Ask Richard

Submit your questions to Richard Vandersteen, and learn from The Man himself everything you always wanted to know about Vandersteen products!

Richard will review the questions, pick those with the widest interest and post the questions and answers below. Please include your first name in your question so that you can find it on the page. Qs and As may be sorted by topic in the drop down selector.

Questions and especially service issues that require immediate assistance or do not get answered here should be directed to your Vandersteen dealer or to technical support at Vandersteen Audio at 559 582 0324. 

Also please note that Richard and only Richard answers these questions. When he is traveling this feature will not be tended until he returns.

Nicholas- (7/26/17): Richard, would you be willing to share your thoughts on the impact of crossover component selection - boutique / tight tolerance capacitors, wire gauge / purity options, inductor designs, etc. There's much said about driver specifics, but not as much commentary on crossover elements (other than summation into a first-order design is non-negotiable ). - Nicholas Renter

HELLO NICHOLAS, BOUTIQE CAPS IN PARTICULAR ARE GREAT FOR DIY GUYS BECAUSE THEY OFTEN DON’T HAVE SOPHISTICATED EQUIPMENT TO DO LIVE VS. RECORDED PANEL SESIONS TO FIND WHAT IS MOST NEUTRAL. I NEVER HAVE FOUND ONE TYPE THAT SOUNDED GOOD ENOUGH TO USE AS A SINGLE CAP. COMBINING AS MANY  AS 3 TYPES OF DIFFERENT VALUES WITH SOME OF THEM DAMPED WITH RESISTORS (ASSURE THEY HAVEN’T FORMED A TANK CIRCUIT) HAS GIVEN ME MUCH BETTER AND NEUTRAL RESULTS, ESPECIALLY IN LISTENING TESTS. EACH VANDERSTEEN HAS ALL OF THE VALUES DIALED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER SO VALUES END UP BEING BETTER THAN 1%. ALL OF THE ELEMENTS MUST BE CAREFULLY CHOSEN FOR EACH FREQUENCY RANGE BY EAR. IN THE END ONE WILL HAVE GOOD QUALITY PARTS AND WIRE BUT NOT USUALLY BOUTIQUE AS THEY MANY TIMES ARE CHOSEN FOR THEIR NON-NEUTRAL CHARACTERISTICS. WE DO USE WONDER SOLDER, WONDER WIRE, WONDER CAPS, MIT/REL AND DUELUND CAPS WHEN APPROPRIATE.

Joseph (5/7/17): I am new to high end audio but have fallen in love with your speakers at all levels but only the treos and quatros fit my budget at this time. However, I am of a divided mind on pre-amp and amplifier. I love aspects of the products from Boulder, Ayre, and even McIntosh. Several dealers have suggested that McIntosh's MC452 is a bad fit for your speakers given the autoformer. Others have said that Boulder's 800 series products have "bad synergy" with the electronics of the crossovers. All have said that any Ayre combination is a match made in heaven with your speakers but I have to admit that the "laid-back" quality of their house sound sometimes leaves me cold. Can you help to dispel the rumors and salesmanship from the facts? Are there any inherent limitations presented by these products with the Treos or the Quatros? Would you have a personal preference understanding that they all make high quality stuff and each person's ear is different?

HELLO JOSEPH, I HAVE TALKED TO  MANY PEOPLE WHO SAY ALL THAT YOU HAVE MENTIONED AND YET SOME WHO LOVED SOME OF THE COMBINATIONS YOU LISTED. HOW CAN THIS BE!!!! EVERYBODY HAS DIFFERENT TASTE IN ONE WAY OR ANOTHER AND THE BEAUTY OF A TRULY NEUTRAL TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKER WITH ROOM EQ IS THEY CAN BE CHAMELEON-LIKE ENOUGH  TO MAKE MANY PEOPLE HAPPY. WITH A LITTLE LISTENING OF YOUR OWN YOU WILL FIND THE COMBO THAT MAKES YOU HAPPY, I ASSURE YOU. YOU WON’T FIND IT BY CALLING PEOPLE UP AND BY READING DIFFERENT POSTS BECAUSE IT IS ABOUT YOU AND YOUR PREFERENCES. ENJOY, BECAUSE THE SEARCH WILL BE VERY EDUCATIONAL AND FUN AND YOU WILL HAVE CONFIDENCE IN A SELECTION YOU'VE MADE WITH YOUR OWN EARS.

Peter (5/7/17): Hi Richard. One last question about "dialing in" the settings on the WX-2 crossover. Is it safe to change the dip switches "on the fly" while adjusting the sub, or do you have to power everything down while changing the dip switches? Thanks, Peter

HELLO PETER, NO NEED TO POWER DOWN BUT DO MUTE THE SIGNAL OR TURN DOWN THE VOLUME ALL THE WAY DOWN.

Michel (4/14/17): Dear Richard, I have two Vandersteen Model 2Wq subwoofer systems that I currently use with a VTL Preamp/Power combo and a pair of Magnepan 1.7s. My problem is the following: I want to change the VTL combo for an integrated amplifier. But in this case I don't understand the 2Wq user manual and how/where to plug the X2 crossovers. In the manual it says: "On receivers and integrated amplifiers, install the WX-2 between the "Pre Out" and the "Main In" jacks". I am French and my English is not so good to understand such terms. Could you send me a drawing explaining such above plugging. In advance many thanks. Best regards, Michel.

MICHEL- NOT ALL INTEGRATEDS HAVE THE “PRE- IN AND MAIN- OUT” REQUIRED TO USE THE X-2 AND YOUR INTEGRATED IS ONE OF THEM, SO THAT IS WHY YOU CAN’T FIND THEM. YOUR INTEGRATED IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE 2WQ AND THEREFORE THERE IS NO WAY TO MAKE IT WORK.

Hi Richard, I've owned a few Vandersteen products in the past and know that upgrades are sometimes done without literature updates. I'm curious to know whether there's been any recent enhancements to the 2wq subwoofers? Also, would like to know what your opinion is on partnering a pair of 2wq subwoofers to the Egglestonworks Fontaine speakers? And, what will give me the best performance with this setup. My amps are Sugden SPA4 power amp (75w Class A) and Sugden Preamp. All my source components are Reference Standard. Regards, Donovan

Donovan (4-3-17): HELLO DONOVAN. THERE ARE ALWAYS REFINEMENTS GOING ON HERE AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO AND THE 2WQ IS NO EXCEPTION. A PAIR OF QUALITY SUBS WITH MOST IMPORTANTLY A PROPER HIGH-PASS (M5-HP(b)  WILL ALWAYS IMPROVE THE PERFORMANCE ON ANY SYSTEM! IT IMPROVES THE AMPLIFIER, THE LOUDSPEAKER, ROOM NODES AND NULS AND PLACEMENT OPTIONS IN EVERY AND ALL SYSTEMS, WITHOUT FAIL.

Richard (12/26/16): Dear Richard, I have had electrostatics and all kinds of dynamic speakers since I build my first Heathkit intergraded amp and a Jensen coaxial in a cabinet my father build along with a Garrard RC 88 changer. I first bought you 2C but then bought a 2C i plus a backup 2Ci just in case, I had Quad ESL 63 and a pair of your 2Ci but only when I matched the 2Ci with a high current amp (Electrocompaniet AW 100 did the 2Ci begin to sing and I sold the Quad ESL 63. Current system is a pair of 2CI on loaded metal stands with the AW 100 on sorbotane feet on a amp stand which is spiked to a carpeted floor. Have 30 ft. LSI interconnects from the amp to a Classe solid state DR -5 preamp with a sutherland Hubble phono stage for vinyl. Also have a Marantz SACD and a Nakamichi CR-4A cassette deck. 2Ci's are connected to the amp with Kimber Kable bi wired. Have a Sota table with the firt produced Graham tone arm. System is in a room 14 feet wide and about 22 feet long. with carpeting throughout and upholstered furniture. The system is the closet to the sound I hear in Rochester's Eastman threatre which Fred Fennell and Howard Hanson did many records for Mercury. My question: I am considering your 2Wq subwoofer but wonder if I only use it for the low end below 35 or 30 CPS (never did like the word Hertz), does that make sense? I currently have a Hsu woofer but either it is me and how I set it up or that it is not the right fit. So In addition to my question above, is there an optimum CPS or range for the 2Wq to be crossed over to my 2Ci's? By the way I have 10,000 vinyl records and only about 200 CD's so Vinyl is my main listening. Richard Barone

HELLO RICHARD, THE 2WQ WOULD BE A TREMENDOUS  ADDITION TO YOUR SYSTEM. THE OPTIMUM FREQUENCY WOULD BE 80Hz FOR THE CROSSOVER AND I WOULD USE THE M5-HP HIGH-PASS DESIGNED FOR THE QUATROS AND MODEL 5 SPEAKERS FOR MAXUMUM  TRANSPARENCY. MOST SUBWOOFERS ARE DESIGNED TO BE PURCHASED FOR THEIR DELIBERATE  PRESENCE TO JUSTIFY  THEIR PRICE.  IN A WAY THAT IS THE MOOD WE ARE IN WHEN WE ARE LOOKING AT SPENDING A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF MONEY, WE WANT THAT WOOFER TO WOOF AND THAT SPEAKER TO CALL ATTENTION TO ITSELF. ONCE WE MAKE THE PURCHASE AND GET OVER THE NEW TOY PHENOMENA  WE WANT THE PRODUCTS TO GET OUT OF THE WAY AND THE MUSIC TO SPEAK! THAT IS WHAT THE 2WQ IS DESIGNED TO DO AND WILL DO BECAUSE IT IS NOT THE FREQUENCY SELECTED  BUT THE DESIGN THAT KEEPS THAT FROM HAPPENING. THERE ARE SEVERAL CURICAL ELEMENTS TO A SUBWOOFER GETTING OUT OF THE WAY OF THE MUSIC. FIRST, ONE MUST HAVE A QUALITY HIGH-PASS IN ORDER TO HAVE A CHANCE OF A PHASE-CORRECT TRANSITION BETWEEN THE SPEAKER AND THE SUB.  SECOND, THE WOOFER NEEDS TO BE DESIGNED SO THAT NO MID-FREQUENCY SIDEBANDS CAN GET TO THE LISTENER (CONE BREAKUP IN THE WOOFERS EVEN THOUGH THE CROSSOVER IS LOW) BECAUSE IT WILL MAKE THE LOCATION OF THE SUB OBVIOUS  AND COLLAPSE THE SOUNDSTAGE IN THE MID FREQUENCIES ESPECIALLY (DOWN FIRING).  THIRD, THAT ONE IS STARTING WITH A FULL RANGE SPEAKER IN THE FIRST PLACE. LAST BUT NOT LEAST, BLEND SO WELL THAT NOBODY HAS ANY IDEA THAT THERE IS A SUB IN THE ROOM SO IT SOUNDS AS THOUGH THE MAIN SPEAKERS ARE JUST MORE FULL-RANGE AND DYNAMIC. CONGRATULATIONS, HAVING A TRUE HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCE IS A WONDERFUL PLACE TO START.

Jeff: Hello Richard, I recently purchased a pair of 2ce signatures.I have a pair of Mcintosh MC 30 tube monos and an mc2205 200 wpc solid state amp. Which would be best for my 2ce sigs? Is the 200 watt amplifier too powerful and are the 30wpc amps too little. I'll end up selling the amplifier that I don't use. Thank you for your advice. Jeff

HELLO JEFF, CONGRATULATIONS ON THE 2CE SIG SPEAKERS. 30 WATTS IS ON THE LOW SIDE BUT IT IS ADEQUATE FOR MANY PEOPLE AND 200 WATTS IS PLENTY. AND THERE IS NEVER TOO MUCH POWER BECAUSE YOU ARE IN CONTROL OF THE VOLUME. HOWEVER, I DON’T UNDERSTAND THIS QUESTION AS YOU HAVE BOTH OF THEM SO WHY NOT LISTEN TO THE TWO AMPS AND DETERMINE WHICH SOUNDS BEST AND START THE PROCESS OF BUILDING CONFIDENCE IN YOUR OWN LISTENING SKILS. YOU ARE THE ONE WHO NEEDS TO BE PLEASED. WHAT PROBABLY WILL HAPPEN IS THAT YOU WILL LIKE SOME OF WHAT THE 30 WATT AMP DOES AND SOME OF WHAT THE 200 WATT AMPS DOES AND YOU WILL HAVE TO MAKE THE DECISION ANYWAY. GOOD LISTENING.

Nicholas (1/13/17): Richard, I miss the regular updates to the "Ask Richard" section! It gave me a reason to visit the Vandersteen website early and often. BTW...really loving my Quatro CTs (John @ Audio Connection is awesome).. I've got a freakishly-flat listening position in-room response down to 24 Hz (falls off a bit at 20 Hz). I'm driving it with an Ayre AX-7e w/ factory installed filters. When I started typing this, I didn't really have a question (other than asking to bring back the "Ask Richard" section...but now that I think about it... Is it possible to quantify the potential performance improvement of an amplifier when the input signal is attenuated by a first-order crossover -3dB @ 100 Hz? Intuitively, the amp will have less current requirements into the load (based on the attenuated input signal below 100 Hz). What decisions did you make when designing the M7-HPA that would differ than someone designing a full-range amp (with respect to the input signal and load demand characteristics)? Glad to be part of the Vandersteen family. - Nicholas Renter

HELLO NICHOLAS, THE FAQ IS STILL VERY MUCH IN PLAY BUT WITH SO MANY ARCHIVED NOT MANY QUESTIONS ARE NEW SO I DON’T ANSWER QUESTIONS WHICH ALREADY HAVE BEEN ANSWERED (NOT DUTCH EFFICIENT). IT IS HARD TO QUANTIFY THE IMPROVEMENTS HEARD WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY IS HELPED BY A HIGH-PASS AT 100Hz. YOUR DEALER COULD DEMONSTRATE IT TO YOU BY INSERTING THE HIGH-PASS AND THEN REMOVING IT. IT IS SUBSTANTIAL BUT LIMITED BY HELPING THE POWER SUPPY ONLY. THE M7-HPA IS A VERY DIFFERENT STORY AND ITS ADVANTAGES ARE HUGE BECAUSE THE CIRCUIT AND POWER SUPPLY ARE OPTIMIZED FOR HIGH-PASS ONLY.  MANY FEATURES HAVE BEEN INCLUDED WHICH COULD NOT BE IF THE AMPLIFIER WERE TO BE FULL-RANGE. I WILL GIVE YOU ONE EXAMPLE TO HOLD YOU UNTIL WE GET THE WHITE PAPER. A FULL-RANGE AMPLIFIER HAS TO HAVE MULTIPLE OUTPUT DEVICES IN ORDER TO HANDLE THE CURRENT NEEDED FOR THE WOOFERS. MULTIPLE OUTPUT DEVICES (TUBE OR SOLID STATE) SMEAR EACH OTHER SLIGHTLY BECAUSE THEY CANNOT BE EXACTLY THE SAME. IN THE M7-HPA VERY FEW OUTPUT DEVICES ARE NEEDED AND NO EMITTER RESISTORS ARE USED CAUSING NOTICABLE IMPROVEMENT IN DYNAMICS AND TRANSPARENCY.

Don (1/21/17): Hello Richard. I'm considering a pair of 2ce's and wondering if my Creek 5350 , 85 watts per channel would be a good match. My room is 16' by 15'. Thanks for your time.

DON, COULD BE A GREAT-SOUNDING COMBINATION AS MANY BRITISH INTEGRATEDS SOUND VERY GOOD. NOT FAMILIAR WITH THIS PARTICULAR ONE SO YOU WOULD WANT TO BRING IT TO THE VANDERSTEEN DEALER SO HE CAN HOOK IT UP FOR YOU TO DEMO. BE SURE TO ASK HE OR SHE WHAT THEY RECOMMEND FOR THAT AMOUNT OF MONEY.

Steve (1-22-17): On my 1Ci speakers that I bought at the end of '15, I have bananas plugged into the connection holes. I tried to use spades, but they wouldn't fit due to the metal dividers being too close together. Everything sounds fine, but I heard that spades are the more optimum connection option. Is this so? Also, why those dividers sticking out like that, preventing me from being able to utilize my spades? Am I losing any performance by using bananas? By the way, I love these speakers! Thanks. - Steve

HELLO STEVE, BANANAS FORCED INTO THE 10-32 THREADED HOLES IS A VERY POOR CONNECTION BECAUSE THE BANANA ONLY CONTACTS THE VERY SHARP EDGE OF THE INTERNAL THREADS. THE TERMINALS ARE BRASS, WHICH IS SOFT SO THE THREADS WILL BE RUINED IF USED THIS WAY CONTINOUSLY. WHEN THE TERMINALS ARE DAMAGED IT IS VERY DIFICULT (EXPENSIVE) TO REPLACE THEM AS THE ENTIRE SPEAKER MUST COME BACK TO THE FACTORY. THE DIVIDERS BETWEEN THE TERMINAL ARE THERE TO KEEP THE SPADES FROM SHORTING TOGETHER WHICH COULD BLOW UP YOUR AMPLIFIER. MOST WIRE COMPANIES HAVE A SPADE THAT WILL FIT VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS OR ONE COULD FILE THE SPADE NARROWER. YES, YOU ARE DAMAGING YOUR SOUND DRAMATICALLY ESPECIALLY OVER TIME. 

Majet: Mr. Vandersteen I recently auditioned your 1Ci Loudspeakers and was really impressed. I noticed that the sensitivity is 90 DB; I am currently using a 300B Amplifier. Will this combination work? Also I would like to know if you plan to make a larger version of that product with a 10 or 12 inch woofer that would allow deeper bass response?

HELLO MAJET, THIS COMBINATION SHOULD WORK WELL BUT AS ALWAYS THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE IS TO BRING THE AMPLIFIER TOGETHER WITH THE SPEAKER AND HOOK IT UP AND PLAY MUSIC. THE 1CI USES A SOPHISTICATED 8-INCH WOOFER WHICH IS AS LARGE AS ONE SHOULD BE FOR TIME AND PHASE CORRECT MIDRANGE. GOING TO A 12-INCH WOULD GIVE MORE BASS BUT IS DRAMATICALLY LIMITED BY ITS WEIGHT AND DIAMETER TO RETRIEVE THE NUANCE YOU LIKED IN THE 1CI MIDRANGE FREQUENCIES WHERE THE EAR IS MOST SENSITIVE AND THE TIMBRE OF MUSIC MOST RECOGNIZED. 

Nicholas: Richard, Just bought a set of Quatro Wood CTs...love them! Seriously amazing. Just curious...Why didn't you include a rear-firing tweeter on the Quatro CTs? Was it a price-point thing? Is the incremental effect not worth the additional costs? - Nicholas

HELLO NICHOLAS, GREAT THAT YOU ARE ENJOYING THE QUATROS. THE QUATROS ARE DESIGNED TO BE PLACED IN THE ROOM ABOUT 1 TOO 4 FEET FROM THE REAR WALL. THE REAR-FIRING TWEETER IS 100 PERCENT DISTORTION BECAUSE THE FRONT TWEETER HAS ALREADY PUT ALL OF THE INFORMATION ON THE RECORDING INTO THE ROOM. WITH THE MODEL 5 AND SEVEN SPEAKERS GENERALLY GOING INTO LARGER ROOMS THEY MAY BE MUCH FURTHER FROM THE REAR WALL.  IF THE ROOM TENDS TO BE OVERDAMPED AND THEREFORE DARK SOUNDING, PUTTING SOME REDUNDANT INFORMATION INTO THE REVERBERANT FIELD MAY BE A BENEFIT. AGAIN THE BEST CHOISE WOULD BE TO FIX THE ROOM AND NOT USE THE REAR TWEETER BECAUSE IT CAN SMEAR THE HIGH FREQUIENCES (TWO SOURCES OF THE SAME INFORMATION) AND NEGATIVALLY IMPACT THE IMAGING.

Per: Hello Richard. On the Stereophile measurement (in room) of the model Quatro the area between 100 hz and 400 hz are down about 5 db. Can you explain if it is realted to the speaker, the set-up between the room and the speaker or the set-up of the in-line filter between the preamplifer and the amplifier ? Best regards Per

HELLO PER, THIS IS PARTLY A NATURAL ACOUSTIC ARTIFACT AND PARTLY BAD ROOM SETUP.  WHEN A SINGLE SOURCE LIKE VOICE OR PIANO IS LISTENED TO IN A ROOM THE FREQUENCY RESPONSE IS MODIFIED IN THIS RANGE BY CANCELLATION CAUSED BY FLOOR BOUNCE. THIS IS A NATURAL EFFECT. THE SAME THING HAPPENS WHEN A SPEAKER IS LISTENED TO IN A ROOM BUT IF YOU LOOK AT THE SPEAKER RESPONSE WITHOUT ROOM THE SPEAKER IS VERY FLAT THROUGH THIS REGION. IN THIS CASE THE EFFECT IS EXAGGERATED BY THE FACT THAT THE SPEAKERS WERE TOO FAR INTO THE ROOM. THE QUATRO IS DESIGNED TO WORK CLOSER TO THE WALL BECAUSE IT IS A BETTER AND MORE LIKELY AESTHETIC SOLUTION. THE ONLY WAY TO FILL THIS REGION IS TO USE MULTIPLE WOOFERS VERTICALLY ALIGNED ON THE FRONT BAFFLE SO THAT THE FLOOR BOUNCE IS AVERAGED OVER ALL OF THEM AT A SLIGHTLY DIFFERENT FREQUENCY.  THIS IN MY OPINION CAUSES A HEAVINESS TO THE SOUND THAT MAKES THE SPEAKER SOUND LIKE A BOX. THIS IS NOT CAUSED BY MISADJUSTING THE HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMP. IF A LISTENER WANTED THE SPEAKERS FAR INTO THE ROOM THEY WOULD NEED TO BE PLACED VERY CAREFULLY OR TOO MUCH OF THIS EFFECT COULD BE A PROBLEM.

Ron: Hi Richard. I purchased a pair of Model 2 speakers about 20-years ago and have lived happily with them ever since. I'm uncertain of their version (2c, 2ce???) -- s/n's are 19728c and 19729c. Please help me with what version I have, and given their age do you recommend doing any maintenance or upgrading, or is it time to replace them? Thanks for any comments. Ron D.

HELLO RON, WE DO NOT KEEP RECORDS BUT THE “C” AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER INDICATES THEY ARE MODEL 2C SPEAKERS, APPROXIMATELY 32 YEARS OLD. NO MAINTENANCE REQUIRED NOR ARE THERE ANY UPDATES AVAILABLE. IF YOU WANT A DRAMATIC IMPROVEMENT IN SOUND YOU SHOULD VISIT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND AUDITION THE LATEST 2 SERIES SPEAKER, THE MODEL 2CE SIG II. OTHERWISE CONTINUE TO ENJOY THEM UNTIL THEY QUIT.

Paul (6/20/16): My home recently got struck by lightning and it damaged my audio gear. At the time I had a pair of Model 2 speakers and 1 - 2w sub. These were powered by 2 Adcom GA 555 se amps . I used a Linn preamp to control all. The sound was a little bright but still sounded good. I think the Adcoms may have been a little bright. Any way I am in the process of replacing all gear & would like some help on amps for this new system. I will purchase the new 2ce & a new sub 2w . I am wondering what would be a good pair of amps to match up with this system. Please keep in mind my budget is small. I can afford around 3000.00 to 4000.00 for the amps & would like your opinion on if their is anything in that price range to power these wonderful speakers. I will also be looking at preamps in the 3,000.00 to 4,000.00 range most likely solid state if that helps. Thanks for your help.

HELLO PAUL, SORRY TO HEAR ABOUT ALL THE DAMAGE TO YOUR SYSTEM. I THINK YOU WILL BE ABLE TO MAKE LEMONADE OUT OF THE LEMONS IF YOU FOLLOW THESE RECOMMENDATIONS. FIRST ESTABLISH A BUDGET FOR THE ENTIRE SYSTEM AND SELECT SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC.  CALL ME (559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE) SO WE CAN SELECT A VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR YOU TO VISIT, EVEN IF IT INVOLVES TRAVEL. GIVE THIS DEALER YOUR ABSOLUTE BUDGET AND THE CDs/LPs YOU CHOSE AND GET HIS RECOMMENDATION AFTER DOING SOME LISTENING SO HE CAN KNOW YOUR LISTENING PREFERENCES. AFTER A LISTENING SESSION GIVE COMMENTS ON HOW YOU LIKE THE SYSTEM. THE VALUE OF YEARS OF EXPERIENCE ON HOW TO GET THE SOUND YOU WANT FROM A PAIR OF SPEAKERS IS PRICELESS. DEALERS DO TRY TO SELL YOU WHAT THEY SELL (THAT’S HOW THEY STAY IN BUSINESS ) BUT GOOD SOUND AND HAPPY CUSTOMERS ARE ULTIMATELY  WHAT KEEP THEM IN BUSINESS. BECAUSE OF THIS THEY GO TO SHOWS AND TRY DIFFERENT PRODUCTS CONSTANTLY TO IMPROVE THEIR SHOWROOM LINEUP. OBVIOUSLY YOU DON’T NEED TO BLINDLY FOLLOW ANYONE'S RECOMMENDATIONS BUT I WOULD TAKE DOWN EVERY DETAIL INCLUDING WIRES AND ACCESSORIES BECAUSE YOU BY NOW WILL HAVE THE CONFIDENCE TO MAKE A CHOICE THAT WILL SERVE YOU WITH MUSIC IN A WAY YOU ENJOY.  THIS IS WHAT MATTERS BECAUSE YOU ARE WRITING THE CHECK, NOT ME. THIS CAN BE A LOT OF FUN AND WILL GIVE YOU THE CONFIDENCE AND SKILL NEEDED SO THAT OTHER PEOPLE'S OPINIONS AND REVIEWS WON’T MAKE YOU DOUBT YOUR DECISION OR JEOPARDIZE YOUR INVESTMENT.

Dan (6/29/16): Hello Richard, As a long time fan of Vandersteen products, I have a question about upgrading in relation to Home Theather and general music listening. Bought the Model 2CE in the 80's serial Numbers 69090 & 69091 and also have the VCC serial # 1461. Have a Pioneer Elite SC-05 - 130 amp receiver, OPPO Blue Ray, with surround and rear Paridigm Studio 20's. The speakers are Bi-wired with #12 copper stranded, and all is protected by a APC Line conditioner. Have a Pioneer 65 inch plasma to complete the home Theather. With the HT upgrade a few years ago all of the old equipment went (except) the Vandersteens. My wife has even made cloth covers for when their are not being used. For the question I would like to improve the center channel and wonder about the comparison between the VCC 1 vs VCC-2 vs the VCC-5? Also has the 2CE components changed much over the past 30 years. This is a crazy idea but do you offer an audio tune up for the old 2CE speakers? They have been well taken care of and wonder if it would be worth a tune up or simply move to a new speaker. As we age the high frequency range gets diminished a bit, so additional highs are appreciated!). This system is used for general music, family movies, and youth group movie nights. Any suggestions that you have would be greatly appreciated. Thank you, Dan.

HELLO DAN, THE VCC-1 IS NOT DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR MODEL 2 SERIES SPEAKERS AND SHOULD BE USED WITH THE VCC-2 FOR BETTER DYNAMICS AND CLARITY. WE DO NOT OFFER ANY UPGRADE FOR THE 2 SERIES SPEAKER NOR HAVE WE EVER. UPGRADE THE CENTER FIRST AS IT IS YOUR WEAKEST LINK.  AFTER THAT GOING WITH THE CURRENT 2CE SIG II WOULD BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT AS NEARLY ALL OF THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS HAVE BEEN DRAMTICALLY IMPROVED DURING THE LAST 30 YEARS. ONE PART OF YOUR QUESTION IS TROUBLESOME AND THAT IS ABOUT AGING AND HIGH FREQUENCY BALANCE OF A SYSTEM. YOUR EARS ARE RECALIBRATED EVERY DAY BECAUSE YOUR REFERENCE IS THE SOUND AND VOICES YOU HEAR EVERYDAY. IF YOU TRY TO MAKE YOUR SYSTEM SOUND THE WAY IT DID WHEN YOU WERE YOUNGER YOU WILL BE WATCHING MOVIES ALL BY YOURSELF BECAUSE THE LADIES AND YOUNGER PEOPLE WILL NOT LIKE THE HIGH FREQUENCY EXAGGERATION AND WILL EXPERIENCE ACCELERATED NATURAL HEARING LOSS THEMSELVES. MAKE ONE  MOVE AT A TIME WITH THE HELP OF YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ENJOY.  

Cleon (3/25/16): Hello Richard. What are the (sonic) differences between Quatro Signature and Quatro Wood CT? Thanking you in advance, Cleon

HELLO CLEON, THE CT VERSION HAS A CARBON FIBER TWEETER WHICH IS A DESCENDANT OF THE MODEL SEVEN TWEETER BOTH IN MATERIAL AND SONIC CHARACTERISTICS. THERE WERE MANY CHANGES REQUIRED TO ADVANCE THE SOUND OF THE ENTIRE FREQUENCY SPECTRUM INCLUDING A QUICKER MID-BASS DRIVER. THE QUATRO WOOD IS NOT UPGRADEABLE BECAUSE OF THE INTERNAL CHANGES REQUIRED.

TROY (1/23/16): Hi Richard. I am a longtime owner of the 1C and was thinking of upgrading. I was looking at possibly a 2ce Sig or the Sig II, but read that adding a 2wq to the1's could make a big difference in sound. Also heard this from a 2ce sig owner at a local dealer. Would this be a big enough upgrade? Looking to keep a smooth, non-bright sound. My listening room is a second bedroom at 13x17. Thanks! Troy

HELLO TROY, YOU ASK GOOD QUESTIONS BUT THEY CAN ONLY BE ANSWERED BY GOING TO YOUR DEALER AND DOING SOME AUDITIONING. SOME HAVE THE NEW 1CI USED WITH LOW-POWERED AMPLIFIERS WHICH WILL NOT DRIVE THE NEW 2CE SIG II. SO THEY ADD A 2WQ SUBWOOFER WHICH GIVES BETTER AND LOWER BASS AND IMPROVES THE MIDRANGE IN THE 1CI AND ALLOWS THEM TO CONTINUE USING A LOW-POWERED AMPLIFIER THEY ARE FOND OF.  YOUR ROOM DIMENSIONS WILL WORK EITHER WAY.

Russell (2/6/16): Richard I just wanted to say I purchased a pair of Quarto Wood CT speakers in Aug. of 2015 from Don Better Audio. I have to say these are the most musical speakers I have ever owned. Don is a Excellent representative for Vandersteen Audio. He was a pleasure to deal with and very knowledgeable. I wanted to ask you if there would be a chance that you might think about a Quatro Carbon loud speaker . I would be interested in a upgrade if down the road you might consider this change. Thanks Russell

HELLO RUSSELL, THANK YOU FOR YOUR ENTHUSIASTIC  ENDORSEMENT OF OUR QUATRO WOOD CT AND OUR DEALER, DON BETTER. I HAVE WORKED THE NUMBERS EVERY WAY I CAN AND UNFORTUNATELY PUTTING THE CARBON MIDRANGE AND ALL THE OTHER CHANGES REQUIRED WOULD PUT THE SPEAKER WITHIN A COUPLE OF THOUSAND DOLLARS OF THE 5A CARBON. THE 5A CARBON HAS THE BATTERY BIASED INTERNAL CROSSOVER, PUSH-PULL 12-INCH SUBWOOFER, 7-INCH MID-BASS AND MORE POWERFUL SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER IN A SLIGHTLY LARGER FOOTPRINT. THE RESULTING PERFORMANCE ADVANTAGEIN FAVOR OF THE 5A CARBON WOULD BE EMBARRASSING FOR THE DIFFERENCE IN MONEY. AS YOU CAN SEE IT COULD BE DONE. HOWEVER, I DON’T THINK IT WOULD BE SUCCESSFUL. WHERE THE QUATRO WOOD CT AT ITS PRICE HAS JUST ENOUGH OF THE SEVEN/5A CARBON TECHNOLOGY TO BE AN AMAZING VALUE THAT'S ABLE TO SOLVE REAL ROOM PROBLEMS AND BRING A MUSICAL PERFORMANCE FAR BEYOND ITS PEERS.

Steve (2/10.16): I just bought a pair of 2CE Signatures. The amplifier I am currently using is a Peachtree 220. The power output is 220 watts per channel @8 ohms (400 watts/channel @4 ohms). Is that too much power for my speakers? My "listening room" (basement) is rather large, but I don't normally play at high volume.

HELLO STEVE, CONGRATULATIONS ON YOUR SPEAKER PURCHASE. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO HAVE TOO MUCH POWER BECAUSE YOU ARE IN CONTROL OF THE VOLUME CONTROL. NOT HAVING ENOUGH POWER IS A BIGGER PROBLEM SO YOU ARE IN GOOD SHAPE. IS THIS AMPLIFIER POWERFUL ENOUGH TO DAMAGE THE SPEAKER IF SOMETHING STUPID WERE TO HAPPEN? YES, BUT NOT IF 2CE SIGNATURE’S RED L.E.D. LIGHTS BEHIND THE GRILLE MATERAL ARE MONITORED AS THEY WILL COME ON WHEN BEING OVERPOWERED.

Bill (12/15/15): Hey Richard, I just got a pair of 2CE signatures from a fellow who moved to a smaller living space. I am thrilled with them now that I have found the proper placement in my room. Thanks for the detailed set up section in the manual, it works! I am powering them with a Mcintosh 225 which I know is considerably less than recommended power, but at low to moderate volumes it is sounding great. However I have found the limit. I have a second 225 that I am looking a buying. I was planing on running them both in bridged mono for 50 WPC. Would there be any advantage to using them to bi amp each speaker instead of bridged mono? I understand that doubling the power will only give me 3 dB but I think that will be enough. Thanks, Bill

HELLO BILL, BRIDGED AMPS WILL GIVE YOU MORE POWER AND THAT IS WHAT YOU NEED. BI-AMPING WILL NOT HELP AS YOU STILL ONLY HAVE 25 WATTS OF POWER FOR EACH  DRIVER. 50 WATTS WILL BE BETTER THAN 25 BUT IS STILL MARGINAL DEPENDING ON YOUR ROOM AND LISTENING TASTE.

Steve (12/18/15): Hi Richard, I am very interested in the 1CI but am unsure if they will work well with my Shindo Montille tube amp of 15 watts per channel in a room that is 13 X 14 X 10 high. I primarily listen to orchestral and jazz and sometime like to go fairly loud. Thank you. Steve

HELLO STEVE, THE 1CI IS QUITE EFFICIENT SO IT MAY WORK. I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH YOUR AMPLIFIER SO YOU WOULD WANT TO BRING IT TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND TRY IT OUT WITH SOME OF YOUR OWN MUSIC. YOUR ROOM SIZE MAY ALLOW THIS TO WORK BUT HOW LOUD IT NEEDS TO PLAY IS SUBJECTIVE ESPECIALLY WHEN YOU SAY “SOMETIMES LIKE TO GO FAIRLY LOUD,” WHICH IS ALSO SUBJECTIVE. AN AUDITION WILL BE THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW.

Gregory (12/19/15): Good evening Richard, Any chance will see a 3A Signature CT upgrade?

HELLO GREGORY, IT WOULD INCREASE THE PRICE ABOUT $1500.00 WHICH WOULD PUT IT TOO CLOSE IN PRICE TO THE TREO CT. THE TREO CT HAS A SIGNIFICANTLY MORE INERT CABINET THAN THE MODEL 3 SERIES  AND IS THEREFORE  MUCH LOWER IN DISTORTION WITH GREATER TRANSPARENCY. THE MODEL 3 DOES GO A LITTLE LOWER IN THE BASS, BUT MUCH OF THE CT ADVANTAGE IS LOST BECAUSE THE MODEL 3 SERIES CABINET IS NOT SILENT ENOUGH. THE TREO IS BASICALLY A MODEL 3 WITH A BETTER SILENT CABINET, LESS DIFFRACTION, HIGHER PERFORMANCE CROSSOVER AND COSMETICS WHICH JUSTIFIES MORE SOPHISTICATED  PARTS AND DRIVERS.

Konkilr (12/24/15): I have an old set of model 2's. Everytime I stress the speakers at high volume the right speaker has led's under the front facing woofer that begin to light up. Once these become fully lit the bass from that speaker decreases. What could be the cause of this? The left speaker never does this.

HELLO KONKILR, THE MODEL 2 AND 3 SERIES SPEAKERS HAVE A WARNING SYSTEM THAT MONITORS THE TEMPERATURE OF THE 8-INCH FRONT WOOFER. WHEN THE VOICE COIL GET VERY HOT AND IS ABOUT TO FAIL THE LED’S FLASH. THIS CIRCUIT RESETS ITSELF AFTER LOWERING THE VOLUME AND THE VOICE COIL COOLS. IT WILL ENGAGE SOONER THAN NORMAL IF THE VOICE COIL IS STILL HOT WHEN THE MUSIC IS TURNED BACK UP.  THIS CIRCUIT CAN BEGIN TO ENGAGE PREMATURELY IF IT HAS BEEN ACTIVATED TOO MANY TIMES. YOU CAN TRY MOVING THE SPEAKER TO THE OTHER CHANNEL BECAUSE STEREO HAS DIFFERENT INFORMATION RIGHT AND LEFT AND USUALLY IT IS THE RIGHT CHANNEL WHICH FLASHES FIRST. IT IS IMPORTANT TO TURN DOWN THE MUSIC WHEN FIRST SEEING ANY LIGHTS. IF YOU FIND THE SAME PREMATURE ENGAGEMENT AFTER SWITCHING SIDES THE SPEAKER MAY NEED TO HAVE THE CROSSOVER REBUILT HERE AT THE FACTORY. IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED DOWNLOAD A R.M.A. FORM, FILL IT OUT  AND PUT IT INTO THE BOX WITH THE SPEAKER. NO CALL REQUIRED AS THE FILLED OUT FORM IS YOUR AUTHORIZATION. COST IS LESS THAN $100 PLUS FREIGHT.  

Dave (11/30/15): Dear Richard, I own your model 2 signature speakers purchased in 1998...,they are still going strong. My question is this....I see several Vandersteen model 4 speakers showing up on eBay, but I can't find any descriptions of that model. I assume it's an old timer (like me), but was it a worthy contender to the high end? Thanks, Dave Drake in Maine

HELLO DAVE, THE MODEL 4/4A WAS IN PRODUCTION FOR A SHORT TIME SO VERY LITTLE INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE FOR THEM. THEY WERE USED IN COMBINATION WITH AN ELECTRONIC CROSSOVER (VANDERSTEEN WX-4) BECAUSE THE SPEAKER SHOULD BE BI-AMPED. THE SUBSEQUENT RELEASE  OF THE MODEL 3 COMBINED WITH 2W POWERED SUBWOOFERS OUTPERFORMED THE MODEL 4/4A OFFERING BETTER AESTHETICS AND FLEXIBILITY SO MODEL 4 SALES STOPPED. SEVERAL OF THE PARTS ARE NO LONGER AVAILABLE AND WE HAVE NO STOCK. THE 12-INCH SUBWOOFER DRIVERS ARE NO LONGER MADE BY THE VENDOR AND THEY HAD FOAM SURROUNDS WHICH ARE FAILING AT THIS AGE. WE HAVE HAD SOME SUCCESS GETTING THEM REFOAMED BUT IF THE VOICE COIL OR ANY OTHER SOFT PARTS ARE NOT REUSABLE WE HAVE A PROBLEM. I HAVE NOT FOUND A 12-INCH DRIVER  SHALLOW ENOUGH TO WORK AS A SUBSTITUTE. AT THIS TIME I CANNOT RECOMMEND INVESTING ANY AMOUNT OF MONEY IN A MODEL 4/4A BECAUSE OF SERVICE ISSUES.

Rodney (9/28/15): Hello Richard, I purchased a pair of Vandersteen model 2 speakers about 20 years ago. I then purchased your center channel speaker and 2 VSM on wall speakers for my surround sound system. I am now looking to upgrade to an atmos 5.1-4 or 7.1-4 system. Do you sell in ceiling speakers that would be compatable ? If not, can you recommend what speakers I should purchase? Thank you. Rodney

HELLO RODNEY, OUR VCC-1 WORKS PERFECTLY FOR THE CEILING SPEAKER FOR ATMOS. YOU WILL NEED TO IMPROVISE A MOUNTING SYSTEM FOR THEM REMEMBERING THAT THEY WEIGH A LOT AND THAT YOU DON’T WANT THEM FALLING DOWN ON SOMEONE. “L” BRACKETS SECURED INTO THE CEILING JOISTS (OR BACKER) BEHIND THE VCC-1 WITH ONE SIDE OF THE “L” ALONG THE TOP AND AN OTHER WITH ONE SIDE OF THE “L” ALONG THE BOTTOM WORKS GREAT. USE # 12 WOOD SCREWS ONE INCH LONG THROUGH THE “L” BRACKET INTO THE TOP AND ANOTHER INTO THE BOTTOM FOR FASTENING. VCC-1 CAN BE SPECIAL ORDERED WITH A FINISHED BOTTOM FOR $50.00 FOR THIS PURPOSE.

Marnik (10/11/15):  Hi, mr. Richard, I have big problems with my wife as she hates too many cables lying around our living room. I use 2WQ subs with Quad ESL, and I thought that connecting the subs'input to the input of the Quads instead of the output of my amp's, might be a solution. Is this setup a disadvantage, or should I consider getting another wife instead? Sincerely, Marnik

HELLO MARNIK, YOU COULD TRY HOOKING THE 2WQ SAMPLE WIRE TO THE QUADS BUT IT WILL RESULT IN A SMALL DEGRADATION IN SOUND. TRY IT AS THIS WILL PROBABLY BE A BETTER OPTION THAN FINDING A NEW WIFE.

Michael (10/29/15): Hi Richard. Didn't see this question in the FAQ's. I have a Bel Canto Evo6 gen II and I want to use it in bridged-balanced mode with a pair of 2W subs. Since both the positive and negative binding post of the amp are driven actively I'm wondering if it's safe to connect the subs normally or if there's a better way, one that avoids potential damage to the subs amp? I've tried using only the positive terminal and connecting the negative cable to an undriven binding post but the volume of the sub drops to an unacceptable level. Any insight you can offer is much appreciated. Thanks, Michael.

HELLO MICHAEL, THE INPUT OF THE 2W SUBS IS A DIFF AMP SO BOTH THE RED AND BLACK TERMINALS CAN BE DRIVEN.

Robert (11/17/15): HELLO Richard, I have an NAD C326BEE at 50 watts per side which is a two channel amp. I am on a budget and I am currently using some tower speakers that cause me to have to quit listening to them because they cause me to have serious listeners fatigue whenever I play them between 8 and 10 o'clock on the volume knob. I have had it with these things which set me back $500.00 and they are now for sale on Ebay after two years of repeated listener's fatigue episodes. In the early nineties I owned a pair of your elegant VANDERSTEEN Model 1Bs and I mainly recall how forgiving they were in terms of not having an edgy presence in the sound, but still sounding beautiful. Do the current Model 1ci speakers sound as forgiving as the Model 1b of the early nineties or not. I really need some guidance on this issue because I may decide to purchase a new Model 1ci pair based on your advice. I have a budget of up to $1400.00 for a pair of speakers, but most of what I have auditioned sounds really bright and heavy in the treble. I keep going back to the halcyon days of the early nineties with my 1Bs sounding so flowing without any hint of harshness, but I know I will have to demo the new1ci at a retailer perhaps. I know my own ears are the judge and jury of whether a speaker is right for me, but will I find the new 1ci bright/aggressive or laidback/forgiving. Your speakers sound so flowing and greatly transparent, and I know the old 1b was not bright. Will I find the 1ci having similar " laid back" sound traits to the Model 1b, and if so please elucidate. Thank you so much Richard! Robert F

HELLO ROBERT, THE MODEL 1CI IS THE SAME DESIGN AS THE OLD 1B BUT WITH DRAMATICALLY IMPROVED INTERIOR COMPONENTS AND INPUT CONNECTORS. YOU SHOULD AUDITION THEM AND I THINK YOU WILL LOVE THEM. THEY ARE NOT LAID BACK OR FORGIVING BUT MANY SPEAKERS IN THIS PRICE RANGE ARE DELIBERATELY BRIGHT SO THEY STAND OUT IN A DEMO. THIS WILL BECOME FATIGUING OVER TIME AS IT IS UNNATURAL AND NOT THE WAY MUSIC SOUNDS LIVE. 

Richard (9/16/15): Hi Richard. I have an Ayre AX7e integrated amplifier with a 60/120 WPC output. This amp is a little forward sounding and I would like to give it some warmth without loosing it's sense of momentum and speed. What speaker in your product line do you recommend for a 600 cubic foot room? I don't have any dealers near me, so I can't audition for myself. Thanks, Richard

HELLO RICHARD, OUR TREO CT WOULD BE A GOOD CHOICE. IF AFTER BREAK-IN THE SOUND IS A LITTLE MORE FORWARD THAN YOU LIKE JUST USE A LITTLE MORE TILT IN THE SET UP.  THE CARBON TWEETER IS SWEETER THAN THE REGULAR TREO AND YET MORE TRANSPARENT WITH MORE CONVEYED INFORMATION.

Rick (7/15/15): Where can the stands for the 2ci be purchased?

HELLO RICK, THE 2CI REQUIRES A STAND THAT IS 6 INCHES TALL. THIS PRODUCT IS LONG OUT OF PRODUCTION (20 YEARS). YOU CAN ORDER THEM CUSTOM FROM SOUND ANCHOR 321-724-1237.

Steve (7/16/15): Hi Richard, I have a pair of Treo's driven by an Ayre VX-5 amplifier and would like to connect my pair of 2Wq's using the M5-HPB filters. Considering the 2 megaohm input impedance of the amp, what filter settings would you suggest? Thanks

HELLO STEVE, FOR 2 MEG INPUT IMPEDANCE YOU WOULD USE SWITCH 4 AND 5 ON ALL OTHER SWITCHES OFF (OPEN). SHOULD SOUND AMAZING.

Fred (7/18/15): Hi Richard I was wondering if the lowest Vandertones were level boosted to compensate for the stock RS analog meters roll off below 50-ish hz?I have a modded meter which is said to be flatter at the low end .This would of course give inaccurate results if tones are boosted. Thanks Fred

HELLO FRED, THE TEST DISK IS CALIBRATED TO THE ANALOG RADIO SHACK SPL METER SO DO NOT USE ANY CORRECTION.

Roger (8/12/15): HELLO, I have a couple w2 s paired with 3Asig and a set of M5-HP filters . My questions are, are the stickers on the covers accurate for use with the 3as and is "open" on the dip switches the same as "on"? Thanks Roger

HELLO ROGER, THE STICKER ON THE COVER OF THE M5-HP IS ACCURATE FOR A 100Hz CROSSOVER (MODEL SEVEN, 5A CARBON AND QUATRO WOOD CT SPEAKERS).  WHEN USING THE M5-HP(B) HIGH-PASS WITH THE 2W OR 2WQ SUBWOOFER (80Hz CROSSOVER) YOU WOULD USE ONE SETTING LOWER. OPEN IS OFF.

Craig (7/13/15): Hi Richard, I own a pair of your Model 2's. Still love them after all these years but was wondering if there was an upgrade available. Thanks Craig

HELLO CRAIG, THERE IS NO UPGRADE AVAILABLE NOR HAS THERE EVER BEEN FOR THE MODEL 2 SERIES.

Glenn (7/13/15): I have ARC REF 210 and want to attach M5-HPB filters to them. The input impedance on the spec's says 200 Balanced. Would I use the setting for 100K? Thanks Glenn

HELLO GLENN, YOU WOULD USE 200K ON THE M5-HPB.

Manuel (7/14/15): Hello. As I have previously posted here regarding my 2w circa 1991 I have the following inquiry. Now that besides my Reference 3a mm decapos I also have a pair of Quad 988's which mated with the 2w have made me realize that this sw is really intended for full range speakers, or so I have read. The 2w shines w/ the where as with the mm de capos its output is not fell as much. Thede caps senditivity is 92 db and the 2w gain dial goes only to 94 db, so i am wondering if there would be a way to make the 2w output a little higher to complementbthe mm decapos. I have the hp caps in the output of my preamp which are 0.047 uf calculated for an input amp. Impedance of 44,100 ohms giving a xover hp frequency opf 76 hz. So i wonder if Zi could lower that hp frequency or if there might be another trick that could be implemented. Supposedly the mm de capos response is 46 hz - 3db. The 2w skits between both speakers at the center, connected to the wall outleot btw. Thank you very much. Manuel

HELLO MANUEL, THERE IS NO WAY TO INCREASE THE OUTPUT OF THE 2W SUBWOOFER EXCEPT TO FIND ANOTHER 2W AND GO STEREO. THIS WILL GIVE YOU MORE RANGE AND IMPROVED SOUND AS STEREO BASS IS SIGNIFICANTLY BETTER THAN MONO BASS. YOUR HIGH-PASS IS PERFECT, NO CHANGES REQUIRED. LOOKING AT YOUR NUMBERS YOU SHOULD HAVE ENOUGH OUTPUT IF YOU RUN THE LEVEL ON THE 2W AT 92 OR 94 DB.

Bo )7/10/15): Hello Richard ! Is it possible to get good results with a 300b amp, SE / PP . ? (model 2 Ce signature ii ) Do not expect it to play disco level , but Can it be brought to play with magical midrange and top ? My budget is about $ 3,700 . Do you know of alternatives with the same audio performance as 300b amps ? Hoping for a positive answer! Regards Bo Denmark

HELLO BO, THIS IS A QUESTION THAT CANNOT BE ANSWERED WITHOUT A DEMO.  ROOMS VARY AND WHAT IS AN ADEQUATE VOLUME FOR ONE PERSON IS VERY SUBJECTIVE. I KNOW 2CE SIG II OWNERS WHO ARE USING SMALL TUBE AMPS AND ARE VERY HAPPY WITH THE COMBINATION. IN ALL CASES THAT I KNOW OF THEY BROUGHT THEIR AMPLIFIERS TO THE DEALER ALONG WITH SOME OF THEIR MUSIC AND TRIED IT OUT TO MAKE SURE. YOU HAVE A FIFTY-FIFTY CHANCE SO I WOULD GIVE IT A TRY EVEN THOUGH IT IS BELOW THE RECOMMENDED AMOUNT OF POWER. 

Thierry (7/6/15): Dear Richard, I own a pair of 2ce sign, combined with a VCC 1 for my home cinema. I think that it would make sense to upgrade the central speaker. The VCC 2 seems to be made for the 2 Ce sign, but the VCC 5 is the reference one. So my question is: should I go for the 2 or the 5? Are the 2ce sign good enough to work with the 5? or is the harmony better with the 2? Thank you and best regards, Thierry from Belgium

HELLO THIERY, THE VCC-2 IS DESIGNED FOR THE MODEL 2 SERIES SPEAKERS BUT THE VCC-5 WOULD BE AN UPGRADE. BECAUSE MOVIES TEND TO BE MADE WITH EVERYTHING ON THE SCREEN OUT OF THE CENTER THE HOME THEATER EXPERIENCE WILL IMPROVE.

Tom (7/6/15): HI Richard. I live in Illinois and I have had a pair of Vandersteen IICe's in my garage for the last three years. I was finally able to get a place large enough that I can utilize them. My question is, will they still be good? I haven't hooked them up and tried them. Should I re-break them in? -Tom

HELLO TOM, 3 YEARS STORAGE WON’T HURT THEM AT ALL. HOOK THEM UP AND PLAY THEM!

Bob (7/6/15): 3A specs list says 3 drivers, is the bottom driver a passive piece like AMT?

HELLO BOB, THE 10 INCH DRIVER IN THE REAR OF THE 3A SIGNATURE IS AN ACTIVE LOW-BASS DRIVER.

Steve (7/6/15): Richard, I have a pair of model 1 serial no. 42518 & 42519. what is the approx vintage of these, I need to replace the drivers, can I download a manual showing the correct way to remove the end caps and cloth to get inside. I will order parts from you once I have determined the problem thanks

HELLO STEVE, THERE IS NO WAY TO TELL EXACT AGE BY SERIAL NUMBER AND YOU WON’T NEED THAT INFO FOR SERVICE AS WE WILL KNOW ONCE WE SEE THE DRIVER (S) FOR REBUILD. INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO PREPARE YOUR SPEAKERS FOR SERVICE CAN BE FOUND HERE.

Denny (7/7/15):  Greetings Richard, what is the cost (if still available) for a pair of socks for model 3? The 8 inch woofer, is that Peerless/Vifa? I understand that Scanspeak do an identical replacement 21WO... thanks...

HELLO DENNY, THE 8-INCH WOOFER IS NOT A STOCK ITEM BUT A CUSTOM DESIGN. WE HAVE THE PARTS TO REBUILD EVERYTHING. CALL 559-582-0324 AND PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE AND LEAVE A MESSAGE AS THIS PHONE IS NOT ATTENDED. SERVICE WILL GIVE YOU COSTS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

Andy (7/7/15): Hi Richard, I've owned a set of 2c's for about three years and am scheduled to look at a pair of 2ce signatures in the next week or so. I've done some googling about identification and note consistent 2ce marking as well as the signature. And, in some cases there is a 30 year marking as well. What I don't see is something that says "Signature ii." How can I figure this out? Thanks. Andy.

HELLO ANDY, THE “II” IS AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER IN ADDITION TO ALL OF OTHER IDENTIFIERS YOU MENTION.

BILL (7/8/15): Hi, Richard: I bought Model 2C many, many years ago, had to store them and now want to reinstall. I lost the manual, though, and I need it to know how to set up, etc. I also am not sure which 2C model I have. Could you let me know (1) how to determine the precise model no., and (2) how I can get the proper manual? Thanks much for the listening pleasure! Bill

HELLO BILL, THE MODEL 2C MANUAL IS LONG OUT OF PRINT. HOWEVER, YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE CURRENT 2 MANUAL BY CLICKING HERE. THIS WILL HELP WITH SETUP AS IT IS THE SAME. IF THE SERIAL NUMBER IS FOLLOWED BY A “C” YOU HAVE A 2C. THERE WERE TWO VERSIONS OF THE 2C, ONE WITH 2 INPUTS AND THE LATER ONE WITH 4 INPUTS FOR BI-WIRING. HOPE THAT HELPS!

Steve (6/25/15): Richard, I have a pair of 2Wq subs that I would like to connect to my Ayre VX-5 amplifier. The amp has an input impedance of 2 megaohm on the balanced input (1 megaohm per phase). What settings should be used on the M5-HPB filters? Thanks.

HELLO STEVE, SWITCHES 4 AND 5 “ON” ALL OTHER SWITCHES “OFF OR OPEN” FOR 2 MEG.

John (6/29/15): Good Morning Richard, Regarding the batteries in the 5A, two questions: First, you've indicated a nominal life of 5 years. I am not sure of their exact function in the circuit -- static or dynamic. If static, then I could understand them doing something all the time, 24/7, with a given amperage draw. But this then brings up the discharge rate of the batteries and the draw must be minute to last for 5 years. However, if dynamic, wouldn't life depend upon use of the speaker -- 2 hours a day as opposed to 8 hours a day, let's say. Whatever the amperage draw, the batteries still have a given discharge profile. At what power does their performance diminish? That said, without putting a meter inside the speaker and measuring them, how can you tell that your batteries are getting weak or shot? Which brings up the second question: why not an internal transformer that supplies the small DC current necessary or at least a rechargeable battery -- though they also have their issues. :) TIA, John

HELLO JOHN, THE BATTERIES ACTUALLY LAST ABOUT 7 YEARS BECAUSE IT IS DETERMINED BY THEIR SHELF LIFE. IT IS A STATIC VOLTAGE THAT IS APPLIED TO THE CAPACITORS IN THE CIRCUIT. IT DOES NOT CHANGE WITH USE OR POWER PUT INTO THE SPEAKER AS THERE IS NO CURRENT DRAW. THEIR PURPOSE IS TO KEEP THE CAPACITORS FORMED WHERE MUSIC LEFT THEM LAST. MOST PEOPLE NOTICE A BREAK-IN WHEN THEY TURN ON THE SYSTEM FOR THE FIRST HOUR OR SO. THIS IS ELIMINATED BY THE BATTERIES BECAUSE THE CHARGE KEEPS THE CAPS BIASED. ONE COULD USE A POWER SUPPLY TO DO THE SAME BUT IT WOULD COST A LOT MORE AND IT WOULD NEED TO BE PERFECTLY QUIET. BEST CHOICE IS A BATTERY. THE SPEAKER WILL PLAY WITH DEAD BATTERIES BUT WILL SOUND DARK AND LIFELESS.

Gee (6/30/15): I have a pair of model 2 towers hooked up to a vintage Yamaha reciever (CR2020). If I wanted to bi-amp, what is the best way to go? Can I still use the Receiver amp and add an amp? Thanks, Gee

HELLO GEE, THE BEST WAY WOULD BE TO ADD A STEREO AMPLIFIER OF HIGHER QUALITY WITH BI-WIRE CAPABILITY TO THE SPEAKER AND USE THE RECEIVER AS A PREAMP.

Richard (7/1/15): Hello Richard, I have a pair of 2wq's paired with Nola Contenders. My Amps are Quicksilver V4's (Originals). Since I have to invert the speaker cables to my main speakers, do I also invert to the subs? 2nd question: I can't seem to get rid of some booming on certain songs. I'm using a 50k X2 on Mikes Original QS -V4's. I have the contour turned all the way down to 1 and the sensitivity se to 90. I have tried lowering the sensitivity but it still booms. Could it be some of the recordings themselves? ( e.g. HiRes -Eric Caption Remastered Live & HiRes Doug MacLeod "There's a Time" Live) Any suggestion would be really appreciated.. Thanks, Richard P.

HELLO RICHARD, THE QUICKSILVER V4 HAS AN INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 100K SO I THINK YOU HAVE A BUMP IN THE RESPONSE BECAUSE OF THE 50K X-2. PUT THE WX-2 ADJUSTABLE BOX BACK IN THE SYSTEM AND TRY 100K. RECORDINGS DO VARY SO TRY  RAY BROWN SOULAR ENERGY AS IT IS WELL RECORDED AND FOLLOW  THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE MANUAL UNDER “OPTIMIZING SETTINGS” PAGE 5. I SUGGEST USING THE M5-HP HIGH PASS USED WITH THE QUATRO AND MODEL 5A FOR MUCH HIGHER PERFORMANCE TO REPLACE THE X-2 AND IT HAPPENS TO BE ADJUSTABLE TO DIFFERENT AMPLIFIER IMPEDANCES FOR FUTURE CONVENIENCE. 

Pat (6/23/15): I have a pair of model 3's and a 2WQ connected to a NAD 25 with an input impedance of 1meg ohm. The M5-HP I acquired from Stereo Unlimited (San Diego) for my 2WQ maxes out at 470K. 1) Will adjusting to 1meg on the M5-HP improve sound? 2) Can my M5-HP be modified to adjust to 1meg? 3) What is your overall recommendation? Thanks. Pat.

HELLO PAT, THE M5-HP IS SET UP FOR THE 100HZ CROSSOVER NEEDED FOR THE QUATRO, FIVE AND SEVEN SPEAKERS. THE 2WQ SUBWOOFER IS DESIGNED FOR AN 80HZ CROSSOVER WHICH IS COMPENSATED FOR BY ADJUSTING THE M5-HP LOWER BY ABOUT ONE HALF.  SO YOU ARE GOOD.

Bill (6/24/15): I am upgrading my system to use two Ayre MX-R mono blocks driving my Model 5As. My dumb question of the day is I have two choices available: place each MX-R directly besides each speaker and have a ridiculously short speaker wire run of 18" and a compensating longer XLR interconnect from the preamp or running two short XLR runs to the two MX-Rs sitting side by side and speaker wire runs of about 2 meters. I plan to sit each MX-R on an isolation platform in either location. Your thoughts? Bill

HELLO BILL, SHORT SPEAKER CABLE AND LONG INTERCONNECTS ARE ALWAYS SUPERIOR. SPEAKER WIRE COULD BE A LITTLE LONGER THAN 18 INCHES FOR CONVENIENCE.

Josef (6/3/15): I have Naim (NAC 82 & NAP 250) with Neat Momentum 4i Speakers. I am looking for something new in the 6K range and 2 things sound interesting - the Treo and the Endeavor e3. The last once are possible to hear in Austria (Vienna), but I could not find a dealer yet that has your Treo's to listen too for having a comparison. Do you know somebody? Would the Naim NAP 250 be powerful enough for the Treo - or any other reccomondation? Thank's, Josef

HELLO JOSEF,  YOU CAN LISTEN AND BUY THE TREO FROM OUR DISTRIBITOR IN SWITZERLAND CALLED GOOSEBUMPS AUDIO GMBH. WEBSITE INFO BELOW.

http://goosebumps.ch

Norm (6/10/15): Hello Mr. V, I'm the original owner of a pair of Model 1's, which I bought some 25 or so years ago. Well, one speaker finally blew out two days ago. Should I repair it, or replace it with a Model 1ci? If the latter is preferable, can I purchase just one Model 1ci? Thanks for your time. Regards, Norm

HELLO NORM, WE CAN REPAIR THE OLD MODEL 1 BUT THE NEW 1CI WOULD NOT BE COMPATIBLE AS THERE HAVE BEEN MANY CHANGES.

Erick (6/15/15): Just bought a pai ofr Vandersteen 2 CE Signature II speakers.My room is 12ftx 14ft.How far should they be set off from the front wall and side wall? How far apart and how far away should I sit from the front wall. the speakers will be on the 12 ft wall. Thanks Erick

HELLO ERICK, YOUR OWNER'S MANUAL HAS A COMPLETE SET OF GUIDELINES FOR SETUP.  FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR SOUND WILL BE OPTIMIZED.  IF YOU DON’T HAVE A MANUAL, IT CAN BE DOWNLOADED HERE

Paul (6/16/15): Hi Richard. I have the 3a Signature and love them. I'm thinking of getting a demo pair of Quatro fabric -- I know this is an older version. Would there be enough of an improvement between the two to justify the change? Thanks! Paul

HELLO PAUL, THE QUATRO FABRIC HAS THE SAME TWEETER AND MIDRANGE AS THE MODEL 3A SIG BUT HAVING THE HIGH-PASS AND INTEGRATED POWERED BASS WITH ROOM EQ OF THE QUATRO WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT OVER YOUR 3A SIGNATURE.

Tom (5/7/15): Hi Richard, I own a pair of 5a Carbons and recently purchased a pair of Aesthetix Atlas Monoblocks. I know you frequently pair these with your speakers at shows. Do you prefer using the Vandersteen filter or the built in filter on the amps? Also I heard from a friend that there are some caps that can be installed in the Atlas amps filter that significantly improve the sound? If so, I would like to purchase these caps and have Aesthetix install them. Thanks much! Tom

HELLO TOM, MOST PEOPLE RUNNING THE ATLAS AMPLIFIER RUN THE M5-HPB INTO THE DIRECT INPUT FOR THE BEST PERFORMANCE USING OUR BATTERY-BIASED HIGH-PASS FILTERS. HOWEVER, IF YOU WISH YOU WOULD CONTACT AESTHETIX FOR THE MODIFICATION AND THEY WILL ORDER THE CAPS FROM US.

Karl (5/26/15): Hi Richard, Are you planning an upgrade option from Quatro Wood to Quatro Wood CT? Thanks. -Karl.

HELLO KARL, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO UPGRADE AN ORIGINAL QUATRO WOOD TO THE CT VERSION AS THE INTERNAL CHANGES WON’T RETROFIT.

Terry (5/18/15): I have model 5A speakers that have not been used in several years. My questions are: With the internal battery dated to be good through only 2012, what type of battery needs to be used as a replacement? I use the M5-HPB filter. The 9 volt battery is dated in 2009. The battery is extremely difficult to remove. Any advice? Do you have a dealer within close proximity of Cincinnati, Ohio. Terry

HELLO TERRY,  YOU MAY SEND YOUR CROSSOVERS AND M5-HPBS TO US WITH AN R.M.A. FORM FILLED OUT AND WE WILL REPLACE THEM WITH DURACEL 9 VOLT BATTERIES. THEY ARE GOOD FOR 7 YEARS BUT IF YOU SEND THEM IN WITH 6 LITHIUM BATTERIES WITH AN 11 YEAR LIFESPAN WE WILL INSTALL THEM FOR YOU. LABOR COST EITHER WAY IS $149.00 WITH UPS SHIPPING INCLUDED. THE M5-HPB REPLACEMENT IS AN ADDITIONAL $59.00.

Bob (5/19/15): Richard, I have a pr of model 3's and a 2Wq in my audio system. I am a weekend listener(3-5 hrs). Should I leave the 2Wq plugged in all the time, or only when I am listening? Bob

HELLO BOB, THE 2WQ IS DESIGNED TO BE ON ALL THE TIME FOR MAXIMUM RELIABILITY. THEY ONLY DRAW 6 WATTS EACH WHEN NOT PLAYING.

Leonardo (5/25/15): Hi Richard, I'm the happy owner of a pair of the 3A signature. I'm thinking of changing amplification. I have been offered a pair of Quicksilver 88 mono amps. They are rated at 80 W per channel. The manual for the 3As suggests amplification of 100 to 200 watts per channel into 8 ohms. Do you think that 80 W would be enough to drive the 3As? I have a medium size room and I listen at very moderate volumes (too old to rock and roll, at least not all the time). Also, would adding a subwoofer, the 2Wq, reduce the required power to drive the speakers? Thanks for your help. Leonardo

HELLO LEONARDO, I HAVE NOT TRIED THE 88’S ON THE 3A SIG BUT ITS POWER IS ON THE LOW SIDE. ADDING A 2WQ WOULD LOWER THE CURRENT NEEDED FOR THE BASS BUT DOES NOT ALTER THE DEMANDS IN THE MIDRANGE WHERE PEAK VOLTAGE IS MOST OFTEN REQUIRED.  I WOULD TRY THE AMPS BEFORE PURCHASE AND MAKE SURE IT CONTROLS THE BASS AND PLAYS AS LOUD AS YOU WANT.

Ken (4/29/15): Hi Richard - Not sure exactly how to word my question but here it is: Given adequate amplifier power, what is the maximum SPL the Quatro can put out (obviously accounting for dynamics, etc)? Thanks. - Ken

HELLO KEN, THIS IS A COMPLICATED QUESTION. THE QUATRO AND TREO CAN HIT 107 dB PEAKS UNDER THE CONDITIONS YOU DESCRIBE IN YOUR QUESTION. UNDER NORMAL CIRCUMSTANCES THIS IS NOT A PROBLEM FOR A CUT OR TWO, OCCASIONIALLY. HOWEVER IF THEY ARE PLAYED AT THIS LEVEL DURING A PARTY FOR AN HOUR OR MORE THE MAGNETS AND DRIVER CHASSIS GET HEAT SOAKED AND THERE IS NO WAY FOR THE HEAT TO ESCAPE. THIS MAY RESULT IN VOICE COIL DAMAGE. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO KNOW THAT ALL SPEAKERS THAT ARE NOT HORN LOADED AND HAVE THE SAME QUANTITY OF SIMILAR DRIVERS HAVE THE SAME LIMITATIONS REGARDLESS OF WHAT IS CLAIMED. LOUDER REQUIRES MORE DRIVERS (SMEAR), LARGER DRIVERS (LOWER RESOLUTION AND COMPROMISED IMAGING), OR HORN LOADING (COLORED) BECAUSE ULTIMATELY WE MUST ALL SUBMIT TO THE SAME LAWS OF NATURE.

Welly (4/30/15): Hi Richard, I have looked at the waterfall graphs given in the Vandersteen product description for the 5a carbon, the quatro wood, and the model 7. The 5a carbon graph doesn't look as "nice" as the 7's and it's not even clear that it's better than for the quatro wood. Please explain Welly

HELLO WELLY, THE MODEL SEVEN IS A MORE SOPHISTICATED DESIGN THAN THE MODEL 5A CARBON SO THE WATERFALL GRAPH SHOULD LOOK BETTER. WATERFALL GRAPHS ARE ONLY ONE PARAMETER AND SHOULD NOT BE INTERPRETED AS THE ONLY IMPORTANT MEASUREMENT. GOOD SPEAKER DESIGN SHOULD DELIVER A SPEAKER THAT PERFORMS WELL WITH A  BROAD VARIETY OF STANDARD MEASUREMENTS, AND ONCE THAT'S ACHIEVED THE SPEAER CAN THEN BE CONSIDERED FOR AUDITION. THE BEST TEST EQUIPMENT RESIDES ON BOTH SIDES OF YOUR HEAD.

Jim (5/5/15): Hello, Richard, Just wondering if there was a slight change in the drivers for current Model 5A Carbons from previous production units. I ask this based on the change in language describing the 5A Carbons from previous ads and currently on your website ("descending directly from" the Model Seven drivers) to the language in the latest TAS ad saying these two drivers in the Model Seven MK II and the 5A Carbons are the same. My units' S/N are 6232AC and 6233 AC I'm wondering if my units are current. I've owned nothing but Vandersteen speakers for the past twenty years, and plan on owning nothing else in the future. Thanks. Jim Heckman

HELLO JIM, THE CARBON/BALSA MIDRANGE OF THE SEVEN AND SEVEN MK II ARE THE SAME DRIVER AND ALWAYS WERE. WE MATCH AND GRADE THESE DRIVERS VERY FANATICALLY FOR THE SEVEN SERIES SPEAKERS AND USE THE REMAINDER FOR THE 5A CARBON SPEAKER.

Kent (5/5/15): Richard, In my AV system I have gradually replaced all the original Genesis 6 Series speakers the room was built around with yours, 5As in the front and four VSM-1s as surrounds. I still use the Genesis center as it sits in a custom enclosure built specifically for it. This center channel speaker has a high level throughput by which it connects to a Genesis 2/12T sub via speaker cables to high level inputs. The problem is the Genesis sub is unreliable to put it nicely. My question is whether this high level throughput will work with one of your subs (2wq maybe?) to maintain this as a full channel center with greater reliability? Thanks, Kent

HELLO KENT, IF YOU ARE GOING TO CONTINUE TO USE YOUR PRESENT CENTER SPEAKER THE ONLY OPTION WOULD BE THE V2W AS IT HAS LINE-LEVEL INPUTS DESIGNED FOR HOME THEATER.  THE CENTER SPEAKER IN A TIME- AND PHASE-CORRECT SYSTEM  IS VERY IMPORTANT AND SHOULD ALSO BE TIME- AND PHASE-CORRECT.  BEFORE MAKING LONGTERM DECISIONS YOU MAY WANT TO RETHINK THE CENTER.

Tick (4/16/15): Can you use the VSM-1 for front and left fronts for a wall mount near your tv. Tick

HELLO TICK, YES YOU CAN AND IT OFTEN IS USED THIS WAY ALONG WITH A VCC-2 BELOW THE FLAT SCREEN TV. THIS IS A DYNAMITE COMBO WITH THE V2W AND IT IS UP AND OUT OF THE WAY.

Dushyant (4/17/15): Hi Richard, I listened to the Treo s recently at my dealer with my favorite music tracks, I was totally impressed with the clarity, transparency and stereo image. I am amazed as to how you have managed to put that in a small and beautiful enclosure! In terms of bass when I compare the experience to my 2CE SIg II it is better defined on Treo but 2CE has more weight, power and authority. Some of my music goes to low 30s and mid 20s. Having enjoyed the 2CE bass for a while I am reluctant to let it go. Does this mean Quatro is the only/next option if I want all the clarity AND powerful bass? My room is 14wx17dx10h and I am limited to placement near front wall. Thanks much - Dushyant

HELLO DUSHYANT,  THANK YOU FOR THE COMPLIMENT. THE TREO, ESPECIALLY THE CT (CARBON TWEETER) VERSION, IS A HUGE ADVANCEMENT OVER THE LATEST VERSION OF THE VENERABLE MODEL 2 EVEN THOUGH THEY ARE BASED ON THE SAME DESIGN PRINCIPALS. YOUR OBSERVATION AFFIRMS THE FACT THAT THE LAWS OF NATURE STILL RULE. THE MODEL 2 HAS A LARGER ENCLOSURE VOLUME AND LARGER DRIVERS IN THE BASS SO IT WILL HAVE DEEPER BASS. ONE OPTION IS TO ADD A 2WQ SUBWOOFER IF THE FORM FACTOR OF THE TREO IS IMPORTANT AND YOU WILL STILL HAVE THE WEIGHT IN THE BASS PLUS THE ADVANTAGE OF HIGH-PASSING YOUR SYSTEM. HAVING SAID THAT MOVING UP TO THE QUATRO WILL GIVE YOU STEREO BASS AND ROOM CORRECTION, WHICH IS A BIG DEAL IN MOST ROOMS.  BOTH THE QUATRO AND THE TREO WERE DESIGNED FOR NEAR-WALL PLACEMENT. THIS MAY EFFECT THE BASS AND THAT IS WHEN THE QUATRO HAS A HUGE ADVANTAGE. 

Martin (4/17/15): Hi Richard. I'm trying to make a shortlist of speakers in the $5000-8000 range that will sound great even when positioned up against a rear wall (I have limited space). Will this work for the Treos? To be used with Naim amplification. Thanks for your help, Martin.

HELLO MARTIN, THE TREO CT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED WITHIN 12 INCHES OF THE REAR WALL. I HAVE NOT HEARD THE TREO CT WITH NAIM BUT I AM SURE IT WILL SOUND GREAT.

Carl (4/20/15): Richard I just bought a pair of Treos from audio alternatives. I'm driving them with Classe C400 and am disappointed with bass response. They are in a small room with carpet . Am I doing something Wrong thanks Carl

HELLO CARL- FIRST, THE SPEAKERS TAKE ABOUT 60 HOURS OF PLAY TIME TO BREAK-IN. ROOM PLACEMENT CAN AND WILL HAVE AN EFFECT ON BASS PERFORMANCE. GET THE SPEAKERS BROKENIN AND TRY DIFFERENT POSITIONS EVEN BY A FEW INCHES. YOUR DEALER CAN ASSIST YOU WITH THIS.

Pat (4/21/15): Hi Richard. I am planning to add a NAD 25 Power amp to my system, which includes a pair of Model 3's, and a 2Wq. The amp is rated at 1 meg ohm input impedance. Will I be doing any damage, and what will be the result musically if I use my X-2, 200k single ended crossover to connect the 2Wq?

HELLO PAT, THIS WOULD MOVE THE CROSS-OVER FROM 80HZ DOWN TO 20HZ WHICH COULD DAMAGE YOUR 2WQ AMPLIFIERS. I RECOMMEND YOU USE THE M5-HP AS IT CAN BE ADJUSTED FOR THE 1 MEG INPUT IMPEDANCE AND WOULD SOUND DRAMATICALLY BETTER IN A SYSTEM OF THIS CALIBER.   

Olav (4/27/15): Hi Richard, I have three questions: The specs of the C1i says "First order/6dB per octave, 80Hz, 2.8kHz" What is the 80Hz? In the C1 manual you mention "temperature-tracking devices" for protection. Is this zero ohm devices that change to resistance with temperature? Are these also used in the C1i? How do you avoid signal degradation with a switch in the tweeters signal path? Best regards Olav

HELLO OLAV, WE RECENTLY RENEWED OUR WEB SITE AND THE 80HZ IS A MISPRINT IN THE TRANSFER. THIS SHOULD BE 2.8KHZ ONLY. THEY ARE RESETTABLE FUSES THAT ARE HEAVILY BYPASSED WITH FILM CAPS. SERIES RESISTANCE IS PART OF THE MODEL USED WHEN ALIGNING A PROPER BASS SYSTEM. I ASSURE YOU THIS AND SOME RESISTANCE FOR WIRE HAS BEEN ACOUNTED FOR. 

PS- THE WEBSITE HAS BEEN UPDATED AND THIS ERRORONEOUS SPEC CORRECTED.

Barton (4/6/15): Hi Richard. I have a pair of 2CEs with Super Vanderstands that I'm moving with me to a new place. Unfortunately, the screws that hold the stands to the speakers have not made the trip with me. What size replacement screws do I need to get? Thanks! Barton

HELLO BARTON, ¼ x20 BOLT ONE INCH LONG.  AVAILABLE AT ANY HARDWARE STORE.

John (4/6/15): Hi Richard. I am considering the purchase of a pair of new Quattro's for my 2 channel system. I currently use a pair of Pathos mono blocks with Focal Micro Utopia's. Because of my location, a home demonstration is probably not feasible so I was wondering if you have experience with running Vandersteen speakers with Pathos amplifiers. Also, is it possible to get the automotive finish on the Quattro speakers? Thanks for your time. John

HELLO JOHN, WE USED PATHOS MONOBLOCK AMPLIFIERS AT A SHOW ONE TIME AND IT WORKED FINE. AUTOMOTIVE COLORS ARE A $5000.00 OPTION ON THE QUATRO CT AND 5A CARBON.

Chris (4/1/15): Hi Richard, I have a pair of 2Cis that I bought in 1991 and love. Lately, I've noticed that the tweeters seem to be lower in amplitude than they used to be. I'm driving with a 4308 Denon ( pure direct) and a Pono player. It could be age-related (58) hearing loss ( which I refuse to accept) or could it be that the crossovers may be aging (which I'd like to accept!) What do you think? Is my crossover aging or are the Dead concerts catching up with me? Regards, Chris

HELLO CHRIS, THESE SPEAKERS RARELY DIE UNLESS THEY HAVE SEEN TOO MUCH POWER. THAT CAUSES THE TWEETER TO OPEN TOTALLY. THE CROSSOVER USES FILM CAPS AND WE HAVE NOT EVER HAD ONE FAIL IN 38 YEARS. IT COULD BE YOUR EARS OR SOMETHING ELSE IN THE SYSTEM BUT UNLIKELY THE SPEAKER. ONE THING YOU COULD CHECK IF BOTH SPEAKERS SOUND THE SAME. IT IS EVEN MORE UNLIKELY THAT BOTH WOULD HAVE THE SAME PROBLEM.   

Andrea (4/2/15): Dear Richard, I'm an italian director who lives in france. I love jazz, '70 rock and classical music. In Paris I have a Luxman LV113, an AR turntable, and Cabasse Bisquine Speakers. It sounds pretty good. In Tuscany I have a vintage HI-FI. Creek 4140S2, a Myriad CD Player, Supra 3.4S cables, Goldring 2 turntable and... your Vandersteen 1b speakers that I found last year from my italian audiophile dealer! I'm so happy of the sound. I'd like to thank you for the "finesse" of your products. The sound is clear, dynamic, present and the scene quite complete. I'm not an audiophile with a lot of budget, but I love when the music is put together and give me emotions. I have a question. I saw some 1C model here in Europe (I don't listen at it yet) and I'd like to know if there is some quality differences between the 1B and 1C and, if I will decide tp choose to improve my HI-FI, I will listen a difference... I'm very satisfied of the 1B model, but I'm curious to know if the 1c will change the way to listen Coltrane, Mingus or Led Zeppelin! Thank you so much and a big "bravo" for your passion and your work. Best, Andrea Baldini

HELLO ANDREA, THANK YOU FOR YOUR KIND WORDS. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE 1B AND THE CURRENT 1CI BECAUSE THEY HAVE BEEN UPGRADED IN THE CROSS-OVER AND DRIVERS. THEY HAVE THE SAME TIME- AND PHASE- CORRECTNESS BUT ARE EVEN MORE TRANSPARENT WITH IMPROVED BASS. MAYBE YOU CAN GET A LISTEN TO THEM AS YOUR EQUIPMENT WOULD CERTAINLY JUSTIFY THE IMPROVED PERFORMANCE.

Kyle (4/3/15): I bought a pair of model 1's from Craigslist. I'm not sure if they're 1B or 1C. I thought they were 1C but the serial number has a "c" before the number instead of after, like "C15888" and "C15889". I was just wondering how old they are. Thanks.

HELLO KYLE, THEY ARE 1B’S EXPORTED INTO CANADA. IF THEY WERE 1C SPEAKERS THE “C” WOULD FOLLOW THE SERIAL NUMBER. THEY ARE APPROXIMATELY 23 YEARS OLD. THE MODEL 1CI IS NOW IN PRODUCTION SO ALL OF THE INTERNAL PARTS ARE UPGRADED.

Carlos (4/4/15): Hi Richard I was wondering if the DSpeaker 8033 antimode DSP eq would be compatible with my 2wq sub, since it s connected with through line level . Hera are the specs:Anti-Mode™ 8033 is very simple to use. The calibration process is completely automatic: it generates frequency sweeps to the desired calibration point (or multiple points) and measures the combined transfer function of the subwoofer-room system. Anti-Mode™ 8033 uses regular RCA connectors, which can be found from vast majority of home theater equipment. Input to the device is taken from the line level subwoofer output of the (pre-)amplifier. Output is connected to the line level input of the subwoofer. Features Measures and corrects the combined frequency response of your subwoofer system and the listening room User-friendly automatic calibration procedure Can be used with any active subwoofer Minimum phase filtering, no significant algorithm delay Correction range 16-144 Hz Three user-selectable additional equalization filters Single or multiple measurement point calibration Measurement microphone is included, Although It does says that it can be used with any active sub I need to know because i,m unable to audition it in my country. Thank you , Carlos

HELLO CARLOS, THIS DEVICE IS DESIGNED TO GO BETWEEN THE SUB OUTPUT OF A PROCESSOR OR A/V RECEIVER AND THE LINE-LEVEL (RCA) INPUT OF A POWERED SUBWOOFER. THE 2WQ IS DRIVEN WITH THE SPEAKER OUTPUT OF AN AMPLIFIER AT SPEAKER LEVEL SO IT IS NOT COMPATABLE WITH DSPEAKER 8033. 

Ray (3/25/15): Richard, Just a comment to say thanks very much for the recent call. Dialing up the sensitivity of the 2wq to 90db and some placement adjustments has solved the M5-HPB input impedance (10K) issue. The system really sounds great now and the M5 is a major improvement. Regards, Ray

HELLO RAY, THANKS FOR THE COMMENT, ENJOY YOUR MUSIC.

Van (3/27/15): I have a pair of 2ce.Want to purchase a vandersteen 2w sub it use .Do I need to have the Vandersteen WX-2 crossover?.Also can you use just one sub or must have two.Music only no surround .

HELLO VAN, YOU CAN USE ONE 2WQ AND YOU WILL NEED THE WX-2 WHICH IS INCLUDED WITH THE SUBWOOFER AS WELL AS THE INTERCONNECTING CABLE.

John (3/27/15): Hi Richard I need to replace the speaker cloth for my 15 year old 1C's. Where can I get the exact cloth? Thanks, John

HELLO JOHN, CALL 559-582-0324 AND ORDER A PAIR.

Robert (3/30/2015): Hi Richard-- My current set-up is the NAD C326BEE AMP/NAD D1050 DAC/ NAD C 546BEE CDP as a transport/ CARDAS CLEAR SKY WITH QUADLINK CABLES THROUGHOUT entire system, and pair of VANDERSTEEN 1Bs. For the past two years, I was using the floor- stander POLK TSI - 400 series as my "one and only" speaker pair in the" two channel" system mentioned above, but instead of the 1Bs. I, within the past two weeks, had to hook up my old, but great, VANDERSTEEN 1Bs again. The reason for my switching back to the 1Bs, was I felt I had sore ears from listening to the Polks. I went to the ear doctor, and he said that I had an ongoing- fairly- severe form of listener's fatigue from the POLK TSI 400s, as a result of the POLK's naturally occuring high frequencies, he said. To me, reviews of the POLK 400 were great overall, but I felt immediate relief when the VANDERSTEEN 1Bs were hooked back up to my system. I now have to give my ears a chance to heal because of this near "ear bleed" nightmare with the POLKs. Upon immediate hook-up of the 1Bs, I felt immediate relief and no ear fatigue during a two hour listening session. It was as if a sharp tingeing feeling was lifted away from the entire listening experience when listening to the VANDERSTEEN 1Bs again after two years of POLK's deceptively harmfull high frequencies being present in all my listening sessions. I feel like a" fool" for putting myself through this 2 year ear- fatigue- limbo with the POLK TSI 400s. Richard, am I the only person who feels this way-about the POLK TSI 400s being a negative choice in a two channel stereo application!? Are all budget category speakers beside VANDERSTEEN MODEL 1s designed with inherent listener's fatigue and overly aggressive high frequencies that burn your ears in the long run. Again, I feel like a fool for being sold by the POLK 400s sleek lines and great looks. In the end I wasted my valuable time and money. As I move forward, the VANDERSTEEN ONES will be the GO-TOO choice for all my listening needs. One last question - Do the VANDERSTEEN MODEL 1ci pair offer a true upgrade to the MODEL 1B pair? THANKS!!

HELLO ROBERT, IT IS NOT MY PLACE TO CRITICIZE OTHER DESIGNS BECAUSE THAT IS UP TO THE EARS OF THE LISTENER. THERE IS A BIG IMPROVEMENT IN ALL WAYS WITH THE NEW 1CI SPEAKER AND MERITS AN AUDITION AT YOUR NEAREST VANDERSTEEN DEALER. CLICK HERE TO GO TO OUR MODEL 1CI PAGE AND CLICK THE FIND A DEALER BUTTON TO FIND THE CLOSEST DEALER WITH THE MODEL 1CI ON DISPLAY. THE MODEL 1B IS NOW A 28 YEAR OLD DESIGN SO IMPROVED MATERIALS AND SIGNAL COMPONENTS ARE USED NOW THAT WERE NOT AVAILABLE THEN.

Rob (3/19/15): Hi Richard, my current set up is the original Quatro (sock, non-wood) using Arc Ref3 Pre-amp and VS110 Amp. Looking for an upgrade that would be significant. I read in your answers below that the current Quatro CT wood is better than the older 5A. Would you recommend the CT wood or the 5A Carbon for a significant change. I know the difference us 2X, but would rather wait and save and not do multiple upgrades. Thanks!!

HELLO ROB, GOING UP TO THE QUATRO WOOD CT WOULD BE A MAJOR UPGRADE SONICALLY OVER THE EARLY QUATRO FABRIC. STEPPING UP TO THE Model 5A CARBON WOULD BE A SIGNIFICANT IMPROVEMENT IN THE BASS (ESPECIALLY IN A LARGE ROOM) AND BECAUSE OF THE PERFECT-PISTON CARBON MIDRANGE A BETTER IMPRESSION OF THE MODEL SEVEN’S PERFORMANCE. FIND A VANDERSTEEN DEALER THAT HAS THE QUATRO CT AND THE 5A CARBON AND SPEND AN AFTERNOON FIGURING OUT WHICH ONE MEETS YOUR NEEDS.

Chris (3/21/15): I currently run an all Vandersteen home theater system with model 2cs up front, VSMs in the rear, and a VCC1 as a center channel, using a sony str-dn1030 receiver. I would like to upgrade the center channel to a VCC2. I noticed that the VCC2 is rated at 6 ohm. and my receiver supposedly only supports 8 ohm speakers. I remember reading where you said that ohm readings are not that real in practice. Do you think that I could use the VCC2 without any problem with my current receiver? Chris

HELLO CHRIS, THE VCC-2 SHOULD RUN FINE WITH YOUR RECEIVER BECAUSE IT IS A EASY LOAD ON THE AMPLIFIER. YOU MAY WANT TO CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER BECAUSE HE WILL BE MUCH MORE FAMILIAR WITH THE DIFFERENT RECIEVERS THAN I.

Richard (3/23/15): Hello Richard, I have a pair of 2wq's and wanted to know if upgrading the wires to the subs makes any difference at all. Kind thanks, Richard

HELLO RICHARD, THE WIRES PROVIDED ARE OFC 16G TWISTED PAIR AND HAVE PROVEN TO BE ACCURATE AND WERE USED DURING THE 2WQ'S DEVELOPMENT. USING DIFFERENT WIRES MAY CHANGE THE SOUND AND IT WOULD BE UP TO YOU IF YOU LIKE IT BETTER.

Bill (3/13/15): Hi Richard, I just introduced an NAD M25 power amp into my system (Magnepan 1.6 and a pair of 2Wqs). The M25 input impedance is listed at 1 M-ohm (1,000 k-ohms). What do I do with the Temporary x-over (and whatever I choose as the more permanent solution)? I assume I should set the x-over to the highest impedance available (200 k-ohms), but when I checked with my dealer, he suggested, "ask Richard; he likes that kind of question". Many thanks and keep up the good work! Bill

HELLO BILL, YOUR ONLY OPTION WOULD BE THE M5-HP OR M5-HPB FOR AN INPUT INPEDANCE THIS HIGH. THE M5-HP(B) IS A HUGE IMPROVEMENT IN SOUND AND IS ADJUSTABLE FOR FUTURE CHANGES IN AMPLIFIER IF YOU CHOOSE. USING THE 200K SETTING WOULD HAVE YOUR CROSSOVER OFF BY 2 OCTAVES. CALL ME IF YOU HAVE MORE QUESTIONS 559-582-0324, PRESS 3 AND IF I CAN'T ANSWER PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE. I WILL GET BACK TO YOU.

Bill (3/13/15): Hi Richard, my VTL amps have an input impedance of 130k ohms, do I use the 100k or 150k setting on the M5-HP or do I have to send it in to be modified? the speakers are cloth Quatros.

HELLO BILL, THE CLOSEST SETTING WOULD BE 150K IF THE VTL IS SPECIFIED 130K BALANCED.

Jeff (3/16/15): Hi Richard, Can the VLR Woods be placed directly against a wall? I'd like to install a pair on an 11-inch deep shelf but want to be sure that placement wouldn't be a problem. Also, is it possible to pair with a subwoofer in a hi-fi set up? If so, can the sub be on a different wall? Love your products (and the new website). Many thanks. Jeff

HELLO JEFF, THE VLR IS DESIGNED EXACTLLY FOR THAT PLACEMENT. IT IS NOT DESIGNED TO BE MOUNTED ON A STAND AWAY FROM THE WALL. THE VLR IS OFTEN SOLD WITH OUR 2WQ SUBWOOFER AND IT MAKES A KILLER 2.1 SYSTEM.

Ray (3/3/15): Hi Richard, my current set up is 2ce Sig II's with two 2wq's. I recently got an M5-HPB and sent it in for new batteries and just got it back from your service department. When I hooked it up though it didn't sound as good as the single ended x-2 10K crossovers I was using. It seemed to be missing some of the mid bass. My amp impedance is 10K and I have the M5 on the lowest setting pin combo 1,2,9,10. Is this due to the M5 roll off set at 100hz and the 2wq at 80hz? If so, is there anything I can do as I would really like to use the M5 and by balanced connections. Thank, Ray

HELLO RAY, THE M5-HPB IS SET FOR 100HZ. FOR THE 80HZ USED WITH THE 2WQ ONE WOULD NEED TO GO DOWN ONE SETTING. IN YOUR CASE YOU DO NOT HAVE THAT OPTION BECAUSE THE M5-HPB ONLY GOES DOWN TO 10K. AS FAR AS NOT SOUNDING AS GOOD IT WILL TAKE TIME FOR THE NEW BATTERIES TO FULLY FORM THE CAPS BUT THIS WILL NOT CORRECT THE FACT THAT THE HIGH-PASS IS SET FOR 100HZ. YOU HAVE TWO OPTIONS 1) TURN UP THE LEVEL OF THE 2WQ BECAUSE THE LEVEL AT ALL FREQUENCYS GOES DOWN WHEN RAISING THE HIGH-PASS. 2) IT MAY BE EASY TO CHANGE THE INPUT IMPEDANCE OF YOUR AMPLIFIER AS MOST OFTEN IT IS ESTABLISHED BY RESISTORS ON THE INPUT.  IF YOU CHANGE THE INPUT RESISTORS I SUGGEST GOING UP TO 50K WHICH SOUNDS BETTER.  IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO DISCUSS THIS FURTHER CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.

Paul(3/3/15): Hello Richard, In your reply to Mike on 3/1/2015, you stated "THE TREO FEATURES THE SAME THREE UPPER DRIVERS AND CROSSOVER COMPONENTS AS THE ORIGINAL QUATRO WOOD" Are you referring to the original Wood Quatro, or the Wood Quatro II? I've also heard the term "Wood Quatro Signature" used before. Is this the same speaker as the Wood Quatro II? Also, what are the differences between the Wood Quatro models prior to the CT version? Thanks, Paul

HELLO PAUL, THE ORIGINAL QUATRO WOOD HAD THE MODEL 5 (FILLED POLY SMOOTH CONE) MID AS DID THE TREO.  BOTH SPEAKERS WERE UPGRADED WITH THE 5A MIDRANGE (TRI-FIBER WOVEN CONE) WITHOUT ANY DESIGNATION CHANGE. NOW WE HAVE BOTH THE QUATRO CT AND BOTH VERSIONS OF THE TREO. THE QUATRO CT AND TREO CT (CARBON FIBER TWEETER) HAVE THE SAME DRIVERS AND CROSSOVERS FROM THE 6.5-INCH MID-BASS DRIVER AND ABOVE.  

Michael (3/6/15): Hi Richard, in regard to the integrated subwoofer in the Quatro CT's...do you recommend against using something like the PS Audio Ultimate Outlet when plugging the speakers in? Thank you, Michael

HELLO MICHAEL, GENERALLY I RECOMMEND PLUGGING DIRECTLY INTO THE WALL AS MY EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN BETTER PERFORMANCE IN MOST CASES. THERE MAY BE CASES WHERE A POWER-LINE CONDITIONER IMPROVES THE SOUND BUT I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE PS UNIT. I ALWAYS RECOMMEND AN AUDITION TO VERIFY PERFORMANCE.

Jim (2/25/15): Hello, Richard, I'm trying to calculate the total power consumption in watts of my whole system to see if my 15 amp circuit can handle it safely. To date it has, but I'm not sure if I'm pushing it with all the gear coming out of it. My specific question is the power consumption requirements of the subwoofers in the 5A Carbons. I realize they are 400-watt amplifiers, but am not sure if this is the same as their power consumption requirement. Can you let me know what the wattage draw is for the subwoofer amplifier in each speaker? Thank you. Jim Heckman

HELLO JIM,  250 WATTS PER SIDE. MOST SYSTEMS WILL RUN ON ONE 15 AMP CIRCUIT AS LONG AS THE EQUIPMENT IS TURNED ON ONE PIECE AT A TIME. THE CURRENT SURGE WOULD BE A PROBLEM IF EVERYTHING IS TURNED ON AT THE SAME TIME (NOT A GOOD IDEA ANYWAY).

Mike (3/1/15): Hello Richard Mike, 1994 circa 2CE and 1991 Model 3 serial (1418) and 2WQ serial xxx owner here wonders if the "Treos are nothing more than Quatro Woods without the powered subwoofers."

HELLO MIKE, THE TREO FEATURES THE SAME THREE UPPER DRIVERS AND CROSSOVER COMPONENTS AS THE ORIGINAL QUATRO WOOD. THE TREO CT AND THE CURRENT QUATRO CT ARE ALSO THE IDENTICAL WITH RESPECT TO THE UPPER THREE DRIVERS. HAVING A POWERED SUBWOOFER WITH 11-BAND ROOM EQ IS NOT A SMALL THING AND IN SOME ROOMS MAY BE A DEAL MAKER.

Steve (3/1/15): I have a pair of the 2ce signatures with the dark oak endcaps. Can I use something like a mahagony or red oak stain to darken them up a little? I had thought about going ahead and trying it, but decided to ask you first as I didn't want to end up with a splotchy look.

HELLO STEVE, APPLYING STAIN IS ALWAYS AN ART. I WOULD TRY IT ON THE REAR OF THE BOTTOM FIRST SO YOU CAN SEE IF YOU LIKE THE RESULT.

Erik (2/24/15): Hello Richard. Heard your presentation couple of years ago in Audio Alternative (Alan Jones) and was thrilled about your enthusiasm regarding audio. Thank you. I was close to buy a pair of quattro's as one of my friends got these (with Sonic Frontiers 220 mono tubes / pre amp / Wadia CD) but was offered a good deal on 3 x 2CE Signatures and 2 x 1C's as surround system. I am extremely happy but the upgrade gene in me still look for the quattro's... Would the Quattro's be a good upgrade replacing the 2CE's in front where I could move them back as surround? The one 2CE is a special one a bit shorter than the standard 2CE and used as Center. Second question is if I am moving to Europe can the Quattros be used with step up transformer 230/50Hz? Thank you in advance

HELLO ERIC, I ENJOY DOING THESE SEMINARS AND MEETING NEW PEOPLE THAT SHARE THIS ENTHUSIASM. THE QUATRO WOOD CT WOULD BE A HUGE UPGRADE TO YOUR HOME THEATER. THE SHORTER 2CE SIG WOULD STILL WORK AS A CENTER BUT THE VCC-5 WOULD ALSO BE AN UPGRADE IN THE FUTURE. YOU WOULD ALSO GAIN ROOM EQ WHICH SOLVES BASS PROBLEMS WITHOUT THE DIGITAL PROCESSING DEGRADATION IN THE MIDS AND HIGHS THAT ALWAYS OCCURS WHEN YOU DIGITIZE AND EQ THE WHOLE SIGNAL. THE QUATRO WILL WORK WELL WITH A STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER AS LONG AS IT IS RATED FOR 1000 WATTS, THIS WOULD BE ENOUGH  FOR BOTH SPEAKERS.

Binger (2/19/15): Hello Richard. Hope things are well in sunny California. Any plans to upgrade the terrific coaxial drivers you use in the VCC-5 and the VSM's to the balsa stiffened perfect-piston design ? I am thinking of trading my Quatros in on Quatro CT's but I use a Meridian G68 processor and the Trifield DSP to get three channels from stereo sources. I am concerned that if my VCC-5 is not as clean as the Quatro CT's in the midrange , it won't work as well as it does now, ( which is phenomenal). Also Meridian's digital room correction works as well as your analog equalizer, but is a LOT easier to use (I've done it both ways). Also, have you heard the Meridiam M6's ? This is Meridian's first (and only) phase coherent speaker and they sound stunning in my office. Very interesting approach which uses a very low crossover (200 hz) for the integral 5.5" subwoofer and a full- range, digitally equalized 3" driver from there up. It shouldn't work but it does - very similar sound to your Quatros.

HELLO BINGER, WE ARE NOT CONSIDERING PERFECT-PISTON DRIVERS FOR OUR COAX-BASED SPEAKERS BECAUSE OF COST. THE TOOLING, MATERIALS AND LABOR WOULD INCREASE THE VCC-5’S RETAIL PRICE TO WELL OVER $12,000. AT THIS PRICE SALES WOULD BE MUCH LOWER AND MAKING IT A PROFITABLE PRODUCT WOULD REQUIRE INCREASING THE RETAIL PRICE EVEN MORE. I USE THE VSM-1 SIGNATURES AND THE VCC-5 WITH MY MODEL SEVENS AND EXPERIENCE GREAT SOUND. THANK YOU FOR THE COMPLIMENT THAT OUR ALL-ANALOG BASS-EQ SYSTEM WORKS AT LEAST AS WELL AT THOSE FREQUENCIES AS YOUR DIGITAL ROOM CORRECTION SYSTEM WITHOUT DIGITIZING THE WHOLE SIGNAL. WHEN YOU UPGRADE TO THE QUATRO CT OR 5A CARBON THE RESOLUTION OF YOUR SYSTEM WILL INCREASE DRAMATICALLY AND I GUARANTEE YOU CAN USE AN ALL-ANALOG SYSTEM WITH OUR POWERED-BASS EQ SYSTEM AND MAKE IT SOUND BETTER THAN ANY DIGITAL DSP-BASED SYSTEM. IT DOES TAKE EXPERIENCE AND TIME BUT WITH PATIENCE AND PERSISTENCE THE REWARD IS GREAT. MANY PEOPLE WILL USE AUTOMATED DIGITAL ROOM CORRECTION SYSTEMS BECAUSE IT IS EASY. BUT ENOUGH HIGH-END DEVOTEES ARE GOING BACK TO TURNTABLES AND LP RECORDS BECAUSE IT SOUNDS BETTER. WE NEED TO KEEP OUR BEST SPEAKERS PURE ANALOG AND DIGITAL-FREE SO THAT ADVANTAGE IS NOT LOST. WE ARE INVESTIGATING DSP FOR LOWER-PRICED SPEAKER APPLICATIONS BECAUSE IT COULD BE LESS COSTLY THAN USING EXPENSIVE HAND-SELECTED COMPONENTS.

Jim (2/20/15): Richard, on the 5A Carbons, do the Low Frequency Contour controls need to be the same level on both speakers? Thanks. Jim

HELLO JIM, YES THE CONTOUR CONTROL MUST BE SET THE SAME FOR BOTH SPEAKERS. THE LEVEL CONTROL CAN BE SET DIFFERENTLY IF NEEDED AND IS PART OF THE ROOM EQUALIZATION PROCESS. 

Charles (2/13/15): Richard - I have several questions regarding subs and bass response. A little background... I have thoroughly enjoyed by 2ce's for I can't remember how long. I am in the process of upgrading my entire system top to bottom. My finished basement is somewhat challenging for bass, so the Quattro's with the sub EQ would be great. However, purchasing subs and speakers separate will be easier to budget. I am curious, with careful placement of two 2wq's, can I smooth out the bass issues and approach the bass performance of the Quattro's? From your response on 2/6, it appears the 2wq's will have an EQ in the near future. From a bass perspective, how will the Treo CT with EQ'ed 2wq's compare to the Quattro's? Are there inherent advantages to splitting the subs from the main speakers? Thanks, Charles

HELLO CHARLES, NO AMOUNT OF EXPERIMENTATION WITH PLACEMENT WITH DUAL 2WQ’S  WILL SOLVE BASS PROBLEMS LIKE THE EQ'd SYSTEM IN THE QUATRO. THE TREO CT WITH THE NEW 2WQ WILL SOLVE YOUR BASS PROBLEMS BUT THE QUATRO WILL STILL SOUND BETTER (MORE COHERENT). HAVING A TRUE FULL-RANGE SPEAKER (QUATRO) WITH ROOM EQ WILL ALWAYS HAVE MORE COHERENT SOUND THAN A SPLIT SYSTEM.  THIS IS WHY ALL OF OUR MORE EXPENSIVE SPEAKERS ARE DESIGNED WITH INTEGRATED SUBWOOFERS WITH ROOM EQ.

Burke (2/16/15): I have 2C's purchased from Cal Audio in 1978 in Visalia...What is my upgrade path? Upper end is fine, but the bottom end distorts..Do I drive down and have you upgrade them or just buy a new pair of your Treos?? What would be the cost to upgrade my 2C's if I brought them to you! Thanks , Burke in Sacramento

HELLO BURKE, THERE IS NO UPGRADE PATH FOR YOUR 2C SPEAKERS EXCEPT TO HAVE THEM SERVICED TO ORIGINAL SPECIFICATIONS. TREOS WOULD DEFINITELY BE A SERIOUS UPGRADE OVER THE 2C’S IN EVERY WAY SONICALLY AND COSMETICALLY.

Ed (2/16/15): Hello Richard, several years ago I bought a pair of Quatros from an estate sale. At the time I was also buying cables/interconnects from a local audio expert (Chris Kipp) who was a Vandersteen dealer. Chris did the basic set-up, but did not complete the Room Optimization process. Very shortly thereafter, he went out of business. I understand that there is a procedure for carrying out the optimization process with a non-proprietary test CD. Can you direct me to that procedure? By the way, the Quatros are great, as were the Model 2 pair I bought from your Palo Alto dealer with recommendation from Keith Yates many years ago. Best regards, Ed

HELLO ED, YOU CAN DOWNLOAD OUR PROPRIETARY VANDERTONES TEST-TONES FROM THIS WEBSITE- CLICK HERE.  FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE QUATRO MANUAL UNDER “TECHNICIAN’S ADJUSTMENT SECTION.”  WITH SOME PRACTICE ALL WILL BE WELL.  GLAD  YOU ARE ENJOYING THE QUATROS.

Ken (2/18/15): Hi! Richard, My name is Ken, do you know where can i get spikes for 1B stands? Thanks!

HELLO KEN, YOU CAN ORDER THEM BY CALLING 559-582-0324.

Dee (2/4/15): My name is Dee, and had Vandersteen speaker for over 25 years, right now i still have a pair of 3A signatures and pair of 2wqs. The question is about the 3As in one of them i somehow stripped the threaded insert in the back that holds the stand and now it just spins inside of the speaker with the bolt, How do i access it to unbolt it and glue it back? Thanks in advance.

HELLO DEE, THIS ¼ X 20 LONG BOLT THREADS INTO A TEE-NUT TRAPPED BETWEEN THE INNER AND OUTER STRUCTURE OF THE MODEL 3 OR 3A. THIS IS CAUSED BY OVER-TIGHTENING THE BOLT AND IS VERY RARE. THIS IS VERY DIFFICULT TO REPAIR EVEN FOR US HERE AT THE FACTORY. YOU WOULD NEED TO PACK THE SPEAKER AND THE ATTACHED STAND ON A PALLET AND TRUCK IT TO US FOR REPAIR. CONTACT OUR OFFICE 559-582-0324 SO WE CAN ARRANGE THE SHIPMENT AND PASS ON OUR FREIGHT DISCOUNT TO YOU.

Harald (2/6/15): Hello Richard You have done a lot of wonderful groundwork and research on the integrated subwoofers in Model 7, 5 and Quattro, but it seems nothing has happened with the 2wq for a very very long time. Do you have any plans for updating your subwoofers with trickle down technology or lessons that you have learned from your upscale products. Best regards Harald Nipen

HELLO HARALD, THE RESEARCH ON THE 2WQ HAS TRICKLED UP TO THE QUATRO, 5A CARBON AND SEVEN IN TRUTH. MANY UPGRADES HAVE OCCURRED TO THE 2WQ OVER THE YEARS BUT THE BIGGEST IMPROVEMENTS HAS BEEN USING THE MODEL 5 HIGH-PASS (M5-HP) WITH THE 2WQ. WE ARE WORKING ON ADDING EQ AND THE SWITCH-MODE POWER SUPPLY IN ABOUT ONE YEAR BUT AT A HIGHER PRICE. IN THE QUATRO, 5A CARBON AND SEVEN THIS IS A BIG DEAL BECAUSE THEY ARE ATTACHED TO THE REST OF THE SPEAKER AND NEEDS TO BE ADJUSTABLE AS THE SPEAKER NEEDS TO BE PLACED WHERE IMAGING AND MID AND HIGH FREQUENCIES ARE BALANCED IN THE ROOM. KEEP IN TOUCH WITH YOUR DEALER OR THIS WEB SITE FOR FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS

Arthur (2/9/15): Hi Richard, Greetings from sunny San Jose. I was fortunate enough to acquire a pair of pristine 2C's without the stands. I was wondering if you have them as stock item or for sale. My better half loved its sound and decided to place them beside our TV powered by a Mac 4100. Our area rug is thicker in that area hence the need for the stands. Let me know possibilities please. Thanks and all the best. Arthur

HELLO ARTHUR, THE MODEL 2, 2A, 2B, 2C, AND 2CI SPEAKERS ALL REQUIRE A 6-INCH HIGH STAND IN ORDER TO GET THE DRIVER ALIGNMENT CORRECT. THIS IS NOW ALMOST A 30 YEAR-OLD SPEAKER AND WE DO NOT HAVE ANY STOCK. THE ONLY SOLUTION WOULD BE TO CONTACT:  SOUND ANCHOR 321-734-1237.  BOB MAY HAVE A PAIR OR MAKE THEM. 

Don (1/29/15): Hi - Just picked up a pair a Vandersteen Model 1 Speakers & was trying to figure out what I actually have. The Serial # on one of them is 020599 Anyway you can narrow it down as the whether they are Model 1, 1B, 1C1 etc - thx - don - 905-579-1878

HELLO DON, THEY ARE MODEL 1B SPEAKERS BUILT APPROXIMATELY 1987. WE ARE BUILDING MODEL 1CI SPEAKERS NOW WHICH LOOK THE SAME ON THE OUTSIDE BUT EVERYTHING INTERNAL HAS BEEN UPGRADED.  IF YOU ARE LOOKING AT CURRENT MODEL ONES IN THE STORE BE AWARE THAT THE OLD 1B SOUNDS VERY INFERIOR BECAUSE ALMOST 30 YEARS OF R & D HAS MADE A DIFFERENCE.

Mitch (1/30/15): Richard. I have been fascinated by the 2W design since I first read Richard Hardesty's article back in 2000. I have a modest mid-fi system as it is what my budget will allow, but I happened to stumble upon a cosmetically abused 2W in a local pawn shop. Judging by the panel on the back it is an original 2W as there is no mention of a crossover on the back diagram. I am having trouble finding information on this specific model but am I correct in thinking that it requires a crossover after the preamp in order to function correctly as the current 2Wq does? My receiver sadly does not have a pre-amp/return loop and I'm wondering if there is any way I can take advantage of this rough little gem I've found. I know this would not provide the benefit of relieving the amp of reproducing sub-bass, but is there such a thing as speaker level crossovers? Or is that madness? Alternately might I simply feed the 2W the unattenuated signal and compensate for its contouring by bringing the output level down? I realize that I'm asking for your advice in how to best misuse your design, but I am eager to find a way to justify the purchase. :) Sincerely, Mitch

HELLO MITCH,  YOUR 2W INSTALLS INTO A SYSTEM JUST LIKE THE 2WQ SO YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE 2WQ MANUAL. NEITHER THE 2W OR 2WQ CAN BE USED WITH A RECEIVER WITHOUT PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN CONNECTORS. IF YOU CONNECT THE 2W WITHOUT THE CROSSOVER (WX-2) THE INTERNAL AMP WILL FAIL (EXPENSIVE). JUST LOWERING THE LEVEL WILL NOT CORRECT THE SLOPE AS THE FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF THE 2W IS NOT FLAT BY DESIGN. WE MAKE A V2W SUBWOOFER WHICH IS DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH A/V RECIEVERS AND DOES NOT REQUIRE THE WX-2.  YOU SHOULD CONSIDER TRADING IN YOUR 2W FOR A V2W AT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

Bob (2/2/15): Hello Sir, I am building my second system based on NAD C316BBE amp and NAD CD player. Do you think your Model 1ci would work fine? I don't need high sound levels but I prefer warm - with no fatigue sound. Currently I have NHT2.1 system that is quite forward/detailed/bright. Thank you for your time.

HELLO BOB, THE  MODEL 1CI WOULD BE A PERFECT REPLACEMENT FOR YOUR PRESENT SPEAKERS. YOU CAN FIND YOUR NEAREST VANDERSTEEN DEALER ON THIS WEBSITE.

Jerry (1/7/15): Hi, Richard. My query: Have you ever listened to any of your speakers powered by Linn Klouts ? I have three of them currently trip-amping Linn Espeks. At some point, I'd try to afford some of your mid-priced speakers, which would likely mean just using one Klout for each speaker. Do you have any experience with this ? I wish I could afford your 5A Carbon, but even the Quattro Woods are a big stretch for me. Thank you very much. Jerry Wechsler / New York

HELLO JERRY, I HAVE NOT HEARD THIS COMBINATION BUT YOU COULD CONTACT JOHN RUTAN OF AUDIO CONNECTION IN NEW JERSEY AT 973-239-1799. HE WAS A LINN DEALER AND IS A VANDERSTEEN DEALER, HE MAY RECALL.

Jim (01/09/2015): Richard I have a pair of 2C's that I bought used back in 1988. They still sound wonderful. Are there any tweaks you would recommend be done (by Vandersteen) to upgrade these 2C's? I have considered buying the current version 2CE Signature II's. How do they compare to the 80's vintage 2c's sonically. Thank you.

HELLO JIM, WE DO NOT HAVE ANY UPGRADES FOR ANY MODEL 2. WITH 25 YEARS OF TWEAKS AND UPGRADES YOU WILL NOTICE AN AMAZING DIFFERENCE, IN FACT THERE ARE NO COMMON PARTS BETWEEN THEM. LOCATE YOUR NEAREST DEALER AND GIVE THEM A LISTEN AND YOU WILL FIND A BOTTOM-TO-TOP IMPROVEMENT IN ALL RESPECTS.

Mike (1/12/15): Hi Richard, I have a pair of 2 CE Sig II and I'm thinking about getting one extra (just one) 2CE Sig II to use for a center channel to match it instead of a VCC5. Would this be okay?

HELLO MIKE, I DON’T KNOW WHERE YOU WOULD GET ONE 2CE SIG II BUT IT WOULD UNDERPERFORM THE VCC-5 IN MANY WAYS. TRY PUTTING THE VCC-5 TWO FEET FURTHER AWAY FROM THE LISTENER THAN THE 2CE SIG IIs ARE AND SET THE PROCESSOR DISTANCE FOR ALL THREE SPEAKERS THE SAME.

Steve (1/13/15): Do you know how much the Model 5 speakers draw when plugged in but the amp is turned off? Thanks Steve

HELLO STEVE, THE MODEL 5 SUB AMP DRAWS 8 WATTS WHEN THE MAIN AMPLIFIER IS OFF AND THEREFORE NO MUSIC IS PLAYING.

Mike (1/13/15): What's the life expectancy for the 3's. I've got a 20 year old pair. They've been well taken care of and average about 3 hours a day of usage at "normal" listening levels, with the occasional sonic test run when my wife's not home. Mike San Dimas

HELLO MIKE, NOTHING IN THEM TO WEAR OUT SO THEY ARE GOOD TO GO ANOTHER 20 YEARS.

Joe (1/16/15): Richard, First of all, thank you for making High End Speakers affordable. Maybe that is why I have five Vandersteen Systems in my home. My main listening speakers are 3A's. The question is: should I upgrade them or should I sell them and buy the Treo's? Amplification is adequate - vintage ARC with 225 WPC.

HELLO JOE, THE TREO WILL BE NOTICEABLY BETTER (IMAGING, TRANSPARENCY AND SPEED)  EVERYWHERE BUT THE BASS. THE 3A SIG WILL HAVE  DEEPER BASS THAN THE TREO.

Ralph (1/19.15): Hello, Richard. I bought a pair of VLRs and one 2Wq last spring, and want to add a second 2Wq to have stereo subwoofers. I will also upgrade the crossover. Is this year's 2Wq the same as last year's, or are there any compatibility or other issues to be aware of or address? Ralph

HELLO RALPH, THERE HAVE NOT BEEN ANY CHANGES TO THE 2WQ IN THE LAST TWO YEARS.  THE WOOD FINISHES VARY BECAUSE EVERY PIECE OF WOOD IS DIFFERENT.

Dushyant (1/20/2015): Hi Richard, I am considering Quatro Wood CT. The user manual says some integrated amps with built in high pass filter may not require external M5-HP. Is this the subwoofer out from an integrated amp? Is the mid-bass, bass input to Quatro a line level input so that I can connect the subwoofer out from an integrated amp? It is possible to set the crossover freq to 100Hz and the slope to 1st order in the integrated amp I have for the subwoofer out. Or does Quatro requires speaker out level input for mid-bass and bass via M5-HP? What re the name, model number of some integrated amps which I can use directly with Quatro Wood CT without M5-HP? Thanks for your help. - Dushyant, San Jose, CA

HELLO DUSHYANT,  IF YOUR INTEGRATED AMP/PROCESSOR GIVES YOU THE OPTION OF FIRST ORDER (6dB/OCTAVE) 100Hz HIGH-PASS, IT WILL WORK. YOU WOULD NOT USE THE SUBWOOFER OUT OF YOUR INTEGRATED BECAUSE THE QUATRO CT’S INTERNAL SUBWOOFER AMP WOULD RESTORE THE BASS SIGNAL AND ALL WILL BE GOOD.  CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 EXT 3 AND WE CAN DISCUSS THIS IN DETAIL.

Mike 1/1/15): My name is Mike and I am considering purchasing used model 5s (2004), from Audio Connections in Verona, NJ. My question is, what is the difference between the model 5 and 5a? My concern is that I am buying old technology. I currently have Vienna Acoustics Grand Mozart SEs, powered by Bob Carver Cherry 180 tube monoblocks and Conrad Johnson Art preamps. Any advice/information you can give me would be appreciated. Thank you.

HELLO MIKE, YOU ARE PURCHASING OLD TECHNOLOGY COMPARED TO THE MODEL 5A CARBON MANUFACTURED TODAY. HAVING SAID THAT THEY WERE VERY ADVANCED IN THEIR DAY AND CERTAINLLY VERY GOOD SOUNDING.  THE DIFFERENCES ARE TOO NUMEROUS TO LIST IN THIS FORUM BUT EVERYTHING IN THEM IS STILL SUPPORTED AND DESIGNED TO GO FOR MANY MORE YEARS.  YOUR ELECTRONICS WILL WORK VERY WELL WITH MODEL 5 OR 5A SPEAKERS.  HAVE AUDIO CONNECTION HOOK THEM UP AND I AM SURE YOU WILL BE IMPRESSED.

Dave (12/30/14): Hi Richard , Dave again. I hate to be redundant but I am asking clarification between your answer to my question about the possibility of using XLR to RCA adapters on my balanced M5-HPB filter & a similar question asked by Rob , on 12/13. Your answer to my question was yes , as long as the adapter had pin 3 & 1 tied. Your answer to Rob was no but a balanced M5-HPB CAN be used with a modified RCA adapter. Are you referring to pins 3 & 1 tied here as well or some other mod ? Also I have another question , concerning impedance matching ( XLR to RCA ) : Does running a balanced M5-HPB into a single ended amp affect sonic performance ? Again , thanks in advance for your time.

HELLO DAVE, THE PREVIOUS QUESTION INVOLVED A SINGLE ENDED M5-HP WHICH CAN NOT BE ADAPTED TO BAL. ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL ME 559-582-0324.

Kurt (12/30/14): Richard: I attended your recent presentation in Tacoma and enjoyed it thoroughly. An individual in the audience (not me) asked your view of digital room correction systems. Your reply was passionate and critical. I'm curious to know if you have reached the same conclusion about the Lyngdorf system? Best wishes...I am hoping a pair of Quatros will find their way into my listening room. Kurt

HELLO KURT,  I STILL BELIEVE CORRECTING BASS BELOW 120Hz IS VALID BUT PREFER DOING IT IN A WAY THAT DOES NOT INVOLVE ANY SIGNAL PROCESSING OF THE INFORMATION ABOVE 120HZ. THIS IS HOW IT IS DONE IN THE QUATROS YOU ASPIRE TO OWN.

Dee (12/30/14): Hi Richard, Two questions. I have a pair of 3a Sigs and a pair of 2wqs. The first is concerning the 3a. The back bolt holding the sound anchor stand cannot be undone. the captive nut is just spinning. Is it accessible through the hole behind the connectors? Or am i stuck with removing the socks and the passive radiator to get to it? And what do i replace it with? is it a T nut? the second is concerning one of my 2wqs. it has one of the corner banged up due to some shipping damage when i bought it years ago. How would i go about taking it off for repairs? dee ;-D

HELLO DEE, THERE IS A ¼-20 T-NUT TRAPPED BETWEEN 2 PIECES ½ INCH MDF SO YOU WOULD NOT HAVE ACCESS FROM INSIDE. BEST SOLUTION IS TO DRILL A SMALL 1/8 INCH HOLE ABOUT 1/16 INCH FROM THE 5/16 HOLE THE BOLT GOES INTO. YOU WILL BE DRILLING THROUGH MDF WOOD AND THEN THE STEEL FLANGE OF THE TEE-NUT AND THEN WOOD AGAIN. GLUE A NAIL INTO THIS HOLE WITH EPOXY AND WAIT FOR IT TO CURE.  REMOVE THE BOLT AND REINSTALL WITH A NEW BOLT. THE NAIL IS A PERMANENT FIX IF ONE FOLLOWS THE INSTRUCTIONS (FINGER TIGHT, PLUS ONE TURN). THE TOP OF THE SUB IS GLUED ON WITH 4 WOODEN DOWELS.  VERY CAREFULLY PRY AROUND THE CIRCUMFERENCE MULTIPLE TIMES UNTIL IT IS LOOSE.

Bill (12/31/14): Hi Richard, I also have cat damaged grills on my 1B's. The cats still live here and will no doubt destroy new grills if I replace them. Can I just remove the grills and not paint or modify the interior finish without any ill effects on sound quality?

HELLO BILL, ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS ARE DESIGNED WITH A MATTE INTERIOR PAINT AND TO BE USED WITH THE GRILLES ON. IF YOU REMOVE THE GRILLES AND PAINT THE INTERIOR THE SPEAKER WILL BE HARSH IN THE HIGHS. THE DRIVERS WOULD ALSO BE UNPROTECTED AND REPAIRING DAMAGE TO THEM IS VERY EXPENSIVE.

Omead (12/23/14): Hello Sir, I bought 4 vandersteen 1Bs in 1985 and they are still working beautifully. I was a freshman then, now senior faculty in the same school. My cat has butchered the covers. I took one off and the stuff inside looks beautiful. Can I do damage by taking the drivers out and sanding and painting the inside to look nice (to my task) likely use lacquer after smoothing etc. Will the paint change the acoustical performance? Or alternatively, I can try to replace the cover. The cat has managed to puncture through and now there is a rattle out of the larder driver. Shame. Will try to get it to your service dept soon. Wonderful stuff you make. Bravo. Omead Amidi Pittsburgh

HELLO OMEAD, TAKING THE FABRIC OFF AND PAINTING THE INSIDE WITH SMOOTH SHINY PAINT WILL MAKE THE SPEAKER HARSH IN THE HIGHS. YOU CAN CALL 559-582-0324 AND PURCHASE NEW GRILLS.

Bill (12/26/14): Hi Richard- I have ordered a pair of 2CE Signature II speakers that I will use with my Marantz 8005 until I can upgrade my amps as well. Under these circumstances, would it be better to bi-amp using the A and B outputs on the amp or bi-wire using only the A output? Thanks.

HELLO BILL, YOU WILL GET BEST SOUND IF YOU BI-WIRE FROM OUTPUT A.

Dave (12/29/14): Hi Richard , this is Dave. My question is : Can your M5-HPB filter configured w/ XLR pigtails be connected to a single ended amp using XLR to RCA adapters ? The amp in question is a Sumo Andromeda. Thanks in advance. Dave Condruk

HELLO DAVE, YES YOU CAN USE THE XLR TO RCA ADAPTERS AS LONG AS PIN #3 AND PIN #1 ARE CONNECTED TOGETHER. YOU WOULD USE THE SAME SWITCHES AS SPECIFIED ON THE COVER.

Bill (12/29/14): Mr. Vandersteen, I am the happy owner of 2Ce Sig IIs . . . I heard the Treos at RMAF 2013 and think they are my likely upgrade path (as a bonus, I think they are the best looking speaker you've ever built). I am curious about the CT version. I haven't found any reviews of the Treo CT . . . can you please describe the sonic attributes of the CT version compared to the standard?

HELLO BILL, THEY HAVE IMPROVED RESOLUTION IN THE MIDS AND HIGHS AND ARE LOWER IN DISTORTION. I WOULD GIVE THEM A LISTEN AS YOU ARE THE ONE WHO NEEDS TO BE PLEASED, BUT I CERTAINLY BELIEVE YOU WILL LIKE THEM AS MUCH AS WE DO.

Tim (12-10-14) Hi Richard, I have a VCC-5: what is the best distance from the wall for placement of this speaker and what height should the VCC-5 be from the bottom of my Plasma TV?

HELLO TIM, LOCATE THE VCC-5 AS CLOSE TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN AS POSSIBLE. DISTANCE FROM THE REAR WALL IS NO FACTOR EXCEPT IT SHOULD BE TWO FEET FURTHER FROM THE LISTENER AS THE MAIN SPEAKER IF POSSIBLE. IN THE PROCESSOR SET THE DISTANCE ON THE CENTER THE SAME AS THE MAINS.

Rob (12/13/14): Richard: can I use RCA to XLR adapters for the Model 5 amp xover? they currently use XLRs. Rob

HELLO ROB, NO IT WON’T WORK. A BAL M5-HPB CAN BE USED WITH MODIFIED ADAPTERS FOR RCA.

Steve (12/15/14): HI Richard. I am hooking up my model 5's after a move/remodel. I would like to confirm that I connect the side of the M5-HP with the integral cable (input) to the line output of my preamp, and then connect the output side of the M5-HP to the unbalanced input of my amp with a RCA cable. Thanks and Happy Holidays. Steve

HELLO STEVE, THE M5-HP PLUGS INTO THE AMPLIFIER. THE CABLE IS THE OUTPUT.

Preston (12/20/14): Richard, I have a pair of 2CE sig II's about 7 years old. I am using an AR Classic 60 amp(balanced) and an AR LS12 preamp. I also have a Rel T9 sub and a pair of M5-HP crossovers(10 yrs old). Is there any sonic advantage in using the M5-HP with the Rel. Also the batteries are almost dead). What is the cost to replace the batteries? Thanks Preston

HELLO PRESTON, YOU ARE GOING TO WANT TO CHANGE THE BATTERIES BECAUSE IT DRAMATICALLY AFFECTS THE SOUND QUALITY. CALL 559-582-0324 FOR A QUOTE ON CHANGING THE BATTERIES. ONE OF THE BIGGEST IMPROVEMENTS ADDING A SUB TO ANY SYSTEM IS THE HIGH-PASS OF THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND AMPLIFIER, THIS MEANS DECREASING THE AMOUNT OF ENERGY REQUIRED OF THE AMPLIFIER AND THE SPEAKER IN THE BASS. THIS PROVIDES A DRAMATIC IMPROVEMENT IN TRANSPARENCY AND A MEASURABLE REDUCTION IN DISTORTION IN THE SPEAKERS AND AMPLIFIER. ADDING A SUB WHOSE LOW PASS IS ADJUSTED TO THE FREQUENCY THAT THE MAIN SPEAKER NATURALLY ROLLS OFF WILL ADD BASS BUT DOES NOT REMOVE THE EXCESSIVE WOOFER MOVEMENT (AND AMPLIFIER CURRENT REQUIRED) BELOW CUTOFF.  THIS CURRENT AND SUBSONIC MOVEMENT RAISES DISTORTION AND INCREASES CURRENT REQUIRED OF THE MAIN AMPLIFIER NEEDLESSLY. THE RESULT IS THAT THE CROSSOVER LINEARITY BETWEEN THE SUB AND THE MAIN SPEAKER IS MARGINAL AT BEST. THIS IS THE REASON ALL OF OUR MORE EXPENSIVE SPEAKER MODELS (QUATRO, 5A CARBON, AND SEVEN) USE A POWERED BASS SYSTEM ALL IN ONE ENCLOSURE.

Kris (12/22/14): Hello Richard! I have read in an online resource (http://education.lenardaudio.com/en/06_x-over.html) that second order crossovers provide best technical accuracy and that first order crossovers are only used to power cheap low power systems. A lot of your speakers use the first order crossovers. Is this for technical simplicity in the circuitry that you do this or is it just crossovers past the first order become prohibitively expensive? Thanks Kris

HELLO KRIS, WE USE FIRST ORDER CROSSOVERS BECAUSE THEY ARE THE ONLY ONES THAT ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT. FIRST ORDER SPEAKERS ARE ACTUALLY MUCH MORE EXPENSIVE TO DESIGN AND IMPLEMENT BECAUSE THE DRIVERS MUST COVER A BROADER RANGE OF FREQUENCIES IN LINEAR FASHION AND THE SPEAKERS NEED TO BE INDIVIDUALLY ADJUSTED FOR EACH PAIR OF SPEAKERS IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER. IT IS MUCH MORE ACCURATE TO SAY THAT FIRST ORDER CROSSOVERS PROVIDE THE BEST TIME DOMAIN PERFORMANCE AND ARE MUCH MORE EXPENSIVE TO DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE.

(Garrison (12/5/14): Hi Richard, I have a pair of 3a signatures and want to add a sub. There is a used V2W available at a nice price. Is that a good match? the only sub on this site is the 2W. Would it perform considerably better??

HELLO GARRISON, THE V2W WILL NOT WORK UNLESS YOU ARE USING AN A/V RECIEVER. THE 2WQ SUB WILL WORK IF YOU ARE 2-CHANNEL. 

Danny (112/7/14): Hi.What is the price for the pair of Vandersteen 4A in excellent full working condition? what is the right set up for this Tri-bi wire.thank you for your time. Danny in Ca

HELLO DANNY, THE MODEL 4A WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION IN 1991. I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THEY ARE WORTH BUT THE SPEAKER NEEDS THE WX-4 ELECTRONIC CROSS OVER TO WORK OPTIMALLY. IF YOU ARE LOOKING TO BUY A PAIR USED MAKE SURE YOU GET THE WX-4 BECAUSE THEY ARE NO LONGER AVAILABLE. 

Jon (12/09/14): Good morning Richard, I have a pair of 3A Signature speakers (# 7285 A and 7283 A). What does the "5A woven cone" mid-range offer over the "non-woven early cone"? What is the price to upgrade the mid-range with the required cross-over parts? Thank you for your time and information.

HELLO JON, BETTER TRANSPARENCY AND NEUTRALITY IN THE MIDRANGE. WE DO HAVE AN UPGRADE PROGRAM FOR JUST THE MIDRANGE. AT SOME POINT WHEN THE 3A SIGNATURE GETS CHANGED ENOUGH TO WARRANT A DESIGNATION CHANGE ALL OF THE RUNNING CHANGES IN THE 3A SIGNATURE SERIES WILL BE UPDATED.  

Tom (11/25/14): Hello Richard, if I have a chance to buy a used pair of 2CE Signature II (asking price $800) or a used pair of regular 3A (not signature) (asking price $1100), which one should I get? Thanks very much Richard. Tom

HELLO TOM, THE CURRENT 2CE SIGNATURE II WILL HAVE BETTER MIDS AND HIGHS BUT THE ORIGINAL 3A (NOT CURRENT SIGNATURE) HAS BETTER BASS. BETTER TO AUDITION THEM AND SEE WHAT WORKS FOR YOU. THE 3A SPEAKERS HAVE AN UPGRADE PATH, THE 2CE DOES NOT.

Krish (11/25/14): Hi Richard - I bought a pair of 3A's and paired them with a 340i Moon with DAC. If I want to expand this to include a home theatre, would a Rotel receiver be sufficient or do you think I'll need a sub-woofer as well? Thanks Krish

HELLO KRISH, ALL HOME THEATRE SYSTEMS NEED A SUB (OR HIGH-PASSED POWERED-BASS SPEAKERS) TO PROTECT THE BASS DRIVERS IN THE MAIN SPEAKERS. A SUB IS ALSO REQUIRED TO PRODUCE THE EFECTS EXPECTED FOR MOVIES.

Sunny (12/1/14): I have two questions. 1. Can I take screws out of 3A signatures to use banana plugs? I have nice biwire speaker cables that have soldered banana plugs and would like to use it. 2. Anticables.com mentions that jumpers should be used along with bi-wire. What's your thought on this? >>quoted>> Bi-wiring can provide some sonic improvements, but with the Anti-Cable Speaker Wires we prefer a configuration called by some as “parallel-bi-wiring”. It is when you bi-wire a speaker, yet still add a set of our excellent sounding jumpers as if you were not bi-wiring. The jumpers put the two wire run pairs in parallel, thus getting them working together. We prefer this to typical bi-wiring, as it gives the music additional bass weight, and greater musical dynamics which brings even more life to the music. -------- Thank you -- Sunny

HELLO SUNNY, THE SPEAKER WILL PLAY BUT NOT SOUND VERY GOOD. THE BANANA PLUGS WILL ONLY CONTACT THE INNERMOST POINT OF THE THREAD. THIS IS VERY LITTLE CONTACT AREA AND COULD DAMAGE THE THREADS IN THE TERMINALS. THIS IS VERY EXPENSIVE TO CHANGE AS THEY MUST COME BACK TO THE FACTORY.  WHY WORRY ABOUT THE SOUND YET MAKE SUCH A BAD CONNECTION? BEST CONNECTION WOULD BE A RING LUG OR SPADE WHICH IS GAS TIGHT, MAXIMUM CONTACT AREA AND BEST SOUNDING. JUMPERS DEFEAT THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF BI-WIRE.  MOST WHO RECOMMEND JUMPERS HAVE NOT DONE THE EXPERIMENT BUT YOU CAN.

Shane (11/25/14): I have a small home theatre and must use a perforated screen. Would three VSM Signatures behind the screen be ideal for this situation? I'm wondering about the sound from the fabric around the speaker compounded with the screen perforations. Would the sound be terrible? I really want to go with Vandersteen speakers. Any thoughts? Thanks for your time! Shane

HELLO SHANE, PERFORATED SCREENS AFECT THE SOUND SOME BUT THE FABRIC ON THE VSM-1 IS TRANSPARENT. THE IDEAL WOULD BE TWO VSM-1 SPEAKERS RIGHT AND LEFT AND A VCC-2 FOR CENTER MOUNTED ON THE CENTER LINE OF THE VSM-1. THIS WOULD PUT THE CO-AX DRIVERS ON A SLIGHTLY DIFFERENT HEIGHT.

Russ (11/28/14): Hi Richard. I'm in a good place to pick up a pair of Model 3As for a good price, but I've ALWAYS stood on the belief that your Model 2Cis were the standard by which all other speaker were measured (an exact quote). Which of the two do you prefer and why? I always thought bigger/more expensive was better, but now I know that's not always true. (I have sufficient power to run either, and I don't like music real loud so that won't be a problem.)

HELLO RUSS, THE 3A WILL OUT PERFORM THE 2CI IN EVERY WAY, IF THEY ARE IN GOOD SHAPE AND HAVE NOT HAD ANY UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS. AS ALWAYS LISTEN TO THEM BEFORE YOU BUY!

Dave (11/14/14): Hi Richard, With regards to time and phase coherence, is a 1st order crossover network the only way to provide proper time and phase alignment, or, in your opinion, simply the best way? Cheers, Dave

HELLO DAVE, IT IS THE ONLY WAY.

Welly (11/17/24): I have a model 5A, which has excellent treble -bass balance, a full sound, and is smooth overall. I see one limitation which is this: when I listen I feel sound is coming from only one speaker, unless I place myself exactly between both speakers. So is it a dispersion problem with the drivers, either the tweeter or midrange? Does the 5A carbon correct deficiency? Welly

HELLO WELLY, ALL RECORDINGS ARE MADE ASSUMING THE LISTENER IS BETWEEN THE SPEAKERS. ANY HIGH RESOLUTION SPEAKER SHOULD DO THIS. THE ONLY WAY TO MAKE IT SOUND THE SAME WOULD BE TO DRAMATICALLY LOWER THE RESOLUTION AND BOUNCE THE SOUND OFF THE WALLS. THIS HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH DISPERSION OR A PROBLEM WITH ANY DRIVER. THE ONLY PROBLEM IS THE ASSUMPTION THAT WHEN STEREO RECORDINGS ARE MADE THAT THE LISTENER WOULD BE NEAR THE CENTER OF HIS STEREO SPEAKERS.  THE MODEL 5A CARBON IS A HIGHER RESOLUTION SPEAKER AND IT WOULD NOT CHANGE THIS.

Todd (11/17/2014): Hi Richard. Several years ago I made an impulse decision to buy a single (one) 2CE Signature loudspeaker from a private party on craigslist. The speaker was in great shape and I paid (very little) for it. I thought for sure I would be able to find a mate (knowing full well that it would not be a matched set). I still have not found a mate after regularly checking eBay, craigslist, and other sources for 2+ years. Any ideas on where to find / buy a single 2CE Sig? Got one sitting around your would like to sell? Thank you for your input.

HELLO TODD, HAVE NO IDEA WHERE TO FIND ONE. WE DO NOT HAVE ONE HERE.

Ken (11/19/14): Hi Richard. My name is Ken and I recently met you at Advanced Audio (the bald headed truck driver formerly from Visalia). I currently own a set of 2Ci's and am looking to buy a pair of 3A Signatures. When I purchased the 2Ci's in Sacramento I matched them with Bryston equipment. My amp is a 3b (100 watt). I understand the 3A Signatures need 100-200 watts to perform correctly (according to the specs). Will the 3A Signatures play at 'concert hall' levels with a 100 watt amp? Would I be better off also buying a larger amp? I remember you talked about this at Advanced Audio but can't remember the details. Hope this makes sense. Thanks!! - Ken 

HELLO KEN, THE BRYSTON SHOUD WORK FINE BUT I DON’T KNOW ABOUT “CONCERT HALL LEVELS." THE BRYSTON HAS CLIPPING INDICATORS SO YOU WILL BE ABLE TO DETERMINE IF THE AMP IS POWERFULL ENOUGH. YOU DO NOT WANT TO LISTEN WITH THE CLIPPING LIGHTS FLASHING.

Michael (11/20/14): Hello Richard. I own the first edition of the Model Five. Moving and room conditions have me thinking to get slightly smaller speakers and I am wondering - is the Quatro Wood CT (given the integration of things learned from the model 5A Carbon and Model Seven) represent an upgrade path? Lateral move? Downgrade? Bottom line : would I rejoice in the new tech or, God forbid, regret parting with my Fives? Best, Michael

HELLO MICHAEL, THE QUATRO CT WILL OUT PERFORM THE MODEL 5 AND 5A EXCEPT IN THE BASS. IN A SMALLER ROOM THE BASS WILL STILL BE AMAZING WITH THE QUATRO CT AND LIKE THE 5/5A THE BASS IS ROOM ADJUSTABLE.

Art (11/20/14): Hi Richard. Art here, happy owner of a pair of Treos supplemented by a 2Wq (previously owned 3A Signatures). Do you anticipate offering an upgrade from the original Treo to the Treo CT? Thanks.

HELLO ART, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO UPGRADE A TREO TO THE TREO CT.

Bill (11/24/14): Hello Richard, I am using two 3A's as front speakers and I love them so much. I am working if I could use two 2CE's as the rear or surround ones because I found a good deal on this. Please advise. I am debating if I should use the 2CE's as the rear/surrouds or the bose 901 VI? Big thanks. Bill

HELLO BILL, IF YOU HAVE THE ROOM THE 2CE WOULD WORK VERY WELL BUT THE PREFERRED WOULD BE VSM-1. THE BOSE WOULD NOT BE TIME- AND PHASE-CORRECT TO MESH WITH THE FRONTS.

Unknown (11/21/14): Richard, do you recommend any brand of amplifier that matches well with Vandersteen? Thank you.

HELLO UNKNOWN, I DO NOT BUT OUR DEALERS HAVE EXPERIENCED MANY AMPLIFIERS THAT SOUND GREAT. ALL THEY HAVE TO SELL IS GREAT SOUND SO THEY HAVE FOUND THE COMBINATIONS THAT SOUND BEST AT MANY PRICE POINTS.

David (11/23/14): Do the 3a signatures all start with the tri- laminated midrange and approximately when was the mfgr start date of these? David

HELLO DAVID, ONLY 3A SIGS MANUFACTURED IN THE LAST YEAR OR SO HAVE THE 5A WOVEN CONE. WE DO NOT HAVE THE DATE AND OR SERIAL NUMBER SO THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW WOULD BE TO SHINE A LIGHT THROUGH THE GRILLE AND CHECK THE TEXTURE OF THE CONE.  THE NON-WOVEN EARLY CONE WILL BE SMOOTH.

Bill (11/23/14): Hi Richard, I have a set of vandersteen 3a speakers I was wanting to clean the fabric that surrounds the speakers how do i disassemble so i can clean? also is there a preferred amp i should use with these speakers ?

HELLO BILL, IT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO REMOVE THE GRILLE. I WOULD SUGGEST USING A SPRAY FABRIC CLEANER THAT DRIES INTO A POWDER. WHEN DRY, USE THE BRUSH ATTACHMENT ON YOUR VACUUM CLEANER AND CAREFULLY REMOVE THE DRIED CLEANER. AS FOR AN AMPLIFIER ASK A VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR SUGGESTIONS IN YOUR PRICE RANGE AND LISTEN TO THEM AND SEE IF YOU AGREE.

Al (11/12/14): Hi Richard, my name is Al and I currently own a pair of Quatro wood speakers. I am considering buying a new pair of Quatro wood ct. I really enjoy my current pair and would like to know what might I hear with the new CT? Thank you

HELLO AL, THE CHANGES WILL ADD TRANSPARENCY, LOWER DISTORTION BUT BE SWEETER AT THE SAME TIME IN THE MIDRANGE AND TWEETER FREQUENCIES. THE LOWER MIDRANGE AND MID-BASS WILL BE SLIGHTLLY RICHER.

Dwayne (11/13/14): Hello Richard..Currently I own the Quarto Woods with the ceramic coated dome tweeter. Can they be upgraded with the CT tweeter? The Quatro's are not listed in your upgrade section...and if so, what is the cost to do so. Dwayne

HELLO DWAYNE, THE QUATRO WOOD CAN NOT BE UPGRADED TO A QUATRO WOOD CT BECAUSE IT INVOLVES A LOT MORE THAN JUST CHANGING THE TWEETER OUT.

Syed (11/10/14): Hi Richard, I have an oppertunity to buy a pair of used Vandersteen 2ce. The seller says he has been using these since 1994. So I believe the speakers are around that time period. Could you tell me the sensitivity rating of these speakers please? Do you think my Macintosh MAC6700 200 watt per channel receiver will have to work hard to drive these speakers ? Will that be a good match between my receiver and these speakers? My receiver is producing a softer warmer sound. I am looking to hear all the crisp high frequency without the brightness. I also love to hear good bass. Please let me hear opinion. Thanks. I am really looking forward to you. Thanks, Syed

HELLO SYED, THE SENSITIVITY IS 85DB 2.83 VOLTS SO YOU WILL HAVE PLENTY OF POWER. I HAVE NOT HEARD THIS MODEL SO I CAN’T COMENT ON THE SOUND.

Tim (11/10/14): Hello Richard! Most of what I find online claims that shorter speaker cable and longer interconnects are favored over longer speaker cable and shorter interconnects. Being as your speakers are bi-wireable, is there a point where the speaker cables can be too short? For example, what if I can get my monoblock amps right up behind the speakers and have a 6 inch bi-wire speaker cable? I'd love to get your thoughts on this. Thanks much! Tim

HELLO TIM, THERE IS NO DISCERNIBLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 2 FEET AND 6 INCHES SO I WOULD DO WHAT IS PRACTICAL.

Tracy (11/4/14): Hello Richard, having owned a pair of 2ce's for a couple of decades and absolutely loving them, I've switched to using them in a home theater and have always wanted a V2W. I finally found a used one that I can afford so I purchased it! In your manual for the V2W it mentions prominently about a grounded interconnect cable using the "drain" part of the cable for the ground. I'm not sure what that is and is it a cable that can be easily purchased and if so, what do I look for? I've seen interconnect cables that have a separate wire running along the side for ground, is that it? I've got to tell you that it's very cool that you take the time to answer questions from the "people"!! Thanks very much!

HELLO TRACY, THE INTERCONNECT WITH THE SEPARATE GROUND WIRE IS THE CORRECT ONE. ONE END WOULD CONNECT TO THE GROUND TERMINAL NEAR THE POWER CORD ON THE V2W AND THE OTHER END CONNECTS TO THE GROUND TERMINAL ON THE RECIEVER/PROCESSOR. IF THERE IS NO GROUND TERMINAL ON THE RECEIVER/PROCESSOR JUST PUT IT UNDER A SCREW CONNECTED TO THE CHASSIS.

Michael (11/4/14): Hello Richard. I live in Tokyo (100v, 50hz). Would there be any issues or conversions necessary using your speakers with powered subwoofers? Say the Quattro or Five's? Thank you - Michael

HELLO MICHAEL, CONVERSION IS NOT POSSIBLE BUT IF YOU ORDER THEM 100V, 50HZ WE CAN DO THAT.

Jeff (11/6/14): Hello Richard, I am in the process of having a pair of mcintosh mc 30 mono amps restored. What Vandersteen speakers do you recommend for these 30 watt per channel amps? Thanks very much, Jeff

HELLO JEFF, THE MODEL 1CI IS A SURE BET.  OUR OTHER SPEAKERS MAY WORK DEPENDING ON HOW LARGE THE ROOM IS AND HOW LOUD ONE WANTS TO PLAY. IT IS MARGINAL BUT SOME FIND IT ACEPTABLE AND ARE VERY HAPPY. AS ALWAYS CONSULT YOUR DEALER AND POSIBLLY BRING IN THE AMP FOR A DEMO, THIS IS THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE.

Drew (10/31/14): Hi Richard, I took your advice and bought a set of M5-HP high-passes to use with my Treos and two 2WQs. I have the single-ended RCA type with ten DIP switches. I cannot seem to locate anywhere the conversion chart to use the 100Hz boxes with my 80 Hz subs for the ten DIP settings. My amp has an input impedence of 200 ohms. Do you know where I can locate a copy of this chart? Thanks! Drew

HELLO DREW, THIS SHEET IS POSTED IN THE RESOURCES SECTION UNDER MANUALS AND ON THE 2W SERIES SUBWOOFERS PRODUCT PAGE OUR NEW WEBSITE PLEASE CLICK HERE.  FOR 200K SWITCH “1” WOULD BE ON OR ONE LOWER WOULD BE SWITCH “1,2” ON. IF YOUR PARTICULAR M5-HP HAS THE SWITCH MARKED “OPEN” THIS REPRESENTS OFF.

Bob (10/31/14): Hello Richard, I have a pair of 2ce serial numbers 69309ce 69310ce. I was reading an old Sterophile article and they stated that there was two releases of the 2ce. Can you tell me when mine were made, and if they are the first or second release?

HELLO BOB, THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO SHINE A BRIGHT LITE THROUGH THE GRILLE AND SEE IF IT HAS A ¾” TWEETER OR 1”.

Michael (11/3/14): Hi Richard. I would like to use my Vandersteen Fives with the Audio Research vis 75 integrated amp. If Audio Research modifies the unit at the factory - to install the high-pass filter inside the unit (?) does that mean that I no longer need to physical cross over boxes? Thank you, Michael

HELLO MICHAEL, IF THE FACTORY INSTALLS A COUPLING CAP INSIDE THE INTEGRATED AMP GIVING A HIGH-PASS AT 100HZ  3DB DOWN THE M5-HP IS NOT REQUIRED.

Oscar (11/3/14): Hi Richard my name is Oscar. I own the 3A signiture series speakers and wish to purchase Kimber Kable 8TC speaker cables. I wish to jump my speakers. Do you sell or recommend wires or brass block to jump.

HELLO OSCAR, WE DO NOT MAKE A JUMPER OF ANY KIND. ASK YOUR DEALER BECAUSE MOST WIRE MANUFACTURES DO.

Rick (11/3/14): RIchard Can you tell me what wood is the Treo CT pictured in with pic 2? thanks, RIck Kangail

HELLO RICK,  MAPLE.

Ron (10/28/14): Hello Richard: I auditioned the Treo's recently (I was very impressed) and was told that they are designed for placement virtually up against the front wall of the listening room. That seemed odd to me. The manual for the Treo, on the other hand, describes placement options out in the room itself (which is where my old Model 2c's used to be). Which approach is correct? Second, I might consider the Quatro for their better bass response but I use XLR interconnects between the pre-amp and the amp - I believe that the high-pass filter has RCA connectors - no? BTW - my room is 13' wide, 22' deep - listening position is a little more than 1/2 way back. With respect to amplifier power, I have plenty, so I might not actually need a powered sub. Many thanks for your thoughts. Ron

HELLO RON, THE TREO IS DESIGNED TO BE USED ACORDING TO THE MANUAL BUT WORKS BETTER THAN THE 1,2 AND 3 MODELS NEAR THE WALL IF NECESSARY. ALL MANUALS HAVE A SECTION ON HOW TO PLACE THEM IN A ROOM, AND THE BEST OPTION IS ALWAYS THE ONE THAT  SOUNDS BEST TO YOUR EARS.  THE FORMULAS PROVIDE A VARIETY OF OPTIONS BUT LISTENING IS ALWAYS REQUIRED TO DETEMINE THE BEST PLACEMENT. THE HIGH PASS FOR THE QUATRO IS AVAILABLE WITH RCA OR XLR CONNECTORS.

Tom (10-29-14) Hello Richard, I am Tom  from Pittsburgh. I am asking you for your guidance concerning your speakers systems. I am getting back into fine audio gear with vinyl sources. I was wondering about your preferences concerning the 2ce Signature II versus the 1 ci/2w subwoofer combination. I am intending to use Rogue Audio tube gear for amplification. About 30 years ago I sold your equipment for Al Tucker at Better Sound Concepts in Pittsburgh. Al always encouraged us to experiment with various components to examine their performance. I always remembered how well speakers sounded with tube amps and your subwoofer. That subwoofer really freed up the tubes from low end dampening demands and allowed an incredible 3 dimensional soundstage to be realized. I am hoping you can give me guidance on this. Thank you in advance

HI TOM, YOU ARE CORRECT ABOUT THE 2WQ AND HOW IT HELPS ANY SYSTEM. THE PROBLEM IS THAT THE 1CI IS A VERY GOOD SPEAKER BUT LIMITED BY NOT HAVING A TRUE MIDRANGE. THIS IS ESPECIALLYE VIDENT WITH HIGH-RESOLUTION VINYL SOURCES. I WOULD RECOMMEND THE LATEST 2CE SIG II WHICH HAS THE WOVEN MIDRANGE FROM THE MODEL 5A. AT A LATER TIME WHEN BUDGET ALLOWS ADDING A 2WQ THIS IS WILL BE ANOTHER MAJOR UPGRADE. A WORD OF CAUTION, THERE IS NO DESIGNATION CHANGE BETWEEN THE TWO DIFFERENT 2CE SIG II LOUDSPEAKERS. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE IS TO ORDER A NEW PAIR OR SHINE A STRONG LIHGT THOUGHT THE GRILLE FABRIC OF AND LOOK FOR THE WOVEN TEXTURE ON THE MIDRANGE CONE.

(Ralph 10/30/14): I OWN A PAIR OF SIGNATURE 3A SPEAKERS AND A 2WQ SUBWOOFER. I WANT TO ADD ANOTHER SUBWOOFER CAN I USE A 2W WOOFER THAT IS NOT A Q MODEL?

HELLO RALPH, UNFORTUNATELY THE OLD 2W IS NOT COMPATABLE WITH THE 2WQ. THEY HAVE DIFFERENT POWER LEVELS AND PHASE CHARACTERISTICS SO THEY WON’T SUM PROPERLY.

Logan (10/23/14): Hi Richard. I currently own a pair of 2ce Sig II. I plan to upgrade them into 3A sig. Could you please help me awnser 2 questions? 1. My 2ce Sig II's serial numbers are 65480 and 65481. The 3A sig's serial numbers are 12234 and 12235. Could you tell me when those speakers were made (approximately)? 2. Could you tell me the difference between the two pairs mentioned above? (Subwoofer, midrange and tweeter). I know you have made a lot of improvements on them, but in different period of time, they're equipped with different improvements. I want to know this clearly because I need to consider if it's worth upgrading. Profusion of thanks. Logan.

HELLO LOGAN, AS I HAVE STATED MANY TIMES WE CAN NOT GIVE MANUFACTURE DATES AS WE DON’T RECORD THAT INFO. MY GUESS IS THESE ARE ABOUT THE SAME AGE SO THE 3A WOULD OUTPERFORM THE 2CE, ALL THINGS BEING EQUAL. WHAT PARTS ARE USED WOULD NOT BE KNOWN UNTIL SERVICE OPENED THEM UP FOR SERVICE OR A PART CAME IN FOR REBUILD.  IT IS VERY COSTLLY TO KEEP THIS INFO OVER THE 35 YEARS WE HAVE BEEN BUILDING SPEAKERS. BE ASURED THAT ON INSPECTION WE DO HAVE ALL THE PARTS REQUIRED TO REBUILD ANYTHING WE HAVE EVER PRODUCED. WHETHER IT IS WORTH UPGRADING SHOULD ONLY BE DETERMINED BY AN AUDITION, IMO.

Wayne (10/28/14): I am upgrading my system to Dolby Atmos layout. I want to use 4 VSM-1's as my ceiling mounted speakers. Since the brackets for mounting the VSM-1's on the wall hold them beautifully, I was thinking that they could be used to mount on the ceiling. I don t see any problem with them sliding off once the two mating brackets are engaged correctly. Your thoughts on this idea please? Wayne

HELLO WAYNE, DO NOT USE THE WALL BRACKETS FOR CEILING MOUNTING THE VSM-1! THEY ARE NOT MADE FOR THIS PURPOSE! FOR LIABILITY REASONS I CAN’T GIVE YOU A RECOMMENDATION BUT MAKE SURE THEY ARE SECURED ON BOTH ENDS.

Wayne (10/28/14): I understand that the VSM-1's can also be used as main speakers if wanted. What is the dispersion pattern of the VSM-1's? How do they compare to the 2CE's dispersion pattern? Thank You for your time. Wayne

HELLO WAYNE, YES THEY CAN BE USED AS MAIN SPEAKERS AND THE DISPERSION PATTERN IS EXCELLENT FOR THAT USE. THE DISPERSION PATTERN OF THE 2CE BECAUSE IT IS NOT ON THE WALL WILL BE SUPERIOR HOWEVER IF SEATED IN A NORMAL LISTENING POSITION THIS WON’T BE THE DIFFERENCE YOU HEAR. THE 2CE IS A 4- WAY AND THERFORE WILL BE LOWER IN DISTORTION.

(Unknown 10/22/14): You used to have an upgrade program. Does that still exist?

HELLO, SOME OF OUR PRODUCTS ARE UPGRADEABLE, BUT THE 1'S, 2'S AND SUBS ARE NOT. THERE HAVE BEEN TOO MANY SIGNIFICANT CHANGES TO THEM OVER THE YEARS TO MAKE AN UPGRADE COST EFFECTIVE. IF YOU'D LIKE MORE INFORMATION ABOUT A SPCIFIC PRODUCT CONTACT YOUR DEALER OR CALL US AT 559-582-0324.

Wayne (10/22/14): Regarding the mounting of the VSM-1's, does it make a critical sonic difference if the VSM-1's are wall mounted vertically or horizontally? Currently, I have my three sets of VSM-1's mounted horizontally. Thank You for your time in addressing this. WAYNE

HI MICHAEL, NO IT DOESN'T MAKE A DIFFERENCE. THE VSM'S WILL WORK GREAT MOUNTED VERTICALLY OR HORIZONTALLY BECAUSE WE USE A COINCIDENT/COAXIALLY MOUNTED DRIVER TO ENSURE LINEAR RESPONSE AT ANY MOUNTING HEIGHT OR LISTENING ANGLE.

Michael (10/15/14): Hello Richard. I am interested in pairing my (first generation) Vandersteen Five's with a Devialet 120 or 200. Two questions: Is it possible to use this integrated amp and still properly employ the high pass filters? Lastly, is this particular amp a good match, in your opinion, with these speakers? Kind regards, Michael

HELLO MICHAEL, I HAVE NOT HEARD THE INTEGRATED YOU ARE ASKING ABOUT. UNLESS DEVIALET CAN INSTALL A 100HZ (-3 DB) HIGH-PASS 6 DB PER OCTAVE BETWEEN THE PREAMP SECTION AND THE AMPLIFIER SECTION, IT WILL NOT WORK WITH THE MODEL 5, 5A, 5A CARBON, SEVEN OR QUATRO.

Randy (10/10/14): Hello Richard. I just upgraded my system to make the stereo more musical when not watching movies using a Rotel surround processor which formerly doubled as a preamp. I now have a Mcintosh MC303 three channel amp for the L,C,R front channels (3a's and a VCC-5) and Audio Research's References 5CE , and Reference Phono 2SE preamps (with a Basis turntable) for stereo enjoyment. I added two 2Wq subwoofers in concert with my 3a's. I also bough and Equitech 2QR power conditioner to further enhance the sound. My question is what is the draw of each subwoofer and what do I do with them? Should I plug them into the Equitech? Will they gain anything by going through the conditioner? The manual says they should be "unswitched". If my Mcintosh goes into the wall and the Equitech goes into the wall, I am out of wall outlets. (The rear has a separate amp (rear outlet) and two old Vandersten 1's which are more than up for the task in back.) Should the Mcintosh and twin 2Wq's go together through a heavy duty surge protector so I can use one outlet? Will that dilute the power and/or sound quality? The load of the 2QR is 16.7 amperes. If advisable, I'd like to run everything through the Equitech conditioner. Your view?

HELLO RANDY, THE SUBS SHOULD NEVER BE PLUGGED INTO ANYTHING OTHER THAN THE WALL. I DON'T KNOW ABOUT THE MAC. YOU SHOULD CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER FOR A SOLUTION FOR THE FACT YOU DON'T HAVE ENOUGH PLUGS.

Wally (10/16/14): Hello Richard. I have owned a pair of the cloth Quatros for about 5 years now and enjoy them immensely! I use ARC electronics and the sound is wonderful. I have not had any urge to upgrade until news of the Quatro CT came along. No one in Ontario, Canada seems to have a pair on demo. Can you give me some idea of the degree of improvement I might expect with the upgraded carbon tweeter, 5A midrange and wood cabinet? Thanks, Wally.

HELLO WALLY, THERE HAVE BEEN MANY CHANGES RESULTING IN A SUBSTANTIAL IMPROVEMENT IN SOUND QUALITY. THE QUATRO WOOD CT DOES GIVE A TASTE OF THE MODEL SEVEN BECAUSE OF THE CARBON TWEETER WHICH IS MANUFACTURED HERE IN HOUSE. THE MIDRANGE FROM THE ESTEEMED 5A IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE CARBON TWEETER IMPROVES THE TRANSPARENCY, SPEED AND LOWERS THE DISTORTION DRAMATICALLY. ALL OF THIS ALLOWS THE QUATRO CT TO OUT PERFORM THE ORIGINAL 5A (NOT THE 5A CARBON!) IN EVERY WAY EXCEPT THE BASS IN LARGE ROOMS.

Gary (9/26/14): Nice to hear there as some kind of plan to upgrade the model 3, it just will not include an expensive carbon tweeter. Is there any time table on when I could expect to ship my 13 year old 3a sig speakers to Hanford for upgrading to the latest and greatest model 3?

HELLO GARY,  THERE IS NOT AN ACTIVE PLAN TO UPGRADE THE 3A SIGNATURE. FIRST WE WOULD NEED TO DEVELOP A MAJOR UP-GRADE TO THE MODEL 3, THEN WE WILL DO THE UPGRADE.  WE HAVE NO PLANS AT THIS TIME BUT WHEN YOU HEAR OF A NEW DESIGNATION FOR THE MODEL 3A SIG THAT WOULD BE THE TIME.

Bob (10/2/14): Hi Richard, I would like to add a pair of 2WQ subs to my system which consists of a integrated amp and 3A Signatures. The amp does not have pre in or pre outs. I was advised to buy a cheap pre-amp with these connection, and connect it to the integrated amp. I'm wondering what you think of this,will it degrade the sound of my current system, and how would it be connected? Thanks Bob

HELLO BOB, THE 2WQ CAN NOT BE USED WITH AN INTEGRATED WITHOUT AMP IN CONNECTORS. BUYING A CHEAP PREAMP MAY DEFINITELY AFFECT THE SOUND DEPENDING ON ITS SOUND QUALITY. IF THE PREAMP IS HIGHER PERFORMANCE IT WOULD IMPROVE THE SOUND BUT A LESSER QUALITY PREAMP COULD HURT THE SOUND MORE THAN YOU GAIN WITH THE 2WQ'S IN THE SYSTEM. HOW TO HOOK  UP THE 2WQ IS COVERED IN THE 2WQ OWNERS MANUAL.

Ted (10/4/14): Hello Richard, I have one Vandersteen V2W (EU Model) to my HT system, can you inform me about the max Power consumption? There's info at the manual about the idle power consumption only. Thank you a lot for your reply. Ted.

HELLO TED, 500 WATTS MAX.

Dushyant (10/6/14): I am thinking of upgrading from 2CE Sig II (move them to another room) with Treo. My question is about bass and low freq performance. Going by the specs on your web site 2CE has better bass extension down to 29Hz vs 36Hz for Treo. Would this make a difference for mostly music listening? How would you compare and contrast them for bass? I assume that for all other audio freq Treo will perform better. Thanks - Dushyant

HELLO DUSHYANT, YOU ARE CORRECT THE 2CE SIG II DOES GO LOWER IN THE BASS BUT BECAUSE OF THE INERT STRUCTURE OF THE TREO ALL FREQUENCIES WILL BE LOWER IN DISTORTION AND MORE TRANSPARENT. VERY FEW PIECES OF MUSIC GO LOWER THAN 36HZ BUT SOME DOES, ONLY A DEMO WITH YOUR PREFERRED MUSIC WILL ANSWER THAT QUESTION.

Tim (10/7/14): Hi Richard, After many years of saving, I have finally completed my "soundproof" home theater room. My question is concerning the receiver that I am considering buying; i.e., Anthem 710. I have 7 Vandersteen speakers: Model 3 [Signature], 2Ce [Signature], 2 [Non Signature], Center: VCC5. and a Rel [Storm 3 Sub]. Do you have any thoughts / suggestions on my choice of the Anthem 710 receiver to drive the above 8 speakers? Thank you, Tim

HELLO TIM, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE ANTHEM 710 RECEIVER. I ALWAYS RECOMMEND  AUDITIONING THE UNIT BEFORE PURCHASE OR ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A RECOMMENDATION. CONGRATULATIONS ON YOUR HOME THEATER ROOM.

Amauri (10/7/14): Hello, I would like to know if you can tell me when my 2C speakers were built, serial # 27478C & 27479C. Also, do they have the more durable rubber instead of foam on the drivers? I've owned them for about 25 years and they still sound great. Thanks very much, Amauri

HELLO AMAURI, WE DO NOT HAVE RECORDS FOR SPEAKERS THIS OLD. IF THEY ARE SOUNDING GOOD THIS MANY YEARS DOWN THE ROAD THEY ARE PROBABLY RUBBER. IN EITHER CASE, NOT TO WORRY WE HAVE PARTS TO REBUILD EVERYTHING WE HAVE EVER MADE.

Charles (9/30/14): I have a pair of 1Bs which I really love. I've been driving them with an old Sony STR-7045 receiver in my den, and they sound great. Plenty of bass and I'm quite happy. I want to move them to my tube amp in my living room, but found they completely lack bass on that amp. They come off as harsh and bright, which is not how they sound on the Sony receiver. I even swapped the kt88s out for kt120s, and while that improved the bass some, they still do not sound good in either single ended or ultra linear (40wpc) modes. In comparison, my Cerwin Vegas have way, way too much bass with the kt-120s installed. The treble control on the back of the speaker can town down the highs, but it cannot make up for unsatisfying bass. Do you have any recommendations on what I can try next? Thanks! -Charles

HELLO CHARLES, I WOULD TRY TO EXPERIMENT WITH ROOM PLACEMENT. IT COULD BE THE ROOM IS TOO LARGE FOR THE 1B. IT WOULD BE INTERESTING TO TRY THE SONY IN THE NEW ROOM.

Todd (9/30/14): Having owned three variations of 2CE's I'm now considering upgrading to the Treo's. I visited my local dealer recently to audition, the Treo's weren't set-up with optimal placement (very tight quarters) and they sounded as such. They did have a pair of quatro's set-up correctly and they sounded fabulous! My question is whether the Treo's sound is the same as the quatro's (minus the bass), does the external cross-over provide any additional goodness? Should I expect the same fabulous sound from the Treo's? Thanks. Todd

HELLO TODD, THE TREO AND THE QUATRO SHARE THE TOP 3 DRIVERS.  THE DIFFERENCE IS THE QUATRO HAS A POWERED SUBWOOFER WITH BUILT-IN ROOM EQ. IT IS THE POWERED SUBWOOFER THAT REQUIRES THE HI-PASS UNITS BETWEEN THE AMP AND PREAMP. IF YOU ARE SERIOUS I WOULD ASK THE DEALER TO PLACE THE TREO MORE LIKE IT WOULD BE IN YOUR HOME.

Andrew (9/30/14): Congrats on the new website! Happy owner of a pair of VLRs and 2CE Signatures. What would be an upgrade to the VLRs? VSM Signatures? Could the VSM Signature crossovers be installed in the VLRs? An uplevel version of the VLRs with Perfect-Piston drivers would be sweet... andrew

HELLO ANDREW, THANK YOU. NEXT STEP FOR THE VLR WOULD BE ADDING A SUBWOOFER. A VLR WITH PERFECT PISTON DRIVERS WOULD BE $15,000.00 PLUS SUBS, 5A CARBON WOULD BE A BETTER CHOICE.

Cy (9/30/14): Richard: Sorry, but this isn't a question but a comment. I heard the amp/speaker setup (7's) at the NY audio show. Amazing sound, didn't enjoy the listening at any other room after that Thanks for giving us so much enjoyment with your hard work, Cy

HELLO CY,  THANK YOU.

Blair (9/30/14): Are there pictures of the quatro's with all the various veneer options? The tiny picture of mahogany and mahogany walnut is the same, I need to see a better picture in order to make my decision. Thanks, Blair

HELLO BLAIR, MAHOGANY IS NOT A STANDARD FINISH BUT THE MAHOGANY WALNUT IS.  THIS MAY BE SOMETHING THAT GOT CONFUSED IN THE SHUFFLE. THE ONLY PICTURES AVAILABLE ARE ON THE SITE.

Blaine (9/30/14): Richard, it was nice seeing you again at the show in NYC. You and John Rutan had the best exhibit and the best sounding system at the show. Thanks again Blaine Munro

HELLO BLAINE, THANK YOU.

Andrew (9/30/14): Hi Richard, You have mentioned that, when using the 2WQ subwoofers, the X-2 high passes are adequate for moderate systems, but that you recommend the M5-HP high passes for higher performance systems. Would you recommend the M5-HPs for use with Treos and 2WQs?

HELLO JOHN, THE M5-HP WOULD BE REQUIRED AS THIS IS A VERY HIGH RESOLUTION SYSTEM. THIS COMBINATION WOULD BE ON THE LEVEL WITH THE QUATRO WOOD MINUS THE ROOM CORRECTION AND CARBON TWEETER.

Rich (9/30/14): Wiring the 2CI sigs with your subwoofers, waiting to get to Audio Connection for John to demo the subs. I currently amp with Quick Silver monos 88 wired with 12' of 16 ga silver wire , any thoughts on changing wires to the main speakers for optimum operation with the 2 new Vandersteen subs. Is it as simple as attaching the Vandersteen provided subwoofer wiring? Currently very happy with the speaker wires. Thanks Rich M.

HELLO RICH, THE WIRE GOING TO THE SPEAKERS HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH THE 2WQ SUB. IF YOU'RE HAPPY WITH THE SOUND OF THE 2'S, YOU'RE GOOD. WHEN YOU GET THE SUBS FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OWNERS MANUAL AND YOU WILL BE GOOD.

Gary (9/23/14): In early 2001 I brought new the 3a sig speakers. The following 13 years I have watched Vandersteen introduce the quatro, treo, model 7, and updated the model 1, model 2 speakers, and updated the model 5, quatro and treo speakers. So I’m wondering if the 3a sig speakers are ever going to get an upgrade or has it been left to die? I think a worthy upgrade would be be to put in the quatro tweater and midrange drivers and call it the 3q signature, of course the “q” stands for quatro.

HELLO GARY, ABOUT ONE YEAR AGO WE PUT THE MODEL 5A MIDRANGE (SAME AS QUATRO)  IN THE 3A SIG AND THE 2CE SIG II. THERE IS NO UPDATE FOR THEM AS WE NEVER UPDATED THE MODEL 2 AND TO DO THE MODEL 3 SIG WOULD BE TOO EXPENSIVE FOR JUST A MIDRANGE CHANgE AND ALL THE PERTINENT CROSSOVER CHANGES REQUIRED. WHEN WE DO THE NEXT MODEL 3 UPGRADE IT WOULD INCLUDE THE 5A MIDRANGE. AS FOR THE QUATRO CARBON TWEETER I DOUBT THE MARKET WOULD ACCEPT $1500 RETAIL PRICE INCREASE. AT THIS PRICE THE BEST OPTION WOULD BE THE TREO CT, WHICH BECAUSE OF ITS SIGNIFICANTLY LESS RESONANT CABINET IS SUBSTANTIALLY BETTER SOUNDING. THE 3A SIG DOES GO A LITTLE LOWER IN THE BASS, HOWEVER.

Scott (9/24/14): Hello Richard. We met some years ago when you did a demo and discussion at Advanced Audio before Curtis Havens retired, and I have closely followed your product line in the years since. I own a pair of 3A Sig's and two 2Wq's that I bought from Curtis about 12 years ago. I would like to upgrade to the 5A's, but I am now retired and buying a new pair isn't feasible (although a good used pair might be possible). I am therefore thinking about the Quatros. I have 2 questions for you: 1. Do the Quatros offer a noticeable improvement over my current speakers? 2. If I decide that I can't afford an upgrade, are there "mod's" available for my 3A Sig's given they are more than 10 years old. Any comments/ advice from you will be sincerely appreciated. Best regards, Scott

HELLO SCOTT, THE QUATRO CT WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT OVER YOUR 3A SIG/2WQ COMBINATION. THE ENCLOSURE IS DRAMATICALLY MORE INERT, 5A WOVEN MIDRANGE AND THE CARBON TWEETER OF THE 5A CARBON RESULT IN SIGNIFICANTLY IMPROVED TRANSPARENCY AND LOWER DISTORTION AND BEING ABLE TO EQ THE POWERED BASS TO YOUR ROOM IS ALSO A BIG IMPROVEMENT. THERE ARE NO MODS AVAILABLE FOR THE 3A SIG BECAUSE THE COST APPROACHES THE TREO WHICH OUTPERFORMS ANYTHING I COULD EVER DO TO THE 3A SIG.

Paul (9/23/14): Are there any plans to put a Carbon midrange into the Wood Quatro (The Quatro CTM?) I assume that since much of the 7's coherence occurs in the mids, that the Quatro could get even more of the 7's magic. I think my room is too small for the 5A-carbons and its bass would overwhelm it. If so, what would the approximate MSRP? Thanks. Paul

HELLO PAUL, THAT WOULD BE A $25,000.00 QUATRO WOOD! WE HAVE NO PLANS FOR THAT AS THE BASS WOULD NOT BE BIG ENOUGH FOR THE PRICE, I THINK. ANY ROOM THAT CAN HANDLE THE QUATRO WILL ALSO WORK FOR THE 5A CARBON BECAUSE THE BASS IS COMPLETELY ADJUSTABLE AND THE FOOTPRINT NOT MUCH LARGER.

Yuri (9/18/14): Hi, I have a pair of used 2ci #39238 and 39239. Are they upgradeable, please? I have no packaging, but I am planning to get a new pair anyway. Thank you. Yuri.

SORRY BUT NO MODEL 1 OR MODEL 2 SPEAKERS ARE ELIGIBLE FOR UPGRADE. 

Tim (9/19/14): Hello Richard, I have a pair of Vandersteen 2C's, serial number 21670 and 21671, and wondered approximately what year these were made. A friend has offered to sell them to me, and I've heard wonderful things about these speakers. Thank you for your time. Tim

HELLO TIM, THEY ARE ABOUT 25 TO 30 YEARS OLD. VERY DIFFERENT FROM WHAT WE DO NOW BUT IF YOU LISTENED TO THEM AND LIKED THEM IT DOESN'T MATTER.

Karol (9/21/14): Hi Richard ! I have a MODEL 1 and i have a problem with the sharp higher diameter and high tones with larger loud. is there a possibility to improve on this point ? changing the elements in crossover to new or tweeter?? thanks , Karol

HELLO KAROL, IT COULD BE AMP CLIPPING. HAVE YOU TRIED A HIGHER POWERED AMPLIFIER? THERE ARE NO MODS OR UPGRADES AVAILABLE FOR ANY MODEL 1 OR 2.

Joe (9/22/14): Hi Richard should i leave the subs on my 5a carbons on when not in use or should the power be switched off when not in use? Joe

HELLO JOE, THEY ARE CLASS "B" SO THE POWER DRAIN IS VERY LOW (5 WATTS). I WOULD UNPLUG THEM ONLY DURING A BAD STORM OR VACATION.

Rich (9/22/14): Hi Richard, How do the 2Ce's with 2 2Wq compare to the tio's? Is it worth upgrading to the Trio's or go with the 2Wq's? Have had the 2Ce's for 8 months and love them. Quick Silver mono 88s. Rich

HELLO RICH, THE TREO WILL BE NOTICEABLY MORE NEUTRAL AND TRANSPARENT EVEN THOUGH THE DRIVERS ARE SIMILAR BECAUSE THE ENCLOSURE IS DRAMATICALLY MORE INERT OR SILENT. THE BASS WOULD BE NOTICEABLY BETTER WITH THE 2CE SIG II/2WQ COMBINATION. THE TREO/2WQ COMBINATION WOULD BE SIMILAR TO THE QUATRO BUT WITHOUT ROOM CORRECTION. 

(9/16/14) Hello Richard, I just purchase a second hand pair of the 2ce signature and the serial # are 57492 and 57493, can you please tell me what year these were made? And also do the drivers have foam surrounds?? Thanks Joe

HELLO JOE, WE DO NOT RECORD THIS INFO BUT I CAN GUESS THEY WERE MADE 2003 OR SO. THEY DO NOT HAVE FOAM SURROUNDS.

(9/16/14) Dear Richard, I purchased a pair of 5a speakers from a dealer in Portugal after modifying my Devialet to provide the roll off and100db filter, I have had a glorious 2 weeks of music every night! Previous speakers Summit X which I still have. 2 questions, I have noticed a small amount of distortion from my L/H mid only noticible on orchestral strings and sharp piano notes The speakers are 3/4 years old has the Devialet done this or might it be just wear , I obviously need to fix this, so can ,I kill two birds with one stone And go the whole hog to carbons upgrade which would have to be done physically by me as the speakers live in Spain , I guess it would be to cost prohibitive to send them back to the factory and return them to Spain Alternatively can the factory provide me with a set of replacement Mids, the fault is not unlistenable but irritating when it happens. I have at last found a pair of speakers that talk to my musical emotions ,but sadly a blot has now appeared on my horizon Thanks in anticipation for your reply best wishes Chester Wedgewood

HELLO CHESTER,  THE 5A CARBON WOULD BE A HUGE STEP UP BUT IT MUST BE DONE HERE AT THE FACTORY.  IF YOU E-MAIL  international@vandersteen.com  WE CAN SORT OUT WHAT MIDS YOU NEED.

(9/16/14) I was interested to read a 1W subwoofer is not feasible to make. How about a Model 3W using the 12" jackhammer driver from the models 5 & 7? Thanks, Gordon

HELLO GORDON, THERE WILL BE A BIGGER SUB IN A YEAR OR SO IF ALL GOES WELL. A STEREO PAIR OF 2WQ SUBS WILL OUTPERFORM ONE SUB WITH THE 12" JACKHAMMER DRIVER AND BE LESS EXPENCIVE. THATS BEEN OUR PROBLEM BECAUSE THE PAIR OF 2WQ'S WOULD BE LESS MONEY THAN ONE SUB BASED ON THE JACKJAMMER.

(9/11/14) Hi, I have a pair of 1bs which I love. I had been driving them with a Luxman r-113, which outputs 35wpc into 8 ohms, and the sound was great. Unfortunately, the amp broke and is not worth repairing. My question is about a new amp: I've been offered an Onkyo tx8511, which outputs 100wpc into 8ohms, or 140wpc into 4 ohms. Can the 1bs handle this? Is this too much? they sound great, and I would hate to damage them, but while I know the specs for the 1c, I am unsure of the specs for the 1b, even though I have read various things about their specs online. More generally, what is an ideal amplifier for the 1b? Thanks for your help, Justin

HELLO JUSTIN, POWER IS NOT THE MOST IMPORTANT SPECIFICATION FOR MAKING YOUR CHOICE. CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER ON WHAT WOULD SOUND GREAT WITHIN YOUR BUDGET. IT WILL MOST LIKELY BE SOMETHING FROM THE U.S.

(9/16/14) Richard I bought a used pair of Dunlavy IV speakers quite a few years ago after reading a glowing review in audiophile which seemd genuine to me. I run them with a pair of tube amps constructed by my audiophile brother in law. I want to enhance the sound by addition of an affordable pair of subwoofers and some sources suggested that a pair Vandersteen 2Wq subwoofers might provide the enhancement I want. I know nothing technically but I have a sonic idea of what out of phase means etc. Can you objectively recommend the Vandersteen 2Wq subs for the Dunlavy IV speaker set up with tube amplifcation? Regards Jim

HELLO JIM, THE 2WQ SUB WILL WORK GREAT WITH YOUR DUNLAVY SPEAKERS.

(9/16/14) Putting together a home theater system based around the 2Ce Signaure II and VCC-2 - what is your recommnedation for pre-amp amp. Strarted with a pair of 1B's in 1982 Richard

HELLO RICHARD, BEFORE YOU MAKE ANY MOVES SEE YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AS A/V PROCESSORS THAT SOUND BEST VARY. THEY STAY UP ON THIS STUFF MUCH BETTER THAN I.

(9/16/14) Hi Richard. My name is Keith. I own a 2w subwoofer which starting making popping sound and smoking. Not good. After unplugging it and then plugging back in it continues to pop. Help!?!?

HELLO KEITH,  YOUR AMPLIFIER NEEDS TO COME IN FOR REBUILD. YOU CAN DOWNLOAD AN R.M.A. FORM HERE AND SEND IN ONLY THE AMP MODULE. IF YOU WOULD LIKE A QUOTE CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE AS THIS PHONE IS UNATTENDED. SERVICE WILL CALL YOU BACK WITH A QUOTE.

(9/16/14) Dear Sir. I am using 2Ce Sig II (2013) purchased in Poland. They are driven by monoblocks Marantz MA24 in bi-wiring. Result is very good. But now I gort a chance to buy pair of Marantz MA22, and I like to connect them in bi amp. I was reading bi amp theory In operations manual of 2CE, but still thinking to try. It means 4 mono blocks class A (30W) and AB ( 50W ) with horizontal connection. Shall I try or forget? Greetings. Piotr

HELLO PIOTR, I THINK THIS WILL BE UNSUCCESSFUL BUT YOU CAN TRY. BE CAREFUL OF OSCILLATIONS THAT COULD DAMAGE YOUR TWEETERS.

(9/16/14) Is it possible to get a wood veneer on the Model 7 enclosure instead of paint? Robert Harley's original CES coverage mentioned the possibility of an extra cost option. I am a happy owner of 5A Carbons looking at upgrading and my wife really wants to stay with the wood look. Me too actually... Regards, Jack

HELLO JACK, THE MODEL SEVEN ENCLOSURE IS MADE OUT OF CARBON FIBER WHICH IS NOT COMPATABLE WITH WOOD (EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION).  WE HAVE SEVERAL WHO HAVE REQUESTED THIS AND CHOSE THE MACADAMIA BROWN COLOR AND FOUND IT TO LOOK GREAT WITH THE WOODS IN THE HOME.

(9/16/14) Hello Richard, I have a pair of Quatro Wood CTs- fantastic speakers. I recently bought a new DAC, which causes a low level buzz in the speakers. There's a ground loop somewhere, I'm told. I'm trying to figure out a solution, but in case I can't, is there any chance the 24/7 buzz could harm the speakers over the long term? It's barely audible across the room, but slowly getting louder. And if you know a simple fix, I'd love to hear it. A 3 to 2 prong power cord adaptor on the DAC reduces the buzz but doesn't eliminate it. Thanks. John

HELLO JOHN, IT WILL NOT DAMAGE YOUR SPEAKERS BUT WOULD GROW OLD OVER TIME. HAVE YOU ASKED THE DEALER YOU BOUGHT THE DAC FROM WHY THIS IS HAPPENING?  DO NOT USE A 3 TO 2 PRONG ADAPTOR ON YOUR QUATRO'S. YOU COULD TRY RUNNING A WIRE FROM THE GROUND POST ON THE QUATRO AMP TO A CHASSIS SCREW ON YOUR DAC. THESE PROBLEMS ARE DIFFICULT TO SOLVE BY E-MAIL AND TAKE TOO MUCH TIME.  CALL ME 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND I WILL DO A BACK AND FORTH IN REAL TIME AND HELP YOU SORT IT OUT.

(9/16/14) Hello Richard: I have a pair of 2CE Signature I purchased about 10 years ago. They have had pretty regular use in the evenings. Has there been any upgrades to the drivers over the last 10 years. If so, is there a mechanism by which I get the upgraded drivers and what is cost or is it most cost effective to get 3A's? Best Regards, Mike

(I have exclusively used Vandersteen speakers for the last 20 years.)

HELLO MIKE, OVER THE 10 YEARS YOU HAVE BEEN ENJOYING YOUR SPEAKERS WE HAVE IMPROVED THEM 3 TIMES. IT WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE TO UPGRADE THEM TO THE NEWEST VERSION. YOU COULD TAKE THEM BACK TO YOUR DEALER AND COMPARE THEM TO THE LATEST 2CE SIG II AND TRADE THEM IN IF YOU LIKE WHAT YOU HEAR.

(9/16/14) Can I change the midrange driver of my old 2CE Sig II to the newer/ latest version 2CE Sig II midrange driver? Mike

HELLO MIKE, THE 5A MIDRANGE NOW USED IN THE 2CE SIGNATURE II WILL NOT BE COMPATABLE WITH THE CROSSOVER IN YOUR SPEAKERS, SO THAT WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE AS THERE ARE MANY CHANGES.

(9/14/14) Hi Richard, I have a pair of Model 1's serial numbers 11042 and 11043. Are these really just a model 1 or are they something else? Thanks Jay

HELLO JAY, THEY ARE 1B'S APPROXIMATELY 29 YEARS OLD. THESE MAY HAVE FOAM SURROUNDS BUT THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW WOULD BE TO SHINE A LIGHT THROUGH THE GRILLE.

(9/17/14) Hi guys, I presently own a pair of 2CE Sig II and I really enjoy them. Nevertheless, I was captured by a pair of Quatro Sig sold by a fellow here in Italy at a very fair price. He told me the sn are 1772 and 1773. I was wondering if you are keeping trace of manufacturing date of each pair or if you can guess the manufacturing year. Could you please explain me, in short, the main differences between that model and the more recent Quatro Wood and Wood CT? Are there any differences in the integrated amplifier? Thanks in advance. Mirko - Italy

HELLO MIRKO, WE DO NOT TRACK THIS INFO BUT BY THE NUMBERS APPROXIMATELY 2005 OR 2006. THERE ARE MANY CHANGES INCLUDING THE NEW CARBON TWEETER, MIDRANGE AND CROSSOVER. THE SUB-WOOFER AMPLIFIER STAYED THE SAME.

(9/16/14) Your new site lacks information that was present before. I could not find anything about the V2W now. My question regards 2Wq subwoofer. How signal from the amplifier's output whose signal lacks the information cut off by the inserted crossover can serve to reproduce this erased information???

Hello Joseph- I'm Shane Buettner, one of my roles at Vandersteen Audio is leading the redesign of the website and acting as the webmaster. Currently the information on the subwoofers is the same as before, a combined explanation of both the 2Wq and V2W. Where before there were duplicate prduct pages with essentially the same information, the new site simply lists one product page with that information. Regarding your question on the subwoofer's design, please read our FAQ HERE.

Heather (8/17/12):I'm a little confused. I have? full 5.1 surround system (Integra DTC 9.8 preamp and standalone amps) and have a pair of Vandersteen 2CE speakers as front mains, a VCC-1 center, and a pair of Vandy 2CI speakers as side surrounds. I have been using a power amp and an old JBL sub for the .1 LFE channel currently, but I have a VANDERSTEEN 2W + WX-2 Subwoofer with Outboard Crossover on the way via FedEx. Now - that all hooks up to the front mains (before and after the power amp) but what do I do with the LFE channel? Do I turn that off in my preamp? I'm a little confused so far - and the manual doesn't seem to address those of us with Home theater systems. Thank you for your help.

Answer: HELLO HEATHER, ITS COMPLICATED.? CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND I WILL CLARIFY.

Frederic (8/31/14): Question: I have a pair of Vandersteen model 2C that I believe I purchased in 1987.

After 27 years do they need to be replaced?

They still sound good but they and my ear may have diminished. Thank you for your thoughts.

HELLO FRED,  AS LONG AS THEY ARE PLAYING AND ALL THE DRIVERS ARE PRODUCING SOUND WITHOUT ANY BUZZING THEY WILL PLAY MUSIC FOR MANY MORE YEARS. THE MODEL 2C HAS BEEN MODIFIED MANY TIMES WITH MODERN COMPONENTS AND SOUND SIGNIFICANTLLY BETTER, THEY ARE NOW CALLED MODEL 2CE SIGNATURE II. THE ONLY REASON TO UPGRADE TO A NEW PAIR WOULD BE THE DESIRE FOR IMPROVED MUSICAL ENJOYMENT.

Richard (3/01/14): I own a 2wq and had a power failure. The sub no longer works. no thump when I plug it in. Is there is fuse I can replace on this unit?

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, NO THERE IS NO FUSE OR BREAKER THAT THE USER SHOULD MESS WITH. IT WILL NEED SERVICE. FILL IN A R.M.A. FORM AND SEND IT IN WITH THE AMPLIFIER MODULE.

Jamie (3/01/14): I love my Vandersteen 1c speakers. Will it ever be possible to purchase the components to make them 1ci's?

Answer: HELLO JAMIE, NO, THE MODS WOULD BE TOO EXPENSIVE AS MANY PARTS AND STRUCTURE ARE DIFFERENT.

Ron (3/01/14): I have a pair of 2c speakers Ser# 23972C and #23973C.? Can you tell me if the woofers have a foam or butyl surround?

Answer: HELLO RON, NO WAY TO TELL EXCEPT TO SHINE A LIGHT THROUGH AND LOOK AT THE WOOFER CONE. IF THE CONE IS BLACK IT IS NOT FOAM. IF THE CONE IS MILKY WHITE IT IS FOAM.

Neil (3/03/14): Good morning! For interconnect matching purposes, I would like to know the input impedance of the MH-5 crossovers that go between the preamp and amps, and I don't see that information in the manual or in the FAQ. I am using a pair of VTL MB-125 mono tube amps for my Quatros, which have an input impedance of approx. 130k ohms, but I am thinking that the preamp (also tube) might be seeing a different (lower?) impedance once the crossover modules are installed.

Answer: HELLO NEIL, THE INPUT IMPEDANCE OF THE M5-HP IS WHAT EVER THE AMPLIFIERS INPUT IMPEDANCE IS IF THE SWITCHES ARE SET PROPERLY.

David (3/08/14): Is it possible to connect my Vandersteen 2W (2001) [not 2Wq] subwoofer directly to the XLR Sub1 output of an Anthem Statement D2V AV Processor, rather than running the wires off the front speakers? Thanks

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THERE IS NO WAY TO USE THE 2W OR 2WQ WITH THE SUB OUT OF ANY PROCESSOR. WHAT YOU NEED IS CALLED A V2W

Michael (3/09/14): Hello - I still use a wonderful old pair of Vandersteen 3's, not 3a or signature. Is there anything I should do to keep them fresh and updated?? can i just keep running as is or is there some maintenance / care i should be doing.? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, JUST KEEP RUNNING THEM AS THERE IS NO RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.

Paul (3/10/14): Hi - in what finishes is the Treo available? Best regards.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, THE TREO IS AVAILABLE IN ALL STANDARD WOODS. OAK, WAL, CHERRY, MAPLE AND BLACK PAINTED ASH. See the Treo product page for current finish selection. 

Mike (3/11/14): I am considering purchasing a used pair of vandersteen 2c's. Are there any hidden landmines I should be aware of -- such as foam surrounds? Are there any cost effective upgrades?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, NO LANDMINES AND NO UPDATES, JUST ENJOY THEM.

Nicoletti (3/14/14): Good evening, I bought (used) a pair of Vandersteen model 2 serial number 32207ci it would be possible to know at what time and date have also email the instructions in Italian?

Answer: HELLO NICOLETTI, WE DO NOT KEEP RECORDS OF MANUFACTURE DATES BUT THE 2CI WAS BUILT IN MID 1980. WE DO NOT HAVE THE INSTRUCTIONS IN ANY LANGUAGE BUT ENGLISH.

Alex (3/11/14): My name is Alex from Italy. I purchased a pair of 2CI but I have a doubt about the tweeter. They have a metal dome, are Vifa. The sn speaker is 49185Ci. The tweeters are original? Thank you and congratulations, I love these speakers!

Answer: HELLO ALEX, YES IT IS A CUSTOM VIFA.THEY ARE THE ORIGINAL.

Hieng (3/13/14):just bought a used Model 2W subwoofer without a crossover. Do I need a crossover or is that an internal crossover that cuts off the frequencies above a certain level and takes in the LF? And how should I run my speaker wires with the 2W and my L and R speakers?

Answer: HELLO HIENG, THE 2W ABSOLUTLY NEED THE HIGH-PASS SET PROPERLY TO THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE. YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE 2WQ OWNERS MANUAL BECAUSE THE WIRE HOOK UP IS THE SAME.

Richard (3/11/14): I am interested in the 5A Carbons.? Can they be driven effectively with an Audio Research REF 75, or is a more powerful amp, the REF 150, necessary in order to maximize the speaker's potential?

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, THE REF 75 MAY BE ENOUGH POWER. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO BRING SOME OF YOUR MUSIC TO THE DEALER AND HOOKUP THE REF 75 TO THE DEMO 5A CARBONS. HAVE THE DEALER PLAY THE MUSIC AS LOUD AS YOU WOULD EVER WANT TO PLAY AND LOOK AT THE METERS. IF THE METER STAYS BELOW FULL POWER, YOU'RE GOOD.

Ben (3/25/14): Dear Mr. Vandersteen, Thank you for calling me today. I bought my #5 speakers from Audio Center, Deerfield Beach, Fl., in June 1999. I am unfamiliar with speaker technology and I imagine that Deerfield Beach (my dealer) is the closest option I have for changing the battery packs. Please confirm and I will have the change made.Thanks for your help. I love the sound of these speakers.

Answer: HELLO BEN, YOUR OWNERS MANUAL HAS INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE CROSS-OVER. SEND US THE TWO M5-HP'S AND THE TWO CROSS-OVER'S WITH A R.M.A. FORM FILLED OUT. WE WILL GET THEM OUT IN A FEW DAYS. YOU WILL HEAR A BIG IMPROVEMENT IN SOUND BECAUSE THE BATTERIES SHOULD BE CHANGED EVERY SEVEN YEARS. YOURS HAVE BEEN DEAD FOR SEVEN YEARS NOW.

Paul (3/26/14): After reading the information on biwiring, do you believe vertical biamping (using one stereo amplifier per channel, with one amp channel going to mid/tweeter, and the other to woofer), makes sense as a configuration to drive your Quatro or 5a speakers, and, if it does, would that require an additional high pass filter per side, or does the tweeter/mid channel just run unfiltered? Thank you for your feedback.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, I DO NOT BELIEVE IT WOULD IMPROVE THE SOUND. I NORMALLY RECOMMEND GETTING A BETTER SOUNDING AMPLIFIER BUT THE ARC REF 150 IS A VERY GOOD WAY TO RUN ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS INCLUDING THE SEVENS. VERTICALLY BI-AMPING DOES NOT OFFER ANY MORE POWER AS IT IS STILL 150 WATTS PER DRIVER ANYWAY. YOU WON'T NEED ANY MORE POWER ANYWAY. WITH EQUIPMENT LIKE THE ARC 150 YOU SHOULD CONSIDER THE QUATRO CT AS IT IS BETTER THAN THE 5A EXCEPT IN THE BASS.

Kelly (2/06/14): My name is I was recently given (All New and still in original boxes never used) Deluxe Power Drive DNA-0.5, DAC-1, TLC-1 and a pair of signature 2Ce speakers. I have a 5 disc cd player also. I have no clue how to properly hook up this equipment. Is there any wiring guide I can use and what about cabling? Any help would be greatly appreciated. Thanks

Answer: HELLO KELLY, YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE OWNERS MANUAL FOR THE 2CE SIG II BECAUSE THE HOOK-UP INSTRUCTIONS ARE THE SAME.

Mark (2/10/14): Do you have a mounting template available for the VCC2 center channel speaker? I am trying to plan the location within an elevation for one of our clients who has a whole batch of Vandersteen speakers that he is implementing in his new home. Any documentation that you could provide would be appreciated.

Answer: HELLO MARK, WE HAVE NOT COMPLETED THE MANUAL FOR THE VCC-2. THE TEMPLATE IN THE VSM-1 MANUAL IS VERY CLOSE BUT YOU WILL WANT TO VERIFY IT BEFORE DRILLING HOLES. IF YOU HAVE THE VCC-2 HOLD THE VSM-1 TEMPLATE AND COMPARE. 

Craig (2/10/14): I have a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce Sigs and VCC-1 center in black oak finish. I want to do some touch up on them. Is there a certain stain and polyurethane that I should use.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, YOU CAN USE KRYLON SPRAY PAINT.

Tue (2/11/14): My model 2c woofer is making popping sound on bass when playing sound track.( Serial# C25438C, using power Amp Acurus A250). What would be the problem of the driver? I have followed trouble shooting instructions from Vandersteen Service dept., and had ruled out crossover problem. Also pin pointed 10" rear woofer was the one making that sound. What was the cost of a new pair of drivers? Is the model 2Ce have the same driver? 'My model 2C speaker has problem with 10" acoustic coupler. Both of Acoustic coupler make popping sound when play track with heavy bass. The serial # is C25438C and C25439C. What would be the problem coupler and how much would cost to fix them? Is this model has thermal cutout that may had been trips?

Answer: HELLO TUE, WE REBUILD THE DRIVERS, SO REMOVE THE DRIVERS NEEDING REPAIR AND SEND IT IN WITH THE R.M.A. FORM COMPLETED.? THIS SPEAKER IS OVER 30 YEARS OLD AND USES DIFFERENT DRIVERS THAN THE 2CE. IT COULD BE THE COUPLER IS DAMAGED. GO INTO THE SPEAKER BOTTOM AND INVESTIGATE . FOR SERVICE AND PRICES CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE WITH YOUR QUESTION AS THIS PHONE IS MESSAGE ONLY. THE 2C HAS THERMAL PROTECTION ON THE 8 INCH WOOFER ONLY.

Doug (2/19/14): I am planning to buy some Parasound amps to go with my 3A/VCC-1/VSM-1 setup. I asked Richard Schram about using a Halo A23 in bridged mono mode with the VCC-1 (SN 4381). In his response, he asked me to contact you about several issues. "The impedance curve of the VCC-1 The phase angle of the VCC-1.  If the room isn't too large, your SPL expectations aren't really high, you don't stuff the A 23 into a cabinet with no space around it, the frequency range where the impedance dips below 8 ohms is in a "safe" place and the phase angel isn't to brutal then it should be ok. Would you mind checking items 4 and 5 with Richard V?"

Answer: HELLO DOUG, THE PHASE ANGLE IS LESS THAN 45 DEGREES BUT THE VCC-1 DIPS DOWN TO 4 OHMS AT 200 HZ. I CAN'T COMMENT ON THE AMP AS I HAVE NOT HEARD IT. 

David (2/27/14): If I have a pair of Vanderteen 2CE can they be upgraded to 2CE Signature 2 level. What would be the price for this service. If not what type of upgrades can I do to these type speakers.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, WE DO NOT OFFER UPGRADES FOR ANY MODEL ONE OR TWO. IT IS NOT COST EFFECTIVE AS 70 PERCENT OF THE MAJOR COMPONENTS HAVE CHANGED. THE BEST WAY TO IMPROVE THE SOUND OF YOUR 2CE IS TO FEED THEM A BETTER SIGNAL WITH CAREFULLY SELECTED COMPONENTS. CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND GET IDEAS ON WHAT TO GET THAT IS WITHIN YOUR BUDGET.

Anthony (1/27/06): Richard, I have a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce Sigs. How can I tell if they are originals or upgraded?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, THERE IS NO WAY TO KNOW EXCEPT TO ASK THE ORIGINAL OWNER. I HAVE BEEN STRIVING FOR ALMOST 30 YEARS TO KEEP VANDERSTEEN PRODUCTS THE BEST VALUE IN THE INDUSTRY. SOME THINK I HAVE SUCCEEDED. THE COST OF DOCUMENTING THIS KIND OF INFORMATION REQUIRED TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTION WOULD HAVE HAD A LARGE IMPACT ON THAT OVER THE YEARS. SO WE DON'T. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT SERVICE WILL BE NEEDED ONCE OUR TECHNICIAN OPENS THEM UP EVERYTHING WE NEED TO KNOW IS THERE TO SEE. NO COST TO THE CONSUMER.

Jeff (1/04/14): 'New house for a 3a signature surround setup. I have a pair of the 3a sig's 2-2wqs a v2w and a pair of the vsm1 sig's and a vcc5. I have the opportunity with my new house to try to improve the layout of the system. I'm using a 55" flat screen for video and do not have a good place to put the vcc5. I'm using some billy bags stands and right now have the vcc5 on top of a 5 ft stand about ten inches to the left of the screen. I have a sub to the immediate right of the stand the monitor is on with the 3a next to it. If been moving the v2w around currently it is just to the left and right below (3ft) the monitor. Then I have the equipment stand with the vcc5 on top then the left 3a the the other sub. So from left to right its sub, 3a , rack with vcc5, v2w, stand with monitor, sub and 3a. Would it be worth the expense to build a shelf above the monitor for the vcc5 then bring the 3a with its sub inside the space next to the monitor with the equipment rack sitting to the far left. Or is keeping the 3a's further apart with the vcc5 sitting a bit of to the left. Lastly I could move the v2w to the far left a tuck everything ing about 8 inches but right now I'm taking advantage of the monitors overhang which covers almost half of the v2m.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, THE ONLY WAY TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS ACCURATELY IS TO MOCK IT UP AND LISTEN. YOU COULD USE A LADDER TO HOLD THE VCC-5. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO PREDICT HOW THIS WOULD SOUND.

Pete (1/14/14): I have a QW2 from the 80's that has has had the reset button used several times over the years. I had unplugged the unit due to local power failures and when I plugged it back in I heard the start up pop then nothing. I opened the back to press the reset button but it had popped. Does this sound like an amp problem or a reset button? What is my next step?

Answer: HELLO PETE, CALL SERVICE OR SEND THE AMP IN WITH THE R.M.A. FORM.

Ed (1/15/14): Thank you Richard, I looked for a dealer in my city (San Jose, CA) and there is not one. Can I order a V2W directly from you or is there some retail channel you recommend?

Answer: HELLO ED, WE HAVE A DEALER IN SAN FRANCISCO, WHICH IS CLOSER TO YOU THAN THE FACTORY.

Sunder (1/15/14): I am the original owner of a pair of Model 5's that have been upgraded twice by your company (currently to 5A Carbon). My Aesthetix Atlas Amp has an input impedance of 470; what is the correct dip switch combination on the MH5 crossover? I have 4 and 5 on. Also would you recommend I purchase the crossover for the Model 7? - you posted a comment to a question recently that it is more dynamic and transparent. Many thanks.

Answer: HELLO SUNDER, I DON'T HAVE THAT INFO HERE AT HOME. CALL ME 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND I WILL GIVE IT TO YOU. THE M7-HPB IS MORE DYNAMIC AND TRANSPARENT WITH THE MODEL SEVEN. THE MODEL 5A CARBON IS NOT THE SAME RESOLUTION AS THE SEVEN AND WILL OFFER A SMALL CHANGE FOR THE MONEY

Ernel (1/16/14): Can the 3a signature be run by a 45wpc tube amp (e.g., a55t cayin).

Answer: HELLO ERNEL, NOT ENOUGH POWER.

Tom (1/17/14): I have a question, I bought a pair of used 5 A carbons serial # 5910A and 5911A. I was wondering if you could tell me when these speakers were made so I know when to replace the battery's on the crossover. I was also wondering if I could purchase some extra washers that go on the cones to level the speakers.

Answer: HELLO TOM, WE DO NOT RECORD ANY INFO ON UPGRADES BECAUSE OF COST. I WOULD ASK THE PREVIOUS OWNER OR MEASURE THEM IN ABOUT 4 YEARS. ALL PARTS CAN BE ORDERED FROM US AT 559-582-0324.

Richard (1/18/14): I would like to know if the grill socks are available for the 2ce Signatures? If so, how much and how do I order them? Regards.

Answer: HELLO RICHARD,PLEASE CALL VANDERSTEEN AUDIO 559-582-0324. WE DO NOT DO SERVICE OR PARTS ORDERS ON THIS FORUM.

Chris (1/19/14): Mr. Vandersteen. I hope be in a position to order a pair of treos in the next month or two. I live in Jacksonville FL and try to support my local hi-fi outlet (House of Stereo) and have purchased my current speakers, line stage, phono stage, and turntable from them. According to the Vandersteen dealer web page, my closest Vandersteen dealer is 400 miles away in Atlanta. I have operated a small business in town and I would prefer to keep my business local; I KNOW it's a tough market! Would you prefer that I ask my local dealer to establish a relationship with Vandersteen or would you prefer that I utilize the existing dealer network? I understand the value of a good dealer, and although I've only been there once, I did have a good experience at Audio Alternative. But if I bought from them I would call and order the speakers and arrange to pick them up during a swing through the ATL. Just wanted to pick your brain on this issue.

Answer: HELLO CHRIS, WE ONLY SELL THROUGH OUR DEALER NETWORK. SHOULD YOUR LOCAL DEALER BECOME A VANDERSTEEN DEALER BEFORE YOU ARE READY TO PURCHASE, THAT WOULD BE A DIFFERENT STORY. 

Greg (12/06/13):I have a rather old Onkyo M5140 amp with 105WPC @ 8Ohms. Have been looking at the 2CI's and coupling with your subwoofers. I'm no audio expert but was wondering how to handle the impedance issue. I not too bright at this but was thinking I could hook up the 2C to speaker "A" and the Sub's to speaker "B". Am I way off base? Thx for your advice.

Answer: HELLO GREG, THIS IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM AS I DON'T KNOW THE EQUIPMENT YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT. YOU NEED TO GET THE HELP OF A VANDERSTEEN DEALER BECAUSE IT GOES BEYOND THE "A" AND "B" ISSUE ON THE AMP.

Peter (12/07/13):Hi Richard, thanks for having this forum to ask questions. I have fallen in love with your upper line speakers. John at Audio Connections is as good as any dealer I've ever dealt with. He has me saving up for the Treo's. It will still be a while or me to get to this point as I have to sell off all my older systems. I know that the Treo on up share the same drivers. I know the Treo's were just released within the last two years, but was wondering when the Treo CT's would be out since you are now using the carbon tweeter's on the Quattro's on up. Thanks so much.

Answer: HELLO PETER, BY THE TIME YOU ARE READY THIS MAY BE A $1500 OPTION ON THE TREO. I DON'T WANT TO LEAVE THE $6500.00 PRICE POINT OF THE TREO BUT AM CONSIDERING IT AS AN OPTION. LET YOUR DEALER KNOW YOU WOULD BE INTERESTED.

NOTE: Treo CT is now available

Nelson (12/08/13):Dear Mr Vandersteen, I have a full Vandersteen HT that consist of 2CE Sig MK2, VCC 5 ,VSM and a 2WV. My VCC 5 has a black top bottom finish and all the other speaker are oak finish. I will like to change the oak tops and bottom to black. How difficult will it be to change the oak tops and bottom to black? Is it something I can do by ordering the parts?

Answer: HELLO NELSON, THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE IN THE FIELD BUT CAN BE DONE AT THE FACTORY. THIS WOULD COST OVER $1000.00 PLUS FREIGHT!

Jesse (12/09/13):Hi. I am about to order a new pair of 1Cs from Optimal Enchantment. Very excited. But I am also shopping around for a used pair of 2ci's or 2ce's for my office where I have a Rotel integrated amp with only 35W per channel. Would this be enough to drive the 2Ce/i speakers? Anything I should be particularly wary of when buying used Vandersteen's? I found a pair of 2Ci's locally that the seller says are less than 10 years old. Can that be true, a pair of 2Ci's less than years old? Thanks for your help.

Answer: HELLO JESSE, THAT IS NOT ENOUGH POWER FOR ANY MODEL TWO BUT WOULD WORK WITH THE 1CI.YOUR INSTINCT IS GOOD IT IS NOT POSSIBLE FOR A 2CI TO BE ONLY 10 YEARS OLD. THEY RANGE BETWEEN 15 AND 20.

David (12/09/13):Hi! I have a pair of Model one's (serial numbers 11170 and 71. The 70 model rolls off completely at about 300Hz. The other speaker is fine. What is the course of action here?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, INTERESTING YOU FOUND THIS FAQ SECTION BUT NOT THE SERVICE PAGE. CALL 559-582-0324 AND PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE AND LEAVE A MESSAGE AS THIS PHONE IS UNATTENDED WITH YOUR MODEL NUMBER AND WHAT THE TROUBLE IS. SERVICE WILL RESEARCH YOUR QUESTION AND RETURN YOUR CALL WITH ANSWERS.

William (12/09/13):I just purchased a pair of 2Wqs for my Maggie 1.6s and first impression is we love them. I have an old but solid Mark Levinson ML-9 (100 wpc into 8 ohms) with 50 Kilo-ohm input impedance. I wonder if someone could give me a quick intro to the relationship between input impedance and crossover frequency so that I have a mental (well, visual) picture of what the temporary, adjustable x-over is doing when I change input impedance. For example, I started off with the x-over set to 50k-ohms when listening, but reading the manual more carefully realized it should be set to 33 K-ohms, one setting below the ML-9's actual input impedance. After re-setting the x-over, my hearing suggests that the crossover point moved to a slightly lower frequency, as my perception of the Maggie output was that it was just the slightest bit warmer, as though it had more low end vs the original 50 K-ohm setting. Of course, aging audiophile that I am, I could be making all this up. PS - I appreciate all the outreach you do re: hearing problems. I personally have tinnitus in the form of a 10KHz whine (I have been tested in Atlanta at Emory by one of the world's leading experts) that requires me to listen through the noise at all times.

Answer:? HELLO WILLIAM, IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOT KNOW. WE WANT TO GO BY WHAT WE HEAR NOT BY WHAT WE THINK. FOLLOW THE OPTIMUM POSITION SECTION OF THE MANUAL AND USE THE VALUE THAT SOUNDS BEST.

Michael (12/11/13): I have just purchased a used VCC-2 to go with my 2Ce Sigs & 2Wq. Was the manual for the VCC-2 made available I understand that finding a mount & hanging it might be all that's needed, but given the incredibly detailed nature of the manual for my Sigs, I thought I should check.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THE MANUAL HAS NOT BEEN COMPLETED. IT IS DESIGNED TO BE MOUNTED ON THE WALL UNDER THE SCREEN. 

Bill (12/11/13):What?s the difference between a Model 1 and a Model 1C? I assume the 1C is newer and therefore more advanced? Thanks for your time

Answer: MARTIN, YOU GOT IT.

Mike (12/13/13):Hello Richard 1994 circa 2CE and 1991 model 3 serial (1418) and 2WQ serial xxx owner here has a ponders: when is the Model 3 getting the Carbon Tweeter after reading "the Quattro Wood CT gets the carbon tweeter from the 5A carbon, crossover changes to accommodate the new tweeter, and slightly different tuning.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THE CARBON TWEETER WOULD RAISE THE PRICE $1500 PER PAIR AND IS NOT LIKELY TO HAPPEN FOR A LONG TIME. AT THAT PRICE THE TREO WOULD BE A BETTER INVESTMENT EVEN WITH THE CERAMIC ALLOY TWEETER. I AM NOT ABLE TO MAKE THAT MANY ANYWAY.

Bill (12/14/13): What would be the production date of VSM speaker? Serial number: 14521?

Answer: HELLO PING, WE DO NOT RECORD PRODUCTION DATES BUT THE PRODUCT HAS NOT CHANGED DURING PRODUCTION.

Jeff (12/20/13):I am trying to repair a damaged 2Wq subwoofer. I need a schematic in order to know what the values are on the parts that are charred beyond identification, in order to replace them. I am the original owner. Is it possible to get this information?

Answer: HELLO JEFF, WE BUY THE AMPLIFIERS FROM A VENDOR AND DO NOT HAVE THAT INFO. WE SERVICE THE AMP MODULE FOR $225.00 INCLUDING FREIGHT. IF YOU NEED THAT SERVICE, SEND IT IN WITH THE R.M.A. FORM ON THIS SITE AND WE WILL MAKE IT AS GOOD AS NEW. DO NOT SEND IN THE P.C. BOARD WE NEED THE ENTIRE ASSEMBLY.

Jeff (1/04/14): I don't see anything in the manual about replacing the batteries in the high pass filters. It looks like they are soldered into place rather than snapped in. Is there anything I need to know before I go ahead and change them myself? I'd rather not have to send them to the dealer if I don't have to. Thanks

Answer: HELLO, THEY MUST BE SOLDERED IN. IF YOU CAN DO IT YOURSELF IT IS UP TO YOU. WE CHARGE $96.00 FOR THE PAIR, SHIPPING INCLUDED.

Stuart (11/08/13):Hi, Richard. We spoke a year ago about a buzz/hum problem on my 2wq sub. Wire from sub ground to (amp I think it was) didn't help. I since bought a second 2wq. They both do the hum/buzz constantly. Not volume dependent, and the sound is present even when all other components are disconnected from the subs, and even when all other components are unplugged and the only components plugged in and connected are the subs. I even took one sub upstairs and plugged it in to the wall and it buzzes up there too, all by itself. I am not 100% certain if the buzzing comes from the drivers or the amp, but I think from the drivers. Is something wrong with my AC, perhaps? If not that, any ideas? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO STUART, THE 2WQ SHOULD NOT HUM WHEN NOTHING IS CONNECTED. IT COULD BE MECHANICAL TRANSFORMER HUM WHICH IS NORMAL. YOU MAY HAVE A VERY QUIET ROOM AND THEN NOTICE THE HUM. I WOULD TAKE ONE OF THE UNITS TO A VANDERSTEEN DEALER SO HE CAN FIND THE PROBLEM. YOU AN CALL ME ANYTIME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3. PLEASE LEAVE ME A MESSAGE IF I AM OUT OF THE OFFICE AND DON'T PICK UP.

Ping (11/12/13): I am thinking to by Model 2Ce Signature II and the matching surround (VSM-1) and center speakers (VCC-1). Can I get any more info such as testing graph of those speakers please? I know your speakers have ver good (small) phase delay, but i could not find phase delay of any amplifier, are the amplifiers all have very small phase delay so they don't measure? The frequency response of VCC & VSM, are they down enough please? Can I put VSM on floor?

Answer: HELLO PING, ALL MEASUREMENTS WE HAVE ARE ON OUR WEB SITE. THE VSM WALL SPEAKERS ARE DESIGNED TO HANG ON A WALL OR A STAND THAT HOLDS THEM AGAINST THE WALL.

Steve (11/14/13): Hello. I run 2Ce Signature II's, with a pair of 2W subs. I was wondering if you could estimate the change in the senstivity of my 2Ce's resulting from insertion of the subwoofer crossover? If it helps, my amp has an input impedance of 47K, but I'm currently using the next lower setting on the adjustable crossover (as I experiment prior to ordering the fixed crossover). Thank you very much. Take care.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE SENSITIVITY DOES NOT CHANGE WHEN USING THE HIGH-PASS.

Sam (11/14/13): To whom it may concern, I own some Vandersteen Model 2 home audio speakers and the power amp I have been using seems to be miss-behaving. I was thinking of replacing it or repairing it.I am not sure what I would use to replace it with. The power amp I have been using is a BK ST-202. What would be a good choice for another power amp?

Answer: HELLO SAM, I WOULD GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN AND LISTEN TO HIS RECOMMENDATIONS WITHIN YOUR BUDGET.

William (11/15/13):  I am acquiring a pair of model 1's, but would like to know what series they're. The serial #30747 is there a way this can help identify the speakers? 

Answer: WILLIAM, THEY WOULD BE MODEL 1B.

Adrian 11/17/13):Richard any chance the model 5 will get a cosmetic upgrade within the next couple of years?

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN,

THE MODEL 5A CARBON IS ONLY SEVERAL YEARS OLD AND CATERS TO THE PEOPLE WHO LIKE WOOD ON THEIR SPEAKERS. THE ONLY WAY TO NOT COMPROMISE THE SOUND WOULD BE TO MAKE A WOOD VERSION OF THE SEVEN. THIS WOULD REDUCE THE PRICE ABOUT 5 THOUSAND DOLLARS BUT BE A LARGE SONIC STEP BACKWARDS COMPARED TO THE SEVEN. IN MY OPINION THERE WOULD NOT BE A MARKET FOR SUCH A PRODUCT. SOME DAY A FULL CARBON QUATRO WITH WOOD MAY BE AN OPTION. IT WOULD BE ABOUT THE SAME PRICE AS THE 5A CARBON BUT WITH LESS BASS QUALITY. AS YOU CAN SEE THE FORM FACTOR OF THE 5 SERIES IS HARD TO IMPROVE ON AND WHY THE SEVEN IS WHAT IT IS

Kevin (11/18/13): am looking into a pair of Vandersteen Model 1's. How do I identify between the B, C, etc.? What are the differences? Which models have the rubber surrounds on the woofer, and what is the easiest way to identify that?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, ALL MODEL ONES WITH NO LETTER AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER ARE "B". ALL ONES WITH "C" AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBERS ARE "C" MODELS. ALL "C" MODELS HAVE RUBBER SURROUNDS BUT SOME 1B'S HAVE FOAM. NO WAY TO TELL EXCEPT EXAMINATION WITH A LIGHT FOR A MILKY WHITE CONE WHICH HAS FOAM SURROUNDS.

Joe (11/19/13):Hello, I own a pair of 2c speakers, which are in great shape cosmetically and seem to be functionally. However, I can clearly hear a difference when adjusting the dials for the treble and midrange on one speaker, but cannot on the other. Is there an easy fix for this? One clue that might help determine the problem is that when I ran Audyssey (before I read your stance on room eq) I noticed a slightly muffled and/or softer test tone in the "malfunctioning" speaker than the other speaker. Audyssey finally gave it an extra boost in amplification after the first few attempts and it became louder than the functioning speaker. Any help is greatly appreciated

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, CALL SERVICE AND LEAVE A MESSAGE DESCRIBING THE PROBLEM. RAY WILL RETURN YOUR CALL OR TRY THE LINE 3 AND I WILL TALK YOU THROUGH IT.

Richard (11/20/13):I inherited a pair of 2c speakers. They are in original boxes and, since I don't have any equipment to test them with, I've only unboxed one. I'm interested in selling them, but before I do, I'd like to know if you can tell me a little about them. The serial number from the one that I've pulled from the box is 5674 C. Is there an owners manual online? Any info you can pass on will be helpful.

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, THESE ARE 2C SPEAKERS AND ARE APPROX 32 YEARS OLD. THE OWNERS MANUAL IS LONG OUT OF PRINT AND NO DIGITAL FILES EXIST. SHOULD BE WORTH $200.00 FOR THE PAIR IF THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER.

Cal (11/20/13):I have a pair of VLR's about 6 years old. Good clean sound, but would like more bass. My principal criterion is the wife acceptance factor (WAF). Each speaker must fit on a shelf 24" x 13" tall x 12" deep. A sub must fit on a shelf or preferably be hidden on floor at the side of the built-in shelves. Any suggestions?

Answer: HELLO CAL, ANY SMALL SUB WILL DO. OUR 2WQ WOULD BE A GOOD CHOICE BUT IT IS LARGE.

Frank (10/06/13): I have a set of 3a's and purchased a 2wq subwoofer to improve the bass. I have a mcintosh MC350 amp and AR1600 preamp with Ayre CD player. After numerous days of trying to get the sub to respond i have pretty much given up. The amp unbalanced input impedance is 20,000 and I am using the fixed 20,000 crossover. I tried multiple combinations using the crossover device, but was never sure if I heard any difference . Is the subwoofer compatible with this amp design/preamp? The following was a comment from a review of the MC352. "The Larry Cox review is not very favorable, so I'm wondering if there was a "hook-up" problem. Three years ago a review of the MC352 was done in Germany. The critical comments were similar to Larry?s. I was in Frankfort for the International Hi-Fi Show so I met with the reviewer to discuss the problem. Come to find out, his speaker cables had the negative lead grounded through test equipment connected to the output. Since the MC352 is a fully balanced design, the output transformer has its center tap grounded. His external connection shorted the negative half of the output. This seriously effected the output of the amp. Only half the power output was available and the output impedance match was changed. The sound was bad. The speaker load must float and have no connection to ground. The wiring was changed and then he was very happy with the amplifier sound and performance. Regards, McIntosh Labs". Overall I was pleased with the speaker/electronics sound but felt the bass was lacking, which was my reason for purchasing the 2wq. I heard the quatros in verona and was blown away by the sound, but am skeptical about their ability to integrate into my system. Any suggestions on how to get some performance out of the 2wq's and whether the Quatros's will actually work with my components. Thank you for taking the time to consider my question.

Answer: HELLO FRANK, THERE SHOULD BE NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR EQUIPMENT. I WOULD CALL YOUR DEALER IN VERONA AND HAVE HIM FIND OUT WHY IT IS NOT PERFORMING PROPERLLY. YOU WILL NOT ATTAIN QUATRO PERFORMANCE BY ADDING A PAIR OF 2WQ SUBS TO THE MODEL THREES. 

Heather (10/06/13): I recently bought a pair of Vandersteen 2CI speakers. They sound really great, but the fabric has quite a full pulls or pilling in the cloth. I would like to buy a new pair of black socks and replace these fabric sleeves. I gather its labor intensive and that doesn't bother me. i just want them to look their best again. What do I need to do to buy a pair of socks from you?

Answer: HELLO HEATHER, PLEASE CALL US TO  ORDER A PAIR. 559-582-0324

Kelly (10/14/13): Hello. My beloved 2W Vandersteen subwoofer is giving me problems. I am using the WX-2 crossover and am certain I have all connections correct. Overall, the system sounds great, especially since the addition of the sub. But occasionally--usually at low volumes--the sub makes noises: a small succession of bumps or burping noises is one way to describe it. And often, at normal listening levels--usually during quiet passages--I hear the same thing: bump bump bump bump; or maybe its more of a: thump thump thump thump. Either way, it is distracting and I know it should not be this way. I do not know the exact age of the sub as I bought it used. As said, other than the semi-regular noise, it seems to have integrated well with my system--beautifully in fact. Any suggestions would be most appreciated.

Answer: HELLO KELLY, 2W SUBS ARE 20 YEARS OLD OR MORE. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER SERVICE FOR REPAIR INFO. 

Mike (10/18/13): are there going to be a 3A Sig II in the future?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, WE WENT TO THE WOVEN CONE MID-RANGE FROM THE 5A A YEAR OR SO AGO (CIRCA 2012) ALONG WITH OTHER REFINEMENTS. I GUESS YOU COULD CALL THAT A 3A SIG II.

Wayne (10/20/13): Hi Mr. Vandersteen. I own a pair of 2Ci speakers. Is there a way that I can obtain jumpers so that I can run the speakers without bi-wiring? Please let me know.

Answer: HELLO WAYNE, WE DO NOT SUPPLY JUMPERS BUT YOU CAN IMPROVISE AND MAKE YOUR OWN USING SHORT LENGTHS OF HIGH QUALITY SPEAKER WIRE. BOTH REDS NEED TO BE CONNECTED AND BOTH BLACKS THE SAME.

Billy (10/21/13): Model 1 speakers serial? #1302 and 1303 are they 1, 1c? Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO BILLY, VERY OLD 1B. ABOUT 30 YEARS OLD.

Michael (10/23/13): I own Vandersteen 5's, (sn# 2201 and 2200) bought as demos in aug 2006, from audio art in Richmond. Tim suggested I speak to you. The 5's are powered by Ayre AX 7 Integrated Amp, and it was sold to me vandersized, meaning, the int. amp has crossovers built in. Do the batteries in the 5's still have to be changed? Are they fine left alone?

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, YES THE BATTERIES NEED TO BE CHANGED EVERY 7 YEARS.

Pete (10/24/13): I am thinking of adding a subwoofer to my 2Ce Signature II speakers. Granted that 2 is clearly better, does having only a mono sub degrade the sound experience specially in an otherwise excellent top-to-bottom speaker? In other words, are the overall "sonic gains" still worth it? Thanks

Answer: HELLO PETE, A LOW QUALITY SUB-WOOFER WILL DEGRADE THE SOUND. ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER TO DO A DEMO WITH AND WITHOUT.

Bill (10/25/13): I have a VCC-1 mounted inside a cabinet. Does the setting Proximity ON make it have a little less bass and thus make dialog a little easier to hear? (When watching TV or a movie) I am 63 and my hearing is in question (by my wife) She is trying to make me buy some Bose crap SOLO sound bar for geezers with bad hearing. Can you help me? Thanks

Answer: HELLO BILL, YES IT DOES ROLL OFF THE LOWER FREQ SOME TO COMPENSATE FOR THE FACT IT IS IN A CABINET OR NEAR A WALL

Matt (10/30/13):'Hi Richard. I very recently purchased a pair of your 2ci speakers and am very impressed with them. I'm pretty convinced these are some of the best values in used speakers. I like them so much that I was able to a pair of Sound Anchor stands already filled with lead shot. Unfortunately the original owner of the stands lost the screws to mount them, so my question is, what are the thread types of the screws on the bottom of the speakers? Would you happen to have these remaining in stock or should I source them myself? Thank you for your help, really really happy with them. Running them with a Marantz 170dc amp 3250 preamp, both fully recapped with great parts so they don't have quite the warmth typical vintage Marantz gear does which causes this gear to match really really well with the 2ci pair.

Answer: HELLO MATT, THAT IS SO LONG AGO BUT I BELIEVE THEY ARE 10-32 INSERTS.

Gregory (9/03/13): Richard, I am fascinated by the "Quatro Wood CT" now appearing in your new price list. What is it, particularly relative to the Quatro Wood?

Answer: HELLO GREGORY, IT IS THE OLD QUATRO WOOD WITH A CARBON TWEETER AND A SLIGHT INCREASE IN "Q" FOR THE 6.5 INCH MID-BASS DRIVER. THE GRILLE EXTENDS DOWN THE FRONT OF THE SPEAKER AN ADDITIONAL 2 INCHES. THE OLD QUATRO WOOD IN NOT UPGRADABLE TO THE QUATRO WOOD CT.

Jerry (9/04/13): Thank you very much for speaking with me on the phone to solve my sound problem. After our conversation, I found the connection problem and the speakers sound great. I have had my speakers for over 20 years and love them. Thanks again for your time.

Answer: HELLO JERRY, ALTHOUGH TIME IS SHORT I TRY TO HELP BEST I CAN. ENJOY YOUR MUSIC.

Roger (9/06/13): I have had my new 2ce signature mk2's with the woven midrange up and running for about 100 hours and they have really smoothed out and opened up. I am using monarchy sm70 pro mono-blocks (80 watts per channel) and there is a good synergy between speaker and amp. In short they are sounding fantastic. My wifes first comment upon hearing them was that it was like listening to our cd's for the first time. My question is in regard to the cabling. I am currently auditioning an internal biwire speaker cable. I like the way the cable sounds but want to go to full biwire with 2 separate runs per speaker as you recommend. The binding posts on my amps accept bananas and spades. Do you think it would make any difference to use bananas for the high and mid run and spades for the low frequency run so the runs are not in direct contact with each other or just use spades on on both.

Answer: HELLO ROGER, IT SOUNDS LIKE YOU SHOULD LEAVE EVERYTHING ALONE. YOU WANT BOTH TO BE A TOGETHER AS POSSIBLE WITH THE BEST BEING BOTH TERMINATED INTO THE SAME SPADE AT THE AMPLIFIER END.

Randy (9/06/13): Are there any significant difference between the 1B and the 1C?

Answer: HELLO RANDY, EVERYTHING INTERNAL IS DIFFERENT, ONLY THE OUTSIDE IS MOSTLY THE SAME.

Michael (9/10/13): 'Will the stands for a 1C fit a model 1?

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, YES BUT YOU WILL HAVE TO INSTALL TEE NUTS IN THE BOTTOM FOR THE MOUNTING BOLTS. THEY ARE 1/4-20 AVAILABLE AT THE HARDWARE STORE

John (9/11/13): I am considering the purchase of a pair of 2Ce speakers locally and wonder if the specific version has any long term reliability or maintenance issues. Are there any upgrades that I should consider? The serial numbers are 55324Ce & 55325Ce. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THERE ARE NO UPGRADES AVIABLE FOR ANY OF THE MODEL 2 SPEAKERS. NO MAINTENANCE ISSUES JUST A REMINDER THAT SIGNIFICANT CHANGES HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE MODEL 2CE SIG II. IF YOU ARE LISTENING TO A PAIR AT A DEALER THEY ARE NOT THE SAME. LISTEN TO THE PAIR YOU ARE BUYING, IF YOU LOVE THEM IT DOESN'T MATTER HOW THEY HAVE CHANGED.

JP (9/13/13): Hi, What Vandersteen speakers work best with a Conrad Johnson premier 11a amp. Thanks

Answer: HELLO JP, YOUR AMPLIFIER WILL WORK WITH MOST OF OUR SPEAKERS. I WOULD DECIDE HOW MUCH MONEY YOU WANT TO SPEND AND VISIT ONE OF OUR DEALERS AND HAVE A LISTEN.

Bill (9/19/13): Hello Mr. V. How about a large wide tall floor speaker (rectangular) sock with 12 in or 15 in single paper driver with 98 DB. Triode people must make their own cabinets and buy old used drivers or old Bozak/Tannoy/Alant on ebay. Has to be inexpensive. You will sell many worldwide. No crossover. Also could have a more expensive 2 way speaker with a HF driver with a little cap to roll over to HF.?There are lots of people with 2A3 (3 watt) and 300B (6 to 8 watt) triode amps suffering. You would be the only one making a serious musical affordable product for all.? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BILL, ONE MAJOR PROBLEM IS THAT I HAVE TO LIKE TO LISTEN TO WHAT I PUT ON THE MARKET. I AM NOT OLD ENOUGH TO ENJOY LISTENING TO ALL THAT DISTORTION. A 15 INCH WOOFER AND A TWEETER IN A WIDE BOX WON'T DO VOICE OR PIANO LIKE ANY I HAVE HEARD UNAMPLIFIED, MAYBE YEARS FROM NOW WHEN MY EARS GO SOUTH.

Gary (9/27/13): I purchased a used set of Vandersteen 3A Signiture speakers a few years back from Stereo Unlimited in San Diego. I really enjoy them. I read that the latest Vandersteen 3A Signature speakers now include a woven speaker for the mid-range. How much would it cost to upgrade my speakers from the old Vandersteen 3A Signatures to the latest Vandersteen 3A Signatures? In addition, to what extent should I expect the upgrade to improve the sound?

Answer: HELLO GARY, WE HAVE NOT DEVELOPED A UPGRADE TO THE WOVEN CONE MID-RANGE. THIS WOULD INVOLVE INSTALLING THE NEW MID-RANGE (EASY) AND CONSTRUCTING A NEW CROSS-OVER IN THE CHAMBER FOR THE NEW ARRANGEMENT (EXPENSIVE). IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO TALK ABOUT THIS CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.

2014 NOTE - SEE OUR UPGRADE PROGRAM PAGE

Robert (9/29/13): Can you tell me what model/year a Model 2 with number 76191Ce would be?

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, IT IS A 2CE ABOUT 10 TO 12 YEARS OLD.

Giovanni (8/10/13): I have a pair of stacked quads, and the bass response is not ideal (too boomy). I was wondering if you ever tried your subwoofers (2wq) with stacked quads or quads. Many thanks!

Answer: HELLO GIOVANNI, THE 2WQ HAS BEEN VERY POPULAR WITH QUADS BUT ONLY WITH THE (M5-HP) MODEL 5 HIGH-PASS.

Bill (8/06/13): What is the the best solution for running a pair of Vandersteen 5s on 230V when they're set up for 110V?

Answer: HELLO BILL, A GOOD QUALITY STEP DOWN AUTO-FORMER OR TRANSFORMER.

John (8/08/13): I Have a pair of 2c's serial 21188-21189. Would these have the foam surrounds or the rubber? Still sound great!

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO INSPECT THEM (shine a flashlight through the grille, black cones have rubber surrounds, milky white are foam) OR DON'T WORRY ABOUT IT UNTIL THEY START DISTORTING.

Roger (8/10/13): I recently purchased a pair of pre owned 2Ws from Audio Connection that needed some TLC. I have removed the tops after hearing some clicking when a corner was pushed down.Now that I have checked them for warping and am ready to re-attatch them ,I would like to know what type of adhesive you use so I can reinstall the lids. I would also lie to know what if anything can I do to convert them from 2Ws to 2Wqs . I currently have a pair of 3As at your shop getting converted to the Signature series.

Answer: HELLO ROGER, WE USE WOOD GLUE ON THE WOOD PEGS AND CAULKING IN BETWEEN. THE 2W CAN NOT BE UPGRADED TO A 2WQ.

Larry (8/21/13): Just moved to a house with hardwood floors. My 2C speakers have spikes. Not sure what to use for protection. Please advise.

Answer: HELLO LARRY, YOU CAN ORDER FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER OUR SPIKE SHOES.

John (8/26/13): I am considering the purchase of a pair of used Vandersteen 3 speakers (original model 3, not 3a or Sig). The sale is local, so I can hear them, and the cosmetic condition is described as excellent. The seller says that he checked with Richard Vandersteen and that based on the serial numbers the speakers were built in 1995. My question is, are there parts in these speakers that degrade over time (such as woofer surrounds or capacitors)? I know the speakers are upgradable, and maybe that's an option when Better Days arrive, but for now, I'd have to take them as they are. So, as for buying

Answer: HELLO JOHN, EVERYTHING IS DESIGNED TO GO 40 YEARS OR SO. LISTEN TO THEM. IF YOU LIKE THEM, BUY THEM OR WAIT FOR A PAIR OF 3A TO SHOW UP.

Bryan (8/28/13): It seems to me that a popular trend in audio, currently, is the use of waveguides for the treble and at least upper mid-range. The belief, from what I gather, is that it helps control the sounds interaction with the room as well as increasing overall speaker sensitivity. Seeing as how a waveguide in some ways is simply a contoured baffle with a specific purpose, it can be argued that your speakers take the exact opposite approach with having as minimal a baffle as possible. I am sure that with a minimal baffle you are increasing the sweet spot by allowing the sound to radiate in all directions uniformly. However, can you comment on the benefits of your design versus those of Dr. Earl Geddes and Tom Danley?

Answer: HELLO BRYAN, I THINK WAVEGUIDES WORK WELL ON SPEAKERS THAT ARE BOXES. WE HAVE ALWAYS WORKED HARD AT ELIMATING THE SOUND OF A BOX. I FIND BAFFLES ADD COLOR BUT THE LACK OF THEM MAKES THE CROSSOVER DESIGN MORE DIFFICULT.

Itai (8/28/13): Hi, i own an amazing model 2 speakers. For sometime now the left tweeter volume has decreast by 90%. I replaced the left tweeter with the right one and it is? not!! a tweeter problem, it is something with the left crossover. Is it possible to get a diagram of the model 2 cross over in order to try and fix it myself

Answer: HELLO ITAI, EVERY PAIR COMES OUT OF THE CHAMBER WITH DIFFERENT VALUES. THE BEST WAY IS TO OPEN THE SPEAKER THAT IS WORKING CORRECTLY AND COMPARE IT TO THE ONE YOU ARE HAVING TROUBLE WITH. WE DO NOT HAVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS OF ALL THE DIFFERENT MODEL TWO'S BUT YOU SHOULD NOT NEED ONE IF YOU DO WHAT IS SUGGESTED ABOVE

Eric (7/05/13): I have a pair of Vandersteen 1Cs, that have worked great for me for many years. I recently noticed that one of the speakers within one of the 1Cs has become damaged, and makes a 'bad' sound when operated at high power levels. I would like to replace that element - is it possible for me to do that myself? I am an electrical engineer, and so could open up the unit find the bad speaker, and replace it.? If I could do this, how much would the internal speaker element cost? If I have to return it to Vandersteen for repair, how much would that cost?

Answer: HELLO PAUL, UNDER SERVICE ON OUR WEB SITE THERE ARE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO GO INTO THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE. WHEN YOU FIND OUT WHAT NEEDS TO BE REBUILT CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE. THE SERVICE GUY WILL CALL YOU BACK WITH YOUR QUOTE. I DO NOT PUT QUOTES ON THIS FORUM AS THEY LIVE FOR YEARS. 

Michael (7/06/13): Hello, I have the Ayre ax5 integrated amp and wanted to know if the crossover with the Quattro would work in that setup. Thanks for any insight.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THE M5-HP WILL NOT WORK BECAUSE THERE IS NO WAY TO PUT THE CROSSOVER BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND THE POWER AMP. CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 FOR A POSSIBLE SOLUTION

Cyrus (7/10/13):I purchased 5a Carbons from an authorized dealer. After about 6 mos I decided to swap them for 7's which are now installed and are amazing. (the 5a's sounded great too). They did not swap the Hi Pass (balanced) that I had purchased for the 5aC's which are M5-HPB. should I be using the M7-HPB? I am running aesthetix mono amps.

Answer: HELLO CYRUS, THE M5-HPB WILL WORK BUT THE M7-HPB IS MORE DYNAMIC AND TRANSPARENT.

Paxton (7/11/13): I just purchased 2 vandersteen model 3a signatures from audiogon and I was wondering if you could tell me how old they are. The serial numbers are 11064A and 11065A. Thanks for any information.

Answer: HELLO PAXTON, THEY ARE APPROXIMATELY 7 YEARS OLD. WE DO NOT DOCUMENT THE MANUFACTURE DATE SO THERE IS NO WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE

Barry (7/13/13): I have a pair of model ones that do not have stands. Can you recommend a height. I will fabricate them unless I can find some. Listened to a pair at Fiddler Hi Fi here in Mobile AL back about 25 or more years ago and could not swing it. But have followed the forums and the audio respect that Vandersteen has maintained. Finally found a pair only two miles from my home.

Answer: HELLO BARRY, CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 SO WE CAN FIGURE THIS OUT. NO EASY ANSWER

Josh (7/21/13): I am current owner of 2ce Signatures and I have really enjoyed them a lot! But I'm looking at switch to tube amps...probably 25W EL34 based monos. I saw at THE Show how you ran the 7's with some uber AR 250w monsters. How realistic is it to run the 5a Carbons or the Quatro Woods with 25W? And advise would be greatly appreciated. I could also go with some 70W KT88 based mono amps from the same manufacturer if that power is essential, but I'm thinking I'd prefer EL34 tubes if practical.

Answer: HELLO JOSH, 25 WATTS IS NOT ENOUGH POWER TO DRIVE THE 5A CARBON OR THE QUATRO

Jacques (7/19/13): How often should the batteries in the filter of the Quatro be replaced. I previously had a mishap in that the batteries that were not replaced in time exploded and caused massive damage to my expensive amplifier.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, THEY LAST ABOUT 5 YEARS OR YOU CAN INSTALL LITHIUM WHICH WILL LAST 10 YEARS.

Matt (7/20/13): 1) My speakers still sound great. But I understand that I have foam surrounds and so while I don't hear anything that would make me think the surrounds need replacing, I can't just pop the grill off to see. What advice can you offer? 2) I know you do upgrades, but I don't see any listed for my speakers. I'm wondering if there is a significant difference between the 2Ce/i and 3C speakers from what I have? I listen to a variety of music and currently have my 2C's mono bridged with Parasound HCA-1500 amps, and may move up to HCA-2200 amps in mono. They sound great. But I wonder how much better a newer pair would sound, but don't have a local dealer I can pop in to have a listen. Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO MATT, EVERY PART IN THE NEW 2CE SIGNATURE II HAS BEEN UPGRADED. THERE IS A VERY LARGE DIFFERENCE IN EVERY WAY. WE NEVER OFFERED UPGRADES FOR THE MODEL 1 OR 2 SERIES. THE MODEL 3 CAN BE UPGRADED

Kelly (7/21/13): I have a new set of model 2ce never been used. I would like to hook up to a Pioneer VSX-V555 Digital Signal Processor Receiver. The receiver speaker connections are bare wire inserts. What plugs do I need for back of 2ce. They have the 2 black and 2 red plug in type connectors.? Thank you for your help.

Answer: HELLO KELLY,  SINGLE OR DOUBLE BANANA PLUGS ARE REQUIRED.

Kelly (7/26/13): Richard - my Quatros here in South Africa are now approximately seven years old, but have not been used for about 2 years, because the batteries in my filters were not replaced in time and blew uop, damaging my amp amp (which also suffered other forms of damage) and it took two years to go though all the processes of raising money and waiting for parts etc to get my very expensive amp up and running again. Does this mean that the crossover batteries will last another two years? If not, is it not possible to factory-train only one technician on each continent, so that the speakers can be taken or sent to him or her for the replacement of the crossover batteries? Sending the speakers all the way to the States only for batteries would be a tall order.

Answer: HELLO KELLY, THERE ARE NO BATTERIES INSIDE THE QUATROS.

Scott (7/30/13): I have a pair of 2C speakers which I like very much however, one of the tweeters is bad and needs replaced. Are there replacements available? Any NOS? Can it be rebuilt? Can you help me? I would appreciate any help or advice. Thank you.?

Answer: HELLO SCOTT, CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 AND LEAVE YOUR MEASSAGE AS THE PHONE IS NOT ATTENDED. WE WILL BE ABLE TO REBUILD THE TWEETER.

Dolphin (7/30/13): I own a pair of 2wq subwoofers to mate with my 2ces both of which were purchased from Audio Advice in Raleigh NC around 8 years ago and the system was installed and set up by them. I have the system in storage for a couple years for various reasons and finally set it up myself and discovered that the crossover is the temporary unit that came with the subwoofers, wx2 if I remember. The manual states to obtain the optional crossover for optimal performance. I assumed that Audio Advice had placed the permanent crossover in the system. From what I understand the crossover match is primarily to the amplifier with respect to the input impedance and not to the speaker being mated to the subwoofer. Is this correct? I am using an Anthem P2 realizing it exceeds the power recommendations but believe in current on reserve for optimal sound when listening to classical music at reasonable levels which has an input impedance of around 20Kohms if I remember correctly. I cannot find anywhere on your website where to obtain the permanent crossover. I know it is obviously not necessary but I would like to take full potential of the subs. Please inform me as to what to do. One more not. I have only owned your speakers since I purchase a pair of model 1s years ago in the early 90s. It was probably the best sounding pair of speakers I have ever heard regardless of price mated with a Yamaha power amp and pre-amp with an old Magnavox CD player. I may have to get a pair to play by themselves without integration with subs.

Answer: HELLO DOLPHIN, INSTALLING A X-2 WILL IMPROVE YOUR SOUND. FIRST YOU NEED TO FOLLOW THE OPTIMIZATION SECTION IN THE OWNERS MANUAL AND DETERMINE WHICH VALUE TO ORDER. IF YOU LOST THE MANUAL IT CAN BE DOWN LOADED FROM THIS SITE. WE DO NOT SELL DIRECT BUT THE X-2 CAN BE ORDERED FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

George (7/31/13): When checking the Model M5-HP Highpass Filter for my 5a's I noticed the date on the battery was 2012 so it seems to have expired. I have not be able to find any explanation about how to change the battery and when I talked to the technician at the local dealer he has never had this occur before. When looking at the battery it looks like it is more complicated than just snapping in a new one. Could you advise what you recommend in this situation.

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, THEY ARE SOLDERED IN. CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 (SERVICE) AND ASK FOR A QUOTE. THIS LINE IS NOT ATTENDED SO BE SURE TO LEAVE A MESSAGE.

Alex (6/03/13): I was recently given a pair of Model 2, and they have inspired a deeper interest in sound for me. Now, I can say I am a budding audiophile. My question: How do I know how to set the speaker's Tweeter and Midrange level? Thanks in advance for your help.

Answer: HELLO ALEX, PLEASE READ THE MANUAL. YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE 2CE SIG II MANUAL BECAUSE THE STEPS ARE THE SAME. IN MOST ROOMS YOU WOULD USE THEM WITH THE POINTER STRAIGHT UP.

Jeff (6/05/13): I was wondering if the 2WQ performance might be compromised if connected to a power amplifier that does not have any voltage gain, only current gain, -or something like that-, such as the First Watt F4. Would the output from the 2w be less than with a "normal" amplifier?

Answer: HELLO JEFF, I HAVE NOT HEARD OF YOUR AMPLIFIER NOR KNOW ANYTHING ABOUT IT. IF IT PLAYS SPEAKERS IT SHOULD WORK AS LONG AS THE HIGH-PASS IS SET PROPERLY. YOU COULD BRING IN THE AMP TO YOUR DEALER AND TRY IT.

Kevin (6/07/13): I own a pair of 2C's that desperately need the speaker cloth replaced and I am sure you have seen or heard this request hundreds of times already. I am more than comfortable with taking the speaker apart and replacing the sock myself but my sewing skills and especially my girlfriends' are sub par. Is there any way I could purchase the speaker cloth separately? If this makes any difference, I own 2 pairs of Vandersteen's and my father owns a pair as well! Purchased from Audio Ecstasy in the 90's. Just looking forward to make them look equal to how they still sound!

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, YOU CAN ORDER THE GRILLE SOCKS FROM YOUR DEALER.

Ricky (6/11/13):Hi Richard. I recently purchased a pair of used 3A Signature. I notice there is a lot of dust in the surrounding of the speaker drivers. What is the best way to clean off the dust without removing the sock?

Answer: HELLO RICKY, THE DUST DOES NOT EFFECT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SPEAKER. YOU COULD TRY A CAN OF COMPRESSED AIR BUT BE CAREFUL THE DRIVERS ARE NOT DAMAGED BY THE BLAST.

Paul (6/13/13):The contour controls on my 6 year old 3A Signatures have recently started to cut out at certain positions. They've spent most of their life set at zero, but recently I set all tweeter and midrange controls to +1. No problems for months, then one day I powered up my system and one of the speakers midrange driver sounded weak and scratchy, and almost as though it was out of phase with the tweeter. Upon turning the midrange contour knob slightly, the correct sound quality immediately returned, but I'm still able to duplicate this issue by adjusting the knobs. I also noticed that in the rotational area of trouble, the internal workings of the knob sound different, as though something rough is dragging across a spring. Are these controls something that can fail over time, and if so, does this sound like this is possibly what's happening? If so, is there a test I can perform to better determine what's going on within, or can/should these controls be removed and cleaned from time to time? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, BOTH THE MID-RANGE AND TWEETER CONTROLS ARE SILVER PLATED AND CAN BE RESTORED BY SEVERAL QUICK ROTATIONS BACK AND FORTH.

Bill (6/16/13): I'm the original owner of a pair of Vandersteen 5s. Over the years there has been some slight damage to the hoods. Do you offer any type of restoration for the hoods and if you do could you provide the cost for the service? I could get them to you at your convenience.

Answer: HELLO BILL, CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE STATING YOU WOULD LIKE YOUR HOODS RECOVERED. OUR SERVICE REP WILL RETURN YOUR CALL WITH A QUOTE. OUR SERVICE LINE IS NOT ATTENDED AND TAKES MESSAGES ONLY

Eric (6/19/13):Can I use subwoofer 2W to improve my 2ce speakers?? I am using mono tube amps. I find the music is not airly enough at the lower end... could the subwoofer help or something else need to be done?

Answer: HELLO ERIC, ADDING A 2WQ WOULD ADD AIR IN THE BASS, MIDS AND HIGHS.

John (6/26/13): I am considering buying a 2wq subwoofer to go with my 2CE Signature speakers. At a recent audio show, you (Richard Vandersteen) recommended using the M5 HP (which I guess is the Model 5 crossover). I haven't yet seen it on Audiogon or EBay. Is it hard to find a used one? Are there better sites to look?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THAT IS THE BEST PLACE TO LOOK SO BE PATIENT OR GO TO A VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ORDER A NEW ONE. 

Sunny (5/01/13): I just got a used pair of Vandersteen 1 and not sure if they are 1 or 1B or other models. Serial numbers are below: 30810 and 30811.? I saw manual for 1C but is there a PDF manual for older 1 models? Also, is the terminal cap easily removable to clean the tweeter controls? Thanks for information.

Answer: HELLO SUNNY, NO WAY TO TELL BY THE SERIAL NUMBER BUT THERE IS NO LETTER AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER THEY ARE 1B'S. THE ONLY MANUAL AVAILABLE IS THE 1C MANUAL WHICH IS THE SAME AS FAR AS SETUP IS CONCERNED. THE TOPS ARE NOT EASY TO REMOVE AND SERVICE IS DONE THROUGH THE BOTTOM. THERE IS NO NEED TO CLEAN THE CONTOUR CONTROL UNLESS THE TWEETER STOPS PLAYING. IT IS NORMAL FOR THE TWEETER TO MAKE NOISE WHEN TURNING THE CONTROL WITH MUSIC PLAYING (NOT RECOMMENDED). THE CONTROL IS BYPASSED WITH A CAP WHICH IS DISCHARGING WHEN YOU ROTATE THE CONTROL.

Jeff (5/06/13): I have your 1C's, as mains, VCC-1 for center, and VLR's as surrounds (not VLR-1 (the ones that basically look like the VCC-1 without the compensation switch. My question is for 5.1 Dolby digital, should i set the 1C's to large, rest to small? Also, what crossover frequency should i set the "small" speakers too? (50 Hz my options are 40-250Hz)? also, i have the option of 12 db vs 24 db slope, which should i use for these? FYI, i also have a V2W subwoofer.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, IF YOU HAVE A V2W YOU WOULD CALL THEM SMALL. 80 HZ IS A GOOD CROSSOVER POINT BUT I WOULD TRY 12 AND 24 SLOPES AND USE THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST.

Chris (5/09/13): I have a Vandersteen 2Wq sub and would like to use it in a home theater setup hooked up to an LFE out from my Pre amp. My thought, since this sub uses line ins, was to hook up the LFE from my Pre to the spare channel on my amp and then connect to the sub via the speaker cables.? Would this cause any issues? Thank you,

Answer: HELLO CHRIS, THERE IS A BIG POSSIBILITY THE AMPLIFIER WILL BE UNHAPPY WITH NO SPEAKER LOAD AS THE INPUT OF THE 2WQ IS OVER 200K. A BETTER SOLUTION WOULD BE OUR V2W AS IT IS DESIGNED FOR THE LFE OUTPUT AND HAS TWICE THE OUTPUT.

Marie (5/10/13): Due to recent renovation of our family room, we no longer have enough wall space to mount our rear VSM-1s. Is there any other way to install these besides on a wall? What else could we use for our rear surround?

Answer: HELLO MARIE, THEY CAN BE MOUNTED ON THE REAR OR SIDE WALL AS LONG AS THEY ARE BEHIND THE LISTENER. IF NEITHER OF THESE ARE POSSIBLE ONE OF OUR FLOOR-STANDING SPEAKERS IS THE ONLY TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SOLUTION

Dsmith (5/10/13): Hello, I am being offered a used set of your 2WQ subs with a set of "HP-5" balanced variable crossever filters. I dont see any reference of this crossover anywhere, Is it possibly the M5-hp crossovers, and does this offer any advantage to me in my system over the X2 filters? Magtech amp, Magnepan 3.7;s.

Answer: HELLO DSMITH, THE M5-HPB IS PART OF THE MODEL 5 SYSTEM BUT IS A HIGHER RESOLUTION SOLUTION FOR THE 2WQ AND YOUR PANS.

Scott (5/10/13): Hi Richard, I have owned your 1C speaker and the 2CE speaker and have a question. The 1C speaker is by far my favorite but I would like to get a recommendation directly from you. If you had to choose from any of your larger speakers of which sounds most closely to the 1C, which one would it be? The 2CE that I owned did not sound nearly as good. I just need to fill a larger room with the same sound that the 1C currently fills. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO SCOTT, THE 2CE MUST HAVE BEEN TOO HIGH IN RESOLUTION FOR YOUR SYSTEM OR A BAD FIT FOR YOUR ROOM. YOU COULD ADD A 2WQ SUB-WOOFER TO YOUR 1C SPEAKERS IN THE LARGER ROOM.

Tim (5/12/13): I recently acquired a pair of 2C's and the tweeter and midrange are not working in one. I have cleaned the pots with DeoxIt but still no luck. Can you tell me the common causes for this issue? Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO TIM - IT IS NEVER THE POTS AS THEY ARE NOT DIRECTLY IN THE SIGNAL PATH. THE MOST LIKELY PROBLEM IS A BURNT CROSSOVER. DO NOT REMOVE THE CROSSOVER BECAUSE WE CAN ONLY REPAIR THE CROSSOVER IN THE SPEAKER WHILE IN OUR CHAMBER.

See service

Havish (5/13/13): I wanted some advice on which crossover to pick, i.e., X-2 or M5-HP for my 2Wq which I just acquired on Audiogon. My main speakers are 2Ce signatures from February 2004 and I am using an Aragon 8008 amplifier made by the original Aragon company. With this system, do you think I would notice the difference between the M5-HP and the X-2? Is it worth spending the extra money for the M5-HP? Your input would be highly appreciated. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, THE M5-HP WOULD BE THE BEST SOUNDING BY FAR BUT IF THE DIFFERENCE IS WORTH THE MONEY ONLY YOU CAN COMMENT ON.

Robert (5/14/13): I own 5A speakers that I bought some years ago from Soundworks in Silver Spring, MD. They are no longer in business. I moved to a different house and wonder if there is some one in the DC area who can re-tune the speakers for me. If not are there clear directions so that I can do it myself? Are Vandertones to be used for that purpose? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THE VANDERTONES ARE AVAILABLE AS A DOWN LOAD ON OUR WEB SITE. THE MODEL SEVEN MANUAL IS ALSO AVAILABLE AS A DOWNLOAD. THE LOW FREQUENCY SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS ARE CLEARER BUT THE PROCESS IS THE SAME FOR BOTH SPEAKERS. THE NEAREST DEALER WITH LOTS OF EXPERIENCE WOULD BE JOHN AT AUDIO CONNECTION 973-239-1799 , VERONA, NJ.

Peter (5/14/13): Is there an M7-HP high pass filter now? Is it for the 5a Carbons, or just the 7s? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO PETER, THERE IS A M7-HPB FOR THE MODEL SEVENS BECAUSE THE MODEL SEVENS HAVE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION THAN THE 5A CARBONS. THE M7-HPB COULD BE USED WITH THE 5A CARBON BUT I BELIEVE IT WOULD BE OVER KILL. THE M7-HPB IS BALANCED ONLY.

Jim (5/16/13):Hello! I just picked up a pair of Model 2 Ce speakers from an original owner and I love them. I never thought I'd be able to afford them but I got lucky on Craigslist. The model numbers are 56134Ce and 56135Ce. I read Thomas Norton's 1993 Stereophile review and can't help wondering if these are the 1" tweeter model or the short lived 3/4" model?? I also purchased 1" x 3/8 carriage bolts for the attached bases as they didn't have spikes. Should I get spikes for these on carpet, or are the carriage bolts sufficient? Based on my readings, it's unclear if bi-wiring or bi-amping is preferred. I have access to several Carver A-220 stereo amps (110w x 2 @ 8ohms or 350w bridged) and my AVR is a Denon 4311 (140wpc x 9). Should I go with one or two Carvers? Stereo vertically bi-amped or bridged mono and bi-wired? Or just one Carver bi-wired? Or no Carvers, direct from the Denon? Thank you for your time and dedication to your art.

Answer: HELLO JIM, I DO NOT KNOW WHAT TWEETER YOU HAVE. YOU COULD REMOVE THE BOTTOM AND LOOK INSIDE OR SHINE A LIGHT THROUGH AND SEE. CARRIAGE BOLTS ARE GOOD FOR TILE OR HARDWOOD FLOORS BUT SPIKES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR CARPET. I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH THE CARVER AMPS SO YOU SHOULD EXPERIMENT AND USE THE BEST SOUNDING COMBINATION. 

Perry (5/25/13): I purchased Vandersteen 2ce signature 2 in March 2010 (brand new) Serial #'s are 67122/3.Would these be the latest 2's? Thank-you.

Answer: HELLO PERRY, NO WAY TO TELL EXCEPT TO SHINE A LIGHT THROUGH THE GRILLE AND SEE IF THE MID CONE HAS A FABRIC TEXTURE. IF IT DOES IT IS THE LATEST VERSION BUT I BELIEVE WE DID THE CHANGE IN EARLY 2011.

Henry (5/26/13): I live in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania and there are no Vandersteen dealers. Could I please order directly from you? Thank you. All the best.

Answer: HELLO HENRY, WE WILL SELL DIRECT HOWEVER IF YOU ORDER THEM FROM A DEALER IN YOUR AREA IT WILL SAVE YOU MONEY. OUR DEALERS ARE LISTED ON THIS SITE. CALL VANDERSTEEN AT 559-582-0324 IF YOU NEED MORE INFO.

Jeff (5/27/13): I used to work at AudioVisions in West Babylon, NY and bought a pair of 2Cs at the time. Is it possible to purchase boxes for the speakers?'

Answer: HELLO MARK, CONTACT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO 559-582-0324.

Bradley (5/27/13): I have purchases a pair of Model 1 speakers serial No's 41812 & 41813. Are these Model 1B's or 1C's?

Answer: HELLO BRADLEY, COULD BE EITHER. LOOK FOR A "C" AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER. IF YOU HAVE A "C" AFTER THE NUMBER IT IS A 1C, IF NOT IT IS A 1B.

Paul (5/27/13): Hello! I run a mixing/production facility here in Dallas and have a client who can't quite come up with the final payment of an EP that I mixed for him. He has offered me a fantastic pair of Vandersteen 2c speakers to cover the rest of his debt however I am not sure if I'd have much use for them in a mixing environment. A friend of mine owns a pair for his home and I agree that they sound great - however I couldn't tell if there was a presence peak or if it was a condition of his living room. Is there an available frequency response for the 2c speaker that I can peek at to help me make my decision. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO PAUL, YOU CAN CHECK THE ARCHIVES OF A STEREOPHILE REVIEW WHICH HAS MEASUREMENTS. THIS SPEAKER HAS BEEN OUT OF PRODUCTION FOR 20 YEARS AND MEASUREMENTS ARE NOT AVAILABLE.

Sunny (4/03/13): I just got a used pair of Vandersteen 1 and not sure if they are 1 or 1B or other models. Serial numbers are below: 30810 and 30811. I saw manual for 1C but is there a PDF manual for older 1 models? Also, is the terminal cap easily removable to clean the tweeter controls? Thanks for information.

Answer: HELLO SUNNY, THERE NEVER WAS A MODEL ONE. THE SPEAKER BEGAN AS A 1B THEN A 1C AND NOW 1CI. THE BEST WAY TO ACCESS THE SPEAKER FOR SERVICE IS THROUGH THE BOTTOM. THE CONTROLS ARE SILVER PLATED SO A FEW QUICK SWIPES WILL CLEAN THEM UP. DO NOT MOVE THE CONTROL WHILE MUSIC IS PLAYING BECAUSE THE STATIC IS A VOLTAGE CHANGE ACROSS THE BI-PASS CAP. THIS NOISE IS NORMAL BUT THE TWEETER SHOULD PLAY CLEANLY ONCE THE CONTROL IS NOT MOVED.

Marco (4/08/13): I'm very upset. Why the QUATRO owners don't have the privilege to win an upgrade? I'm kidding Richard. But seriously, why not? Best Regards.

Answer: HELLO MARCIO, ALL CROSSOVER WORK IN DONE IN THE CHAMBER SO IT IS TOO COSTLY TO SHIP THEM IN FOR THE STRUCTURE AND CROSSOVER CHANGES. IT WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE TO PUT IT IN KIT FORM.

Carlos (4/10/13): The battery in my pair of balanced M5-HP crossovers being used on a pair of 2Wq are marked as 2013. I have 3 questions: 1) Should I change the batteries at this time, or can I wait until they fail, (with the thought that these batteries may still last for another year or two)? 2) Do I need to send the units back to the factory, or can the battery change be done by myself or a local electronics/audio shop? 3) From a previous e-mail thread, you ask for us to purchase the batteries to be used. Is there a reason we need to purchase and send the battery to be used for replacement, and if so do you have recommendations as to which battery would be best?

Answer: HELLO CARLOS, THE BATTERIES SHOULD BE CHANGED IN THE YEAR MARKED ON THE BATTERIES. -YOU CAN CHANGE THEM YOURSELF BUT BE VERY CAREFUL SOLDERING TO THE BATTERY AS THEY CAN'T TAKE A LOT OF HEAT. -WE RECOMMEND YOU SEND THE LITHIUM TYPE 9 VOLT BATTERIES BECAUSE THEY LAST 11 YEARS. IF YOU DON'T WANT TO GET THEM YOURSELF WE WILL PROVIDE 9 VOLT DURACELL'S THAT LAST 7 YEARS AS PART OF THE SERVICE.

Ron (4/14/13): I am running two 2wq sub-woofers with my 3a Signature speakers. I would like to purchase fixed value crossovers in a balanced configuration, one for each channel. I am using a BAT VK-55 as my main amp. The input impedance for the VK-55 is over 200k Ohms, and I have the crossover set at 200k Ohms (it does not seem to go any higher). It seems to work fine at that setting. Please let me know how to go about getting the fixed value crossovers.

Answer: HELLO RON, YOU CAN ORDER THE X-2B FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER BUT THEY ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IN THE VALUES NOTED IN THE TEST WX-2 BOX.

Michael (4/15/13):I have enjoyed immensely my Vandersteen 1b's for the last 30 years but unfortunately they have blown a driver or something. I now live in Australia and am looking to replace them with a pair of Vandersteen 2ce signature mk2's from caxton audio in Brisbane with serial numbers 68698/9. I would like to know if these are current spec with the most recent upgrades.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, SORRY WE HAVE NO WAY OF KNOWING THAT BY THE SERIAL NUMBER. THERE HAVE BEEN MANY RUNNING CHANGES IN THE 2CE SIG II AND WE DO NOT GO THROUGH THE EXPENSE OF DOCUMENTING THEM ALL. FIRST ASK THE DEALER IF THEY ARE THE LATEST OR YOU COULD SHINE A POWERFUL FLASH LIGHT THROUGH THE GRILLE AND SEE IF THE 4 1/2 MID-RANGE CONE HAS A WOVEN TEXTURE. IF THE MID CONE IS TEXTURED THEY INCORPORATE THE LATEST CHANGES.

Kent (4/18/13): Sorry for so many questions lately but as I've said I have a pair of 5As going on 7 years now. It's time to change the batteries. What is your normal turn around on changing these out? Down time for me is hard. I love these speakers. As an aside, my MX-Rs are always on. I turn them off maybe a few times a year. So when these amps are sitting at idle are they biasing the crossover the same as the battery pack would do? I realize there's no input signal and maybe this makes a difference?

Answer: HELLO KENT, WE GET THE BATTERIES CHANGED IN LESS THAN A WEEK. THE AMP ON ALL THE TIME IMPROVES THE SOUND OF THE AMP BUT HAS NO EFFECT ON THE SPEAKERS. 

Josh (4/19/13): Just wondering if I can use a pen-style laser pointer mounted on top of 2Ce Signatures to adjust tilt if the pointer hits my listening chair 130mm above my ear position (distance from speaker to top to tweeter center).Ear height is 39" 11' feet away from speakers.Hoping to more directly determine the correct speaker tilt.

Answer: HELLO JOSH, THE BEST WAY IS TO DO IT THE WAY SHOWN IN THE MANUAL BECAUSE THE FOCAL POINT IS NOT THE TOP OF THE SPEAKER. ONCE YOU HAVE ONE SET YOU CAN GET THE OTHER BY PUTTING THE LASER ON TOP OF THE ONE YOU ADJUSTED AND MARK THAT POINT ON THE WALL BEHIND THE LISTENER. THEN TILT THE OTHER WITH THE LASER ON TOP OF IT UNTIL THE LASER POINTS AT THE SAME SPOT.

Jeff (4/23/13): Hello Richard my name is Jeff. I value your opinion and would like to know if I should put my 3A's or 1C's on the side in a 7.1 setup. I have Quatros on the front and was given the advice of putting 3A on the back wall with 1C on the side. This seems wrong to me but..

Answer: HELLO JEFF, I HAVE ONLY USED VSM-1'S FOR SIDE AND REAR IN 7.1 SYSTEMS HERE AT HOME, SO I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE TO PASS ON. I AM NOT THE TYPE TO GUESS ESPECIALLY IN A PUBLIC FORUM. IF YOU OWN THEM TRY IT AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS.

Bill (4/29/13): I purchased a pair of 3A Signatures last year, but am now moving to a new home which will have a smaller music listening room. I was wondering if my 3A Signatures will be too much speaker for a room that is 12'x17' Thank you.

Answer: HELLO BILL, EVERY ROOM IS DIFFERENT AND HOW A PAIR OF SPEAKERS SOUND IS NOT ENTIRELY DETERMINED BY THE DIMENSIONS. IT COULD WORK VERY WELL BUT YOU WILL HAVE TO TRY IT TO KNOW.

Ricky (4/30/13): Hello, I recently purchased a pair of 3A Signature from Randall at Optimal Enchantment. I have two amplifiers model Adcom GFA-555 MKII. The power rating are 200W in 8 ohms,325W in 4 ohms and 600W in 8 ohms in bridge mode. I want to use both amplifiers in bridge mode to drive each of the 3A Signature. Would that be okay? Thank you.

Answer:  HELLO RICKY, THE MODEL 3A SIG IS A 4 OHM LOAD. CHECK YOUR OWNERS MANUAL BECAUSE EACH CHANNEL WILL SEE A 2 OHM LOAD WHEN BRIDGED. A BETTER IDEA IN MY OPINION WOULD BE TO VERTICALLY BI-AMP AS SHOWN IN THE MANUAL. IF YOU DO CHECK THE TEMPERATURE OF THE HEAT SINKS ON THE CHANNEL DRIVING THE MID/TWEETER SECTION AND MAKE SURE IT IS NOT HOTTER THAN THE OTHER CHANNEL. IF IT IS STOP USING THE AMPS BI-AMPED BECAUSE THE CHANNEL DRIVING THE TOP SECTION IS OSCILLATING.

Gregory (3/05/13): Is there an advantage, or disadvantage, to using diagonal wiring rather than straight mono wiring when using a single ended cable and jumpers on the 3A Signatures?

Answer: HELLO GREGORY, YES IT WOULD MAKE A SMALL DIFFERENCE. EASY FOR YOU TO TRY, SO YOU CAN HEAR FOR YOURSELF.

Kent (3/07/13):I'm an original 5A owner since 2006. Hard to believe it's been 7 years. This is the longest I've kept any speaker. I've been so satisfied I thought I may never change. Now you've generously made the upgrade to the 5A Carbon available and I'm considering that. In addition to the upgrade, I see other benefits such as renewing the crossover batteries and having the whole speaker taken apart and tested to make sure all is working optimally after 7 years of constant use. My main question is how the driver selection was made. The only model 7 driver used is the midrange. It appears the tweeter is changed to a carbon dome variety but not with the balsa core.? The mid bass driver is not changed. The sub really is already the same as the 7 so doesn't apply. When I first heard this upgrade was coming I just assumed the model 7 tweeter, midrange and mid bass drivers would all be used. Was this combination chosen for cost considerations or for the way they perform together?

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE MID WAS CHOSEN BECAUSE THE CLARITY OF THE SEVEN DRIVER IS MOST SIGNIFICANT. IF I USED ALL THE SEVEN DRIVERS AND THE PARTS NEEDED TO MAKE IT WORK, THE 5A CARBON WOULD BE $38000.00 PER PAIR. THIS IS TOO CLOSE TO THE PRICE OF THE SEVEN AND STILL WOULD NOT HAVE THE SIGNIFICANT ADVANTAGE OF THE CARBON FIBER ENCLOSURE. THE BATTERIES SHOULD BE CHANGED FOR SONIC REASONS SOON

John (3/10/13): Any technology changes to the 3a Sig's in the last 10 years? Can I drive these well, with a Class A amp rated at 60 watts into 8 ohms ( Thinking of a Luxman M-600A, or Mono pair)?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THERE HAVE BEEN MANY CHANGES IN THE LAST 10 YEARS.? THIS IS A VERY COMPETITIVE INDUSTRY IT WOULD BE IMPOSSIBLE TO MAKE THE SAME THING FOR 10 YEARS AND STAY IN BUSINESS. THE LATEST CHANGE ABOUT 1 YEAR AGO WAS THE INSTALLATION OF THE WOVEN FIBER MID CONE OF THE 5A AND RELATED CROSSOVER PARTS TO MAKE IT WORK. 60 WATTS IS MARGINAL SO BE SURE TO AUDITION THE AMP AND MAKE SURE IT IS ENOUGH POWER FOR YOUR TASTE.

Kevin (3/11/13): I recently acquired a pair of older Vandersteen Model 2 speakers with the following serial numbers: 5340601 and 5340701. Can you tell me about how old they are and the specific model number (2, 2ce, 2ci, etc.)?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, THOSE NUMBERS ARE NOT POSSIBLE. I THINK YOUR SPEAKERS ARE 2CI BECAUSE THE 0 COULD BE A "C" AND THE 1 COULD BE A "I".

William (3/12/13): Hello I'm new to audiophile technology and my first pair of high end speakers are the vandersteen 1a's. I'm getting a slight fuzz or clicking on my left channel. Im sure there not seriously damaged. Could this be a speaker problem or perhaps a circuitry one? I don't want to run them until I get his figured out. Do you overhaul your older equipment? Also, if you would. I'm using a Marantz 2215b to run them. Is this sufficient? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, GO TO SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND DOWN LOAD THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR REMOVING THE BOTTOM. PLAY MUSIC AND LISTEN FOR THE DRIVER THAT IS ACTING UP. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OR CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 PRESS 4. NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE MARANTZ BUT IF IT SOUNDS GOOD AND PLAYS AS LOUD AS YOU WANT WITH THE VOLUME HALF WAY UP, YOU'RE GOOD.

Heather (3/16/13):I have owned the Vandersteen model 2 speakers since they were first introduced. I recently replaced my amplifier for an Interga A/V When we hooked up the speakers, they were fuzzing at all volumes. I tested the resistance between the leads as per your instructions and registered no resistance. Do you still repair speakers at this age? Can I send them in?

Answer: HELLO HEATHER, WE DO SERVICE EVERYTHING WE HAVE EVER MADE. DOWNLOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND THEM IN.? THE FORM CAN BE FOUND ON THIS SITE UNDER SERVICE.? FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS AND THEY WILL BE GOOD AS NEW.

Rob (3/19/13): I live in Winnipeg, Canada, and purchased a pair of used 3A-Signatures, and a pair of 2Wq subs. As your manual states, I have the adjustable crossovers installed and adjusted to my processor impedance. After hundreds, if not thousands of hours of listening, I am ready to purchase a pair of X-2 fixed crossovers for higher performance. The problem is that there are no Vandersteen dealers in Winnipeg. Do you have a solution for me?

Answer: HELLO ROB, YOU CAN ORDER THEM FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER YOU WISH. WE DO NOT DO DIRECT SALES. 

Dan (3/20/13): Richard and /or the Vandersteen technical staff - I have the opportunity to buy a pair of used Vandersteen Signature 2Ce speakers, however the owner is unsure if they are the Signature or Signature II versions. I have looked online and I am also unsure how to visually tell the difference as the two speaker models appear to be identical in every way. Can you tell me if there is a visual clue or a serial number to look for that can discern the difference?

Answer: HELLO DAN, THE II VERSION HAS II AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER. THE II IS SO NEW IT WOULD BE HARD TO FIND ONE USED. THERE IS EVEN A LATER VERSION OF THE II THAT HAS THE MID-RANGE OF THE 5A. NO WAY TO TELL UNLESS YOU REMOVE THE GRILLE AND SEE THE WOVEN CONE. THIS NEW VERSION HAS BEEN IN PRODUCTION FOR ABOUT 6 MONTHS.

Gosa (3/20/13):Can I get a replacement woofer for a Model 1(first series)?

Answer: HELLO GOSA, GO TO SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS ON GETTING THE WOOFER REBUILT.

Susan (3/21/13): A few questions. I was informed there is a new version of the IC speaker, that is, 1Ci. I am curious as to what improvements been made on the original speaker, and how do those upgrades translated into better sound? Second question, what is the boxed height and weight of each speaker?Lastly, is your warranty transferable, and do you have a reliable dealership in Honolulu Hawaii? BTW, I owned a pair of IC's about 6 years ago, and vividly recall the verbal thrashing I received over the phone from you for not carefully reading the manual, which was a folded blue two sheet publication. Nevertheless I will appreciate if you could answer the above questions. I am looking for an alternative set of speakers with a small footprint for a 14X12 living room that is occupied by a pair of Acoustic Zen Adagios.?

Answer: HELLO SUSAN, THE TWEETER IS MODIFIED, NEW CROSSOVER AND HAS TERMINAL INPUT CONNECTORS FOR SPADES. THE SPEAKER SOUNDS BETTER FROM TOP TO BOTTOM. THE 1CI WEIGHS 50 LBS IN THE BOX AND DIMENSIONS ARE 12 X 14? X 40 INCHES. OUR WARRANTY IS NOT TRANSFERABLE. OUR DEALER IN HONOLULU IS AUDIO DIRECTIONS BY APPOINTMENT. THE 1C MANUAL HAS 8 PAGES AND CAN BE DOWN LOADED FROM THIS SITE. THE 1CI MANUAL IS NOT AVAILABLE YET BUT ALL SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS ARE THE SAME.

Heather (3/23/13):I'm a bit fan of Vandersteen speakers - I've got 5 of your speakers and love them to bits! Have 2CEs for Front mains, 2CIs as side surrounds, and a VCC1 for my center. My only complain is that, if anything, the center seems a bit lacking in tone compared to the other 2 pairs. I see you do show a VCC-2 in the Product line - but I just see the one page and details are a bit sparse. Is it a better audio/tonal match to the 2 series than the VCC1 I have now? Is it wood tone to match the other 2 pairs - I'm not a fan of black wood - I prefer walnut and the like. Will it sit on my console or do I need to wall mount it? Do I order direct or go to The Gifter Listener, our local Vandersteen dealer? Thanks very much for all you do!

Answer: HELLO HEATHER, THE VCC-1 IS TONALLY THE SAME AS ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS HOWEVER IS IS NOT DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR THE TWO'S. IT WAS DESIGNED TO BE A MATCH FOR OUR MODEL ONES. THE VCC-2 IS A MUCH BETTER MATCH FOR YOUR SPEAKERS BUT IT DOES NEED TO HAVE ITS BACK UP AGAINST THE WALL. IT COMES WITH A WALL BRACKET FOR THAT PURPOSE. YOU COULD SET IT ON A CONSOLE AS LONG AS ITS BACK IS AGAINST THE WALL. THE VCC-2 IS AVAILABLE IN ALL STANDARD FINISHES.  WE DO NOT DO DIRECT SALES SO YOUR BEST BET IS GIFTED LISTENER.

Stan (3/23/13): .I read in the "tweaks" section of Audioassylum, that connecting a wire to the 2 neg. sides of the bi-wired speaker greatly enhances the sound. I have 5A's...is that something that you approve?

Answer: HELLO STAN, OUR EXPERIMENTATION HAS BEEN LIMITED TO TRUE BI-WIRE, INTERNAL BI-WIRE AND MONO WIRE. THE SUGGESTIONS IN THE MANUAL ARE BASED ON THAT RESEARCH. I AM NOT A WIRE GUY SO I SPEND LITTLE TIME ON THIS. SOUNDS LIKE AN EASY EXPERIMENT SO YOU SHOULD TRY IT. MAKE SURE A FRIEND DOES THE SWITCHING SO THE LISTENER KNOWS NOTHING, OTHERWISE THE RESULT WILL BE CORRUPTED BY POWERS OF SUGGESTION.

Kris (3/23/13):We spoke at CES and you mentioned the possibility of an upgraded version of the 2Wq with similar room compensation controls. I would love to have such a subwoofer (or two!). Is that in development?

Answer: HELLO KRIS, YES IN ABOUT A YEAR.THE 2WQ WILL REMAIN IN PRODUCTION BECAUSE IT WILL BE LESS MONEY FOR THE MAJORITY WHO DON'T NEED THE MORE EXPENSIVE FEATURE. I HAVE NO IDEA HOW MUCH MORE IT WILL COST YET

Floyd (3/26/13): The Treo has been out for quite a while now; could you please post the setup guide and/or owner's manual here so interested buyers can get more information. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO FLOYD, DOWNLOAD MANUAL HERE

Ken (3/27/13): I have a model 2wg subwoofer serial number 11198. Is there any way of checking this without sending the unit back? I do not hear any bass coming from it. I moved it recently but I have checked all connections and they are fine.Thanks

Answer: HELLO KEN, ONE WAY TO DO A 90% CHECK IS TO UNPLUG THE UNIT FOR 5 MIN. LISTEN FOR A SMALL THUMP WHEN PLUGGING IT BACK IN. IF IT THUMPS IT IS PROBABLY OK. DO NOT SEND IN THE WHOLE SUB-WOOFER, ONLY THE AMPLIFIER MODULE. DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND IT IN FOR SERVICE.

Mark (2/28/13): Well, one of my older (ancient?)? 8" drivers foam suspension has degraded and given up. Marked on the magnet is 99.2. in felt pen and the speaker stamped in red X-2370 and 1056 and 8208. Could you please give me an estimate cost and availability of a replacement/repair unit Also am I to look forward to my other 2-C having the same problem I guess that old foam just gives up and rots after a couple of decades :)

Answer: HELLO MARK, CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE. I DON'T HAVE PRICES HERE AT HOME. HOW ABOUT 3 DECADES.

John (2/01/13): MY VANDERSTEEN 2C SERIAL # ARE C17087C AND C17086C WHAT WAS THE PRODUCTION YEAR OF THESE SPEAKERS AND FOR THE 2C WHEN DID YOU BEGIN TO USE THE SCANSPEAK DRIVERS IN THIS MODEL AND ARE THE SCANSPEAK DRIVERS STILL BEING USED.

Answer: HELLO JOHN,THESE SPEAKERS ARE ABOUT 30 YEARS OLD AND THERE ARE NO SCANSPEAK DRIVERS IN THEM

Eric (2/05/13): I have a pair of 2ce speakers. I know they may not be ideal for a small home theater setup, but will they work well (generally speaking)?

Answer: HELLO ERIC, THEY WILL WORK VERY WELL INA HOME THEATER SETUP. THE ONLY CAUTION WOULD BE THE BASS ENERGY ON SOME MOVIES WHICH OFTEN HAVE VERY LOW FREQUENCY HIGH ENERGY SOUND EFFECTS. AT THE LEVELS PEOPLE LIKE TO WATCH MOVIES THIS COULD DAMAGE THE 10 INCH WOOFER IN THE REAR OF THE 2CE IF NOT USING A SUB-WOOFER.

Michael (2/06/13): How can these people sell the Treo for under $3,000. I am a proud owner of 3ASigs.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THEY CAN'T AND STAY IN BUSINESS, UNLESS THAT PRICE IS FOR ONE SPEAKER INSTEAD OF A PAIR. IF THAT PRICE IS FOR A PAIR THAT IS SIGNIFICANTLY BELOW COST.

Mark (2/10/13): Richard, sadly my beloved 1C's have fallen victim to my cats who think they are a great scratching post. Is there a way to replace the grill cloth? If so do you recommend returning to your factory, DIY or a service center. I am in CT so long way to ship the speakers. Thanks for any advice you can give me.

Answer: HELLO MARK, CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE AND LEAVE A MESSAGE ASKING ABOUT YOUR OPTIONS.

John (2/11/13): I have a pair of 2ce Signature II speakers. I've been toying around with the idea of making my own tube amplifier to drive them. Any suggestions on what specifications I should be making my tube amplifier to in order to compliment the speakers, such as wattage, bandwidth, sensitivity, etc. Any information would be helpful.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THE POWER NEEDED WILL DEPEND ON YOUR LISTENING HABITS. OTHER THAN THAT MAKE A GOOD SOUNDING PAIR OF MONO BLOCK AMPS SO THEY CAN USE SHORT SPEAKER WIRES

Ken (2/12/13): Hi, I have 2Ce sig. and am in process of getting a subwoofer. as much as I would like to get a Vandy sub they are out of my price range. Would you please give me your recommendation on a sub in the $800ish range. I want good clean bass for music and good boom with movies. I.m looking at, what has become #1, psa xs15, Rythmik 12, maybe the f15, svs pb12 nsd, hsu vft3 mk4 or stretch to the 15h. I'm really ready to move and just can't make a decision. I love the smoothness of the Vandy's and don't want to muddy it up at all. Thank you so much for any input.

Answer: HELLO KEN, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE UNITS YOU MENTIONED BECAUSE I DON'T GET INTO HI-FI SHOPS VERY OFTEN. YOU WOULD BE ABLE TO FIND A USED V2W FOR THAT KIND OF MONEY AND IT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH YOUR SPEAKERS

Stefan (2/22/13): My name is Stefan and I am from Romania. I intend to buy a pair of Vandersteen loudspeaker's, Model 1, to be more precise. I have a Lafayette LR 1100 stereo receiver, that delivers 22 watts per channel, 8 ohm. It has two final stages, on transistors. It is a beautiful piece of audio equipment and delivers a huge warm sound. But with the proper speakers. And this is what I want: crisp highs with no fatigue, good bass but nothing too exaggerated, lively and airy, over all not fatiguing sound. Do you think it will be a good match for the Vandersteen's Model 1 I found. Considering the age of these speakers on what should I be careful to look at when i buy them. Thank you in advance.

Answer: HELLO STEFAN, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE LR 1100 SO CAN NOT COMMENT ON HOW IT WILL WORK. BEST THING TO DO IS TAKE YOUR AMPLIFIER WITH YOU AND AUDITION THE MODEL 1 SPEAKER. LISTEN FOR THE SOUND YOU LIKE AND IF THE TWO SPEAKERS SOUND ALIKE WITH NO DISTORTION. THIS WOULD BE A GOOD INDICATION THEY ARE WORKING WELL.

Alex (2/24/13): 'Hello Richard - I am thinking of upgrading my 2CE Sig II to the Treo or Quatro Wood but would prefer to keep my current electronics. I currently have an Ayre system (AX-7e integrated ? QB9 DAC). Is the Ax-7e at 60WPC enough to drive the Treo? Quatro Wood? If not, I might consider upgrading to the Audio Research DSi200 integrated (can't afford new speakers and a new AX-5). In either case, how would I hook up the integrated's to the Quatro's. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO ALEX, YOUR AX-7 INTEGRATED CAN BE USED AS IS WITH THE TREO. AS TO THE QUESTION, IS IT ENOUGH POWER I WOULD BRING YOUR AMP TO THE DEALER AND AUDITION IT SO YOU CAN DETERMINE IF IT HAS ENOUGH POWER. IF YOU WANT TO USE IT WITH THE QUATRO IT WOULD NEED TO GO BACK TO AYRE AND HAVE THE HIGH-PASS INSTALLED INSIDE THE UNIT. AYRE DOES THIS FOR A NOMINAL FEE.

Kent (2/24/13): I have to send my MX-R monos for service. I bought a Marsh A200s to use as a backup with my 5As while they're gone. This amp has an input impedance of 4 Kohm through the balanced inputs. The lowest setting listed on the top of the M5 HPB filter is 10K which corresponds to 1,2,9,10 on. Is this setting acceptable for this amp or would you recommend something else not listed?

Answer: HELLO KENT, YOU CAN USE THE MARSH BUT THERE WILL BE A HOLE IN THE RESPONSE BETWEEN 100HZ AND 500HZ. THE LOWEST SETTING AVAILABLE IS 10K SO THAT WILL BE THE SETTING TO USE UNTIL YOU GET YOUR MX-R'S BACK.

David (2/26/13): My name is David Ballou and I have a pair of your Vandersteen 2c loudspeakers (Serial# 25xxx). What great loudspeakers.I currently own the following speakers: Vandersteen 2c, JBL S8 (1973), ADS L1290, B&W DM305 and B&W DM302. I use my Vandersteens in an unusual way; I have them on 6 inch oak stands, on my computer desk, upside down. I auditioned quite a few speakers installed at my computer desk. It really works out nice with the tweeters pointed at my ears and the woofer just above my head with no reflections.My question is this; I currently don't hear any audio problems with the stock capacitors, would the speakers have a notable benefit to have newer capacitors (example: Solen Metalized Polypropylene Capacitors) installed? I had to remove the grill socks, the spider on both rear 10? acoustic couplers came unglued. I re-glued the spiders with super glue and so far so good. I am impressed on the whole construction of the cabinet and short wiring. I have an ASEE degree and have done all kinds of soldering so I am capable. My father is Glen Ballou and has written and edited the Handbook for Sound Engineers. (http://www.goodreads.com/book/show/851072.Handbook_for_Sound_Engineers) so I have really come to love the whole loudspeaker-voice coil alignments. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, EVERY COMPONENT IN THE 2C WAS SELECTED BY LISTENING TESTS. MANY HAVE REPLACED PARTS ONLY TO RUIN THE BALANCE THEY SO COVETED. MAKE EVERY CHANGE WITH A LISTENING TO VERIFY THAT THE SOUND DID IMPROVE AND THE BALANCE REMAINS. YOU HAVE ONE LARGE ADVANTAGE IN THAT WHEN DOING THIS MUCH WORK IT WILL TEND TO BE BETTER. THIS IS WHY I DON'T EVALUATE MY OWN DESIGNS BECAUSE THE TENDENCY IS TO HEAR WHAT YOU THINK YOU DID. GET ANOTHER OPINION SO YOU WON'T FALL INTO THAT TRAP AND SPEND A LOT OF TIME AND MONEY.

Steve (2/28/13): I have a 2Ce speaker that I removed the 8" speaker and returned to Vandersteen for repair. While removing the speaker I noticed one of the wood posts is cracked. What is the size of the wood post? A 1-1/4" round appears too large as a replacement.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, IT IS 1-1/4 ROUND.

Ann (1/01/13): How do you remove the dust off of the grills? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO ANN, USE THE BRUSH ATTACHMENT ON YOUR VACUUM

William (1/02/13): Do you sell replacement hoods for your Model 5 speakers? I have an original pair which are about 13 years old. The fabric looks worn around the corners and overall they are slightly faded. Plus, I have a tear in the back of one speaker. Please provide the price for a pair if you do offer them or possibly some suggestions if you don't.

Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, WE CAN'T SELL REPLACEMENTS BECAUSE THEY ARE HAND FITTED TO THE SPEAKERS. SEND THEM TO VANDERSTEEN AND WE CAN REPLACE THE CLOTH FOR APX $200 EACH PLUS FREIGHT. CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 FOR DETAILS.

Dennis (1/02/13): If I buy the 2 c is a sub woofer recommended? If so why? What is the sound like without a sub woofer?

Answer: HELLO DENNIS, MANY OF THESE QUESTIONS HAVE BEEN ASKED AND ANSWERED ON THIS FORUM MANY TIMES. IF YOU WANT PARTICULAR INFORMATION CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE, I WILL RETURN YOU CALL.

Tim (1/04/13): Richard , What would be the options for a crossover-High Pass filter with The 2WQ? Can all of these be used? X-2 , X-5 or M5-HP.? Thanks

Answer: HELLO TIM, YES, EXCEPT I DON'T KNOW WHAT A X-5 IS. 

Blue (1/06/13): Hello. I have what I believe are Vandersteen 2CE stands and they are missing several "end caps" which I need for mass loading. Do you know where I could source several replacement plastic end caps? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO BLUE, CALL 559-582-0324 AND ORDER THEM.

Mikel (1/08/13): Looking for information on Vandersteen model 4 speakers.

Answer: HELLO MIKEL, THERE IS NO INFORMATION ON THE MODEL 4 OR 4A. THEY WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION BEFORE WE PRODUCED ANY LITERATURE FOR THEM. WE DO HAVE MOST PARTS AVAILABLE FOR BOTH MODELS.

Stephen (1/09/13):Hi. My question relates to Kevin's question on 12/09/11. I am actively searching for a used pair of 2ce Sig II's to upgrade from my 1c's that I've had for 10+ years. In addition to your response to Kevin that states the change to the 5a woven midrange was in June of 2011, is there a serial number that can be referenced in the event that I purchase from someone who cannot verify the date? Also, one dealer that has a pair in on trade stated to me that he thought the used pair they were selling was the first generation of the Sig. II since it was sold at the old price, however, the purchase date by the dealer from you was 9/16/2011- this doesn't jive with the response to the previous post. Any thoughts for someone such as myself looking for a used pair? I would be more than happy with either generation of this version, but want to know what I am getting and pay appropriately. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO STEPHEN, THERE IS NO WAY TO TELL DEFINITIVELY WITH OUT INSPECTING THE DRIVERS. AS I HAVE STATED HERE MANY TIMES WE DO NOT SPEND THE MONEY TO DOCUMENT ALL THIS AS WE REBUILD THEM WHEN SERVICE IS NECESSARY.

Kelly (1/11/13): I have a pair of 3A speakers and I need to change my av receiver. I am looking at a Yamaha with 110 watts per channel. Will that be enough power to drive the speakers? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO KELLY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THIS RECEIVER BUT I HAVE NOT HEARD A RECEIVER DO A VERY GOOD JOB ON THE 3A SPEAKERS. LOOK FOR SEPARATES USED FOR REASONABLE PRICES OR ASK A VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A GOOD TRADE-IN THAT IS KNOWN TO DO A GOOD JOB.

Steve (1/12/13): I am a loyal but economically limited Vandersteen customer. I replaced my 2Ci's with 2Ce Sig II's last year, and an planning to add a subwoofer for more punch (NOT boom) at the low end. While I would love to use a Vandersteen sub, I frankly cannot afford to do. My system is for music only, and I would like to offload the woofers in my Sig II's (and, correspondingly, my power amp) by rolling off their low end response around 80Hz (and using the subwoofer to cover these frequencies instead). Can you provide any guidance as regards the specifications of a simple passive crossover to insert between my preamp and power amp to accomplish my objective most appropriately with the Signature II's? I intent to connect the subwoofer directly to the preamp.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER CAN SELL YOU THE X-2 REQUIRED TO DO THIS. A GOOD USED 2W OR 2WQ CAN BE FOUND FOR REASONABLE PRICES ON AUDIOGONE. THIS WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT.

Thomas (1/15/13): I have a old pair of Model 2's. How do I know which version they are, ie 2a, 2b, 2c?

Answer: HELLO THOMAS, LOOK FOR THE LETTER (S) AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER.

Jim (1/18/13): I want to connect my 2c speakers to a 2x5 selector switch unit, which in turn is connected to the B channel output of the A/V receiver.??I have bi-wired the speakers through nearby walls to the selector switch placed in a component cabinet.??Must the short length (2 ft max)of wire from the A/V B channel output inside the cabinet also be bi-wired configured to the input of the selector switch? If so, does that harm the other speakers connected to the selector switch? I hope you choose to answer this question because I am totally confused and, after 25 years of ownership, this is the first time these speakers will be bi-wired. Love them!

Answer: HELLO JIM, I AM CONFUSED. BI-WIRING IMPROVES THE SOUND OF VANDERSTEEN'S IN A HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEM. IF I UNDERSTAND CORRECTLY YOU ARE GOING THROUGH A RECEIVER SPEAKER SWITCH AND THEN ANOTHER STAND ALONE SPEAKER SWITCH. THE SIGNAL HAS GONE THROUGH SO MANY SWITCHES AT THIS POINT THAT IT IS UNLIKELY TO MAKE ANY DIFFERENCE. IT SHOULD NOT EFFECT THE OTHER SPEAKERS ATTACHED TO THE SELECTOR SWITCH.

Tim (1/23/13): Dear Sirs, It is with great regret that I am writing this email and I hope Mr.Vandersteen reads it. I have read and heard very good things about your firm hence my great interest. I recently purchased a new amplifier and dac from a very well known American firm at a sizable cost. I always like to purchase and support American firms whenever possible. I wished to purchased a pair of your Model 1 or Model 2 loudspeakers but the dealer told me that he has no stock!! After a major investment in electronics I was shocked to hear that the dealer does not have one new pair of even the entry level speakers to sell and everything needs to be ordered. I really wanted to like your products even though the "look" is not what I prefer, but in the overcrowded high-end audio environment (and I now know why the environment is so dismal) I would imagine that your firm would stock your small dealer network with basics for potential customers. How do you expect to sell products when dealers are at your mercy and why does a customer need to wait god knows how long for a basic loudspeaker? I understand unusual finishes and colors take time of course but this is silly and not the dealers fault at all as the dealer needs to be supported and there are very few good dealers left. As you know audiophiles are very demanding and impulsive, however we are paying a great sum of money and for a dealer not have at least the entry level product in stock is ridiculous and bodes very poorly on you the manufacturer. I know the typical excuses that color and finish make it difficult but your quality dealer network should at least have one-two pairs on hand. It is with great regret that I can and have found other very competitively priced and suitable products IN STOCK and available for delivery very quickly. As a businessman for over 35 years I would be out of business very quickly if I ran my business as you do and that is a fact. In the massive arena of high-end audio loudspeakers a modest dealer investment budget will far outweigh the loss of sale due to out of stock issues. I really did want to own your product but I am not willing to wait it out for a $1,200 or $2,500 loudspeaker. It is very sad that you take your dealers for granted and you have just lost a potential major customer as I usually upgrade quickly to top models and I pay my bills up-front.

Answer: HELLO JIM, I AM SORRY YOU ARE FRUSTRATED WITH THE LEAD TIME REQUIRED FOR A SPECIFIC FINISH. YOU ARE MISTAKEN ABOUT THE DEALER NOT HAVING STOCK. OUR DEALER HAD STOCK BUT NOT THE WOOD AND FABRIC COMBINATION YOU PREFERRED. THESE SPEAKERS ARE HANDMADE TO ORDER AND DON'T FALL OFF A ASSEMBLY LINE IN CHINA. YOUR DEALER MET YOU ON A SUNDAY (NORMALLY CLOSED) AND SPENT GOOD TIME WITH YOU AND OFFERED TO LOAN YOU SPEAKERS. SOMEHOW I THINK VANDERSTEEN AUDIO IS A BETTER COMPANY WITHOUT CUSTOMERS LIKE YOU! I THINK OUR DEALER WENT OUT OF HIS WAY TO HELP YOU AND DESERVES BETTER FROM THE LIKES OF YOU, AND THAT IS A FACT.

Tepsiri (1/29/13): What are the differences between model 5 and model 5a? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO TEPSIRI, EVERY COMPONENT EXCEPT THE SUB-WOOFER DRIVER, MID-BASS DRIVER AND STRUCTURE WAS UPGRADED GOING FROM THE 5 TOO 5A. THEY CAN BE UPGRADED AT THE FACTORY FOR APX $9500.

Harvey (1/31/13): I would like some information about model 4's vs model 3A signature, also I would like to know the procedure to have the speakers sent to your factory for a checkup before having them shipped home. I live in Quebec Canada and already have model 3's, When sending in my mid's you did not take credit cards but cashiers checks, has their been any change?

Answer: HELLO HARVEY, THE 3A SIG SPEAKERS OUT PERFORM THE MODEL 4/4A EXCEPT IN THE BASS. WE DO NOT TAKE CREDIT CARDS AS WE DO NO DIRECT SALES SO OUR VOLUME IS LOW. SHIPPING THE 4/4A WOULD BE VERY EXPENSIVE. A BETTER SOUND WOULD BE TO ADD TWO 2WQ SUBS TO THE 3A SIG

Daniel (12/04/12): I have the Vandersteen 2 and another set for parts both sets appear to be of the same series according to the serial numbers. I had swapped out the original front woofer (a milky-gray colored plastic cone with foam that has failed) for the black-colored plastic driver from the other pair - looks like rubber surround.? Further, I swapped the milky-gray mid-range from the original with the black plastic replacement.? I found that the milky-gray colored mid-range sounds far more natural, open and unrestrained to my ear vis a vis the black coned (and self-enclosed) midrange I had replaced it with. The only hitch is that the foam has given out on these milky-gray colored midrange drivers too. I would like to have the foam replaced or replace the drivers themselves, do you know how I might go about either task?

Answer: HELLO DANIEL, THERE ARE MANY DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE TWO DIFFERENT MODELS.  WE CAN REBUILD ANY DRIVER SO DOWNLOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND IN THE DRIVER WHICH NEEDS WORK. THE CROSS OVER IS NOT CORRECT WHEN SWAPPING DRIVERS AROUND. MAKE SURE YOU GIVE US THE SERIAL NUMBER AND THE LETTER AFTER IT. 

Alexander (12/04/12): Hello, I have a pair of 2c speakers. The diaphragms of both tweeters (Polydax HD 9x8D25) are torn out in the center and need to be rebuilt.? I know these are rather old, are parts still available if I send them in? If so what would the repair cost per tweeter? Thank you for making wonderful speakers!

Answer: HELLO ALEXANDER, I DON'T HAVE THAT INFO HERE AT HOME. PLEASE CALL SERVICE AT 559-582-0324 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE.  SERVICE WILL CALL YOU BACK WITH A QUOTE TO REBUILD THEM. YOU WILL HAVE TO DOWNLOAD THE RMA AND SEND THE UNITS IN FOR REBUILD.

Kathryn (12/11/12): Richard, I bought a pair of 3A speakers in 1996 and they are still the best investment I ever made. As you might suspect, the years (and our dearly-departed cat Caz) have taken a toll on the grill cloth. I recall that the grill cloth was replaceable, but I do not see any specifics on purchase on your website. Ideally, I could purchase a set of grill clothes and replace myself. Can you fill me in on how to accomplish this task? Thank you for your help, and thank you for continuing to design and produce the very best of quality speakers (and all in the US!).

Answer: HELLO KATHRYN, THE GRILL IS VERY DIFFICULT TO CHANGE. CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 FOR MY DIRECT LINE SO WE CAN DETERMINE IF THIS IS POSSIBLE. 

Alexander (12/14/12): Where do I get a M5-HP for my Quatro Woods? or is this built in? Cost?

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THIS CAN BE ORDERED FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER LISTED ON THIS SITE. IT IS NOT BUILT IN. APX $1,000 FOR THE PAIR.

Louie (12/15/12): Richard, A couple of questions. I own a pair of Quatros that I have enjoyed since 2005 (SN1084 and SN1085). I just looked at the batteries in my crossovers and they have a 2012 date on them. How do I go about getting the batteries replaced? Can this be done by my dealer? Second question:\The room compensation controls of my Quatros were set by my dealer in 2005. Is there any need to have these settings rechecked after so much time? My source components have changed since the original calibration but my amp is still the same (Ayre V-5xe).Finally, I want to say how much I love these speakers!

Answer: HELLO LOUIE, DOWNLOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND THEM TO VANDERSTEEN WITH A CASHIERS CHECK OR MONEY ORDER FOR $58.00 AND 2 9 VOLT LITHIUM BATTERIES. IT TAKES ABOUT ONE DAY. PRICE INCLUDED UPS BACK. THE ONLY TIME THE ROOM COMPENSATION NEED TO BE REDONE IS IF THE SPEAKERS ARE MOVED OR PUT INTO A DIFFERENT ROOM.

James (12/20/12): I have 2CE speakers, gray, and sub and an angry cat. What is the cost of new covers for all three speakers? 

Answer: HELLO JAMES, CALL THE FACTORY PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE. THEY CAN GIVE YOU THE PRICES AS I DON'T HAVE THEM HERE AT HOME.

Brian (12/21/12): I have a 2wq SW, had everything setup good using 80W power amp with 47K input Impedance.? Changed to wyred4sound SX-500 power amps with 60K input impedance. I had to turn down everything on the 2wq to minimum just so the bass was not way too loud.? Does this seem right? my speakers are 92db efficient. 

Answer: HELLO BRIAN, YOU DID NOT MENTION WHAT X-2 FILTER YOU WERE USING. IF YOU WERE USING 50K FOR THE OLD AMP THEN THE NEW AMP AT 60K IS WITHIN RANGE. IF YOU WERE USING THE 33K X-2 FOR THE OLD AMP YOU SHOULD ORDER FROM YOUR DEALER A 50K X-2. IF YOU ARE WITHIN RANGE YOU DID WHAT THE OWNERS MANUAL RECOMMENDS. IT HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH POWER.

Kaz (12/22/12): I'm purchasing a pair of new Quatros that are being made in your factory right now. I'd rather upgrade my speakers first rather than my amps. I've been running two Adcom 545 MK II's in a vertical passive bi-amped configuration. This has been fine for a number of years as a way of feeding my power hungry B + Ws. I've read your comments and as I understand it, if I bi-amp the Quatros, I can run into instabilities in the amp on the channels feeding the tweeters because there won't be any resistive load provided by the woofers? Unless I misread you and bi-amping would work in this configuration, I was wondering if it would be a better idea to keep one Adcom 545 MK II to power the Quatros or if I should pick up an Adcom 555 off ebay or Craigslist. That's what I can afford for now since I'll tapped out after buying the speakers. The 555 has more power but is still by Nelson Pass (I've heard the no marks are better than the MK IIs as well), but maybe the 545 is preferable? Or maybe I'm totally wrong and I can continue to bi-amp? Perhaps there's another gem from the good old days I could find that I could essentially trade the 545s for, costwise (each goes for about $250 on ebay these days). I'm using a Cary SLP-03 preamp, a ClearAudio Performance SE turntable, and at present an Ayre P-5xe phono stage. Thanks so much.

Answer: HELLO KAZ, CALL ME 559-582-0324 PRESS 3

Alexandar (12/28/12): Regards, I would ask for a little help if possible. I'd like to buy one of your speakers, but there is one problem .. They have white cone woofers .. These are Model 2C. Have you ever produced a series of speakers with white 8'' bass driver? When I first heard the Vandersteen Model II I just fell in love with speaker. Currently my budget is short, so why I watched something from the older models .. I hope to one day raise enough for 2CE Signature. Greetings from Serbia and I wish you all the best.

Answer: HELLO ALEXANDAR, WE NEVER USED WHITE CONES ON OUR WOOFERS. THE VERY EARLY MODELS USED A MILKY WHITE POLYPROPYLENE CONE. THIS MAY BE WHAT YOU ARE ASKING ABOUT.

Michael (12/31/12): Hi, I am from Singapore and have a pair of 2CE Signature II. I found that there are mold growing on and around the passive driver (not on the rubber surround) on both speakers. I would like to seek advice on how I can remove the mold. Can I spray lysol through the socks and onto the passive driver to kill the mold? If not what are my options without removing the socks? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, ARE YOU SURE IT IS MOLD? THE 10" ACTIVE DRIVER IS PAINTED AND INSTALLED WITH MASTIC, ARE YOU MISTAKING THAT FOR MOLD? I WOULD NOT SPRAY ANY LIQUID THROUGH THE SOCKS. THERE ARE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE UNDER "SERVICE" ON THIS WEB SITE. I WOULD WIPE THE MOLD WITH LYSOL ON A CLOTH TO MINIMIZE THE AMOUNT OF LIQUID USED.

Rui (11/07/12):? Good morning, gentlemen. I was unable to obtain a certified answer here at my distributor and could not use the form you supply in your site to get in contact with you. The question is this: I have noticed that your speaker Vandersteen model 1C is rated at, and I quote (6.8 ohms 2 ohms), in the technical info. Should I understand that the nominal impedance is 6.8(six-point-8)ohm and that 2 ohm should be the very minimum value attained for the whole impedance curve of that 1C loudspeaker ? Thanks in advance and best regards, from Portugal (Europe).

Answer: HELLO RUI, THE 1C IMPEDANCE IS 8 OHMS +/- 2 OR A RANGE OF 6 TO 10 OHMS.

Rafael (11/08/12): I'm interested in the Treo and I was wondering if there is more information about the model, like color and finishes available, full specs, user manual, etc... All I was able to find in your website was a preliminary one page pdf format with somewhat limited information and I've seen different frequency response ?specs? from different vandersteen dealer so is a bit confusing.

Answer: HELLO RAFAEL, I WOULD GO BY THE SPECS LISTED ON THIS WEB SITE. FINISHES ARE THE SAME STANDARD FINISHES LISTED FOR ONES AND TWOS. I WOULD GO BY WHAT YOU HEAR BECAUSE THAT'S WHAT MATTERS MOST. 

See Treo Page for product details 

Jack (11/10/12): I am trying to replace the rubber surrounds on the Dynaudio 30W100's at the bottom of my old Model 4's (#234 and 235). I have turned the speakers on their heads, and removed their socks and bases. The drivers are bolted to a circular "ring" that is itself secured to the bottom of the speaker cabinet. I have removed all of the bolts from the wood ring, leaving the bolts holding the drivers themselves to the ring (pursuant to earlier advice you gave me, thanks!). I am unable to lift the double driver ring out of the subwoofer cabinet. I speculated that it was a weight thing, so I turned one speaker right side up, supported at the edges so the driver ring has nothing below it, pulled and pushed, and a little prying. No luck.

Answer: HELLO JACK, THEY WILL COME OUT, JUST PRY ON THE OUTER RING. OVER THE YEARS THE FOAM GASKET WE USED HAS DETERIORATED AND BECOME A WEAK ADHESIVE.

Walter (11/11/12): This is a follow up question on the 2W's and the Denon AVP-A1HDCI. You stated that I cannot use these subs with this processor. Am I able to use the newer V2W or is there something intrinsic with the Dennon processor that doesn't work with your subwoofers?

Answer: HELLO WALTER, THE V2W IS WHAT YOU NEED BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE DENON. THE 2WQ OR 2W WILL NOT WORK WITH THE MAJORITY OF RECEIVERS.

Steve (11/14/12): I have a 12X12 1/2 size listening room. Would the model 2 be too big for this size room? If so, what would you recommend that I go with?

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO TRY IT. IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS THEN YOUR ONLY OPTION WOULD BE VLR'S WITH A 2WQ. 

Len (11/15/12): I have seen a lot of Model 2Ce's where the owner says the speaker was upgraded to a Signature II. How is this done and is there any paperwork that accompanies an upgrade from the factory? I don't want to get ripped off.

Answer: HELLO LEN,THERE HAS NEVER BEEN A UPGRADE TO THE 2CE SIG II OR OF ANY KIND. ONLY THE THREE'S ARE UPGRADABLE. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IF THE SPEAKER IS A 2CE SIG II IS TO LOOK AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THE ROMAN NUMERAL II STAMPED IN.

Harry (11/15/12): Hello, could you inform me manufacture year of VANDERSTEEN 2CI speakers (33267C and 33266C serials)? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO HARRY, WE DO NOT RECORD THAT INFORMATION BUT THE NUMBERS YOU PROVIDED ARE FROM A 2C NOT 2Ci. IF THE SPEAKER WERE A 2Ci IT WOULD HAVE A SMALL i AFTER THE C. THEY RANGE IN AGE FROM 25 TO 30 YEARS OLD.

Ian (11/17/12): I am an original owner of Model 5As and am considering the factory upgrade to 5A Carbons. My 5As are rated as having a sensitivity of 87 dB with the standard input voltage at 1 meter. When the 5A Carbons first were released, I seem to recall the rated sensitvity published at around 85 dB. That made sense to me considering the stiffer midrange driver cone, etc. Now the www.vandersteen.com site lists the sensitivity as 87 dB. Which is correct and why?

Answer: HELLO IAN, THERE IS NO SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 85 AND 87 IN THE REAL WORLD. IT DEPENDS AT WHAT FREQUENCY THE MEASUREMENT WAS TAKEN AND THERE IS ALWAYS A PLUS AND MINUS TOLERANCE BECAUSE NO SPEAKER IS PERFECTLY FLAT. WHAT DOES MATER IS HOW DIFFICULT THE SPEAKER IS ON THE AMPLIFIER. WE HAVE ALWAYS SAID SPECIFICATIONS WILL NOT INFORM ONE ON HOW THE SPEAKER WILL SOUND OR WHAT AMPLIFIER WILL SOUND BEST. THIS IS ALWAYS LEFT TO THE ULTIMATE TEST, YOUR EARS. GETTING BACK TO YOUR QUESTION, CALL IT AN AVERAGE OF 86. ANY FURTHER CLARIFICATION CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.

Clint (11/21/12): We have tried to get an answer to this question but the audiophiles on line don't make it easy. We have inherited some 2ce's in great shape but don't have cables. The speakers have holes: are they for jacks or screws that hold spades? Please advise. Our receiver takes bare wire so that is no problem.

Answer: HELLO CLINT, THEY ARE JACKS FOR BANANA PLUGS AVAILABLE AT ANY HI-END STORE INCLUDING VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

Udit (11/22/12): Hi, I have been using the 2WQ with the crossover box for a few years and would like to purchase the actual fixed crossover cables. Is this something that only Vandersteen can provide? How do I go about ordering them? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO UDIT, THIS MAY SEEM OBVIOUS BUT ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER CAN ORDER THEM FOR YOU. WE DO NOT DO DIRECT SALES.

Richard (11/23/12): Hello and thank you for your assistance. I have a V2W sub and want to use it with a NAD M3 integrated amplifier. The M3 has a pre-amp out with selectable high pass filter 40-120 HZ in 20Hz increments. The pre-amp out is RCA right and left. Was thinking about using a y connector out to combine the right and left channels to a single line to the sub in.

HELLO RICHARD: I WOULD NOT DO THAT. IT COULD CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH THE NAD. HAVE A GOOD TECH LOOK AT THE CIRCUIT AND MAKE SURE THERE ARE ISOLATING RESISTORS BEFORE THE OUTPUT. IF SO IT COULD WORK.

Ow (11/28/12): I am the original owner of Vandersteen 5As and have been considering upgrading to 5A carbons.? I note that this upgrade has gone up recently from $8650 to $9650.? Is there a reason for this price increase, given that the upgrade cost from 5's to 5A carbons is unchanged?

Answer: HELLO OW, WE HAVE UPGRADED QUITE A FEW 5A'S NOW ONLY TO DISCOVER WE ARE LOSING MONEY ON EVERY ONE. THIS UPGRADE IS ONLY AVAILABLE TO ORIGINAL OWNERS AS YOU ARE AND I KNEW IT WAS NOT GOING TO BE PROFITABLE FROM THE BEGINNING. WE HOWEVER CAN'T STAY IN BUSINESS IF IT COSTS US MONEY. MANY COSTS HAVE INCREASED INCLUDING FREIGHT BUT I UNDERESTIMATED THE LABOR ON THE 5A TO 5A CARBON CONVERSION. I OVER ESTIMATED THE LABOR COST FOR THE 5 TO 5A CARBON UPGRADE. IN BOTH INSTANCES THE SPEAKERS ARE TOTALLY DISASSEMBLED AND INSPECTED, THEN BUILT BACK UP LIKE A NEW 5A CARBON VERSION. MANY OF THE PARTS CHANGED FOR THE 5 TO 5A UPGRADE ARE ALSO CHANGED AGAIN FOR THE CARBON UPGRADE. WE AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO ARE STILL DEDICATED TO PROTECT OUR CUSTOMERS INVESTMENT AS BEST WE CAN. IF YOU HAVE FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.

Terria (12/26/10): Richard will there be an update in the near future in midrange unit of the 5a?

Answer: HELLO TERRIA, NO THE 5A WILL REMAIN THE SAME. WE ARE SHIPPING THE 5A CARBON WHICH HAS A CARBON/BALSA MID-RANGE AND A CARBON TWEETER DOME PRICED AT $23,700.00 PAIR.

Michael (4/18/07): I wrote to you about starting a section with superior recordings or as you now call them "the country road." I suggest each person interested post ten albums. I will start off with cd's, it seems from your FAQ that would be the most popular. Hell Freezes Over Eagles On and On Jack Johnson Endangered Specias Lynyrd Skynyrd Sultans of Swing Very Best Dire Straits Papa Doo Run Run California Project Rolling Stones Stripped Folk Singer Muddy Water (gold recording) Heart of Mine Maria Muldaur Baja Sessions Chris Isaak Corine Rae Corine B. Rae10,000 HZ Legend Air Let see what happens.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, HERE WE GO, LETS SEE WHAT HAPPENS. WE WILL BE PUTTING UP A SEARCH BAR FOR THIS PAGE SOON SO IT WONT BE SO HARD TO FIND. EVERY POST SHOULD INCLUDE THE WORDS "THE COUNTRY ROAD".

Juan (4/17/07): Richard I'm calling to your Brazil's dealer, but couldn't talk to someone acquainted with Vandersteen. I'm interested in the 5A's. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO JUAN, THANK YOU FOR YOUR INTEREST. PLEASE CONTACT DELRAMA FAX 480-367-1355 FOR INTERNATIONAL.

Paul (4/16/07): Following on to my inquiry from 4/13, perhaps a better thing to do with a couple thousand dollars is to save towards a pair of Quatros. I've seen it posted here that the Model 3's are more challenging to drive than the Model 2's but what about the Quatros? Looking at the sensitivity and impedance specifications it seems to me that an amp that can drive the Model 2's well should also drive the Quatros without any problem. Of course the superior resolution of the Quatros might reveal other upstream anomalies but that's a separate issue. Thanks again for taking these questions.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, YOU ARE CORRECT ABOUT THE POWER AND THE QUATRO'S ARE MUCH MORE REVEALING AND EASIER TO DRIVE.

Max (4/16/07): I have had my 2's for over 20 years, and been most happy. This past Sunday was my 87th birthday, and the thought occurred to me, though not to my wife, that I should upgrade my aged Vandersteen 2's.  I have a Krell kav300cd,two mono-block Odyssey amp....Do not know if my wife and I can swing the cost of a 3A....but my question is, really, will the 2CE,not only make me happy, but is there that much improvement over what I now have? Take Care & stay Healthy:

Answer: HELLO MAX, THERE IS A BIG DIFFERENCE BETWEEN YOUR OLD TWOS AND THE NEW 2CE SIG II WHICH USES THE 3A SIG MID AND TWEETER. THE 3A SIG WOULD STILL HAVE A ADVANTAGE IN THE BASS. I SUGGEST YOU AUDITION THEM AT YOUR LOCAL DEALER. I HOPE I WILL BE THINKING ABOUT NEW SPEAKERS WHEN I AM 87!!

Manohar (4/14/07): Hi Richard, I'm planning to use a VCC-2 mounted on a wall above my DLP TV (about 6ft above the ground). Would that work fine or should it be closer to the ground?

Answer: HELLO MANOHAR, THE GROUND IS NOT THE PROBLEM ITS ABOUT THE PICTURE. THE CLOSER THE CENTER CHANEL IS POSITIONED TO THE PICTURE THE BETTER THE ILLUSION OF THE SOUND COMING FROM THE SCREEN WILL BE.

Wayne (4/14/07): Mr. Vandersteen I have an older Home Theater System that I am in the process of upgrading. It is in a basement room with a cement floor (covered with carpet without a pad) and one long 22' cement wall studded and covered with 7/16" paneling (the remaining walls are studded using the same 7/16" material). The room is approximately 13 1/2' by 22' with all audio equipment and 40" display located at one end. A large sectional couch is then located about 14'-15' from that equipment wall. A pair of Model 1C's are placed about 6" in front of this wall and a homemade center speaker is built into this wall just below the display. The main part of the sectional couch located about 14'-15' from the front wall and has always been a decent sweet spot for music and video surround. An array of six (6) ADS 400i Ceiling speakers are used for the surrounds with 2 mounted just in front of the sweet spot, 2 just behind the sweet spot and 2 located on the back wall facing the sweet. I have separate 60 Watt per channel Adcom power amps powering all the 400i's and Center speaker. The Model 1C's have a 200 Watt per channel Adcom amp. Each Adcom amp channel also has a dedicated 30 band equalizer which probably isn't necessary but are used and have worked well for a number of years. When setting up the system I have always equalized the respective pair of speakers first and then allowed my Surround Sound Pioneer receiver to adjust the respective levels etc. For years this has worked out just fine for Video surround and especially Music. As mentioned the display is an older 40" Tube monitor and these days is considered small for a room this size. So I recently added a Retractable 92" front projection 16:9 screen with a corresponding High Definition DLP projector. So far no problems with the Video but I need some help with the Audio. What happens is when the screen is down and extended it covers my homemade center speakers. I have no room to place any kind of speaker either above or below this screen so have been doing some experimenting. As a result I found that if I connect my two Model 1C's in parallel, this creates a very nice mono Sound Image directly in the middle of the 92" screen which I have been quite happy with so far. But this now leaves me with no Front Left and Right effect Speakers. As I look at your product line it seems I may have two choices to resolve this. One option would be to use Wall Mounted VSM1's and a second looks like I could possibly use a pair of the VLR1's. The VLR1's look interesting as it seems these could be placed on top of the Model 1C's as are the same width and depth so in the end would just make the 1C's look taller (very convenient and wonder if this was intentional). Knowing you folks are the experts, here are the questions I would then have: (1) After reviewing my setup, would you recommend the Model VLR1's or VSM1's (I would have room to mount the VSM1's one on each side of the 92" Screen if needed). (2) If you agree that the VSR1's could be placed on top of the Model 1C's, then which pair would you recommend as the Front Left and Right effect and which ones to use for the Center Channel (this question would also apply if you recommend the VSM1's). (3) Last I still want to retain my 40" Monitor and actually may be replacing this with a new 44" LCD display. I want to remove my old homemade center speaker so would want this new scheme to work equally as well for the smaller LCD display. (4) I didn't mention the present Subwoofer I have. It is an older Velodyne down firing 15" located along the long Cement wall next to the sectional couch about 6' from the Front Right Model 1C. For years it has worked well but just recently a few problems have surfaced so have considered replacing it. Maybe you could comment on how your Sub would integrate with this system keeping in mind that this is probably the location where a Sub has to reside. I have asked a local retailer that sells your products and they basically told me they've never heard of anyone using speakers configured this way for a center channel and suggested contacting Vandersteen direct. So in summary I would just appreciate some basic advice here before I purchase anything further.

Answer: HELLO WAYNE, FIRST I WANT TO ADMIT I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH THIS COMBINATION BUT I LEARNED LONG AGO IF A CUSTOMER SAYS IT WORKS, IT WORKS. USING TWO SPEAKERS WIRED PARALLEL ON EACH SIDE WOULD WORK JUST LIKE NO CENTER WITH THE PROCESSOR SET IN THE PHANTOM MODE. THIS WOULD LET YOUR RIGHT AND LEFT MAIN SPEAKER DO THE SAME THING. I DO NOT KNOW WHAT ADVANTAGE DOING WHAT YOU SUGGEST WOULD HAVE OVER WHAT IS STATED ABOVE. THE V2W WOULD BE BETTER IF IT WERE ON THE SAME WALL AS THE SCREEN BUT IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE YOUR LOCATION SHOULD WORK FINE.

Paul (4/13/07): I'm the delighted owner of a pair of 2Ce Signatures and a 2Wq sub. Your site says that your full range speakers will sound even better in the mid and treble frequencies with the addition of a Vandersteen subwoofer and my ears tell me that you are correct. You further state that the demands on the main amplifier are also reduced thereby and that's the part I would like to understand better. Is the sensitivity of the full range speakers actually increased by crossing them over around 80 Hz? If so have you measured the difference and what is the sensitivity of the 2Ce Signatures when crossed over to a sub? Maybe I'm asking the wrong question but I think you can see what I'm getting at - just how is it that my amp works less hard with the sub and can I get away with a lower powered amp in this application? I'm using a single BEL 1001 MkV in stereo mode at 50 Watts per channel and the system sounds truly impressive (musical, accurate, detailed, and emotional) but being a scientist and engineer I would like to understand why. I've toyed with adding another identical amp which would give me 200 Wpc but it's hard for me to imagine that my system could sound much better and there may be a better way to spend couple thousand dollars. Thank you for providing this dialog, it's really a great resource.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, THE REASON THE SPEAKERS IMPROVE WHEN USING A HIGH PASS IS BECAUSE THE SPEAKER IS NOT REPRODUCING THE DEEP BASS FREQUENCIES. THIS LOWERS THE PEAK TO PEAK EXCURSIONS THEREFORE LOWER DISTORTION. THE MIDRANGE ALSO HAS LESS EXCURSION AT 80 HZ BECAUSE OF THE HIGH PASS AS FIRST ORDER SPEAKER DESIGNS HAVE A LARGE OVERLAP. THE SENSITIVITY OF YOUR 2CE SIGS REMAIN THE SAME HOWEVER YOUR AMPLIFIER WILL HAVE A LARGER POWER SUPPLY RESERVE HENCE BETTER SOUND. NOT ALL AMPLIFIERS SOUND THE SAME WHEN RATED AT 50 WATTS SO IF THE SOUND IS GOOD AND YOU ARE NOT CLIPPING YOUR IN TALL GRASS. IF YOU HAVE ENOUGH POWER THE ONLY ADVANTAGE WITH TWO WOULD BE DUAL MONO POWER SUPPLIES AND THE POSSIBILITY OF SHORT SPEAKER WIRE WHICH USUALLY IMPROVES THE SOUND. IT WOULD BE IMPORTANT TO ACCESS WHERE THE MONEY SHOULD BE SPENT FOR THE BIGGEST SYSTEM IMPROVEMENT, THAT WOULD REQUIRE A FEW LISTENING SESSIONS AND SOME EXPERIMENTING.

Michael (4/13/07): First thank you for your product. I am the proud owner of 5's with arye equipment. The limiting factor to the sound as you are well aware is the source material. I have cd's and vinyl that are just superior and others that are good, and some that are never listened to again. Since everyone who writes to you wants better sound, is there a way we could share are best with others on this site? Thank you for your thoughts.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, YOUR REMARK ABOUT THE RECORDINGS THAT ARE NEVER LISTENED TO AGAIN SADDENS ME. ASSUMING THEY WERE PURCHASED BECAUSE YOU LOVE THE MUSIC THEY SHOULD BE LISTENED TO FOR THE MUSIC. WHEN YOU OWN A PORSCHE IT WILL SPEND MOST OF ITS LIFE BELOW THE SPEED LIMIT AND IN CITY TRAFFIC, ONLY OCCASIONALLY ON A COUNTRY ROAD WILL IT BE ABLE TO SHOW ITS STUFF. OUR HI FI IS THE SAME BUT MOST AUDIOPHILES ARE POSSESSED BY THE COUNTRY ROAD AND MUSIC SUFFERS. JUST THINK HOW MANY PEOPLE THINK THE I POD SOUNDS GOOD. I PLAY ALL MUSIC I LIKE AND WHEN ITS NOT THE BEST RECORDING THERE STILL IS THE MUSIC. IF YOU LIKE POST YOUR COUNTRY ROAD HERE AND MAYBE OTHERS WILL ALSO, COULD BE FUN. I AM HALF KIDDING BUT IT NEEDS TO BE ABOUT THE MUSIC OR WE ALL SUFFER. THANK YOU FOR THE IDEA.

Lawrence (4/13/07): I have owned a Vandersteen 2w sub for many years. Previously I used it with an Adcom GFA-555 amplifier and Thiel CS2 speakers. That system has finally been retired and I am thinking of using the 2W with a system in my study built around an NAD 320BEE integrated amplifier. I would need to use an X-2 crossover between the pre-outs and amp on the back of the NAD 320BEE. I think the 320BEE has in input impedance of 200kohms, can you recommend which X-2 crossover would work best?

Answer: HELLO LAWRENCE, YOU NEED TO DO BETTER THAN "I THINK" ON THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE, FIND OUT WHAT IT IS. I WOULD USE THE WX-2 ADJUSTABLE X-OVER AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND VERIFY EXACTLY WHICH X-2 IS APPROPRIATE. ONCE YOU KNOW YOU CAN ORDER A PAIR FROM YOUR DEALER.

Peter (4/11/07): I have 2CE Signatures with a single 2Wq for stereo. We are redesigning the living area that doubles as listening room and upgrading other HT components to an all Vandersteen set up so looking to design arrangement without being able to hear the result right now. My reading of your literature and other queries here leads me to think add a 2Wq for stereo fronts; set HT receiver to direct LFE to large front speakers; add wall mounted VCC-2 centre speaker below screen with high pass filter and output from amp to the spare inputs now available on each front 2Wq; add VSM-1s for rears. If that seems good, I would like your feedback on location of speakers (remembering we are designing layout not room at this stage). Room is 40' wide with stereo around centre, listening position against back wall 11' from speakers which are around 10' apart. Area behind speakers is open to rest of house except for cabinetry around 4'high and speakers around 2' in front of cabinets. 2Wqs would be placed inside area at bottom of those cabinets, inside and behind line of speakers with little space above and none behind but in a space about 9' wide. If this was likely to be bad, I could push for another location. VSM's could be attached to ceiling that slopes down towards rear and would be around line of listener and near corner with wall.? Again could look at other mounting but would not look great. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO PETER, SOUNDS LIKE A GOOD SYSTEM TO ME. MOUNTING THE VSM-1 ON THE CEILING MUST BE DONE BY A QUALIFIED PERSON BECAUSE THE STOCK BRACKET WILL NOT WORK. THE VSM-1 DOES WORK VERY WELL ON THE CEILING ONCE THE MOUNTING IS SOLVED. AS FAR A THE LAYOUT I CAN NOT COMMENT BECAUSE I WOULD HAVE TO WALK THE ROOM. I SUGGEST YOU GET YOUR DEALER TO CHECK OUT THE ROOM FOR YOU AS HE HAS SEEN MANY.

Roger (4/11/07): I was interested in purchasing a used pair of Vandersteen Model 1 speakers. One of the speakers is numbered 11532. Can you give me an approximate manufacture date? Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROGER, ABOUT 20 YEARS.

Juan (4/11/07): My name is Juan Altgelt from Buenos Aires, Argentina, I'm interested in the 5a's, I've read that you have a distribution in Brazil, but the e-mail that I sent there asking for your speakers came back. I'm using Krells 750 Mcx (mono), is this too much power for the 5as?? I'm giving the 5a's a chance, even though I'm listening to Wilson Grand Slam right now, a dealer lent them to me but are out of my economic range. I'll try to assemble this: Krell 505 SACD (already have it), Krell 202 preamplifier (I'm using a 222 now), Krell FPB 750 Mcx, and Vandersteen 5a's. What do you think of this?

Answer: HELLO JUAN, I THINK THIS SYSTEM SHOULD SOUND FINE BUT I HAVE NOT HEARD THIS COMBINATION ON THE 5A. CONTACT DELRAMA FAX 480-367-1355 FOR CURRENT STATUS IN YOUR MARKET.

Lars (4/11/07): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, I have a option to trade my new 2ce Signatures bought last December with a pair of upgraded 3A to 3A signatures (done 4 years ago), s/n 5445. Will I notice the difference. Will these 3A's sound as good as if I bought a new set today. Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO LARS, THAT WOULD DEPEND ON THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT BECAUSE THE 3A SIGS ARE HARDER TO DRIVE. I WOULD NOT TAKE ANY BODYS WORD FOR IT WITHOUT DOING YOUR OWN A/B. THERE WOULD BE A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A 4 YEAR OLD 3A SIG AND WHAT WE ARE SHIPPING TODAY. A 3 UPGRADED TO 3A SIG TODAY WOULD SOUND VERY CLOSE TO A NEW PAIR OF 3A SIGS AS NEARLY EVERY THING IS CHANGED.

Steve (4/9/07): Hello Mr. Vandersteen: Is there any way to upgrade my Vandersteen 2Ce speakers to 2Ce Signature? Please advise. Thanks and best regards

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE MODEL TWO PAST AND PRESENT ARE NOT UPGRADEABLE DESIGNS. THE MODEL THREE AND UP ARE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. THE DOZENS OF CHANGES WOULD BE EMBARRASSING AS FAR AS COST IS CONCERNED.

Andrew (4/9/07): Why is it so hard to actually audition Vandersteen speakers? I live in Austin Tx.. I am willing to spend a lot of $$$ on my next speakers and would love to try out the Quattro's or the 5's but my nearest dealer (there are 2 in a state the size of France) is 3 hours drive away (one way) and despite being a starred or favoured dealer (whatever the term is) he does not actually have the full product range available. I know it's difficult to find dealers but boy, it is saying something when a customer with cash cannot find a way to even hear the speakers.......no wonder hi end audio is dying!

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, I DO NOT KNOW ABOUT HIGH END DYING IT HAS ALWAYS BEEN A SEARCH FOR AUDIOPHILES. WE HAVE ABOUT THE SAME AMOUNT OF DEALERS AS WE HAVE ALWAYS HAD AND STILL HAVE ENTIRE STATES WITHOUT ONE. ANYTHING ESOTERIC TAKES TIME TO ASSEMBLE IF YOU WANT IT DONE CORRECTLY, I KNOW HAVING BUILT RACE CARS AND AN AIRPLANE WHERE A SEARCH FOR THE BEST COMPONENT CAN TAKE ONE FROM COAST TO COAST. ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS ARE HAND MADE AND INDIVIDUALLY TWEAKED WHICH LIMITS HOW MANY CAN BE SUPPLIED AND MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL. THANK YOU FOR YOUR INTEREST, MAYBE YOUR TRAVELS WILL BRING YOU NEAR A VANDERSTEEN DEALER WITH THE PRODUCT YOU ARE INTERESTED IN.

Ken (4/8/07): First off, If there is any way you can incorporate a keyword search in your FAQ section it would be most welcome and I suspect would save you a good bit of time by not having to re-answer questions that have been already addressed..... Just a thought...Now my question....Do you publish the impedance curve of the 3A Sig...and what as been your experience with driving the 3A Sigs with a tube amp? I am considering purchasing a tube amp ( 75 to 150 watts) but I have been warned that the 3A Sigs may have an impedance curve that could give a tube amp a bit of trouble. Also, I suspect that Quarto's are in my future...Would they present an easier load for a tube amp to drive? Thanks for a great product and the many hours of listening pleasure they have given me.

Answer: HELLO KEN, I AM COMPUTER ILLITERATE BUT THOSE THAT KNOW SAY THERE IS A WAY TO SEARCH ANY PAGE (Moderator: Some Internet Browsers have the availability to search an internet page by keyword, see if your browser has that availability).? STEREOPHILE'S WEB PAGE HAS PAST REVIEWS WITH MEASUREMENTS ON THE 3A, IT IS ABOUT THE SAME. THE ONLY DIFFICULTLY WOULD BE THAT THE SPEAKER IS 4 OHMS IN THE BASS ESPECIALLY. THE QUATRO IS MUCH EASIER THAN THE 3 BECAUSE IT IS A 8 OHM SPEAKER WITH POWERED SUBWOOFER.

Amnon (4/5/07): Dear Richard. I am a proud owner of 2ce speakers (serials 70130 & 1). I also own a pair of surround speakers. (Cambridge Soundworks Newton S300). I need a good advice about the level of A/V receiver required to drive the Vandersteen speakers to the required level. Specifically asking, I want to purchase a Yamaha (RX-V2700) or a Denon AVR 3806 or similar. Are these types of receivers suitable to get the maximum out of the Vandersteen speakers ?Another question please, where can I get the technical specs of my speakers ? Thanks a lot.

Answer: HELLO AMNON, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE UNITS YOU MENTION SO CAN NOT COMMENT. I WOULD DISCUSS THIS QUESTION WITH A VANDERSTEEN DEALER. THE SPECS FOR YOUR SPEAKER ARE IN THE OWNERS MANUAL.

Steve (4/5/07): Hi, we are fixing a pair of Vandersteen Model 2 speakers for a customers but the cross-overs are completely missing. Can you supply a schematic? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, I AM SORRY WE DO NOT HAVE SPARE CIRCUIT BOARDS FOR SUCH AN OLD SPEAKER, ONLY THE PARTS TO REPAIR THEM. WHEN A X-OVER IS BURNED TO THE POINT THAT THE RESISTORS CAN NOT BE READ THE ONLY WAY TO REPAIR THEM IS TO PUT THE SPEAKER WITH ITS X-OVER IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND INSTALL THE VALUES NEEDED TO GET THE RESPONSE CORRECT. THIS IS HOW THEY WERE MADE IN THE FIRST PLACE. WITHOUT X-OVERS THIS WOULD BE IMPOSSIBLE TO DO, MAYBE THE CUSTOMER CAN LOCATE THE X-OVERS.

Bob (4/1/07): I have a pair of Crown, DC300A amplifiers and a pair of Vandersteen, Model 2Ce speakers. Although the amplifiers are not high-end audio components, they give a rather accurate sound reproduction that I'm happy with. One thing that these amplifiers don't have is any sort of protection circuitry in the event that something goes DC. The ancient manual that comes with the amplifiers suggests putting fuses inline on the speaker wires. My questions are: Is this necessary with the speaker protection circuits that are built into the Vandersteen, 2Ce speakers? ...and... If I did need to use inline fuses, what would you recommend?

Answer: HELLO BOB, THE SPEAKERS DO NOT HAVE PROTECTION, FUSES, AND ALL CONNECTIONS ARE SOLDERED. THE CIRCUIT IN THE SPEAKERS WITH THE RED LIGHTS IS ONLY A WARNING LIKE THE OIL LIGHT IN YOUR CAR. OUR EXPERIENCE WITH FUSES IS THAT THEY DO NOT ACT FAST ENOUGH TO PROTECT THE SPEAKERS AND DEGRADE THE SOUND. IF THE FUSE IS SIZED SMALL ENOUGH TO PROTECT IT WILL BLOW FOR NO REASON AND HURT THE SOUND BIG TIME. I WOULD BE CAREFUL DURING STORMS AND REMEMBER TO USE THE PROPER TURN ON SEQUENCE AND HOPE FOR THE BEST.

Craig (3/31/07): Is there any reason why the VCC-5 center can not be used with the 30th anniversary 2Ce signatures for front left/right? Thank you in advance.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, THIS IS RECOMMENDED AND MANY DO FOR HIGHER PERFORMANCE HT.

Richard (3/31/07): I was wondering if it is possible to use an M5-HP with a 2WQ subwoofer. I know that the crossover point is 80Hz for the 2Wq and 100Hz for the M5-HP. Can you vary the input impedance dip switches to make it work?

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, WHEN YOU CONTACT YOUR DEALER TO BUY THE M5-HP TELL THEM IT IS FOR 2WQ USE.

Lars (3/30/07): I think I read one of your FAQ's and it said the VCC-2 needed to be against the wall. Is that true? My situation will have it 2 feet away from the wall. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO LARS, YES THAT IS TRUE OR A LEAST FIRMLY AGAINST A FLAT PANEL.

Jim (3/30/07): Hi Richard, I just had to give some feedback regarding my 5A speakers. I recently installed 2 dedicated 20 amp circuits for my ARC 210 mono-block amplifiers, one circuit for each. The speakers share a 15 amp circuit with the rest of the system. With the new power circuits the mid and upper frequencies were so much clearer and more prominent that I had to turn up the LF level on the speakers to maintain balance. Once I readjusted the LF contour just right, the sound became magical. I never thought my system could sound this good. This experience taught me how critical it is to have dedicated circuits for power amps. I also realized how amazing these speakers are. The system couldn't sound this good if the speakers weren't such phenomenal transducers. All I can say is THANK YOU.

Answer: HELLO JIM, IN MY 30 YEARS I HAVE SEEN MANY SYSTEMS AND CONSULTED WITH MANY CUSTOMERS AND AM AMAZED HOW MUCH MONEY THEY HAVE SPENT ON EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES BUT HAVE NEGLECTED BASIC HOUSE KEEPING.  TILT AND ALIGNMENT, UNFILLED BASES, BAD POWER AND ROOM TREATMENT (DIFFUSION PREFERRED) IN THE HOME YET FRANTIC EXPERIMENTATION WITH POWER CONDITIONERS, CABLES, ETC.  SOME OF THE LARGEST IMPROVEMENTS I HAVE MADE IN MY SYSTEM WERE FREE.

Tim (3/28/07): Hello again. It's taken a lot of tweaking of placement, tilt-back, toe-in, crossover tuning and whatnot, but I think I'm finally approaching the ideal for my 2Ci's, 2Wq, VCC-1 (all used, so I have no dealer support) in terms of imaging and uniform response. However, I'm left with a lingering problem of what I believe to be excessive sibilance. In cruising the 'net for solutions, the most likely suspect has been identified as RFI/EMI via my speaker cables. The proposed solution is to install Zobel networks on all my speaker leads to act as a low-pass (audible frequencies) filter. I don't see any information here about Zobel or R-C networks, so I want to ask your opinion if you feel they could be a productive tweak with your speakers. I suspect you've probably incorporated some kind of Zobel circuit in your crossovers and I'm dubious about installing additional components into the signal path. Anything you'd like to say on this topic? Cheers,

Answer: HELLO TIM, ZOBEL NETWORKS ARE ALREADY INSTALLED IN YOUR SPEAKERS. EXCESSIVE SIBILANCE IS NOT A COMMON PROBLEM WITH VANDERSTEEN'S AND USUALLY ARE CAUSED BY THE SOURCE OR PROGRAM MATERIAL. THE WAY TO KNOW IS TO PLAY A KNOWN GREAT RECORDING, IF THE SIBILANCE IS GONE THEN YOU ARE DEALING WITH PROGRAM MATERIAL. IF YOU ARE NOT SURE WHAT RECORDING IS GOOD TRY SEVERAL AND IF ANY SOUND GOOD THERE PROBABLY IS NO PROBLEM WITH THE SYSTEM AS MOST SOFTWARE IS NOT GOOD. IF YOU HAVE TONE CONTROLS TRY THEM ON THE BAD ONES YOU WANT TO LISTEN TO.

Anthony (3/26/07): Hello Richard, Here's my question: Would you suggest connecting a subwoofer (I believe it's the 2w, forget the model #) to my system which uses 2ce's? My system is vintage (therefore no subwoofer input), so I would also appreciate any recommendations you might have as to the best way to make the connections. If it's helpful, I am connecting to a Pioneer SX-1050 receiver.

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH YOUR RECEIVER BUT IN ORDER TO WORK IT MUST HAVE "PRE OUT" AND "AMP IN" CONNECTORS ON THE BACK. IF YOU DO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN YOUR OWNERS MANUAL.

Bryan (3/26/07):  need a pair of replacement tweeters for a pair of model 1's serial #s 8192-8193

Answer: HELLO BRYAN, WE DO NOT HAVE REPLACEMENT TWEETERS AVAILABLE FOR 27 YEAR OLD SPEAKERS, HOWEVER WE CAN REBUILD THEM. FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS WEB SITE.

Jonas (3/26/07): Richard, Here's a bit of an embarrassing one. I have always had my speakers (5As) on hardwood floors so I've always used soft shoes under the spikes. I've now got a set up where the rear spike will be on hard wood but the fronts will be on an area rug. So, since this is my first time using spikes on a rug, do I just let the speaker/spikes rest on the carpet or do I try to get them to penetrate the rug/padding? Also, I want to make sure I get the vertical alignment right even though give the above my starting position is uneven. I was thinking if I used enough washers on the rear spike to get the top of the speaker level then that would be a neutral position (0,6) from there I can adjust based on the difference between the 36" line and my listening height/distance in the manual. Does that make sense? Thanks again for your help!

Answer: HELLO JONAS, THE FRONT CONES WILL FIND THEIR WAY THROUGH YOUR CARPET AND PAD IN SHORT ORDER BECAUSE OF THE WEIGHT. YOU WILL HAVE TO DO SOME MATH TO COMPENSATE FOR THE FACT THE REAR CONE WILL STILL BE ON THE SOFT SHOE, 4 WASHERS MEASURE APX 1/4 INCH.

4A Customer (3/26/07): Richard - more of a compliment than a question. I recently had a big class A amp go crazy on me and fry one of the drivers in my 4A speakers - melted the voice coil and popped it right out onto the cone where it embedded itself. You reconed it and sent it back and as part of the set up I for the first time had a friend in the business check my system for in room response. He said that he had rarely seen as flat a response from 24 Hz to 10K (I run the 4As biamped and supplemented with a 2W. I had to boost the tweeters 3 dB and the bass about the same - he said none of his customers would ever have the bass turned down too LOW). He was also impressed with the quality of components you used and said it made a nice change from the megabuck speakers he had to work with that used drivers worth a few bucks each. He also admired the open sound of my system but said that most of his customers wouldn't know the difference as long as their movies made enough noise (I think he is a bit fed up with the 'bang and boom' mind set). Thought you might like to know that even your old designs were appreciated out here!

Answer: HELLO 4A CUSTOMER, THANKS FOR YOUR KIND WORDS. WE RECEIVE MANY POSITIVE COMMENTS BUT NOT ON A SPEAKER VERY FEW HAVE EVER HEARD OF AS WE ONLY MANUFACTURED 250 PAIR.

Ron (3/24/07): I have a pair of 1B speakers from the late 80s which still sound fantastic (with my original NAD 7240). I just bought a used NAD 7250 and am planning on switching out the receivers from living room to bedroom (with Paradigm Mini Monitors). Question: I somehow reread the owner's manual and it appears on face value that I might want to use the 4 ohm setting instead of the 8 ohm setting that I've used over the past 17+ years (based on NAD's specs.).Please advise? We listen to a cross section of music, mostly alternative, but rarely turn the volume past 5.Thanks

Answer: HELLO RON, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR YOUR RECEIVER OR CALL THEIR TECH LINE. THE IB'S ARE 6 OHMS.

Bill (3/23/07): I have a pair of 3A Signatures and a VTL ST-85 tube amp. The Stereophile review of the VTL-85 amp says you can get significant improvement by using 2 amps, one for each stereo channel. I was thinking about buying another ST-85 and trying this, but am not sure exactly how to wire it. I read your FAQ about bi-wiring and understand that, but it does not mention bi-amping. My sense is, I would run the left preamp out to one amp, with a "Y" adapter at the amp, and then run speaker wire from one amp output terminal to the woofer terminal on the speaker, and another speaker wire from the other amp output to the mid/high terminal on the speaker, and then do the same with the other amp. Thanks for your advice.

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE REVIEW IN STEREOPHILE IS TALKING ABOUT BI-AMPING THE SPEAKERS WHICH GIVES THE SPEAKER NO MORE POWER BUT DOES HAVE THE BENEFIT OF BI-WIRING. YOU WOULD STILL HAVE ONLY 70 WATTS AVAILABLE TO EACH DRIVER. I WOULD ASK VTL IF THE AMPLIFIER CAN BE BRIDGED FOR MORE POWER, THAT WOULD BE WHAT A PAIR OF 3A SIG'S MIGHT ENJOY.

Gordon (3/23/07): Are there any plans to create a Signature version of the 1C speaker, for the 2-way fans out here?Thanks,

Answer: HELLO GORDON, I BELIEVE WE ARE GETTING ABOUT ALL WE CAN GET WITHOUT SPENDING A LOT MORE MONEY. IN THE END YOU CAN NOT GET MID RANGE FREQUENCIES OUT OF A WOOFER ACCURATELY WITH LOW DISTORTION. WHEN A SPEAKER GET OVER $1000.00 PER PAIR I THINK A MID RANGE DRIVER IS IN ORDER. I KNOW THERE ARE MANY IN THE MARKET BUT THEY ARE NOT TIME AND PHASE CORRECT OR COMPROMISE BASS, THE FOUNDATION OF MUSIC.

Dan (3/22/07): I own a pair of 2C's, purchased new, dating from the 1980's. (I don't have the serial numbers handy, but can supply them if desired.) What upgrades and refurbishments are available, and at what costs? And what portion of the work could I do myself, having parts shipped to me? (Note that I am far from a neophyte; I possess a fair amount of technical knowledge.) Or would I be better off buying a pair of 2Ce's on the used market? As a first step, can you provide me instructions as to removing the socks from the 2C's (to facilitate inspecting the drivers)? (Such that, of course, the socks can be replaced.) Thanks. P.S. I no longer have a local Vandersteen dealer in Huntsville, Alabama. (The nearest one listed is in Mobile, which is some 6-7 hours away by car.) If I were to decide to purchase a new set of Vandersteen's, what options do I have? (E.g., might I be able to buy directly from Vandersteen?) Thanks again for any information you can supply. Dan

Answer: HELLO DAN, THE MODEL 2 SERIES HAS NEVER BEEN NOR WILL BE UPGRADEABLE, NOT COST EFFECTIVE. WE HAVE ALL THE PARTS TO REBUILD ANY DRIVER IN YOUR SPEAKERS. LOOK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS. IF YOU WANT AN IMPROVED SPEAKER WITH MODERN TECHNOLOGY BUY A NEW PAIR OF 2CE SIG II FROM YOUR NEAREST DEALER. WE DO SELL DIRECT TO PEOPLE IN REMOTE LOCATIONS BUT ORDERING THEM FROM YOUR NEAREST DEALER WILL SAVE YOU MONEY AS THEY USUALLY ABSORB THE FREIGHT COSTS.

Tomas (3/22/07): My name is Tomas i wonder if its possible to get the correct crossover, to the 2wq if you do not have the variable crossover that should come with the 2wq, my dealer has lost the variable and is not interested to help me, i have the 3a speaker (not the signature) and the impedance of my amp is 60k.ohm Tanks for an answer .P.S i live in sweden.

Answer: HELLO TOMAS, NOT DOING THE EXPERIMENT IS NOT THE BEST WAY TO GET OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE. IF YOU HAD TO TAKE A CHANCE I WOULD TAKE 50K BEING THE CLOSEST TO THE ACTUAL VALUE.

Mark (3/21/07): Mr. Vandersteen, Hello. Today I called with a technical question on how to hook my 2C's up in a non-bi-wired configuration. I was informed that I should speak to the technical people and that Richard was not in but I could have him call me or I could call him on his cell phone. I can think of no other industry where the owner and designer of the product will A. answer your technical questions and B. where they will call you or you can call them. It is amazing and a testament to your company. My question is: I have 2C's, serial numbers 9224c and 9225c. Can you tell me how old they are? and I am assuming that they are not upgradeable, but are they? Also how can they be run non bi-wired. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO MARK, THE TWO RED CONNECTORS ON THE BACK OF THE SPEAKER MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER AND THEN CONNECTED TO THE RED TERMINAL ON THE AMP. CONNECT THE TWO BLACK TOGETHER THE SAME WAY AND CONNECT THEM TO THE BLACK TERMINAL ON THE AMP. IMPROVISE HOWEVER NECESSARY LIKE A Y AT THE SPEAKER AND THE SPEAKER WILL BE SUCCESSFULLY MONO WIRED. THE MODEL TWO IS NOT UPGRADABLE AND ARE APX 25 YEARS OLD. WE STILL HAVE ALL THE PARTS NECESSARY TO REBUILD THEM.

Adrian (3/21/07): Richard the Stereophile April 2007 edition has the Vandersteen Quatro listed as a recommended restricted class A component however what is a bit confusing is that they also have the Vandersteen Quatro Signature listed as class K which suggest to the reader be on the lookout for an upgraded or upcoming product. Thus as a perspective buyer in the near future what is the difference between the Quatro and Signature Quatro? If the Quatro did go through a minor transformation what changed from the original product?

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, ALL QUATRO'S ARE SIGNATURES WHICH MEANS THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY TUNED IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER. I DO NOT KNOW WHAT STEREOPHILE HAD IN MIND BUT COULD BE THE QUATRO WOOD WHICH IS A SLIGHTLY BETTER SPEAKER.

Matt (3/21/07): Can I use a multi channel amplifier to bi-amp Vandersteen speakers?

Answer: HELLO MATT, THIS IS NOT RECOMMENDED AS THE CHANNEL HOOKED UP TO THE MID-TWEET WILL SEE ONLY A CAPACITIVE LOAD WITH NO GROUND RETURN. THIS WILL CAUSE BURNT PARTS IN THE X-OVER BECAUSE THE AMP IS OSCILLATING AT VERY HIGH FREQUENCIES. THIS IS WHY SOME PEOPLE THINK IT IS MORE OPEN BECAUSE IT IS BRIGHTER. THE BEST ALTERNATIVE IS MONO AMP WITH SHORT SPEAKER WIRES. THE MONEY SAVED ON SHORT WIRES WILL BUY A BETTER PAIR OF AMPS.

Curtice (3/20/07): Thanks for the answer (3/12/07) regarding the impracticality of a pair of carbon fiber Quatros. Three follow-up questions follow. At CES you (or actually, your wife and daughter in a nice Stereophile shot) were showing a pair of Quatros in "composite ebony". I know what the word "composite" means, but (1) what exactly is this "composite ebony", which you spoke very highly of from the couple of quotes that were passed along? I am interested in a finish for the Quatros that is on the darker side (I personally like how it looks with the small black grill versus a higher contrast choice like a maple or even a cherry finish). I have some opinions and constraints on particular veneers that will go in my room, but wondered if (2) you had some particular suggestions - including the composite ebony - given the numerous pair that you have seen pass through the factory? Finally, (3) will you use or match to some degree a customer-provided stain? Thanks again,

Answer:HELLO CURTICE, COMPOSITE EBONY IS A MAN MADE PRODUCT MADE TO LOOK LIKE EBONY AND IS A STANDARD FINISH. IN FACT EVERY ONE WILL LOOK EXACTLY LIKE THE ONE IN THE STEREOPHILE PICTURE. I WOULD CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER ON THE FINISHES. CUSTOM STAIN IS POSSIBLE IF YOU PROVIDE THE STAIN (1 PINT) AND A SAMPLE ON THE WOOD YOU ORDER FOR $250.00.

Robert (3/20/07): Hello Richard, I have a pair of 2ce Signatures that I am running with a Jolida JD1000 100 wpc. tube amp. I find myself listening to most music at around 9 o'clock on the volume control, which shows the 2ce's to be a very efficient speaker indeed (at least compared to the Magnepans I had). My question is, if I moved up to the 3a Sigs, would I still have plenty of headroom on my amplifier (that's important to me), or might it be strained a bit? Thanks so much for making such a wonderful musical experience available to us.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THE SENSITIVITY IS ABOUT THE SAME, HOWEVER IT IS 4 OHMS. I WOULD TAKE THE AMPLIFIER TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND TRY IT OUT TO BE SURE.

Seb (3/20/07):Would I be better served by a pair of used 2Ci's or a pair of new 1C's? This is for music only, and powered by a mid-nineties 40W/ch Arcam integrated. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO SEB, I WOULD GO WITH THE 1C'S BECAUSE THEY ARE HIGHER SENSITIVITY AND A EASY LOAD TO DRIVE. 40 WATTS IS NOT ENOUGH POWER FOR MOST PEOPLE WITH THE 2CI.

Sanjay (3/17/07): I plan a purchase a pair of 2wq subs to augment the Meadowlark Shearwaters I use in my listening/HT setup. Music is my primary concern. My question is, why did you choose not to include a switch able line-level/speaker-level input like some other manufacturers? My past experience is that a properly integrated subwoofer for stereo, fed by speaker-level, sounds very lean for home theater sound. My Outlaw Audio 950 surr processor has the ability to set the subwoofer output level, and adjust the bass boost and cut-off for the front speakers.

Answer: HELLO SANJAY, THE 2WQ IS DESIGNED FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE AUDIO USE AND IS OPTIMIZED FOR THAT. WE DISCOVERED THAT IN ORDER FOR A SUB TO BLEND WITH THE MAIN SPEAKERS SEAMLESSLY THE HIGH PASS AMPLIFIERS CHARACTER HAD TO BE PASS ON AND THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND AMPLIFIER HAD TO BE HIGH PASSED. MOST PROCESSORS HAVE A BASS BOOST CIRCUIT FOR MORE ROBUST HT WORK. A SUB WITHOUT HIGH PASS CAN NEVER CROSSOVER CORRECTLY AND THE MAIN SPEAKERS WOOFERS WILL PUMP USELESSLY USING AMPLIFIER POWER AT FREQUENCIES WHERE THERE IS NO ACOUSTIC OUTPUT.

Ian (3/17/07): I have a pair of the 2Ce speakers with bases. We have recently moved from a house with carpeted floor where the spikes in the bases gave good floor contact to a house with wooden floors. Is there another alternative to spikes in the bases since they look a bit brutal for the wooden floor?

Answer: HELLO IAN, CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ORDER A SET OF SOFT SHOES TO PUT UNDER THE SPIKES.

Stan (3/14/07): I am replacing my solid state mono amps with Quicksilver v4's. Do I connect my 3A Signatures to the 4 or 8 ohm connections on the amplifer? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO STAN, PERUSE THE POSTINGS HERE THIS HAS BEEN COVERED IN DETAIL.

Rob (3/14/07): I am planning to get a HT speakers set, 2CE Sig II's, a VCC-2 and two surround speakers. Is there any difference in the sound between the VCC-1 and the VSM-1? I have book cases in the rear corners of my room where I plan to put the surround speakers. I could put VCC-1's on top of the book cases. That would also let me adjust their angle. I have been very impressed with the sound of the 2CE's at Audio Connection. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO ROB, THE VCC-1 IS A CENTER CHANNEL SO I WOULD NOT USE THEM. PERUSE THIS FORUM OR ASK YOUR DEALER FOR SUGGESTIONS FOR YOUR APPLICATION. WITH OUT SEEING YOUR ROOM I WOULD THINK VSM-1 WOULD WORK ON THEIR SIDES AND YOU DO NOT WANT TO AIM THEM AT YOU.

Gary (3/14/07): Hi Richard - I have an opportunity to buy a pair of well-maintained 2ci speakers at a reasonable price (the owner has since upgraded to Quatros). I am aware that more current versions of this model are the 2ce and 2ce Signature. I realize that the newer versions are improvements over the 2ci, but without the opportunity to compare I don't have any concept of what I'd be "missing" in settling on the 2ci. Can you give me just a very brief rundown on differences in both sonics and construction between these versions? Thanks much in advance!

Answer: HELLO GARY, THIS HAS BEEN TALKED ABOUT ON THIS FORUM MANY TIMES. REMEMBER YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT 20 YEARS OF CONTINUOUS DEVELOPMENT. THERE IS NO COMPARISON EXCEPT THE BASIC PRINCIPALS OF TIME AND PHASE CORRECT WAVEFORM PRESERVATION AND THE BOXLESS DESIGN. NONE OF THE PARTS ARE COMMON EXCEPT THE DIAMETER OF THE DRIVERS IN MOST CASES.

Ken (3/14/07): I need to replace the amps powering my 2Ce's. A couple of possibilities that I am considering are: Antique Sound Lab Typhoon stereo amplifier, Audio Source Power 300, Parasound Halo A23, Vincent SV-12, Antique Sound Lab AV-25. Please let me know which of these would provide the best sound and reliability. If none are appropriate, please give me your recommendation for a decent amp at a semi affordable price. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO KEN, I HAVE NOT LISTENED TO ANY OF THE AMPS YOU LISTED NOR HAVE I SEEN THEM ON THE WARRANTY CARDS WITH ANY REGULARITY. I SUGGEST YOU HAVE A LISTENING SESSION WITH YOUR DEALER AND SEE WHAT HE RECOMMENDS FOR YOUR BUDGET. THE BEST PART OF THAT IS YOU WILL BE ABLE TO LISTEN AND SEE IF IT FLOATS YOUR BOAT. MOST POPULAR AMPS I SEE ON THE WARRANTY CARDS ARE AUDIO RESEARCH AND AYRE.

Tony (3/13/07): I am getting your Quatro's soon. I want them to be perfect... In your manual you state that once you set the bass room compensation, you don't need to change until you move them again. I know that the total break in period is about 400 hours, do you recommend waiting until the full break in period first, or would calibartion new out of the box remain even after the break in?

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE BREAK IN OF THE QUATRO HAS NO EFFECT ON YOUR ROOM NODES, I WOULD HAVE THE BASS ADJUSTED BY THE DEALER AT THE TIME OF DELIVERY.

Sky (3/13/07): Hi Richard. I will be purchasing the new 2ce Sig II's, and have reviewed all of the questions regarding the minimum listening distance required for phase coherence which you have stated to be 6 feet. I will be sitting in a relatively small room 6 to 7 feet from the speakers (so I am safe here) with my listening height at 39/40". What would be the minimum or preferred distance BETWEEN the 2 speakers to compliment my short listening distance while keeping the phase coherence correct. My room is 10 x 12 and the speakers will be on the long wall. Also, they will be 1 foot in from the wall. Thanks, 

Answer: HELLO SKY, THERE IS NO MINIMUM PER SAY EXCEPT WHAT WORKS IN YOUR ROOM. ROOM VARY AND THE SOUND WILL NOT BE DETERMINED SOLELY BY THE ROOMS DIMENSION. ASK YOUR DEALER AS THEY HAVE EXPERIENCE PLACING THEM IN DOZENS OF ROOMS, NOT I.

Lars (3/12/07): Richard, Since the new 2ce's use the 3A tweeter, mid speaker, and crossover network, plus both have the same 8" & 10" woofer what would be the reason to get the 3A's. Thanks for the feedback! Lars P.S. I'm excited about getting the new VCC2 I heard it and thought it made the front stage sound wide open.

Answer: HELLO LARS, THE 8 AND 10 ARE NOT THE SAME AND ARE MORE ADVANCED DRIVERS WORKING IN A MUCH LARGER ENCLOSURE. THE X-OVER IS ALSO DIFFERENT. GLAD YOU FIND THE VCC-2 AS GOOD AS I DO, SECOND ONLY TO THE VCC-5.

Curtice (3/12/07): I note that the 5a is available now in carbon fiber as a $5k option and you say it has improved bass (that's cool); I wonder would a carbon fiber clad Quattro (the "Wood" ones) make technical or application sense, and, have a potential to make it to market? I understand that it could be bumping up on the price of a pair of 5a's (which I already own), but would be an interesting choice for another situation (I will be ordering a set of Quatros in the near future) where I do not want speakers quite as large as a pair of 5's.

Answer: HELLO CURTICE, THE QUATRO WOULD REQUIRE MORE CARBON AND BE WAY TOO EXPENSIVE. THE TWO 8" WOOFERS IN THE QUATRO DO NOT PUT THE ENERGY IN THE PANELS LIKE THE JACKHAMMER PUSH-PULL 12" IN THE 5A. PUTTING THAT MUCH MONEY ELSEWHERE IN THE SYSTEM WOULD GIVE A BETTER RETURN SONICALLY.

Dan (3/12/07): Hello Richard, I am the owner of the model 5, now upgraded to the model 5a and very satisfied. I am using ARC (Ref3/CD7/PH5) electronics and considering the new ARC Ref 110 tube amp to drive the 5as. I have listened to this setup at a local dealer and the demo sounded excellent. My question is the 110wpc ample power to drive the speaker. Thank-you.

Answer: HELLO DAN, IF IT WASN'T IT WOULD NOT HAVE SOUNDED "EXCELLENT" YOUR WORDS. TRUST YOUR EARS.

Gregg (3/11/07): Hi Richard. I currently am enjoying my 1c's with my recently purchased Audio Research VSI55 integrated and Rega Apollo cd player. I would really like to upgrade to the new 2ce signature II's. My listening room is relatively small at only 9x12'. I sit centered, roughly 7 feet away, listening height 42" with the speakers spaced 6 feet apart and 1 foot in from the wall. As you can probably tell I don't have much room to play with in terms of moving the speakers around. Do you think the 2c's would be too much speaker in this limited space. I recently read an article saying that the 2c's need to be placed well into the room for the best sound. I really love the new 2c's but don't want to be disappointed after I purchase them and they don't sound right in my room. What do you think?

Answer: HELLO GREGG, MAKE IT WORTHWHILE FOR YOUR DEALER TO MAKE A VISIT, IT IS THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE. MANY PEOPLE CALL ME EVERY DAY WITH INFORMATION THEY READ SOMEWHERE ON THE NET THAT MAY HAVE BEEN TRUE 20 YEARS AGO BUT THE PRODUCT TODAY SHARES A TOP AND A COUPLE OF KNOBS ON THE BACK. THEY ARE VERY DIFFERENT IN THAT THE PATH STARTED 30 YEARS AGO IS THE SAME BUT WE ARE MILES DOWN THE ROAD.

Puzzled (3/11/07): Hi Richard. I heard that new Vandersteen's break in after approximately 100 hours. They also said my Fostexes would break in after 1-5,000 hours, but I didn't notice much change...Thank you, Puzzled

Answer: HELLO PUZZLED, VANDERSTEEN'S START BREAKING IN THE MINUTE YOU START PLAYING THEM. THE PROCESS IS COMPLETE IN 400 HOURS WITH MOST OF IT OCCURRING IN THE FIRST 100 HOURS. I DO NOT UNDERSTAND WHY A MANUFACTURE WOULD SAY 1 - 5000 HOUR UNLESS THEY FEEL THEY NEED A LONG ACCLAMATION PERIOD.

David (3/10/07): Hello Richard, I'm considering the new 2ce mk2 and will be using A PSE MK 4 stereo amp and also the PSE mk5 mono's. What is the best configuration for set up? Mono's on the bottom (more power) or on top for better imaging (due to the mono separation) Thank you

Answer: HELLO DAVID, BI-WIRE USING THE THE MONO'S AND USE THE STEREO AMP IN ANOTHER SYSTEM. BE SURE TO PLACE THE MONO'S NEAR THE SPEAKERS SO THE WIRES ARE SHORT.

Garry (3/10/07): Hi Richard, Can I get 5a in carbon fiber? Garry

Answer: HELLO GARRY, THE MODEL 5A IS AVAILABLE IN CARBON FIBER FOR $5000.00 AS AN OPTION. THE BASS IS IMPROVED OVER THE REGULAR FINISH. THE CARBON OPTION HAS ONE LAYER BIDIRECTIONAL AS A BASE THEN FOUR UNI LAYERS SHIFTED 45 DEGREES FROM EACH OTHER, FINISHED WITH A HIGH GLOSS BIDIRECTIONAL LAYER.

Cynja (3/10/07): I own 2 pairs of Model 1 speakers (1st pair circa 1981 - serial # 2300 and 2301; second pair serial # 11500, 11501). They sound great, but was wondering whether there are any upgrades offered on this particular speaker. Also, the black cloth still looks perfect, but the wood trim is scratched and nicked in places -- can I refinish the wood portion without ruining sound/performance? Also, I notice that Vandersteen sells 1C speaker stands - I assume these will fit my speakers. How much will they affect the sound quality I presently have? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO CYNJA, NONE OF THE MODEL ONES OR TWOS ARE DESIGNED TO BE UPGRADEABLE. REFINISHING THE WOOD WOULD HAVE NO EFFECT ON THE SOUND BUT BE SURE TO MASK THE CLOTH VERY WELL AND KEEP THE NEW FINISHING MATERIAL AWAY FROM THE EDGE. THE CLOTH COULD ABSORB THE LIQUID BY CAPILLARY ACTION. THE 1C BASES WILL WORK BUT YOU WILL NEED TO BE HANDY TO IMPROVISE A METHOD OF MOUNTING. BASES PROPERLY INSTALLED USUALLY IMPROVE THE BASS AND TRANSIENT RESPONSE BUT I HAVE NOT TRIED THEM ON MODEL ONES AS WE DID NOT HAVE THEM AT THE TIME.

Andrew (3/09/07): Hello Richard, I've always lusted after the 5As and am now considering the purchase of a pair. In my current situation, though, I have a tough placement issue and I'm concerned that it may lead to some serious compromises. I'm moving into a new living room that is approximately 14 x 20 x 8. The speakers will need to be setup on the long wall. On top of this the speakers will need to be placed very close to the wall. I'm guessing that the controls on the 5A will address the issues with the bass, but I'm concerned that the soundstage will be severely compromised. Do you have any experience in placing 5As this close to the rear wall? In my setup they will be at least 4 feet from the side walls. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, YOU SHOULD ASK YOUR DEALER AS THEY HAVE PLACED 5A'S IN EVERY IMAGINABLE KIND OF ROOM. MY BEST GUESS WOULD BE IT WILL WORK BETTER THAN YOU THINK AND CERTAINLY BETTER THAN ANY OTHER SPEAKER. SIDE WALL REFLECTIONS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN THE BIGGER PROBLEM AND 4 FEET IS A LOT. THE SPEAKER IS DEEP WHICH PUTS THE TWEETER, MID AND MID WOOFER FURTHER INTO THE ROOM THAN MOST (GOOD). THE SOUND MIGHT BE COMPROMISED SLIGHTLY BUT THAT SHOULD NOT BANISH YOU TO A SPEAKER WITH NO SOUNDSTAGE. I WOULD PUT SOME DIFFUSIVE MATERIAL DIRECTLY BEHIND YOUR HEAD AND THE DEALER WILL ADJUST THE BASS....PASS THE WINE.

Don (3/09/07): Richard, my wife loves the sound of our 3A Signatures in our HT, but hates the look. She likes the size and shape of the Quatros, however, and given how they bowled over our buddy Fremer, I'm intrigued by the potential improvement in sound. My problem - my good friend Tommy Pallazola closed his dealership (Flip's Stereo Place) up here in St. Louis, so I have no idea where to audition or purchase a pair of Quatros. My question - do you sell directly via mail order, and if so, do you take trade-in's ? If not, who is the closest dealer you would recommend ?? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DON, THIS IS EASY CAUSE YOU SEEM PREPARED TO ORDER DIRECTLY FROM THE FACTORY (WE DO NOT DO THAT) BUT YOU CAN GO ON OUR WEB SITE AND FIND THE NEAREST DEALER WHICH WILL BE MUCH CLOSER THAN THE FACTORY AND SAVE YOURSELF SOME MONEY. YOUR A LUCKY GUY IF SHE HATES THEM ENOUGH TO LET YOU BUY THE MORE EXPENSIVE AND BETTER SOUNDING SPEAKER.

Lars (3/09/07): I bought a pair of 2ce sign last December. I heard new version came out the beginning of this year. What is the difference? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO LARS, FOR OUR 30TH ANNIVERSARY THE MODEL 3A SIGNATURE MID-RANGE AND TWEETER ARE INSTALLED ALONG WITH DOZENS OF CHANGES TO THE STRUCTURE AND X-OVER TO FACILITATE THEM. THEY ARE MORE EXPENSIVE AT $1995.00.

Don (3/07/07): Richard, Are quality jumpers with a good quality cable superior to internally bi-wire cables? What about running two sets of separate cables from amp to speakers? I really enjoy my 2CE Signatures. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DON, THIS HAS BEEN BEATEN TO DEATH ON THIS FORUM SO HERE WE GO. JUMPERS WITH MONO WIRE OF EQUAL QUALITY WILL ALWAYS SOUND BETTER THAN INTERNAL BI-WIRE. TWO SEPARATE WIRES FROM AMP TO SPEAKER IS TRUE BI-WIRE AND GIVEN SIMILAR WIRE QUALITY WILL BE SUPERIOR.

Renato (3/07/07): Hello Richard, I have tile hard floor and normal painted concrete walls. What would you suggest to improve sound quality? Acoustic panels on the roof and/or on the side walls should make a difference. I don't want to make a big change, only something to improve sound specially in the low frequency range. Cheers.

Answer: HELLO RENATO, ACOUSTIC TILES AND SURFACE TREATMENTS HAVE VERY LITTLE EFFECT ON BASS BUT CAN ACCENTUATE THE MIDS AND HIGHS. THIS COULD LEAVE THE IMPRESSION THAT THE BASS IS LITE. GENERALLY DIFFUSION IS THE WAY TO GO INSTEAD OF ABSORPTION. THE OWNERS MANUAL GIVES SOME SUGGESTIONS FOR WALL TREATMENT LOCATION AND DO NOT FORGET TO ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR IDEAS.

Al (3/05/07):Dear Richard, Hope this is a new question. I just ordered a pair of the Quatros from my local authorized dealer. I am currently using Cardas Golden Reference mono-wire speaker cable (8ft) to connect my amp to my current speakers. I have two options for speaker cables: 1- Have my Cardas Golden Reference reterminated in bi-wire with small spades, or 2- spring for Alpha Core ag1 in six- or eight-foot length in bi-wire. I'm willing to spend the extra bucks for the Alpha Core, but I understand that anything longer than 4 feet lengths would be suboptimal for these cables. Unfortunately, I can't go shorter than six feet because of amp placement in the room. Am I going to compromise the sound of the speakers with a longer length? Will the Cardas Golden Reference cables work. Ideally, I know that you recommend shotgun bi-wire, but the cost for a double run of Cardas Golden Reference would be out of my budget. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO AL, I WOULD NOT RECOMMEND BI-WIRE ALPHA CORE THAT LONG BECAUSE IT COULD CAUSE AMP AND SPEAKER PROBLEMS. ASK YOUR DEALER IF THEY HAVE EXPERIENCE TO GIVE YOU A RECOMMENDATION AND BACKUP THAT RECOMMENDATION WITH A DEMO TO SEE IF YOU AGREE.

Ash (3/05/07): Hi Richard, I have recently purchased a pair of Quatros and have been reading the manual that came with them. I am a novice audiophile so forgive me if this question is too basic. On page 5, the manual talks about true bi-wiring by using four separate sets of cables and has a diagram right next to the text. However, when I study the diagram it seems to me a diagram to show how to bi-amp the speaker (one amp terminal driving the bass, and another driving the mids/highs) rather than bi-wiring. The diagram on page 6 is closer to what I imagine bi-wiring to entail. Can you comment on this?

Answer: HELLO ASH, YOU ARE CORRECT AND HAVE FOUND A ERROR IN THE MANUAL. DOWN LOAD THE QUTRO MANUAL ON THIS WEB SITE FOR A CORRECTED ONE.

Jim (3/09/07): I am looking at buying a combo of the 1C's and a VCC-1. The only visually minimal position for the center channel is in the center of my stereo cabinet since it appears to bulky to put under my LCD. However, the opening is only 11.75" wide. Can/should I place the center channel on its side, deep in the cabinet, or will that change its sound qualities? Should it have a certain amount of space around it?

Answer: HELLO JIM, YOU CAN TURN THE VCC-1 ON ITS EDGE WITH NO SONIC DETERMENT. JUST MAKE SURE THE FRONT OF THE CENTER IS FLUSH WITH THE CABINET. YOU MIGHT WANT TO CHECK OUT THE VCC-2 AT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER IT IS DESIGNED TO HANG ON THE WALL UNDER THE LCD TV.

Joe (3/02/07): Hello Mr. Vandersteen. I own and love a pair of very early model 2ce's and am thinking that my next upgrade might be to move to the 2ce signatures. I am on a budget which requires me to purchase units from previous owners and am searching for a pair right now. Your statement that SN#57374 AND ABOVE had a "significant" change has had me tossing and turning and I cannot sleep ;). Finding units above this serial # is not an easy task... Should I be holding out for this? If you could I'd love to know what this change was... I have found some 2ce sigs VERY close to this serial # BTW.. thanks for keeping this section up to date.. I think its a great idea.

Answer: HELLO JOE, BE PATIENT THERE WERE TO MANY CHANGES TO LIST BUT WORTHWHILE. WITH THE NEW MARK II VERSION OUT NOW ITS ONLY A MATER OF TIME AND ONE WILL SHOW UP.

Peter (3/01/07): Hello Richard, congratulations on the Quatros I have recently acquired these absolutely superb speakers. I want to learn how to set them up myself (I'm an old hifi guy from college; started with AR-3s & Dynacos- built a couple of the latter's amps). So I know my way around, but have a couple of questions regarding the instructions on p. 11 of the operation manual:1)verify that the SN# on the SPL meter match the SN# on the test disc?  what does this mean? Is SN# serial number 2)I'm not sure what the test disc actually is. Is it the Stereophile #1 or #2 CD? All 3 of these CDs have a series of test tones (bass decade) in reverse order to the list in the manual.? I. e., the manual lists the freqs. of the 1- 11 bands as 20 thru 120 and the tones on the CDs begin with 200 and end with 20; also, the freqs. are not exactly the same (manual: 20, 24, 30, 36, 42, 50, 60, 72,84, 100, 120) and (CDs: 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 63, 50, 40, 31.5, 25, 20). And there are only 11 tracks total; the manual implies more (12-22).BTW, the Radio Shack analog SPL meter (part #33-4050) still seems to be available, according to a local store (although their website indicates otherwise). I got one there today.

Answer: HELLO PETER, CONGRATULATIONS ON YOUR NEW SPEAKERS AND THANK YOU. SETTING UP THE QUATRO'S IS BEYOND WHAT I HAVE TIME AT HOME TO DO ON THIS FORUM. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR DEALER FOR ADVICE ON HOW THIS IS DONE, THAT'S WHAT THEY WERE PAID TO DO. THE RADIO SHACK METER TO USE IS PART#33-2050. A FEW TIPS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO START WITH 20 HZ BY SELECTING THE TRACK AND ADJUSTING THE POT CLOSEST TO THE FREQ. SOME OF THE WARBLE TONES ARE BETWEEN POTS ON THE QUATRO SO ADJUST HALF ON ONE AND HALF ON THE OTHER.

Dave (2/27/07): Hi, Richard. You've responded to me and some other people that hum problems are possible when using the 2wqs with a passive pre or a TVC. So, I'm just wondering: How can I tell if my system is likely to experience this hum? Is this a completely arbitrary thing, or is there a way to tell from the specs of my system whether hum is likely. I'm a bit concerned about this because my dealer down here in South Florida does not allow in-home auditions or returns. By the way, my speakers are 2ce Signatures. Thanks again.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE POSSIBILITY OF HUM HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH THE 2WQ ONLY THE REQUIRED HIGH-PASS. YOU COULD BRING YOUR PASSIVE PRE TO THE DEALER AND INSTALL IT INTO THE SYSTEM AND FIND OUT OR BRING THE HIGH-PASS HOME AND INSTALL IT IN YOUR SYSTEM. IF THERE IS NO HUM YOUR GOOD TO GO. THERE IS NO NEED TO BRING THE HEAVY SUB HOME.

John (2/27/07): Question 1: What's the likelihood of having a pair of Model 5 speakers room-tuned in Lincoln Ne? Apparently the dealer I purchased my 3A's from is no longer associated with Vandersteen .Question 2: Are any upgrades of the Model 5 to 5A optional irrespective of others? Question 3: Can any or all upgrades to Model 5A be completed "at home/ on site" and for that matter by a non authorized technician?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, FIND YOUR NEAREST VANDERSTEEN DEALER ON OUR WEB SITE THAT HAS 5A'S AND SEE WHAT YOU CAN ARRANGE. THERE IS ONLY ONE UPGRADE AVAILABLE ALL THE WAY TO THE 5A. THE MODEL 5A UPGRADE REQUIRES A ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND MUST BE INSTALLED AT THE FACTORY. THE PRICE DEPENDS ON THE 5 SN# AND INCLUDES FREIGHT BOTH WAYS WHEN ARRANGED BY VANDERSTEEN AUDIO.

Tony (2/25/07): I have a strange question for you. I am still looking to buy new Quatros from a local dealer. total price with the filters over $8000.  I also have a chance to get 3a Sigs w/ two 2Wqs for only $3800.00What would you purchase yourself, would you spend more on the Quatros, or save the money for something else and go with the 3a Sigs w/ two 2Wqs combo?

Answer: HELLO TONY, NOT A STRANGE QUESTION BUT TOUCHED ON IN SEVERAL PREVIOUS QUESTIONS ON THIS FORUM. THE 2WQ/3A SIG COMBO WOULD HAVE AN ADVANTAGE IN SHIER BASS OUTPUT (6 EACH 8 INCH WOOFERS VERSES 4). THE STRUCTURE OF THE QUATRO IS VERY INERT COMPARED TO THE 3A SIG AND THE MIDBASS DRIVER (COMPOSITE 6.5 INCH) LIGHTER THEREFORE QUICKER. SONICALLY THIS REVEALS MORE INNER INFORMATION AND A BLACKER BACK GROUND FOR ALL FREQUENCIES. THE X-OVER OF THE QUATRO IS HIGHER QUALITY AND MORE TRANSPARENT. THE QUATRO'S HAVE ROOM EQUALIZATION THE 2WQ DOES NOT HAVE. I THINK THE QUATRO IS A MUCH BETTER SOUNDING SPEAKER IN ALL BUT THE LARGEST ROOMS. IS THE DIFFERENCE BIG ENOUGH TO OVER COME $8000.00 VS $3800.00? THAT IS A LOT OF MONEY AND A DECISION MADE BY MANY EVERY DAY IN FAVOR TWO TO ONE FOR THE QUATRO'S BUT IT COULD BE COSMETICS. ONLY YOU CAN DECIDE AFTER A DEMO.

Kenton (2/23/07): I am a satisfied 5A owner. I am interested in setting them up more as recommended in the owner's manual. Currently I use runs of about 25 feet of Audioquest? Monte Blanc speaker cables to reach the speakers. I want to switch to 20-25 foot interconnects to mono-blocks by each speaker with short speaker cables. In your experience have you found that speaker cables can be too short for optimal performance? I ask this because several sources on the internet (i.e. Maple shade Audio) claim that 8 feet is as short as you want to go with speaker cable. This would be a lot of excess cable for an amp right next to a speaker. By the way, I know it's been said before but it's really very generous of you to spend your time answering customer questions. I hope it's not bogging you down too much.

Answer: HELLO KENTON, BUY THE MONO BLOCKS WITH SHORT SPEAKER WIRES AND YOU WILL BE PLEASED. MOST OF THE PEOPLE SAYING SPEAKER WIRE NEEDS TO BE A 8 FOOT MINIMUM ARE SELLING WIRE, SMOKE AND MIRRORS FOR TENS SOMETIMES HUNDREDS OF DOLLARS. LIKE MOST OPINIONS THERE USUALLY IS A HALF TRUTH. SOME SPEAKER DESIGNS NEED SOME RESISTANCE FOR THE WOOFERS TO BE PROPERLY Q ED. IN THAT CASE THE WOOFER COULD BE OVER DAMPED BY A BIT USUALLY LESS THAN 1 DB. MOST SPEAKERS IN A ROOM ARE HARD PRESSED TO BE PLUS AND MINUS 6 DB ANYWAY BUT IT MAY BE THE STRAW THAT BROKE THE CAMELS BACK ESPECIALLY WITH THE SCREECHING TWEETERS USED BY SOME. IN THESE CASES SHORT SPEAKER WIRES COULD BE USED WITH A NOBEL AUDIO PLATE RESISTORS FOR A COUPLE OF BUCKS. YOUR MODEL 5A'S HAVE INTERNAL AMPLIFIERS FOR THE BASS SO THIS IS NO FACTOR. MOST OF THE QUESTIONS I FIND INTERESTING, SO THEY ARE FUN, THE QUESTIONS COVERED BY THE OWNERS MANUAL....WELL!!!? THEY GET DUMPED MOST OF THE TIME.

Bob (2/22/07): Hi Richard, I love my Quatro speaker very much. My search lasted over 2 years of reading and demos and now that they are in my home for 6 months I enjoy them more and more. Unusual as most investments I have made in this hobby the best day was the first and down hill from there. My only complaint is I don't like the look when they are tilted. Why can't you adjust the location of the midrange and tweeter like some do instead?

Answer: HELLO BOB, YOU COULD ADJUST YOUR CHAIR HEIGHT TO 34.5 INCHES THAT WILL ALLOW THE QUATRO TO BE VERTICAL. PRESERVING THE WAVEFORM (TIME AND PHASE CORRECT) IS VERY DIFFICULT BECAUSE OF DRIVER OVERLAP. THE DRIVERS AND THE SURROUNDING BAFFLES MUST BE CAREFULLY ARRANGED SO THAT ALL FREQUENCIES COMMON BETWEEN THEM SUM TOGETHER AS ONE AND ARRIVE AT THE LISTENERS EAR AT THE SAME INSTANT. DRIVER ALIGNMENT WILL ASSURE THAT THE DRIVERS SPEAK AT THE SAME INSTANT AND COULD BE MOVED BACK AND FORTH TO ACCOMPLISH THIS WITH A CHART OR TEST INSTRUMENT. THE X-OVER IS ADJUSTED SO EACH DRIVER IS CONTRIBUTING THE CORRECT AMOUNT OF ENERGY TO SUM AS ONE INCLUDING THE COLLECTIVE ENERGY OF THE IMMEDIATE SURROUNDINGS. IF YOU MOVE THE DRIVERS RELATIONSHIP TO EACH OTHER THIS SUM OF ENERGY CHANGES AND REQUIRES X-OVER ADJUSTMENTS TO COMPENSATE, VERY DIFFICULT AND NOT VERY LINEAR. THE ONLY WAY TO DO THIS WITH TIMBREL ACCURACY IS TO LEAVE ALL DRIVERS FIXED AS FAR AS THEIR RELATIONSHIP TO EACH OTHER AND TILT THE WHOLE ASSEMBLY. WE HOLD PLUS MINUS TOLERANCES TO THE TENTH OF A DB IN A ANECHOIC CHAMBER WHICH IS PRESERVED BY TILTING THE SPEAKER AND WOULD BE VERY DIFFICULT IF THE DRIVERS WERE TO BE MOVED FOR ALIGNMENT.

Daren (2/22/07): Richard your critics say that time and phase are not critical and that in fact they have lobing problems and are not very dynamic. I am looking to upgrade my speakers and love the sound of Vandersteen but am confused by the varied advice. Would you care to comment?

Answer: HELLO DAREN, JUST BECAUSE SOME SAY THEY CAN NOT HEAR THE TIMBREL ACCURACY ALLOWED BY PRESERVING THE WAVEFORM DOES NOT MEAN IT IS NOT AUDIBLE. SOME SAY WIRES AND AMPLIFIERS ALL SOUND THE SAME AN ARGUMENT I WOULD NOT PARTICIPATE IN EVEN THOUGH I DO HEAR DIFFERENCES, MANY TIMES NOT IN FAVOR OF THE MOST EXPENSIVE. ALL MULTI DRIVER SPEAKERS HAVE LOBING AND OUR DESIGNS ARE NO EXCEPTION. IF THE SPEAKERS ARE SET UP CORRECTLY IN VERTICAL HEIGHT THERE IS LOBING WHERE THEIR HALO WOULD BE AND WHERE THEIR BELLYBUTTON IS BUT NOT AT EAR HEIGHT. THIS IS WHY WE PLACE OUR DRIVERS AS CLOSE TOGETHER AS POSSIBLE TO MIMIC A POINT SOURCE (WOOFERS EXCEPTED). SO IN THE REAL WORLD THIS IS A PROBLEM ONLY WHEN CRITICALLY LISTENING WHEN STANDING OR SITTING ON THE FLOOR. FIRST ORDER SPEAKER DESIGNS CAN BE CHALLENGED IN THE DYNAMICS DEPARTMENT WHEN TOO FEW DRIVERS ARE USED (IE. HIGH DOLLAR 2 WAY) BUT NOT WHEN AN ADEQUATE AMOUNT ARE USED TO DO THE TASK. EXCEPT FOR THE 1C ALL OF OUR DESIGNS ARE 4 WAY OR BETTER FOR THIS REASON. I SUGGEST YOU AUDITION THE VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS FOR YOURSELF AND MAKE YOUR OWN OBSERVATIONS.

Robert (2/21/07): I am considering buying a pair of 3A Signatures but understand that there is a new version of the 3's coming out soon. Is this true? If true will I have the option of sending the 3A Signatures in to be upgraded? If I can upgrade could you give me price or estimate? Thank you

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THERE ARE NO CHANGES PLANNED IN THE FORESEEABLE FUTURE FOR THE MODEL 3A SIGS. IF AND WHEN THERE IS A CHANGE, IT WILL BE AVAILABLE AS AN UP-GRADE.

Jonas (2/21/07): Richard, I have a pair of 5A's that will need to be tuned. I am also going to buy a VCC-5 but it may take a little while. Will the addition of a VCC-5 into a room change the tuning of the bass? In other words, should I wait to tune the bass until I get the VCC-5?

Answer: HELLO JONAS, THE VCC-5 WILL HAVE NO EFFECT ON THE TUNING OF THE MODEL 5A.

Rocky (2/20/07): I recently ordered a pair of Quatros, and I am really looking forward to having them in my home. From what I read in your literature and on your website, the power requirements are based on room size and listening level. I just want to make sure that a 200 watts per channel solid state amplifier is not too much power. My room is fairly small, 11' x 17' x 9' ceiling. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ROCKY, YOU CAN NOT HAVE TOO MUCH POWER ONLY TOO LITTLE. TWO HUNDRED WATTS IN THE HANDS OF A SOBER PERSON IS NO PROBLEM. YOU WILL BE IN GOOD SHAPE.

Tony (2/19/07): Richard, I'm about to buy a new pair of the Vandersteen Quatro's - There is no coming soon update the the Quatros in the next year or so is there? I don't want to buy them then here about an amazing update to them for the same price as what I paid.

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE QUATRO IS ONLY 2 YEARS OLD, I HAVE NOT FOUND ANY MODS THAT ARE NOT ALREADY IN THE PRODUCT THAT WOULD IMPROVE THE SOUND WITH OUT DRAMATICALLY RAISING THE PRICE. REMEMBER THE QUATRO SPEAKER IS UPGRADABLE.

Nick (2/17/07): How does the Quatro (wood finish) compare to the Model 5? The Model 5 is a more attractive speaker, but have never gotten to hear it. In your opinion, which is the better speaker?

Answer: HELLO NICK, THE QUATRO'S COMPARE FAVORABLY WITH THE MODEL 5 SPEAKER EXCEPT IN THE BASS. THE PUSH PULL 12 INCH WOOFER IN THE MODEL 5 IS MORE CAPABLE, AND ITS ABILITY TO FOLLOW THE WAVEFORM AND S.P.L. OUTPUT IS SUPERIOR. THE MODEL 5A IS TOP TO BOTTOM A MORE TRANSPARENT SPEAKER WITH HIGHER PERFORMANCE COMPONENTS. CALL AND ASK FOR THE NEAREST DEALER WHO CAN DEMO THE MODEL 5A.

Jay (2/17/07): Hi Richard; I have 3A Signatures which I love. I want to add a pair of your 2Wq subwoofers, but I have a Placette Audio RVC passive preamplifier. Are there any compatibility problems with a passive preamp and the crossover for the subwoofers?

Answer: HELLO JAY, YOU COULD HAVE HUM PROBLEMS WHEN INSERTING THE REQUIRED HIGH-PASS.

Raymond (2/16/07): Hi Richard your last comment to Jonas 2/15/07 how digital is really not Hi rez. I disagree, I have a great front end for my 5As and my source is HI resolution digital using the world famous Benchmark Dac1 Give it a listen sometime you may change your mind...

Answer: HELLO RAYMOND, I DID NOT SAY CD SOUNDS BAD, IT CAN BE VERY GOOD. HAVING SAID THAT I KNOW THERE IS A LOT MORE INFORMATION ON A RECORD, YOU CAN SEE IT ON A SCOPE. TODAY MOST PEOPLE INVOLVED IN THE RECORDING BUSINESS KNOW THIS AND THAT IS WHY VINYL IS HAVING SUCH A RESURGENCE.

John (2/15/07): I have a 20 year old pair od 2C's that had the Ci upgrade and I love them. Is it possible to upgrade the drivers to the current model?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, I DO NOT KNOW WHAT KIND OF UPGRADE YOU HAVE IN YOUR 2C SPEAKERS BUT IT WAS NOT A 2CI UPGRADE BECAUSE THAT WOULD HAVE BEEN IMPOSSIBLE (TOO MANY CHANGED ITEMS). THE NEW DRIVERS ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH YOUR CABINET, X-OVER OR THE DRIVER ALIGNMENT. THE ONLY PARTS COMMON BETWEEN YOUR 2C SPEAKERS AND THE 2CE SIG II ARE THE TOPS AND THE X-OVER KNOBS ON THE BACK.

Jonas (2/15/07):  Richard, I am close to purchasing one of your VCC-5's to go with my 5A's. Before I purchase, I was wondering if in the next year or so, you had plans for an upgrade or new center channel model that would surpass the VCC-5. Thank you for operating this forum.

Answer: HELLO JONAS, WE HAVE NO PLANS TO MAKE A MORE EXPENSIVE CENTER SPEAKER. I THINK THE MONEY SHOULD GO INTO THE SOURCE ONCE THIS LEVEL HAS BEEN ATTAINED. YOU WOULD BE SURPRISED HOW MANY AUDIOPHILES HAVE MODEL 5A'S, GREAT AMPLIFIERS, EXPENSIVE PROCESSORS, FIRST CLASS PRE-AMP FOR 2 CHANNEL AND NO HIGH REZ SOURCE (TURNTABLE). ALWAYS LOOKING FOR A WAY TO MAKE THEIR SYSTEM BETTER BUT HAVING NO IDEA WHAT THEIR PRESENT SYSTEM SOUNDS LIKE BECAUSE THE ONLY SOURCE IS DIGITAL.

Dwayne (2/13/07): I understand the vcc-2 is designed to be hung on the wall. Can I place it on a shelf of an entertainment center, and if so, what concerns or performance issues should I be aware of? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DWAYNE, THE VCC-2 MUST BE AGAINST THE WALL OR LARGE FLAT SURFACE TO WORK PROPERLY. THE VCC-1 AND THE VCC-5 ARE YOUR ONLY VANDERSTEEN OPTIONS IF THEY NEED TO BE INSTALLED IN A CABINET OR ENTERTAINMENT CENTER.

Bryan (2/12/07): I recently bought a pair of 2CE Sigs from Optimal Enchantment. I had previously been using a very early model of the 2C for quite a long time with very much satisfaction. Randy at OE was extremely gracious in allowing me to listen to my favorite music on the Sigs as long as I wanted. Wow, what a great sound and sound stage - the speakers really became invisible. You not only have the best speaker on the market (I've listened to many), you also, in my opinion from? personal experience, have a dealer network that really cares about the satisfaction of the consumer. Thank you for your dedication to great audio.

Answer: Thank you Bryan for your comments.

Adrian (2/11/07): Richard what the weights of the voice coils for the woofers and subwoofers on the Quatros. You do list these values on the specs for the Model 2CE Signatures and 3A Signatures. Your competitors use 7lb to 8lb midrange and woofers any reason to use such heavy drivers. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, THE WEIGHT OF THE DRIVER IS NOT AS IMPORTANT AS THEY BEING DESIGNED CORRECTLY FOR THE SPEAKER SYSTEM THEY ARE IN. 7 TO 8 LBS IS NOT UNUSUALLY HEAVY IN ANY CASE AND I DO NOT KNOW WHY THE MANUFACTURE WOULD BOTHER AS IT IS IRRELEVANT. MAYBE IT IS A OFF SHORE COMPANY AND SOMETHING WAS LOST IN THE TRANSLATION. ONLY YOU CAN DETERMINE AFTER LISTENING IF I USED DRIVERS HEAVY ENOUGH!

? (2/10/07):When I listen to my 2CE's in the dark, I sometimes see what looks like a little red light inside the speaker. What is that?

Answer: HELLO ?, CHECK IT OUT IN YOUR OWNERS MANUAL.

Keith (2/10/07): Richard, Thanks for you time last week on helping me figure out how to hang my rear speakers on my beam. After you told me it was best to not point the speakers at the listener, I came to the realization that mounting them flush is just fine. BUT, I still need to mount them horizontally since I only have a 13 inch beam to mount them on. Can I purchase 2 extra Vandersteen mounting brackets and use 2 on each speaker ... horizontally? That way I will have a very clean install and also, I am only scaring the backs of the speakers. (It may also save me an untimely death if I mount them against instructions from the ceiling.) Thanks very much.

Answer: HELLO KEITH, CALL ME 559-582-0324 FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS.

Kris (2/10/07): Greetings, what are the physical dimensions of the Vandersteen VCC2 center channel speaker? My dealer does not have one on hand, and describes it as yeah big (arms moderately outstretched). I don't find any VCC-2 specific information on the product pages or in the faq. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO KRIS, 9.25 HIGH, 5 DEEP, 33 WIDE. THE VCC-2 IS DESIGNED TO BE HUNG ON THE WALL JUST LIKE THE VSM-1 IN FACT THEY ARE THE SAME DEPTH. THIS WOULD WORK GREAT WITH A PLASMA, A VSM-1 ON EACH SIDE FOR RIGHT AND LEFT FRONT AND A VCC-2 UNDERNEATH FOR THE CENTER, ADD SUB AND HAVE FUN.

David (2/7/07): Hello Richard, I am looking into buying a center channel speaker to go with the two pairs of 2ce Signatures that I have. What is the difference between the VCC-2 and the VCC-5? Are they the same dimensionally and component wise? I take it the VCC-2 is not shielded and the VCC-5 is. I guess unshielded means 10" or more away from the display. Please advise as I am hoping to buy one soon. Closest dealer is in Detroit, I am near Grand Rapids. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE VCC-2 IS A WALL HUNG UNIT AND IS NOT SHIELDED AS YOU SAID. IF THAT WILL WORK FOR YOU IT IS A GREAT UNIT FOR YOUR 2 SIGS. IF YOU NEED A FREE STANDING CENTER THE VCC-5 OR VCC-1 ARE YOUR ONLY CHOICES AND THEY BOTH ARE SHIELDED. CALL YOUR DEALER IN DETROIT AND DISCUSS WHICH WILL WORK BEST IN YOUR SYSTEM.

NM (2/7/07): This isn't a question, just a comment: I've happily listened to a pair of 2Ce's since 1995. One of the "problems" with Vandersteen speakers that I seldom see discussed is that not only do they reveal deficiencies in associated equipment, they also ruthlessly expose poor recording technique. Bad recordings just sound bad, period. For a surprisingly good listening experience, I recommend "The Ballad of Baby Doe", by the Central City (CO) Opera Company, on the Newport Classic label. Opera may not be your cup of tea, but the SOUND of this recording -- WOW! It's as if you're seated about ten rows back from the orchestra pit. The voices are rich, the strings are sweet, and my good old old 2Ce's breathe every detail.

Answer: HELLO NM, THANKS FOR THE TIP, YOU ARE CORRECT ABOUT TOO MANY RECORDINGS. ITS GOOD TO HEAR ABOUT THE GOOD ONES.

Ray (2/3/07): Richard: i'm still in love with my 2c's, but i am intrigued by the new Quatros...do you offer any guidance/recommendations on amplifiers? I am out of the country--Russia--for at least another year and will look into their purchase when i get back, but in the meantime, my amp is acting up...(an old Nakamichi/Threshold) Any advice, if i have to replace the integrated amp I have, which would best complement your Quattro's ? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO RAY, YOU WOULD NOT WANT ANOTHER INTEGRATED BECAUSE THE QUATRO REQUIRES A HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMP. I WOULD WAIT FOR ANY MAJOR PURCHASE UNTIL YOU FIRM YOUR LOUDSPEAKER SELECTION. ONCE YOU ARE SURE ON THE SPEAKER THEN FIND THE EQUIPMENT THAT WORKS FOR YOU UNTIL THEN FIND SOMETHING USED AND CHEAP TO GET BY WITH. REMEMBER YOU ARE BUILDING A SYSTEM, NOT A HODGEPODGE OF HIGHLY RATED COMPONENTS.

Dave (2/2/07): I was wondering about recommended amplification for your quatros and whether given the changed drivers in the 2ce signature II's do you recommend more power than for the original 2ce signatures. I know from reading posting from several sources that my current amp (a Curcio modified Dynaco ST-70) while a bit below the 2ce signature's recommended amplification, that it powers them just fine. I've looked through the literature on your site, but been unable to find this info. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE SIG II'S ARE SLIGHTLY MORE EFFICIENT, ABOUT 1DB. IT ALL DEPENDS ON HOW LARGE THE ROOM IS AND HOW LOUD YOU PLAY YOUR MUSIC.

Dave (2/2/07): Hello Richard. My system, used for both music and HT, is in a large, vaulted ceiling, open plan room with all Dunlavy speakers (Alethas for the mains, SM-1 center and SC-I surrounds) and a Velodyne FSR-15 sub. I want to swap out the sub for a pair of 2WQs but with no Massachusetts dealer anymore, it's a pretty big investment to make without ever hearing the 2WQ. Tough question I know, but would you be able to comment on what improvements I should expect to hear with this change? Also, are dealers allowed to sell on-line if there is no local dealer. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DAVE, USING STEREO SUBS WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT FOR MUSIC AND LOWERING THE DISTORTION OF YOU MAIN SPEAKERS. I WOULD KEEP YOUR PRESENT SUB FOR THE L.F.E. ON MOVIES. OUR DEALERS ARE RESTRICTED TO SALES IN THEIR AREA. OUR WEB SITE HAS A DEALER LISTING JUST CALL THE CLOSEST ONE TO YOU. I WOULD PICK THE SUB UP BECAUSE OUR PACKAGING IS NOT DESIGNED FOR RE-SHIP AND THE RISK FOR DAMAGE IS GREATER.

Doug (2/1/07): I'm upgrading my beloved old 2Cs and ordered the new 2Ce Signature II model and also getting a new preamp & amp. I live in a rural area and won't be able to audition the amp with the speakers. Does the Sig II have the same recommended amplification requirements of 40 to 160 watts per channel into 8 ohms? I'm considering the Quicksilver Mid Mono pair that's 50 to 60 watts (depending on the tubes). Thanks so much for all that you do. I really like your website too.

Answer: HELLO DOUG, AS STATED ABOVE THE SENSITIVITY IS SLIGHTLY HIGHER BUT THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS A DEMO IN YOUR ROOM.

Ed (1/31/07): Hello Richard, I would like to audition the 2ce speaker. I am in the St. Louis Mo area. Flip's Stereo has closed up shop and I would like to know how close is a store to the area. I own the 1B's for years now and would like to step up. Please let me know if there is any place close to St Louis where I can listen to them. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO ED, ALL THE DEALERS ARE LISTED ON THIS SITE UNDER DEALERS.

Tim (1/31/07): A quick thanks for what I consider a full line of perfect products. I'm currently contemplating adding a 2Wq to my 2Ci's+VCC-1, but I'm concerned about the down-firing drivers, as I live on the 2nd floor of an apartment building of stucco/frame construction. My downstairs neighbor barely tolerates my current setup (which includes a lo-fi, but serviceable after careful tuning and set up, mass-market sub). My question is this, I see that the 2Wq is slot loaded. Does this disperse energy out to the sides, or does the bulk of audio energy drive into/reflect off the floor? I have the feeling I could get away with the former, but not the latter. Can you offer any insight? Cheers,

Answer: HELLO TIM, THE SUB OUTPUT IS FROM SLOTS ALL AROUND THE SUB ABOUT 2.5 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR. THE BOTTOM OF THE SUB IS A SOLID 1 INCH THICK PLATE.

Carl (1/29/07): Dear Sir, I have an upstairs 2600 cubic foot room that is pre-wired for home theater/entertainment and I am in the planning/purchasing phase to have it implemented as such. I am a recent retiree and have not been involved in the audio/stereo/video world for some 20 years, but my family/10 year old son have convinced me that now is the time. I found the AVS forum recently and have pored over the many posts regarding speakers etc, and subsequently have listened to and will now purchase products bearing your name (I listen to music 40% and view movies 60%). I am purchasing the VCC-5 center channel from our Dallas dealer (John Fort Audio - a wonderful man by the way and a great emissary for your product line), as well as the VSM-1 rear surrounds. My questions concern the L/R mains. I have the option of buying new 3A's or used Model 5's (1996 vintage or so, serial #s 1938 and 1939). The difference in price is only about a $1k or so, so price is not the issue. The questions are:- are the Model 5's "on their last legs and antiquated for today's home theater experience"?- will the Model 5's "never be on their last legs and therefore be wonderful speakers for years to come"?- are the Model 5's overkill for my room?- are the 3A's more adapted for home entertainment (more versatile)?- can the older Model 5's be "upgraded" in any way to make them more in tune with today's most recent models? If so, is it possible to estimate - in general - what the cost of this would be? - lastly - for either speaker, is there a minimum watts per channel that these speakers should be powered with? Does bi-amping help and is it necessary? I thank you in advance for any response you can provide, and I'm very anxious to begin implementation of my Vandersteen world.

Answer: HELLO CARL, WOW YOU HAVE A LOT OF QUESTIONS AND A TWO WAY CONVERSATION WOULD BE A BENEFIT. FIRST I WOULD RECOMMEND A LONG PLANNING SESSION WITH JOHN FORT, HE IS VERY KNOWLEDGEABLE AND HAS EXPERIENCE WITH ALL THE PRODUCTS MENTIONED. IF YOU LIKE CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 AFTER YOUR MEETING WITH JOHN AND I WOULD GLADLY ANSWER ANY REMAINING QUESTIONS. I THINK JOHN WOULD AGREE WITH ME THAT THE USED 5'S WILL GIVE YOU BETTER OPTIONS IN THE FUTURE.

Arianto (1/28/07): I have questions regarding the best partnering for model 5A. eg, what kind / brand name of amplifier, preamp, DA, cables ets. thank you much

Answer: HELLO ARIANTO, I SUGGEST YOU HAVE A LISTENING SESSION WITH YOUR DEALER AND DECIDE WHAT SOUND IS YOUR GOAL.? THE BEAUTY OF A NEUTRAL TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKER WITH ROOM CONTROL IS THAT YOU CAN MAKE THEM SOUND ANY WAY YOU LIKE.

James (1/28/07): Browsing through the Quatro manual on this web site (I heard them in with Ayre gear at HE2006 and loved the sound), I noticed that the warranty coverage was listed as one year with nothing indicating an extension if you registered/mailed in a card. I always thought your products carried a five year warranty. Apologies if I am missing something...

Answer: HELLO JAMES, THE WARRANTY IS FOR ONE YEAR AUTOMATICALLY, FOR THE NEXT 4 YEARS YOU HAVE TO SEND IN THE FORM PROVIDED IN THE SPEAKERS AFTER PURCHASE WITH A COPY OF THE SALES RECEIPT.

Joseph (1/27/07): Hey this is Joseph again, Thank you for your reply, My integrated amplifier has only a fixed pre-out, The manufacturer doesn't know any thing about this, they are asking why an external X-over is there for a subwoofer, if its powered it must be built in, I guess they must not be aware of this subwoofer. As I have very little knowledge on electronics, I don't know how to explain it elaborately to them. I'm using Cadence VA-1HP valve amplifier. Nobody is giving me a good advice on this , Can you help me on this matter, I have already purchased 2ce, not yet unpacked, waiting for the sub to come, I always use to check the FAQ section for my knowledge on Vandersteen. Is X-2 available along with the subwoofer, or do I have to purchase it separately.

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, DOWNLOAD THE 2WQ MANUAL FROM THIS WEBSITE AND YOU WILL DISCOVER THAT YOUR INTEGRATED WILL NOT WORK WITH THE 2WQ. YOU WILL NEED TO ORDER THE X-2 FROM YOUR DEALER.

Tony (1/26/07): You have listed that having 2 Sub will allow better performance." Summing the channels into a single subwoffer alters or cancels all the low frequency information containing phase differences between channels. Stereo Subs reproduce all of the bass information" Can you do this with the V2W's or just the 2Wq's.Not sure how the LFE Coaxial out will differ between left and right channel bass information.-Tony

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE LFE IS A MONO SIGNAL.

Romano (1/25/07): Hello Mr. Vandersteen i am planning to buy Vandersteen's in the near future and I am a little bit confused. Now when You have upgraded 2Ce sig. to 2Ce sig II practically. You moved very close to 3 A sig.? For me it would be logical to improve 3A sig? in this situation in order to have some "obvious" difference between 2's and 3's. If You are planning something like that I think it would be very wise to wait for it. Please, excuse my English, best regards,

Answer: HELLO ROMANO, DO NOT BE DECEIVED THE MODEL 3'S ARE A SUPERIOR SPEAKER ESPECIALLY IN THE BASS. SOME MIGHT PREFER THE 2'S WITH LOWER LEVEL ELECTRONICS BECAUSE THE 3'S ARE MORE DEMANDING TO DRIVE. WE KNOW HOW TO IMPROVE THE 3'S HOWEVER THE COST WILL BE CLOSE TO THE QUATRO. THE QUATRO HAS A MORE INERT STRUCTURE WHICH RESULTS IN SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE WITH THE SAME BASIC DRIVERS.

Scott (1/25/07): Hello. I recently purchased a used pair of model 3's. They sound awesome -except one of the 8" woofers buzzes when pushed above lower volume. They still sound awesome and I was wondering if it is possible to purchase a replacement woofer in lieu of sending mine in and not having it to listen to.? .I'd like to replace it myself and was curious where and which direction to go.? Scott

Answer: HELLO SCOTT, WE ONLY HAVE THE SOFT PARTS IN STOCK FOR SUCH AN OLD SPEAKER. WE ARE ABLE TO REBUILD THE DRIVERS WITH THOSE PARTS IN ONE DAY AND YOU CAN INSTALL THEM YOURSELF. CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON WHAT TO DO.

Edward (1/24/07): I have a pair of 2c speakers. What is the best/easiest way to remove the cloth material, to get at the drivers. I see there's a seam at the back. Does the top wood frame need to come off? ( I'm hearing some distortion from one of the drivers...I'm guessing it's time to replace the rubber/synthetic material around the speaker cone) Thanks

Answer: HELLO EDWARD, YOU WILL FIND INSTRUCTIONS ON THIS SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE.

Dave (1/24/07): Concerning the VCC-1 center speaker. Because of its cube shape it is difficult to find an optimum location (ear level). In the photographs of the speaker you show it located on the floor, much like a sub-woofer. Can the VCC-1 be located on floor, not pointed at the listener? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, I WOULD NOT PUT IT ON THE FLOOR. PLACE IT ANYWHERE SLIGHTLY ABOVE OR BELOW EAR HEIGHT. YOU WILL GET THE BEST DIALOG LOCALIZATION IF IT IS NEAR THE BOTTOM OR TOP OF THE PICTURE.

Vu Hong (1/24/07): I want to upgrade my Vandersteen 2Ce to 2Ce Signature. Can you sell for me a upgrade kit. i will DIY with your Upgrade kit. Can you tell how much? I will pay for you by pay pal or visa card

Answer: HELLO VU HONG, THE MODEL I AND MODEL 2 WERE NEVER UPGRADEABLE AND THAT IS THE CASE TODAY. THERE WERE 50 PAIR OF 2CE'S THAT WERE MANUFACTURED THAT HAD HALF OF THE 2CE SIG PARTS AND WE REGRETTABLY OFFERED A UPGRADE FOR THEM (77000 AND ABOVE). THIS HAS PROVED TO BE A BIG MISTAKE BECAUSE IT LEFT THE IMPRESSION THAT THE MODEL 2'S WERE UPGRADEABLE..

Mike (1/23/07): Dear Richard, I am interested in listening and possibly purchasing a pair of your 3a signature speakers (walnut wood and sound anchor stands) but was wondering what you suggest as to where this can be done as I live in the Buffalo/Niagara Falls, NY area? I also wanted to know about some of the discussion with these speakers using "crossovers from the Vandersteen 5 speakers"? Any help and suggestions would be welcomed. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THIS WEB SITE HAS ALL THE DEALERS LISTED. IF YOU ARE TRAVELING ON BUSINESS OR VACATION I SUGGEST MAKING ARRANGEMENTS BEFORE HAND AT A DEALER NEAR YOUR DESTINATION. I THINK THE REFERENCE TO MODEL 5 X-OVERS ARE THE HIGH-PASS FILTERS USED WITH SUB-WOOFERS BY SOME USERS.

Andrew (1/22/07): Hello Richard - a question from a happy owner of 1Bs, and looking to add HT capability (while still keeping my faithful 2 channel setup). My dealer in Australia has a used VCC1 and we're looking at a subwoofer such as Quad/ Wharfedale/B&W. The VCC1 should work well with the 1Bs, however what are the ideal initial settings for the subwoofer crossover? Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, THE VCC-1 WAS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH THE MODEL 1B OR C. I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE SUBS YOU MENTIONED, SUGGEST TRYING ONE OF OURS.

Joseph (1/19/07): Hello, my name is Joseph Lazar, I'm from India, I just placed an order for 2wq, I am using a integrated tube amplifier, Is there any problem in connecting the 2wq with it, Im asking this because, every one I read below are using the speakers with power amplifiers and they have connected x-2 in between, this may be illustrated in the Manuel, just anxious to know!!!!!

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE 2WQ WOOFER REQUIRES THE X-2 BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER. CHECK WITH THE MANUFACTURER OF YOUR INTEGRATED, AND ASK IF THIS IS POSSIBLE.

Tom (1/18/07): Hello, Are you planning a 1C Signature Edition or a new version of the 1C's in the near future?

Answer: HELLO TOM, THE 1C WAS RE-TWEAKED ABOUT 8 MONTHS AGO AND THERE ARE NO SIGNATURE PLANS.

Raymond (1/17/07): Hi Richard I'm in the process of replacing the batteries in the vaunted Model 5s and filters with lithium batteries. Could you please tell me the type of wiring that is used to solder the batteries together and on to the boards. I would like to use new wire, it's just easier. Thanks for making the best full range speakers in the universe period, they are truly the ultimate listening experience.

Answer: HELLO RAYMOND, IT IS SPECIAL WIRE SO I WOULD USE THE WIRE ON THE BATTERIES YOU REMOVE.

Tom (1/16/07): According to the manufacturer, the balanced inputs of my tube mono-blocks have an input impedance of 289K/leg! If accurate, is this out of the upper limit impedance range of the balanced crossovers (400K)? Since the single ended input impedance is 130K, i don't trust the balanced figure and run single ended. Thanks

Answer: HELLO TOM, YOU DID THE RIGHT THING IF YOU DO TRUST THE IMPEDANCE PROVIDED. IT IS IMPORTANT FOR PERFORMANCE AND RELIABILITY THAT YOU HAVE THIS CORRECT. CHECK Q&A PAUL 11/24/06 ON THIS SITE ON HOW TO GET IT RIGHT.

Robert (1/16/07): There is a chance I might be moving to Germany in the near future. My concerns are for my pair of 2Wq,s, I know that I can get a down converter for the voltage but will the difference between the 50/60hz harm the amplifier section in the subwoofer. I would hate to have to part with these as they make a world of difference with my 3A's.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, IF YOU USE A STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER (500VA) IT WILL WORK GREAT.

Ed (1/15/07): I have a pair of 1B's. I am considering upgrading to a home theater sound system, and need to buy a center channel speaker. Since the 1B's have been out of production for some time, I wonder whether the VCC-1 was designed to work well with the 1B's for a 3 channel home theater setup? Would the VCC-1 be a good choice, and if not, do you have other suggestions? Thank you very much.

Answer: HELLO ED, THE VCC-1 WILL WORK WITH YOUR 1B'S VERY WELL. THE VSM-1 WALL SPEAKERS WOULD BE THE RIGHT CHOICE FOR THE REAR CHANNELS.

Juan (1/13/07): Hello Richard, just a question on power amplifiers the Rotel RB-1092 and RB-1091 use a switching power supply instead of the normal transformer it's also rated at 500 watt with a 20 KHz filter, are these amplifiers OK to use with the 3A Signature speakers VCC-5 center.

Answer: HELLO EDDY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THESE AMPLIFIERS. IN GENERAL I HAVE NOT BEEN IMPRESSED WITH CLASS D AMPLIFIERS ESPECIALLY WITH A HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCE (VINYL). I WOULD ASK A VANDERSTEEN DEALER THAT HAS ROTEL FOR A DEMO COMPARING THE ROTEL TO OTHER RECOMMENDED AMPLIFIERS ON THE 3A SIG'S. THE 500 WATTS IS NO PROBLEM ASSUMING THE USER IS SOBER AND REASONABLY INTELLIGENT.

Bob (1/12/07): Bi-Amping the 3A Signatures From: Bob HoshallI would assume Bi-Amping any speaker could be advantageous, if you had two MATCHING POWER AMPLIFIERS, but what if you don't? In my case I have a Parasound HCA-1200II High Current Power Amplifier rated at 205 Watts RMS X 2. My second is a PS Audio Amplifier, the Delta 200 rated at 200 Watts RMS X 2. If I were to take a guess, I would think the PS Audio is a bit better amplifier, even if the Parasound has some bells and whistles the PS Audio doesn't, neither have balanced inputs. What is your view of Bi-Amping, especially with two very different power amps? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BOB, I NO LONGER RECOMMEND BI-AMPING OF ANY KIND UNLESS BOTH ARE TUBE AMPS. MANY SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS ARE UNSTABLE DRIVING THE TOP OF ALL OUR SPEAKERS. THIS CAN RESULT IN AMPLIFIER PROBLEMS OR SPEAKER FAILURE. IF CONSIDERING THIS MAKE SURE YOU USE A O' SCOPE ACROSS THE OUTPUT OF THE AMPLIFIER AND LOOK FOR OSCILLATIONS ON TRANSIENTS. MANY REPORT IMPROVED TRANSPARENCY ONLY TO FIND LATER THAT THE AMPLIFIER HAS SHORT BURSTS OF OSCILLATION TRAILING ALL TRANSIENTS. LISTEN TO BOTH OF YOUR AMPLIFIERS AND PICK THE BEST ONE, BI-WIRE TO YOUR 3A SIGS AND PLAY MUSIC.

Ardian (1/10/07): I am wondering what type of SPL meter do you use to set up the Quatro's low frequency band equalizer? The standard Radio Shack meter which has been mentioned on some of the posting herein does not have a bandwidth down to 20 HZ (Per there specifications posted on RadioShack.com). Thus in short how are bands 1, 2 and 3 accurately measured? Thank You.

Answer: HELLO ARDIAN, AS THE OWNERS MANUAL STATES, USE THE RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER. THIS METER DOES ROLL OFF THE BOTTOM AT THE SAME RATE AS ROOM GAIN LIFTS IT. TOGETHER EVERYTHING WORKS. TRY IT BEFORE JUDGING IT.

Andy (1/9/07): Hello, I've located a good deal on a Vandersteen VCC-1 Center Channel speaker. How would they match up with up with a non-Vandersteen speaker system ? I own a pair of Ohm Walsh 200 MK2's, with the new Ohm Walsh drivers. I appreciate any input you can give me, as I've come to learn that matching a Center Channel speaker isn't always an easy task. Thanks for your time...

Answer: HELLO ANDY, IT IS EASY IF YOU USE THE CENTER RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURE OF YOUR SPEAKERS. YOU ARE RIGHT, MIXING DIFFERENT BRANDS OF CENTERS AND MAINS CAN BE A MESS.

Romesh (1/8/07): Hi Richard, I'm a dealer in New Zealand, and having problems getting a valve amplifier to stably drive a pair of 2ce. When we run one VTL ST85 bi-wired into the 2ce everything work fine. When we try to bi-amp with a second st85 we find that when a amplifier channel sees only the tweeter load it becomes unstable and we see wild variations in bias. The same problem applies with either vertical or horizontal bi-wiring .When we measure the tweeter load using a standard multi-meter we get an open circuit, and when we measure the bass we get varying impedances. Very strange. Are you able to shed any light on the situation? Can you suggest a fix so that we get allow our client to bi-amp? We would greatly appreciate your help? Best regards,

Answer: HELLO ROMESH, THIS IS A COMMON PROBLEM WITH SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS BUT RARELY WITH TUBE AMPS. THE HIGH FREQ AMP IS SEEING THE X-OVER CAPS PROTECTING THE MIDRANGE AND TWEETER LIKE ANY SPEAKER. THIS BY ITS SELF WITHOUT THE RESISTIVE LOAD PRESENTED WITH THE WOOFER SECTION IN PARALLEL IS CAUSING THE AMP TO BE UNSTABLE. THESE AMPLIFIERS CAN NOT BE USED THIS WAY BUT SHOULD BE BRIDGED MONO AND BI-WIRED INSTEAD.

Joe (1/8/07): I don't mean to sound rude but recently heard your Quatro speakers and thought they sounded great. I came to this website for more information and found my faith in the company shaken. The presentation here Is terrible and shouldn't be a representative of a high end speaker company. Also the dates of the notes at the bottom appear to have incorrect dates. The page appears to be sorted by date and the last few dates on the page should have 2007 for the year. If I hadn't heard your speakers and saw this website I would never consider them. This is not meant to be posted, just a professional heads-up.

Answer: HELLO JOE, THANK YOU FOR YOUR "PROFESSIONAL HEADS UP", AND I AM FLATTERED YOU WERE AS IMPRESSED BY THE SOUND AS YOU WERE. I APOLOGIZE THERE IS NOT A LOT OF INFORMATION ABOUT THE QUATRO, IT IS OUR NEWEST PRODUCT AND WE ARE VERY BUSY. DEVELOPING NEW PRODUCTS AND PUTTING THEM INTO PRODUCTION COSTS A LOT OF MONEY AND I WOULD RATHER PUT IT INTO THE PRODUCT. I UNDERSTAND THAT IF TOO MANY POTENTIAL CUSTOMERS HAVE YOUR OPINION AND WE ARE NOT ABLE TO SELL THEM, SLICK LIT WILL BE A NECESSITY. KEEP POSTED WE WILL IMPROVE WITH TIME.

Mike (1/6/07): Hi Richard, you commented about silver oxide being a good conductor. I use o-lugs as speaker wire termination and these seem clean as are the inside of the screws on my 2CEsignatures. The visible part of the screws are often tarnished which I periodically clean, is this an issue or is this silver oxide? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THE SCREWS ON YOUR 2CE'S ARE SILVER PLATED AND DO NOT NEED TOO BE CLEANED. OXIDIZED SILVER IS SILVER OXIDE.

Will (1/04/07): Hello Richard, I own a pair of 5A's and have heard rumors for a while now that there is a major upgrade in the works.. possibly with a new model number as well. Just curious if there is any truth to the rumor of an update in 2007? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO WILL, THAT IS A SAFE RUMOR FOR SOMEONE TO SPREAD THAT DOES NOT KNOW. THE MODEL 5 WAS INTRODUCED 10 YEARS AGO WITH THAT ABILITY AS ONE OF ITS MAIN FEATURES, SO IT IS INEVITABLE THERE WILL BE A UPDATE, HOWEVER NOT IN 2007. IT TAKES A LONG TIME TO DEVELOP ENOUGH IMPROVEMENTS TO JUSTIFY AN UPDATE THAT IS SIGNIFICANT ENOUGH TOP TO BOTTOM. THE FIRST ONE TOKE ABOUT 7 YEARS, I DO NOT THINK IT WILL TAKE THAT LONG FOR THE NEXT. REMEMBER THE COST TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER IS GUARANTEED TO BE THE DIFFERENCE IN PRICE.

Steve (1/04/07): I see that the VCC-2 center channel speaker is designed to go on a wall below a flat panel, but I'm wondering whether the VCC-2 could also be placed either 1) directly below an sxrd rear projection TV on a shelf of the TV stand, or 2) on its own stand in front of the tv, or 3) on top of the TV using something like an Omni mount shelf. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE VCC-2 MUST BE AGAINST THE WALL. THIS IS PART OF THE DESIGN AND WILL NOT WORK WELL IN FREE AIR. THE VCC-1 AND VCC-5 ARE DESIGNED FOR FREE AIR USE.

George (1/04/07): Richard, I recently purchased a pair of 5A's in the beautiful Bird's Eye Maple finish. They are outstanding, but I have two questions: Question 1:When I connect the powered subs to the same AC line as the rest of my gear, the gear that has a transformer in it (my amp and a voltage regulator) starts to have a low level hum. This is isn't a ground loop, but rather a transformer hum. If I disconnect the powered subs or put them on a different AC line via an extension cord, the transformer hum goes away. Any ideas? Question 2:Can I purchase a copy of the setup cd for the 5A's? I don't have a local dealer (I am just outside of Boston, MA) and would like to be able to setup the speakers in the same manner as described in the documentation. Thanks in advance for your responses. Regards,

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, IT MUST BE A HARMONIC SET UP BETWEEN THE SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY IN THE 5A AND THE TRANSFORMER IN YOUR OTHER EQUIPMENT. I RECOMMEND PLUGGING THE MODEL 5A AMPLIFIERS DIRECTLY INTO THE WALL WITH NO POWER LINE CONDITIONERS OR GROUND LIFTERS. THE DISK IS IN PROTOTYPE FORM AND ONLY GIVEN TO DEALERS WHO HAVE BEEN TRAINED BY ME. MANY OWNERS HAVE DOWN LOADED THE QUATRO MANUAL FROM THIS SITE AND USED THE STEREOPHILE TEST DISC THAT HAS WARBLE TONES BETWEEN 20HZ AND 200HZ, USE THE ANALOG RADIO SHACK SPL METER (DO NOT USE ONE OF THE COPIES THAT HAS ITS FREQ CURVE CORRECTED). SOME HAVE REPORTED THEY WERE VERY SUCCESSFUL. FOLLOW THE QUATRO INSTRUCTIONS INTERPOLATING FOR THE FREQUENCIES BETWEEN BY ADJUSTING THE POT ABOVE AND BELOW SPLITTING THE DIFFERENCE. THERE IS NOTHING TO LOSE BECAUSE IF IT SOUNDS BAD JUST PUT THE POTS STRAIGHT UP AND THEY WILL STILL BE BETTER THAN THE MAJORITY OF THE SPEAKERS IN THE WORLD. TRUE PUSH-PULL TOTALLY LINEAR SUB-WOOFERS ARE VERY RARE EVEN WITHOUT ROOM ADJUSTMENTS. GIVE IT A SHOT SEE WHAT HAPPENS IF YOU RUN INTO PROBLEMS CALL ME, MAY BE I CAN HELP.

Jeff (1/4/07): On 7/8/06, you answered a question from Matt concerning 2CE Sigs vs 3A Sigs. You responded that continual upgrades to the 2CE Sigs "are a moot point and did not cause the 2CE Sigs to rival the 3A Sigs," and you suggested that he buy used 3A Sigs, not new 2CE Sigs. So, why have you now upgraded the 2CE Sigs with 3A Sig components? Would you now answer Matt's question differently, or are we all better off looking for good used versions of the more expensive speakers? By the way, I'm a very satisfied owner of 2 CE Sigs and, call me crazy, but when I auditioned 2CE Sigs vs 3A Sigs at my local dealer (without considering price, since I could afford either), I actually preferred the overall sound integration on the 2s (and my remarkably honest dealer agreed). For me, less is more.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, THE DRIVERS USED IN THE 3A SIG ARE MORE ADVANCED THAN THE 2'S. WHY YOU PREFERRED THE 2'S OVER THE 3'S IS A MYSTERY UNLESS THEY REVEALED A PROBLEM UPSTREAM IN THE SYSTEM. I MADE THAT RECOMMENDATION ONLY BECAUSE HE HAD HEARD THE 3 SIGS AND WANTED TO KNOW HOW CLOSE THE NEWER 2'S WOULD BE TO THE 3'S.? IN THE SAME SITUATION WITH AYRE EQUIPMENT THERE WOULD BE NO COMPARISON REGARDLESS THE VERSION. WE HAVE UPDATED THE 2 FOR OUR 30TH ANNIVERSARY WITH 3 COMPONENTS, THE MID AND TWEETER. THEY NOW RIVAL THE 3'S IN THE MIDS AND HIGHS AND ARE CALLED 2CE SIG II. THE NEW 2'S AS BEFORE ARE NOT UPGRADABLE THE 3'S ARE AND THE 3'S STILL HAVE AN ADVANTAGE IN THE BASS. MY COMMENT WAS NOT MEANT TO DEGRADE THE 2'S BUT THE CUSTOMER SEEMED CONCERNED ABOUT UPGRADES. SORRY FOR THE CONFUSION.

George (1/3/07): Per instructions for my Model 5s, I replaced the 27 volt battery packs on the crossover boards yesterday. The written instructions are clear and for that I thank you. The procedure was so simple on the one speaker that I had my fourth-grade daughter do the second speaker ... all it is after all is cutting the straps holding the battery pack, cutting the double-stick tape, de-soldering two leads, cleaning the board of tape residue, soldering together three 9 volters and gluing them together with adhesive caulk, and re-strapping them in. Optionally, I cleaned some tarnish off the inner surfaces of the 8 silver screws. These are very early serial numbers, so I do hope that for the sanity of other customers the later models have some form of click-in battery mount. It's a good thing these speakers are so good, for we must earn the right to own them over and over. No, a fourth-grader didn't really do the second speaker.? NOW ... for a question ... I was alarmed to see that on both crossover boards, there were three prominent caps near the speaker input terminals that had corrosion on their ends, where the can was not covered with plastic. They are labeled "Wonder Signature Infiniti Cap .68 microF 425V". I've not heard anything grossly wrong, but then I could be like the frog in a pot of water that's slowly heated up. Of course these are out of warranty. Have you encountered this problem, and is it a problem? If so, and let's assume that I can replace them, exactly what replacement caps should I buy? Thank you

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, GLAD YOU WERE ABLE TO CHANGE THE BATTERIES WITH YOUR DAUGHTERS HELP. THERE WILL NEVER BE CLICK TYPE CONNECTORS AS THE CONNECTIONS MUST BE SOLDERED FOR LOW NOISE. YOU COULD REPLACE THEM WITH LITHIUM, THEY ARE GOOD FOR 12 YEARS. DO NOT EAT THE LITHIUM IT IS THE WRONG TYPE! THE WONDERCAPS ARE FINE, THEY ARE UNPROTECTED BECAUSE THE MANUFACTURE SAYS THEY SOUND BETTER THAT WAY. SILVER OXIDE IS A GOOD CONDUCTOR AND DOES NOT NEED TO BE REMOVED FOR SONIC REASONS. THIS IS WHY SILVER IS USED INSTEAD OF BARE COOPER.

Juan (1/3/07): Hello Richard, I would like to know what material the 1c woofer loudspeaker model is made of in order to buy the appropriate adhesive to fix it. The problem is that the polycone has become apart from the outer membrane. Thank you in advance.

Answer: HELLO JUAN, THE WOOFER IS DESIGNED TO RUN OUT OF TRAVEL BY THE SPIDER AND SURROUND BEFORE CRASHING THE VOICE COIL. OVER TIME THE SURROUND WILL PULL APART. UNFORTUNATELY THE SURROUND AND POLY CONE ARE VULCANIZED AND I DO NOT KNOW OF A GLUE THAT WILL WORK. TAKE YOUR BEST TRY IT MAY WORK. IF YOU NEED PARTS CONTACT DELARAMA 408-367-1355.

Ashok (1/2/07): Hi Richard, I have a pair of the V-5A's and am going to set up my own 5.1 channel home theater around these speakers. Would you kindly advise on whether it is better to use VSM speakers or the 2ce or 3a speakers for the back/side channels. Also, would I need a subwoofer, and if so, which subwoofer would be better value-wise considering the 5As already have a very good woofing system.? Thanks a lot for your time.

Answer: HELLO ASHOK, THE VSM SIGNATURE WOULD BE THE BEST CHOICE FOR REAR AND SIDE CHANNELS. MOUNT THEM ABOUT 48 INCHES TO THE BOTTOM FROM THE FLOOR. USE ONE OR TWO 2WQ'S TO MAKE THE REAR CHANNEL FULL RANGE LIKE THE FRONT ALREADY IS.

Dave (1/2/07): Hi, Richard. I am currently driving my 2ce Signatures with a McCormack DNA 0.5 amp and a Rotel 1062 integrated amp. I'm considering replacing the integrated with a passive preamp, namely the McCormack TLC-1. At some point, I think I'd like to add the 2wqs to my system. Is there any reason the 2wqs can't be paired (or shouldn't be paired) with a passive preamp? Is this, in general, a good combination? Thanks again for your help

Answer: HELLO DAVE, SOMETIMES WHEN USING A PASSIVE VOLUME CONTROL WITH A HIGH-PASS THERE CAN BE PROBLEMS WITH HUM. KEEP THE ROTEL HANDY IN CASE YOU NEED A LOW IMPEDANCE DRIVE FOR THE 2WQ'S TO ELIMINATE THE HUM.

Steve (1/1/07): I noticed the 2WQ sub woofers use a high-pass filter that rolls off at 80Hz. Does the 2WQ have ANY output above 80Hz? If so, how high does it extend? I am wondering how well the 2WQ will work with Merlin VSM-MX speakers. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE 2WQ'S WORK WITH ANY GOOD FULL-RANGE SPEAKER THAT GOOD RESPONSE TO 40 HZ.

Rayner (12/31/06): I am planning to add a couple of 2Wq's to my 3As. Can Vandersteen supply crossovers to work with balaced cables? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO RAYNER, WE DO NOT SELL DIRECTLY BUT YOUR LOCAL (OR ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER) CAN FIX YOU UP.

Dennis (12/31/06): I'm considering the 2WQ subwoofer. I understand and appreciate the virtues of using two subwoofers, but my budget only allows me to buy one. I'm concerned about localization of the subwoofer using only one, especially with such a shallow filter slope. Is this an issue? Can the crossover be set low enough for this not to be a concern? Also, I have my 2CE Signatures bi-amplified. I know you've said that there aren't many advantages to bi-amping, but I'm already doing it and I'd rather bi-amp than have two idle channels. With this setup, where do I connect the 2WQ? I don't recall the 2CEs having separate high frequency and low frequency connections. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO DENNIS, I WOULD PLACE THE SUB IN ONE OF THE CORNERS FOR BEST RESPONSE IN THE ROOM. THE PROBLEM OF LOCALIZATION YOU MENTION IS ONLY TRUE WHEN USING MINI BOXES FOR MAIN SPEAKERS. WHEN ADDING A SUB PROPERLY (USING FULL RANGE MAIN SPEAKERS) THE MAIN SPEAKERS PROVIDE SIGNIFICANT LOCATION BECAUSE THE SLOPE IS GENTLE. IN THE DEEP BASS MOST RECORDINGS ARE MONO ANYWAY. I WOULD RECOMMEND STEREO SUBS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE NOT BECAUSE OF A LOCATION PROBLEM BUT FOR A MORE LINEAR RESPONSE IN YOUR ROOM. THE 2WQ HAS ITS LOW PASS SET AT 80HZ AND CAN NOT BE CHANGED NOR WOULD YOU WANT TO. WHEN BI-AMPING BOTH CHANNELS NEED TO BE HIGH PASSED TO PREVENT PHASE SHIFT IN THE MID-RANGE. HOOK UP THE 2WQ TO THE CHANEL THAT IS DRIVING THE BASS.

Jim (12/30/06): Hi Richard, I just read Art Dudley's review of the 2Ce Sigs II and the serial numbers of those speakers were #58274 and #58275. Does that mean speakers with serial numbers higher than those are the Signature IIs? I just bought a pair and they are #58320 and #58321. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JIM, THE 2CE SIG II BEGAN SHIPPING 12-15-06 ALONG WITH NORMAL 2CE SIG'S DEPENDING ON WHAT IS ORDERED. BOTH ARE AVAILABLE WITH A DIFFERENT PRICE OF COURSE. THE MARK II VERSIONS HAVE (II) AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER THE REGULAR 2CE SIGS HAVE NOTHING.

Bill (12/29/06): It was a pleasure meeting you this past year at my local dealer in Raleigh NC. I appreciate the time you took to answer the questions that were asked. I took your advice and tried a "true" bi-wire setup with 2 separate cables per side and I do like the improvement. I am planning on doing some more room placement experimenting with my 3As. Currently I have them on one of the short walls of my room using the room odds method you describe in the manual. I plan on trying then on one of the long walls. If I like this better it brings up the issue of what to do with the speaker cables. If I plan to keep the long wall placement, the room will dictate I keep most of my electronics on one of the short walls. So here is the question... would you either run long speaker wires say 20 feet from the amp or would you run a long interconnect(~20 ft.) between the preamp and amp placing the amp between the speakers and stay with shorter speaker cables? I currently Cardas 300B interconnects and Crosslink speaker cable. And am currently using Musical Fidelity SS electronics. The capacitance of the interconnects is 42.9 pf/ft and 55 pf/ft on the speaker cables. thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WISH ALL QUESTIONS WERE THIS EASY. RUN LONG INTERCONNECTS AND SHORT SPEAKER WIRE.

Paul (12/28/06): Richard, I have a pair of 2ce Serial #57xxxce. I need to replace the front woofer. The woofer has separated apart. Vibration and crackling when speaker used.? What would the process of getting the parts? It looks like I need to de-solder and replace with new woofer. Are there other recommended parts that I should replace? Is it my understanding that I cannot upgrade to SIG series? Thank You.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE.

Michael (12/28/06): I own Vandersteen 5's, and Ayre electronics. Ayre sent me a cd Irrational But Efficacious. They told me to use tracks one and seven to tune my stereo. It is basically a sweep of a full glide tone from 5hz to 20khz and track one is a shorter version. It made the system sound better. Why? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, CHECK YOUR OWNERS MANUAL FOR THE DATE THAT THE BATTERIES NEED TO BE REPLACED, IT COULD BE TIME. THE BEST I CAN CONCLUDE IS THAT THE SWEEP IS LIKE A WARM-UP EXERCISE. A SPEAKER IS A MECHANICAL DEVICE AND WE ALWAYS EXERCISE THE DRIVERS BEFORE DOING ANY CRITICAL DESIGN WORK. YOU COULD ASK THE AYRE PEOPLE.

Drew (12/27/06): Hello Richard, I recently purchased a pair of Vandersteen 2CE Signatures from Audio Connection, my third pair of Vandersteen's, and am very happy with them. When I purchased them I was told that major revisions had been made including the addition of the midrange unit from the 3A Signatures. The serial numbers of these speakers are 57416 and 57417 and they have black end caps.? Are my speakers 2CE Signature II's? Thank you,

Answer: HELLO DREW, THEY COULD NOT BE 2CE SIG II BECAUSE THEY WILL SHIP JAN 1, 2007.

Drew (12/27/06): Richard: I have M5-HPB crossovers that I want to set for use with 2WQ subs and VSM-1 signatures for my back surround channels. The 2WQ manual suggests a different setting for the temporary crossovers (2nd value below specified input impedance instead of 1st value below) due to a high pass filter in the VSM-1.? If using the method you have previously described to set the crossovers with a voltmeter, assuming 1 volt at 1 Khz, what voltage should I be looking for at 80 Hz? Is it still .707 volts for the VSM-1 speakers, or is there a different target due to the high pass filter in the VSM-1? Thanks for taking the time to consider my question.

Answer: HELLO DREW, YOU WOULD LOOK FOR .707 AT 80HZ. THE RECOMMENDATION IN THE MANUAL IS ONLY A SUGGESTION, I WOULD EXPERIMENT. THE CLOSER TO 80HZ, IF IT WORKS, THE LOWER THE DISTORTION IN THE VSM.

Bill (12/23/06): I just received my issue of Stereophile and enjoyed reading Art Dudley's rave review on the 2Ce Sig II. I have two questions. I am looking for 3A Sig performance but in a smaller package, how close are the new 2's? Could you explain why the anechoic measurements that John took are very flat yet the in room measurements are not as flat?

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE NEW 2Ce SIGNATURE II DOES HAVE THE TWEETER AND THE MID-RANGE OF THE 3A SIG'S. THIS AND DOZENS OF OTHER CHANGES INCLUDING STRUCTURAL PUSH THE PERFORMANCE IN THE DIRECTION OF THE 3'S. THE MODEL 3'S ARE LARGER AND HAVE MORE ADVANCED DRIVERS IN THE BASS SO THE MID BASS AND BASS ARE STILL SUPERIOR BUT THE GAP IS CLOSED AT THE HIGHER FREQUENCIES. I SUGGEST WHEN YOUR DEALER GET A PAIR AN AUDITION. I WILL SAY IT HAS TURNED AN OLD CLASSIC INTO ONE INCREDIBLE SPEAKER. AS FOR MEASUREMENTS, JOHN MEASURES ALL SPEAKERS THE SAME AND IT IS A SIMPLE PROCESS TO READ THE MANUAL AND GET THE TILT AND ALIGNMENT CORRECT FOR ANY INSTALLATION. THIS WOULD HAVE RESULTED IN BETTER MEASUREMENTS HOWEVER THEY ARE GOOD ENOUGH TO POINT OUT THE SPEAKERS TIME AND PHASE CHARACTERISTICS VERSES OTHER DESIGNS. I HAVE NEVER THOUGHT THE IN ROOM MEASUREMENTS WERE RELEVANT BECAUSE A LISTENER WOULD HAVE TO HAVE A RUBBER NECK TO GET A AVERAGE FROM THAT MANY POSITIONS WHILE LISTENING TO MUSIC. ALL THE OTHER MEASUREMENTS JOHN MAKES I APPLAUD BECAUSE THEY WILL DIFFERENTIATE BETWEEN DIFFERENT DESIGNS FOR THE READER. THE PROOF IS IN THE LISTENING.

John (12/18/06): Around August I purchased the 2CE signatures new and would like to know what options I have to upgrade them to the 2CE signature II?

Answer:HELLO JOHN, THE 2CE SIG WILL CONTINUE AT $1545.00. IT WOULD BE WAY TO EXPENSIVE TO UP-GRADE ALL THE COMPONENTS CHANGED IN THE 2CE SIG II. THE PRICE OF THE 2CE SIG II IS $1995.00. IF UPGRADEABILITY IS AN ISSUE I SUGGEST YOU LOOK INTO A PAIR OF 3A SIG'S WHICH ARE UP-GRADABLE.

Vlad (12/13/06): Hi. I have two 2W subwoofers w my main pair of speakers. I using active set up with active crossover set -3db at 300Hz 24 db/oct in each tower four 7" woofers with separate vented encloses. My room 12'4"W,33'L,9'4"H,and then it still continues to the open kitchen (so the space fairly big), when I use subs as per manual with 33K X-2 Xover it seams that I don't gain any additional bass response (subs six 8" compare to main speakers. eight 7"vented),and to mention that I tried different settings with WX-2 47K, 70K,ect. the 33K gives the best mid-bass (my amp Bryston 4 BST is 50K),it seams that when I playing without subs there more punchier response and it does go pretty low too. I try them running without X-2 ,I figure if I have low pass at 300Hz 24db it is almost the same as if 150hz 12 db or 75Hz at 6 db. and this actually worked way better now have weight an fullness I was looking for so its loaded room better than before, just one thing there sound now a little thick I guess appx. after 120Hz up...So my question is: How I can run this subs with out roll off low frequency of my main speakers (and this is full range speakers in my previous house they was sounding awesome, no subs needed, but the space was smaller). It would be nice to run main speakers full range and run subs at 80Hz 6 db or 12 db roll off. Should I buy separate power amp. (I have two Low pass outs in my active crossover) and run the new amp and subs separately from my Bryston? I think there should be an easier way to roll off subs with out affecting main speakers. .I almost at the point of selling the subwoofers and for the info : I played with positioning , moving them , phase reversing bla, bla, bla...Please Help. (I listen mainly acoustical music, classical, Jazz ect. )

Answer:HELLO VLAD, THE BRYSTON HAS A INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 50K BUT THAT IS AT 1000HZ. WE NEED TO KNOW WHAT THE INPUT IMPEDANCE IS AT 100HZ SO THE X-OVER POINT WILL BE CORRECT. IT HAS BEEN REPORTED TO ME BY MY DEALERS THAT THE BRYSTON NEEDS TO BE SET AT 15K. I WOULD TRY THAT MAY BE EVEN 10K BUT NO LOWER OR SUB DAMAGE COULD RESULT. HAVE YOU ASKED YOU DEALER FOR ASSISTANCE?

Steve (12/08/06): I am interested in the 2Wq subwoofer, a pair of them, but my main speakers (2-way floor standers) use a second order crossover where the 2Wq is first order. Does it matter that the crossover slopes would not be the same?

Answer:HELLO STEVE, IDEALLY FIRST ORDER FOR ALL X-OVER POINTS WOULD GIVE YOU BETTER TRANSIENT RESPONSE BUT THAT IS NOT AN OPTION AND THE 2WQ'S WOULD WORK FINE. YOU MIGHT NEED TO PLAY WITH PHASE BECAUSE 99% OF SPEAKERS WITH SECOND ORDER FILTERS HAVE EVERY OTHER DRIVER OUT OF PHASE.

Max (12/07/06): Hi Richard, I am currently using a REL Storm 5 Sub with a Valve (20wpc class a ) ans Electrostatic Hybrid speakers. I am pretty satisfied with this setup. I did find your school of thought regarding 2wq Sub Filters. I think that would work great in my system. Do you think this would be a worthwhile upgrade? Secondly, do you have any dealers in India? I stay in India and would like to purchase 1 for a start and then upgrade to 2?

Answer: HELLO MAX, USING A SUB WITHOUT A HIGH PASS IS COSTING YOU 70% OF THE ADVANTAGE A PROPER SUB COULD BRING. A HIGH PASS RELIEVES YOU AMP OF THE LOW FREQ LOAD EFFECTIVELY MAKING IT SOUND LARGER. A HIGH PASS REMOVES THE LOW FREQ FROM THE ELECTROSTATIC PANELS DRAMATICALLY REDUCING PANEL ARCING AND DISTORTION.? SUB WOOFERS WITHOUT A HIGH PASS IS FINE FOR MID-FI BUT HAS NO PLACE IN HIGH-END IMO. CONTACT DELARAMA 480-367-1355 OR LOOK ON OUR WEB SITE UNDER INTERNATIONAL.

David (12/07/06): Help, listened to the Quatro's and was impressed. Would like to purchase a pair but after my daughters wedding and two sons in college at the same time, justifying $7k is not in the cards today. As an alternative, I liked the model 2Ce Signatures and thought perhaps coupled with either 1 or 2, 2Wq (s) would solve my sound tastes and budget. The dealer disagreed and recommended purchasing the 2 Ce Signatures and budget permitting, sell the model 2's and step up to the the model 4's. I have not heard the model 2's with the subs, so this might be a pipe dream trying to approximate the model 4 on a economy budget, but would appreciate your unbiased feedback.

Answer:HELLO DAVID, YOUR DEALER HAS GIVEN YOU GOOD ADVICE. ADDING 2WQ'S TO THE 2CE SIGS WILL BE A LARGE IMPROVEMENT BUT THE TOP 3 DRIVERS AND THE STRUCTURE OF THE QUATRO ARE FAR MORE ADVANCED THAN EVEN THE 3A SIGS. YOU MIGHT WANT TO WORK OUT A DEAL WITH YOUR DEALER IN ADVANCE ON TRADING IN THE 2'S FOR QUATRO'S.

Romano (12/06/06): Please give me the nearest dealer because I would like to buy 3A's. I am helpless, is there any chance to buy them in this part of Europe?

Answer:HELLO ROMANO, CONTACT DELARAMA 480-367-1355

PCall (12/03/06): Mr. Vandersteen: I have a 1984 pair of Vandersteen 2C serial #6911C/6909C. The speakers are in good condition. However, I'm having trouble selling them because people seem to know of the foam surrounds around the speaker cones. Am I unable to sell these old 2C's? Should I consider finding a dumpster big enough to fit the Vandersteens in or what would you consider its monetary value. They work fine and I don't see any broken cone surround.

Answer: PCALL, WE CAN REBUILD THE WOOFERS EVEN THOUGH THEY ARE 22 YEARS OLD. I HAVE SEEN SPEAKERS THIS OLD GO FOR $300.00 WHICH IS 1/3 RETAIL. NOT BAD.

Peter (12/03/06): I have had 2Ce Signatures for several years and I am considering upgrading to the Quatro. However, I live in Tucson, AZ, a long distance from any of your "premier" dealers. I would like to learn how to setup the Quatros myself (without dealer help). Can you provide me with instructions/information on how to do this? I have a reasonable knowledge of electronics (i.e., can deal with VOMs & other test equipment) and have built kit components in the past.

Answer: HELLO PETER, YOUR IN LUCK THERE IS A DEALER NOT FAR AWAY IN SCOTTSDALE, AZ WHO HAS THE QUATRO'S ON DEMO. ASK TO SEE HIS OWNERS MANUAL.

Dave (11/30/06): Hi, Richard. As I continue to audition power amps for my 2ce Signatures, a dealer is recommending that I try out the Audio Refinemine Multi-5, which is a five-channel power amp. Now, he said I could use only two channels, but he also said I'd get the best results by using four channels and bi-amping. My 2ces are already bi-wired, and I know you don't recommend bi-amping. But is bi-amping from a single five-channel amp such as the Audio Refinements: 1.) Reasonable? 2.) Better or worse than bi-amping from two identical amps? 3.)Likely to result in better sound than simply using two of the channels? 4.) Probably a complete waste of time; I should just keep looking for a good two-channel amp? Thanks for your help.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, I DO NOT RECOMMEND BI-AMPING ESPECIALLY SOLID STATE BECAUSE THE CHANNEL DRIVING SEE'S ONLY CAPS WHICH CAN CAUSE OSCILLATIONS AND POTENTIAL EXPENSIVE SPEAKER DAMAGE (NON WARRANTY). SUGGEST YOU GET A BETTER 2 CHANNEL AMP OR MONO'S.

Charles (11/30/06): Richard, Along the lines of Ken's question above, what is the minimum listening distance for the 5a's? Thanks so much.

Answer: HELLO CHARLES, THE SAME 6 FEET WITH THE SAME CAUTIONS.

David (11/28/06): I'm looking to buy a set of 2ce Signature speakers that a seller purchased new in September, 2005. Will I still be able to have the 5 year warranty in this case? Thanks

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE WARRANTY ON VANDERSTEEN'S IS NOT TRANSFERABLE.

David (11/28/06): Here is an additional question that occurred to me relative to my previous about your answer below to Dave (2/2/06):"I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q. MOST PEOPLE INCLUDING ME WANT MORE THAN WHAT HAS BEEN RECORDED, HENCE THE V2W. THE PROPER WAY WOULD BE ACCURATE REPRODUCTION (2WQ'S) WITH A BASE CONTROL ON THE PROCESSOR SO ONE COULD DIAL ALL THE BOOM DESIRED. THIS IS CONSIDERED SAC-RELIGIOUS IN HIGH END SO WE HAVE IT BUILT INTO OUR SUB-WOOFERS, UNFORTUNATELY WITHOUT A DEFEAT SWITCH. GOING TO ONE INPUT AND HALF A X-OVER WOULD SAVE ABOUT $5 AND NOT ALLOW THE SCENARIO ABOVE." My understanding is that the ".1" in 5.1 is a DISCRETE Bass effects channel referred to as LFE. So, IF the pre-pro is set for no LFE because there is no V2W in the system ("only" Stereo 2Wq's), then there IS no LFE info and therefore, your statement that "I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q" is confusing to me. How can it all be there with no LFE? Am I missing something here?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, WHEN YOU TELL THE PRE-PRO THAT YOU DO NOT HAVE A SUB AND THAT THE RIGHT AND LEFT SPEAKERS ARE LARGE (FULL RANGE) ALL OF THE LFE INFORMATION IS MIXED INTO THE RIGHT AND LEFT CHANNELS.

Ken (11/28/06): Hi Richard, Is there a minimum listening distance that the 3A Signatures can be and the drivers stay time coherent? I notice that 8 feet is the shortest distance on the graph provided in the manual that shows the required "tilt" of the speaker relative to ear height...Many thanks for a fine product, Ken

HELLO KEN, SIX FEET WOULD BE THE MINIMUM BUT YOU WOULD HAVE TO INTERPOLATE THE GRAPH OR TUNE THE TILT BY EAR.

George (11/27/06):  Hi, I have a pair of Lowther full range drivers mounted in transmission line, custom cabinets. Currently, after 2 months of notch filter adjustments, room positioning, etc. I have what I think- is a satisfying, musical system. I have excellent response down to 36hz- and about zero after that. So, in an effort to gain a little more reinforcement of true low bass etc. I tried my Axiom HT sub- to no avail. It sounded something like fog horn going off along with the music. I am intrigued by your superior application towards resolving issues these HT type subs present. But with no way to audition your 2wq's....What is your opinion of applying your subs with the full-rangers? Thank you!!

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, THE 2WQ'S SHOULD WORK FINE AND CLEAN UP YOUR MID-RANGE AT THE SAME TIME. ONE DISADVANTAGE OF FULL RANGE SPEAKERS IS THE BASS CAUSES LARGE EXCURSIONS WHICH RAISES THE DOPPLER DISTORTIONS SIGNIFICANTLY IN THE MID-RANGE. THE 2WQ USES A HIGH PASS AT 80HZ WHICH WILL HELP.

Kevin (11/25/06): I have a pair of 1c and a pair of 2ci. The 1c's are 43 days old and the 2ci's are 17 years old both sound outstanding i won't have any other speakers in my house WELL DONE GREAT JOB! i need a lean angle graph for the 2ci's could you tell me where and how to get it once again love your speakers.

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, THE 2CI OWNERS MANUAL NEVER HAD A CHART FOR TILT. THE PROPER TILT WAS FOUND BY EAR BY THE DEALER DURING SET UP. STRAIGHT UP IS GOOD FOR 36 INCH EAR HEIGHT.

Brien (11/25/06): Richard, I have been using 2C's, a 2W and a VCC1 for years, with gratification. I am ready to try something a bit different. Can I re-wire my 2W so that it feeds from the ".1" signal of Dolby 5.1? Do you have a wiring diagram for the 2W's amplifier?

Answer: HELLO BRIEN, THERE IS NO WAY THE 2W CAN BE USED LINE LEVEL. WHAT YOU NEED IS OUR V2W, LOOKS THE SAME BUT IS LINE LEVEL IN AND HAS AN EXTRA 12 INCH ACOUSTIC COUPLER IN THE FRONT.

Eddy (11/25/06): Hello Richard, the 2Wq are rated at 220 volt, we have 240 volt, is this ok, also can I leave the unit switched on, or do you recommend that I switch off when it is not in use. The speaker cables which are supplied with the 2Wq, would they need to be upgraded to a better quality, or can I keep using them?

Answer: HELLO EDDY, THE SUB'S WILL WORK FINE ON 240 BUT MAY HAVE A LITTLE MORE TRANSFORMER HUM. THE 2WQ'S ARE DESIGNED TO BE ON EXCEPT DURING VACATION. I WOULD RE READ THROUGH YOUR OWNERS MANUAL. WE SUPPLY THE SUBS WITH VERY BAD WIRE SO THE SUB'S WILL PERFORM POORLY AND WE RECOMMEND THE STUFF. JUST KIDDING, I SEE NO REASON TO USE ANY OTHER WIRE UNLESS YOU HAVE MONEY BURNING A HOLE IN YOUR POCKET. IF YOU DECIDE TO EXPERIMENT WITH DIFFERENT WIRES MAKE SURE YOU CAN TRY THEM BEFORE PAYING FOR THEM. LET ME KNOW IF YOU HEAR ANY DIFFERENCE.

Paul (11/24/06): I had my Moscode 600 amplifier upgraded a couple years ago. Recently I got out the radio shack db meter and it appears as though my crossover with my 2w sub is now somewhere around 160 hz. I think the input impedance of my amplifier is 100k ohms. What value capacitor should I be using for the crossover, its currently a multi-cap hard wired into the input. And, larger cap = lower crossover point (or higher?)

Answer: HELLO PAUL, TO CHECK FOR PROPER INPUT IMPEDANCE OF A AMPLIFIER WHEN IT IS NOT KNOWN GET A TEST DISC WITH SINE-WAVE TONES AT 1000HZ AND 80HZ AT LEAST. USE A DIGITAL VOLT METER SET TO AC VOLTS. PLAY THE 1000HZ TRACK AND MEASURE THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE OUTPUT TERMINALS OF THE AMPLIFIER WITH THE SPEAKERS HOOKED UP. ADJUST THE VOLUME UNTIL THE METER READS 1 VOLT. PLAY THE 80HZ TONE AND READ THE METER WITHOUT CHANGING THE VOLUME. IF THE VOLTAGE IS .707 THE X-OVER IS EXACTLY CORRECT FOR 80HZ. IF THE VOLTAGE IS HIGHER YOU NEED A SMALLER CAPACITOR, IF THE VOLTAGE IS LOWER YOU NEED A LARGER CAPACITOR. TRYING TO MEASURE THE WAY YOU ARE WITH A SPL METER WILL NOT WORK BECAUSE IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE LOW FREQ IN A ROOM.

Bill (11/23/06): Hello from Canada, I have purchased a pair model 2s. I have not seen them and will not until I recieve them in 2 wks. Could you tell me what type of connectors are on the speaker. I want to have wiring ready when the speakers arrive but connot determine the type of connectors I need at the speaker end. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO BILL, WE HAVE BEEN MAKING MODEL TWO'S FOR 30 YEARS. WHAT CONNECTORS ARE USED DEPENDS ON WHICH MODEL YOUR TALKING ABOUT. IN THAT 30 YEARS MANY THINGS HAVE CHANGED TO THE POINT THAT TODAY THERE ARE NO COMMON PARTS WITH A PAIR 8 YEARS OLD.

Dave (11/19/06): I am upgrading my prepro/amp to Sunfire TGP-5 prepro and TGA-5200 amp. The amp has two sets of binding posts for the front channels. The following describes them:(1) a standard voltage-source (i.e., near zero impedance) output for all typical applications and:(2) a higher-impedance current-source output, which many prefer for electrostatic, planarmag net ic, or ribbon speakers. Or you can bi-wire your system with the voltage source driving the woofer(s) and the current source driving the upper part of the system. In many cases this provides by far the best possible interface between the amplifier and the speaker system. I have 2CeSignatures, front left, front right, V2W sub, VCC and VSM speakers. Can I b-wire the 2Ce's as described in (2) above?

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE ONLY DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE ONE OUTPUT AND THE OTHER IS ONE HAS A RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH IT. TECHNICALLY THEY THEN ARE NOT EXACTLY THE SAME AND WOULD NOT BE RECOMMENDED, BUT I HAVE NOT TRIED IT SO I DO NOT KNOW. HOW HARD WOULD IT BE TO TRY IT?

Dave (11/17/06): I have a pair of Model one speakers and would like to know what power amp and brands are compatible and would provide the richest sound. I presently have a Kenwood amp.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, ONE ADVANTAGE OF HAVING A WORKING SYSTEM IS THAT YOU CAN TAKE YOUR TIME AND BORROW EQUIPMENT LOCALLY AVAILABLE. THIS IS WHAT I RECOMMEND YOU DO UNTIL YOU FIND ONE WITH A RICH SOUND. TRY AS MANY AS YOU CAN BECAUSE ELECTRONICS CAN SOUND VERY DIFFERENT AND YOU WANT TO FIND ONE ACCORDING TO YOUR TASTE.

Craig (11/27/06): I just purchased a system including your 1C speakers & a 2wq subwoofer. I noticed the Q control on the back of the subwoofer feels loose when compared to the tweeter adjustment on the 1C's & the sensitivity adjustment on the subwoofer. All the mentioned controls have some resistance when adjusting. The Q does not. Is this normal? By the way your speakers have the best soundstage I have ever heard! I am currently running them with Quicksilver Minis And the midrange reminds me of my old Quads-Except your speakers convey dynamics!! Thanks for creating an affordable speaker that really performs!!

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, THAT IS NORMAL.

Amy (11/16/06): Dear Richard, my name is Amy and I'd like to thank you for making your expert advise publicly available. Currently I'm running a pair of 1C's with a 2wq sub placed in between. It's all set up in a very small room (10x12) with acoustic treatment. I'd like to get more precise imaging, and was wondering if I'm better off upgrading to the 2ce sigs for the added benefit of a midrange driver, OR would I be better off adding a second 2wq so I could place the subs behind the main speakers instead of having just one in the center? Conversely, should I just give up since my room is so small?

Answer: HELLO AMY, I WOULD GET YOUR DEALER TO LOOK AT YOUR ROOM AND ADVISE BASED ON WHAT HE HEARS. A SECOND 2WQ WOULD NOT BE MUCH OF A BENEFIT IN SUCH A SMALL ROOM.? A DEALER VISIT MAY DISCOVER A WAY TO GET YOUR 1C TO IMAGE BETTER OR ADVISE WHAT YOUR NEXT MOVE SHOULD BE.

Bryan (11/14/06): I am a long-time owner of a pair of your original 2C speakers with low 6,000 serial numbers. These were manufactured before you provided bi-amping. Besides the bi-amping what are the major differences between these and the current version of this speaker? What benefits would I derive besides further speaker life?

Answer: BRYAN, YOUR SPEAKERS ARE ALMOST 30 YEARS OLD, GLAD YOU ARE STILL ENJOYING THEM. THE BASIC TIME AND PHASE CORRECT DESIGN IS STILL USED TODAY HOWEVER EVERY SINGLE PART HAS BEEN IMPROVED WITH NEW TECHNOLOGY MANY TIMES. YOU SHOULD GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND HAVE A LISTEN TO THE 2CE SIGNATURE'S. IN ONE WAY YOU WILL HEAR WHAT IS VERY FAMILIAR BUT RESOLUTION, TRANSPARENCY, BASS EXTENSION AND DEFINITION, POWER HANDLING AND IMAGING ARE DRAMATICALLY IMPROVED.

David (11/13/06): Two questions regarding Model 5's and the batteries. Sometimes batteries do not last as long as they are expected. What would be the audible signature if either of the battery packs were to give out prematurely? Also, these look like 9V's "strapped" together, as it were. Can you provide a brief tutorial to a person who can solder on battery replacement who is not wanting to send in the modules or take them to a dealer? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, NOT MUCH TO SAY THAT ISN'T OBVIOUS. DO THEM ONE AT A TIME AND MAKE THEM LOOK THE SAME, YOU WILL BE FINE. USE LITHIUM IF YOU WANT IT TO LAST 12 YEARS. WE HAVE NOT FOUND ANY BATTERIES THAT HAVEN'T GONE THE DISTANCE.

Anthony (11/13/06): I have a pair of 2ce's that I bought in either 1991 or 1992. I had to put them in storage for a short time, only to recover them with what appears to be a water spot on the the bottom grill cloth of each speaker. I would like to send them back to the factory to have them looked at, but can you also replace the grille cloth?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, CHECK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS. ANY QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324

Kevin (11/10/06): When can we expect your VCC-2 loudspeaker to debut?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, WE HAVE BEEN SHIPPING THE VCC-2 FOR WEEKS, CONTACT YOUR DEALER AS NOT ALL HAVE IT YET.

Rich (11/08/06): Hi Richard - first the up front compliment: fell in love with your speakers in the late 80's at a NYC Hi-Fi show, and have since then gone from 2Ci to 2Ce Sig and recently to Quatros they sound great. I listen to vinyl and my system will always be optimized for 2 channel. But just been relocated to Nashville, and building a new listening room so may attempt to integrate very modest secondary multi-channel capability in order to watch movies with my significant other or check out the multi-channel content on my SACD's/DVD-A's. I spoke to you briefly (will probably spring for Brian Berdan to come here to set-up the Quatros) and reviewed the FAQs but frankly I'm a complete multi-channel novice and not sure I even understand some of the answers -- what's an LFE? -- so now to the question: I'm thinking about getting an A/V receiver and using its pre-out to feed the front L/R through my primary 2-ch pre-amp's bypass to 2-ch amp/Quatros. Then using the A/V receiver amp to power a couple of your VSM's for the rear and a VCC center. As I want to keep this simple, and my preferences are more towards small group jazz and older classic/foreign movies -- limited large orchestral or car chase/explosion fare -- I'm inclined to skip a subwoofer (I gather I can set most processor/receivers to no sub?) as the Quatros should be fine in a 16' x 26' room. If anything, rather than a sub, I suspect I'm better putting $ towards the VCC-5 for a better quality center if listening to something like the 3 channel Mercury recordings. Does this make sense to you?

Answer: HELLO RICH, LFE (LOW FREQUENCY EFFECT) IS ANOTHER NAME FOR SUBWOOFER OUT. I AGREE THAT IT WOULD BE BETTER TO PUT THE MONEY INTO A VCC-5. THIS SOUNDS FINE TO ME BUT I WOULD PASS IT BY YOUR DEALER.

Unknown (11/08/06): I have a pair of 2CE signatures running on a Dynaco ST 70. The manual suggests that I put all the low frequency through the left channel and the high frequencies through the right. If I set up the bi wiring to do this it doesn't seem like a natural idea because I wont get channel separation. Is there something I should know?

Answer: HELLO , I HOPE I'M NOT WASTING MY TIME SINCE YOU CAN'T READ SIMPLE INSTRUCTIONS. I THINK YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT BI-AMPING WHICH WOULD REQUIRE 2 STEREO 70 AMPLIFIERS. REREAD THE INSTRUCTIONS ON BI-WIRING IF YOU HAVE ONE STEREO 70 AND FOLLOW THEM. IF YOU DO HAVE 2 STEREO 70 AMPLIFIERS FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR BI-AMPING. IF THIS DOES NOT CLEAR UP CALL ME 559-582-0324.

John (11/07/06): The spade connectors at the end of my speaker cable are wider than the space allowed by the plastic dividers / "fins" / on each side of the screws that serves as the binding posts on the 3's. What would happen if I removed / cut off the dividers so that the spades could make a better connection / be fully seated around the screw ? Naturally I would be sure that the 2 spades didn't touch each other.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, IT WOULD BE BETTER TO TRIM THE SIDES OF THE CONNECTOR SO THEY WILL FIT. THE LESS METAL IN THE CONNECTOR THE BETTER THE SOUND. IF YOU TRIM THE BARRIERS IT IS VERY EXPENSIVE TO REPLACE THEM FOR RESALE AND THERE IS THE POSSIBILITY OF A SHORT, COULD COST YOU AN AMPLIFIER.

Allen (11/07/06): Dear Sir,I am writing to enquire if an integrated amplifier can be used with the new Quatro model? Doe the Quatro external crossover units require separate amp and preamp for installation or will a very good integrated allow for installation? Many Thanks,

Answer: HELLO ALLEN, THE HIGH-PASS MUST BE USED SO ONLY INTEGRATED WITH PRE OUT-PRE IN WILL BE CANDIDATES. READ OTHER POSTS ON THIS FORUM ON THE IMPORTANCE OF HIGH-PASSING THE AMPLIFIER AND THE SPEAKER.

Steve (11/07/06): Richard, What are the technical details of the upcoming 2CE 25th anniversary edition? (It has been mentioned online) Are there 3-series upgrades in the pipeline as well? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO STEVE, OUR 30TH ANNIVERSARY IS NEXT YEAR. NOTHING GOING ON WITH THE 3A SIGNATURES THEY WERE NOT AROUND 30 YEARS AGO.

Mike (11/04/06): Hi Richard, If the battery runs flat in the 5A high pass filter can the loudspeaker be damaged? Regards

Answer: HELLO MIKE, DEAD BATTERIES IN YOUR HIGH-PASS WILL ONLY MAKE YOUR 5'S SOUND BROKEN. ONCE YOU HAVE NEW BATTERIES INSTALLED THEY WILL BE ALL BETTER. DO NOT FORGET THE BATTERIES ON THE INTERNAL X-OVER IN YOUR MODEL 5'S.

Lars (11/03/06): Hi Richard. Do you have any suggestions for ceiling-mounts of the VSM-1 speakers? (Running experiments with overhead surround sound as a further extension of the "EX" format. Essentially a 5.0 matrix decoding of the Left/Right surrounds). -Thanks.

Answer: HELLO LARS, THE VSM'S ARE OFTEN USED AS CEILING SPEAKERS. I CAN NOT HELP YOU ON HOW FOR LIABILITY REASONS LEST ONE FALL AND HIT SOMEONE ON THE HEAD. USE YOUR INGENUITY AND MAKE SURE THEY CAN NOT FALL. BECAUSE THE VSM'S ARE POINT SOURCES THEY ARE IDEAL FOR CEILING USE.

Eddy (11/03/06): Eddy, from Brisbane AU Hallo Richard, could I use a pair of 2Wq with the 3A Signature and VCC-5 center. I listen to both music ( cd, SACD, DVD-A) and home theatre, or would I be better off with a pair of V2W. Regards

Answer: HELLO EDDY, YOU CAN USE THE 2WQ'S JUST FINE JUST TELL THE PROCESSOR THAT YOU DO NOT HAVE A SUB SO THE LFE WILL BE REDIRECTED TO THE FRONT TWO CHANNELS.

Jason (10/31/06): Hi Richard. I totally agree with your designs, and I love your "house sound". However, I also love that distinct and pleasant sound of speakers that use those Vifa XT19/25 ring radiators. Is there any possibility of incorporating the Vifa XT19/25 into you current designs?

Answer: HELLO JASON, THE RING RADIATORS FROM VIFA AND SCAN-SPEAK ARE NOT PISTONIC AND ARE IN CONTROLLED BREAK-UP FROM APX 8K. THE TWEETERS WE USE ARE TRULY PISTONIC THROUGH ALL AUDIBLE FREQUENCIES (27K). THIS WILL BE LOWER IN DISTORTION AND RESULTS IN MORE ACCURATE IMAGING.

Bill (10/31/06): Hi Richard, just a note to tell you how pleased I am with my new 5As. Eric Schmidt recommended these speakers and I could not be more pleased. The piano black finish is truly remarkable. I am driving these 5As with a Macintosh MC 2102 and the preamp is a Macintosh C 2200. Both components are vacuum tube design. The 5As seem to really blossom with these components. Family and friends marvel at the open sound, the realistic sound stage, and the absolute delightful overall presentation. I am a heavy listener and study straight ahead jazz. Given the hours of listening I have suffered ear fatigue many times. But no more. The Vandys just deliver a beautiful presentation without glare or harshness. Thanks very much for your craftsmanship and pride. If you are in the San Jose area please let me know. I would to demo these speakers and give you the chance to see how well they work with the Macintosh tube gear. Of course Miles Davis and John Coltrane would be involved not to mention a glass of vino ! All the best,

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WILL PASS ON THE INFO.

Luciano (10/31/06): After reading how to use the 2Wq and the article from Audio Perfectionist Journal, I agree that this is the way to go but what if the main speaker is very small i.e. with a low frequency response of around 90 - 95 Hz ? in other words there is no way to change the 80 Hz of the crossover as per 2Wq specs and still getting optimum results ?

Answer: HELLO LUCIANO, 80HZ IS ABOUT THE LIMIT IN MY OPINION. MOVE THE X-OVER HIGHER AND THE BASS WILL GET DIRECTIONAL AND THE TWO WILL NEVER SOUND AS ONE (OUR GOAL). SUCH A SMALL SPEAKER CERTAINLY WILL BENEFIT FROM THE HIGH-PASS AND YOU WOULD NOT WANT TO TRY GOING WITHOUT IT, UNLESS YOU LIKE WATCHING A SMALL WOOFER BEAT IT SELF UP, AND LISTENING TO THE RESULTING DISTORTION.

Tom (10/29/06): Hello Richard--I have a question about your subwoofers, 2WQ. My current set up is a pair of old Model 3's from the mid 1990's (can or should they beupgraded?) with Adcom electronics. I will probably bi-Amp the system with a old rack mount Adcom that I am re-furbishing. My question is about the 2WQ's. Many reviews I have read say that a pair of these guys is really necessary, or to forget it. Another question I have is about placement. If I get a pair, can I place the second 2WQ 20 feet away from the main speakers? I mean they aren't directional are they? This is a 10x25 room with the system on the long wall, going across the shortest length of the room. I would propose having the two 2WQ's on the two ends of the room.

Answer: HELLO TOM, THERE ARE MANY FAQ,S THAT ADDRESS ONE VERSES TWO SUBS ON THIS SITE. I RECOMMEND STEREO SUBS ONE IN EACH CORNER BEHIND AND TO THE OUTSIDE OF YOUR MODEL THREE'S. IF YOU WANT HIGHER PERFORMANCE FROM YOUR MAIN SPEAKERS YOU SHOULD UPGRADE.

Tom (10/28/06): Hello Richard: I have a pair of Model 5's purchased in early 2002 (sn's 2202, 2203).They are wonderful speakers. The life expectancy of the 5's internal battery pack is stated as 7+ years however the written notation on page 16 of the manual states March 2006. Typo or just a prompt for an early check? Are there audible symptoms which would indicate declining effectiveness of the internal battery pack? Best regards,

Answer: HELLO TOM, IF YOUR MANUAL CAME WITH THE SPEAKERS I WOULD GO BY THAT DATE. IF YOU REPLACE THE BATTERIES WITH LITHIUM THEY WILL LAST APX 11 YEARS.

Larry (10/15/06): Richard, I own the V5As and am driving them with an ARC VT100. My dealer once suggested I try the 4ohm taps, instead of the 8ohm. I understand this may affect the damping factor and the frequency response (especially low end). Do you recommend trying this? Can it damage either speaker or amp? What difference might I hear? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO LARRY, TRY THEM ON BOTH TAPS AND STAY WITH THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST. THERE WILL BE NO DAMAGE TO THE AMP OR SPEAKERS.

Greg (10/09/06): Hello, Richard. My name is Greg, and I live on Long Island. Recently, I purchased a pair of used 3A Signature speakers from one of your dealers. Unfortunately, one of the pair was lost by FedEx en route to me. This began a 2 week hunt for the missing speaker. We'd just about given up and began the long process of making a claim. Imagine my surprise when I found that the speaker surfaced at your factory! I want to thank you and especially the fine gal who answered the phone, took the initiative to look about and find my speaker, and handle the necessaries to get it shipped back across the country to me. I am now enjoying the finest sound my home known. Great, great stuff you're turning out there! Thank you again, and please thank for me, again, the staff member who took such good care of me in a time of stress.

Answer: HELLO GREG, CONSIDER IT DONE.

Craig (10/09/06): Richard, I have a question you probably haven't heard before. I am interested in purchasing two 2wq subs but my problem is the are not physically large enough. I intend to use them as end tables. Can I modify or hide the cases inside a larger enclosure (no sides) that will look like your enclosures with black cloth around the outside, without destroying the sound and performance of the subs. Thanks in advance your help.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, THAT WON'T HURT A THING EXCEPT THE BEST LOCATION WOULD BE IN THE CORNER.

John (10/06/06): I am putting together a 2-channel system, and am leaning toward buying a Jolida amp, along with Vandersteen speakers. The Jolida will probably be either the JD-302B or the JD-502B. They are only rated at 50 and 50 wpc respectively, so I am concerned with two questions with regard to which Vandersteen speakers would be better. I understand the Model 1C does not have the kind of detail that the Model 2Ce does, but the 2Ce is 3dB lower in sensitivity. A big problem I have is that there are no audio dealers in the area that carry both the Jolida and the Vandersteen lines, so it is not possible to audition both of them together easily (unless I buy one and take it to the other location). My questions are these:1) Are both of the Jolidas capable of driving the 2Ce adequately?2) Is the quality of the Jolidas such that there would be a sonic benefit to getting the 2Cs instead of the 1Cs? The reason for this question is that I was told that the 1C is better for lower resolution electronics because it may not expose the weaknesses as much as 2Cs would. But I am not sure if the Jolidas are at the level to be appropriate for the 2C.Thank you.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THERE ARE MANY POSTS ON THIS SITE ABOUT POWER. THE ONLY WAY TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS WITH A ANSWER THAT WOULD MEAN ANYTHING, IS TO FIND SOME WAY TO AUDITION THEM TOGETHER.

Leonard (10/04/06): Hi Richard. I have read all the information on low Q and first order filters. I understand how the 2WQ subs integrate with the main speakers and why corner placement is advised. I just wonder if there is any limit on large rooms for corner placement for subs? I am considering your 3A Signatures and if all goes well, then add a pair of 2WQ subs. My 2 channel only listening room is rather large: 26' X 37' X 14' high. Preferred placement with my past speakers is 12' from the front (short) wall, 8' from the side-wall, and 14' from the corner. My listening chair is 12' from each speaker and there is 13' behind my chair plus an open foyer beyond that for another 14'. Nice free space placement. At what point does a room get large enough that I should be concerned about delay or sound integration problems with corner subs? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO LEONARD, BASS IS OMNI-DIRECTIONAL AND THE WAVE LENGTHS ARE LONG, I WOULD STILL TRY THEM IN THE CORNER. IF THAT IS NOT SATISFACTORY MOVE THEM UNTIL THEY ARE.

John (10/04/06): Hello, my name is John, I'm considering a pair of 3a sigs, or Quattro's, problem is that my room is only 12'wide and 13' long. The room is treated, but I am not sure if these will work well in this small of a room. Thanks for your response.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THE QUATRO HAS ADJUSTABLE BASS WHICH WOULD GIVE IT THE ADVANTAGE. WITH SOME TREATMENT FOR HIGH FREQUENCY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY EARLY REFLECTIONS AND THE BASS ADJUSTMENTS ON THE QUATRO IT SHOULD WORK FINE.

Frank (10/02/06): I have the Model 5A speaker. I will be using Bel 1001 Mk IV amp (single ended). Its input impedance is at 27 kilo-ohm. so, would I set the cross over at 20K or 33K? I have it at 100K by mistake - I hope I have not damaged the speaker already? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO FRANK, IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THE THE HIGH-PASS BE ADJUSTED CORRECTLY. THE CORRECT SETTING WOULD BE THE CLOSEST ONE (33K).

Stuart (9/28/06): Hello Richard, I own 3A sigs + 2Wq's + HP-5B's (looking to move to 5A's). I am also looking at the new Ayre MX-R mono blocks but they have 2 Megohms Impedance. I asked Charles Hansen of Ayre how they have married Vandersteens to these new amps at the trade shows. His answer was thus:<< Am I reading the MX-R impendence right at 1M Ohm? >>Yes, it is 1 Megohm per phase. For the Vandersteen crossovers running balanced mode, this means 2 Megohms total.<< The HP-5's don't go that high :-( >>Higher input impedances require a smaller capacitor. I think the smallest capacitor in the crossover box is a 0.01 uF. This is still too big to achieve the correct 100 Hz crossover frequency. The solution is to add a resistor in parallel with the amplifier input in order to reduce the input impedance. I'm pretty sure that there is an option for this with the HP-5B. Check with Vandersteen to find out for sure. If they don't have a good answer for you, have Richard give me a call and we'll figure out a solution. Is this an option with the HP-5B's? I know several other folks on the boards have had the same question. Thank you for any insight / advice.

Answer: HELLO STUART, WE HAVE USED THE NEW MONO'S MANY TIMES. FOR 2 MEG USE SWITCHES 4 & 5 ALL OTHER SWITCHES OFF.

Tom (9/25/06): Hi - I have some older model 2 speakers, and I am moving them from a room that had a bi-wired Dennon to one with a 'regular' dennon dra 425Is my best stategy1) use the a and b speaker outs to bi wire2) do a jump from the upper to lower speaker inputs using banana plugs stacked3) use one speaker input with some specific setting 4) something else I haven't thought of.? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO TOM, SPEAKERS ARE NOT THE SAME SOME TIMES. THE BEST WAY TO DO THIS WOULD BE GETTING SOME SPADES FROM AN AUTO PARTS STORE LARGE ENOUGH FOR BOTH WIRES. PUT THE SPADE UNDER THE 5-WAY BINDING POST ON YOUR AMPLIFIER.

Richard (9/20/06): Hi Richard: I just received a set of Quatros. I want to use them in my home theater. I had 2Ci's and (2) 2Wq's. I will sell those but I was wondering if I should keep one of the 2Wq's to use with my VCC5. The 2Wq manual that I have suggests not using subs with a center channel but that was before you had the VCC5 available. Do you still subscribe to the "no subwoofer with center channel" philosophy? What is the down-side? Also my center channel amp has an input impedance of 47Kohms. I have Vandersteen 33kohm and 50kohm HP filters. Which would you use??

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, KEEP BOTH 2WQ'S AND USE THEM ON THE REAR CHANNELS. THIS MAKES AN UNBELIEVABLE DIFFERENCE. WE RAN THE QUATRO'S AT CEDIA THIS WAY AND EVERYBODY LOVED IT.

Kevin (9/19/06): I recently purchased a new pair of 2Ce Signature loudspeakers after literally being put into shock after hearing a dealer's demo (Audio Nexus, NJ). Being a classical musician (trombonist) I can now tell you first hand your loudspeaker design using time aligned phase accurate drivers presents the recorded signal so perfectly, that what I once thought was overly bright recordings with strident brass was actually very natural recordings that were being desecrated by a supposedly high end satellite/subwoofer system which I owned previously. This experience has made me wonder if ALL loudspeakers that don't adhere to these design concepts are seriously flawed in their performance. If that's true, why aren't more loudspeaker companies embracing what you have been advocating for the past 30 years, and why would anybody spend $50,000+ for speakers that don't adhere to these specs? Thanks for a great product.

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, YOU ASK A GOOD QUESTION AND I WILL TRY TO ANSWER IT. ALMOST 30 YEARS AGO OUR FIRST SPEAKERS WERE MORE TYPICAL (BOX WITH HIGH QUALITY DRIVERS AND STEEP X-OVERS). IN MAKING THE DECISION TO CHANGE CAREERS WITH A NEW GROWING FAMILY MY LISTENING PANEL WOULD DISCUSS EAST COAST SOUND VERSES WEST COAST SOUND, WHICH LEFT ME VERY NERVOUS. I SUGGESTED WHY WE WOULD NOT TRY TO REPRODUCE THE SOUND DELIVERED BY THE AMPLIFIER. ALL AGREED AND THIS BEGAN A QUEST INVOLVING LIVE VS RECORDED LISTENING SESSIONS. THE FIRST TO GO WAS THE BOX BECAUSE IT MADE OUR RECORDINGS SOUND BOXY ACCORDING TO THE PANEL OF AUDIOPHILES, BAFFLE-LESS WAS BORN. SOON THE DRIVERS WERE ALIGNED SO THEY ALL SPOKE AT THE SAME TIME BUT THAT ONLY WORKED WITH FIRST ORDER X-OVER'S. MANY EXPERIMENTS AND LIVE VS RECORDING SESSIONS LATER THE MODEL TWO WAS BORN. OVER TIME THAT BASIC DESIGN HAS MORPHED INTO MANY PRODUCTS ALL USING THE SAME DESIGN PHILOSOPHY. AS TO WHY SO FEW SPEAKERS ARE THIS WAY 30 YEARS LATER I CAN ONLY GUESS EXCEPT THAT A LARGE PERCENTAGE BELIEVE THAT MUSIC REPRODUCTION VIA A SPEAKER IS AN ART UNTO ITSELF. IF IT SOUNDS GOOD IT IS GOOD. 30 YEARS AGO THIS WAS THE ROLE OF TONE CONTROLS BUT THEY HAVE DISAPPEARED FOR "ACCURACY". NOW THEY ARE DESIGNED INTO LOUDSPEAKERS THE ONLY PROBLEM IS THEY CANT BE DEFEATED. THE OTHER REASON IS COST. EVERY SPEAKER IS CAREFULLY MATCHED AND ITS X-OVER HAND ADJUSTED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER. THIS IS NOT CONDUCIVE FOR MASS PRODUCTION. IN THE END IT WAS THE ONLY CHOICE FOR ME AND STILL IS 30 YEARS LATER. IF SOME DAY A DEPARTURE FROM WAVEFORM PRESERVATION SOUNDS BETTER TO ME ON ALL MUSIC AND UNDER LIVE VS LISTENING TESTS, I COULD CHANGE MY MIND.

Chuck (9/18/06): I am considering purchasing a pair of 2CE's,,,serial numbers 66126ce and 66127ce...can you tell me date of manufacture from the serial numbers? Also I am using a pair of MIT Shotgun MH-750 speaker cables....the cables are very high end and detailed but not by-wire. I there another way to connect then without jumper strips to realize full sonic benefits of both speaker and cable? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO CHUCK, I CAN ONLY GUESS AT ABOUT 1990. JUMPERS WILL BE THE ONLY WAY TO HOOK UP THE SPEAKERS. IF THE SOUND IS NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED BE SURE TO TRY ANOTHER WIRE. HIGH PRICED WIRE DOES NOT GUARANTEE IT IS A PROPER MATCH.

Robert (9/17/06): I'm considering the purchase of a pair of Vandersteen 2C3e Signature series loudspeakers. I've borrowed a pair from my local dealer and love them. The only concern is the base. It "leaves" a large foot print in an already cramped room. Is there any sonic purpose to the base or is it just for stability? Can I do without the base and get optimal performance from the speakers? Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THE STAND IS A MUST. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO GET THE TILT RIGHT FOR YOUR LISTENING HEIGHT AND DISTANCE.

Stan (9/16/06): Hi Mr.V - I have my 5A's for 9 months already. I play them every day for hours, yet I still hear them getting better and better. Is this still the breaking in process?

Answer: HELLO STAN, WE BREAK-IN DRIVERS AND OTHER COMPONENTS FOR 1000 HOURS BEFORE ANY DESIGN WORK IS DONE. THEY WILL CONTINUE TO CHANGE ALTHOUGH SLIGHTLY UNTIL AT LEAST 400 HOURS.

Ken (9/09/06): I have just purchased a pair of Quatros from Audio Connection (NJ) after a second audition in which John and Carlos painstakingly and patiently inserted my equipment (CARY TUBES) to make sure the components were compatible. WOW! The Quatros were bought to either replace or be used in rotatation with Quad ESL 63s. Unlike virtually every other speaker I have auditioned the Quatros have most of the unique qualities of the Quads and more dynamics. I have used a pair of 2wqs or Celestion 6000s to augment the Quads" bass and have become accustomed to very deep bass. My question is: should I trade the 2wqs in or can they be integrated into the Quatros for even more bass? Or, will you be coming out with 2wqs that use the 11 band compensation in the future? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO KEN, MOST PEOPLE IN MOST ROOMS HAVE PLENTY BASS WITH THE QUATROS. MORE BASS IS THE FUNCTION OF A BASE BOOST CIRCUIT NOT MORE WOOFERS. IF YOU HAVE A VERY LARGE ROOM YOU CAN CONTACT YOUR DEALER ON HOW TO INCORPORATE THEM BOTH.

Frank (9/15/06): I Just purchased a used pair of 2CE's vintage 1996 No's 74398, 74399. My question: I am currently using an Audible Illusions preamp, model M-3. These preamps do not invert phase. AI says to switch red with black at the speaker connection. Any conflicts here regarding phase in the 2CE? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO FRANK, YOU NEED TO KNOW WHETHER YOUR SYSTEM IS IN ABSOLUTE PHASE. THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER NEED TO BE IN ABSOLUTE PHASE TOGETHER. IF THAT IS THE CASE THE RED WIRE GOES TO THE RED AND BLACK TO BLACK. I BELIEVE THE M-3 DOES INVERT PHASE SO IF YOU AMP DOES NOT YOU WOULD REVERSE THE WIRES ON THE SPEAKER. AGAIN A GOOD DEALER WILL HELP WITH THIS.

Yuchyu (9/24/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce speaker since 1992. Recently, I found that a red light below the bass speaker is on and sometime I can hear strange unstable noise even without turning on CD player. What is the problem of my speaker? What is the red light for? Should I sent the whole speaker back to you for repair or I just need to pull out one of speaker or crossover for replacement. please let me know, Thanks

Answer: HELLO YUCHYU, YOUR OWNERS MANUAL EXPLAINS THE RED LIGHT. IT IS A WARNING THAT THE SYSTEM IS BEING PLAYED TO LOUD. LOWER THE VOLUME AND IT WILL GO AWAY. DO NOT FOR ANY REASON REMOVE THE X-OVER. IF YOU NEED FURTHER ASSISTANCE CALL 559-582-0324.

Felix (9/08/06): Hi Richard. I'm looking to add an old 2w subwoofer to my actual stereo setup. My main speakers consist of Totem Model 1 signature which are small Canadian monitors going down to 50Hz. On your site, you recommend using speakers which reach a full octave below the crossover point of 85 Hz(40Hz). If I add a 2w, will it have difficulty integrating my monitors and will I be able to locate it in my listening room? I hope that the answers to both these questions is no...

Answer: HELLO FELIX, THERE ARE MANY EXISTING FAQ'S DEALING WITH THIS QUESTION I SUGGEST YOU PERUSE THEM. REMEMBER THIS IS NOT ABOUT ONLY THE 2WQ BUT ALL SUBWOOFERS.

Ken (9/07/06): Hi Richard, Well, if this is the place for technical questions, I have a technical question...I bought all-new Vandersteens for a 7.1 system, and I am selling an older pair of Model 5s to a guy in the US. I am in Canada, and a shipper tells me that I have to send a declaration form/letter with the speakers, to confirm that, "the field strength of the magnets in the loudspeakers is less than 0.002 gauss at 2.1 meters" and therefore are not restricted as magnetized material under Packing Instruction #902 of the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations." I haven't heard of this before, but I thought it likely that you would know the answer to this question. Can you help me please? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO KEN, THAT IS ALL TRUE BUT THE STANDARDS ARE NOT CLEAR SO I HAVE NEVER SENT ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS OUT FOR TEST (YOU CAN IMAGINE WHAT A LAB WOULD CHARGE). THE BEST ANSWER IS TO GET A DIFFERENT SHIPPER OR METHOD. ONE THING YOU WANT TO BE MINDFUL ABOUT IS WHAT THEY WILL PAY IN CASE OF DAMAGE BECAUSE USED GOODS ARE CLASSIFIED AS "PERSONAL BELONGINGS" AND THE COVERAGE IS NORMALLY POOR.

Mauricio (9/07/06): Do you have a dealer in Colombia? How can I get a pair of Vandersteen in this country?

Answer: HELLO MAURICIO, LOOK UP EXPORT ON THIS SITE AND CONTACT DELRAMA FAX 408-367-1355.

Zvonko (9/06/06): Hi Richard. I currently have 2ce Sigs that I am driving with a 125 watt/channel solid state MOSFET amplifier. I am thinking of getting a couple of the 2WQ subs to fill in the bottom end and was wondering that since the subs have their own amplifier and the main amp will not be driving the low frequencies, can I switch to a lower power amplifier and still get the same volume out of the setup. What I am thinking is that I can switch to a tube amplifier of lower wattage and take advantage of the better mids and high frequency sound reproduction that they deliver. If you agree, what would you recommend as the minimum wattage tube amplifier for this and if there is a model and brand that you have had good experience with. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ZVONKO, THIS IS A COMMON MISUNDERSTANDING. THE PEAK VOLTAGE (NOT CURRENT) SWING IN MUSIC OCCURS MOST OFTEN IN THE MID RANGE, THIS IS WHY THE AMPLIFIER NEEDS TO BE ABOUT THE SAME POWER. IT IS TRUE THAT THE AMPLIFIER WILL BE MUCH HAPPIER NOT HAVING TO DO THE HIGH CURRENT WORK IN THE BASS BUT THE CLIPPING POINT WILL BE ONLY SLIGHTLY IMPROVED BECAUSE THE RAILS WILL SAG LESS. SOME TUBE AMPS HAVE PROBLEMS DELIVERING CURRENT, THIS WILL NOT BE A FACTOR WITH THE SUBS. I SUGGEST YOU AUDITION A FEW AMPLIFIERS AND SEE IF THEY SOUND TO YOUR LIKING AND PLAY LOUD ENOUGH ON YOUR MUSIC.

Fernando (8/31/06): I have a pair of older model 2C speakers with the beige socks. While these speakers have served me well, the socks are showing their age. I would like to replace them with black socks. It has been stated that the replacement cost is $80 per speaker. However, shipping costs may more than double that figure. I live in the San Francisco Bay area, which is 2-1/2 hours from the Vandersteen Hanford factory. Can I drop off the speakers? Can I pick them up after the work is done? Are there any lower cost shipping options, such as shipping them to my local dealer? I am hoping that my speakers will be part of a larger shipment, and therefore cheaper to ship.

Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, TAKING THEM TO YOUR DEALER IS A OPTION BUT THEY NEED TO BE PAID FOR THEIR TIME SO IT WILL COST MORE. YOU MAY DROP THE SPEAKERS AT THE FACTORY HOWEVER THERE IS A DROP CHARGE OF $50.00. SHIPPING FROM S.F. WILL BE LESS THAN THAT IF YOU TAKE THEM TO UPS NOT A PACKAGE STORE. I CAN'T IMAGINE BEING ABLE TO DRIVE 500 MILES ROUND TRIP TWICE WITH TODAY'S GAS PRICES FOR LESS THAN UPS. I DO NOT KNOW A SINGLE SPEAKER YOU CAN USE FOR 20 YEARS AND HAVE MADE NEW COSMETICALLY INCLUDING A CHECK-UP FOR APPROX $275.00 TOTAL.

Mike (8/31/06): I have the Model 2 sn:C30062 & 63C. Over the years of service, I am pleased of their performance. Recently the active acoustic coupler (rear cone suspension) had separated from it's base and part of it had cracked around the outer rim. Is there any way that I may purchase or exchange for new couplers, without shipping the speaker to the USA?. I am a Electronic Technician and I have no problems servicing the Model 2 including removing and reinstalling the grill to it's original factory look.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, I ASSUME YOU ARE OVERSEAS SO CONTACT DELARAMA FAX#480-367-1355. YOU WILL NEED TO PROVIDE HIM WITH THE SPEAKER MODEL NUMBER, SN#, AND ALL CODES AND MARKINGS ON THE BACK OF THE DRIVER ITSELF.

Adrian (8/29/06): Hi Richard I have a couple of questions; Now that the Vandersteen Quatros have become such a success and have obtained great reviews all over the audiophile community are you going to continue future research and development on the Model 2CE Sigs and 3A Sigs or are these speakers pretty much complete? It seems that you have chosen the "active speaker technology" as the technology of choice. Wouldn't a next logical step be to place a class D full range amplifier in a speaker? I would buy that ASAP because that would make life simple (One interconnect and one power wire). I am an eleven year owner of your model 2CE Signatures, Great Speaker. Thank You

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, THE MODEL 2'S AND MODEL 3'S ARE NEVER COMPLETE AND GET YEARLY REFINEMENTS. I HAVE NOT HEARD A CLASS D AMPLIFIER THAT I LIKE ESPECIALLY ON HIGH REZ (VINYL) SOURCES AS WELL AS ANALOG AMPLIFIERS WITH LOW OR NO FEEDBACK. IT WOULD BE A MARKETING MISTAKE ANYWAY BECAUSE IT WOULD ASSUME THAT ALL VANDERSTEEN CUSTOMERS LIKE THE SAME SOUND. TRUST ME THAT IS NOT TRUE, I HAVE HEARD THEM SOUND VERY DIFFERENT FROM SYSTEM TO SYSTEM OVER THE YEARS. THE BEAUTY OF A TIME AND PHASE ACCURATE SPEAKER IS THEY ARE VERY NEUTRAL AND CAN BE MADE TO SOUND ANY WAY YOU LIKE WITH CAREFUL SELECTION OF THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT.

Andrew (8/28/06): Richard, thanks for this forum which I find very helpful. I currently power my 3As with an Audio Research VT130 and LS2MkII and am thinking of upgrading to a pair of 3A Signatures or Quatros. Will the VT130 and LS2MkII be adequate for the Quatros? Also, I've gone through the forum and it seems the Quatros are only available for 120v/50Hz power supply. When will you make them for 220v/60Hz electricity supply?

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, YOUR ELECTRONICS SHOULD WORK FINE WITH EITHER SPEAKER. WE DO NOT INTEND TO MAKE A 220 VOLT VERSION AS IT SOUNDS INFERIOR TO A 115 VOLT WITH A STEP/DOWN TRANSFORMER. MAYBE THE EXTRA ISOLATION IS THE REASON.

Bill (8/27/06): Hello -I have a pair of 2ce's and a VCC-1 center channel speaker in a home theater setting. I used to have the center channel speaker sitting on top of my subwoofer, but now I have two subs and they are behind the 2ce's, so I need something like a speaker stand for the VCC-1. Any recommendations? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BILL, CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A RECOMMENDATION. THERE ARE MANY MANUFACTURES OF DIFFERENT STANDS I AM SURE ONE OF THEM WILL WORK FOR YOU.

Matt (8/26/06): Richard, I have model 2Ce speakers. One woofer has a tear in the surround and was repaired with silicone but plays ok. The other speaker has 2 red lights that glow softly on and off with the music. What does that mean? what would be the cost of refurbishing this model? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MATT, IT SOUNDS TO ME LIKE THESE SPEAKERS HAVE LIVED A ROUGH LIFE. I WOULD SEND THEM IN FOR A CHECK-UP AND REPAIR. THE RED LIGHTS ARE WHAT WE CALL "IDIOT LIGHTS" WHICH NORMALLY MEANS TURN THE VOLUME DOWN BUT YOURS DO NOT SEEM TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY.? CONTACT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO FOR REPAIRS 559-582-0324.

Tony (8/25/06): Can the Quatro's be used with a HT receiver? Or does it require the High-Pass filters to work?

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE QUATRO REQUIRES A HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND THE AMPLIFIER. I DO NOT BELIEVE A HT RECEIVER WOULD BE UP TO THE TASK ANYWAY.

Bob (8/24/06): Recently acquired the venerable Vandy Model 2. Do not have the user manual. Is this item (user manual) available and if so where can I get one?Are there any accessories available to upgrade or enhance the performance level of these fine old speakers? How is the sock removed - I need to clean it. Is the sock replaceable if I feel the need for a new one? Please respond - thanks.

Answer: HELLO BOB, WE DO NOT HAVE OWNERS MANUAL FOR SPEAKERS THAT OLD AND THERE ARE NO UPGRADES. CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS WEB SITE ON HOW TO RETURN THEM FOR A GRILL CHANGE. ON A SPEAKER 29 YEARS OLD IT NEEDS TO BE CHANGED NOT CLEANED IN MY OPINION. TO CHANGE GRILL CLOTH IS $80 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT.

Andy (8/23/06): My pair of 2Ce speakers are serial numbers 71118 and 71119. They are old enough to have come with banana jacks rather than terminal strips. Would it be possible to update the back panels on these speakers with ones with a terminal strip? If so, is it a job I could do myself or would they need to come back to you? I am fairly handy. I've also noted your comments that some banana plugs are too long. As an alternative to replacing the back panels, do you have any recommendations for locking banana plugs that I could re-terminate my cables with that would be the correct length for the jacks in my speakers? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ANDY, IT WOULD BE VERY DIFFICULT TO GO TO THE TERMINAL STRIP OF THE 2CE SIG'S. WE COULD DO IT AT THE FACTORY BUT THE COST WOULD BE MORE THAN THE DIFFERENCE USED FOR 2CE SIG'S. YOU CAN USE ANY BANANA PLUG JUST DO NOT PUSH IT IN AS FAR.

Jenny (8/22/06): I just got a new Kenwood seven channel surround sound amp and had my "techie" son in law redo our audio system so that our Vandersteen Stereo speakers are hooked up to the TV along with our Bose surround sound. It's amazing how much better the sound quality is since the Vandersteen speakers were attached. Why would the stereo speakers make such a difference with the surround sound? My son in law is really impressed, and very curious. I don't know how he configured the audio, but whatever he did, it's a thousand times better than it was before. I'd appreciate a response (non technical for me, but Brian would probably like all the details). Thanks,

Answer: HELLO JENNY, THE ANSWER TO YOUR QUESTION IS NOT VERY COMPLICATED. THE LIFESTYLE PRODUCTS THAT PROLIFERATE THE MARKET TODAY LIKE YOUR BOSE SYSTEM HAVE VERY SERIOUS SONIC COMPROMISES BECAUSE OF SIZE. IF I WERE TO DESIGN A SPEAKER AND THE MARKET DEMANDED IT BE THAT SMALL IT WOULD NOT BE MUCH BETTER. IN ORDER TO GET WIDE BANDWIDTH, GOOD EFFICIENCY, AND LOW DISTORTION GIMMICKS WON'T FOOL MOTHER NATURE, THE SPEAKER IS GOING TO HAVE SOME SIZE TO IT. MOST CONSUMERS ARE NOT AWARE OF WHAT YOU HEARD OR DO NOT CARE, THEY WANT THE SPEAKERS OUT OF THE WAY. WE HAVE A 9 FOOT GRAND PIANO IN OUR ROOM SO OUR LARGEST SPEAKER LOOKS SMALL IN COMPARISON.

Luis (8/21/06): I recently bought 2 2wq subwoofers. I like to change my amplifier (aragon 8008) to a 5 channel amplifier Cary Audio Cinema 5. The crossover I have at the present time is a pair of 2kx2. The speakers are Magnepan 1.6.My question is : Do I have to change crossovers? or what are the parameters for cross over use. I looked in your web page and could not find any information. Specification Aragon Carey Audio Power 200 watts at 8 200 watts at 8 400 at 4 350 at 4Imput impedance 22kohms unbalance 44kohms unbalance am very satisfied buying the subwoofers and the main Magnepan but I might to go a different dealer for the amplifier.? Thanks very much

Answer: HELLO LUIS, IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONSULT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER TO MAKE SURE YOUR WOOFERS ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY. YOUR QUESTIONS REVEAL THAT YOU HAVE NO IDEA AND IT IS TO COMPLICATED FOR THIS FORUM. IF YOUR DEALER CAN NOT ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Mike (8/21/06): I have a pair of Model 3As and am considering having them upgraded to Sigs. Two questions... 1) Will all drivers be replaced, or just the tweeters? 2) Will the crossovers be replaced? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MIKE, DEPENDING ON THE AGE OF YOUR 3A'S EVERYTHING THAT NEEDS TO BE REPLACED TO MAKE IT A 3A SIGNATURE WILL BE. MANY PARTS WILL BE CHANGED OR MODIFIED INCLUDING ON YOUR X-OVERS. AFTER THE MOD THEY WILL BE TESTED IN THE CHAMBER JUST LIKE A NEW PAIR. ANY MORE DETAILS CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Mick (8/21/06): Have placed an order for a pair of Quatros with Sound Reference in Brisbane. In preparing for their arrival I'm needing to make a few changes to my listening area in regard to power points specifically. Question 1: is there a power switch on the rear of the Quatros? Question 2: Should I leave the Quatros "powered up" continuously. Any other considerations I should account for? My system at present is a McCormack UDP1(Conrad Johnson Edition); Valve Preamp (Sound Reference Design) Valve Power Amps (6550x 4 per mono-block). Strictly 2 channel in this household. Enjoyed the Stereophile review but am wondering what a can of worms Michael Fremer has unleashed with his comments re Wilson MAXX speakers. I'm a long term fan of your speakers having moved from the 2CE signatures to my current 3A's. David Neilen at Sound Reference said I should not raise the issue of power cords with you. Cheers

Answer: HELLO MICK, THE QUATRO'S ARE AVAILABLE IN 120 VOLT ONLY SO YOU WILL BE NEEDING A GOOD STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER OF 300VA. DAVID WILL BE ABLE TO HELP YOU WITH THAT. THE SUB AMPLIFIERS ARE DESIGNED TO BE ON 24/7. AS FAR AS EQUIPMENT IS CONCERNED I DEFER TO YOUR DEALER IF HE HAS HEARD THEM. IF YOU HAVE UPGRADED ALL YOUR EQUIPMENT TO THE HIGHEST LEVEL, THEN YOU SHOULD EXPERIMENT WITH ACCESSORIES. UNTIL THEN PUT YOUR MONEY INTO IMPROVED COMPONENTS FOR A GREATER RETURN.

Anthony (8/18/06): What is the life span of the model 2 Vandersteen speakers? Regards

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, MODEL 2'S IN MANY DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION HAVE BEEN MADE FOR ALMOST 30 YEARS. HOW LONG THEY LAST DEPENDS ON HOW THEY ARE USED AND CARED FOR.

Albert (8/13/06): My new Quatros are wonderful straight out of the box. My dealer is not close enough to visit and tune them. The manual describes the process of adjusting the room compensation, but some points aren't clear. First, is the first process done with ONLY the left speaker connected? And is the second process done with ONLY the right speaker connected? Is the "test disc" available to end users? If not, what are the frequencies of the 11 warble tones? Do they match the 11 frequencies controlled by the various bands as mentioned in the manual? With answers to those questions, I think I can do this myself. If I screw it up, I can always return the bands to neutral! Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ALBERT, THE WARBLE TONES ARE FROM A TEST DISC FROM STEREOPHILE. THE FREQUENCIES ARE NOT EXACTLY THE SAME SO YOU WILL HAVE TO INTERPOLATE AND ADJUST TWO TRIM POTS IN A FEW CASES. OUR TEST DISC IS NOT YET AVAILABLE YOUR DEALER WILL BE INFORMED WHEN IT IS.? THE ADJUSTMENTS ARE ONE CHANNEL AT A TIME WITH A RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER ONLY.

Chicar (8/13/06): Hi, I'm interesting to have a pair of Quatro Signature after I read a review on Stereophile its article mentions about have to buy a kit with a box including a high pass filter for Pre amp to amp n it cost US$795 for balanced. Is the kit mandatory to install n how to install between Pre n amp, any alternative in the market? Is Quatro is suit for my gear? My gear included power amp ARC VT 150SE,pre amp ARC Ref 2 MK2,all interconnect cables n speaker are XLO unlimited edition. Thx,

Answer: HELLO CHICAR, THERE IS A KIT THAT IS INCLUDED, BUT YOU WILL NEED A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PREAMP AND AMPLIFIER. $795.00 IS THE CORRECT PRICE FOR THE BALANCED VERSION. YOUR EQUIPMENT WILL WORK FINE.

Vassilis (8/13/06): Hello Richard, I plan to replace an old pair of infinity with 3Signatures. I use the 2-ch system for movies as well. I am concerned with some remarks made on failures of low frequency driver. Should I reconsider? My electronics are all FM Acoustics, except the amplifier which is Classed Omega. Thanks

Answer: HELLO VASSILIS, USING THE 2 CHANNEL FOR MOVIES IS FINE. IT IS WHEN USING DOLBY DIGITAL THAT CAN DAMAGE YOUR SPEAKERS BECAUSE OF THE L.F.E.. SOME MOVIES HAVE ENOUGH BASS AND COULD TRY TO PUT THE WOOFERS IN YOUR LAP, A SUB-WOOFER SHOULD BE USED IN 5.1 SYSTEMS.

Terry (8/10/06): Richard: I presently have the 2Ce Sigs driven by the Rogue Stereo 90 power amp, along with a Rogue Perseus preamp. I have one Model V2W sub, and have been toying with adding a second V2W sub. My V2W is approximately 4 or 5 years old and is as I bought it (no modifications). My question is this: Do I need to worry whether the second V2W is of same or similar age? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO TERRY, THE V2W HAS NOT HAD ANY MAJOR CHANGES.

David (8/10/06): I have a new amp, so I want to try a few settings on my 2W. The WX-2 has four RCA plugs. The top two are white, and the bottom two are red. Do I connect the bottom (red) pair to my preamp? And the white pair to the amp? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE WX-2 IS JUST A SERIES CAP, IT MAKES NO DIFFERENCE.

Joseph (8/8/06): Can you please let me know what the maximum watts consumption is for the powered subwoofer in the Model 5 speakers? I will need to use a step up transformer to get the voltage from 100v to 120v, but I was hoping that the 500 watt model would be enough, as the 1,000 watt models and up seem to have an audible hum. The 500 watt version is completely silent. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE 5A SPEAKER HAS A SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY THAT IS FULLY REGULATED. THE AMPLIFIER WILL WORK FINE ON 100V.

Kevin (8/8/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, After living with subwoofer/satellite systems for the past 15 years I've finally decided to make the move to full range speakers but alas I have no room for them. I live in a Manhattan apartment that's only 11 feet wide. I would like to keep my listening position away from any boundaries for best bass response and depth) but that would severely limit my layout because I have two windows behind my front speakers. I would not be able to incorporate VSM's as front speakers because of the windows and being the classical musician performer as well as listener, I am very much enamored with 2Ce Sigs and two 2WQ subs to have the audio nirvana of two channel music. Plus it's in my budget. I thought if I went with the 1C's(which are plenty big for my Manhattan apartment) I might as well go with the 2Ce Sigs. My sensible side is laughing uncontrollably at my vision and every time I look around my room I say it can't be done. Another option is your VLR-1 which will obviously look more balanced with the room but after hearing the 2Ce Sigs it may become a compromise that would be difficult to accept. If you had a choice to setup smaller speakers where you're listening position was away from room boundaries or having full range speakers set up where you had to place your listening position against a room boundary long side wall directly behind you) what would you do?. I am becoming very stuck in making a decision. Can you help?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, I WOULD USE THE FULL RANGE SPEAKERS WITH THE LISTENING POSITION AGAINST THE WALL. WHEN LISTENING PUT A PILLOW BEHIND YOUR HEAD OR ANY THING TO ABSORB OR DIFFUSE THE WALL BEHIND.

Havish (8/9/06): My question is about the tone controls at the back of my 2Ce signatures. Does not setting them flat (say treble at -1 dB) still preserve the time and phase correct nature of the sound? Also, I have felt sometimes that other brands of speakers that have almost flat measured frequency response curves still seem to sound bright. Does this have something to do with them not being time and phase correct? Is it possible that the sound of the tweeter hitting the ear first makes them sound bright? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, CHECK OUT OTHER POSTS ON THIS SITE ABOUT THIS. MANY SPEAKERS ARE NOT FLAT THEY ARE PUSHED IN THE HIGHS. THE HIGH FREQ INFORMATION ARRIVING FIRST COULD EMPHASIZE THEM.

Alp (8/7/06): Hi, I recently purchased a pair of 2ce signatures for my home theater system. They are approximately 5 years old. I noticed different connections for the amps and I was not sure which one to use. Also I am in the process of evaluating and purchasing a surround receiver. What do you recommend, I am seriously considering the Denon avr4806 ci. I am also considering the new Arcam and Rotel. Thanks for the response.

Answer: ALL THREE RECEIVERS ARE CANDIDATES BUT CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR HIS RECOMMENDATION. I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH ANY OF THEM. BASED ON OUR WARRANTY CARDS YOU MIGHT WANT TO THROW NAD IN THE MIX.

Richard (8/6/06): I am strongly considering buying a pair of 2ce Sigs. One concern I have is the recommended bi-wiring. As you know, speaker cables can be quite expensive these days, and paying for two pair is a significant factor in a buying decision. I understand the advantages, so if I get your speakers I will certainly bi-wire them. No doubt many of the expensive wires are worth the money, but I imagine there are some good lower-cost values out there (just like Vandersteen speakers!). Your typical recommendation on such matters is to go listen to some, but I'm wondering if you have any general comments or recommendations on desirable attributes (or even brands) of lower-cost wires that would make them a good match for your speakers. Also, do you know of or can you recommend some cables that already have spade or O-lugs that work well with your barrier strips? Crimping and soldering are not my fortes.

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, PRINT THIS QUESTION OUT ON YOUR PRINTER AND TAKE IT TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER. TELL HIM WHAT YOUR BUDGET IS AND AUDITION HIS RECOMMENDATION. WE DESIGN OUR SPEAKERS WITHOUT WIRE AS EXPLAINED MANY TIMES IN THIS FAQ FORUM. I DO NOT AUDITION ANY FULL-RANGE WIRE AND CAN NOT COMMENT WITHOUT EXPERIENCE. IF YOU WANT A RECOMMENDATION MADE WITHOUT ANY ACTUAL EXPERIENCE THERE ARE MANY ON THE COMPUTER FORUMS. NEED MORE HELP CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Eric (8/3/06): I have a pair of 2ce's that were damaged during shipping. You repaired them about 6 months ago. Now one of the speakers has devolped a "popping" or "crackling" sound. It doesn't do it at low volume and at medium volume only with a more bass heavy track. I rarely play music loud and I'm surprised to have developed such a problem. I've narrowed it down and can tell it's coming from the 8" woofer. Can I buy a single woofer and replace it myself? I don't want to ship the speaker across country, for fear of damage, cost and just the fact that I'll be without it for so long. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ERIC, LOOK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS WEB SITE AND YOU WILL FIND YOUR ANSWER OR CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Darren (7/31/06): I recently replaced my 1c's with 2ce signatures (new). My room is fairly well treated with the speakers precisely aligned according to the odd dimensions rule and lean back for listening height. With the 1c's I got a great response. However, the model 2ce's have much more range in the midrange. I am hearing a problem with some of the midrange being "over-powering". Such as the mid instruments sound great, but the vocals are being drowned out by it. I read in the manual that this could be an issue with having the speakers close to walls. The speakers are currently slightly toed in (just like I had my 1c's). Do I need to use more toe-in to help with this, or could there be some other acoustic problem I am not aware of? Thank you,

Answer: HELLO DARREN, TOE-IN SHOULD BE ADJUSTED ANY WAY YOU LIKE IN YOUR ROOM. TOO MUCH TOE WILL CAUSE A STRONG "MONO IN THE MIDDLE'. YOUR 1C'S ARE GOOD SPEAKERS BUT AT $850 A PAIR THEY ARE COMPROMISED BY NOT HAVING A MIDRANGE. THE 2CE SIGS HAVE A MIDRANGE AND THEREFORE HAVE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION. ON SOME RECORDINGS THAT ARE A LITTLE ROUGH IN THE MIDS (VERY COMMON ON SO SO RECORDINGS) LOWER RESOLUTION COULD BE PREFERRED. THE QUESTION SHOULD BE, HOW DO THE GOOD RECORDINGS SOUND?? IF THE ANSWER IS GREAT THE SYSTEM AND THE ROOM ARE WORKING FINE. THE 2CE SIGS ARE LESS EFFICIENT YOU COULD BE HEARING AMPLIFIER CLIPPING. IF YOU WANT TO BRAIN STORM SOME MORE CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Craig (7/29/06): Hi Richard, My friend owns a pair of 2Ce's and they sound fantastic. I often go to his place just to hear how music I love is SUPPOSED to sound. I am considering getting a pair. I have recently acquired an Audire Otez power amp that has 250W into 8 ohms. Should I be concerned with this much power driving the 2Ce's? Thank you for your reply.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, READ THE POSTS ABOUT POWER ON THIS SITE.

Jack (7/28/06): Since your 5A requires a high pass filter between the preamp and power amp, I assume this eliminates the use of an integrated?

Answer: HELLO JACK, SOME INTEGRATED HAVE PRE-IN AND PRE-OUT THEY WILL WORK. SOME MANUFACTURES WILL INSTALL A HIGH-PASS AT THE TIME OF ORDER (AUDIO RESEARCH, AYRE, ROGUE, AND ROWLAND).

Rob (7/27/06): Richard, Can the composite material base plate on the Vandersteen 5 be replaced and how much would one cost? One of the thread locations is smashed/damaged and the cone can not screw into the base. I would like to replace the whole bottom plate if possible.

Answer: HELLO ROB, THE COMPOSITE BOTTOM IS VERY EXPENSIVE? BUT BECAUSE IT IS COMPOSITE WE CAN USUALLY REPAIR IT. CALL 559-582-0324 FOR DETAILS.

Jeff (7/26/06): Thanks for answering some of my questions over the last couple of months. At the end of the day, I purchased your 2ce Sigs. Contrary to Mike's situation on 7/21 (to which I totally relate), I could have afforded the 3's or the Quatros, but frankly I couldn't be happier with my choice. With the sale of my Wilson's, I now have the upgraded version of the same speakers I bought 15 years ago. And, the sale allowed me to buy your speakers, a new cartridge for my turntable, and most importantly, some great new albums to listen to. I also love the look of the basic sock 2ce, but that's gravy considering the joy of listening to Billie Holiday last night on your speakers. If this were a MasterCard commercial...priceless.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, UPGRADING ONES SOURCE IF NOT IN LINE WITH THE REST OF THE SYSTEM IS ALWAYS THE CORRECT THING TO DO. WELCOME BACK TO YOUR NEW MUSIC. WHEN EVER I UPGRADE MY SYSTEM IT IS HARD TO GET ENOUGH SLEEP.

Nick (7/26/06): I have finally finished my dream system. It took many years and dollars to get this system after visiting countless dealers and reading dozens of reviews over the years only to end up with the latest hot product. Only problem the music, MIA. I have your 5As with Ayre electronics, Basis turntable, and Audioquest cables in a very good sounding study. When I play my favorite jazz, classical, and some female vocals the systems brings me to tears, it is so good. The performances are as realistic as live and piano sounds like it is coming from the grand in my study. Thank You. In many ways I have the musical enjoyment I had left in 1980 when I sold my 2c speakers to upgrade. My question for you is: some of my favorite music, ie early rock, is better than any previous system I have owned but still not as enjoyable as the best recordings, how can I help the lesser to be more enjoyable? Nick

Answer:? HELLO NICK, I GET CALLS LIKE THIS EVERY WEEK. THEY START WITH A COMMENT "MY SYSTEM DOES NOT SOUND GOOD I NEED SOME SETUP HELP" TO WHICH I RESPOND BY ASKING IF ANY RECORDINGS SOUND GOOD. THE ANSWER IS ALWAYS "OH YES THE AUDIOPHILE STUFF SOUNDS GREAT". I THEN TELL THEM THAT THERE IS NOTHING WRONG WITH YOUR SYSTEM DON'T LET SOMEONE SELL YOU A $500 POWER CORD OR A LINE FILTER. WE MUSIC LOVERS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN PLAGUED BY THE FACT THAT SOME OF OUR FAVORITE MUSIC IS POORLY RECORDED. NO UPGRADED COMPONENT WILL CORRECT FOR THAT DISPARITY. IT IS TRUE THAT IMPROVING THE SYSTEM WILL MAKE THE BAD BETTER WITH THE GOOD BUT THE FRUSTRATING DISPARITY WILL STILL BE THERE. WHAT TO DO? WE WHO HAVE BEEN AT THIS FOREVER LISTEN TO THE MUSIC ANYWAY FOR ITS MUSICAL VALUE AND IGNORE THE FACT THAT IT DOES NOT SOUND AS GOOD AS SOME. OTHERS WHO ARE INTO EQUIPMENT JUST DO NOT PLAY RECORDINGS THAT SOUND LESS THAN GOOD. OTHERS ARE LEFT INSECURE BECAUSE THEY THINK IF THEY HAD THE RIGHT STUFF ALL WOULD BE GREAT, IN MANY WAYS OUR INDUSTRY FOSTERS THIS INSECURITY. I THINK SIMPLE TONE CONTROLS LIKE IN OUR CARS THAT ARE FULLY DEFEAT ABLE (LIKE IN THE TAPE LOOP) OR A SIMPLE EQ BETWEEN AN EXTRA OUTPUT ON THE CD PLAYER TO AN UNUSED INPUT ON THE PREAMP WOULD HELP. IT WILL NOT MAKE A LESS THAN PERFECT RECORDING STATE OF THE ART BUT COULD MAKE IT TONALLY MORE PALATABLE. ONE CUSTOMER ASKED ME WHY HE HAD MORE MUSICAL PLEASURE ON SOME MUSIC IN HIS CAR (STOCK RADIO) THAN HIS HI FI. I ASKED IF THE TONE CONTROLS WERE FLAT. HIS ANSWER "NO". SOME WILL SCOFF, SOME WILL USE SE AMPS WITH NO HIGHS AND NO LOWS, SOME WILL BUY EXPENSIVE COLORED CABLES, SOME WILL BUY SPEAKERS WITH FREQUENCY RESPONSE RESEMBLING THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS BUT TONE CONTROLS ARE YOU KIDDING I AM A PUREST! REMEMBER WITH TONE CONTROLS YOU CAN PUSH A BUTTON AND THEY GO AWAY AND YOU ARE NOT OUT THE MONEY FOR NEW COMPONENTS. I WOULD LIKE TO LEAVE THIS WITH ONE RECOMMENDATION FOR NOW.? DO NOT CHASE POOR RECORDINGS THAT MAY BE YOUR FAVORITES WITH EXPENSIVE EQUIPMENT CHANGES. IF YOU FIND A COMBINATION THAT MAKES THE BAD GOOD THE GOOD WILL BE CRAP.

Wilbur (7/24/06): I bought a cheapo digital voltmeter at Radio Shack to do the M5HP test you describe here. The meter only displays 10ths, not 1000ths of a volt. On one leg, 75k is the proper setting; on the other, 50k. Is it OK to run them that way? I determined the setting by playing a test tone at 1000hz and getting the meter to read 1.0. I then played an 80hz tone and got the meter to read .7.

Answer: HELLO WILBUR, I DO NOT KNOW WHAT YOU MEAN BY ONE LEG AND ANOTHER. IF YOU TESTED EACH LEG INDEPENDENTLY THAT WOULD MEAN YOUR AMPLIFIER IS NOT TRULY BALANCED AND WOULD PROBABLY SOUND BETTER SINGLE ENDED. IF I MISSED SOMETHING CALL ME 559-582-0324.

Stan (7/23/06): Hi - I'm enjoying my 5A's. It's taken a while since I've been able to get the right wire, the right resonance control things for the components, etc. but it's a pleasure. Anyway, I'm using an Ayre V1xe which is 200 watts/8 ohms/side with their K1xe preamp, etc. They have just come out with mono-bloc 300 watts each.? They say that the sound is better from these amps and was just wondering if you'd change to the new amps... Thanks Stan

Answer: HELLO STAN, IF YOU HAVE AUDITIONED THE TWO AND THE MONO'S WERE BETTER, AND THE DIFFERENCE IN MONEY IS WORTH IT TO YOU IN SOUND, GO FOR IT.

Randall (7/23/06): I auditioned Quatros this weekend and a speaker of another manufacturer that costs twice as much as Quatros and the Quatros blew the other speaker out of the water. Not even close. If the input impedance of my amp is 100k, what settings can I safely experiment with on an M5HP with 3A Sigs and 2Wqs. I have the cheat sheet, I simply don't want anything to blow up.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE 2WQ MANUAL. IF I RECALL YOU WOULD TEST THE EXACT VALUE, ONE ABOVE AND ONE BELOW. REMEMBER TO READJUST THE WOOFER LEVEL SO THERE IS THE SAME AMOUNT OF BASS FOR EACH SETTING.

Bob (7/23/06): I purchased a pair ov 2C's back in the early 1980's. They still sound good except at times they break in the lower end watching movies and sounds like the bass driver may be bad. Playing music I do not have that problem. I just purchased a new Pioneer Plasma, Denon receiver and Denon DVD. I was wondering if I should build my sound around the old 2C's or start from scratch for HT. Is it even feasible or possible to rebuild these with new drivers and or has the technology changed so much that I am wasting my time with these very old speakers. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO BOB, THIS QUESTION HAS BEEN ANSWERED HERE BEFORE. THE 2C'S CAN BE BROUGHT UP TO SPEC AT THE FACTORY. THE OLD 2C'S ARE COMPATIBLE WITH OUR CENTERS AND REAR SPEAKERS. BY ADDING A SUB THE BASS WILL BE MORE APPROPRIATE FOR HT.

Bob (7/23/06): Could you tell me how the model 4 sounds compared to the model 3 or 3a? I listen to home theater or classical music. Thanks, Bob

Answer: HELLO BOB, THE MODEL 4 SERIES SPEAKER WAS DISCONTINUED WHEN THE MODEL 3 SPEAKER WERE INTRODUCED BECAUSE THE 3'S WERE BETTER 80HZ AND ABOVE. THE COMBINATION OF THE 3'S AND THE 2W SUB WAS BETTER TOP TO BOTTOM AND EASIER TO PLACE IN A ROOM. THE RESULT, NO SALES.

Sam (7/22/06): Richard - first off not to bother you with redundant questions, I read through your entire FAQ last night and I must applaud you for running this feedback forum. The only other manufacturer I know who comes close is Alan Shaw of Harbeth, he is right in there too. Thanks again! not only for your effort but patience too. I am moving from Tannoys (just sold), and Harbeths in another system and love the British sound, but having recently heard you products for the first time, both in nice audiophile setups [one a Heart Surgeon and the other, wouldn't you know - a plumber!!]. I am sold on them. Quite overwhelmed at listening to their phase correct sound, fine mid-range not to mention with the addition of bass - after your designing protocol of no proper music without the foundation of bass. Wow! I have been missing this for 25 years! Also a great thank you to the writer for Audio Critic who did the long article on your speaker line, written so well in fact, seems his conclusions are indisputable. What more can I say. You have a great ally there, as well as Shane Beuttner (sic) of TAS. My question is simple though. My room which is a study is almost 16 feet wide, and almost 14 feet deep. As the right side of the room has a writing table that comes into the room about 3 feet - my listening space is more or less square although the room is technically wider. I noted in reading the FAQ and site materials that the 3 Sigs are guaranteed upgradeable, the the 2Ce Sigs are not, if I read correctly. Do you think then the 3 signatures would be appropriate for my room? This would simplify the delivery of bass, and not possibly mandate 2ce Sigs with additional subwoofers. Do you think the 3's may overload the room? and if only slightly is it possible to roll off the bass so that it may not be so deep. With the upgradeability factor, I am tempted to go for the 3's as they are not vastly larger than the 2's and according to reviewers a much superior listening experience. As I have a 3B SST Bryston, I may add another and bi amp. I have heard your speakers with Bryston SST equipment, their noise floor is the blackest of any amplifier I have heard - on your speakers (2ce sigs, and 3Sigs) they are incredible - especially notable on solo string, piano and string quartet music. Thanks for you time and congrats on your hard work in this forum. Being an entrepreneur myself (bookseller) I know the importance and significance of customers dealing with the 'owner' or in your case the 'designer / manufacturer'. Much appreciated. Sam

Answer: HELLO SAM, WOW ALL THAT WRITING, AND READING ALL THE FAQ'S AND STILL A QUESTION ABOUT HOW A SPEAKER WILL SOUND IN A ROOM I HAVE NEVER BEEN IN. AS STATED IN SEVERAL FAQ'S DIMENSIONS DO NOT DETERMINE HOW A ROOM WILL SOUND THERE ARE MANY OTHER CONTRIBUTING FACTORS.? YOU NEED A VANDERSTEEN DEALER TO VISIT YOUR ROOM AND IN TWO MINUTES ANSWER YOUR QUESTION FOR YOU. YOU MUST PUT IN A PAIR OF 2CE SIGS OR 3A SIGS AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS IF YOU WANT TO BE SURE. THANK YOU FOR YOUR KIND WORDS AND GOOD EXPERIMENTING.

Sam (7/21/06): I am pretty well decided on Vandys for my next purchase, am moving from old tannoys.In a personal exchange with an old Vandersteen 2ce owner, he recommended trying, if I had the bucks - the new deqx pre with room correction, speaker correction etc. which I have researched. I am very pleased with the British sound, laid back with excellent mid range, which the Vandys offer along with proper bass, missing from such lines as Harbeth and Spendor. I have heard a pair and want to go for them.? He also told me the Vandersteens would be ideal to usewith deqx as the crossovers are easily accessible - i.e. the speaker posts are right-on the crossover. Could you assist me in this? My choice would be the 2 or 3 sig as my room is not too large, more of a study. 15 by 14 feet, which I suspect the 3/s would overload. Any feedback on this too would be greatly appreciated. I have yet to read the full length of the tech page so please accept apologies if this is a redundant question.

Answer: HELLO SAM, READ Q/A (DAN 7/02/06) IT WILL ANSWER YOUR QUESTION. IF YOU WILL HAVE OVERLOAD IN THE BASS IN THAT SIZE ROOM PERUSE THIS FORUM ON HOW TO SOLVE THIS WITH A HIGH-PASS. THE 2'S OR 3'S WILL WORK ABOUT THE SAME, MIGHT AS WELL GO FOR HIGH REZ AND GET THE 3'S.

Louie (7/21/06): Hello Richard, My Quatros were delivered in Jun05. This was before the Quatro manual was available. After reading the Stereophile review, I realized that the manual was now available and had my dealer obtain a copy for me. Using the manual I wanted to check and adjust the listening height of my Quatros. The problem that I encountered is that my early Quatros did not come with washers or rear cones. My Quatros came with a set of short and a set of long rear spikes. Since the manual only discuses the height adjustment in terms of washers, I am unable to perform this critical setup. How can I go about purchasing the correct hardware?--Louie PS: I just have to say that these speakers are one of the best purchases that I have ever made. Thanks for designing such a wonderful product.

Answer: HELLO LOUIE, THE LATER VERSIONS OF THE QUATRO'S DO NOT USE CONES ON THE REAR ONLY SPIKES. THE BEST WAY IS TO FIND THE SWEET SPOT IS BY EAR OR INTERPOLATE. THE WASHERS ARE 1/16" THICK SO YOU CAN ADJUST THE JAM WASHER ACCORDINGLY. GLAD YOU ARE ENJOYING YOUR QUATRO'S.

Mike (7/21/06): After reading the comment by "Chicken" about wood finishes I have to disagree. I have owned many speakers in the last 30 years and not only prefer the sound of my 2CE signatures to anything I have previously owned but I also prefer the look. Wood finishes go in and out of style, require oiling, if marked are very difficult to repair, sunlight can also lift the finish, etc. The sock can be replaced if damaged, is easily vacuumed and is visually non intrusive. My wife says that speakers that look like furniture don't hide the fact that they are speakers and prefers the Vandersteen look (and sound) over anything I have shown her. I think the look of the Quattro sock version in black is even nicer than the 5A. Wish the Quattro or 5A were in my budget.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, NICE OF YOU TO USE YOUR NAME. IT IS BECAUSE OF CUSTOMERS LIKE YOU THAT WE ARE STILL HERE AFTER 30 YEARS IN OUR FIRST INCARNATION. THANK YOU AND YOUR WIFE FOR YOUR SUPPORT AND 100'S OF THOUSANDS LIKE YOU. WE AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO ARE VERY HAPPY WE CAN ACCOMMODATE BOTH CUSTOMERS TODAY ALBEIT EXPENSIVE. WE STILL OFFER MORE HI-TECH DRIVERS AND X-OVER COMPONENTS (NON CHINESE) THAN MOST, FOR THE MONEY.

Joseph (7/20/06): Can you please let me know if the new 'analog switching' amps, like the Nuforce, will work with the Model 5's. I have gotten feedback directly from Nuforce and they state that they can not say whether there would be a problem or not. The technical aspect of this is way above my head, but I have done a 'cut and paste' of their response here..."We usually point the finger back to the active subwoofer manufacturer since we can't tell how the active subwoofer is wired internally. Martin Logan Summit is one such example where ML upgraded the speaker in 2006 to allow for active woofer with amps that have half rail DC offset on the speaker terminal. With so many amps using Icepower module internally (Icepower also has DC offset), I think a lot of active subwoofer manufacturers will have to accommodate this issue." I recently heard the Nuforce and was impressed, plus they won't cause me to take out a second loan on the house;) But I am worried if they would be compatible with the power subwoofer in the Model 5's. If you have any advice, it would be greatly appreciated. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE. THE NEWER VERSIONS OF THE ICE POWER AND MANY OTHER MODULES NO LONGER HAVE THE DC ON THE OUTPUT. IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW THAT THESE AMPLIFIERS ARE ANALOG IN YES, BUT ARE STILL SWITCHING AMPLIFIERS. WE SHOULD CALL THEM WHAT THEY ARE INSTEAD OF PLAYING SEMANTICS. THE MODEL 5'S ARE HIGH REZ SPEAKERS BE SURE YOU LISTEN BEFORE YOU BUY. ITS NOT A GOOD DEAL AT ANY PRICE IF IT DOES NOT SOUND GOOD.

Randall (7/20/06): Have the M5 HP's changed in the past two years? I just bought a used pair and I was wondering if they are as up to date as a new pair. I am using the M5 with mono-block amps, a pair of 2Wqs and a pair of 3A sigs. The manufacturer says the input impedance of the amps is 100k ohms each. Am I correct I can safely test my system using the M5 set at 200k, 100k, 75k and 50k to determine what sounds best? Can I can also safely perform the digital voltmeter test with the 1000 hz and 80hz test CD you described in an earlier post? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, THERE HAVE BEEN CHANGES BUT NEW ONES WERE NOT AN OPTION OR YOU WOULD HAVE BOUGHT THEM. THE DIFFERENCES ARE MOOT THEN SO I WONT BOTHER YOU WITH THE DETAILS. YOU CAN CONTACT THE FACTORY FOR A COPY OF THE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR 2WQ USE. YOU CAN USE THE TEST DESCRIBED ON A EARLIER POST.

Dan (7/18/06): Dan from Inland Empire: Richard I can think of two ways to make your subwoofers work, firstly sample the signal with a computer and make any adjustments necessary or two and more likely preprofile the subwoofer for any dispersant signals ( gross vibrations & frequencies inabilities ) and program these out when ever they occur. Which of these methods have you employed? It is impossible to tell by your rather vague description.

Answer: HELLO DAN, WE USE FEED FORWARD WHICH IS AS YOU SAY A PRE-CORRECTION IN REAL TIME OF KNOWN PROBLEMS. OUR "VAGUE DESCRIPTION" IS NOT DESIGNED TO TEACH SOME ONE HOW TO MAKE ONE JUST INFORM THOSE WANTING TO BUY ONE. MOST PEOPLE ARE BORED BY THESE THINGS AND JUST LISTEN TO IT AND MAKE A DECISION.

Stephen (7/17/06): Mr. Vandersteen, are there any particular budget cables (<$200.00 for 30ft pair). or what gauge would you recommend going between a Bryston 3bst and your 1C's. I've found a few, but am not sure of the synergy and don't want to waste a lot of money. Audioquest GBC (12awg, 6 conductor), DH Labs T14, ???? Any preferences?

Answer: HELLO STEPHEN, I HAVE NOT HEARD A CORRELATION BETWEEN SOUND AND WIRE GAUGE. DO NOT PAY MORE THAN A $1.00 A FOOT FOR WIRE UNLESS YOU AUDITION IT ON YOUR SPEAKERS. THERE IS A LOT SAID ABOUT WIRE IN THE FAQ SECTION.

Robert (7/17/06):? Richard First let me Thank You and Richard Hardesty for leading me to the awesome sound that I have found with your products, your article in Widescreen Review is what lead to my trying your product and I have been very pleased since. I?m at the point of upgrading the amplification for my 3A?s, my question concerns vertical bi-amping. I?ve enjoyed Richard Hardesty?s writings in The Audio Perfectionist concerning your speakers and in one of his configurations he had his 3A Signatures vertically bi-amped with a Theta Dreadnaught (One amplifier module driving the Hi input and one module driving the Low input). With the 3A?s and 2Wq combination would you recommend using a single amplifier with 200 watts with bi-wiring or two 100 watt amplifiers in a vertical bi-amp configuration? Also I liked your comments about analog; I started with an older Rega P3 now I have a heavily modified P25. Your speakers really show the differance between digital and analog. Thank You for your time.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, FOR THE MOST I THINK BI-AMPING IS OVER RATED AND NOT THE BEST WAY TO GO. BI-WIRING WITH SHORT SPEAKER WIRES FROM A 200 WATT MONO AMPLIFIER NEXT TO THE SPEAKER WILL RUN CIRCLES AROUND THE OTHER OPTIONS. KEEP SPINNING THAT ANALOG.

Chicken (7/17/06): Since your Quatros Woods are: physically smaller than your 5A's (1/8th less surface area) and have about 1/3 more wood (the surface area reduces at the top of Quatros where the extra wood would be placed) that gives us a 20.5% increase(33% minus 12.5%) coupled with about a 10% increase for manufacture and? material- we get a 30.5% reasonable increase for upgrades in wood choice. All this gibberish means that it would be reasonable for you to charge 1/3 more for wood upgrades from your 5A veneer choices to those offered to a Quatro Wood purchase. Vandersteen speakers have always been known for their superlative sound but have always lacked in the beauty and practicality department. It makes good business sense to make beauty upgrades more affordable because they, in turn, make your products easier to live with visually. More visually appealing products also convey a greater level of taste. "WOW...not only do the sound phenomenal but just LOOK at them- they're beautiful...works of art!" instead of..."Yeah...they sound really good but, would you get a load of those sock things!" Fabric retains fragrance, can't be washed, and can be easily snagged or damaged. The more beautiful wood you send out there- the better you look...period. Think about it. And also, Richard...thanks so very much for giving the world really swell sounding stuff. I appreciate your efforts more than you might ever guess.

Answer: HELLO CHICKEN, OUR PRODUCTS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN PRICED ACCORDING TO WHAT THEY COST TO MANUFACTURE. MOST PEOPLE WHO HAVE BOUGHT VANDERSTEEN SEE THE BEAUTY IN VERY EFFICIENT DESIGN AND ARE LOOKING FOR THE HIGHEST PERFORMANCE AVAILABLE, NOT FURNITURE. I ASSURE YOU IF I HAD TO FEED MY FAMILY ON THE SALES OF OUR (BEAUTIFUL) SPEAKERS WE WOULD HAVE BEEN IN A BREAD LINE LONG AGO. HAVING SAID THAT YOU CAN HAVE IT BOTH WAYS NOW, BUT IT COSTS MONEY. TO THIS DAY WE STILL SELL MORE SOCK VERSIONS BY FAR.

Tom (7/16/06): Richard, Recently was told by friends there are upgrades available to my Model 2C's (serials 28290c and 28291c). Is this true and what is the upgrade and cost. Thank you for your great speakers. They have traveled a lot since first purchased in California. Nevada, California again, Key West, Florida, Vienna, Virginia, and now on to South Carolina.

Answer: HELLO TOM, MODEL 1'S AND 2'S WERE NEVER UPGRADEABLE.? THERE WERE A FEW 2CE'S (LATE MODELS) THAT COULD BE UPGRADED, CHECK AN EARLIER POST FOR DETAILS.

Jim (7/16/06): Richard I bought a pair of Vandersteen model 2 off eBay. they work perfect, but I did not get the jumper so I can run one set of speaker wires or the manual. are these still available threw you or a dealer. I live in Omaha where there is no dealer at this time.

Answer: HELLO JIM, JUMPERS WERE NEVER AVAILABLE FROM US, WE BELIEVE IN BI-WIRING.

Robert (7/16/06): I've noticed that a pair of Vandersteen Quatro Woods are pictured on a Stereophile blog. They mention that they have 5A Signature tweeters. The products page here lists the Quatros as having 3A Signature tweeters. Have the tweeters been upgraded on the Woods? Which tweeter accompanies the "Woods"?? Is the Stereophile blog correct? Thanks ever so much for your time in advance. Also, it would be very helpful to know which finishes are available for the Woods and their corresponding prices. I only see quotes for 5A veneers and because there is so much more wood on the Quatro Woods I'm assuming that a price increase would accompany their implementation.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, CHECK OUT Q&A BILL 5-2-06 ABOUT THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FABRIC AND WOOD QUATRO. ALL THE WOOD OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON THE 5A'S ARE ALSO AVAILABLE ON THE WOOD QUATRO'S FOR THE SAME PRICE, EXCEPT THEY WILL BE SATIN FINISH NOT HIGH GLOSS.

Jim (7/14/06): I'm planning a move to South America. Do you make a dual-voltage (or 220v only) version of the subwoofers or Quatros? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JIM, THE 2WQ WOULD NEED TO BE MODIFIED BY US FOR 220. THE QUATRO IS AVAILABLE IN 120V ONLY AND WOULD REQUIRE A 300VA STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER. FOR SOME REASON THE DISTRIBUTOR IN SOUTH AFRICA CLAIMS IMPROVED PERFORMANCE. MAYBE ONE MORE STAGE OF LINE ISOLATION IS THE REASON.

(7/13/06): Yesterday I bought a pair of your speakers, actually I do not have mine yet, but the dealer loaned me a pair. I had gone a bit out of budget doing this and was a bit worried about the response when I got home, but I had to tell you: my wife said, "Do we have to sleep tonight? I need to listen to all of our music. I've never heard it before." Thank you

Answer: HELLO HAPPY CAMPER, THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENT, ENJOY.

Pradeep (7/11/06): Hi Richard, Is it possible for you to send me the Service Manual for the 2Wq Subwoofer. I am requesting this because my 2Wq Subwoofer needs to be repaired and it works out to be very expensive to send the 2wq to your factory from India where I reside now. Awaiting a favorable reply. Many Thanks !

Answer: HELLO PRADEEP, A SERVICE MANUAL FOR ANY OF OUR PRODUCTS IS NOT AVAILABLE. WE DO ALL REPAIRS HERE AT THE FACTORY. SOME OF THE PARTS IN THE 2WQ AMPLIFIER ARE IN LIMITED SUPPLY BECAUSE THEY ARE NO LONGER MANUFACTURED. WE HAVE AMPLE SUPPLY FOR MANY MANY YEARS AS LONG AS THEY ARE NOT WASTED. I RECOMMEND THAT YOU SEND THE AMPLIFIER MODULE COMPLETE TO US FOR REPAIR. WE SERVICE THEM AS A MODULE FOR $160.00 US OR FREE IF IT IS STILL UNDER WARRANTY. FREIGHT COSTS WOULD BE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY AND THE REPAIRS USUALLY TAKE 1 OR 2 DAYS. DO NOT SEND IN ONLY THE CIRCUIT BOARD OR SERVICE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.

David (7/10/06): What is the proper method for bi-wire amplification of the 2CE speakers? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, BI-WIRE HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH AMPLIFICATION. LOOK AT THE DRAWING IN YOUR OWNERS MANUAL AND YOU WILL SEE IT INVOLVES TWO SETS OF WIRE FROM THE SAME OUTPUT TERMINALS ON THE AMPLIFIER. ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL TECH 559-582-0324.

Michael (7/09/06): I am looking into a home theater system for a small room. The room will have a two channel set-up and a separate 5 channel set up. So you can imagine that space is a big problem. So I was thinking of a multi channel system consisting of 2-pairs of VM-1 signatures and the Vcc-5 signature center. I was wondering if the VSM-1 signatures would do well as front channels. My room is 12 ft x 15ft.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THE VSM-1 WILL WORK VERY WELL FOR FRONT SPEAKERS IN A 5.1 SYSTEM. I WOULD ENTERTAIN A 2WQ FOR THE FRONT CHANNELS AND A V2W FOR L.F.E. SIGNATURE VSM-1 FOR THE REAR WOULD BE OVERKILL, THE MONEY SAVED COULD GO TOWARDS THE 2WQ. FOR THIS SYSTEM TO WORK YOU WOULD NEED A SEPARATE PROCESSOR AND AMPLIFIERS OR A A/V RECEIVER WITH PRE OUT/ MAIN IN FOR THE FRONT CHANNELS.

????? (7/08/06): Hi Richard, If side wall reflections are NOT an issue in the listening room, would you recommend Vandersteen speakers placed facing straight ahead or do you prefer toe-in? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ??????, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE MANUAL ON TOE- IN. EVERY ROOM IS DIFFERENT SO EXPERIMENT WITH TOE-IN (IT'S EASY AND FREE). IF THE SIDE WALLS ARE 4 FEET AWAY OR MORE THE TOE-IN WILL PROBABLY BE LESS OR STRAIGHT.

Matt (7/08/06): Richard, I've had the pleasure of listening to the 3A Sig at Ayre's sound room - fantastic sound, and at a fair price (but still a bit beyond my current budget). In this forum, I've read that the 2ce Sig is frequently updated, including a "significant" update in Feb 2005. Could you please give a short description of the changes, including the sonic benefits? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO MATT, ALL THE CHANGES ARE A MOOT POINT AND DID NOT CAUSE THE 2CE SIG'S TO RIVAL THE 3A SIG'S. TRY TO FIND A GOOD USED PAIR OF 3A SIG'S WITHIN DRIVING DISTANCE.

Brien (7/08/06): Sir, I just purchased a pair of Vandersteen Model 4 speakers. Now I need a owners manual and information on the power requirements of these speakers, especially the low end woofers. Thank you, Brien.

Answer: HELLO BRIEN, THERE IS NO MANUAL AVAILABLE FOR THE MODEL 4. THIS SPEAKER MUST BE BI-AMPLIFIED WITH THE WX-4 ELECTRONIC X-OVER. A GOOD 100 WATT HIGH CURRENT AMPLIFIER IS ALL THAT NEEDED. IF YOU HAVE ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL THE FACTORY 559-582-0324.

Ron (7/04/06): I have Nagra VPA mono-block amplifiers - rated 50 w/ch. Are they likely to be able to achieve the full performance potential of the 5As? My room is open space with the main listening area 16 feet x 20 feet x 10 feet. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RON, I WOULD AUDITION THIS COMBINATION AND MAKE SURE THE LISTENING LEVELS ARE ENOUGH FOR YOU. THESE CUTE TRIODE AMPLIFIERS ARE GREAT SOUNDING BUT WILL ONLY PLAY SO LOUD. IN MY OPINION THESE WILL ACHIEVE FULL PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL WITHIN THEIR POWER. THEY ARE VERY GOOD SOUNDING. YOUR PROBLEM IS THAT IF YOU LIKE THE SOUND OF THESE AMPS AND THEY ARE NOT LOUD ENOUGH IT IS GOING TO COST A LOT OF MONEY TO GET THE SAME SOUND AT A HIGHER POWER LEVEL.

Reynold (7/06/06): I recently bought a brand new 2ce signature with SN 57208 here in Jakarta, Indonesia. My components: ARC VT130se,CJ Premier 17ls,Ah Tjoeb cdp, VandenHul the First interconnects and Cardas speaker cables. I have great respect for the 2ce after listening to friends' audio systems with 2ces,thus I sold my Merlin VSMs. My concern: after listening (break-in stage am aware is 150hrs) for 3 days the lack of highs is so severe. I did manage my expectations (not to expect Merlin kind of highs) but it is really very dull, and I doubt if it will greatly improve even with break-in. Need your help, could it be a factory defect?

Answer: HELLO REYNOLD,? I KNOW YOUR AMPLIFIER IT IS VERY GOOD. YOUR PREAMP IS KNOWN TO BE VERY GOOD BUT POLITE. YOUR INTERCONNECT AND SPEAKER WIRES ARE VERY DARK USUALLY USED WITH SPEAKERS THAT MEASURE HOT IN THE HIGH FREQ (CHECK MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE AND NOTICE HOW MANY SPEAKERS ARE LOUDER IN THE HIGHS THAN THE MIDS). IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR BOTH SPEAKERS TO HAVE A PROBLEM OUT OF THE BOX. I SUSPECT TO MANY DARK COMPONENTS IN THE SYSTEM. IT LOOKS LIKE A SYSTEM DESIGNED TO TAME A VERY, VERY BRIGHT SPEAKER. I WOULD TRY SOME DIFFERENT WIRES MAYBE EVEN LESS ROOM TREATMENT IF YOU HAVE ANY.

Joseph (7/06/06): Will the powered subwoofer on the Model 5/5A work fine with 100v/50hz instead of normal US of 120v/60hz or do I need to get a step down transformer? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE MODEL 5 WILL BE A PROBLEM AND NEEDS TO BE MODIFIED AT THE FACTORY. THE 5A WILL WORK FINE. BY THE WAY IT WOULD BE A STEP-UP TRANSFORMER FROM 100 TO 120.

Jeff (7/05/06): I'm considering the purchase of either 3A Sigs or Quatros. Forgive me if you've answered these questions elsewhere, but if so, I didn't see it. On the Quatros, are there any sonic and/or component differences between the sock and wood versions? One dealer said that the wood version incorporated a few enhancements to the components, e.g., to the tweeters. I've only been able to audition the sock version and wonder if, apart from esthetics, there might be other differences for me to consider. On the 3A Sigs, my question relates to room size. My room is 13 by 13 (carpeted), and although I realize that sound quality relates to much more than just size, do you have any rule of thumb on the minimum size space for this speaker? The only other stuff in this room for now is an upholstered chair opposite the speakers, and a component rack to the right of the right speaker. So, with the chair against the rear wall, and the Sigs about 2 feet from the opposite wall, my ears are roughly 8-9 ft. away. I like the "bigger" sound of the 3A vs the 2ce, but wonder if my room might be better suited to a smaller sound. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, CHECK OUT Q&A (BILL 5/2/06) FOR THE LOW DOWN ON THE QUATRO. YOUR ROOM IS SQUARE AND WILL BE A PROBLEM IN THE BASS FOR THE MODEL THREE'S. I SUGGEST THE QUATRO BECAUSE OF THEIR ROOM BASS COMPENSATION.? THE PERFORMANCE OF EITHER QUATRO WILL BE HEAD AND SHOULDERS ABOVE THE 3A SIG'S ANYWAY.

Mike (7/04/06): You're comments about turntables being a higher resolution source than CD triggered my curiosity. Is this because of the limitations (flaws) in the CD format such as pressing quality, error correction, samples rates, etc. or is it a fundamental problem with digital? Since many records come from digital records is it the CD format that is the problem not digital? I like the convenience of digital but wish for a higher resolution format than CD. I am hoping that the highest resolution recording technology exists using digital in the recording studio?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, COULD BE ALL OF THE ABOVE. ALL I KNOW IS THAT A RECORD MADE FROM A DIGITAL MASTER SOUNDS BETTER THAN A CD. NO QUESTION A RECORD MADE FROM ANALOG MASTER IS BETTER. AT THIS TIME THE FORMAT MUSIC IS AVAILABLE ON THAT HAS THE MOST INFORMATION IS VINYL! WITH LOW FI SYSTEMS THIS IS NO BIGGIE, MPEG WOULD WORK BUT HIGH REZ SYSTEMS CAN ONLY BE FULLY APPRECIATED ON VINYL.

John (7/03/06):? I own and love the 2CE's - I just upgraded my amp to a rotel 130WPC amp, and am very happy with the result, but still come across those who have me second guessing my choice since they have much more power in their systems and claim I need more reserve for the momentary orchestral peaks and operatic peaks and highs in the music I like. My listening room is 16ft x 24 ft. Any advice? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JOHN, BECAUSE THIS IS MY FORUM I THINK IT'S TIME I ASK A QUESTION. WHY ARE SO MANY OF THE QUESTIONS ON THIS SITE FROM PEOPLE WHO QUESTION THEIR OWN OBSERVATIONS? DUDE! IF IT SOUNDS GOOD TO YOU, IT IS GOOD! WHO GIVES A RATS ASS HOW MUCH POWER YOUR FRIENDS HAVE, MAYBE THEY SUFFER FROM NAPOLEON COMPLEX. 130 WATTS IS A LOT OF POWER ESPECIALLY IF YOU FACTOR IN THE TYPICAL 3DB HEADROOM MOST AMPLIFIERS HAVE(260 WATTS) AGAIN IF IT WORKS IT WORKS.

Dan (7/02/06): Hello Richard, my name's Dan and I'm a long time Vandersteen fan (of the speakers, sorry but we've never met, though my dealer says you're a wonderful guy...). I started with the 2ce and now own a pair of 3A, there have been numerous amplifiers, cables, etc, the usual audiophile nervosa thing... I have noticed that the 3A is quite sensitive to amplification and cables and the best setup I've had was with passive bi-amping ? two channels driven full range each to a different bi-wire post. This was the best sound I've achieved with the 3a by far, even though it was with solid state (and a few years ago). Thanks to a child in the Boston University theatre program (costs a dream system every year) I find myself in possession (yes, legally) of a Yamaha DME32 digital processing engine capable of n-way crossover and user defined filtering. My thinking is (and I know this must have occurred to you) replace all those pesky inductors and capacitors with an 'equivalent' digital filter and quad-amp my beautiful 3As. So, I was wondering if there is any public information available about the crossover curves, driver characteristics, phase vs. frequency, your intentions in the crossover design, etc.? I know I can go in there and measure things, build a spice simulation (well, ask someone to help me), etc., etc. But it seems so much simpler to ask the master. I'd love to hear your thoughts on this. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DAN, WHAT YOU ARE ASKING IS POSSIBLE TO DO AND WE HAVE EXPERIMENTED WITH D.S.P. PROCESSING FOR THE SPEAKER. ALL OF OUR SPEAKER X-OVER'S ARE DIALED IN FOR EACH SPEAKER. EACH DRIVER HAS SOME IMPERFECTIONS NO MATER HOW CAREFULLY WE MATCH THEM. THE MATCHED DRIVERS ARE INSTALLED INTO THE CABINET THEN THE SPEAKER GOES INTO THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER TO BE DIALED IN. WE LOOK AT THE ACOUSTIC OUTPUT OF ALL THE DRIVERS AND MANIPULATE THE NETWORKS ON THE X-OVER SO THAT THE INTERACTION OF THE DRIVER AND THE X-OVER ARE WHAT WE WANT. EVEN IF THERE WERE NO PRICE TO BE PAID FOR ALL THIS MANIPULATION IN THE DIGITAL DOMAIN (WHICH THERE IS BIG TIME) UNLESS DONE ON A ONE BY ONE BASIS THE RESULT WOULD BE INFERIOR. AIR CORE INDUCTORS AND HIGH QUALITY FILM CAPACITORS INTERACTING WITH THEIR RESPECTIVE DRIVERS WILL ALWAYS BE MORE TRANSPARENT THAN ALL THAT ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY ESPECIALLY DIGITAL. I SUGGEST YOU CONTINUE TO DO WHAT YOU ARE DOING AND SHOULD YOU BUY A TURNTABLE YOUR HIGH REZ SOURCE WILL NOT BE CORRUPTED BY THE DIGITAL PROCESSING.

Stefano (7/02/06): Hello, First of all, excuse for my bad English. I'm considering to buy a 2ce Signature, but I'm not sure about the compatibility with my power amplifier, a Conrad Johnson MV55. The room measure 4,5x5,5mt.The sound of CJ and his 45+45w are right for the 2ce? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO STEFANO, IT IS ENOUGH POWER FOR SOME PEOPLE. I SUGGEST YOU BRING THE AMPS TO THE DEALER WITH SOME OF YOUR MUSIC AND SEE IF IT IS ENOUGH FOR YOU.

Michael (7/02/06): I am looking to buy an integrated amplifier for my 2ce sig that I bought last December. Currently I am driving them with an av denon (avr 2106).I know that I haven't heard anything from my speakers with this amp but I am already very enthusiastic with their sound. Can you please give some advice on some brands of amplifiers that will make my speakers "sing"? What about valve amplifiers? Can they drive them? My budget is up to 2000$.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, I SUGGEST YOU MAKE AN APPOINTMENT WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ASK WHAT YOUR OPTIONS ARE FOR $2000. MOST IMPORTANT IS THAT YOU WILL BE ABLE TO LISTEN TO THE RECOMMENDATION AND SEE IF YOU AGREE.? FOR TUBES AT THAT PRICE THEY PROBABLY WILL HAVE TO BE USED.

Ray (6/30/06): Hello, are there any plans, or could you perhaps be bribed :) to release a speaker model for use with CARA? This is not meant as an endorsement of the software, but would be exceedingly useful to those of us who use it anyway. If not, could you explain why? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RAY, YOU CAN USE CARA TO HELP LOCATE ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS TODAY. AS FAR AS SPEAKER CORRECTION FOR THE ROOM I DO NOT BELIEVE, EXCEPT BELOW 150HZ THAT IT HAS ANY THING TO OFFER AND COULD DO A LOT OF DAMAGE. I BELIEVE THAT A TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKER SHOULD BE USED IN A WAY THAT REPRESENTS THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENT'S) THAT WERE RECORDED. IMAGINE THAT CARA MEASURES YOUR ROOM TO HAVE A SUCK OUT AT 500HZ. IF WE MOVED A 9 FOOT GRAND PIANO INTO YOUR ROOM WOULD WE ASK THE PIANO PLAYER TO HIT THE KEYS AROUND 500HZ HARDER BECAUSE OF IT? THIS IS OVER SIMPLIFIED BUT IS WHAT ROOM CORRECTION DOES. BECAUSE OUR EAR/BRAIN DOES FOCUS ON THE DIRECT SOUND VERSES REFLECTED SOUND ABOVE 150HZ THAT WOULD BE A STRANGE PIANO SOUND. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THE SPEAKER PRESERVE THE WAVEFORM THAT MAKES EVERY INSTRUMENT AND VOICE WHAT IT IS. SOME PROGRAMS CORRECT BOTH PHASE AND TIME FOR SPEAKERS THAT ARE NOT CORRECT BUT THIS INVOLVES A LOT OF DIGITAL WORK WITH IT'S OWN COMPROMISES. IT'S MUCH EASIER IN MY OPINION TO MAKE THE SPEAKER CORRECTLY IN THE FIRST PLACE AND TREAT THE ROOM WITH DIFFUSION AND AS LITTLE ABSORPTION AS NEEDED. SOME WOULD SAY YOU CAN DO ANYTHING WHILE DIGITAL WITHOUT SONIC COMPROMISE. HA! TELL THAT TO THE AUDIOPHILE WHO IS TRYING TO FIND THE BEST CABLE BETWEEN HIS TRANSPORT AND DAC AND THEY ALL SOUND DIFFERENT! THIS IS LITERALLY ONLY MOVING BITS NOT PROCESSING THEM.

Tim (6/30/06): Hi Richard, this is Tim. I got to meet and talk to you a few years ago at the Stereo Shoppe in Selinsgrove, PA. I hope that you can get back to visit Dale there sometime in the near future. As for my question, it is regarding the VCC-5. I have seen a picture of the back of the VCC-5, and it looks like it is not bi-wire able. Knowing that this is the recommended center channel speaker for the 3A Sigs and the 5A, I was surprised to see that you cannot bi-wire the VCC-5. I'm just curious as to why this is, given the importance of a center channel speaker to a great home theater setup, and the fact that the 3A Sigs and 5A speakers are bi-wire able. Did you find that there is no benefit to making center channel speakers bi-wire able? Thank you!

Answer: HELLO TIM, THE ONLY TIME BI-WIRING IS A BENEFIT IS WHEN THE SPEAKER GOES VERY LOW AND THEREFORE HAS A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF MASS IN THE DRIVER'S). THIS MASS CREATES A LOT OF BACK EMF WHICH CAUSES SIGNIFICANT CURRENT MODULATION. CHECK THE FAQ ON BI-WIRING AND HOW IT WORKS. YOU WILL FIND THAT SPEAKERS WITH SMALL DRIVERS WILL HAVE LITTLE OR NO BENEFIT SO THE MONEY IS BETTER SPENT ON A BETTER TWEETER FOR INSTANCE.

Philip (6/30/06): I am looking to buy a used pair of 2ce signature ,the person selling them says they are seven years old did you make the signatures seven years ago? what would be the difference from today's model? other than dust. thank you in advance

Answer: HELLO PHILIP, THERE HAVE BEEN MANY FAQ'S ANSWERED ON USED SPEAKERS, HOW TO BUY THEM, AND WHAT THE DIFFERENCES ARE. PLEASE PERUSE THIS FAQ SECTION FOR YOUR ANSWERS.

Kent (6/30/06): Hi Richard, thank you for your previous response regarding the First Watt F1 (current amp). Nelson Pass wrote this..."If the input to the sub is differential, then you can use both terminals at the output, but since we don't know whether they will reject DC, then we should place a capacitor in series with each so that the sub amplifier doesn't see DC regardless. I don't know the input impedance, but I would guess that10 uF would be enough, and as a precaution, I would turn the F1 on before the subwoofer amp. "Please let me know if you agree with the capacitor, or if you think I should let Nelson know the input impedance, etc. Best Regards, Kent

Answer: HELLO KENT, INPUT IMPEDANCE IS 200K. IF THE F1 IS A CURRENT AMP HOW MUCH POWER WILL THE AMP PUT INTO THE 200K RESISTOR. THAT RESISTOR IS A 1/8TH WATT.

Paul (6/29/06): Hello, I have lC's, would I gain anything by using 4 conductor speaker wire as I do on the 3A Sigs. I know that the difference would be that the connection on the speaker end would be the same as the connection on the amp end of my 3A Sigs. Wonderful sound, I am enjoying immensely. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, MAY BE, MAY BE NOT. YOU WILL HAVE TO TRY IT AND LISTEN. YOU COULD HAVE TRIED THIS AND KNOWN THE CORRECT ANSWER BEFORE THIS RESPONSE IS POSTED. IN THIS GREAT HOBBY, WHY ARE PEOPLE SOOOOO SLOW TO TRY THINGS INSTEAD OF ASKING SOMEONE?

Craig (6/28/06): Richard, Sorry to bother you with this question but I've run into a dead-end trying to find a PSE contact. I have an opportunity to buy a pair of PSE Studio V's, which I understand you've used extensively, to drive my 2Ce Signatures and I'm trying to find out if anyone is still servicing PSE products. I even tried calling Dean directly using a number I found on the web. I'm nervous about buying a product without knowledge of source for service should I ever need it. Do you know what PSE's status is? or do you know anyone who services these amps? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I BELIEVE DEAN HAS MOVED ON TO OTHER THINGS. THE CORRECT ANSWER FOR ANYONE BUYING ANYTHING NO LONGER SUPPORTED BY A MANUFACTURE NO LONGER ACTIVELY IN BUSINESS SHOULD BE; KNOW A GOOD TECH FOR THE TIME THE INEVITABLE OCCURS.

Phillip (6/27/06): I am looking to buy a used pair of 2ce signature's about 7 year old.? Is there a difference to the current model. thank you in advance

Answer: HELLO PHILIP, THERE ARE SEVERAL Q&A'S ON THIS SITE THAT ADDRESS THIS QUESTION YOU MIGHT WANT TO READ. THE SHORT ANSWER IS THERE HAVE BEEN MANY CHANGES SOME VERY SIGNIFICANT. SUGGEST YOU LISTEN TO THE PAIR YOU ARE CONSIDERING INSTEAD OF THE DEALERS DEMO'S WHICH WOULD BE DIFFERENT. IF YOU LIKE THEM BUY THEM, THE DIFFERENCE IS THEN MOOT.

Ted (6/26/06): I have a pair of 2Ci'sI bought new long ago and I very happy with them. I have upgraded my system and I am considering upgrading to the 2Ce Sig's. Is it worth it? There is nothing I do not like about about the 2Ci's,so, how do they compare to the 2Ce Sig?

Answer: HELLO TED, YOU SHOULD VISIT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND AUDITION THE 2CE SIG AS EVERY SINGLE PART HAS BEEN UPGRADED OVER THE 20 YEARS SINCE YOURS WERE MANUFACTURED. YOU WILL RECOGNIZE WHAT WAS IMPORTANT THEN IS STILL IMPORTANT TO ME NOW, JUST MORE SO.

Jeff (6/26/06): In your archived FAQs from 11/1/04, #7, you address bi-wiring. You state that the wires should be the same, not ones separately best for treble or bass. At my Vandersteen dealer, he had Audioquest speaker cables...same "series", I think...but one was marked for treble, and one for bass. Is this incorrect, or are wires from the same manufacturer and series considered ok, even if dedicated to treble or bass? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, I WOULD ASK THE DEALER WHAT IS GOING ON, MAYBE THE ONE MARKED TREBLE IS A NEWER VERSION. YOU ARE NOT RESTRICTED TO THE SAME WIRE IT JUST GUARANTIES A SMOOTH TRANSITION THROUGH THE MIDRANGE. SOME DEALERS MAY HAVE FOUND COMBINATIONS THEY LIKE BETTER, GIVE IT A LISTEN AND SEE IF YOU AGREE.

Kent (6/29/06): Hi Richard, I am considering a First Watt F1 amplifier for use with my 2W. F1 is made by Nelson Pass. The F1 is a current amp (as contrasted with a voltage amp). My goal is to try the F1 with both its single-end and balanced inputs. I asked Nelson Pass about using the 2W, and this was his response..."...if the subwoofer input takes its input from the output of the F1, then most likely you will want to use just one output leg for the signal and take the ground from the input ground of the F1, which is pin1 of the XLR or the ground of the RCA connector and also you would need to find out whether the input to the subwoofer amplifier is capacitively coupled, as the balanced outputs of the F1 are both live and at a 13.8V DC potential with respectto ground."Will my 2W be compatible with this amp (I also have M5-HP balanced xover)? If so, will I need to do special wiring to make it work?

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE 2W SUBWOOFER IS NOT CAP COUPLED ON ITS INPUT. I DO NOT KNOW ENOUGH ABOUT THE F1 AMPLIFIER TO MAKE A COMMENT, SHOULD THINGS GO WRONG. THE INPUT OF THE 2W IS A DIFFERENTIAL AMP FOR EACH CHANNEL AND THEM SUMMED. YOU SHOULD GIVE THIS INFO TO NELSON AND LET HIM ADVISE.

David (6/25/06): Hello, I need a little help determining if my 2Wq subwoofer is working properly. My entire system was in storage for a few years and I just set it back up in the same room it was in before. The bottom end seemed very week from what I remembered, so I ran a couple of tests. My main speakers are 2C's and I am using X-2 crossovers. The sensitivity pot is set properly for the 2C's. The subwoofer passed the acid test, the speakers popped when I plugged it in. I used the method you described to check the crossover frequency, using a volt meter and a 1000Hz test tone. When I played the 80Hz tone the meter read .702, so the 33k X,s are a very good match. Here?s the kicker: I used the test method described by Stewart (3/22/06) below:1. Wire the subwoofer and a main speaker to separate speaker outputs on the amplifier. 2. Play a 80Hz test tone alternating between the main speaker and subwoofer. 3. If the proper capacitor is chosen, the main speakers and subwoofer will each have the same loudness. I do not have a Db meter, but the speaker is about 10 times as loud as the subwoofer by my ear. I pulled the bottom of the sub cabinet to make sure there wasn?t a dead animal in there or something equally stupid going on with the woofers, and everything looked fine. Is Stuart?s test valid? Should I send the sub in to be checked, or is this just a case of false memory? Thank you for your help.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE EAR IS LESS SENSITIVE AT LOW FREQUENCIES THAN HIGH FREQUENCIES THAT IS WHY THE 2C'S SOUND SO MUCH LOUDER. THE TEST YOU MENTIONED MAY WORK BUT YOU WOULD HAVE TO USE A SPL METER. IF YOU ARE USING JAZZ OR ROCK THERE SHOULD BE NO DIFFERENCE WITH A SUB OR NOT BECAUSE THE 2C'S ARE FLAT TO 32 HZ. USE ORGAN MUSIC WHICH GOES VERY LOW AND THERE SHOULD BE A DIFFERENCE. MOST OF THE TIME IF IT THUMPS IT IS WORKING. IF YOU WANT MORE BASS THAN IS ON THE RECORDING YOU WILL NEED A THUMPY WOOFER OR BASS CONTROLS ON YOUR PREAMP.

Greg (6/25/06): Mr. Vandersteen, I have owned Model 2ci speakers since 1990 and upgraded to 3a Signatures a couple of years ago. At the time I purchased my 3a's, I imagined that my most likely step forward from there would be to add a pair of 2Wq's and high-pass my 3a's. The introduction of the Quatro has complicated things. Can you please describe the advantages (apart from the room equalization) of the Quatros versus a pair of 3a signatures with 2Wq's? I have measured the frequency response of my 3a's with an SPL meter and the bass is relatively linear in my room. My second question is whether the lengths of cables running to the main speakers and the subwoofers should be of the same type and length? Thank you in advance for your time.

Answer: HELLO GREG, THE MID-BASS DRIVER ON THE QUATRO IS FASTER AND MUCH LOWER IN DISTORTION THAN THE 3A SIG'S. THE ENCLOSURE ON THE QUATRO IS VERY INERT ALLOWING A MUSH BLACKER BACKGROUND WHICH IMPROVES IMAGING A LOT. OTHER REFINEMENTS ALLOW THE QUATRO TO OUT PERFORM THE 3A SIG'S WITH SUBS IN EVERY WAY EXCEPT IN PEAK POWER IN THE DEEP BASS WHERE THE 2WQ'S HAVE ONE MORE DRIVER PER SIDE. THE WIRES ARE PROVIDED FOR THE 2WQ AND DO NOT NEED TO BE THE SAME LENGTH.

Stan (6/24/06): Hi - I just read the Stereophile report on your Quatro. Congrats on the wonderful review. Unless I misread the review, they said it was not only better than the Wilson product, but also better than the 5A's. I just recently (about 5 months ago) got my 5A's. I listened carefully to the 2 speakers and although I think the Quatros are very good, I don't think they are as complete as the 5A's. Do you have any thoughts on this matter?

Answer: HELLO STAN, IF YOU READ THE REVIEW CAREFULLY IT SAYS SOME SONIC FEATURES ARE BETTER THAN THE WILSON PRODUCTS. AS FAR AS COMPARISONS WITH THE 5A'S THEY WERE BASED ON HIS LIMITED EXPOSURE AT SHOWS. ALL SPEAKERS ARE HANDICAPPED BY THE HOTEL ROOMS TYPICALLY USED AT THE SHOWS SO BASIC ROUGH ASSESSMENTS CAN BE MADE BY A ASTUTE LISTENER IN THAT VENUE, BUT CRITICAL LISTENING LIKE IN A REVIEW IS IMPOSSIBLE. THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ROOMS CAN MASK LARGE DIFFERENCES. I AM ALWAYS AMAZED WHEN A AUDIOPHILE GETS INTO THE SHOW AND ASKS ME WHY THE SPEAKER I'M SHOWING DOES NOT SOUND AS GOOD AS HIS AT HOME. I HOPE THEY ARE NOT LIVING IN A HOTEL ROOM WITH ONE DAY TO WARM UP THE GEAR AND DO THE SET UP. THE CES SHOW IS FOR DEALERS AND MOST OF THEM HAVE LEARNED HOW TO LISTEN AROUND THE CONDITIONS. YOU HAVE THE SAME ISSUE IN MOST DEALER SHOW ROOMS BECAUSE THAT'S RETAIL. MOST PRODUCTS WILL ALWAYS PERFORM MUCH BETTER IN A HOME ENVIRONMENT BUT VANDEERSTEEN'S? ARE PARTICULARLY HANDICAPPED BECAUSE THEY ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT WHICH IS OBSCURED BY THE RE-RADIATION FROM THE OTHER SPEAKERS IN THE ROOM OR THE HIGH AMBIENT NOISE. AUDIOPHILES WHO ARE CRITICAL LISTENERS DEVELOP THAT SAME ABILITY IN THEIR FAVORITE DEALERS SHOWROOM, OVER TIME THEY LEARN HOW TO EVALUATE GEAR AS WELL AS AT HOME. GETTING BACK TO THE REVIEW THE QUATRO IS AN AMAZING SPEAKER FOR THE MONEY (MOST OF IT'S COMPONENTS CAME FROM THE MODEL 5) BUT IT WON'T HOLD A CANDLE TO THE 5A'S IN MY OPINION.? WE CAN ONLY IMAGINE WHAT THE REVIEW WOULD HAVE BEEN IF HE WERE AUDITIONING THE 5A'S.

Jack (6/24/06): Will the 2ce Signature perform alright if installed in my existing wall unit? Each speaker would be in a 17" wide cabinet. Thus, no open space on the sides. I would use vcc-1 center channel under the tv. Best wishes,

Answer: HELLO JACK, THIS IS ALWAYS A HARD QUESTION TO ANSWER. YOU WILL COMPROMISE THE SOUND SIGNIFICANTLY BUT STILL HAVE BETTER SOUND THAN A BOX SPEAKER IN THE SAME LOCATION. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF OPEN SPACE AROUND THE TWEETER AND MIDRANGE IN THE VANDERSTEEN WITHIN THE SOCK WHEN INSTALLED IN A CABINET. YOU WILL STILL GET A OPEN SOUND BECAUSE THE DRIVERS ARE UN-BAFFLED TO A DEGREE. INSTALLING SOME SOUND ABSORBERS ON THE SIDES OF THE CABINET WILL HELP. VCC-1 WILL WORK GREAT UNDER THE SCREEN.

Paul (6/24/06): Dear Sir; Can you outline the differences between the 3A and the 3A Signatures? On your upgrade pricelist, you have two prices for what appears to be the same upgrade. Can you elaborate on this difference? Regards,

Answer: HELLO PAUL, IT IS THE SAME UPGRADE FROM TWO DIFFERENT STARTING POINTS; 3 OR 3A TO 3A SIG. NO MATER WHICH ONE YOU START WITH YOU END UP WITH 3A SIGNATURES FOR TWO DIFFERENT PRICES.

Jeff (6/24/06): My first adventure into high end equipment 15-20 years ago included a purchase of 2CI's. I loved them. Then I got money, and got stupid, and migrated to Wilson Watt Puppy 5's. Recently, I decided to audition some of your terrific choices, including the 2CE's and 3A Signatures. Brought back fond memories...and now the Wilson's are for sale. So, thank you. My question is somewhat mundane. Back on March 9th, you answered Mark's question about veneers on the 3A Signatures. My dealer didn't know the name of the wood for the pair on display, and told me to check your web site. Neither the site, nor the response to Mark, allow me to determine the wood I saw. To my eyes, it appeared to be light oak...not white oak as your site pictures for the 5As...it's darker than that. I'm sure it's not cherry, so that leaves me with oak, walnut, or maple as possible choices. But, any of those can be lighter or darker. So, how do I determine what's what? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, WE USE WHITE OAK SPECIES WOOD WHICH IS NOT WHITE. YOUR DEALER CAN LOOK AT THE SHIPPING BOXES IT WILL SAY WHAT THEY WERE. REMEMBER THEY ARE NOT VINYL AND WOOD VARIES TREE TO TREE.

Havish (6/23/06): Hi Richard,My question is about speaker break in. When I bought my 2Ce speakers, I was told that they need to be broken in for a certain number of hours. However, I also know that the two speakers are hand matched in the factory to be very close in response prior. If the speakers aren't broken in yet, how can hand matching in the factory guarantee that the speakers will be matched after the break in period as well? Or is the information that the speakers need breaking in a mistake? Could you throw some light on what exactly is happening during the breaking in process and why this does not affect the results of the hand matching done apriori in the factory? Thanks for taking the time to operate this forum. Regards,.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, BREAK IN INVOLVES THE SUSPENSION COMPONENTS OF A DRIVER. THIS IS A LINEAR FUNCTION AND IS WHY WE BREAK IN DRIVERS FOR 1000 HOURS BEFORE DOING ANY DESIGN WORK. MATCHING THE DRIVERS INVOLVES SUBTLE DIFFERENCES IN THE DIAPHRAGM (CONES AND DOMES) THAT NEVER CHANGE IF THE MATERIALS ARE NOT EFFECTED BY AGE, MOISTURE, ETC. ALL OF OUR DIAPHRAGM ARE ENVIRONMENT STABLE FOR THIS REASON, AN EXAMPLE OF ONE THAT IS NOT WOULD BE PAPER. YOU SHOULD HAVE HEARD THIS CHANGE IN THE FIRST 100 HOUR ESPECIALLY.

Jonas (6/19/06): Richard, Thanks for continuing to operate this forum. I have another question as I come to the final stages of designing the room that will hold my beloved stereo (5A's, tube pre, SS amp and universal digital player) and a HT setup as well (not yet purchased but will have front projection and 5 channels including the stereo): I have the ability to install dedicated AC lines back to the main panel, how many should I get to accommodate the HT and the Stereo? Also, do think there is any value in "audiophile" grade outlets? Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO JONAS, RUNNING SEPARATE DEDICATED LINES IS A GOOD IDEA ALTHOUGH OVER RATED EXCEPT IN THE BIGGEST SYSTEMS. AS MANY AUDIOPHILES HAVE DISCOVERED, RUNNING THE WHOLE SYSTEM FROM ONE CIRCUIT CAN OFTEN IMPROVE THE SOUND. THIS IS BECAUSE THAT GUARANTIES THE WHOLE SYSTEM IS ON THE SAME LEG. IF YOU RUN MULTIPLE LINES TELL YOUR ELECTRICIAN YOU WANT ALL OF THEM ON ONE LEG. THE OTHER LEG SHOULD BE USED FOR THE REFRIGERATORS AND ANY LIGHT CIRCUIT WITH DIMMERS OR FLUORESCENTS. DON'T KNOW ABOUT AUDIOPHILE OUTLETS BECAUSE I DO NOT USE THEM AND HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH THEM.

Mike (6/19/06): Hi there, I am in NZ and have a pair of 3a Signatures, a pair of 1c's and the VCC 5.  I am wanting to replace the sock on all speakers with a new color (color for you guys) and am hoping you can send me a) instruction on removing the sock and b) the template pattern for replacements so I can have them ready to swap over. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, INSTRUCTIONS ARE ONE OUR WEB SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE. THIS IS A BIG JOB!! BE SURE TO SELECT A FABRIC THAT IS AS TRANSPARENT AS WHAT IS INSTALLED. YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE THROUGH IT EASILY. ONCE YOU HAVE SECURED YOUR NEW FABRIC REMOVE THE OLD AND USE IT AS A PATTERN. DO NOT USE A LIGHT COLOR AS THEY WILL SOIL IN A VERY SHORT TIME BECAUSE THEY ACT AS ROOM FILTERS. YOU WOULD BE SURPRISED HOW MUCH AIR IS PUMPED THROUGH THE GRILLE.

Truck (6/17/06): RE: 5a, Bass EQ and Set-up Procedure. Hello Richard. I have owned my 5a's for a year now, and I enjoy them more and more every day; the only drawback is that my music loving friends have practically moved-in and my wife is threatening divorce. Since I have relocated since my purchase, I have done the set-up procedure on my own according to the instructions in your fine owner's manual. I was wondering why you do not recommend taking a final step in the set-up of the EQ, which would be to take the measurements at the listening position in the aggregate (both speakers playing simultaneously). I am quite certain you have considered this - you seem to have thought of everything else - so I am just wondering why this would not work, or if you consider it a redundant and therefore unnecessary step? Many thanks in advance for you considered reply.

Answer: HELLO TRUK, ASK YOURSELF, IF BOTH SPEAKERS ARE PLAYING WHICH ONE WOULD ADJUST? THE MOST COMMON MISTAKE MANY PEOPLE MAKE IS TRYING TO ADJUST THE SPEAKERS AS FLAT AS THEY CAN. THE RESULT IS A LACK OF INTEGRATION, BORING, AND COMPRESSED BASS. ONCE THE LEVELS ARE SET ON THE PRE-AMP WRITE DOWN THE SPL METER READING FOR EVERY BAND ON BOTH SPEAKERS. NEXT TO THAT COLUMN WRITE DOWN WHAT YOUR TARGET IS FOR THE FINAL ADJUSTMENT. IE: +9DB X .3=3DB. 3DB WILL BE WHAT YOU WANT THAT BAND(POT) TO BE ON THE METER WHEN FINISHED.? ALWAYS GO BACK AND RUN THROUGH ALL BANDS TWICE AND MAKE TRIM ADJUSTMENTS. NEVER USE A CALIBRATED MIKE, USE THE RADIO SHACK ANALOG SPL METER IT HAS THE CORRECT ROLL OFF BUILT IN. DO NOT USE A RADIO SHACK THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED OR A CORRECTION CHART SOME PROMOTE.

Mauricio (6/14/06): I've recently bought a pair of second hand Vandersteen 1C. They seem to be OK. and 'm very satisfied with them, but I didn't get the stands and the catalogue. I have problems positioning the speakers in order to get the most of them. My rectangular room size is (WxHxD) 3.5mts. X 2.5mts X 5mts, would you give me an advise? I live in Colombia (south America) and I would like to know how to get the stands, which seem to be crucial to obtain the whole sound they can reproduce. When I use them with a subwoofer the sound becomes less natural, so how can I get a better bass response of them? I've made listening comparisons against the Von Schweikert VR-4 of a friend of mine, and despite they are in a different level of price and level, we both, for our surprise, didn't heard the difference they have in price. I thank you in advance for your help.

Answer: HELLO MAURICIO, YOU CAN REQUEST A MANUAL BY MAIL. SEND $5.00 US TO COVER POSTAGE. SOUNDS LIKE THEY ARE WORKING VERY WELL.

Steven (6/10/06): Richard, thank you very much for taking the time to review and answer all our questions--I enjoyed reading all the Qs and replies and learned a lot. I've read enough recently to know I want to get a 2Wq subwoofer. I have an Audio Research SP-9 MkII preamp, 2 bridged sons of ampzilla (using "The Bridge" by GAS), and upgraded Dahlquist DQ-10 speakers. (1) Do you think the 2Wq would work well with this system? (2)If I get just one 2Wq to start, do I run speaker wires from the L and R out channel of my bridged amps to the L and R inputs on the back of the 2Wq? (3) Later, if I get another sub, would I just connect the amp L out to L in on one sub and amp R out to the R in on the other sub? (4) You say "FOR MODERATE SYSTEMS THE X-2 WILL BE SUFFICIENT, BUT FOR VERY HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS A BATTERY BIASED HIGH PASS LIKE THE M5-HP SHOULD BE USED." Do you think there would be a noticeable sound difference if I were to use the M5-HP on my system, or should I just use the X-2?

Answer: HELLO STEVEN, THIS LATE AT NIGHT I AM GETTING DIZZY TRYING TO FOLLOW ALL OF THIS. ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER WHEN YOU VISIT HIM AND BRING A DRAWING. THE X-2 WILL BE FINE.

David (6/10/06): Six weeks ago I had a pair of 2Wq Subwoofers installed in my listening room in my home. I was aware that a break in period was required, but even after the manual instructions, I was not impressed. I also had ordered a X-2 Fixed Crossover which I am waiting for. I just wanted to report that the sound is NOW awesome!! The deep bass is tight with absolutely no hangover (maybe not correct terminology). It just took a little longer to break them in than the manual indicated. Am told that when the crossover arrives the sound will be improved more. Can't wait. I can strongly recommend your subwoofers. I have owned other brands of subwoofers in the 80's and very early 90's and they were not close to yours in the quality of sound. I know you know all this, but thought you might like to hear again. David Glover The Woodlands, Texas

Answer: HELLO DAVID, ENJOY YOUR MUSIC AND PLEASE POST HERE WHAT YOU HEAR WHEN YOU INSTALL THE X-2'S. BE SURE TO GIVE THEM A CHANCE TO BREAK IN.

Phil (6/07/06): Would it be acceptable to place the VSM's on 24" stands in the back of the room against the back wall instead of up on the wall? This installation would also require them to be very close to corner placement. I am currently considering 1c's in the front, VSM's in the rear and VCC5 center using a single 2W for my home theater. I do not have a placement to hang them at the same height and spacing on the back wall(this also includes my wifes reluctance to "Hang" speakers in the den!)Also, would it be just as acceptable to use 1C's in the back instead of the VSM's if they would not work close in a corner and/or on a stand? I could probably get the 1C's out a little or the VSM out maybe 6-8 inches.I'm trying to build an economical home theater. It certainly isn't required to be of "Reference" caliber-just good sound. I have a large opening leaving the right side of the den which is handicapping placement. One last question, I'm currently using 3a Sigs and a pair of 2Wq's in my 2 channel room. I was considering switching to the Quattro's for ease of placement and space saving. Would this be a move sideways or an improvement in sound?

Answer: HELLO PHIL, HT SETUPS SHOULD BE ADDRESSED BY THE DEALER AS THEY HAVE INSTALLED MANY OF THEM, IN MANY DIFFERENT ROOMS. I HAVE NOT. I KNOW OF A DEALER WHO HAS HUNG OUR SPEAKERS UPSIDE DOWN FROM THE CEILING AND THE CUSTOMER IS VERY HAPPY, I WOULD HAVE NEVER MADE THAT RECOMMENDATION. FORTUNATELY FOR HIM, HE ASKED HIS DEALER. THE QUATRO IS A SIGNIFICANT IMPROVEMENT OVER 3A SIG'S AND SUBS.

William (6/03/06): Richard,I need to order a new manual for my 2Ce's...(How do I do that?)I also lost my soundanchor spikes in the move, can I get them from you as well?Thanks,

Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, CALL THE FACTORY.

Clay (6/02/06): Dear Richard, I have enjoyed a pair of 2C loudspeakers for years. I am about to upgrade my amplifier to a Rotel integrated amp. I have the opportunity to add a Vandersteen 2W subwoofer to this system. Will the sub work as it is intended with the Rotel and 2C's? Is extra equipment or a special hookup required? Thanks and keep up the great innovation.

Answer: HELLO CLAY, THE 2WQ REQUIRES A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER AND WILL NOT WORK WITH MOST INTEGRATED AMPLIFIERS. CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

Bill (5/31/06): Richard, I realize this does NOT fall in the frequently asked question category, but I need some help. You did answer this question when it was much more general back in February, but it has progressed since then. It's about running a pair of 5s in balanced mode with Pass Aleph 1.2s. Here's the exchange I've had with Nelson at Pass recently. Thanks for your help, Bill Mr. Pass,I had a pair of Aleph 2s that were driving a pair of Vandersteen 5s. Because of the crossover with the Vandersteen and the Input Impedance for the Aleph 2s when balanced was, standard 20 K ohm and inverted 5 K ohm, I was running them single-ended. Is the Input Impedance for the Aleph 1.2s the same as the Aleph 2s and is there a way I can run them balanced? Thanks for your help, Bill William Togno 2720 Russell St Berkeley, CA 94705 (415)299-9659 --- Nelson Pass wrote: You can buffer the input to the Aleph 1.2, or you can adjust the values of the crossover to accommodate the impedance. If the filter is passive, that means multiplying the values of the filter parts by 4. Of course you can just hook it up and it will run - I have customers who did that and were happy. best, np Mr. Pass, Sorry for confusion, but I'm only slightly above a novice when it comes to electronic. I was a music lover first, who picked up a few things over the years. I got this response from Richard at Vandersteen; HELLO BILL, YOU MUST CHECK WITH PASS LABS AND MAKE SURE BOTH LEGS ARE THE SAME. SOME OF THE PASS LABS ARE NOT TRUE BALANCED LIKE 5K ON ONE LEG AND 20K ON THE OTHER LEG. THIS IS VERY DANGEROUS FOR THE 7 INCH MID BASS DRIVER. PASS LABS WILL MAKE YOU A CUSTOM HIGH PASS BECAUSE OURS WONT WORK. Running them in balanced mode is ideal, but if this is too much work it's not a problem. I just loved the Aleph 2s and thought the 1.2s would be great for the Vandersteen 5s. Maybe I'll just compromise and run them single-ended. Thanks for your time, Bill From Nelson Pass We don't make a network for the Vandersteens, but if Richard will release the schematic to you, I can point you to the correct values. best, np Sorry for the length, but that's where I am. It would be great to be able to run them balanced, but like I mentioned if this is just too much for the two of you maybe I'll run them single-ended. Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE FACT THAT THE IMPEDANCE OF THE (+) LEG IS NOT THE SAME AS THE (-) LEG IS EVIDENCE THAT IT IS NOT A FULLY BALANCED AMPLIFIER. THIS AMPLIFIER IS BETTER SOUNDING THEREFORE WHEN RUN SINGLE ENDED BECAUSE IT IS SINGLE ENDED!!!!!!

Paul (5/31/06): I'm running a pair of 2Ce Signatures with a single 2Wq sub. The system sounds very good with the cables I made from AudioQuest bulk cable ($3/foot and I'm using two pairs on each side to bi-wire) and terminators but I've been very impressed with BEL P-1 interconnects and will probably upgrade to BEL speaker cable for the 2Ce's well. I'm inclined to order two pairs of the BEL S-12 cables rather than a single set of the heavier gauge S-24s and a pair of jumpers but my Vandersteen dealer says that he and everyone he knows does the latter so he can't loan me S-12's to listen to. If a single pair of S-24s with jumpers works well with his Model 5s should they work well for my 2Ce Signatures? That seems to run contrary to your general recommendations. The cost is about the same either way. I think that you have some experience with BEL cables - do you have a recommendation for me? Also, is it critical to run the same cable to the sub or can I get by with my homemade cables? I could end up spending over $1000 on speaker cables if I get all BELs so any advice you can give as to priorities would be appreciated.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, OUR VIEW ON THIS SUBJECT IS WELL DOCUMENTED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL AND SEVERAL QUESTIONS ON THIS SITE. THAT IS OBVIOUSLY NOT GETTING THROUGH TO YOU SO YOU SHOULD MAKE THE DEALER PROVE ME WRONG. IF HE WON'T I WOULD FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

David (5/30/06): Dear Richard, I am currently using a pair of 2Cs with a single 2Wq. My amp?s input impedance is 49k and I am using a 50k X-2 crossover that is an excellent match. I need to replace the amp and the new one is a tube / transistor hybrid with an input impedance of 420k. I spoke to my dealer about a new X-2 but was informed that they only go up to 200k. He offered me the option of using the active crossover from the Model 5?s, but my system is very modest and a passive crossover like the X-2 is fine for me. Is it possible for me to simply wire a 4700pf WonderCap or KimberKap in the signal path? Will this give me a crossover point at 80hz, or am I over simplifying? Any help or advice you can give will be greatly appreciated. Thank you very much.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE REASON WE DO NOT PROVIDE X-2 ANY HIGHER THAN 200K IS BECAUSE THE HIGH PASS FREQUENCY CAN VARY A LOT. YOU COULD USE A SERIES CAP LIKE YOU MENTIONED BUT I WOULD USE A FREQUENCY GENERATOR AND O-SCOPE AND VERIFY THE HIGH PASS FREQUENCY. THE X-2'S ARE JUST EXACTLY THAT, A HIGH QUALITY CAP IN SERIES WITH THE INPUT OF THE AMPLIFIER.

Dan (5/30/06): Hi Richard, When an upgradeable pair of 2CE's are made into signatures, are they of the present day standard or of the original late 90's standard. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO DAN, UPGRADING AN UPGRADEABLE 2CE TO SIGNATURES IS 85% OF WHAT WE MAKE TODAY. THERE ARE SOME THINGS WE CAN NOT CHANGE BECAUSE THE ALREADY HIGH COST WOULD BE RIDICULOUS.

Craig (5/29/06): Hello Richard, can you recommend a way to add Quatro/Model 5 type room correction to our 2Wq's? Or much better yet, do you offer such? Thanks again for all you do.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I'M SORRY IT IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE 2WQ. IT WOULD MAKE THE SUB A LOT MORE EXPENSIVE. THE 2WQ CAN BE PLACED IN THE CORNER OF THE ROOM AND IF USED IN STEREO PAIRS WILL BE VERY FLAT IN MOST ROOMS. IF THE SUB IS Q'ED PROPERLY (MOST ARE NOT) CORNER PLACEMENT IS THE MOST LINEAR. THE MAIN REASON THE 5A'A AND QUATRO'S HAVE ROOM CONTROL IS BECAUSE THEY NEED TO BE PLACED WHERE THE ROOM ALLOWS THE BEST IMAGING SO THE BASS CAN BE ADJUSTED TO THAT LOCATION.

Gabriel (5/28/06): "USING ADAPTERS ON A BALANCED HP5B WILL NOT WORK CORRECTLY. I'M SORRY TO SAY THE MP5B CAN NOT BE MODIFIED TO SINGLE ENDED." Is this statement true of the converse? Can I use an XLR to RCA adapter on my XLR amp to convert it to single ended and use the single ended M5-HP?

Answer: HELLO GABRIEL, ADAPTERS OF ANY KIND ARE NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE HIGH-PASS FUNCTION COULD BE VERY FAR OFF THE PROPER FREQUENCY. ONE HAS TO THINK ABOUT ADAPTERS AND THEIR SONIC EFFECT. WHEN YOU PAY $600.00 - $800.00 FOR A HIGH PASS, ADAPTERS AND THEIR NEGATIVE EFFECT DOES NOT MAKE SENSE.

Richard (5/27/06): I recently purchased two used 2Wq subwoofers and M5-HP balanced high-pass crossovers. On 3/22/06 you said on this Technical Information page that the balanced filters would not work correctly with RCA/XLR adapters on my single-ended cables and electronics. Subsequently I traded crossovers with a gentleman who had single-ended M5-HP crossovers but needed balanced M5-HP crossovers. I set the impedance of the single-ended M5-HP crossovers using a multi-meter, 1kHz test tone, and the method you described in your response on this page to Stuart on 3/22/06.I just played "Ballad of the Runaway Horse" from the Rob Wasserman CD "Duets." This cut, which features Jennifer Warnes singing and Wasserman on upright bass, has been recommended to me for speaker setup. However, there seems to be little difference in the volume of Wasserman's bass regardless of whether the subwoofers' sensitivity and contour controls are at their lowest or highest settings on both subwoofers. To complicate matters, I moved recently and I'm not yet familiar with the sound of my stereo in the new room (approximately 12' wide by 22' long by 8' high). So I tested the subwoofers using the 31.5Hz track on Stereophile first test CD. With the test CD, I could definitely distinguish the bass volume and quality differences as I adjusted the sensitivity and contour controls from their lowest to highest settings. Still, the difference wasn't as much as I expected and I'm wondering if I damaged the subwoofers' internal amplifiers by using the subwoofers with the balanced crossovers and RCA/XLR adapters for a week while I was waiting for the single-ended crossovers to arrive. Can you recommend a test that I can do at home to verify the subwoofer amplifiers are working correctly? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, WE DELIBERATELY MADE THE CONTROLS ON THE 2WQ,5A,AND QUATRO'S SUBTLE FOR FINE TUNING. IF IT MADE A BIG DIFFERENCE THAT WOULD NOT BE VERY FINE! THIS ALSO LIMITS HOW SCREWED UP ONE COULD GET THEM, THEY ARE SOLD AS HIGH END EQUIPMENT. THE SUB WOOFERS EITHER WORK OR THEY DON'T THERE IS NO IN BETWEEN.

Randy (5/26/06): I don't believe everything I read, so I figured I'd ask you. On a web page a gentleman says he runs his 2Wqs with NO X2 or anything else between the amp and the preamp. He said the sound is great and he has been doing so for several months with no adverse concequences. What is the worst thing that could happen trying this? Why should we not do it?

Answer: HELLO RANDY, READ THE QUESTION (JEFF 5/12/06) ON THIS SAME PAGE.

David (5/25/06): I'm confused about the M5-HP. I thought it was only for Quatros and 5As. I have 3A Sigs and 2Wqs. What is an M5-HP and will it work with my system? How much is one in a balanced set up. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE M5-HP IS RECOMMENDED IN HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS INCLUDING THE MODEL 3'S. CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AS TO WHAT IT IS AND HOW TO USE THEM.

Ryan (5/25/06): Just bought a pair of used 1C's from somebody who upgraded to the 3A's. He included the stands but no spikes. I have carpeted floor and would like to add some spikes to the stand. What threaded size spikes do I need to buy, and does your company sell spikes or should I go to a 3rd party? Also, the guy did not include the mounting hardware to screw the stands onto the speakers. What size bolt do I need to correctly attach the speakers? Thanks, I love your product!

Answer: HELLO RYAN, CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER OR VANDERSTEEN AUDIO 559-582-0324 FOR A HARDWARE KIT FOR THE 1C'S. ENJOY YOUR NEW SPEAKERS.

Dan (5/24/06): Hi Richard, I own a pair of 2ce sigs. I'm driving them with a high quality "class A" 250 watt amp. I listen at low to moderate volume. I also use a powered sub crossed over at 85hz. The power recommendation for the sigs is significantly lower than 250. To me, the sound is wonderful and I don't want to change a thing. But are my sigs in grave danger? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAN, HIGH POWERED AMPLIFIERS ARE NO MORE DANGEROUS THAN HIGH HORSEPOWER CARS. GET DRUNK OR STUPID ALL BETS ARE OFF. JUST BECAUSE YOU HAVE 250 WATTS IS NOT A PROBLEM AS LONG AS ONLY PART OF THEM ARE USED WISELY. IT IS SAFER TO HAVE MORE THAN YOU NEED THAN NOT ENOUGH POWER.

Paul (5/22/06): Hi Richard, This is Paul following up on the question I posed on 2/24 having to do with lack of bass in my system. I have an update: much to my surprise it was my Acurus DIA100 passive preamp integrated amplifier that was limiting my system. It simply could not drive the 2Ce Signatures to anywhere near their potential. I tried a pair of Odyssey Stratos Monos with Odyssey Tempest preamp and the sound improved noticeably. Then I found used BEL 1001 Mk V amp and PSE HL-1 preamp and WOW - I now have rich, detailed bass. While all rooms introduce sonic anomalies, particularly at low frequencies, the room was not the primary problem with my system. Before I got my hands on the BEL I also bought a used 2Wq which I will have by the end of this week. That may be overkill but I am eager to experiment with it, and if it's anywhere near as impressive as the 2Ce Signatures I suspect that it would be very difficult for me to part with it. Thank you for dedicating your mind, ears, and hands to creating products delivering truly exceptional sound reproduction and value.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, THESE QUESTIONS ARE HARD FOR ME TO ANSWER BECAUSE I DO NOT HAVE PERSONAL EXPERIENCE WITH MUCH OF THE EQUIPMENT MANY PEOPLE SEEM TO BUY ON SOMEONE ELSE'S SUGGESTION AND NOT ON A PERSONAL EVALUATION. I'M HAPPY YOU FOUND THE GEAR THAT WORKS FOR YOU.  REMEMBER IT DOESN'T MATER HOW GOOD THE DEAL IS IF IT SOUNDS BAD.

Jason (5/19/06): I have a pair of 3a with a stereo pair of 2wq subwoofers and I'm using the balanced M5-HP variable cross-over. My main amp (Krell KAS200s) has an impedance of 47K, so I set the switches to 100K. I also tested one setting up and down from there as recommended and found I liked the 75K setting best in my room, mainly because it gave a bigger bass punch. I further experimented with the 50K setting and found that while the sound was less balanced, it seemed to deliver even more bass, particularly on movies. I spend more time watching movies these days than listening to music (which is a change from when I bought these). I was wondering if using a setting 2 levels away (50K) from the amp?s impedance is ok or if system damage could result. What about 3 setting away (33K)? Is there an alternative method to increase the bass output (bass volume?) without switching to the V2W? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JASON, TWO SETTINGS IS NOT RECOMMENDED. THE PROPER SETTING WILL GIVE THE BASS OUTPUT RECORDED ON THE CD OR DVD. I SUGGEST YOU USE THE BASS BOOST ON YOUR PROCESSOR FOR MOVIES THAT WAY YOUR MUSIC WON'T BE SCREWED UP.

Kent (5/19/06): Hi Richard. I tried moving the M5-HP crossover up and down one setting. I most like the 10k ohm setting, which is one down from my amp?s stated input (Ayre V-3 / 20K ohms in balanced). This setting appears to improve both bass quality and overall integration. It also appears that this setting requires less gain from the 2W to achieve proper balance. I'm the kind of guy who likes to understand how and why things work. Will please explain to me what changes occur to the signal or phase when set at 10K (vs 20K), and why the sound is improved (and also seems louder)? Thanks

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE WAY THIS ASSESSMENT SHOULD BE DONE IS AS FOLLOWS: SET THE X-OVER TO THE SETTING CLOSEST TO THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE AND ADJUST THE 2W(Q) LEVEL CONTROL TO APPROXIMATELY THE SENSITIVITY OF THE MAIN SPEAKERS. TRY ONE SETTING LOWER AND TURN DOWN THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UNTIL THERE IS THE SAME SUBJECTIVE BASS IN THE ROOM. ASSES THE QUALITY NOT QUANTITY OF BASS. ADJUST THE X-OVER ONE SETTING ABOVE THE FIRST SETTING AND RAISE THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UNTIL THERE IS THE SAME SUBJECTIVE BASS IN THE ROOM AS THE TWO TESTS BEFORE. ASSES THE QUALITY NOT THE QUANTITY OF THE BASS. USE THE SETTING THAT GIVES THE BEST QUALITY OF BASS. IF YOU WANT MORE BASS THAN THE RECORDING HAD USE THE BASS TONE CONTROL ON THE PREAMP AND TURN IT UP. IF YOU DO NOT HAVE TONE CONTROLS TURN THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UP AND DON'T TELL YOUR AUDIOPHILE FRIENDS. REMEMBER THAT TURNING THE BASS UP WILL BE PERCEIVED BY MANY AS REDUCED TRANSPARENCY. YOU WANT TO KNOW MORE CALL ME.

Kevin (5/18/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, I purchased 1Cs last year and love them. Do you have any plans for a smaller bookshelf speaker, or a smaller floor standing model with a smaller footprint? I'd like to purchase speakers for my bedroom. Thanks

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, FOR BOOKSHELF SPEAKERS HOW ABOUT THE VSM-1 WHICH HANG ON THE WALL, AND YOU WON'T NEED TO BUILD A SHELF. THEY ARE OUT OF THE WAY AND SOUND GREAT.

Rob (5/18/06): Richard, What finish do you use on your Model 5/5A? I purchased a used pair of cherry veneered 5's and want to have them re-veneered (small dings, scratches, etc.) and really like the finish that is on the existing veneer. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROB, THE MODEL 5'S ARE SPRAYED WITH A CLEAR POLYURETHANE SATIN RUBBED. JUST SAND THE EXISTING FINISH SMOOTH AND RE-SPRAY WITH THE SAME PRODUCT. DO NOT USE LACQUER. IF YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT PUTTING A DIFFERENT WOOD OVER THE CHERRY YOUR ABOUT TO MAKE A BIG MISTAKE. ANY GLUE YOU TRY OVER THE FINISH WILL NOT STICK. SEVERAL CUSTOMERS HAVE HAD US CHANGE THE WOOD WHEN THEY WERE AT THE FACTORY FOR UP-DATE.

Rob (5/18/06): Richard, If gluing veneer over the existing veneer is a bad idea I take it you actually pull the old veneer off when you re-veneer speakers. What is an estimate to get both speakers veneered new (cherry) as part of a 5 to 5A update? Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROB, MAYBE WE CAN RESTORE THE EXISTING FINISH. CALL ME SO WE CAN DISCUS OPTIONS. THIS IS BEYOND THIS FORUM AND WOULD TAKE A LOT LESS TIME THAN DOING THIS BACK AND FORTH.

David (5/17/06): I have a pair of 5's which I have worked very hard to get positioned such that sound is optimized (to my ear anyway). I have the 11 "pots" on the bass contour panel all set to "straight up". I plan to be in this house for only another year and really do not want to pay someone $300-400 to come out and adjust the contour. Is there ANYTHING a person can do by ear that will be of benefit in this regard during an interim period? It would seem that with 11 settings, the permutations for finding the perfect setting by ear would be daunting, but is there any chance of damage from making adjustments without measuring equipment?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, NO DAMAGE, BUT IT CAN NOT BE DONE BY EAR. YOU ARE MUCH BETTER USING THE SPEAKERS WITH ALL POTS 12 O'CLOCK LIKE YOU ARE.

Kent (5/17/06): Thank you Richard for your previous response. Please also clarify: With your M5-HP balanced crossover, if I adjust the settings to the next higher or next lower impedance, what does that do to the curve? Does one setting move roll off point to a higher frequency, and the other down? BTW: I love what your crossover does to improve SQ of midrange (by taking low-frequency burden off speakers / amp). Thank you again.

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE X-OVER DOES NOT MOVE BUT THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND THE SUB DOES. DEPENDING ON THE ROOM ONE UP OR ONE DOWN CAN PROVIDE BETTER LINEARITY IN THE MID BASS.

Gregg (5/17/06): RICHARD, FIRST OF ALL I WANT TO TELL YOU I WAS ONE OF YOUR EARLY CUSTOMERS BACK IN 1978. I PURCHASED A SET OF MODEL 2C'S FROM YOU VISITING A FRIEND ANTHONY MOTTO WHO AT THE TIME WORKED FOR INTEL, A START UP COMPANY AT THE TIME. YOU HAVE BEEN MORE THAN KIND THROUGH THE YEARS REPAIRING THE SPEAKERS FROM TIME TO TIME WHEN I PLAYED A POORLY RECORDED RECORD AND POPED THE VOICE COILS. I HAD THEM IN STORAGE FOR AROUND 10 YEARS NOW, FINALLY CONNECTED EVERYTHING BACK UP A FEW MONTHS AGO AFTER RETURNING FROM A EUROPEAN TOUR WITH THE BAND I'M IN AND CAN'T TELL YOU HOW MUCH I MISSED THE CLARITY OF THOSE SPEAKERS. I PLAYED PINK FLOYD MEDDLE AND THOUGHT DAVID GILMOUR AND ROGER WATERS WERE SITTING ASIDE ME IN THE STUDIIO LAYING DOWN TRACKS.HERE COMES THE SAD PART. I THINK THE SILICON ON THE OUTSIDE WENT BAD DUE TO EXTREME HEAT OR COLD BEING IN MY WAREHOUSE ALL THOSE YEARS AND THEY ARE FLUTTERING. IS THERE ANYONE I CAN TAKE THEM TOO I CAN TRUST IN PITTSBURGH, PA? OR SHOULD I SEND THEM OUT TO YOU. I REALLY MISS THEM AND WANT TO ENJOY MY RECORDS AGAIN IN BETWEEN TOURING. PLEASE CHECK OUR WEBSITE OUT TOO. GOOGLE THE CYNICS OR GET HIP RECORDS. THANK YOU AND LOOK FORWARD TO YOUR RESPONSE. GREGG KOSTELICHCEO GET HIP RECORDSGUITARIST FOR THE CYNICS.

Answer: HELLO GREGG, DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM ON THIS SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE, PACK UP THE SPEAKERS WITH THE FORM INSIDE AND SHIP THEM TO US. MOST REPAIR SHOPS DO SO SO WORK FOR A LOT OF MONEY. IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REPAIR THEM MAKES SENSE, SHIP US THE PARTS WITH THE FORM. YOUR CHOICE.

Bob (5/17/06): I have purchased a VCC-1. S/N 2223. I assume I should set my Harman Kardon AVR-635 receiver to "small" for this speaker? Is this correct? ( I am using it with a pair of 2C's I purchased on 3/84, S/N 8462c/8463c. They are still working fine.) Until I can afford a Vandersteen sub or two, I will be using my HK 200 watt subwoofer with the HK satellites to complete a 5.1 system.

Answer: HELLO BOB, YOUR MANUAL COVERS THIS, PLEASE READ IT OR CALL ME.

Roger (5/16/06): Hi Richard, I ordered a pair of 5As back in March and am looking forward to receiving them sometime in the next month or so. In a previous post you mentioned that the standard power cords were fine, and that aftermarket power cords could change the sound of the 5As to something other than you intended. I would like to know your thoughts about using surge protectors/power conditioners for the 5A subwoofer amps. I'm not looking to alter the sound of the speakers, but I would like to provide surge protection for the subwoofer amps. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO ROGER, IN MY OPINION PLUGGING THE SUBWOOFER AMPS DIRECTLY INTO THE WALL IS THE WAY TO GO. REMEMBER TO UNPLUG THEM DURING A BAD STORM OR ON VACATION. JUST A NOTE IF YOU GET HIT DURING A BAD STORM SURGE PROTECTORS DO NOT RESPOND FAST ENOUGH ANY WAY.

Moby (5/16/06): Hi Richard, Moby here again. I found my balanced crossovers (Model 5's)set 4 levels to high being I upgraded my amp and never re-set the crossovers. YIKES! How can I tell if I have damaged the speakers. The midrange is very hard to hear. It's there but sounds like it's in the back ground. If I can't afford to upgrade them to 5A's what are my options? Also I have the shipping bases/pallets but can't find the boxes. Can I purchase new boxes if I need to ship the speakers to you? Thank You.

Answer: HELLO MOBY, HAVING THE ADJUSTMENT TOO HIGH WILL NOT HURT ANYTHING, JUST SOUND BAD. I AM A LOSS AS TO WHAT YOUR PROBLEM IS OTHER THAN WHAT I ASKED YOU TO CHECK.? CONTACT YOUR DEALER AND HAVE HIM HELP YOU. WE DO HAVE BOXES AVAILABLE BUT THEY ARE EXPENSIVE BECAUSE OF THE FREIGHT. CALL THE FACTORY.

John (5/16/06): Another question about the o-lugs, does the material make any difference, ie. gold plated, or just any standard #10 o-lug(usually looks like tin alloy) sound fine? What about contact preservative like pro gold or similar?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, ALL CONNECTORS ARE COPPER PLATED WITH TIN, THEY WILL WORK GREAT. USE THE CONTACT PRESERVATIVE THAT SOUNDS GOOD TO YOU. BECAUSE ALL CONNECTIONS IN THE SPEAKER ARE SOLDERED I HAVE NOT TAKEN THE TIME TO LISTEN TO THEM, BECAUSE I DON'T HAVE IT. THIS WOULD BE A GOOD QUESTION FOR YOUR DEALER THEY EVALUATE THINGS ALL THE TIME, BECAUSE THEY ARE IN THE BUSINESS OF SELLING THEM.

Moby (5/15/06): Hi Richard, I have a pair of early model 5's powered by a Classe CA150 matched to a Classe CP60. I have gone through the setup many times over and have made all the obvious changes but they still are very very bright. Hard to listen to voice level frequencies. What should my path to warmer sounding speakers be and how do I know if I have damaged the mid drivers somehow? Can I change the crossover roll off? I currently have them @ 50 Ohms should I try changing these? Also I have been told the CA150 is a bright sounding amp to start with so should I look to invest in another amp? Thank You, Moby

Answer: HELLO MOBY, I MUST CONFESS NO ONE HAS COMPLAINED ABOUT THE 5'S BEING BRIGHT. HAVE YOU INSTALLED THE PROPER WASHERS FOR TILT ACCORDING TO THE MANUAL? THE TILT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO GET CORRECT. NOT ENOUGH TILT WILL RESULT IN THE TWEETER FREQUENCIES HITTING YOUR EARS FIRST BEFORE THE REST OF THE FREQUENCIES SOUNDING BRIGHT. THE X-OVER MUST BE SET FOR THE CORRECT AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE, DO NOT DEVIATE FROM IT. WHO SET THE SPEAKERS UP FOR YOU? I HAVE HEARD THAT YOUR AMPLIFIER IS ON THE BRIGHT SIDE BUT HAVE NO PERSONAL EXPERIENCE. IF TRUE THE SPEAKER WOULD HAVE NO CHOICE BUT TO BE BRIGHT. CONSULT YOUR DEALER, THEY HAVE MUCH MORE EXPERIENCE WITH ALL THESE DIFFERENT COMBINATIONS.

John (5/15/06): I have read the posts about your use of barrier terminal strips and agree with you. What kind of o-lugs do you suggest, electronics stores seem to carry low quality o-lugs. Your barrier strips look like molex products and I was hoping to find a matching o-lug from molex - but no luck. John

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THOSE CHEAP RING LUGS ARE FINE. THERE IS A POST ON THIS SITE ON HOW TO PREP THEM. REMOVE THE PLASTIC SLEEVE AND INSULATE WITH HEAT SHRINK AFTER TERMINATION.

Chris (5/14/06): I am currently living in an apartment where I have less space and I must keep the volume relatively low. I want to consolidate my gear and build a home theater system. I'd like to use my 2Ce's and a 2Wq sub. I also have bi-amped tube amps and a tube stereo pre-amp that even when the volume turned all the way down, the music is still too loud. So, my question is, since I don't have room to put out all my tube gear and I am willing to part with my stereo tube pre-amp, is there a HT receiver that you are aware of that will work with the 2Wq or can you think of a better way do this? Thanks

Answer: HELLO CHRIS, WOW, YOU ARE IN FOR A BIG DISAPPOINTMENT. TUBE SEPARATES FOR TWO CHANNEL IS VERY SOPHISTICATED STUFF. THERE ARE NO HT RECEIVERS THAT WILL EVEN PALE COMPARED TO WHAT YOU HAD. A/V RECEIVERS THAT HAVE PRE-OUT AND PRE-IN FOR THE FRONT CHANNEL'S WILL WORK WITH THE 2WQ. THE HIGH PASS WILL GO BETWEEN THE TWO.

Jeff (5/12/06): Richard: I read on an internet site of running your sub without the x-2 filter with full range speakers. The person claims improved sound but the sub could be damaged. Could you comment? Jeff

Answer: HELLO JEFF, ONE OF THE MAIN IMPROVEMENTS WITH THE 2WQ IN THE SYSTEM OCCURS BECAUSE THE MAIN SPEAKERS ARE HIGH PASSED. THIS IMPROVES THE DISTORTION IN BOTH THE AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKERS. ONE SHOULD ASK HIM HOW FULL-RANGE HIS SPEAKERS COULD BE WHEN HE'S PILING BASS ON TOP OF THE SPEAKERS LET ALONE 15DB OF BOOST IN THE SUB FREQUENCIES. BUT THEN THE LAST CAR I RENTED HAD THE BASS TURNED ALL THE WAY UP (ONLY 12DB) AND THE TREBLE ALL THE WAY DOWN. COULD IT BE HE WAS IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD? OVER TIME THAT OVER BOOST WILL CAUSE PROBLEMS IN THE AMPLIFIER. IT IS HOWEVER VERY IMPORTANT TO HAVE A HIGH PASS OF APPROPRIATE TRANSPARENCY. THE ADJUSTABLE BOX SHOULD NOT BE USED EXCEPT WITH A/V RECEIVERS. FOR MODERATE SYSTEMS THE X-2 WILL BE SUFFICIENT, BUT FOR VERY HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS A BATTERY BIASED HIGHPASS LIKE THE M5-HP SHOULD BE USED.

Theodore (5/12/06): Thank you for the quick reply ,The mac ma2275 does have pre-out and amp-in. It uses 4 KT88s in the amp section. That is obviously 1/2 the number a pair of quicksilver mono's or mac 2102 amps use. My question is this - in your vast experience with the 5a's have you found a 75w/channel amp running a/b with the kt88's to have enough power to successfully run the 5a's at low/mod volumes. Do 8 KT88's do better at low volumes than 4??? Otherwise i will not pack up my 90lb integrated for the trip to the local dealer. I never listen loud - usually low volumes. Looking for a very warm and relaxing (most high end systems (i have owned them too) give me severe listener fatigue after 1/2 hour) amp to pair with the 5a's. Vocals and jazz. In ss many suggest higher powered amps also sound better at low volumes. I just want you expert opinion on tube amps with the va's. If you feel 75w is not sufficient i will buy a pair of higher powered mono-blocks (quicksilver) or the mac 2102 100/channel with 8kt88s. The integrated would go great with 2ce sigs in my office too. Thanks again, Theodore

Answer: HELLO THEODORE, THIS QUESTION IS BETTER ANSWERED BY A DEALER WHO HAS EXPERIENCE WITH YOUR PARTICULAR AMPLIFIER AS I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH IT. I WOULD STILL RECOMMEND BRINGING IT TO THE DEALER TO MAKE SURE.

Michael (5/11/06): My name is Michael, and I don't yet own a pair of Vandersteen speakers but having heard them at a friend's house I am very interested now. I am currently doing a lot of online research. Since my space is rather limited, I'm focusing on the VLR & VCC speakers and if I might make a comment, it seems that the majority of questions on this forum are related to these speakers, particularly in reference to home theater. Maybe if the website had more info about this topic, it might answer many of those questions. For example, it could include a section on recommended placement / mounting height of these speakers in a typical HT room, a table listing the differences between similar models, as well as more pictures of the speakers, finishes, and relative sizes next to each other. Also, since many people seem to be purchasing your speakers used, it would be very helpful to have a table of serial number ranges and dates of production. It may be beyond the scope of this website, but some type of certification program, or even a "recommended used dealers" page might be helpful for those who steer clear of eBay-type sites and hence may never hear a Vandersteen speaker as a result. Finally, I am also interested in knowing a little bit more about where the company is headed in the future. While the speakers have a legendary following, to be sure, it also seems as if the focus is on 2-channel / stereo audio rather than HT. I have no problem with this at all - I still prefer my vinyl setup to my HT setup - but that may be precisely because HT speakers are so much harder to configure correctly. These are just my impressions from visiting the website and reading online reviews about Vandersteen speakers. Thank you for your time.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THIS IS A HARD QUESTION TO ANSWER. FIRST THE EASY PART. WE WILL CONTINUE TO SPECIALIZE IN TWO CHANNEL LOUDSPEAKERS AND HT WHEN THE CUSTOMER WANTS MULTI CHANNEL WITH AUDIO PRIORITIES. THE TWO CHANNEL WORLD IS HELD TO A MUCH HIGHER STANDARD BECAUSE BOTH CD AND VINYL ARE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION FORMATS. PLACEMENT OF ANY LOUDSPEAKER IS DICTATED BY THE ROOM NOT THE SPEAKER DESIGN SO GENERIC INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT WORTH THE PAPER THEY ARE WRITTEN ON. WE HAVE STATED ON THIS FORUM MANY TIMES HOW TO BUY USED PRODUCTS, I SUGGEST YOU READ SOME OF THEM.? BUYING USED CAN SAVE A LOT OF MONEY BUT IN ORDER TO DO IT SUCCESSFULLY YOU MUST HAVE MORE KNOWLEDGE THAN YOU COULD EVER PICK UP ON A WEB SITE. I WILL STATE ONE MORE TIME HOW IMPORTANT IT IS TO AUDITION THE PRODUCT YOU ARE GOING TO BUY. IF THE SOUND IS GOOD BRING IT HOME. THE BIGGEST PROBLEM WE SEE WHEN PEOPLE BUY USED GOODS HAS TO DO WITH SHIPPING AND DAMAGE. THE IRONY IS THAT A GOOD DEALER IS MORE KNOWLEDGEABLE ABOUT THIS THAN A MANUFACTURE COULD EVER BE BECAUSE THEY HAVE INSTALLED SO MANY SYSTEMS OVER THE YEARS. I HAVE INSTALLED EQUIPMENT IN ONE ROOM, MINE. AS A MANUFACTURE THE COST STRUCTURE HAS ESTABLISHED THE DEALER FOR THIS FUNCTION NOT THE MANUFACTURE. WITH USED EQUIPMENT THE DEALER IS NOT INVOLVED SO UNLESS THERE IS SOME SYSTEM LIKE A 900 PHONE NUMBER THERE IS NO WAY FOR THE MANUFACTURE TO GET COMPENSATED WHEN THE PRODUCT TURNS SEVERAL TIMES. I FEEL IT IS WRONG TO RAISE THE PRICE TO THE CONSUMER AND DEALER WHO IS NOT INVOLVED ENOUGH FOR A MANUFACTURE TO PROVIDE DEALER LIKE SERVICE TO A SECOND OR THIRD OWNER. THIS SERVICE IS VERY SPECIALIZED THEREFOR EXPENSIVE TO STAFF MAKING IT HARDER TO COMPETE WITH OFF SHORE PRODUCTS. THE SET-UP HAS ALWAYS HAD MORE TO DO WITH AWESOME SOUND THAN THE EQUIPMENT WITH IN REASON.

Theodore (5/9/06): I have 3a sigs and am very seriously considering the upgrade to the 5a's. Would my McIntosh ma2275 integrated tube amp at 75w/channel be sufficient? It is an all tube design. I never listen at loud levels, usually low levels. Room size 15x23ft. I have read many recommending tube amps such as the quicksilver's but no comments on mac tubes. It is a 5 hour drive to my nearest authorized dealer and I would be willing to bring the amp unless you feel it is not a good match. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO THEODORE, YOU MUST VERIFY THAT THE MAC HAS PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN CONNECTORS ON THE BACK PANEL, BECAUSE THE MODEL 5A'S REQUIRE A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND THE POWER AMP. IF SO LOAD IT UP IN THE CAR AND DRIVE TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN AUDIO DEALER AFTER MAKING AN APPOINTMENT. HOOK IT UP AND PLAY SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC YOU BROUGHT WITH YOU, IF YA LOVE IT, IT WORKS! NO ONE INCLUDING ME IS GOING TO ARGUE ABOUT THAT.

Ray (5/9/06): Hi Richard, I own 5's and 5A's currently the 5's are more desirable with my present decor because the bottoms are cherry, what I want to do is swap out all drivers, crossovers and powers supplies from the 5As that are all black. Thanks....

Answer: HELLO RAY, THIS WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE WITHOUT JIGS AND FIXTURES AND A ANECHOIC CHAMBER. IF IT WERE THAT EASY WE COULD HAVE OFFERED A FIELD UPGRADE KIT. THE MODIFICATIONS GO BEYOND JUST CHANGING PARTS.

Carl (5/9/06): I have a pair of 1c's (love 'em). I'm starting to look into tube amps (with little knowledge so far) and wonder what I should know.? In particular, what about "single-ended" amps which have low power output? Any limitations or restrictions I should know about?

Answer: HELLO CARL, THERE ARE LOTS LIMITATION AND RESTRICTIONS YOU AND YOUR DEALER SHOULD TALK ABOUT. READING THE POWER RECOMMENDATIONS IN YOUR 1C OWNERS MANUAL WOULD BE A GOOD PLACE TO START. FOR SOME PEOPLE A TUBE AMP THEY HAVE AUDITIONED ON THERE OWN SPEAKERS MAKE THEIR DAY, IT MAY MAKE YOUR WEEK.

Kent (5/13/06): Kent - I own a Vandersteen 2W and Vandersteen M5-HP balanced crossover. Is it possible to change the crossover frequency for either or both of these units? I would like to try my system with less lower-mids coming from the 2W. My goal is to lower the crossover point to somewhere between 45 - 60Hz. Currently my crossover is set to the amps specified input of 20K ohms. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO KENT, THERE IS NO WAY TO MOVE THE X-OVER FREQUENCY NOR WOULD YOU WANT TO. IF YOU WERE TO MOVE THE FREQUENCY TO SAY 50HZ YOUR MAIN SPEAKER WOULD HAVE TO BE FLAT TO 25HZ. IF YOUR MAINS WENT THAT LOW IT WOULD NOT NEED A SUB. I WOULD RECOMMEND YOU BUY A USED 2WQ TO REPLACE YOUR 2W. THE 2WQ IS A MUCH BETTER SUB AND HAS SUBSTANTIALLY LESS MIDRANGE LEAKAGE.

Phil (5/5/06): Richard,I recently purchased two used 2Wq subwoofers and M5-HPB balanced high-pass crossovers on audiogon. On 3/22/06 you said on this Technical Information page that the balanced filters would not work correctly with RCA/XLR adapters on my single-ended cables and electronics. Subsequently I found a gentleman (Kirk) on audiogon would had recently purchased used Quatros with single-ended M5-HP crossovers. Kirk needed balanced crossovers so we agreed to trade. The single-ended crossovers just arrived today and I noticed the decal on the crossovers says "Model M5-HP High-pass Filter (100Hz)." The 2Wq literature talks about an 80Hz crossover but I don't remember whether the decal on the balanced crossovers said 80Hz or 100Hz, and Kirk is currently out of town so he can't check. Will the 100 Hz single-ended crossovers I received in trade work with my 2Wq subwoofers? Will the balanced crossovers I sent to Kirk work with his Quatros? If not, what is the approximate cost for the factory to change the crossover points on our crossovers? Thanks, Richard!

Answer:  HELLO PHIL, THE M5-HP WILL WORK FOR KIRK BECAUSE THE LABEL ON THE COVER IS ALWAYS FOR 100 HZ WHICH IS NECESSARY FOR MODEL 5'S AND QUATRO'S. YOU CAN CALL THE FACTORY AND REQUEST A CHEAT SHEET FOR 2WQ USE WHICH HAS DIFFERENT SWITCH SETTINGS FOR 80 HZ.

Rob (5/4/06): Hi, I have an opportunity to buy a used pair of 5's or a new pair of Quatro's. The dealer has the Quatros and a private individual has the 5's so its impossible to really compare the two - different electronics, rooms, etc. Any advice you can give on the differences between the two sonically beyond the more powerful bottom end of the 5's would be appreciated. I wonder if the latest engineering solutions that went into the Quatros are enough to offset the design of the original 5's.

Answer: HELLO ROB, IT IS EXACTLY THE OTHER WAY, SOME OF THE TECHNOLOGY OF THE 5 HAS TRICKLED DOWN TO THE QUATRO. THE DIFFERENCE IN THE BASS IS THE LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE. THE MODEL 5 STRUCTURE IS MUCH MORE INERT, MORE UP-GRADABLE, HIGHER TECH IN EVERY WAY, AND LESS DIFFRACTIVE AROUND THE MID AND HIGH FREQUENCY DRIVERS. THE DIFFERENCE GOES OVER THE MOON WHEN YOU UPGRADE TO 5A'S SOME DAY. THE ONLY THING NEGATIVE IS YOU WON'T HAVE THE WARRANTY. BUY THE USED 5'S ASSUMING YOU CAN INSPECT THEM, LISTEN TO THEM, AND TRANSPORT THEM HOME YOURSELF. SOME MODEL 5'S ARE APPROACHING 10 YEARS OLD AND MAY HAVE BEEN BEAT UP. THIS IS NOT THE LAND OF OZ THE QUATRO'S ARE ONLY $6995.00 AND A AMAZING SPEAKER AT THAT BUT I AM NOT A MIRACLE WORKER.

Francisco (5/4/06): Dear Mr Vandersteen, I am using a pair of 5A's with balanced crossover. I would like to test a single ended set-up. Is it OK to use the BAT single ended to balanced adapters? Regards.

Answer: HELLO FRANCISCO, MR VANDERSTEEN LIVES ACROSS TOWN AND IS 81 YEARS OLD AND WOULD NOT KNOW THE ANSWER TO YOUR QUESTION (MY FATHER). SINGLE ENDED ADAPTERS OF ANY KIND WILL NOT WORK WITH THE M5-HP BAL. EXPENSIVE DAMAGE COULD HAPPEN TO YOUR 7" MID-BASS DRIVER AND OR SUB-WOOFER AMPLIFIER. I WOULD SUGGEST YOU BORROW A M5-HP SINGLE ENDED FROM YOU DEALER TO DO THE TEST. IN YOUR CASE THE BAT IS A BALANCED DESIGN AND WILL ALWAYS SOUND SUBSTANTIALLY BETTER BALANCED.

Dave (5/3/06): I would like to use a pair of VSM-1 speakers for the rear in my 5.1 system (2Ce Signatures f-l/r, VCC-1, V2W). They would be mounted on a brick wall that has a fireplace (brick, marble mantel) 5 feet wide that protrudes 10" from the brick wall. Can they be used in this physical environment? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, IF THERE BACK IS AGAINST THE WALL THE VOICING SHOULD BE FINE. YOU SHOULD CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND MAKE HIM A DRAWING AND GET HIS OPINION. THE DEALERS HAVE INSTALLED MANY OF THESE AND HAVE MORE EXPERIENCE THAN I IN DIFFERENT ROOMS AND SITUATIONS.

Curtis (5/3/06): Richard, are you working on automatic bass adjustment for the room like some other manufactures? I am particularly interested if it some day will be available for the Quatro or 5A.

Answer: HELLO CURTIS, WE RESEARCHED THIS COMPLETELY FOR THE MODEL 5'S BEFORE RELEASING THEM. IT WAS RATHER EASY WITH TODAY'S TECHNOLOGY TO DO BUT THE SOUND WAS NOT AS GOOD. THE PROBLEM WAS THE DSP PROCESSORS WERE UNABLE TO RELIABLY CORRECT FOR .707 OF THE FAULT (IT WOULD TRY AND SUCCEED TO CORRECT TO 0 DB). OUR RESEARCH AND LISTENING REVEALED CORRECTING TO FLAT FREQUENCY IN A ROOM SOUNDED EQ'ED. I BELIEVE THIS IS BECAUSE THE EAR/BRAIN KNOWS THE ROOM IS NOT PERFECT EVEN IF IT IS CORRECTED TO FLAT FREQ RESPONSE. THIS IS WHY THE PROCEDURE WE USE MAPS THE ROOM AND THEN CORRECTS .707 OF THE PROBLEM. THE SOUND IS MUCH BETTER BECAUSE THE ROOM PROBLEMS HAVE BEEN MINIMIZED. THE LISTENER IS MORE COMFORTABLE AS THE CHARACTER OF THE ROOM STILL REMAINS. THIS ALSO ALLOWED THE SIGNAL TO REMAIN ANALOG SOMETHING THAT IS A POSITIVE ON HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCES (VINYL). WE USE THE SAME SYSTEM ON THE NEW QUATRO.

Bill (5/2/06): Richard, I have heard rumors that the wood Quatro's do not sound as good as the normal grille wrap version. Could you elaborate on this? I find them very elegant and am considering them but its a lot money for less performance.

Answer: HELLO BILL, WHEN WE FIRST COVERED THE QUATRO'S WITH VENEER WITH ALL OTHER COMPONENTS THE SAME THEY WERE SLIGHTLY INFERIOR TO THE CLOTH VERSION. THIS IS BECAUSE THERE ARE LARGE REFLECTIVE SURFACES SURROUNDING THE DRIVERS. THIS WAS THE INFORMATION LEAKED TO THE DEALERS EARLY ON AND PROBABLY THE SOURCE OF THE RUMOR. WE REDESIGNED THE GRILL/DRIVER INTERFACE, INSTALLED A PLINTH OF THE SAME MATERIAL (EPOXY COMPOSITE) LIKE THE 5A ON THE BOTTOM, AND THE ALLOY FACE PLATE OF THE 5A ON THE QUATRO TWEETER. ALL OF THIS EXPENSIVE WORK ALLOWED THE QUATRO WOOD A SLIGHT IMPROVEMENT AT ALL FREQUENCIES OVER ITS LOWER COST CLOTH VERSION. THE COST OF ALL THIS $10.700 BUT THEY ARE BEAUTIFUL.

Kyle (5/2/06):I bought a pair of 2c's from my boss. I was in love with them the first time I heard them but I couldn't afford the rest of his system. I need to buy a a/v receiver for these speakers and was wondering if you could give me a name of one that it inexpensive and would do these wonderful speakers justice? Thank you for your time.

Answer: HELLO KYLE, THERE ARE SO MANY WAYS TO GO I WOULD RECOMMEND LOOKING AT THE DEALER LIST ON THIS SITE AND PAY THEM A VISIT. TELL THEM WHAT YOU HAVE AND WHAT YOUR BUDGET IS AND ASK FOR A RECOMMENDATION. ITS MOST IMPORTANT THAT YOU LISTEN TO WHAT THEY SUGGEST AND MAKE SURE YOU LIKE IT. THERE PROBABLY GOING TO RECOMMEND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: NAD, ARCAM, ROTEL, ETC.

Bill (5/2/06): Hello, I'm interested in purchasing 2wq subwoofer. I currently use JMlab micro utopia be, which has limited bass output (3dB@50Hz and 6dB@45hz). Given this limited bass response, would the speaker still integrate well with 2wq subwoofer? From reading Audio-Perfectionist journal, it mentioned that 2wq can only be used with full-range speakers. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE RECOMMENDATION FOR FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKERS IN AUDIO-PERFECTIONIST IS FOR ALL SUB-WOOFERS TO PROPERLY INTEGRATE A SUB YOU NEED ONE OCTAVE ABOVE AND BELOW THE X-OVER POINT. YOU DON'T HAVE TO TAKE MY WORD ON THIS JUST LOOK AT THE MARKET PLACE. IF WHAT YOU WANT TO DO COULD BE DONE CORRECTLY NONE OF US SPEAKER DESIGNERS WOULD BE MAKING LARGE, HEAVY, HARD TO HANDLE FULL-RANGE MONSTERS, WE HAVE WIVES TOO. THE WHOLE WORLD WOULD BE THREE OR FOUR PIECE SYSTEMS WITH SMALL MAIN SPEAKERS AND SUB(S). HAVING SAID THAT YOU CAN WITH MUCH EXPERIMENTATION WITH THE HIGH PASS AND PLACEMENT ADD BASS WITH THE 2WQ. IT, MORE THAN ANY OTHER WOOFER LENDS ITSELF TO THAT KIND OF EXPERIMENTATION BUT DO NOT EXPECT IT TO BE AS LINEAR AS A GOOD FULL-RANGE SPEAKER. I HAVE HEARD EXAMPLES IN SOME ROOMS THAT WORKED QUITE WELL, CERTAINLY BETTER THAN MISSING A WHOLE OCTAVE OF BASE WHICH IS THE FOUNDATION OF MUSIC. ONLY IN AUDIOPHILE WORLD DO LISTENERS CALL THAT MUSIC AND TALK ABOUT TRANSPARENCY BECAUSE THE BASS IS MISSING. SORRY, I KNOW YOU KNOW THAT BECAUSE YOUR TRYING TO ADD A SUB.

Peter (4/26/06): Hello--how do i replace my woofer/driver of my model-1b? again, thank you for your assistance!

Answer: HELLO PETER, LOOK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS. YOU CAN SEND THE WHOLE SPEAKER IN IF YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND THE INSTRUCTIONS. IN BOTH CASES A RMA FORM WILL NEED TO ACCOMPANY THE SHIPMENT.

Carry (4/25/06): Hi Richard, Are you familiar with the spectron remote sense cables, any comment? Just ordered 3a sigs to replace my aging 2cs thanks.

Answer: HELLO CARRY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THEM BUT THAT DOES NOT MATER. IF YOU HAVE AUDITIONED THEM IN YOUR ROOM WITH YOUR EQUIPMENT AND IT WORKED FOR YOU THAT'S MORE IMPORTANT THAN MY OPINION. HAPPY LISTENING.

Eddy (4/24/06): I have a home theatre, the left and right front speakers are 3A Signature, the centre is VCC-1, I am using a home built 15 inch sub woofer. The whole system really rocks and sounds great, however the center speaker vcc-1 sounds a little thin, (insufficient or no oooomph) compared to the rest, my processor has a pre amp output for 2 center channels, would you suggest purchasing another center or have you any other ideas that could help. I am also limited to space, I only have room for 2 VCC-1 centers. Thank you, hope to hear from you shortly.

Answer: HELLO EDDY, I WOULD STAY WITH WHAT YOU HAVE. ADDING A SECOND VCC-1 WOULD MAKE A MESS, ONE WOULD SMEAR THE OTHER IN TIME AND LOWER INTELLIGIBILITY DRAMATICALLY. A VCC-5 WOULD BE THE CORRECT SOLUTION IF YOU CAN FIND THE ROOM.

Bill (4/24/06): I am buying a used pair of 2c speakers. these were originally purchased in 1981 at Take Five Audio in New Haven CT. when asked about serial #s original owner said the numbers were hand written on the outside of the box. the #s were either s or 5 632c & 633c. does this sound legit? did you not put serial #s on the plate in 81? how can I order new socks and is there any easily installed upgrade to the 2c to enhance performance like the ci or ce? I am really looking forward to when they arrive to finally be able to listen to a Vandersteen in my home.? Thank you

Answer: HELLO BILL, IF THEY ARE THE ORIGINAL BOXES THE SN# ON THE BACK OF THE SPEAKER SHOULD MATCH THE NUMBERS ON THE BOX. BULK GRILLE CLOTH CAN BE ORDERED THROUGH ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER IF YOU HAVE THE ABILITY TO INSTALL (SEW) THEM. THERE ARE NO UP-GRADES AVAILABLE EVEN AT THE FACTORY. MAKE SURE YOU AUDITION THEM BEFORE PURCHASE BECAUSE THEY WON'T BE ANYTHING LIKE THE 2CE SIGNATURES AT YOUR DEALER, BUT THEN THE PRICE WON'T BE EITHER.

Rico (4/23/06): Used or new? How about discussing the merits of each? Say, for instance, that a certain prospective buyer absolutely LOVES the sound of the 2CE Sigs. Used pairs (with stands!) can be had for anywhere between 800 and 1200 dollars (plus shipping) which is tempting for those of us who get off on finding a bargain. On the other hand, you and your posse appear to be hell bent on constantly upgrading every speaker in your line, especially the beloved model 2. Besides the obvious warranty and local dealer support issues, can you make a convincing case for buying new? Just thought I'd throw this question at ya, since there just might be a lot of us in this same situation. Sincerely, Rico.

Answer: HELLO RICO, EASY QUESTION, IF ALL THE MONEY YOU HAVE IS $800 TO $1200 DOLLARS YOU WON'T FIND A BETTER DEAL AS LONG AS YOU ARE ABLE TO AUDITION THEM. MANY PEOPLE HAVE PURCHASED SPEAKERS ONLY TO FIND UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS (IE: RADIO SHACK TWEETERS IN A FEW CASES) BY MAIL. AFTER SENDING THEM IN FOR REPLACEMENT PARTS, SHIPPING COST THEY HAVE LOTS OF MONEY TIED UP INTO A PAIR SEVERAL GENERATIONS OLD FOR ALMOST THE SAME MONEY MINUS THE 5 YEAR WARRANTY. SO IF YOUR ON A BUDGET AND CAN AUDITION THEM TO MAKE SURE YOU LIKE THEM IT CAN BE A GOOD DEAL. IT'S A GOOD DEAL FOR US ALSO BECAUSE SOME PEOPLE MAY BE UP-GRADING TO 3'S OR QUATRO'S. IF YOU THINK YOU ARE BUYING WHAT YOU HEARD AT THE DEALER ON THE CHEAP, YOU MAY BE MORE WRONG THAN YOU KNOW. WE DO MAKE SIGNIFICANT IMPROVEMENTS WHEN WE CAN IF IT IS COST EFFECTIVE TO KEEP THEM COMPETITIVE. AGAIN, IF YOU BUY WHAT YOU HEAR NONE OF THIS MATTERS.

John (3/19/06): I am disappointed in the physical connection provided by the standard IEC power plug and by amplifier speaker cable connections. Neutrik powercon power connections and speakon speaker connections look impressive. Any opinion on these compared to IEC and spade connections?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, I'M SORRY YOU ARE DISAPPOINTED ABOUT MY CHOICE OF CONNECTORS ON OUR SPEAKERS. WE HAVE TESTED MANY CONNECTORS INCLUDING THE SPEAKON BUT I HAVE TO ADMIT THAT LOOKS HAD NOTHING TO DO WITH THE TEST. AS STATED IN AN EARLIER RESPONSE, RING TERMINALS WITH A BINDER HEAD SCREW WAS EQUAL TO THE BEST IN THE SHORT TERM AND MUCH BETTER THAN ANY CONNECTOR AFTER ONE YEAR SONICALLY. THE IEC WAS USED JUST BECAUSE IT WORKS AND IT IS READILY AVAILABLE.

(3/16/06): This is not a complaint, and I really don't want to give any more information at this point, but I need one question answered. I have a pair of 5A's, love them. What piece of equipment does a dealer need to use to properly set up a pair of 5A's, to properly set the bass, etc.? Thanks.

Answer: THE PROPER EQUIPMENT IS A RADIO SHACK ANALOG SPL METER AND A TEST DISC WITH WARBLE TONES. USING A REAL TIME ANALYZER AS THE INSTRUCTIONS SAY IS UNSATISFACTORY. ALL 5 & 5A ARE TO BE SET UP BY THE DEALER AND TO MY KNOWLEDGE I HAVE TRAINED ALL WHO HAVE SOLD THEM. IF YOU KNOW DIFFERENT I WOULD LIKE TO KNOW!

Larry (3/16/06): Hi I have a pair of Model 2's I bought in about 1979. You've done some work on them over the years to keep them in good repair. Now, I think I've blown a woofer on one. Do I have to ship one or both speakers back? Can I just remove the raw speaker and send it in to save shipping, or can it be reckoned locally (in Houston) and maintain anything like balance?? Thanks for a wonderful sound

Answer: HELLO LARRY, READ THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE (CLICK HERE) ON HOW TO REMOVE THE PART THAT NEEDS REBUILDING, IF YOU LIKE.

Jacques (3/16/06): Is it correct that there is no input for RCA cables on the Quatro? If it was the case that there was such an input at the speaker end, I could have utilized the high-pass facility on my NAD Masters Series M3 integrated amp. I was informed by the distributor that I will have to buy a filter, so that the low frequencies may be filtered at the speaker end. Does the speaker not have such an internal facility? Is there no way I can still employ the high pass facility on my amp, feeding the internal amp in the speaker directly by means of RCA cable?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THEY ARE THE ONLY WAY TO USE THE QUATRO'S. I WOULD NOT SECOND GUESS YOUR DEALER HE IS GIVING YOU GOOD INFO, IF YOU WOULD ONLY BELIEVE HIM.

Randall (3/16/06): Hello Richard! I have a pair of 2C's that I have enjoyed a lot. What would be the best upgrade path to improve these to 5.1 for movies? should I continue to use the older 2C's for front speakers and fill in the other spots? Or should I buy a new front pair of 2CE's and move the older ones to the rear?

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, YOUR 2C'S CAN BE USED FOR FRONT SPEAKERS. THE MAIN BURDEN IN HT IS ONE THE CENTER, SO USE THE MONEY SAVED ON A VCC-5. NOT MUCH INFORMATION IS IN THE FRONTS EXCEPT BASS AND THE MANDATORY SUB'S WILL HANDLE THAT. YOU COULD THEN USE VSM-1'S MOUNTED 18" ABOVE EAR HEIGHT FOR REAR CHANNEL. PERUSE THE QUESTIONS ON THIS WEB SITE FOR A WEALTH OF INFORMATION AND DON'T FORGET TO AVAIL YOURSELF OF THE DEALER'S KNOWLEDGE.

Dave (3/15/06): Just saw the Quattro-wood pics, quite good looking...but, won't the enclosure inherently "box" the sound? I truly love the open, airy sound of our 3A Sig's and it seems that even the 5s have the upper register drivers essentially hanging in space.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE ANSWER IS......NO. BECAUSE THE SPEAKER IS SO NARROW AND THE DESIGN OF THE GRILLE STRUCTURE (THIS SPEAKER LIKE THE 5 SERIES MUST BE USED WITH THE GRILLE CLOTH IN PLACE) THERE IS VERY LITTLE BAFFLE AROUND THE THREE DRIVERS. WHAT LITTLE BAFFLE THERE IS IS COVERED WITH ACOUSTIC FELT. WE WERE ABLE TO DO THIS BECAUSE THE EIGHT INCH WOOFERS ALLOW THE SPEAKER TO BE ONLY TEN INCHES WIDE AT THE BOTTOM. ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS HAVE THEIR DRIVERS IN BOXES BECAUSE THE REAR WAVE MUST BE CONTAINED OR THE REAR ENERGY WILL CAUSE TIME SMEAR. THEY ARE DESIGNED WITH VERY SMALL FORWARD FACING SURFACES, SO THE SOUND WILL NOT BE RE-RADIATED, ALSO CAUSING TIME SMEAR.

Peter (3/15/06): Hello Richard, this is Peter and I have two questions for you. The first is related to your comments on the pre-amp volume control. You say that with it at the 12:00 position it will be the onset of clipping on most amps. I'm a little surprised that it would occur so soon, especially since some audiophiles think the "sweet spot" for volume controls is 10:00 to 2:00, but more specifically I was wondering if you would say this for my components; 3A Signatures being driven by Audio Research LS25 Mk II and a Classic 60? The second question is my system is in a relatively small room (the speakers see 13'x14'x7' due to a partial wall, though it is actually 17'x14'x7') and some folks on Audiogon and Audio Asylum have said the 3's are too much speaker for the room and 2's would sound better. I'm not sure I agree since I upgraded from 2Ci's, but I was wondering if the Quatro's would be a better choice? I will say I had bass problems, but I solved the worst of them with a single 2Wq. Thanks for your time and keep up the great work!

Answer: HELLO PETER, I SAID THIS WAS THE CASE MOST OF THE TIME. I DO NOT KNOW IF IT IS IN YOUR CASE. THE REASON THIS HAS HAPPENED IS BECAUSE WHEN CD PLAYERS CAME OUT 20 YEARS AGO SOMEONE DECIDED 2 VOLTS AVE OUT WAS GOOD, WHEREAS BEFORE 1 VOLT AVE WAS MOST COMMON. IT'S NOT A BIG CONCERN BECAUSE CD IS NOT HIGH RESOLUTION ANYWAY COMPARED TO THE SWEET SPOT OF A VOLUME CONTROL. NOW I WOULD MAKE SURE MY VINYL WAS IN THE SWEET SPOT! I GUESS SOME OF THE GUYS ON AUDIOGON OR AUDIO ASYLUM ARE GUESSING INSTEAD OF COMMENTING WITH ACTUAL EXPERIENCE, OR THEIR EXPERIENCE WAS MANY YEARS AGO THINKING NOTHING'S CHANGED. I RECEIVED A CALL DAYS AGO FROM AN ENTHUSIASTIC GUY WHO JUST RETIRED HIS 2C'S FOR 2CE SIGNATURES AND WAS SURPRISED THEY WERE SO DIFFERENT, I REMINDED HIM THAT WAS 20 YEARS AGO. NOW YOU WILL BE ABLE TO CORRECT THEM BASED ON YOUR ACTUAL EXPERIENCE. MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT THE COUPLE OF HZ DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE 2'S AND 3'S EITHER WORKS FOR BOTH OR NEITHER. THE QUATRO IS A MUCH HIGHER PERFORMANCE LOUDSPEAKER, BUT THEN AGAIN IT BETTER BE FOR SEVEN GRAND. THEY DO HAVE A SUB-WOOFER WITH ADJUSTABLE BASS WHICH WOULD BE AN ADVANTAGE IN A DIFFICULT ROOM.

Ron (3/14/06): I bought a pair of your 1B speakers back in 1990 and still love them to this day! I use them in conjunction with a NAD 7240 receiver and CD player...but here's my question: I'd love to play along on guitar with my son (on his separate combo amp); right now his amp only has one line-in and we're not planning to upgrade his until next Christmas. If I play mine on low volume do you think it would be possible/all right to run it thru my system? I don't know that much about transparency, impedance, etc. and am looking for some technical guidance. Thanks

Answer: HELLO RON, IF EVERYTHING WENT PERFECT AT NORMAL LEVELS THERE WOULD BE NO PROBLEMS. WITH LIVE MUSIC FEEDBACK IS VERY LIKELY AND WOULD COST A PAIR OF TWEETERS IN A HEART BEAT. I RECOMMEND YOU BUY A RADIO SHACK MIKE MIXER (APX $39.00) TO EXPAND YOUR SONS AMPLIFIER INPUTS. IT'S NOT IF SOMETHING WILL GO WRONG.

Bill (3/13/06): Hi Richard, I have been looking for new speakers for some time. Research and experience over the past years has kept me interested in Time Coherent designs but I have a few questions. The B&W 800 series have stepped baffles, low diffraction, first-order crossovers, aerodynamic magnet behind the midrange to deal with internal diffraction, and other similarities with Vandersteen but why do they sound so different? Your speakers seem to have more in common with my present Meadowlarks, do you agree? Please clarify these issues for me.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WILL ANSWER YOUR LAST QUESTION FIRST. YOUR PRESENT MEADOWLARKS ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SO THEY WOULD BE MORE SIMILAR IN SOUND. THE B&W'S WELL I DON'T KNOW WHERE TO START EXCEPT TO TAKE EACH CLAIM ONE AT A TIME. FIRST, THEY ARE NOT TIME AND PHASE CORRECT THE STEP IN STEREOPHILE WILL SHOW YOU THAT. READ SOME OF THE OTHER ANSWERS ON THIS SITE AS TO HOW TO RECOGNIZE THIS. MANY PARAMETERS MUST BE OPTIMIZED IN A LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN TO PRESERVE WAVEFORM BEING TIME AND PHASE CORRECT IS ONLY ONE OF THEM. IN 1989 WE INTRODUCED THE MODEL 3 WITH A NOVEL MID-RANGE FOR WHICH WE RECEIVED A PATENT. IT INTRODUCED A AERODYNAMIC MAGNET AND CHASSIS (TO DEAL WITH THE BACK WAVE), LINEAR (FLAT) SURROUND IN ORDER TO REDUCE DISTORTION. OUR DESIGNS WERE ALREADY TIME AND PHASE CORRECT AT THE TIME WITH FIRST ORDER X-OVERS. THE B&W'S USE A FIRST ORDER FILTER ONLY ON THE TWEETER AS I UNDERSTAND. SO TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTION, THERE ARE SOME SIMILARITIES ESPECIALLY IN THE MID-RANGE EXCEPT IT IS THE SIZE OF A MID-WOOFER BUT MY CRYSTAL BALL SAYS IT WILL MORPH INTO A MORE APPROPRIATE SIZE SOON. THE SPEAKERS SOUND VERY DIFFERENT BECAUSE THEY DO NOT PRESERVE THE WAVEFORM EVEN THOUGH THEY LIKE OURS ARE LOW IN DIFFRACTION.

Glenn (3/13/06): Richard: I have the model 5As with the Quicksilver V4 amp, and the PSE preamp. I am currently using the audioquest viper interconnects. I am thinking about 'upgrading.' As I follow the signal to the speakers, I notice the wire between your crossover and my amp. What is the (approximate) current audioquest equivalent of that wire? Perhaps this is an unanswerable question, please excuse me if it is. If my upgrade wire is superior, how would I replace the current wire from the crossover to the amp?? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO GLENN, IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR ME TO TELL EXCEPT THAT WE HAVE ALWAYS USED THE TOP OF THE LINE. IT WOULD BE VERY EXPENSIVE TO CHANGE THE PIGTAILS. UNLESS YOU WENT TO THE VERY TOP OF THEIR LINE ON ALL YOUR CABLES YOU WOULD GET VERY LITTLE CHANGE IF ANY FOR YOUR MONEY. YOU MIGHT BORROW YOUR DEALERS' HIGH-PASS WITH THE LATER TAILS AND LISTEN FOR THE DIFFERENCE.

Keith (3/13/06): Richard, I have an old set of Vandersteen 3s. They have had none of the upgrades, I love them now and can only imagine how good they would sound with two upgrades. What would the major differences be between what they sound like now and what they would sound like after the two upgrades. My other question is, i am running a McIntosh system Model 2155 amp, it puts out 150 watts per channel, I know have my speakers on the 4 ohm outputs, but have had people tell me they would sound better with 8 ohms put in them. What is your take on this? My speakers clearly say 4 ohms, but friends have told me that because I am running a McIntosh system that the 8 ohms would work better. Please help me with this dilemma.

Answer: HELLO KEITH, I WOULD GO TO YOUR DEALER AND AUDITION THE 3A SIGNATURE FOR YOURSELF AND SEE WHAT YOU THINK. TRY BOTH THE 4 AND 8 OHM TAPS AND LEAVE IT HOOKED UP TO THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST. EITHER TAP WILL WORK WITHOUT DAMAGE TO YOUR AMPLIFIER OR SPEAKER. I GUESS IF YOU HAVE THIS AS A DILEMMA YOU'RE IN GOOD SHAPE WITH A SIMPLE SOLUTION.

Ian (3/13/06): Richard - I am enjoying my 5As (purchased new before the end of 2005). I enjoy vinyl and well recorded CDs. However my current amplification is now showing its limitations. I am investigating replacement amplification (pre- and power). Although I appreciate that you have been reluctant to publicly discuss preferred amplification, what recent product experience has revealed the true potential of these great speakers? Yes, I will work with my dealer, but your input is particularly of interest.

Answer: HELLO IAN, THE FIRST CHOICE YOU HAVE TO MAKE IS TUBE OR SOLID STATE. MAKE SURE YOUR SPEAKERS ARE WELL BROKEN IN (400 HRS), AND PLACED IN THE ROOM OPTIMALLY, AND THE BASS EQ ADJUSTED. FIND A DEALER THAT IS MAKING GOOD SOUND AND TRY SOME IN HOME DEMO'S. PEOPLE WHO BUY MODEL 5 OR 5A'S TASTES ARE ALL OVER THE MAP, THAT IS THE BEAUTY OF A NEUTRAL SPEAKER. IN MY TRAVELS I HAVE HEARD MANY DIFFERENT COMBO'S, SOME GOOD, SOME SO SO. IT IS INTERESTING HOW HAPPY THE OWNERS WERE WITH SOME SYSTEMS I THOUGHT WERE SO SO. BLONDS AND BRUNETTES. GIVE ME A CALL AND LET ME KNOW WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED AND WHAT YOU THOUGHT. MAYBE I'LL HAVE AN IDEA.

John doe (3/12/06): Do you have any plans to offer the Model 1 or 2 in wood cabinet albeit at a higher price?

Answer: HELLO JOHN DOE, THERE WILL NEVER BE AN ALL WOOD VERSION OF THE 1C OR THE 2CE BECAUSE THEY WOULD RETAIL FOR FOUR TIMES THE PRICE. LOOK AT THE MARKET AND FIND A SPEAKER IN WOOD THAT HAS AS MANY CUSTOM DRIVERS AS THE 2CE SIGNATURE. THAT WOULD BE FOUR CUSTOM DRIVERS WITH VERY HIGH QUALITY X-OVER, EACH SPEAKER CUSTOM TWEAKED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER BY HAND. I KNOW IT DOESN'T EXIST BUT YOUR LOOKING AT SIX TO EIGHT THOUSAND DOLLARS. FOR THAT KIND OF MONEY YOU COULD BUY A QUATRO IN FABRIC OR FOR $10,700 A QUATRO IN BEAUTIFUL WOOD. IT ALL DEPENDS, WHEN ON A BUDGET, WHAT YOU WANT TO SPEND YOUR MONEY ON.

Allen (3/12/06): Hi Richard from a fellow Pa. boy. I'm looking to buy a pair of used 1C's because that's all I can afford. The owner gave me the serial numbers and I was hoping you could tell me how old they are? He is not the original owner so all he and I have to go by are the serial numbers. They are 64902c and 64903c. Thanks Richard and continued success.

Answer: HELLO ALLEN, WE DO NOT RECORD THIS INFORMATION BECAUSE IT COST MONEY AND WOULD NOT MAKE THE SPEAKER SOUND BETTER. PERUSE THE OLDER FAQ'S AND READ THE CAUTION ABOUT BUYING USED. LISTEN TO THEM AND IF YOU LIKE THEM FOR THE MONEY BUY THEM. BECAUSE THERE IS A "C" AFTER THE SN NUMBER THEY ARE 1C'S.

Philipp (3/10/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen! I am writing from Vienna/Austria. I want to say thanks for a great speaker. Listening to a pair of 2ce signature is really stunning. Europe's loudspeakers are all the same. I had a pair of B&W 803D for three months and I was not happy with them. The 2ce signature produces an impressive soundstage. The music just flows I am really satisfied know. It's a pity that Vandersteen is in fact not really present in Europe (especially in Germany and Austria). Another question: do I have a warranty for my knew babies?? My other equipment: Arcam FMJ Amplifier and CD-Player. Thanks for the opportunity to get a pair of great loudspeakers to Austria!

Answer: HELLO PHILIPP, HAPPY TO HEAR YOU ARE PLEASED WITH THE 2CE SIGNATURES. YOUR WARRANTY IS VALID BUT THE WORK MUST BE DONE AT THE FACTORY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT YOU NEED A DRIVER REBUILT, DOWN LOAD THE RMA UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE RETURN IT TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO.

Dave R. (3/09/06): Hi Richard, Thank you for answering my Q on 2/22/2006, re: early 1b's. I am planning to purchase 2ce signatures, a v2w, and use the "early" 1B's as side surround speakers. Now all I need is rear speakers. I would like to use vsm-1 for this purpose, but wall mounting poses a problem. Can they be mounted on stands, and if so what kind? Any other suggestions would be appreciated. Thank you..

Answer: HELLO DAVE R, THE VSM-1 ON WALL'S ARE VOICED WHILE MOUNTED ON A WALL FOR PROPER RESPONSE. IF YOU STAND-MOUNT THE VSM-1 MUST HAVE A FOUR FOOT BY FOUR FOOT BACK BAFFLE OR THE SOUND WILL BE VERY LEAN AND FORWARD. YOU MIGHT USE THE OLD 1B'S ON THE REAR AND THE VSM-1 ON THE SIDE WALL.

Tom (3/09/06): All of the info I've been able to find regarding your subs and how to hook them up refer to the crossover between the pre-amp and receiver etc. I'm trying to find out if they can be hooked up to just a home theater receiver. I currently own a Yamaha htr-5150 and have been thinking about getting the new Denon avr-2807. I currently have 1B's (which I have loved for many years) upfront, but have an opportunity to get 3A's and two 2w's at an unbelievable price. However, I'm worried that I'll need to spend more being able to use them than I will getting them. Any advice would be greatly appreciated. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO TOM, YOU CAN USE THE 2W WITH ANY RECEIVER THAT HAS A PRE OUT AND AMP IN LOOP FOR THE LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT CHANEL'S. BE CAREFUL, MOST A/V RECEIVERS DO NOT HAVE THIS FEATURE THESE DAYS. I AM NOT AWARE OF ANY RECEIVER AT ANY PRICE THAT WILL DRIVE THE MODEL 3A ADEQUATELY. IF MODEL 3 SOMETHING'S ARE IN YOUR FUTURE BUY SEPARATES. CONSULT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND PERUSE OTHER Q&A'S ON THIS SITE. HT

Adrian (3/08/06): I am the proud owner of your Model 2Ce Signatures however in the ever pursuit of improvement I am looking into acquiring the Quatros. However I have a question with the Quatros being that they have an internal amplifier do you recommend a dedicated power outlet for a pair of Quatros? What is the average power consumption of the internal amplifiers?.........Keep on the great work!

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, THEY DO NOT REQUIRE A SEPARATE CIRCUIT. IN FACT AN ARGUMENT CAN BE MADE FOR ONE CIRCUIT MAKING BETTER SOUND. AVERAGE POWER CONSUMPTION DEPENDS ON THE SIGNAL BUT WILL NOT EXCEED 250 WATTS PER CHANNEL.

Alan (3/08/06): My cat has been using my 2CE speakers as a climbing/scratching post! How can I replace the cloth covers? Alan

Answer: HELLO ALAN, REMOVING THE CLOTH ON THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE IS EASY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE. REMOVING THE TOP FOR CLOTH REPLACEMENT IS A DIFFERENT STORY AND QUITE DIFFICULT BUT YOU CAN TRY. YOU CAN ORDER CLOTH FROM YOUR DEALER OR SEND THEM IN AND WE WILL. COST IS $60.00 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT, NOT A LOT CONSIDERING THEY WILL LOOK LIKE NEW AFTER SUCH ABUSE.

Jeff (3/08/06): I have been a believer and faithful listener of Vandersteens for about 12 years now. My wife has continued to beat me up with the ugliness of wires and equipment. I have been in pain trying to find a proper home theater 'closet' for the speakers (with the 61" DLP TV in the center, my other gear is in a closet behind the wall). I have 3s for the fronts, VCC5 center, VSM for surrounds and 4 2Ws attached to 3s and VSMs. Having a lot of wood or other 'structure' around would go against how I understand the philosophy of "openness" and be degrading to the sound. After many thoughts and plans, I have finally come up with one I think is worthy. I built 'frames' out of 2X2's. I stretched acoustic fabric cloth over these frames. The frames are on 3 sides with the back side against a wall. The 3's are positioned so no wood framing is in front of the speaker driver. It now looks pretty good and doesn't seem to add any unwanted color to the sound. Here's my two questions. Do you think this is a good set up and should I remove the speaker socks (since they are now behind an 'enclosure') for better sound. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, IF IT SOUNDS GOOD IT IS A GOOD SET UP. MANY HAVE SET UPS LIKE THAT AND I HAVE HEARD SEVERAL THAT SOUNDED VERY GOOD. THE SPEAKER CLOTH IS SO TRANSPARENT I WOULD NOT REMOVE IT. HOPEFULLY YOU SELECTED CLOTH FOR YOUR ENCLOSURE THAT IS EQUALLY TRANSPARENT. HAPPY LISTENING.

Michael (3/08/06): Hi Richard, I know this has been answered in one form or another but I need to ask. I have a room that is 10 x 12 x 9. In the next year or so, I will probably move to the other room which will be 12 x 15 x 9. I was thinking of the 3a sigs but I'm worried that it is too big for the room. I could consider the 2ce sigs but I'm worried that I won't have the refinement that comes with the 3a's. My room is treated with Abfussors/traps. My preamp is an Aesthetix Calypso and my power amp is BAT VK-75. Which would you recommend?

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, 3A SIG'S. READ SOME OF THE OTHER Q&A ABOUT WHAT TO DO IF YOU HAVE TOO MUCH BASS.

Havish (3/07/06): I have 2Ce signatures for the fronts, VCC-1 for the center channel, VSM-1s for the rears, and a V2W subwoofer connected to the preamp subwoofer output of a Rotel RSX-1067 receiver. I have read on this page and elsewhere that you are concerned about the sounds generated by movies damaging the main speakers which are the 2Ce signatures in my case. Are you worried about the LFE channel being re-directed to the main speakers? If so, with a V2W to deal with the LFE (subwoofer set to "yes"), shouldn't it be ok to set the front speakers to large?? On the other hand, if you are concerned about the effects encoded on the channels intended for the front speakers themselves, it would be better to set the front speakers to small? So, which setting would you recommend when a V2W subwoofer is present in the system? Many thanks for taking the time to answer the questions on this page. The answers definitely help understanding many subtleties.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, YOU ARE CORRECT THE LFE IS HANDLED BY THE V2W SO THAT INFORMATION IS NOT A PROBLEM. WHAT COULD BE A PROBLEM IS THE BASS INFORMATION IN THE LEFT AND RIGHT CHANNEL. SELECTING SMALL WILL SOLVE THE PROBLEM BUT AT THE EXPENSE OF FIDELITY. IF YOUR RECEIVER HAS PRE OUT AND AMP IN JACKS ON THE REAR, INSTALLING A X-2 AT 20HZ IN THE LOOP WILL ROLL OFF THE 2CE SIGS AT A 6DB PER OCTAVE RATE. THIS IS GOOD AND WILL PROTECT THE SPEAKERS. SELECTING SMALL WILL INSTALL A 12DB PER OCTAVE SLOPE AT WHAT EVER FREQUENCY IS SELECTED, THIS WILL CAUSE A PINCHED SOUND WITH HARSHNESS IN THE MIDS (LIKE ALL HIGH ORDER FILTERS). NOT GOOD. CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER ON HOW TO DO THIS OR IF THE RECEIVER WILL NOT ACCOMMODATE THIS, JUST RUN THEM LARGE AND WATCH THE LEVELS.

Ron (3/06/06): Richard, I have a question & a request. Question - I am using 2CI's for the main & VCC-1 for center, no sub at this time, NHT for surround. My processor is set for large, small, small & none. Is this acceptable or should I change it?? Request - The VCC-1 I am using is a loaner, Audio Connection ordered a new one for me today. I made a mistake and asked for the covering to be black. My wife says the 2CI's are brown. Can you please make sure the VCC-1 is sent with the brown covering?? Many thanks.

Answer: HELLO RON, SOUNDS LIKE YOU HAVE THINGS SET UP PROPERLY BUT I WOULD RECOMMEND A SUB-WOOFER SOON. YOUR 2CI'S ARE NOT GOING TO LAST LONG PLAYING THE BASS EFFECTS THAT ARE ON SOME MOVIES. PERUSE THE OTHER FAQ'S ON THIS SITE FOR RELATED SUBJECTS OR ASK YOUR DEALER. THIS FAQ SECTION IS NOT INTENDED TO REPLACE DEALER COMMUNICATION ABOUT AN ORDER, CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER. I DO THIS AT HOME IN THE EVENING FOR QUESTIONS THAT ARE OF BROAD INTEREST TO MANY READERS. OTHER QUESTIONS SHOULD BE ASKED OF THE DEALER OR CALL TECH AT VANDERSTEEN (559-582-0324).

Jim (3/06/06): I have the 2Ce Signatures and the Vandy subwoofer. My tube preamp inverts polarity. When I switch the speaker cables at the amplifier posts (red to black and black to red), do I switch the cables to the subwoofer also? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JIM, YES YOU WOULD OR THE SUB-WOOFER WOULD BE OUT OF PHASE.

Jacques (3/05/06): Can the Quatro Signature be positioned against the wall as you seem to indicate in the photo in your Product Information section? If not, I suppose the usual minimum of 1 foot from the wall will be correct? Also, what does the subtitle "Signature" indicate? what does it represent?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, YOU CAN PUT THEM ANYWHERE YOU THINK THEY SOUND GOOD IN YOU ROOM. SIGNATURE MEANS THAT EACH PAIR IS TWEAKED IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER.

David (3/04/06): I just bought a pair of 3's and the cloth shows its age. Do you sell replacement cloth or what is the cost for the factory to do it?

Answer: HELLO DAVID M, YOU CAN GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND BUY BULK CLOTH BUT IT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO DO. CLOTH REPLACEMENT IS PART OF EVERY UP-GRADE OR YOU CAN SEND IT IN TO US. THE COST IS $60.00 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT TO AND FROM THE FACTORY.

Bob (3/03/06): I have two pair of speakers, which I am very happy with. I have 41422Ci and 41423Ci in the front, and 40650 and 40651 in the rear. There is also a Snell Center Channel and Paradigm Subs. I purchased the entire system used, from a friend. I don't really know how old they are, but am under the impression they were all purchased about the same time. Can you tell me which Center Channel of yours, I could match to these speakers? I am trying to build a matched set. Power is provided by B&K Amps and Tuner. The sound now is awsome, but I believe the "matching" center would make it better. You can be proud of your fine product. Thanks, for the help, Bob K.

Answer: HELLO BOB K, YOU ARE CORRECT, HAVING ALL 5 CHANNELS MATCHED WILL BE MUCH BETTER. IN A SYSTEM BASED ON MODEL TWO'S THE VCC-5 OR THE NOT YET AVAILABLE VCC-2 WILL BE THE BEST MATCH. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO SKEW YOUR INVESTMENT TOWARDS THE CENTER AND SUBS BECAUSE MUCH IS EXPECTED OF THEM IN H.T. PERUSE THE FAQ SECTION AND OTHER INFORMATION AVAILABLE THROUGHOUT THIS WEB SITE FOR FURTHER HELP. YOUR B&K EQUIPMENT WILL WORK WELL.

David (3/03/06):  One of my 2WQs is dead. The repair instructions tell me to remove the amplifier and return it to you for examination and repair. Before shipping it, is there any troubleshooting I should try? I have verified by checking outlets, amplifiers and wires that the amp of the sub is the source of the problem. Is the quality of speaker wire as important for the subs as it is for the main speakers? I assume it is not. What wire works best for the 2WQ? I have 3A Sigs and a pair of 2WQs and I am very pleased with the sound. You make a fabulous product, that unlike most things on the market, is actually worth its cost. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE TESTS YOU HAVE ALREADY ACCOMPLISHED ARE ALL THERE IS. IF THE SUBWOOFER HAS BEEN UNPLUGGED FOR 5 MIN OR SO IT SHOULD MAKE A POP WHEN YOU PLUG IT BACK IN. IF IT DOES NOT POP IT NEEDS SERVICE. INSIDE THERE IS A RESET-ABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, DO NOT RESET IT. MAKE A DRAWING OF THE WIRING HARNESS AND PUT IT AND THE SCREWS INTO THE OPENING THE AMPLIFIER WAS IN. FILL OUT THE RMA AND SEND IT TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. REBUILD COST IS $160.00 IF NO CURRENT WARRANTY IS ON FILE. THE WIRE PROVIDED SHOULD BE ADEQUATE. THERE HAVE BEEN REPORTS THAT USING THE SAME WIRE AS THE SPEAKERS ARE HOOKED UP WITH GIVES BETTER PERFORMANCE. I HAVE BEEN UNABLE TO VERIFY THAT IN A DOUBLE BLIND TEST, THE MIND CAN PLAY TRICKS. IF YOU FIND DIFFERENT RESULTS IN A BLIND COMPARISON I WOULD LIKE TO HEAR ABOUT IT.

Daryl (3/02/06): Hi. I am interested in replacing the top and bottom plate of my 2C's. Currently, I have oak veneer and will replace them with a cherry or mahogany. Can you tell me if the center grill cloth in the top plate is removable so I can use it in the new plate that I build? Failing that, can I buy the cloth? I am a good woodworker. Also, are the plates for the 2C available for purchase from Vandersteen in other veneers? Thanks. -- Daryl

Answer: HELLO DARYL, THE ONLY WAY TO CHANGE THE TOP AND BOTTOM IS AT THE FACTORY. WE CAN INSTALL ANY OF OUR STANDARD AND OPTIONAL FINISHES FOR APPROXIMATELY $240.00. THIS WOULD MAKE THEM LOOK LIKE A BRAND NEW PAIR, NOT TO MANY SPEAKERS CAN BE REFURBISHED PERFECTLY FOR THAT KIND OF MONEY. I WOULD NOT RECOMMEND YOU INVEST THAT AMOUNT INTO A PAIR OF SPEAKERS THAT ARE 20 YEARS OLD. PUT THAT MONEY TOWARDS A NEWER PAIR OF 2CE'S. EVEN THE 2CI'S ARE NOW 15 YEARS OLD AND BEHIND TODAY'S TECHNOLOGY.

Ron (3/01/06): Good morning Richard. I have the opportunity to purchase a VCC-1 to match up with my 2CI's. The serial numbers for the VCC-1's I am considering are 1452 & 9296. Can you tell me the production date of each? Are there any changes between the two? I see info that says you now have a VCC-2. Where can I locate info on this version? Once again, thank you.

Answer: HELLO RON, WHEN BUYING USED SPEAKERS I CAN'T EMPHASIZE ENOUGH HOW IMPORTANT IS TO BUY ONE YOU CAN AUDITION. IF YOU WERE OUR TECH FOR REPAIRS YOU WOULD KNOW WHAT I MEAN. WE SEE IMPROPER SUBSTITUTION OF PARTS INCLUDING DRIVERS, SPEAKERS THAT HAVE SEVERE HEAT DAMAGE TO X-OVER PARTS THAT WERE NOT REPAIRED DURING A FIELD DRIVER SWAP, ETC. IF YOU WERE TO AUDITION SUCH A SPEAKER AND LIKED WHAT YOU HEARD, THAT'S OK. YOU PAY THE GUY WHAT HE'S ASKING AND YOU NEVER KNOW THE DIFFERENCE. IF HOWEVER YOU ARE FAMILIAR BECAUSE OF A VISIT TO A VANDERSTEEN DEALER THAT SCENARIO IS UNLIKELY TO HAPPEN, YOU WILL KNOW WHAT IT SHOULD DO. WE DO NOT LOG MANUFACTURE DATES, ALL WE CAN DO IS ESTIMATE. I ESTIMATE A 10 YEAR DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE TWO WHICH WOULD INVOLVE MANY CHANGES THAT ARE NOT UP-GRADABLE. BUYING OUR PRODUCTS USED YOU SHOULD DO WISELY BY AUDITIONING THEM. THE VCC-2 IS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL JUNE OR SO KEEP IN TOUCH WITH YOUR DEALER.

David (3/10/06): Exactly what are "O Lugs"? I can't find anything by that name in hardware stores or online. I have an idea of what they are, but I want to be sure I'm using what you are recommending. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, ALSO CALLED "RING LUGS" BE SURE TO CRIMP FIRST AND THEN SOLDER FROM THE RING SIDE. REMOVE SOLDER AND HEAT THE SECOND SOLDER FLOWS TO PREVENT SOLDER FROM WICKING PAST THE CRIMP AND INTO THE WIRE. APPLY HEAT ON THE RING END

(2/28/06): I bought a used pair of Vandersteen model 1 speakers, sound is superb, but I cant seem to find much info on this model, is it the same as the model 1C...your feedback is much appreciated

Answer: THE ONLY THING COMMON BETWEEN THE 1B AND 1C ARE THEIR EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND BASIC DESIGN. THE WOOFER, TWEETER, X-OVER, AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE ARE TOTALLY DIFFERENT. THE MODEL 1B WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION MANY YEARS AGO BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER. THAT'S WHY THERE IS NO INFORMATION. SET-UP AND HOOKUP ARE BASICALLY THE SAME AS THE 1C'S SO YOU COULD GET A COPY OF THE 1C MANUAL. ALL THE PARTS NECESSARY TO REPAIR ANY ASPECT OF YOUR 1B'S OR ANY SPEAKER WE HAVE EVER MADE IS STILL AVAILABLE.

Stan (2/27/06): I took delivery of my new Kawazinga finish 5A's last week. First, let me say that the finish is absolutely jaw dropping beautiful...much more so than the sample on your website. I am a musician and have been interested in good sound for many years. The 5A's have replaced "very good" top of the range British speakers driven by all Ayre top of the line electronics - but what I hear in the 5A's is reality. Sure the lows go lower, the highs, higher, but I'm hearing Paul Simon sing right there between the speakers - a holographic image with his words so clearly sung that I can hear the poetry with ease. What makes that spookily "real" quality? It's not the frequency response, the power handling, etc... the stuff that specs are made of?

Answer: HELLO STAN, I AM PLEASED YOU ARE HAPPY WITH YOUR NEW 5A'S, THEY WILL GIVE YOU MANY YEARS OF ENJOYMENT AND ARE A TRUE LIFELONG INVESTMENT. WHO KNOWS WHAT TECHNOLOGY WILL COME DOWN THE PIKE. IMAGINE THE MANY PEOPLE WHO INVESTED IN MODEL 5'S NOW 10 YEARS AGO, SENDING THEM IN FOR AN UP-GRADE TOO 5A'S AND EXPERIENCING WHAT YOU ARE. AS A BONUS HAVING THEIR INVESTMENT PROTECTED BY NOT HAVING TO SELL THEM AT HALF COST AND STARTING ALL OVER. I BELIEVE THAT WAVEFORM PRESERVATION IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PARAMETER IN LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN. MANY PARAMETERS ARE IMPORTANT AND A GOOD DESIGN WILL DO WELL AT ALL OF THEM. THAT "SPOOKILY REAL" EFFECT IS THE OUTCOME OF REPLICATING WHAT THE AMPLIFIER PASSED ON TO THE SPEAKER AS PERFECTLY AS POSSIBLE.

Tom (2/27/06): What center channel speaker will work best with Vandersteen 2Cs?

Answer: HELLO TOM, THE VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5. READ THROUGH SOME OF THE POSTS ON THIS SITE FOR MORE INFORMATION.

Ray (2/27/06): Hi Richard, I have the vaunted model 5 and would like to set the room compensation. I purchased the Stereophile cd and the Radio Shack Spl meter. What is the proper procedure for setting the room compensation using the warble tones and the Radio Shack meter? or could I purchase this information because my manual only refers to RTA procedure. Thank you.....

Answer: HELLO RAY, THE SHORT SECTION AFTER THE RTA SECTION IN THE MANUAL IS WHAT YOU ARE LOOKING FOR. GETTING THIS RIGHT IS SO IMPORTANT I WOULD HIRE A VANDERSTEEN DEALER WITH FACTORY TRAINING TO DO IT THE FIRST TIME. IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE YOU WILL GET BETTER PERFORMANCE LEAVING THE 11 BANDS SET FLAT JUST LIKE ANY REGULAR SPEAKER WOULD BE. THE PROCEDURE OUTLINED IN THE MANUAL WITH AN RTA IS NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE RESULT IS NOT GOOD. CALL ME AND I CAN GIVE YOU THE NAMES OF DEALERS WHO HAVE FACTORY TRAINING IN YOUR AREA.

Daniel (2/27/06): Hi Mr. Vandersteen. If I have wood floors but can't afford to spend $80 or so on these "soft shoe" things for the floor spikes on your speaker stands, are there any alternatives? Perhaps hex bolts? Any suggestions would be really appreciated.

Answer: HELLO DANIEL, I GUESS IT DEPENDS ON HOW IMPORTANT THE FLOOR FINISH IS. CARRIAGE BOLTS ARE NOT POINTED BUT WILL SCUFF THE FLOOR. PICK YOUR POISON.

Chi (2/27/06): I have a pair of 1Cs (3 years old) and have tried using the treble control behind to adjust for some room differences. However, moving the dial does not result in much audible change to the sound and I can hear a scratchy sound emanating from the speakers when I adjust the dial. Are the controls damaged?

Answer: HELLO CHI, THE CONTROL ON THE REAR OF YOUR IC'S ADJUST ONLY +-2DB, THIS IS VERY SUBTLE. IT IS NORMAL FOR THE CONTROL TO MAKE A STATIC NOISE BUT ONLY WHILE TURNING IT. ONCE A SETTING IS SETTLED ON AND THE CONTROL IS SET THE STATIC SHOULD CEASE.

Andrew (2/25/06): I own a pair of 2Cs and both of the 8' drivers have dry rot and the 4's are starting to wear out also. Do you recommend sending in just the drivers or is it time to send the speakers themselves and have them checked out?

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, IF THE SPEAKERS HAVE NEVER BEEN OVER POWERED AND THE X-OVER'S DAMAGED I WOULD SEND IN THE DRIVERS ONLY. THIS SAVES A LOT OF FREIGHT COSTS. REBUILD COST WOULD BE APX $250.00 FOR ALL FOUR DRIVERS.

Paul (2/24/06): I recently purchased a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce Signature loudspeakers which under ideal conditions are very flat in their response. Imagine my surprise when I found very lumpy frequency response in the bass! Actually I was not shocked as my Snells also sounded thin in the room since we moved in August of 2004. The main problem is a big hole in the bass from about 45 to 70Hz- it's down about 10dB at 50Hz. Response throughout this range is 70dB or less whereas the reference level for my tests was more like 78dB. I am trained in physics and electrical engineering and I understand the nature of standing waves. I have moved the speakers around a bit but to little avail. I wonder whether sound absorbers could actually boost bass response significantly. Of course if these are standing waves then anything which disturbs the resonant cavity geometry could be effective. What do you suggest? FYI the room is approximately 13x17 feet.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, ASSUMING YOU ARE MEASURING WITH WARBLE TONES ANY PROPERLY DESIGNED LOUDSPEAKER WILL MEASURE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME IN THAT LOCATION IN THE ROOM. PLACEMENT CHANGES MAY HELP BUT CAN ONLY BE FOUND BY EXPERIMENTING. CHECK OUT THE MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE AND YOU WILL SEE VERY FEW THAT ARE +-5BD AT ANY FREQUENCY ANECHOIC. WHAT I AM TRYING TO SAY IS THAT IS NOT THAT BAD AND USUALLY IS CAUSED BY A HEMHOLZ RESONANCE DOWN A DUCT OR HALL, MAYBE EVEN OUTSIDE THE ROOM BUT CONNECTED. I HAVE HAD NO SUCCESS WITH ABSORBERS BECAUSE YOU WOULD NEED TO ABSORB EVERY THING AROUND THE HOLE, KILLING THE DYNAMICS WHICH IS A BIG PROBLEM. ABSORBERS CAN WORK WHEN THE ROOM DIMENSIONS CAUSE A LARGE PEAK. TRY PLACEMENT CHANGES AND IF THAT DOESN'T WORK YOU COULD GET A 2WQ AND PLACE IT IN THE CORNER GIVING YOU MORE FLEXIBILITY. LAST OPTION LOOK INTO THE QUATRO IT HAS ADJUSTABLE BASS, TALK TO YOUR DEALER AND ASK FOR A DEMO.

Garry (2/23/06): What are your thoughts on class D amps and their use with Vandersteen speakers?

Answer: HELLO GARRY, MY THOUGHTS ARE IF YOU LIKE'M BUY EM. MY SYSTEM USES HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCES (VINYL LP'S) SO I AM NOT PREPARED TO HAVE ANY DIGITAL PROCESSING YET IN MY ANALOG CHAIN.

Russ (2/23/06): Richard- I'm having two sets of speaker cables made up (to biwire) a pair of 3A Signatures. The 3As will be coming in a week or two. Would you please tell me the optimum size spades for the speaker connections. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO RUSS, WE HAVE BEEN USING THE BARRIER STRIP ON YOUR SPEAKERS FOR 15 YEARS. ASK THE WIRE COMPANY WHAT THEY RECOMMEND AND IF THEY DON'T KNOW TRY A NEW WIRE COMPANY. USE THE FAQ SECTION FOR OTHER WIRE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.

Kenn (2/22/06): Richard, I submitted a question yesterday (re:VCC sig. v. VCC-1 and my models 1, 2c, & 3A s) and since have had time to explore your FAQ site. I'm beginning to think that piece mealing together a HT system, from even good used sources, isn't the best idea given the advances you've made over the years. After seeing your site I also am questioning my Onkyo TX-SR 803 receiver for your speakers. I'm overwhelmed by the amount of AV info "out there" and the various forums reveal a variety of informed opinion. I'm not an audiophile nor will I ever be one (I think!) but I do appreciate good sound - music and movies. I know I'm going with Vandersteen speakers to make a HT system. This will probably be my one and only system for evermore. I know you have a HT system but I have the sense that putting together something along the lines of new 3As, VCC sig., 2VW would be better for my 17 x 35 room. What are your thoughts? P.S. I know this is a loaded question and that there are many considerations. I don't have big bucks but I value "value" that's why I'm going with Vandersteen. Thanks, Kenn (if you wanted to comment on receivers and such for your speakers, it wouldn't hurt my feelings any!)

Answer: HELLO KENN, GOOD TO HEAR YOU ARE DOING YOUR RESEARCH. I UNDERSTAND WANTING TO SAVE MONEY BUT HALF PRICE ON THE WRONG PIECE IS MORE EXPENSIVE THAN FULL PRICE ON THE RIGHT COMPONENT WITH EXPERT SET-UP. YOU COULD GET THE BASIC SYSTEM WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND FILL-IN WITH GOOD PERSONALLY AUDITIONED AND SEEN USED COMPONENTS. GOOD LUCK.

Dave (2/22/06): Hi, I have a pair of Model 1's(?)...Serial #'s:3166, 3167. The "Operating Instruction" that came with the pair, refer to them as "Model 1B". My questions: 1) - What model are they?  2) - Can I use the Model 1C bases with these speakers?? Thank you...

Answer: HELLO DAVE R, YOU HAVE EARLY 1B, THERE NEVER WAS A MODEL ONE SOLD THROUGH DEALERS. THE 1C BASE WILL WORK IF YOU ARE HANDY ENOUGH TO INSTALL YOUR OWN T-NUTS INTO THE BOTTOM OF THE 1B SPEAKER.

(2/22/06): I have an HT setup using a pair of VSMs as fronts with stereo subs? (2Ws), a VCC-1 center, and a pair of VSMs for the surround (the surround VSMs are mated to a third 2W). Since I'm running stereo subs upfront, I have a pair of inputs available on the subs. Can I use those available inputs to connect the VCC-1 as well?... thereby giving me deep base for all 5 channels? If so, should I connect the VCC-1 to both subs (which I believe will exaggerate the bass) or just one sub? Will I loose some bass clarity because the center channel bass is superimposed with the left and/or right front channel bass? I would love a VCC-5, but I need save a bit more before I can afford one.

Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, WHAT YOU WANT I BELIEVE IS A MORE DYNAMIC, LOWER DISTORTION CENTER CHANNEL. ADDING MORE BASS USUALLY DECREASES INTELLIGIBILITY BUT YOU CAN TRY IT SEE WHAT "YOU" THINK. THE NEW VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5 ARE WHAT YOU WANT.

Jacques (2/21/06): Jacques (2/22/06) I was told in South Africa that my Quatros will be delivered within 5 weeks, so I expected them to arrive by about 22, February 2006. Now, suddenly, yesterday (21 February) I was told that I will have to wait another 4 weeks (!!??). I don't know all the facts behind the scenes, except that the Distributor in South Africa suddenly decided that he also wants a pair of Quatros for his showroom. He indicated that it was VANDERSTEEN AUDIO who decided to hold back my Quatros and combine the two orders. My full deposit was paid at the beginning of the whole period involved. Please keep in mind that some people have waited for 40 years to own speakers of this stature - so it is traumatic to overcome the time-lag, prolonged by such rather cynical action. I suppose there can be a cost saving in combining the orders - would that saving be passed on to the buyer? I put these points to you in the interests of making VANDERSTEEN the finest brand in the world, if it is not precisely that already.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, THE REASON FOR THE DELAY HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH YOUR DEALER DECIDING TO HAVE A PAIR FOR HIMSELF. THE DELAY IS BECAUSE THE 220 VOLT VERSION OF THE AMPLIFIER WAS NOT FINISHED. YOUR DEALER WAS NOT INTERESTED IN THE 120 VOLT VERSION WITH STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPPED TO OTHER FOREIGN MARKETS WHERE THE CUSTOMER WAS IN A BIGGER HURRY. SHIPMENTS OF THIS SIZE ARE PRICED BY THE POUND OR KILO SO WOULD HAVE BEEN THE SAME. SORRY FOR THE DELAY.

Kenn (2/21/06): I have Model 1s, am getting 2Cs, and 3As soon so that I can create a home theater system in my basement. I'm not sure if I need more than a VCC-1 center speaker. I thought the VCC sig might be overkill. What do you think? Also, I thought I'd get the V2W for the sub. Thanks, for your help, Kenn

Answer: HELLO KENN, THE VCC-1 SIGNATURE HAS BEEN DISCONTINUED AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED WITH MODEL 3'S. THE NEW VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5 ARE THE ONLY CENTERS DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR YOUR PROPOSED SYSTEM. THE VCC-2 WILL BE AVAILABLE JUNE 06.

John (2/20/06): Richard, Thank you for 16 years of outstanding audio enjoyment from my current set of speakers. The downside is that I have no idea what they are. The back label says Model 2. Serial #s are 53150Ci and 53151. I'd guess they are Model 2Ci's, but the serial # is a little hard to read and I can't tell if the "i" is a blemish or real. Is there anyway you can tell me what I own? Thanks! John

Answer: HELLO JOHN, YOU ARE CORRECT THEY ARE 2Ci'S.

Joe (2/20/06): I recently acquired a used pair of 5's through my son, Sam, who works at Optimal Enchantment in Santa Monica. He suggested I ask you the following question. The serial numbers on my speakers are 2006 and 2007. I noticed that your web site indicates that these speakers require $1500 more to upgrade to 5A's then some other serial numbers. I suspect that means that changes were made to the 5 that makes the upgrade less expensive. Did these changes result in any sonic improvements? If so, can I make those changes to my 5s, and would it be worth it?? Also, I'd like to ask a somewhat more specialized question. My left ear is more highly sensitive to high frequencies than normal, and most speakers tend to sound a bit bright to me. Also, my listening room is a bit on the bright side, though I have treated it a fair amount. On my previous speakers, Spendor SP 100s and before that Kef 105.2s, I installed an L-pad on the tweeter by putting resistors in parallel and in series with it to provide the same resistance to the crossover network, but drop the output a bit. I found 3 dB was just about right. In the case of the Kefs, I did it the same time as I re-built the crossovers, replacing all the old electrolytic caps with polypropylene ones. I know that some of your speakers do have tweeter level adjusters. Has anyone ever asked to have one installed on the 5? It looks like just the opposite was requested; the rear-firing tweeter for adding treble. I have toed in the speakers a bit, and that helped a lot. Of course a lot of the problem is with CDs that are simply too bright in themselves and the (to me) silly notion that tone controls, very useful for correcting poorly balanced recordings, are forbidden. Actually, for most vinyl and many CDs and SACDs, the problem is minimal, but I was curious. I'm sorry to take up so much of your time, but I'm quite excited to have these speakers and want to get the best out of them. Santa Cruz, California.

Answer: HELLO JOE, I VISITED OPTIMAL ENCHANTMENT JUST YESTERDAY, HAD A GOOD TIME WITH RANDY AND SAM. YOUR OBSERVATION IS CORRECT ABOUT CHANGES OCCURRING DURING THE SEVEN YEARS THE FIVES WERE IN PRODUCTION AND THEY WERE DEFINITELY AUDIBLE OR I WOULD NOT HAVE SPENT THE CUSTOMERS MONEY. UNFORTUNATELY IT WOULD BE FAR TOO EXPENSIVE TO DO A PARTIAL UPGRADE FOR THE GAIN RECEIVED. WHEN THE TIME COMES TO UPGRADE THE SPEAKERS TO 5A'S ALL WILL BE BROUGHT CURRENT. IN THE MEAN TIME ENJOY THE MODEL 5'S ALTHOUGH NOT A 5A, IT IS ONE INCREDIBLE SPEAKER. IN MY OPINION YOU SHOULD DO NOTHING ABOUT THE DIFFERENCES IN YOUR EARS. ALL OF US, IF WE MEASURED HAVE ABOUT 3 TO 6 DB LESS HIGH FREQUENCY ABILITY IN OUR LEFT EAR AND IN THE UK IT IS THE RIGHT EAR. DRIVING THE CAR WITH THE WINDOWS DOWN A LIFE TIME CONTRIBUTES TO THIS. FOR SOME REASON YOURS ARE THE OPPOSITE BUT OUR REFERENCE IS STILL EVERY DAY SONIC EXPERIENCES HEARD WITH THOSE SAME EARS. WHEN IT COMES TO BRINGING THE TONE CONTROLS BACK I AGREE 100% AND BELIEVE THE MORE MUSIC ORIENTATED HIGH END MANUFACTURES (NOT NECESSARILY THE SAME) WILL DO SO SOONER THAN LATER (PSE HL-1 ALREADY DOES BUT IS NO LONGER AVAILABLE) FOR THE REASONS YOU MENTION IN YOUR QUESTION. I WOULD NOT INSTALL THIS INTO A SPEAKER BECAUSE IT WOULD BE TOO DIFFICULT TO DEFEAT ON THOSE RECORDINGS NOT NEEDING IT. YOU MIGHT CONSIDER BUILDING A TONE CONTROL CIRCUIT THAT WOULD GO INTO THE TAPE MONITOR LOOP. AS TO THE COMMENT ABOUT MOST SPEAKERS SOUNDING TOO BRIGHT, MOST ARE. CHECK OUT THE MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE MAGAZINE.

Stephen (2/19/06): What can be wrong with one of my Series 2 speakers? The tweeter is not working, also the bass unit is very muffled with no real response to music. I understand that there are no Vandersteen dealers in the UK and hope that you may be able to assist me in finding the fault and helping me to repair the speaker. Also I need a cover, do you sell them ? Many thanks,

Answer: HELLO STEPHEN, THIS QUESTION IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM. PLEASE READ THE REPAIR SECTION UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE OF THIS WEB SITE. IF THE INFORMATION THERE IS NOT FAMILIAR SOUNDING AND OF NO ASSISTANCE TO YOU, IT WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE TO TRAIN YOU BY E-MAIL TO EFFECT A PROPER REPAIR. YOU HAVE TWO OPTIONS AS I SEE IT 1) FIND A GOOD LOCAL REPAIR SHOP THAT KNOWS WHAT THEY ARE DOING BY FRIENDS REFERRAL. 2) DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND THEM TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. THIS MAY SEEM LIKE A EXTREME OPTION BUT WE HAVE THE PARTS, REPAIRS ARE USUALLY LESS THAN $150.00 U.S. FOR ANY NORMAL PROBLEM. ON SPEAKERS THIS OLD WE DO NOT HAVE PARTS BUT WE ARE ABLE TO REBUILD ALL SPEAKERS WE HAVE EVER MADE (30 YEARS). A GOOD REPAIR SHOP CAN DIAGNOSE THE PROBLEM REMOVE THE DAMAGED DRIVERS AND SEND THEM FOR REBUILD AND ALL IS WELL. IF HOWEVER THE X-OVER IS DAMAGED BUY EXCESSIVE POWER OR LIGHTNING STRIKE IT IS NOT REMOVABLE PLUS MANY OF THE PART VALUES ARE COMMON TO THAT SPEAKER AND ITS MATE ONLY. IT WOULD BE AND IS TO EXPENSIVE TO RECORD ALL THAT INFORMATION. THE SPEAKER WITH ITS REBUILT DRIVERS AND X-OVER ARE THEN PUT IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND THE VALUES ARE DIALED IN. THIS IS THE ONLY WAY TO GET LIKE NEW PERFORMANCE IF THE X-OVER IS BURNED BY PLAYING TOO LOUD FOR TOO LONG, POWER AMP FAILURE, OR LIGHTING STRIKE.

Mark (2/19/06): I just returned from your very excellent dealer in South Minneapolis. The 2ce Sigs were far and away the most involving speakers of the many pairs I auditioned. (The planars had a similar depth, but didn't integrate all the instruments nearly as well.) I love the 2ce Sigs but, until my infant and toddler mature a bit, these speakers will end up in very small (7' x 12') room. My question: How will the 2's do in such a small room, with a near field (about 5 feet away) listening position?? Thanks very much. This is fun.

Answer: HELLO MARK, THANKS FOR YOUR COMMENTS ON OUR DEALERS POSITIVE DEMO AND HIS CARE FOR YOU. THE SPEAKERS WILL WORK FINE WITH SOME QUALIFICATIONS. PLEASE READ SOME OF THE QUESTIONS IN THE LAST SEVERAL WEEKS THAT ARE SIMILAR I THINK YOU WILL FIND THE ANSWERS ABOUT NON OPTIMUM SITUATIONS INTERESTING. FIVE FEET IS A MINIMUM DISTANCE BUT STILL WITHIN DESIGN LIMITS.

Stan (2/19/06): Question regarding the fixed passive filters for 2WQ subs. I have 2 x > 2WQ subs but am using Vandersteen 5k fixed high pass filters into my > 10k ohm input impedance Spectral (DMA-80) amp; the reason is that is all the dealer had and I never bothered to order the 10k ones as he said it would take a while to get from you. My question is, how critical is it to precisely match these with the input impedance of my amp? What effect is the 5k filter having? I also have a 20k filter - would I be better off using it?

Answer: HELLO STAN H, THIS IS ONE OF THOSE QUESTIONS I SHOULD DUMP BUT AGAIN I WILL TRY TO REITERATE THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THE SUB-WOOFERS ARE SHIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE WX-2 X-OVER SO ANY VALUE IS AVAILABLE BY SWITCHING A SWITCH!!!!! DOING THE EXPERIMENT SINGLE ENDED IS VALID FOR BALANCED ALSO, THE RESULT WILL BE THE SAME . HOW THE PERFORMANCE WILL BE EFFECTED IS A VARIABLE THING BUT PEOPLE DO NOT INVEST IN THIS KIND OF STUFF IF MEDIOCRE PERFORMANCE WAS THE GOAL. IF YOUR HAVING DIFFICULTY GETTING THIS RIGHT PAY YOUR KNOWLEDGEABLE DEALER OR A FRIEND TO HELP YOU. SET UP CAN IMPROVE THE SOUND OF A SYSTEM MORE THAN A SIGNIFICANT INVESTMENT IN "IMPROVED" GEAR. ITS WORTH DOING OR HAVING IT DONE.

Steve (2/16/06): Hi Richard, Just recently bought a pair of 2Ce Signatures and a Rogue Cronus integrated amplifier and was wondering if you can make a general recommendation as to whether the 8 Ohm taps or 4 Ohm taps are preferred for my 2Ces. I took the liberty of changing over the taps to 4 Ohms based on your specs but am thinking maybe I should have at least tried them with the 8 Ohm taps first. Do what sounds best? Your thoughts? My feeling is that I am not sure yet and I tend to want to rationalize why I would choose one vs. the other. Your thoughts? Wonderful speakers by the way.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, I KNOW IT'S A LOT OF WORK TO TRY BOTH TAPS BUT THAT'S THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW. IF BOTH OF YOUR ARMS ARE BROKEN YOU COULD ASK THE DEALER WHO SELLS BOTH THE SPEAKERS AND THE AMPLIFIER FOR HIS EDUCATED OPINION. JUST KIDDING BUT UNLESS HE HAS DONE THE EXPERIMENT WE STILL DON'T KNOW.

Ken (2/15/06): I have a 2W with a Serial Number above 4060. I have an opportunity purchase a second one but its S.N. is below 4060. Would they integrate well with each other? I know there is a difference in the upgrade prices with the cutoff at S.N. 4060 so I assume there are some differences.

Answer: HELLO KEN, THERE ARE DIFFERENCES SO I RECOMMEND BUYING ANOTHER ABOVE 4060. THE DIFFERENCES ARE NOT THAT BIG AND WITH PLACEMENT IN EACH CORNER MAY NOT BE THAT NOTICEABLE, HOWEVER IF YOU DECIDE TO UPGRADE THEM ONE CAN BE DONE IN THE FIELD THE OTHER WOULD TAKE A TRIP TO THE FACTORY TO BECOME A 2WQ. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE SONICALLY BETWEEN THE 2W AND THE 2WQ AND THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE.

Bob(2/14/06): Hi Richard, Is it true that even though you use a first order crossover 6db per octave that lets say the model 1Cs the tweeter and woofer are still 90 degrees out of phase...

Answer: HELLO BOB, ACTUALLY IT IS 45 DEGREES AT THE X-OVER POINT. THE WAY TO VISUALIZE THIS IS TO LOOK AT THE HAND OFF IN A RELAY RACE. THERE IS THE TIME OR DISTANCE WHERE BOTH RUNNERS ARE RUNNING, AT SOME POINT THE BATON IS PASSED FROM ONE TO THE OTHER. IF THERE WERE NO PHASE SHIFT THERE WOULD BE A BUMP IN THE FREQUENCY RESPONSE AT THE X-OVER FREQUENCY. THIS IS ALSO WHY THERE MUST BE A STEPPED OR SLOPED BAFFLE. 6 DB SLOPES AND STEPPED OR SLOPED BAFFLES DON'T NECESSARILY MEAN THE ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT. THE ONLY WAY TO TELL IS THE STEP RESPONSE, IT SHOULD LOOK THE SAME AS A SINGLE HYPOTHETICAL SPEAKER WITH VERY WIDE BANDWIDTH. THE STEP WOULD LOOK LIKE A MOUNTAIN WITH A VERY STEEP LEFT SIDE AND A GENTLE FALLING SLOPE ON THE RIGHT SIDE BACK TO THE GROUND. ANY MISBEHAVIOR WOULD CAUSE MANY BUMPS AND DIPS ON THE RIGHT HAND SLOPE.

Stan (2/14/06): Hi - I have just been notified by my dealer that my new 5A's are going to be delivered in a few days. Regarding power, is a 15 amp socket acceptable?? Also, the right speaker will need an extension cord the included power cord I was told is 6 feet, and too short to reach the wall plug. I will make the extension myself using Hospital Grade components. Should I make 2 cords so that each speaker will see the exact same power? Thanks Stan

Answer: HELLO STAN, CONGRATULATIONS I KNOW YOU WILL ENJOY THEM. THE BREAKER IS FINE BECAUSE YOU WON'T BE PLUGGING BOTH OF THEM IN AT THE EXACT MOMENT. I WOULD USE A CORD ON THE ONE THAT NEEDS IT ONLY.

Bob (2/14/06): I just purchased a pr of 10 year old 2c's from ebay....Are all drivers available and can you post a price list for these parts. Also can I put the series 3 tweeter in this speaker again how much. Thanks

Answer: HELLO BOB, NONE OF THE DRIVERS ARE AVAILABLE, THEY ARE ALL VERY DIFFERENT TODAY. WE CAN HOWEVER REBUILD ALL OF THEM IF NECESSARY, CALL THE FACTORY FOR CURRENT PRICING. THE MODEL 3A TWEETER WILL NOT FIT THE SPEAKER BECAUSE THE STEP IN THE BAFFLE IS NOT CORRECT NOR IS THE X-OVER COMPATIBLE. THIS WOULD BE A VERY EXPENSIVE MOD, IT WOULD BE CHEAPER AND MUCH BETTER SOUNDING TO BUY A NEWER MODEL 2CE SIGNATURE.

Gary (2/14/06): My listening/HT room floor is carpet over plywood (a raised floor). Vibrations can be felt thru out the room which is great for movie entertainment. Currently, I use the spikes provided for the speaker to anchor them to the floor. Certain audio forums recommend the use of such products as Auralex Subdudes to control the vibrations and tighten up the bass. What is your recommendation?

Answer: HELLO GARY, I RECOMMEND YOU USE THE SPIKES PROVIDED. I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE PRODUCTS MENTIONED. A SPEAKER UNLIKE ALL THE OTHER COMPONENTS IN YOUR SYSTEM NEEDS TO BE IN INTIMATE CONTACT WITH THE FLOOR SO BASS TRANSIENTS CAN'T MOVE THE STRUCTURE FORE AND AFT. PRODUCTS THAT ARE COMPLIANT ALLOW THIS MOVEMENT CANCELING SOME OF THE FOR AND AFT MOVEMENT OF THE TWEETER AND MID-RANGE SOFTENING THE SOUND. MANY AUDIOPHILE SPEAKER HAVE VERY BRIGHT TWEETERS SO THEIR OWNERS MAY ENJOY SOME OF THE "TRANSPARENCY" DIMINISHED.

William (2/13/06): I would like to keep two Vandersteen subs and use an integrated amp...without suggesting a manufacturer, or you can, is there integrated out there that have a preamp out to amp in and can I use one of them into my rca crossovers to drive the subs? thanks...

Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, MANY INTEGRATED AMPS DO NOT HAVE "PRE- OUT" AND "AMP- IN" WHICH ARE REQUIRED TO USE THE 2WQ SUB-WOOFER SYSTEM. ROWLAND, AYRE, BAT, AND AUDIO RESEARCH WILL INSTALL THE HIGH-PASS SET FOR 80HZ (6DB PER OCTAVE) FOR A NOMINAL FEE. IF YOU WANT TO USE THE MODEL 5HP YOU WILL NEED A INTEGRATED WITH PRE-OUT AND MAIN-IN.

John (2/12/06): I am the happy owner of a pair of Vandersteen 2Cs that I purchased in 1986. Recently, however, I've noticed serious distortion in bass heavy content that appears to be coming from the acoustic couplers. At first I chalked this up to the age of the speakers but after reading some of your answers in this FAQ list I now suspect that playing movies without a subwoofer may be the culprit. Do you repair speakers this old? If so, any estimate of likely cost would be helpful. I was planning to simply replace them with the new 2Ce Signature or 3A Signature. Now however, I may add the 2Wq subwoofer and hold on to them for a while if repair is a feasible option. Rest assured I will eventually upgrade but I'd like to have these on hand for a graduation present for my son. Keeping these old friends in the family really appeals to me.? Thanks in advance for your reply.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, YOU PROBABLY HAVE A BLOWN REAR DRIVER. PRINT OUT THE RMA UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE, READ INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE IT AND SEND IT IN FOR REBUILD WITH THE FORM. CHARGE IS $84.00 PLUS UPS.? SUB-WOOFER IS MANDATORY FOR LONGEVITY AND THAT H.T. SOUND. WE SEE OLDER FRIENDS THAN THIS, ONCE REPAIRED PEOPLE LOVE THEM.

Jagdeep (2/12/06): Hello Richard, I'm using a Naim pre/power system with Living Voice OBX R2 speakers. Naim specify that the sub must be fed from the speaker end of the speaker cable. Have you any opinions on this? Also, my speakers are very clean and fast. I want the sub to compliment & integrate with the speakers and not draw attention to themselves. Can i tune the 2Wq's to do that?? My room size is approx 3000 cu ft. Should I use 1 or 2 subs..considering that I will cut in at about 35 to 40Hz (speakers have a claimed in room response of 35Hz)? I will not be able to place the sub(s) in corners and the sub(s) will be solely for 2 channel audio.

Answer: HELLO JAGDEEP (SINGAPORE), STEREO SUBS ARE RECOMMENDED AND OUR 2WQ DOES GET ITS SIGNAL FROM THE SPEAKER LEADS. A HIGH-PASS FILTER MUST BE PLACED BETWEEN YOUR PREAMP AND AMPLIFIER OR A LINEAR TRANSITION WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE. I SUGGEST YOU READ THE REVIEWS AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON THIS WEB SITE. CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A DEMO I THINK YOU WILL LIKE IT.

Craig (2/12/06): I have a pair of 5A's (fantastic speaker!), and was thinking of trying an interconnect cable between my amp and preamp that has an adjustable impedance setting for the input of the amp (like the 5A crossover has). My question is, should I set the cable for the input impedance of the amp, or the input impedance of the crossover (to which it would directly connect)? If the latter, what is that impedance value? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO GRAIG, YOU WOULD SET THE CABLE TO THE SETTING OF THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE. THE MODEL 5HP'S INPUT IMPEDANCE IS WHAT IS REFLECTED THROUGH IT FROM THE AMPLIFIER.

Ken (2/12/06): What is your opinion on acoustically treating a room? I am building a dedicated home theater room with Vandersteen all the way around. There are many, many online discussions going on indicating the benefits of putting up some sort of wall treatments. These are typically some some sort of sound absorptive material built into frames and hung on the walls. Usually the advice is to fully treat the front wall, from floor to ceiling to eliminate reflections coming off the back of the main speakers. It also includes treatment of the side walls up from floor to ear level. Is this kind of treatment a worthwhile endeavor with your speakers, or does your speaker design need and use those types of typical wall reflections to create the magic??

P.S. - Please don't end this internet question and answer experiment too soon - it is a real treat for Vandersteen owners.

Answer: HELLO KEN, MOST H.T. PEOPLE OVER TREAT THE ROOM IN MY OPINION. THE BEST WAY TO GET BETTER RESULTS IS TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM, FIRE IT UP AND SOLVE THE PROBLEMS THAT ACTUALLY EXIST. THE PROBLEM WITH OVER TREATING THE ROOM IS THAT IT COMPRESS'S DYNAMICS, INCREASES DISTORTION, AND EATS UP AMPLIFIER POWER. THE ONE TREATMENT I WOULD DO AUTOMATICALLY IS THE CEILING IF THE FLOOR IS NOT COVERED WITH A NATURAL FIBER CARPET. REAR REFLECTIONS ARE NOT USUALLY A PROBLEM. SIDE WALL MAY NEED TREATMENT FOR THE FIRST REFLECTION (USE A MIRROR ON THE SIDE WALL AND MARK THE LOCATION WHERE YOU SEE THE SPEAKER REFLECTED FROM THE LISTENING POSITION). THE REAR WALL WILL NEED SOME TREATMENT BEHIND THE LISTENING POSITION. ABSORPTION OR DIFFUSION CAN BE EXPERIMENTED WITH UNTIL YOU GET THE RESULTS YOU ARE LOOKING FOR. THIS ALL TAKES TIME BUT WILL REWARD WITH VIVID AND DYNAMIC SOUND.

Ted (2/11/06): Hi. I see in the FAQ that the 2ce's should be positioned "at least a foot away from the wall." Is a foot really sufficient? I ask because that is probably as far away from the wall as I will be able to place them. If that placement will give me the results the 2ce was intended to achieve, they are an option for me. But if this placement is a serious compromise, they aren't. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO TED, THE PLACEMENT OF PROPERLY DESIGNED MONO POLES (ABOVE 100HZ) WHICH ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS ARE IS DETERMINED BY THE ROOM NOT THE SPEAKER. BOOK SHELF SPEAKERS WHEN PURCHASED BY SOMEONE WITH EARS SOON END UP ON STANDS AWAY FROM THE WALLS. THIS IS BECAUSE THEY DON'T MAKE RECORDINGS WITH THE MIKES IN THE WALL. WHAT YOUR QUESTION REALLY IS; WILL THE VANDERSTEEN'S BE COMPROMISED ANY MORE THAN ANY OTHER INCLUDING BOOKSHELF SPEAKERS? ANSWER IS NO! WILL THE VANDERSTEEN'S BE AS GOOD AS THEY COULD BE? DEPENDS ON THE ROOM BUT MAYBE NOT. DOES THIS MEAN YOU MUST BUY INFERIOR SPEAKERS BECAUSE THEIR POSITION MAY BE COMPROMISED? EVEN COMPROMISED THEY WILL OUT PERFORM THEIR INFERIOR COUNTERPARTS. THE FACT THAT ONLY APX 18% OF YOUR MONEY WENT INTO THE CABINET AND THE REST WENT INTO THE COMPONENTS DIRECTLY RELATED TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SPEAKER CAN'T BE HID. AFTER ALL THAT THE ANSWER IS: IF YOU LIKE'EM BUY'EM. IF YOU END UP WITH TO MUCH BASS CHECK OUT FAQ ABOUT HI PASS.

Alfred (2/10/06):? I recently bought a used pair of C1s. Unfortunately, it did not come with the manual. I have heard how extensive it is with regards to speaker placement. Thanks! Alfred

Answer: HELLO ALFRED, OWNERS MANUALS WILL SOME DAY BE AVAILABLE ON THIS SITE AS A DOWN LOAD. THEY ARE NOT IN DIGITAL FORM AT THIS TIME SO YOUR ONLY OPTION IS TO SEND $5.00 TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO AND WE WILL SEND YOU ONE.

Ron (2/10/06): I purchased a pair of 2ci's may of 1990. #'s 45158 & 45159. As I type this, both speakers on are the way to you for repair. You should have the speakers in your shop on Tues Feb 14. I noticed when using a sound pressure level meter the sound from the speakers was very different from each other. Being the speakers are so old I figured it would make since to send both in for a check & whatever repair is necessary. My other equipment is - Classe ssp25 processor, Rotel 1095 power amp, NHT VT-1C center channel & NHT HDP-1 surrounds. My two questions are - Can these speakers be upgraded? If yes, at about what cost? I am considering purchasing your center speaker VCC1 to replace the NHT. Any suggestion you have would be appreciated. Incidentally, John at Audio Connection in Verona NJ is the best. Last but not least your product is outstanding.

Answer: HELLO RON, SIXTEEN YEARS IS NOT OLD BY OUR STANDARDS, I SUSPECT SOME BURNED VOICE COILS OR X-OVER COMPONENTS. WE WILL GIVE THE SPEAKERS A COMPLETE CHECKOUT INCLUDING THE CHAMBER, THEY WILL BE LIKE NEW WHEN WE FINISH. THERE ARE NO UPGRADES FOR ANY MODEL ONE OR TWO, IF UPDATABILITY IS A ISSUE LOOK INTO A PAIR OF THREE'S, THEY ARE. I NOTICED YOU ARE NOT RUNNING A SUB WOOFER THIS COULD BE WHY YOU BURNED SOME PARTS. THE 2CI ARE FULL RANGE SPEAKERS HOWEVER THERE IS STUFF ON MOVIES NEVER ENVISIONED IN THE DAYS OF MUSIC. A GOOD SUB WOOFER IS NECESSARY EVEN IF YOU FEEL YOU HAVE ADEQUATE BASS TO PROTECT THE 2CI'S. ONE MIGHT ASK WHY HAVE A FULL RANGE SPEAKER IF A SUB IS NECESSARY ANYWAY. IN ORDER TO HAVE A PROPER TRANSITION BETWEEN THE TWO, ONE OCTAVE OF OVERLAP IS REQUIRED HENCE THE FULL RANGE SPEAKER. YOU DON'T HAVE TO TAKE MY WORD FOR IT IF THIS WASN'T SO THE WORLD WOULD BE DOMINATED BY THREE PIECE SYSTEMS. IT ISN'T BECAUSE IT DOESN'T REALLY WORK. THE VCC-1 WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT BECAUSE IT IS TIME AND PHASE CORRECT LIKE YOUR MAIN SPEAKERS. YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER IS A GOOD RESOURCE FOR INFORMATION, THEY HAVE REAL WORLD EXPERIENCE FAR BEYOND MINE.

Mike (2/10/06): In follow up to my questions about speaker wire: Mike (1/26/06) - One style of wire that interests me and is easy to build for the DIY crowd is the DNM/REASON style (small 24gauge solid core spaced wires) which creates low capacitance but high inductance and high resistance. Some claim this high resistance improves the amplifier loudspeaker interface but can be an issue with some speakers due to the low damping factor. Do you have any recommendations about maximum wire resistance and minimum inductance, ie. some speaker manufacturers recommend .1 ohms as the max wire resistance. I assume this is to set a minimum damping factor?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, AS A SPEAKER DESIGNER YOU HAVE RECEIVED SOME BOGUS INFORMATION IN MY OPINION. I CAN'T ENVISION ANY CIRCUMSTANCE THAT EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE WIRE WOULD IMPROVE IF THE SPEAKER WAS PROPERLY DESIGNED. IF YOU TAKE A MATHEMATICAL MODEL OF A TYPICAL LOUDSPEAKER, CONNECT IT TO AN AMPLIFIER MODEL RUN SOME SIMULATIONS, HIGH INDUCTANCE DOES NOT LOOK GOOD TO ME. THERE ARE SITUATIONS WHERE JUST ABOUT ANYTHING WILL SOUND GOOD FOR SOME REASON. PLAY AROUND AND FIND WHAT WORKS FOR YOU IN YOUR ROOM, HOMEMADE OR STORE BOUGHT.

Bill (2/09/06): I'm confused by the manual for my 2ce signatures in terms of placement. Is the acoustic center in the front or the back of the speaker? I have a 38' long room and speaker placement (distance from the wall) is crucial. Please advise me on how to measure (to the front or back of the speaker) according to the dimensional directions in the manual.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WOULD USE THE MIDDLE OF THE SPEAKERS. REMEMBER THERE ARE NO FORMULAS THAT WILL BE ABSOLUTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE ONLY TO HELP FIND A STARTING PLACE, THEN EXPERIMENT MOVING THEM A INCH AT A TIME IN ALL DIRECTIONS. DON'T GET ANAL ABOUT THIS IT CAN BE WORKED ON OVER A PERIOD OF TIME. ROME WAS NOT BUILT IN A DAY.

Anthony (2/8/06): I know you don't like giving out recommendations for speaker cords, but what are your top picks? I so far like Kimber Cable, what is your opinion of them? I am Double Bi-Wiring 4PR, and going to Double Bi-Wire 4TC. I hope I hear a great increase in Audio Perfection. P.S. You never actually answered my question form the last question I asked on 1-29-06, also what did you think of the pictures?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, CHECK OUT THE FAQ ON SPEAKER WIRES. IF YOU FEEL I HAVE NOT ANSWERED YOUR QUESTION'S) CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 ASK FOR TECH.

Jeff (2/8/06): I have a pair of 2Ce's with a 2WQ subwoofer that I have been using with a power amplifier that has a 100k input impedance. I have been using your X2 inline crossovers with good results but have just bought a new amplifier with a 50k input impedance. Until I can get a new set of crossovers from my dealer, if I use the 100K ones, will this raise or lower the crossover point going to the 2Ce's? I noticed that you mention an 80hz crossover. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO JEFF, YOU ARE NOT ABLE TO MOVE THE X-OVER, IT IS FIXED AT 80HZ. INSTALL THE ADJUSTABLE WX-2 THAT CAME WITH THE WOOFER AND FOLLOW THE DIRECTIONS IN THE MANUAL REEVALUATE WHAT VALUE X-2 WORKS BEST FOR YOUR SYSTEM AND ORDER THE NEW VALUE FROM YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

Mike (2/8/06): I am considering a new power amplifier for my 2CES, class D seems to be the hot new thing. With so many products on the market, I will be only able to listen to a few. I have read there are issues with phase shift with class D compared to traditional amplifier-I believe one manufacturer allows the user to adjust the phase to emulate the bass response of traditional amplifiers. Do you feel they are a technical breakthrough? Have you been impressed with class D amplifiers in? general? Thanks for taking your time answering questions on this forum, it is very interesting and informative.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THE BEST ADVICE YOU CAN GET IS FROM A VANDERSTEEN DEALER WHERE YOU CAN HAVE A LISTENING SESSION SO HE CAN LEARN YOUR TASTE. THE MARKET IS FLOODED WITH AMPLIFIER CHOICES 99% OF THEM I HAVE NEVER HEARD ABOUT LET ALONE LISTENED TO. I KNOW YOU WILL SAY, BUT THE DEALER IS GOING TO SELL ME WHAT HE SELLS. GOOD SOUND IS HOW HE SELLS EVERYTHING SO OVER TIME HIS AMPLIFIER CHOICES WILL BE THE ONES THAT HE RECOMMENDS. I THINK AT THAT POINT HIS GOAL AND YOURS ARE THE SAME. IF THE DEALER IS NOT MAKING GOOD SOUND WITH HIS VANDERSTEENS, GIVE YOUR BUSINESS TO ONE WHO IS. MY EXPERIENCE WITH CLASS D IS LIMITED BUT FOR THE MOST PART THEY SOUND GOOD ESPECIALLY WITH DIGITAL SOURCES. WITH THE HIGHEST RESOLUTION SOURCES (LP PLAYER) THEY HAVEN'T PROVEN THEIR ABILITY TO BE MAGIC. TECHNICAL BREAKTHROUGH? WE SHALL SEE.

Hovhannes (2/8/06): I recently bought a pair of your wonderful Vandersteen model speakers that were manufactured approximately 5-6 years ago. While enjoying the perfect sound of the speakers, I noticed that left speaker produces slightly less highs then the right one. My attempts to compensate that effect by position adjustment and manipulation on controls on the back of speakers were not successful which draws me to suspicion that speakers may need get out of calibration / adjustment during years of use. Could you, please, tell if speakers can be serviced at Vandersteen? Is there adjustment / calibration program offered?

Answer: HELLO HOVHANNES, TRY MOVING THE RIGHT SPEAKER TO THE LEFT AND THE LEFT TO THE RIGHT. IF THE ROOM IS NOT SYMMETRICAL THERE CAN BE QUITE A DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CHANNELS. IF REVERSING THEM DOES NOT GIVE A CLUE SET THEM SIDE BY SIDE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE ROOM. PLAY A MONO SOURCE, THEY SHOULD SOUND THE SAME. THERE IS NOTHING TO ADJUST IN THE SPEAKER SO A TRIP TO THE FACTORY MAY BE CALLED FOR. READ CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS. THIS IS QUITE COMMON WITH SPEAKERS PURCHASED USED BECAUSE YOU DO NOT KNOW WHAT THEY BEEN THROUGH.

John (2/7/06): I have a receiver that has adjustable crossover (in frequency and in slope) and I was wondering, with my 3a Sigs, vcc-5, and vsm-1's, do I maintain a x-over at 80hz with the 6db slope or should I individually apply the crossover at different frequencies for each speaker, and if so, what would that x-over point be (3a's-40hz?, cc-5-60 hz?). Thanks

Answer: HELLO JOHN, MOST RECEIVERS DO NOT HAVE FIRST ORDER (6DB PER OCTAVE) SLOPES AVAILABLE. CHECK AND MAKE SURE YOURS DOES AND POST THE FACT HERE WHEN YOU CAN, I WOULD LIKE TO KNOW. I WOULD USE 50HZ FOR ALL CHANNELS

Jonas (2/7/06): A couple more questions as I am working on designing the room that will house my 2 ch and HT system. My first question is whether with 5A's used as the Left and Right channels in a HT environment will do the job for HT or whether I will also need a pair of V2Ws (I live in a Manhattan apartment so I'll never go to too crazy with the dBs.) Second, I am looking at installing a balanced power system (such as equi=tech). Do you think this would have a meaningful performance impact?? Thanks so much for making the best speakers I've ever owned (or heard!)

Answer: HELLO JONAS, H.T. WITH MODEL 5A'S WILL BE GREAT, NO ADDITIONAL SUBS REQUIRED UNLESS YOU LIKE THE BASS EXAGGERATED. ALL POWER CONDITIONERS SHOULD BE TRIED AFTER THE SYSTEM IS FINISHED. ADDING A COMPONENT IN THE AUDIO CHAIN CAN ONLY HURT THE SOUND UNLESS IT IS SOLVING A PROBLEM GREATER THAN ITS NEGATIVE CONTRIBUTION. TODAY EVERY HOME HAS A POTENTIAL POWER PROBLEM, BUT IT TAKES TIME TO FIND THE SOLUTION. HIGH END EQUIPMENT TODAY ARE DESIGNED WITH VERY GOOD POWER SUPPLIES SO IF THEY ARE DOING THE JOB, AFTERMARKET BOXES MAY NOT BE NECESSARY.

Jacques (2/7/06): The calibrated disk necessary for the adjustment of the 11 bass bands on the Quatro - is it the same as needed for the Model 5? My distributor has the latter and is very helpful and will gladly lend this to my dealer in another city to set up my Quatros.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, YOUR DEALER SHOULD HAVE ANSWERED THIS QUESTION FOR YOU. THE SET UP FOR THE QUATRO'S IS THE SAME AS THE 5A. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR DEALER.

Lonny (2/6/06): Hey there. At what time in the future do you suppose you're going to turn off the CAPPS????????? I am going blind reading this stuff......... Its a good thing you know how to make speakers.

Answer: HELLO LONNY, AFTER A LONG DAY, CAPS IS ALL I CAN READ!!!!!!!!!!! I AM HOPING ENOUGH OF YOU COMPLAIN SO I CAN END THIS EXPERIMENT AND GO BACK TO WHAT I USED TO DO IN THE EVENING.

Bill (2/5/06): I would like to start by thanking you for designing great sounding speakers. I currently own a set of 1Cs which I love. I am contemplating? upgrading to a set of 2CEs or 2CE Sigs. Here's my question. I have this odd room which is essentially 14'x14'. With the back wall (behind me) that has 1/3 of it open to a kitchen. Using your EXCELLENT manual and much experimentation, I was able to dial in my 1Cs. But given the room size and furniture I cannot place speakers far out into the room. Every time I have heard the 2CEs, they were in a much bigger room and were placed farther apart and much farther out into the room from the wall(behind speaker). I am concerned that the 2CEs or Sigs might be too much speaker for my room.? My seating arrangement puts me ~8 feet from my 1Cs. I wanted to upgrade to the 2CEs for the midrange and lower bass improvements. What do you think??

Answer: HELLO BILL, I THINK YOU SHOULD GET AT LEAST AS GOOD PERFORMANCE FROM THE 2CE SIGNATURES AS THE 1C'S. I KNOW SQUARE ROOMS CAN BE A PROBLEM BUT IF THAT'S ALL YOU HAVE IT COULD WORK WITH SOME EXPERIMENTING. I WOULD CONTACT YOUR DEALER WHO WILL HAVE EXPERIENCED MANY MORE ROOMS THAN I. CHECK OUT THE QUESTIONS A FEW BACK YOU MAY NEED TO TRY A HIGH PASS.

Mike (2/4/06): If I understand the 2CE serial numbers correctly from your reply to Unknown (1/17/06) - SN#56032 and SN#77000 were used for the 2CE, but "THE 2CE SIGNATURES ARE CURRENTLY STILL IN PRODUCTION BUT HAVE HAD YEARLY UPGRADES, THE MOST SIGNIFICANT IN FEB 2005 (SN#57374 AND ABOVE)". The serial numbers don't seem to be sequential - my 2CE Signatures are 55020 and were purchased in Jan 2003. What upgrades have been done since then? Drivers, crossover, etc? I am upgrading my amplifier and would like to use the same barrier strips as the 2CE Sig - where can I source them?? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THE FIRST 2CE SIGNATURE WAS SN#50000 THEY ARE NOT SEQUENTIAL WITH THE 2CE. YOUR LOOKING AT THREE YEARS, MANY UPGRADES HAVE HAPPENED. IT WOULD BE VERY EXPENSIVE TO CHANGE OUT ALL THE CHANGES, EACH ONE ONLY A SMALL IMPROVEMENT. TOGETHER THEY ADD UP OVER THE YEARS. IF UP-GRADES ARE AN ISSUE I SUGGEST THE THREE SERIES OR HIGHER THEY A GUARANTEED UPGRADEABLE. YOUR DEALER CAN ORDER THE BARRIER STRIP FOR YOU. $15.00 EACH FOR THE SINGLES $25.00 FOR DOUBLES PLUS FREIGHT.

Patrick (2/3/06): Why are the prices for your speakers in Canada so much higher than in the USA even though the CAD is at a sixteen year high?? Love your 5As, but the prices up here is daunting.

Answer: HELLO PATRICK, CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND GET A NEW QUOTE. WE HAVE NOT SOLD MANY 5A'S UP THERE AND THE EXCHANGE RATE HAS BEEN MOVING AS YOU SAY.

Bill (2/3/06): I have had a pair of Vandersteen 5s for approximately six years and recently acquired a pair of Pass Labs Aleph 2 mono-blocks. I'm running them in balanced form and the owners manual tells me the Input Impedance for balanced operation is 25 kohm. What are the appropriate settings for the crossovers?

Answer: HELLO BILL, YOU MUST CHECK WITH PASS LABS AND MAKE SURE BOTH LEGS ARE THE SAME. SOME OF THE PASS LABS ARE NOT TRUE BALANCED LIKE 5K ON ONE LEG AND 20K ON THE OTHER LEG. THIS IS VERY DANGEROUS FOR THE 7 INCH MID BASS DRIVER AND YOUR DEALER SHOULD HAVE VERIFIED THAT FOR YOU. PASS LABS WILL MAKE YOU A CUSTOM HIGH PASS BECAUSE OURS WONT WORK.

Dave (2/2/06): I'm finally upgrading from stereo to 5.1 Home Theater. I currently own a pair of Model 2C's (S/N: 50xxxC). After listening to the VSM-1surrounds and the VCC-1 center, the decision to purchase was easy, for they sounded great. Selection of a subwoofer was not so easy. First, the dealer didn't have the 2Wq on display. I own an Adcom component system, so I believe this would be the preferred subwoofer. Second, from reading the Vandersteen literature, it appears a stereo subwoofer configuration is preferred. If this is true, why is it not an option to purchase a stereo subwoofer configuration where each subwoofer would only have inputs for one channel and the crossover for the pre-amp output would also be designed for a single channel. My thought was that a savings could be passed on to the consumer and perhaps subwoofer sales might increase.

Answer: HELLO DAVE C, WE DO RECOMMEND STEREO SUB-WOOFERS HOWEVER WITH H.T. A VARIATION WOULD BE ONE 2WQ AND ONE V2W. FULL RANGE SPEAKERS LIKE YOUR 2C CAN BE DAMAGED BY THE CRAZY STUFF ON SOME MOVIES. THE GOOD NEWS BAD NEWS IS BY SELECTING SMALL ON YOUR PROCESSOR DOLBY REQUIRES (STUPIDLY IN MY OPINION) 12 DB OR MORE ROLL OFF CAUSING MANY TIME AND PHASE PROBLEMS. THE SOLUTION IS A 2WQ WHICH HAS A 6DB X-OVER, PROTECTS THE 2C SPEAKERS, LOWERS THE DISTORTION IN THOSE AND THE AMPLIFIER DRIVING THEM. WIN WIN. USING A V2W CONNECTED TO THE L.F.E. OUTPUT OF YOUR PROCESSOR WILL GIVE THE BIG BOTTOM PEOPLE LOOK FOR IN H.T. WHILE WATCHING MOVIES. IN SOME CIRCLES THE 2WQ HAS BEEN CRITICIZED FOR NOT HAVING ENOUGH OUTPUT. I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q. MOST PEOPLE INCLUDING ME WANT MORE THAN WHAT HAS BEEN RECORDED, HENCE THE V2W. THE PROPER WAY WOULD BE ACCURATE REPRODUCTION (2WQ'S) WITH A BASE CONTROL ON THE PROCESSOR SO ONE COULD DIAL ALL THE BOOM DESIRED. THIS IS CONSIDERED SAC-RELIGIOUS IN HIGH END SO WE HAVE IT BUILT INTO OUR SUB-WOOFERS, UNFORTUNATELY WITHOUT A DEFEAT SWITCH. GOING TO ONE INPUT AND HALF A X-OVER WOULD SAVE ABOUT $5 AND NOT ALLOW THE SCENARIO ABOVE.

Steve (2/2/06): Hi Richard.. More a comment than a question. I've heard the Quatros and I think they sound wonderful. Why have they been given short shrift here on your website? The other products have long, elaborate descriptions detailing the design principals guiding their development, yet the Quatro has what looks like a hastily created one-page spec. sheet. that aside, your products are awesome. I hope you have a succession plan in place for your business for the day when you hang up the tuning fork and oscilloscope. ..I'd like to think Vandersteen speakers will continue to be made for decades to come.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, OVER THE YEARS ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS HAVE PRECEDED THE LITERATURE AND COLOR PICTURES BY A YEAR OR TWO. NICE LITERATURE COSTS A LOT OF MONEY AND I WOULD RATHER SPEND IT ON THE PRODUCT IN THE HOPE THAT WE WON'T SHIP ANY HOMING PIGEONS. IN THE END DEALER AND CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS WIN AND WE PRODUCE DECENT LITERATURE. ENEKE AND I HAVE FOUR CHILDREN ALL OF WHICH ARE INVOLVED AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. I'M AFRAID THE AUDIO WORLD WILL HAVE TO PUT UP WITH VANDERSTEEN'S FOR MANY MORE YEARS.

Craig (2/2/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen my wife and I have 2Ce Signatures and two 2Wq's driven by Quicksilver V4's that we are very impressed with. I'm curious about active Bi-Amping, which in our setup I think would be in effect Tri-Amping. My question is why don't I see a second set of terminals on your, or any other speaker that bypasses the crossover for the purpose of Bi-Amping? I suspect going to 3A Signatures would be our best bet, but haven't heard them yet. Thanks for all you do, Craig

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, SOUNDS LIKE A NICE SYSTEM TO ME. THE ONLY BI-AMPING WE RECOMMEND IS WHEN YOU ADD A PROPERLY DESIGNED SUB-WOOFER THAT HIGH PASSES THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND AMPLIFIER. THIS YOU HAVE ALREADY DONE, IF YOU WANT HIGHER PERFORMANCE TRY THE QUATRO'S. THE REASON I DO NOT PUT DIRECT CONNECTORS ON ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS IS BECAUSE IT DOESN'T WORK. USING OUTBOARD X-OVERS ASSUMES PERFECT DRIVERS AND I HAVE NOT FOUND ANY OF THOSE. AIR CORE INDUCTORS AND MODERN CAPACITORS MANIPULATED TO WORK WITH THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DRIVER WILL ACCOMPLISH MUCH BETTER RESULTS AT THE LISTENING POSITION THAN ELECTRONIC X-OVER/AMP COULD EVER ACCOMPLISH.

James (2/2/06): I own a pair of 2CE signatures and am concerned about the dimensions of my new listening room. The dimensions of my new listening room are 8.5' x 14' with 10' ceiling. Can the 2CE signatures perform well in a room of such dimensions. If not, would any of your other speakers be a more suitable match for my room size? I hate the thought of giving up my 2CE Sig's but if I must I would want to replace them with another Vandersteen speaker.

Answer: HELLO JAMES, HOW SPEAKERS WORK IN A ROOM IS A COMPLICATED COMBINATION OF DIFFERENT PARAMETERS NOT DESCRIBED BY THE DIMENSIONS. WITH ENOUGH EXPERIMENTATION VERY GOOD SOUND CAN BE FOUND IN ALMOST ANY ROOM. SOMETIMES AUDIOPHILES THINK THERE IS NO CHANCE AND SETTLE FOR SOME CHEAP SPEAKERS AT THE SWAP MEET, THIS GUARANTIES BAD SOUND. ANOTHER OPTION IS TO GET A SMALL LITTLE TWO WAY ALSO GUARANTEEING NO MUSIC BECAUSE THE FOUNDATION OF MUSIC IS BASS. ONLY AN AUDIOPHILE CAN LISTEN TO A LITTLE TWO WAY LOUDSPEAKER WITH THE SCREAMING MEANIES AND CALL IT MUSIC NO MATTER HOW EXPENSIVE. THIS IS SOMETIMES CALLED TRANSPARENCY.? I CALL IT NO BASS WITH AN EMPHASIS ON MIDS AND HIGHS. YOUR 2CE SIGNATURES MAY LOAD UP THE ROOM IN THE BASS IF THAT OCCURS TRY HIGH PASSING THE AMPLIFIER. CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND BORROW THE WX-2 ADJUSTABLE HIGH PASS IF YOU CAN. START AT HALF THE IMPEDANCE OF YOUR AMPLIFIER AND WORK YOUR WAY DOWN. AT SOME POINT YOU WILL ROLL OFF YOUR 2CE SIGS AT THE SAME FREQUENCY THE ROOM IS LIFTING RESULTING IN FLAT RESPONSE. IT TURNS OUT THAT BASS IS LIFTED AT 6DB PER OCTAVE WHICH IS THE INVERSE OF THE HIGH PASS. IT WILL TAKE A LITTLE EXPERIMENTING BUT THE END RESULT IS MUSICAL. GOOD LUCK.

Ashok (1/30/06): I am trying a BAT VK-75 SE amplifier which has balanced inputs with a pair of your fabulous Vandersteen 5A's. According to Victor Khomenko from BAT, "each channel has two phases on balanced interface, each one of them being 215k. How is that fact treated by the crossover - you need to ask the Vandersteen people, they should know." So do I set each of the high pass filters connected between the outputs of the preamp and amplifier, at a setting of 200k (or 300K which is the next higher level for 215k) or 400K (or 500K)? Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO ASHOK, THE HP-5B DECAL SAYS TO ADD THE SUM OF THE LEGS AND THAT THEY BE IDENTICAL. IN YOUR CASE THEY ARE BOTH 215K SO THAT WOULD ADD UP TO 430K. THE VALUE WOULD BE 400K ON THE HP-5B WHICH IS THE NEAREST SETTING AVAILABLE.

Roberto (1/30/06): I write from Mexico City. my question is where can buy the service manual of subwoofer Model 2Wq ?

Answer: HELLO ROBERTO, WE HOPE TO HAVE THE 2WQ OWNERS MANUAL ON THIS WEB SITE WITHIN THE NEXT 6 MONTHS. THE ONLY OTHER WAY IS TO BUY ONE FROM DELRAMA OUR EXPORTER. HIS FAX#480-367-1355.

Jacques (1/30/06): CAN I USE BANANA PLUGS ON MY NEW QUATROS WHEN THEY ARRIVE - OR IS THERE SOME SPECIAL TYPE OF PLUG I SHOULD USE?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS (1C EXCEPTED) ARE HOOKED UP WITH SPADES. THEY CAN NOT BE WIDER THAN 7/16" (12MM) WITH #10 SLOT TO FIT THE BARRIER STRIP. BANANA PLUGS WILL NOT WORK AND ARE TOO POOR A CONNECTION FOR A SPEAKER AT THIS LEVEL. READ FAQ: MIKE 1/26/06 ON THIS PAGE FOR MORE INFO.

Anthony (1/29/06): Thanks for the replys, to my last 2 questions. One last one for now... Does an upgraded speaker from you differ in anyway way then an ORIGINAL made AKA upgraded 2Ce Sig, to an ORIGINAL 2ce Sig... Sound?? Appearance?? Also, I want you to know that I have been an audiophile for couple years, and Vandersteen are a steal in the audio industry. I have my speakers very well setup, and they blow away all speakers I have heard so far regardless of price. I recently did a shootout with The Martin Logan Summits vs. my 2Ce Sigs, and was blown away that the 2Ce Sigs matched (I would say surpassed) the Summits Highs, but when we got to midrange and lower it was the 2Ces that took home the trophy. I have converted at least 4 friends into buying at least the 1C's - and some VCC-1's. I also know you are mostly a separates man, but I wonder what the last time you used your Vandys (maybe not the 5A's) with a good receiver? I am currently using a Denon 3805 HT Receiver with an External DAC (Benchmark Media DAC 1)from really good transport. (Denon 3910.) The receiver is used only for amp, pre amp only. I have it in "pure" Direct mode so there is no adverse or added processing to the sound. And I will say it was just as good as some of the tube AMP/Preamp combos I have used in the past (Audio research, Cary Audio, Mcintosh) With some Combos I was able to get tad bit crisper highs, but they were significantly more expensive then the receiver. I would love for you to stop by and audition your own speakers, and tell me what you think. (I'm close to Ultra Fidelis - the only authorized Vandersteen dealer in WI.)Here is a couple of links to my setup, let let me know what you think. http://img515.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheaterfull0rk.jpg Home Theater FULL SETUP! http://img371.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatervandersteenvcc5top9.jpg Vandersteen VCC-5 Top http://img488.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatersource7fl.jpg Home Theater Source Devices http://img488.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatersourceclose8bi.jpg Home Theater Source Devices Close Up. I hope you like the custom decal made of fabric that I have on the VCC-REF. Took 4 hours to make. (Also... the right speaker in the full picture is measured to be identical to the left in terms of placement, but doesn't look that way in the pic. I took 3 pics and Photoshoped them together.)

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, YOUR RIGHT SET UP IS EVERYTHING. MY EXPERIENCE HAS BEEN THAT MANY AUDIOPHILES WOULD RATHER SPEND MORE MONEY ON NEW WIRE, POWER CONDITIONERS, AND NEW ELECTRONICS AND FORGET BASIC HOUSE KEEPING. I CAN ONLY PASS ON MY EXPERIENCE BUT UNDERSTAND THAT OUR DEALERS EXPOSE VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS TO MANY MORE ROOMS AND DIFFERENT ELECTRONICS THAN I. WE ARE CONSTANTLY IMPROVING OUR PRODUCTS SO WHAT WE MAKE NOW IS ALWAYS GOING TO BE DIFFERENT THAN LAST YEAR. ITS A REAL PLEASURE TO HEAR FROM SOMEONE HAVING SO MUCH ENJOYMENT WITH OUR PRODUCT.

Craig (1/29/06): Why are your speakers only rated at 86 to 90 db when there are some speakers at over 94db spl?

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I LIKE MOST SPEAKERS DESIGNERS TRY TO GET THE SENSITIVITY AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. WHEN BEING TIME AND PHASE CORRECT IS THE MAIN DESIGN TARGET (I BELIEVE THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PARAMETER IN LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN) THERE ARE SOME RULES. 1) FROM 150 HZ AND ABOVE ONLY ONE DRIVER CAN BE USED PER FREQUENCY RANGE. USING MORE THAN ONE MIDRANGE FOR INSTANCE NO MATER HOW PERFECT WOULD SMEAR EACH OTHER. TIME SMEAR LOWERS REAL TRANSPARENCY. 2) EACH DRIVER MUST BE SMALL ENOUGH TO MINIMIZE BEAMING. BEAMING WILL CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH ROOM REFLECTIONS NOT BEING A FACSIMILE OF THE DIRECT SOUND. BEAMING DEGRADES IMAGE STABILITY. 3) DRIVER DIAPHRAGMS MUST BE RIDGED ENOUGH TO ACT PISTONIC AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE. NON PISTONIC CONES CAUSE TIME SMEAR. 4) FIRST ORDER TRANSFER FUNCTION BETWEEN THE DRIVERS INCLUDING THEIR X-OVERS. THIS ALLOWS FOR WAVEFORM PRESERVATION, THE KEY TO REPRODUCING MUSIC IN A UNBELIEVABLY REALISTIC WAY. ALL THIS ADDS UP TO ABOUT 86DB SENSITIVITY EVEN WITH TODAY'S SOPHISTICATED MAGNET SYSTEMS AND CONE/DOME TECHNOLOGIES. TO GET HIGHER SENSITIVITY YOU WOULD NEED HORN (VERY COLORED), MULTIPLE DRIVERS (TIME SMEAR), OR CONES/DOMES SO LIGHTWEIGHT THEY ARE IN CONTROLLED CHAOS (DISTORTED WAVEFORM). ALL OF THESE ARE UNACCEPTABLE TO ME. TODAY WE HAVE REASONABLY AFFORDABLE HIGH QUALITY POWER AVAILABLE LOWERING THE NEED FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY. IF I COULD DO ALL OF THE ABOVE INCLUDING HIGH SENSITIVITY I WOULD NOT BE ANSWERING THIS QUESTION. I WOULD BE A RETIRED MULTI- MILLIONAIRE IN THE CARIBBEAN.

Curtis (1/27/06): Hi: I recently purchased a pair of Quatros. Is there any literature available, or, if not, could you explain how to "dial in" the proper bass response by using the dials on the back of the speaker? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO CURTIS, CONGRATULATIONS, I HOPE YOU HAVE MANY YEARS OF MUSICAL ENJOYMENT WITH THEM. THE OWNERS MANUAL IS BEING PRINTED NOW AND WILL BE MAILING THEM SOON. THEY WILL BE AVAILABLE ON THIS WEB SITE AT THAT TIME ALSO. YOUR DEALER WILL ADJUST THE 11 BANDS ONCE YOU HAVE SOME TIME ON THEM. YOU SHOULD CONTACT YOUR DEALER AND LET HIM KNOW THAT YOU ARE READY. THE OWNERS MANUAL WILL HAVE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO DO THIS BUT YOU WILL NEED THE CALIBRATED DISK AND S.P.L. METER. THIS YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO BORROW FROM YOUR DEALER ONCE WE PROVIDE IT TO THEM. WE HOPE TO FINISH THIS IN ABOUT 2 OR 3 MONTHS. IN THE MEAN TIME THE DEALERS HAVE BEEN TRAINED ON AN ALTERNATE METHOD. USE THE LARGE KNOBS WITH THE COIN SLOTS ANY TIME YOU WANT. THE LEVEL CONTROL WORKS JUST LIKE A VOLUME CONTROL FOR THE BASS. ADJUST THE BASS LEVEL WITH A JAZZ RECORDING FEATURING STAND UP BASS UNTIL THE BASS SOUNDS EQUALLY LOUD AS THE PLAYER GOES UP AND DOWN THROUGH THE X-OVER REGION. ONCE THE LEVEL IS SET ADJUST THE CONTOUR TO TASTE (#1 TIGHT AND DRY AUDIOPHILE LIKE, #10 BOO MY LIKE HOME THEATER).

Anthony (1/27/06): Richard, I just recently purchased your Main Center Channel the VCC-Ref? (VCC-5) and was wondering if the best position of the speaker is above the listening position, or below? Also Is the tweeter itself covered in a metal mesh? I looked in side with a flash light. I just want to make sure the one I purchased is an original and not repaired with another driver. Thanks in advance - Anthony

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, THE BEST LOCATION FOR THE VCC-5 IS COVERED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THE PRODUCTION VCC-5 DOES HAVE A METAL MESH OVER THE TWEETER TO HOLD THE DIFFUSER.

Mike (1/26/06): I have owned the 2CE Signature model for a couple of years and absolutely love the speakers. The addition of the 2CE's have led me to upgrade my source and modify my amplifier. I am now testing speaker cables and have noticed considerable differences between stranded and solid core, difference wire layout, etc. My problem is that on particular music I may prefer one wire and on another piece of music another wire. I am looking at a number of DIY receipts. Any suggestions? Are their any definite technologies like solid core and or litz construction that are superior? Thank you for using barrier strips, I agree they are superior - plus dealing with spades when making DIY cables is much easier.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THANKS FOR YOUR POSITIVE COMMENTS ESPECIALLY ON THE BARRIER STRIP. I HAVE TRIED DOZENS OF "HIGH END" CONNECTORS NONE OF THEM COMPARE, ARE AS GAS TIGHT, LOW METAL MASS (HIGH FREQUENCY CONDUCTION), AND IF YOU USE "O" LUGS SOUND JUST AS GOOD 2 YEARS FROM NOW. WE GET COMPLAINTS EVERY NOW AND THEN WHEN CUSTOMERS BUY A WIRE FROM A COMPANY THAT ESPOUSES THE MERIT OF SKIN EFFECT ONLY TO HANG A CONNECTOR ON THE END THAT HAS A POUND OF BRIGHT SHINY METAL IN IT. REMEMBER MOST PEOPLE BUY A WIRE LOOKING FOR IT TO HAVE A CHARACTER OF ITS OWN THAT THEY LIKE. IF YOU WANT A TRANSPARENT WIRE DO A STRAIGHT WIRE BY-PASS. COMPARE ONE INCH OF HIGH QUALITY 18GA SOLID WIRE TO 20 FEET OF WHATEVER. THE LONG LENGTH OF WIRE THAT SOUNDS THE MOST LIKE THE SHORT ONE INCH IS THE MOST TRANSPARENT. AFTER DETERMINING THE WINNER USE MONO AMPLIFIERS NEXT TO THE SPEAKERS WITH ABOUT 2 FEET OF IT TERMINATED WITH #10 O-LUGS, SNUG DOWN THE SCREWS AND BE GOOD FOR YEARS.

Unknown (1/25/06): what period was the Model 2CE in production? Is the grill removable?

Answer: HELLO, THE MODEL 2CE WENT INTO PRODUCTION IN FEB 1991. THE 2CE INITIALLY HAD THE 3/4" ALLOY TWEETER OF THE 2CI (IN PRODUCTION 1989-1991) BECAUSE WE HAD NOT COMPLETED THE 1" UNTIL NOV 1991. SN#56032 WAS THE FIRST 2CE TO INCLUDE THE 1" TWEETER AT THIS POINT THE TOP, BOTTOM, AND INPUT PLATE WERE THE ONLY PARTS COMMON BETWEEN THE TWO. IN 1998 THE 2CE WAS DISCONTINUED AND THE 2CE SIGNATURE WENT INTO PRODUCTION. THE LAST 3 MONTHS OF THE 2CE PRODUCTION HAD ABOUT HALF OF THE SIGNATURE PARTS INCLUDED (SN#77000 AND ABOVE) AND CAN BE UPGRADED TO SIGNATURES AT THE FACTORY FOR $380.00 PLUS FREIGHT. THE 2CE SIGNATURES ARE CURRENTLY STILL IN PRODUCTION BUT HAVE HAD YEARLY UPGRADES, THE MOST SIGNIFICANT IN FEB 2005 (SN#57374 AND ABOVE). THE GRILL CLOTH IS NOT REMOVABLE HOWEVER THE CUSTOMER SERVICE SECTION OF THIS WEB SITE HAS INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO GET INTO THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE.

Ken (1/25/06): After years of jealousy of a friend with model 2's, I am going to put together my home theater using Vandersteen all the way around. What are your thoughts on 7.1 channels for the upcoming hi-res formats (Dolby TrueHD, etc.)? Would using 4 VSM's work well, with 2 mounted on back wall and 2 mounted on sides? I may start my Vandersteen addiction on the used market. Can you determine the vintage based on serial numbers? I have come across a pair of 2ce's that are serial # in the 58000 range and a VCC-1 that is in the 28000 range. Owner is not the original owner so they don't know the age of the speakers and it would help if I could find that out. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO KEN, TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKERS ARE THE ONLY WAY TO DO MULTI-CHANNEL CORRECTLY AND ALL OF OUR SPEAKER MODELS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH EACH OTHER. THE IMPORTANT DECISION BETWEEN 5.1 VERSUS 7.1 IS QUALITY. BETTER HIGHER PERFORMANCE EQUIPMENT IN 5.1 WILL ALWAYS BE BETTER THAN 7.1 DONE WITH LOWER QUALITY EQUIPMENT. VSM-1 ARE WHAT I RECOMMEND FOR REAR, SIDE OR EVEN FRONT CHANNEL USE. FOR CENTER I RECOMMEND THE VCC-5 BECAUSE MOVIES AND MUSIC VIDEOS ARE SO DEMANDING OF IT. REMEMBER IF IT IS ON THE SCREEN IT WILL BE SENT TO THE CENTER. THE VCC-1 IS FINE FOR A BUDGET SYSTEM USING THE 1C, BUT NOT DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR HIGH END USE. BUYING USED SPEAKERS I DO NOT RECOMMEND UNLESS THEY ARE NEAR BY SO A DEMO CAN VERIFY THEIR INTERIOR CONDITION. I HAVE SEEN MANY SPEAKERS IN FOR REPAIR BECAUSE ALL THE DRIVERS APPEAR TO WORK BUT THE SOUND IS NOT RIGHT ONLY TO FIND A RADIO SHACK TWEETER KLUGED IN PLACE. BUYING USED IS A GREAT WAY TO GET MORE FOR YOUR MONEY IF YOU REALLY DID. 58000 SERIES 2CE SPEAKERS ARE OVER 15 YEARS OLD, I WOULD RECOMMEND A 2CE SIGNATURE WHICH HAS MUCH LOWER DISTORTION, BETTER POWER HANDLING AND CURRENT TECHNOLOGY. THIS IS A GOOD EXAMPLE OF SOMEONE TRYING FOR 7.1 ON A BUDGET OR 5.1 AT A MUCH HIGHER LEVEL OF PERFORMANCE FOR THE SAME MONEY.

Bob (1/25/06): I saw your Quatro with wood finish at the 2006 CES and they looked great! Are they available yet? Also, I am considering moving up to the Quatro and want to add a new 2 channel amp when I do. Will 150 watt per channel be enough or should I be looking at 200-300 watt range? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BOB, THANK YOU FOR THE COMPLEMENT ON THE WOOD QUATRO. THEY ARE IN PRODUCTION NOW IN THE STANDARD FINISHES AVAILABLE ON THE MODEL 5A. WHAT AMPLIFIER WOULD BE BEST FOR YOU CAN ONLY BE DETERMINED BY A DEMO. I WOULD NOT BE WORRIED ABOUT POWER BECAUSE THE SOUND IS MORE IMPORTANT. AN AMPLIFIERS POWER RATING HAS VERY LITTLE TO DO WITH ITS ABILITY TO DRIVE A SPEAKER. USE SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE RECORDINGS (VINYL IF YOU WANT HIGH RESOLUTION) SET THE VOLUME ON THE PRE-AMP TO 12 O'CLOCK (CLIPPING POINT OF MOST AMPLIFIERS) IF YOU OBSERVATION IS I WOULD NEVER LISTEN THAT LOUD, ITS ENOUGH. IF YOU WOULD LIKE IT LOUDER DIG DEEPER INTO YOUR POCKET AND BUY MORE POWER. REMEMBER TO GET YOUR ADVICE FROM A DEALER WHO HAS VANDERSTEEN, NOT ONE WHO SAYS HE KNOWS VANDERSTEEN.

Bill (1/23/06): I bought a pair of used Model 3A's that I loved listening to back in 2001. I had planned to upgrade them eventually. But two bits of misfortune "plagued" these speakers, and none of them had to do with the speaker quality. One, my wife nearly put them on the front door step of our house when I got home. She was pretty furious that I bought them. I told her they were a steal. She didn't care. So there was some bad "kharma" there.? (My wife and I get along very well, despite the speaker mishap!) Two, eventually I had to sell them because of some financial issues. This was a very difficult decision, as you can probably imagine. I'm looking at saving some money to buy Vandersteen again. I want to stay within a budget and make sure my wife doesn't put these on the porch! My dilemma is? choosing between the 1Cs and the 2Ce Signatures. The 3As are little much for my budget. Will I get similar, if not better sound, from the 2Ce Signatures, to the 3As? Or are 1Cs a good compromise in a high-end speaker in the Vandersteen line? My reluctance in getting the 1Cs is due to them not having a midrange driver. I want to also add two subwoofers in the future. I'd be running the speakers from a Yamaha A/V receiver and a Sony ED SACD player through the analog bypass. Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO BILL, YOUR QUESTION IS A TOUGH ONE. ANY A/V RECEIVER IS LOW IN SOUND QUALITY ESPECIALLY DRIVING LARGE SPEAKERS. I CAN RELATE TO YOUR DESIRE FOR A MIDRANGE DRIVER, IF YOU WANT GREAT MIDRANGE YOU NEED A MIDRANGE! MANY ULTRA HIGH END SPEAKERS BREAK THIS RULE. HAVING SAID THAT I RECOMMEND YOU GET SEPARATES IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE AND A RECEIVER IS A MUST, USE 1C'S. I SUGGEST YOU GO TO YOUR NEAREST DEALER AND AUDITION THE MODEL 2CE AND THE 1C WITH APPROPRIATE EQUIPMENT AND PICK YOUR POISON.

Dave (1/22/06): I have a small hole in the top wood section of black cloth of 1C, not the sides. How can I replace this small black cloth without sending speaker in to you? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, YOU CAN GO TO THE CUSTOMER SERVICE SECTION OF THIS WEB SITE AND DOWNLOAD INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE TOP OF YOUR 1C'. THIS IS VERY DIFFICULT SO BE SURE AFTER READING THE INSTRUCTIONS YOU CAN DO THE WORK. SHOULD YOU DECIDE TO SEND THE SPEAKER IN YOUR LOOKING AT $55.00 PLUS FREIGHT FOR US TO DO IT.

Jacques (1/20/06): I am presently purchasing a pair of Quatros. Will it be possible, later, to upgrade the two high frequency drivers to those of the Model 5A and, if so, will it be possible for technicians in South Africa to install the new drivers or will I have to send the speakers back to the factory?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, THE QUATRO IS AN UPGRADEABLE DESIGN. AT THIS POINT NOT KNOWING WHAT THE UPGRADE WOULD BE I WOULDN'T WANT TO SPECULATE. THE MODEL 5 TO 5A UPGRADE FOR INSTANCE WAS SO INVOLVED THAT IT REQUIRED AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND THEREFORE HAD TO BE SENT TO THE FACTORY. THE MIDRANGE AND TWEETER OF THE 5A WILL NOT WORK IN THE QUATRO WITHOUT EXTENSIVE WORK ON THE X-OVER IN THE CHAMBER BUT IT WOULD ALSO RAISE THE PRICE 40%!

Jacques (1/19/06): I have ordered a pair of Quatros. Can you please give me a few links by email through which I can directly access a number of reviews on this product? Or kindly post the links on this website? I find it difficult to find reviews on it; perhaps because it is such a new product.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, CONGRATULATIONS ON THE PURCHASE OF A FINE SPEAKER, I AM VERY PROUD OF HOW THEY TURNED OUT. WE HAVE NOT SENT THE QUATRO OUT FOR REVIEW SINCE THE QUATRO IS VERY NEW HAVING ONLY BEEN IN THE MARKET PLACE SINCE LAST FEB 05. WHEN A NEW PRODUCT IS INTRODUCED THE DEMAND IS ALWAYS HIGH BECAUSE OUR DEALERS MUST SET UP DEMO'S PLUS EVERY DESIGNER HAS FANS WHICH WILL BUY EVERYTHING THEY DESIGN RIGHT OUT OF THE GATE. IT TAKES ABOUT A YEAR FOR THIS TO EQUALIZE SO A REVIEW WOULD ONLY MAKE THE CUSTOMERS MORE ANGRY. SOME PEOPLE PURCHASE PRODUCT BASED ON A GOOD REVIEW ONLY TO FIND IT IS NOT WHAT THEY NEED, PUTTING THE PRODUCT ON THE USED MARKET. WE PREFER THE PRODUCT TO ESTABLISH LEGS ON ITS OWN MERIT BEFORE GETTING IT REVIEWED ALLOWING BETTER CONTROL OF PRODUCTION DEMANDS. I AM SURE THERE WILL BE REVIEWS IN THE FUTURE.

Havish (1/19/06): My question is about setting up the 2Ce signatures for proper bass response. I have Vandersteen 2Ce signatures, VSM-1s, VCC-1 and a V2W. When listening to music on my 2Ce signatures, I have noticed that the bass is lower than expected. The room itself is shaped unevenly and is probably causing a lot of problems. I used a test CD to measure the bass response and found that I get a steep drop of up to 10 dB below 50 Hz. The bass response in front of the right speaker seems to be much better than in front of the left one. The right speaker has a plain wall about 3 feet behind it whereas the left one has an unevenly shaped wall part of which is much closer to the speaker while the other part has a bookshelf behind it (shown in the top-view figure below). Since, the 2Ce has a rear-firing active acoustic coupler, does this make the composition of the wall behind the speakers more important? Particularly, I was wondering if the uneven wall shape behind the left speaker could be muting the bass response out of this speaker? Also, since I don't have much flexibility with positioning my speakers in this room as they are part of a home theater set up, will any kind of room treatment behind the left speaker help? Regardless of these room issues, the speakers perform wonderfully and have transformed the way I listen to music. Many thanks for designing such great speakers.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, SOME ROOMS JUST DO NOT SUPPORT BASS NO MATTER WHERE YOU PUT THE SPEAKERS. THE 10" DRIVER IN THE REAR OPERATES BELOW 50HZ, A FREQUENCY WITH A LONG WAVELENGTH SO IT COULD BE ON TOP, UNDER, ON THE SIDE, FORWARD, OR ON THE BACK WITHOUT MAKING ANY DIFFERENCE. THE REASON WE PUT ALL OUR LOW FREQUENCY DRIVERS (OR PORTS) ANYWHERE BUT THE FRONT IS FOR LOWER DISTORTION. ALL DRIVERS FOR LOW FREQUENCY WORK MAKE A LOT OF NON LINEAR NOISES (SURROUND, SPIDER, AND VOICE COIL) SINCE IT DOESN'T MATTER WHERE IT IS I PREFER NOT POINTING IT AT THE LISTENER. REMEMBER IF YOU ARE USING THE RADIO SHACK METER IT ROLLS OFF BELOW 50HZ, RESPONSE CURVES AVAILABLE ON THE WEB. YOUR ARE IN LUCK THERE IS A SOLUTION TO YOUR PROBLEM, SUB WOOFERS. MOVIES CONTAIN NOISES MUSIC SPEAKERS WERE NEVER DESIGNED TO HANDLE SO A SUB WOOFER SHOULD BE USED FOR PROTECTION. AS A SIDE BENEFIT YOUR 2 CHANNEL MUSIC WILL IMPROVE BY ADDING A 2WQ. ROOM TREATMENTS WILL NOT HELP A ROOM SUPPORT MORE BASS, SOME WILL ABSORB EXCESS ENERGY. I WOULD VISIT A VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND CHECK OUT WHICH SUB WOULD WORK BEST FOR YOU.

Randall (1/18/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen Model II. Is there any upgrades on the drivers and / or x-over?? Thank you for your attention and the best value in loudspeakers.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, THE MODEL 1 AND 2 SERIES LOUDSPEAKER ARE NOT UPGRADEABLE. IF THIS IS AN ISSUE I SUGGEST YOU INVEST IN A PAIR OF MODEL THREES, QUATROS OR FIVES, AS THEY ARE GUARANTIED TO BE UPGRADEABLE.

Unknown (1/17/06): HOW DO I KNOW I AM BUYING THE MODEL 2 CE . I FOUND ONE PAIR THAT HAS CE AT THE END OF THE SERIAL NUMBER IS THAT MEAN IS A CE SERIES?

Answer: HELLO, THERE ARE MANY VERSIONS OF THE 2CE SPEAKERS OVER THE YEARS. ALL 2 SERIES SPEAKERS STILL SAY "MODEL II" ON THE REAR PANEL, YOU ARE CORRECT ABOUT THE LETTERS AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER IDENTIFYING THEM AS 2CE'S. OVER THE 10 YEARS THEY WERE IN PRODUCTION THERE HAVE BEEN MANY MODIFICATIONS THAT ARE NOT UPGRADEABLE. I SUGGEST YOU FIND A PAIR SN# 77000 AND ABOVE AS THEY ARE FACTORY UPGRADEABLE TO 2CE SIG'S. THE 1 AND 2 SERIES WERE NEVER DESIGNED TO BE UPGRADEABLE AND STILL ARE NOT, BUT THE LAST YEAR OF PRODUCTION HAD MANY CHANGES PART OF WHICH BECAME THE SIGNATURE SERIES MAKING IT POSSIBLE. WHEN BUYING USED MAKE SURE YOU ARE ABLE TO AUDITION THEM BEFORE PURCHASE AND ASSURE THEY ARE WORKING CORRECTLY. ONE WAY FOR A LAY PERSON TO ASSES THEY ARE WORKING IS TO PUT THEM SIDE BY SIDE AND PLAY A MONO SOURCE, THEY SHOULD SOUND PERFECTLY THE SAME ASSURING YOU THEY HAVE NOT HAD ANY UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS.

Sheldon (1/17/06): First, my sincere thanks for producing the speakers that I have enjoyed since 1989. I have the 2C's and am considering upgrading to the 2ce Signature. I have heard there are significant improvements. I believe the new ones are 2db less efficient than my 2C's. I am concerned that my Linn LK140 amplifier, 90 into 8 and 140 into 4, will not be enough to drive these at a pleasing level. What are your thoughts? Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO SHELDON, THE SENSITIVITY OF THE 2CE SIG'S MEASURES ABOUT 2DB LESS HOWEVER THEY ARE EASIER TO DRIVE, SHOULD WORK OUT ABOUT THE SAME. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE IS TO HOOK THE AMP UP, PUT THE VOLUME CONTROL AT APPROX 12 O'CLOCK (WHERE MOST AMPLIFIERS BEGIN TO CLIP WITH A CD PLAYER) PLAY SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC. IF YOUR COMMENT IS "THAT IS AS LOUD AS I WOULD EVER WANT" IT IS ENOUGH. IF YOUR COMMENT IS "I WOULD LIKE IT A LITTLE LOUDER SOMETIMES" YOU WILL NEED MORE POWER.

Ned (1/15/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce's that are ten years old. Can I drive these with a 4 ohm Amp? And if I do, what are pro's & con's over driving them with 8 ohms?

Answer: HELLO NED, 8 OHM AND 4 OHM AMPLIFIERS DON'T REALLY EXIST. SOME AMPS ARE VERY LOW CURRENT DESIGNS AND MAY REQUIRE 8 OHM SPEAKERS BECAUSE THEY WOULD CURRENT LIMIT OR RUN VERY HOT INTO A 4 OHM SPEAKER. MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT THESE AMPLIFIERS ARE NOT SATISFACTORY FOR HIGH END SOUND AND SHOULD BE AVOIDED. AMPLIFIERS DESIGNED WITH ADEQUATE CURRENT CAPABILITY COULD CARE LESS WHETHER THEY ARE 4 OHM OR 8 OHMS AND GENERALLY SOUND MUCH BETTER. HIGH CURRENT BETTER SOUNDING AMPLIFIERS ARE NOT NECESSARILY VERY EXPENSIVE (NAD,ROTEL). THE ONLY EXCEPTION WOULD BE TUBE AMPLIFIERS AND THIS IS IMPEDANCE MATCHING FOR BETTER POWER TRANSFER, AGAIN MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT MOST TUBE AMPS WILL WORK ON 4 OR 8 OHMS BUT WILL SOUND DIFFERENT. LISTEN TO BOTH AND LEAVE IT HOOKED UP TO THE BEST SOUNDING ONE. SOME LOUDSPEAKER DESIGNERS ALLOW FOR VERY LOW IMPEDANCE, MY EXPERIENCE IS THERE IS NO REASON FOR THIS AND HAVING AN EASY LOAD WILL MAKE ANY AMP SOUND BETTER.

Dave (1/14/06): I've owned a pair of Vandersteen II (circa 1979)speakers for many many years now and still love them! I have used them with a B&K ST202 amp and Stereophon Revelation Preamp. I am planning to use them with a tube amp and preamp I never had the "specs" on these speakers.? Could you supply me with the specs of these speakers? The tube gear I am planning to use them with are in kit form from the Bottlehead website. The amps are mono-block 2 watts and they are- suggesting speakers with a minimum of? 93db and preferably 96db. Wondering where the Vandersteen II fall? into?

Answer: HELLO DAVE, LITERATURE AND SPECIFICATIONS ON A SPEAKER THIS OLD IS NOT AVAILABLE. SENSITIVITY IS APX 86DB FOR 2.83 VOLTS. TWO WATTS IS NOT ENOUGH POWER FOR YOUR 2'S I WOULD RECOMMEND A PUSH PULL AMP OF ABOUT 60 WATTS. YOU MIGHT GOOGLE D.I.Y. 2ND HARMONIC DISTORTION GENERATOR FOR THAT SINGLE ENDED SOUND AT LEAST YOU COULD TURN IT OFF WHEN YOU DON'T NEED IT. WE HAVE ALL THE PARTS STILL IN STOCK TO REPAIR YOUR 79 VINTAGE SPEAKERS. HAPPY LISTENING.

Unknown (1/14/06): I have had my speakers for a long time. Have always worked so wonderfully. I recently tried to hook up a little Sony turntable my daughter have? me for Christmas, and now I have no sound from the speakers at all.? Could it be a fuse? Please advise.

Answer: HELLO, THERE ARE NO FUSES AND ALL CONNECTIONS ARE SOLDERED CHECK AND SEE IF THE CD PLAYER STILL WORKS.

1B Owner (1/14/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 1B speakers from 1984! I returned them once becuase the tweeters were "fuzzing" out and you replaced the tweeters. The new tweeters continued to do the same.......frustrated and not wanting to send them back again from Saratoga CA(near San Jose) I replaced the tweeters myself a few times with various results....bottom line is the fuzzing still comes back intermittently.? Good thing I did not throw out the replaced tweeters since an EE? friend of mine tested them and said they were fine. I also have eliminated the tweeter setting knob on the back of the speaker as the culprit and now the only item left is the cross over circuitry.? I have a NAD amp which is a very good quality amp with clipping protection etc...........bottom line is I also have a Pioneer and a Yamaha and the speakers behave the same on all.? It does seem that they fuzz out more when the volume is low. I love the imaging of these speakers but cannot stand listening? to them like this.? Any suggestions? Any upgrade kit? New crossover electronics????

Answer: HELLO 1B OWNER, WHEN YOU SEND THE COMPLETE SPEAKER TO VANDERSTEEN FOR REPAIR THEY GO THROUGH A COMPLETE CHECK OUT INCLUDING A TRIP THROUGH THE CHAMBER. I ASSURE YOU THEY WERE NOT "FUZZING" OUT WHEN YOU RECEIVED THEM, SO WHAT COULD IT BE IN YOUR INSTALLATION. MY BEST GUESS WOULD BE THAT YOU ARE USING AFTER MARKET BANANA PLUGS AND THEY ARE LONGER THAN THE ONES WE SUPPLY. THEY COULD SHORT INTERMITTENTLY CAUSING THE SOUND YOU DESCRIBE. PULL YOUR PLUGS OUT ABOUT 1/8TH OF AN INCH AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS.

Francisco (1/14/06): I have talked to you several times over the telephone to ask different question Re: the various Vandersteen speakers that I own and/or have owned in the past (I have been an active classical music lover for over 50 years now). This note is more of a comment than a question. however, I am very interested in your feedback and or insights.? At the present time I am using a pair of 5As. Until recently I used the 5As in conjunction with a pair of $20K mono-blocks. A few months ago I tried, at the suggestion of my son, a couple of Pathos Classic One "INPOL" amps (each Pathos bi-amplifying each speaker). The Pathos input impedance is specified at 100 KOhm. I set the 5As crossover at this value and there was not bass. Next, I proceeded as recommended in the 5A manual to use an oscilloscope to determine the value of the crossover that would produce a 3dB at 100 Hz (relative to 1 KHz) reduction in output voltage from the amplifier. That point was at a crossover set of 10 KOhm (balanced input/output). Then I connected the system and what an incredible glorious sound came from those speakers! Truly natural and transparent with extraordinary resolution. Since last November I have used the system connected as described. I never heard better sound, all my friends and family agree. Comments on your part? The Pathos use a very interesting first stage-I have the schematics provided by the factory. Kind regards,

Answer: HELLO FRANCISCO, THANK YOU FOR YOUR KIND REMARKS. THIS IS MORE COMMON THAN I WOULD LIKE BECAUSE SOME AMP MANUFACTURERS ARE VERY CASUAL ABOUT THEIR INPUT IMPEDANCE ESPECIALLY AT 100HZ. I BELIEVE THERE IS NOT A BETTER WAY TO IMPROVE THE SOUND THAN BY USING AN INTEGRAL SUBWOOFER WITH ITS OWN SPECIALLY DESIGNED AMP UNIQUE TO THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUBWOOFER AND ITS PLACEMENT.?THIS REQUIRES A HIGH PASS AT 80 OR 100HZ WHICH CAN NOT BE ACCOMPLISHED SATISFACTORILY IN THE SPEAKER. THE LARGE CAPS AND COILS NEEDED AND THE FACT THAT THE IMPEDANCE'S ARE FLYING ALL OVER THE PLACE MAKES IT IMPOSSIBLE TO DO STATE OF THE ART. THE MOST TRANSPARENT WAY TO DO THIS IS WITH A BIASED HIGH QUALITY CAPACITOR ACTING WITH THE INPUT RESISTOR OF THE AMPLIFIER TO FORM A SPECIFIC HIGH PASS. THIS REQUIRES VERY ACCURATE INPUT IMPEDANCE VALUES AND IS WHY THE OWNERS MANUAL SPECIFIES A WAY TO CHECK. I AM SORRY YOUR DEALER DID NOT VERIFY THIS BEFORE INSTALLATION AS VERY EXPENSIVE DAMAGE CAN OCCUR, MOST DO. HAPPY LISTENING.

Lori (1/14/06): Hi Richard, I would like to know if I need any upgrading for my system to handle the new LCD HDTV's, etc. I have the 2W, a pair of model? 3's, a pair of model 1's and a VCC. I think we bought them somewhere between 1996 and 1999. I will look forward to hearing form you. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO LORI, HIGHER DEFINITION EQUIPMENT WILL IMPROVE YOUR PICTURE, NO CHANGES REQUIRED. SOON WE MAY HAVE HIGHER DEFINITION SOURCES FOR BETTER SOUND, STILL NO SPEAKER CHANGES REQUIRED EXCEPT YOUR EXISTING ONES WILL SOUND BETTER.

Unknown (1/11/06): Is it normal for the X-2 crossover to increase the bass level volume very dramatically from the factory wx-2? Both are set at 33k.

Answer: THE BASS LEVEL SHOULD BE ABOUT THE SAME BETWEEN THE TWO. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE WX-2 X-OVER IS NOT ADJUSTED PROPERLY BE SURE THE SWITCH IS ON NOT OFF. WE HAVE USED MANY SWITCHES OVER THE YEARS YOU WANT TO LOOK FOR THE WORD "OPEN" OR ON. THE SWITCH IS USUALLY MARKED ONE OR THE OTHER BUT NOT BOTH. THE CHART WILL TELL YOU WHICH SWITCH (S) NEED TO BE ON. I SUSPECT YOU HAVE THE SWITCHES ON THAT SHOULD BE OFF.

Curt (1/10/06): Is there any type of adapter or configuration that would allow me to use banana plugs on my 2Ce Signature's?

Answer: HELLO CURT, THE INPUT BARRIER STRIP ON THE 2CE SIG'S ARE THE BEST SOUNDING, GAS TIGHT CONNECTION WE COULD FIND. USING AN ADAPTER WOULD COMPROMISE THE SOUND SIGNIFICANTLY.? YOU COULD GO TO AN AUTO PARTS STORE AND BUY SOME O-LUGS MADE FOR A #10 SCREW AND 12GA WIRE, STRIP THE END OF YOUR WIRE AND CRIMP THE CONNECTOR ON. SOLDER THE CRIMPED CONNECTION TO MAKE IT GAS TIGHT. YOU NOW HAVE A STATE OF THE ART CONNECTION THAT WILL REMAIN THAT WAY FOR YEARS WITHOUT HAVING TO CLEAN THEM. BE SURE TO INSULATE THE LUGS SO THEY WILL NOT SHORT AGAINST THE ALUMINUM DRESS PLATE.

Unknown (1/7/06): Which subwoofer should I use to connect to my integrated amp? 2w or 2wq It has an output connection for the subwoofers. I have a DK Design mk II reference amp. Is there a difference in the sound quality?

Answer: HELLO UNKNOWN, THE 2W AND 2WQ BOTH WORK THE SAME WAY THE ONLY DIFFERENCE IS THE 2W IS THE OLD DISCONTINUED VERSION AND THE 2WQ IS CURRENT. THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE BY THE WAY. THEY CAN ONLY BE USED WITH INTEGRATED AMPLIFIERS THAT HAVE "PRE OUT" "MAIN IN" JACKS ON THE REAR OF THE UNIT, THIS IS WERE YOU INSTALL THE WX-2 OR X-2 HIGH PASS X-OVER. DO NOT USE THE 2W OR 2WQ WITH OUT A HIGH-PASS OR EXPENSIVE DAMAGE TO THE SUB WILL OCCUR.

Martin (1/7/06): I read somewhere that it is possible to increase the volume of the 2wq subs by use of jumpers. How is this done and why does it work?

Answer: HELLO MARTIN, THIS ONLY WORKS WHEN YOU HAVE STEREO SUBS. THE 2WQ HAS STEREO INPUTS (RIGHT AND LEFT) WHICH ARE SUMMED TOGETHER TO DRIVE THE SUB AMP. WHEN YOU DRIVE BOTH INPUTS WITH THE SAME SIGNAL THE WOOFER GAIN GOES UP 6DB, THIS IS ONLY REQUIRED WITH VERY HIGH SENSITIVITY LOUDSPEAKERS WERE THE WOOFER LEVEL WON'T GO HIGH ENOUGH. IF THE SUB LEVEL IS WITHIN THE RANGE OF YOUR SPEAKERS ONLY ONE INPUT SHOULD BE USED BECAUSE SIGNAL TO NOISE IS IMPROVED JUST LEAVE ONE INPUT UNUSED.

Oliver (1/4/06): I am looking to buy a subwoofer which is suitable for HT/Stereo. I am currently using a Time Coherent speakers from Meadowlark and am looking for a Sub that would do them justice mainly in the HT. I play mainly at about 5db below reference so in my 2600cubic feet room, I probably need about 105db or so of subwoofer action. Does the V2W with lfe input able to drive my room at about 105db from 20hz to 80hz?

Answer: THE V2W IN PAIRS SHOULD BE USED IN THIS ROOM. THE ADDED ADVANTAGE OF INJECTING THE LFE BASS INTO THE ROOM FROM TWO LOCATIONS WILL MAKE THE BASS RESPONSE MUCH MORE LINEAR. THE V2W IS PROPERLY Q' ED (NOT BOOMY) SO THEY SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE CORNERS WHERE RESPONSE WILL BE MOST UNIFORM THROUGHOUT. THIS WILL GIVE THE SPL YOUR ASKING FOR AT LOW DISTORTION.

Jonas (1/16/06): Hi Richard. I am thinking of adding HT to my stereo setup. Two questions: First, will having the surrounds on the ceiling work ok and if so would you recommend the VSMs for this? Second, if a maximum of 4 people will be watching from 11' away will a center channel be necessary or can I just use my 5As?? Thanks very much in advance for your help.

Answer: HELLO JONAS, ADDING HT CAPABILITY TO YOUR SYSTEM IS A WONDERFUL THING AS LONG AS IT DOESN'T COMPROMISE YOUR 2 CHANNEL PERFORMANCE. BE SURE TO CONTINUE THE USE OF A 2 CHANNEL PRE-AMP AND IMPORT YOUR HT THROUGH A UNUSED INPUT, SOME HAVE THEATER BYPASS FOR THIS. I USE TUBE AMPS FOR STEREO AND CLASS D DIGITAL FOR THE REMAINING 5 CHANNELS. IF YOUR AMPS ARE DIFFERENT CHECK THAT THEY ARE THE SAME PHASE. THE BEST PLACE FOR REAR CHANNEL IMO IS THE REAR WALL ABOUT 18" ABOVE EAR HEIGHT. THIS WAY IF AN EFFECT GOES OVERHEAD AND TO THE REAR IT WILL DO SO. SIDE WALL PLACEMENT WORKS WELL IF THEY ARE PLACED BEHIND THE LISTENER FOR THE SAME REASON. REMEMBER THE CAUTION IN THE OWNERS MANUEL ABOUT POINTING THE SIDE OR CENTER DIRECTLY AT THE LISTENER, DON'T DO IT. POINT SOURCES LIKE OUR CENTER CHANNEL AND REAR CHANNEL SPEAKERS MEASURE AND SOUND GREAT AS LONG AS YOU ARE INDIRECT (ON AXIS MEASUREMENTS AND SOUND ARE NOT GOOD). PHANTOM CENTER IS BETTER FOR THE PERSON SITTING ON THE CRACK IN THE COUCH, IF A VIEWER IS EVEN SLIGHTLY OFF CENTER DIALOG WILL BE COMPROMISED. THERE IS ALWAYS THE CHANCE YOU GET THE CENTER BUT A MOVIE MAY BE ALL YOU GET FOR THE EVENING.

Marius (1/29/07): I just received my pair of 2wq's and have 3 questions. My setup consists of an Audible Illusions Modulus 3a and McCormack DNA-1 Deluxe. 1. The preamp states that speaker connections need to be inverted at the speaker which I've always had in place to drive my 2 mains, which are Coincident Conquests. Do I do the same at the 2wq connections as well? I'm assuming yes but just wanted to be sure. 2. With regards to the X-2, once I order it, will it have factory set settings that will not be adjustable in case I change any of the above mentioned components in the future? Will I have to buy new X-2's, send them back to you for adjustment, or be able to adjust them myself accordingly? 3. I've heard that there is also a M5-HP as a crossover but it's not listed on your site. Is it an upgrade to the X-2 that would be recommended for my configuration? If so, what are the benefits? What type of interconnect cable is used? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO MARIUS, BOTH THE SUB AND SPEAKERS WOULD HAVE TO BE FLIPPED OUT OF PHASE. THE X-2 IS A FIXED UNIT AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. THE HP-5 X-OVER WOULD BE HIGHER PERFORMANCE THEREFORE A BETTER CHOICE AND ONCE PURCHASED THEY ARE ADJUSTABLE TO ANY AMPLIFIER. THEY ARE AVAILABLE IN BOTH SINGLE-ENDED OR BALANCED CONTACT YOUR DEALER FOR INFORMATION. READ SOME OF THE Q&A'S ON THIS SITE ABOUT X-OVERS FOR MORE INFORMATION.

Michael (2/29/08):? I've recently finished "dialing in" my recently acquired 2CE Sig IIs but I was wondering if using room-correction signal processing could be even more helpful in getting the speakers location, toe in, and rake "just right".
Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, UNLESS YOUR ROOM IS VERY BAD THE COST IN TRANSPARENCY, FIDELITY AND DYNAMICS OF ALL THE PROCESSING IS NOT WORTH IT. I DO BELIEVE IN CORRECTING FOR BASS IN A ROOM, THAT IS WHY ARE MORE EXPENSIVE SPEAKERS INCLUDE THIS FEATURE. WE DO THE CORRECTION IN THE INTERNAL SUB-WOOFER AMPLIFIER SO NO EXTRA PARTS ARE IN THE SIGNAL PATH.
ITALY (5/25/09): Hello from Italy! I would like to buy a pair of you wonderful speakers, but it seems it's impossible to find a shopor a distributor of your systems.
Answer: HELLO FROM ITALY, FAX DELRAMA USA 480-367-1355 THOMAS SHOULD BE ABLE TO HELP YOU. HIS EMAIL ADDRESS IS delrama@cox.net.
Paul (2/29/08): I am in the Pittsburgh area and the closest dealer is more than 2 hours away. Do you have any plans to garner a dealer in my area? Thanks for your help.
Answer: HELLO PAUL, AT THIS TIME WE DO NOT HAVE ANY PLANS. OUR SPEAKERS ARE ALL TUNED IN THE CHAMBER ONE PAIR AT A TIME WHICH LIMITS HOW MANY WE CAN MAKE.
Norm (5/27/09): Hello Richard. I have a pair of the Model 2 speakers. Each speaker has two sets of inputs: one set for low freqency and one set for mid/high frequency. Can I use 4 identical mono amps to power this pair of speakers? I plan to use one amp per speaker input, providing a separate amp for each Low and High input. Also, the speakers are rated at about 6 ohms. Is resistance (ohms) much different for the High vs. Low inputs on each speaker? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO NORM,? PERUSE THE POSTED FAQ'S ON THIS PAGE,? THERE ARE MANY ANSWERS ABOUT BI-AMPING.
Arthur (12/26/10):? My name is Arthur and I was fortunate enough to buy a pair of Model 1's with serial nos. 35988/35989. The top and bottom wood veneers have seen better days and are starting to peel off. The socks are pretty decent but there are some paint stains, some gum stuck and a small hole on one of them. I really want to restore them but I don't know if I could afford it. Please if you would let me know how much it would cost to re-veneer them and replace the socks. If I can afford it, I will be glad to drive them down to Hanford. I live in San Jose. I'll do eveything I can to restore them to a more decent condition as I really love their sound. Thanks and all the best.
Answer: HELLO ARTHUR,? YOU SHOULD CALL 559-582-0234 AND THEY WILL GIVE YOU A QUOTE.
Anthony (8/18/12):?I am in the process of purchasing a used pair of Vandersteen 2ce speakers with the following serial #s 70448ce and 70449ce. Can you verify the manufactured date of this pair. The speaker seems to distort a bit the seller indicate the woofers may need to be resealed.
?Answer: HELLO ANTHONY,? I ANSWER THESE QUESTIONS AT HOME AND THE RECORDS ARE AT WORK.? WE DO NOT DOCUMENT THE BUILD DATE AND NEED TO SEE THE SPEAKER TO KNOW.? WE SAVE A LOT OF OUR CUSTOMERS MONEY THAT WAY AND WHEN SERVICE IS REQUIRED IT IS EASY FOR US BY LOOKING AT THE PARTS.? I CAN ONLY GUESS THAT THEY ARE 15 YEARS OLD OR SO.
Ron (2/29/08): ?Hello Richard, I believe the 2Ce Sig II's are your latest edition, but I've heard people refer to them as MK II's. I'm? ordering a pair and don't want to be surprised when I receive them!
?Answer:? HELLO RON, SAME SPEAKER.
PHIL (5/28/09): Hi, I have a question on which speaker would be a better fit for my room. I'm looking at the 2Ce SIG II or the 3A SIGNATURE. I've read nothing but rave reviews on both models (along w/ your other models) but I also read that they are a bit harder to place in a room than other speakers. I don't think my room would pose a problem. The room is 13x7x32 & I sit approx. 12' from my mains now. This is a combo HT/2 channel system. I have plenty of room from the back wall (approx 48-60") & from the side walls (approx 18-24") I also have numerous room treatments (bass traps, absorption panels, corner busters along w/ stuffy furniture & 1/2 of the room is carpeted). What pair would you recommend or would either pair be a good fit. I have yet to hear either model but that will be the deciding factor if either model will work in my room. I also have dual Velo SPL-1200R subs that are used for both venues. Any recommendation you can give will greatly be appreciated.?
Answer: HELLO PHIL,? IN MY OPINION THE 2'S OR 3'S ARE NO MORE DIFFICULT TO PLACE THAN ANY OTHER HIGH PERFORMANCE SPEAKER.? MAYBE THIS IS REFERENCED TO SOME SIX AND A HALF INCH TWO WAY MADE IN CHINA, IN THAT CASE IT WON'T MATER WHERE THEY ARE PLACED.? DEFINITELY A AUDITION IS IN ORDER BECAUSE BOTH OF THEM SHOULD WORK EQUALLY WELL
Wilson (12/29/10):?? 'Hello - I have a pair of 2CEs (s/n 74170, 74171), and the veneer is starting to lift. ?Do you have a recommended repair method, such as using a specific glue or bonding agent and applying pressure to the damaged area? ?I would prefer an in-home repair so I can continue saving for an upgrade to the Model 5a :). ?Thanks for your support.
Answer: HELLO WILSON,? IF THE WOOD AROUND THE EDGE IS LIFTING YOU CAN USE A LITTLE HEAT AS IT IS APPLIED WITH HOT MELT GLUE.? IF THE TOP SURFACE IS LIFTING, WOOD GLUE WOULD BE BEST
Matt (8/27/12): Hello - I recently acquired some Vandersteen speakers after a family member passed.? I would like to know if I can purchase the stock wall mounts for the vsm-1's, and also if any stands are available for the vlr's.? The vlr pair that I have seems to look more like the vcc-1 and not the current vlr's that are shown on your site.? They sound wonderful, however I cannot get much use out of either of these pairs without mounts or stands.? Please let me know.
Answer: HELLO MATT,? YOU CAN CALL 559-582-0324 AND BUY THE VSM-1 MOUNT KIT.? WE NEVER HAD A STAND FOR THE VCC-1 OR THE OLD VLR.? MOST DEALERS HAVE GENERAL PURPOSE STANDS FROM VARIOUS COMPANY'S THAT MIGHT WORK.? CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER LISTED ON THIS SITE.
Max (3/01/08): .The 88 year old lives on Vancouver Island, thus your suggestion of asking my Vandersteen dealer to visit and solve my problem, would entail a good 2000 mile trip, plus a 2 hour ferry ride! In other words, IMPOSSIBLE. The BASS is there but it's muddy...not an overhang(?) problem. Am desperate...if I mailed you photographs of the room plus dimensions would you help?
Answer: HELLO MAX, I WOULD BUT IF YOU HAVE TRIED THE SETUP IN THE MANUAL I'M OUT OF IDEAS. MAKE SURE THE STANDS ARE FILLED WITH DRY SAND AND THE SPIKES ARE TIGHT.
Bill (5/28/09): My speakers are Vandersteen 5As. Other equipment includes Ayre V-5xe amp (at your suggestion -- very happy with it) and C5xeMP disc player (bought because of happiness with other Ayres), Sony TC-WE475 cassette deck, Parasound JC-2 preamp, and an Audio Source (AS) Preamp Tuner Two (bought in '94; tuner is not a critical source for me). Decided to replace the AS with a new Sony XDR-F1HD tuner, a small plastic box that nevertheless sounds better than the AS. Disconnecting and unplugging the AS caused a pronounced hum in the 5As' woofers. Plugging 5A power cords into different outlets in the room made no difference (I think they're on the same circuit). Plugging the Sony tuner into the system made no difference. Tried putting the AS box back in the stack under the Sony, without plugging it in -- no difference. But when I plugged the AS's power cord back in (stout 3-conductor), the hum reduced, and when I installed a connector cord between the AS's outputs and Parasound preamp inputs, the hum reduced to original, acceptable levels. The coax line from the roof antenna remains connected to the Sony tuner (which has a 2-conductor polarized plug). The AS remains off. Can you explain this odd interaction, and suggest a better way to avoid hum than keeping an unused component plugged into the system? Thanks for your help, again!
Answer: HELLO BILL,? THIS IS BEYOND THIS FORUM.? CALL ME 559-582-0324 AND I WILL TRY TO FIGURE THIS OUT.
Raymond (12/30/10):? 'Hi I've been a long time admirer of Vandies and now have the opportunity to purchase a usded pair of 2ce signatures from the original owner. ?Wanted to know if I should be concerned with the surrounds. ??What is the types of surrounds used and would it be difficult to take a peak at these before buying? ?Thanks in advance for your reply.
Answer: HELLO RAYMOND,? WE USE RUBBER SURROUNDS.? THE ONLY WAY TO INSPECT THEM WOULD BE TO SHINE A FLASHLIGHT THROUGH THE FABRIC.
Richard (8/28/12):Have you any experience with Music Reference RM200 Mk2 amp with your (my) 5As?
Answer: HELLO RICHARD,? I HAVE NOT HEARD THE RM200 ON THE 5A BUT IF IT IS ENOUGH POWER I KNOW IT IS A GOOD SOUNDING AMP.? AS I ALWAYS I RECOMMEND YOU LISTEN TO IT BEFORE YOU BUY.
Ron (3/02/08): Richard, I'm in the USAF stationed overseas and will be purchasing the 2Ce Sig II. These speakers will be shipped Priority Mail through the Post Office, and was wondering if the container are double corrugated? to protect the loudspeaker during transit? Thanks, Ron
Answer: HELLO RON, THE SPEAKERS ARE COVERED BY TWO LAYERS OF DOUBLE WALL CARDBOARD WITH CORNER PROTECTORS. I DO NOT HAVE ANY EXPERIENCE WITH SHIPPING? VIA THE POST OFFICE SO I CAN'T COMMENT.
David (6/01/09): Richard, I just acquired a pair of 1b's, untested but complete with cartons at a bargain price; can these be upgraded and/or restored to 1c's and if so how much. I will submit serial #'s if needed as they are in temporary storage. Will perform test/troubleshooting at a later date.
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? THE MODEL ONES AND TWOS ARE NOT UPGRADABLE BUT WE HAVE IN STOCK ALL PARTS REQUIRED TO REPAIR ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS? MANUFACTURED IN THE LAST 33 YEARS
Rob (12/30/10):? Mr. Vandersteen, I have talked to you on land line several times and here on one occasion; have always come away enlightened. ?I recently changed my amplification to the Ayre AX7e, running a balanced system with the C5XE-mp, to my 2 yr. old Quatros. ?I am trying to find a speaker cable that will help maximize system performance, and I know your recommendation is four separate cable runs from the amplifier to the speakers to eliminate, (as I understand it) electrical distortion/cross talk, into the mid-tweeter from the base, and that this can only be effectively accomplished by not having both of the bi-wire runs pass through the same cable sheath. ?I had received a couple of recommendations, one, Kimber Kable, advertises their BiFocal X as "designed specifically for bi-wire loudspeaker systems". ?They claim "electrical isolation is accomplished by correlating circuit geometries with an isolating ESD matrix", (whatever that means), but all wires to each speaker pass through the same cable sheath. ?The other, Audioquest, states their Gibraltar cable, for example, "is exceptional bi-wire cable when halves are separated at the speaker end, the double quad-helix design turns Gibraltar into a true double bi-wire set, thanks to the magnetic autonomy of each quad helix. ?When separated, the dual star quads let Gibraltar be a maximum performance double bi-wire in a single cable." ?Based on those claims, and others like them, do you still recommend two separate cable runs per speaker, or have cable manufactures' solved the problem of "differing electrical characteristics" of four bi-wired cables carried within a single sheath? ?I am currently running a four cable set of Audioquest CV-6 to my Quatros and would not want to purchase much more expensive cables which deliver lesser performance than my present set up. ?This Ayre/Vandersteen combo produces the best sound of any system I have previously owned; my wife is thankful that I am no longer looking for upgrades, (except cable).
Answer: HELLO ROB,? THIS HAS BEEN BEAT TO DEATH.? THERE ARE MANY Q & A IN THIS FORUM ABOUT THIS SUBJECT.? TRY THE DIFFERENT WIRE COMBINATIONS AND BUY THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST.
Soney (8/28/12): My name is Soney Mathew. I am from India. I own your 2ce speakers. Would you please suggest me a amp? It can be either Pre power combination or a not very expensive Tube amp.
Answer: HELLO SONEY,? GIVE ME THE NAMES THAT ARE AVAILABLE IN YOUR MARKET FOR YOU TO TRY.? WITH THAT LIST I CAN GIVE YOU SOME IDEA.? FOR AFFORDABLE TUBES ROGUE WORKS WELL.
Steve (3/03/08):? I have 2Ci's I bought new ~20yrs ago and they are still working well.? I'm looking to change from 2 channel to 5.1 surround (for movies). I would like to buy the new 2Ce sig II's for the fronts (L/R) (esp. for music). Do you recommend I use the 2Ci's or VSM's for rear (side wall) surround sound? If the VSM is recommended over the 2Ci for side surround sound then is there any other use for my 2Ci's (e.g. 7.1 surround rears)? Another idea might be 2Ci's in the rear instead of on the side wall for the rear surround in a 5.1 setup?
Answer:? HELLO STEVE, VSM-1'S FOR THE SIDE AND REAR WOULD BE BEST. IF YOU DO NOT NEED SPEAKERS FOR YOUR GARAGE YOU COULD USE THEM IN THE REAR AND VSM-1 FOR THE SIDE. UNLESS YOU HAVE A VERY LONG ROOM YOU ARE BETTER OF DOING 5.1 WITH MORE SUBS AND A UPGRADED CENTER WITH YOUR MONEY.
Mike (6/02/09): I have a pair of Model 3A speakers, powered by an Ayre model V3 amp at 100 watts and a Manley Shrimp pre-amp. (room size is 13 X 18 feet with a 9 foot ceiling) With the 3As and the Ayre V3, I have tried a few different preamps (including an Audio Research LS2-BMk II) and with all of the pre-amps, I only get the volume knob up to approx the 9 o-clock to 10 o-clock position before it gets too loud. Does this mean that my Ayre amp is too much power for the 3As? Am I OK here or am I missing something sonically by not being able to increase the pre-amp volume to the 12 o-clock to 1 o-clock position? Thanks...
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? VOLUME CONTROL? ARE NOT STANDARDIZED SO THE POWER PUT OUT BY THE AMPLIFIER HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH THE POSITION OF THE CONTROL.? THIS ALSO TELLS US THAT CLIPPING WILL OCCUR AT A LOW VOLUME SETTING, MAY BE 11 O'CLOCK.
Mitchel (1/01/11):? Hello Richard and Happy New Year. I am using a Spectral ? ?amp & preamp and have always heard or read that achieve their best perform with fast design speakers such as avalon, Magnepan, Magico etc. How would you categorize your 2CE Signature II speakers? ??Thanks
Answer: HELLO MITCHEL,? SPEED IS A MATER OF BANDWIDTH AND I THINK YOU WILL FIND THE HIGH FREQUENCY EXTENSION OF ALL YOU MENTIONED TO BE ABOUT THE SAME.
Phillip (8/30/12): Thanks for answering my question about powering my pair of 2Wqs above.? I will go with your advice and leave the 2Wqs plugged directly into the wall outlets.? My question would then be, can I plug my power amplifer (450 watt total output, solid state, class A/B) into the same outlet as one of the 2Wqs, or would the power demands be too great?? That's why I was asking about the power consumption of the 2Wq.? Thanks again.
Answer: HELLO PHILLIP,? NO PROBLEM BECAUSE THE 2WQ IS ALWAYS ON SO THE INRUSH CURRENT OF YOUR AMPLIFIER WILL BE NO PROBLEM.
Larry (3/03/08): Richard, my name is Larry and over the past 10 or so years we have had a number of exchanges on this topic. This one however is MUCH more satisfying. I have a pair of 1Bs which I bought over 10 years ago. The cats got to them after less then 2 years. They looked terrible and it was really hard to justify spending over $300 on SHIPPING and repair when they only cost $600 in the first place. Consequently they went back into their boxes and into the basement. They weren't displayable and they weren't sellable. I could rant for hours about the faulty design of covers that prohibits reasonably economical replacement, or? the policy that says they have to be shipped 2,000 miles to be repaired only at the factory - but that is not why I am writing. I am writing to compliment the Dorsey's at Soundscape Audio Video in? Baltimore for taking a chance, going against the grain, and locally recovering my speakers. They did a great job and were a pleasure to work with. By doing this they add value to your product that is really hard to calculate. By doing this at a reasonable cost they make your? speakers a viable option for folks in the real world of kids, cats, and a house full of activity. You owe them a favor and you would be hard pressed to find a dealer who does a finer job of representing your product. You can reach me through John or Jason at Soundscape if you want to discuss. Call them anyway and say thank you!
Answer: HELLO LARRY, ALL VANDERSTEEN DEALERS HAVE THE OPTION IF THEY HAVE THE TIME. IT IS GOOD TO HEAR THAT YOU RECEIVED EXCELLENT SERVICE BY YOUR DEALER. THERE ARE VERY FEW SPEAKER DESIGNS THAT CAN BE MADE LIKE NEW IN ONE DAY FOR $300.00 SO I DISAGREE ABOUT THE FAULTY DESIGN. EACH HIS OWN.
Mike (6/04/09): Richard. Is there an electronic crossover that controls the frequency response of the "active acoustic coupler" in the model 3? What controls that driver allowing it to only operate between 26Hz and 35Hz? Thanks..
Answer:? HELLO MIKE,? AS YOU CAN SEE IN THE CUT-AWAY PICTURE OF THE 3A SIG LITERATURE THE REAR DRIVER HAS A MAGNET, AND WIRES ATTACHED TO THE CROSSOVER.? THE ANSWER IS THE CROSSOVER WHICH DETERMINES WHAT DRIVERS GET WHAT FREQUENCY'S IN ALL LOUDSPEAKERS.
John (1/02/11):? 'I have a pair of 2Cs purchased in 1985 and used with great pleasure since then in Philadelphia. They (and I) have aged somewhat gracefully, but I believe they have less tight base than before. ?What would you recommend? ?Is it possible to upgrade them (I know it's impossible to upgrade myself) to the 2CE Signature II model? ?Thanks for your response.
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THERE ARE NO UPDATES FOR ANY MODEL TWO OR ONE.
Lenny (8/30/12): I'm Leny from Indonesia, I have Vandersteen Model 4, and I try to look here, but why i cannot find the image from Model 4.
?Answer: HELLO LENNY, THE MODEL 4 WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION OVER 20 YEARS AGO.
Richard (3/03/08): Richard: Nice job posting and replying to the disgruntled used-Vandersteen customer in your FAQ section. Clearly you did not have to post the negative feedback. I'm glad that you made the point about how wrong it is to buy used gear and then to expect a boatload of free support. I recently sold a pair of 2Wq's over the internet and I didn't hesitate to provide as much? info to the user as possible, about how to hook them up. This hobby is all about getting good sound out of our systems and I wouldn't feel right knowing that I let someone take those speakers without understanding how to connect them. Additionally, your manuals are quite informative and there is a wealth of info about how to hook up the speakers right here. I must admit that you can be gruff at times but you deliver very very good customer service, including taking calls yourself. I have owned six different? models of Vandersteen speakers and I couldn't be happier. Best of? luck.
Answer:? HELLO RICHARD, I AM THE ONLY TECH GUY AT VANDERSTEEN, SO IT IS ALWAYS BUSY AND SOMETIMES TENSE. IT IS FINANCIALLY IMPOSSIBLE TO PROVIDE LIKE NEW SERVICE ON A PRODUCT THAT HAS BEEN OUT THERE FOR 32 YEARS AND POSSIBLY ON ITS THIRD OWNER. THANK YOU FOR GETTING IT.
John (6/04/09): Richard, how do the Quatro Woods differ from the Quatro Wood II?
Answer:? HELLO JOHN,? THE QUATRO WOOD II HAVE COMPONENTS BASED ON THE 5A.? THE REGULAR QUATRO WOODS DRIVERS ARE BASED ON THE 3A SIG.? YOU CAN IDENTIFY THE MK II BY LOOKING AT THE MIDRANGE CONE THE REGULAR QUATRO WILL HAVE A SMOOTH CONE AND THE MK II IS WOVEN COMPOSITE.? THE MK II CLOSES THE GAP BETWEEN THE FABRIC QUATRO AND THE MODEL 5A
David (1/06/11):?? Currently, I have a pair of 1Cs that were purchased in 1996 or 1997. ?I would like to create a home theater. ?Is there anything I should be concerned about integrating the 1Cs with a new Vandersteen center and subwoofer? ?Thanks.
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? NO, ONLY THAT YOU SHOULD READ THE INFO IN THE DESIGN AND APPLICATION ON THIS SITE.
Jon (9/02/12):I have a pair of 2CE's, serial #'s 78194 C & 78195 C.? Do you have stands for them I can buy? I'm assuming that the upgrade to signatures is no longer available?? Do you still sell the components that made up that upgrade?
Answer: HELLO JON,? THE STAND FOR THE 2CE IS THE SAME AS THE 2CE SIG II.? THERE NEVER WAS A UPDATE FOR A MODEL ONE OR TWO.? THE MODEL THREE IS THE ONLY SOCK VANDERSTEEN THAT IS UP-GRADABLE.
Greg (3/04/08):? Can I change the socks on my 2CE Signatures at home?
Answer: HELLO GREG, IF YOU HAVE A SEWING MACHINE, HIGH POWER AIR STAPLE GUN AND BASIC SKILLS, YES. YOU CAN GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ORDER BULK FABRIC. IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE CLEAR TO YOU ON THIS WEB PAGE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE, GO FOR IT BUT WE CAN NOT HOLD YOUR HAND BY PHONE.
Adrian (6/11/09): How can a naim supernait integrated amp connect to the Quatro?
Answer:? HELLO ADRIAN,? I DON'T KNOW BUT A NAIM DEALER WOULD.? YOU WOULD NEED TO BE ABLE TO PUT THE HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PREAMP SECTION AND THE AMPLIFIER SECTION IN THE SUPERNAIT.? IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE THEN THE QUATRO'S WILL NOT WORK FOR YOU.
Josh (1/05/11):? I am researching purchasing Signature 3A's - however, I have a query about the active bass. I will be taking the speakers back to Australia with me in just over a years time. Obviously they have different power supply - 240V 50Hz vice the 120V over here. Do you have kit's / mod's that will enable me to use these over there?
Answer: HELLO JOSH,? THE MODEL 3A SIG IS NOT ACTIVE.
Eric (9/03/12): What is the sensitivity of the VLR speakers? Can they be driven adequately from a 6 watt SET tube amp?
Answer: HELLO ERIC,? 84 DB 6 OHMS.? A 6 WATT SET WILL ONLY DRIVE HORNS SUCCESSFULLY.? THE VLR WANT 40 WATTS MIN.? THE SOUND OF AN AMP CAN NOT BE DETERMINED BY ANY SPECIFICATION ONLY BY AUDITION.
Scott (3/04/08):? Hi Richard, I am in the process of a fairly comprehensive upgrade of? my system. I plan to base this on a pair of 3A's that I'm getting a good deal on. I intend to upgrade them to 3A Signatures in the future.? I will be running these bi-wired, but not bi-amping them. Since I am at a crossroads otherwise, I would like your input on which preamp and amp to pair them with. I currently have a Harmon Kardon DVD48 as a CD player. I? have read that you use McCormack amps when demoing your speakers and so I am considering the McCormack TLC-1 preamp and DNA 125 amplifier.? Do you think that these would complement the speakers well? Do you? have any other recommendations (within a similar price range) that you suggest I look into? This will mainly be for playing CDs of rock music and critical? listening to mixes. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO SCOTT, WE HAVE USED MCCORMACK EQUIPMENT AND MANY OTHER IN OVER 30 YEARS OF SHOWS. A SHOW ENVIRONMENT IS FOR BUSINESS NOT COMPARATIVE LISTENING IT IS A HOTEL ROOM AFTER ALL. WHEN BUILDING A NEW SYSTEM FROM SCRATCH I WOULD MAKE YOUR DECISION ON SPEAKERS FIRST (THAT IS WERE THE BIGGEST DIFFERENCES ARE FROM ONE DESIGN AND ANOTHER) . PURCHASE THEM AND BEGIN YOUR SEARCH FOR THE BEST SOUND YOU CAN FIND FOR YOUR TASTE.
Craig (6/12/09): I have a MC 2275 integrated amp, am interested in the Quatros, have 75 atts/side is this sufficient to drive the speakers to 100db Regards
Answer:? HELLO CRAIG,? NOT ALL WATTS ARE CREATED EQUAL SO ONLY AN EVALUATION WILL ANSWER THE QUESTION ACCURATELY.? ASK YOU DEALER TO DEMO WITH THE UNIT OR EQUIVALENT.? THE QUATRO SYSTEM REQUIRES A HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PREAMP AND AMPLIFIER SO BE CERTAIN THE MAC HAS THIS LOOP.
John (1/07/11):? I want to change the grill cloth on my Vandersteen Model II C speakers and have followed your online instructions on removing the bottom plate but how do I remove the top plate? Thanks
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THERE ARE NO INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE TOP BECAUSE IT CAN NOT BE DONE WITHOUT DAMAGE.? THE INSTRUCTIONS YOU FOUND ARE FOR THE BOTTOM IN ORDER TO SERVICE THE SPEAKER.
Arend (9/03/12): I have recently acquired a well taken care, terrific set of 2C's.? My inspection determined that they have been upgraded with butyl surrounds all around - even better so far!? Now a question that you must deal with all the time - can I replace the tweeters with the metal dome ones from the 2Ce?? Must the crossover also be modified?? I can handle it myself, I am a retired EEng here in Canada; that location also precludes me from having you chaps do it!??? What would the cost be and can they be ordered directly from you?? (I acknowledge that duty & taxes are my responsibility of course.) If you do have a minute to respond, I would be quite pleased.
Answer: HELLO AREND,? THE LATTER VERSIONS OF THE 2C HAD BUTYL SURROUNDS.? THE LATER DRIVERS ARE NOT GOING TO WORK BECAUSE THE PHYSICAL STRUCTURE AND THE CROSS-OVER WERE VERY DIFFERENT IN ORDER TO MATCH THE NEW DRIVERS.? IT WOULD BE MUCH CHEAPER TO FIND A NEWER PAIR OF WHAT EVER MODEL YOU WANT.
Brad (3/05/08):? Hello Mr Vandersteen, The effort you put forth to answer question for us out here is greatly appreciated. I have a pair of W2's since the early 90's. I am currently using them with a pair of Martin Logan CLSIIz's that are driven by Audio Research VTM200's. Since changing to the VTM200's I have been unable to use the X-2 as the amps are XLR only. Do you have X-2's for balanced connections? If so is it possible to have X-2's that will crossover between 35-40 hz. I would prefer to use my CLS's full range and have the 2W's pick up at the low end of their response range. If this is possible, can they be purchased directly from Vandersteen Audio or do I need to go through a dealer here in Florida? Thank you for your time reading this.
Answer: HELLO BRAD, IN A SYSTEM AS HIGH-END AS YOURS YOU WANT TO US THE MODEL 5 HIGH-PASS. OUR DEALER CAN EXPLAIN IT TO YOU AND HE HAS A LOT OF EXPERIENCE WITH IT. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO MOVE THE X-OVER TO 35-40HZ NOR WOULD YOU WANT TO. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO NOT MODULATE YOUR CLS PANELS WITH BASS INFORMATION. IN THE PAST YOU HAVE BEEN USING THE X-2 AND EXPERIENCING SIGNIFICANT SONIC DEGRADATION BECAUSE OF IT. THE X-2 IS NOT GOOD ENOUGH FOR YOUR SYSTEM. WHEN YOU TRY THE M5-HPB YOU WILL BE AMAZED. WE DO NOT SELL DIRECT.
Alex (6/13/09):? Hi Richard, I have a full surround system in which each surround consists of a VSM-1 plus a 2Wq, using a Model 5 single ended crossover, run together as a single full range speaker. My question is about the correct crossover setting in this case. The manual says to set the crossover 2 levels below the impedence when the sub is used with a VSM in this configuration. I also have a document from your office indicating different settings that are to be used when using a MP-5 crossover instead of the X-2. Are these corrections additive? My amp impedence is 50 ohms. Using the special settings indicated for the MP- 5 crossover at 50 ohms, I would press switch 4, 8, and 10. Two levels below this would be 3, 4, 7, and 10. Is this the correct setting? Thanks for your response.
Answer: HELLO ALEX,? THE 2WQ OWNERS MANUAL OPTIMIZATION SECTION SAYS TRY ONE ABOVE, ON THE MONEY, ONE OR TWO BELOW AND LEAVE IT WHERE IT SOUNDS BEST.? IF YOU NEED FURTHER INFO CALL ME 559-582-0324.
Michael (1/12/11):? I inherited a pair of Vandersteen 2s that sat in a house with constant cigarette smoke for thirty years. They still sound great, but their odor is affecting my wife's allergies. When I run a slightly-damp sponge over the cloth , there is noticeable brown residue. Is there an easy way to clean the cloth covers without removing them? I don't want to go through the trouble of removing them if I don't have to. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO MICHAEL,? I THINK THE ONLY WAY WOULD BE TO REPLACE THE FABRIC OR GET NEW SPEAKERS.
Amit (9/03/12): Hello, I have the Vandersteen 2Wq sub and was wondering how I would connect it to a Yamaha rvx2065 receiver which has 2 rca subwoofer inputs?
Answer: HELLO AMIT,? THERE IS NO WAY TO USE THE 2WQ WITH MOST RECEIVERS.? WHAT YOU NEED IS CALLED A V2W.? THE ONLY RECEIVERS THAT WILL WORK ARE THOSE WITH FRONT CHANNEL PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN.? IF YOU RECEIVER HAS BOTH OF THOSE CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AS IT IS TO COMPLEX TO GO INTO IN THIS FORUM.
Tim (3/08/08):?? HI RICHARD, I OWN 5 VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS [VCC-5; PAIR OF 2CE? SIGNATURES; PAIR OF 2C'S]. CAN YOU RECOMMEND A GOOD SPEAKER STAND FOR THE VCC-5? I HAVE A LOVAN EQUIPMENT RACK, BUT I CAN'T FIND ANYTHING (IN THEIR LINE) THAT IS AS LARGE AS TO VCC-5. SHOULD THE SPEAKER STAND BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE VCC-5 OR CAN I USE SOMETHING SMALLER? THANK YOU FOR ANSWERING MY QUESTION.
Answer:? HELLO TIM, GOOGLE SOUND ANCHOR THEY MAKE A STAND FOR THE VCC-5.
Joe (6/15/09): When will you upgrade the photos of your speakers on the website? Some of the latest models aren't even shown.
Answer:? HELLO JOE,? OUR PRODUCT HAS ALWAYS BEEN THE PRIORITY.? I DON'T KNOW WHAT PRODUCTS YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT BECAUSE MOST OF OUR MODELS DO NOT CHANGE ON THE OUTSIDE SO THE PICTURE IS THE SAME.? YOUR IN LUCK BECAUSE WE HAVE A DEALER IN SALT LAKE CITY SO YOU CAN GO SEE IT FIRST HAND
Darren (1/14/11):? I've had a pair of 2CE's for about 15 yrs and have always used bi-wired speaker? cables.? My? current situation really calls for single wiring these speakers and because there are no posts on the back of the speakers I'm not sure how to accomplish this.? What do you recommend?
Answer: HELLO DARREN, IT IS COVERED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL.? IF YOU DON'T HAVE ONE YOU CAN DOWNLOAD ONE ON THIS SITE.
Craig (9/04/12): I have Vandersteen 5s, SN 2236 & 2237, that I bought at the Audio Gallery, in Portland, OR. Gary & Cyndi did a great job helping me but unfortunately Gary has passed on and they had not been Vandersteen dealers for some time. I am saving money towards getting my speakers upgraded (hopefully to 5A Carbons) but, because I have become disabled, it will take much longer than I would have wished. In the meantime,I need the battery pack in the speaker crossover replaced and because of my back I don't think I can take it out myself. I have never had any contact with the current Portland dealer, Pearl Audio, and am wondering how exactly to go about getting the replacement done. Do you have an arrangement with the dealer re: servicing this replacement for owners of your speakers who have never bought anything from your current dealers?
Answer: HELLO CRAIG,? THE OWNERS MANUAL HAS VERY CLEAR INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE SPEAKER CROSS-OVER.? THE INSTRUCTIONS DO NOT MENTION ANYTHING ABOUT BATTERY REPLACEMENT EXCEPT FOR THE DATE.? JOHN AT PEARL AUDIO COULD DO IT AS A SERVICE CALL IF HE HAS STAFF.? I WOULD CALL HIM AND SEE.? THIS IS NOT A SERVICE INCLUDED BY ANY DEALER AS PART OF THE INITIAL PURCHASE SO IT DOESN'T MATER WHO DOES IT.? IF YOU ARE ABLE TO SEND THEM IN THE COST IS $96.00 PER PAIR FOR THE SPEAKER CROSS-OVER AND $48.00 PER PAIR FOR THE HIGH-PASS.? BE SURE TO FILL OUT THE RMA FORM DOWNLOADED FROM THIS SITE AND SEND IT IN WITH THE PARTS FOR SERVICE.? NO CALL IS REQUIRED AS THE FILLED OUT FORM IS YOUR AUTHORIZATION.
Harry (3/10/08):? Richard, I have a pair of 2ce sig speakers and am having problems with the bass. I move the speakers according to the manual without much change. any comments?
Answer: HELLO HARRY, IN THE THOUSANDS OF CALLS I HAVE RECEIVED AT THE SHOP, THIS IS MY FIRST CLUE THAT THE STANDS HAVE NOT BEEN FILLED WITH SAND AND POSSIBLY THE SPIKES HAVE NOT BEEN INSTALLED AND TIGHTENED. IF THIS IS NOT THE PROBLEM CALL ME AT 559-582-0324.
Don (7/28/09): I have a Cary SLI-80 integrated amp. It has a switch for triode or ultralinear, and can be set for 4 or 8 ohms. You probably know that it also has dedicated left & right outputs for a subwoofer. Would the 2Wq be easily hooked up to this ? Thank you.
Answer:? HELLO DON,? THE ONLY WAY A 2WQ CAN BE USED WITH A INTEGRATED IS IF IT HAS A PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN LOOP.? I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH YOUR UNIT.
John (1/21/11): ?I own a pair of Quatro Wood Sig II's. ?I need to eq the bass. ?I read Mike's post on 11/4/10 about adjusting Model 5A's. ?The response was to follow the instructions in the manuel for the Model 7's because it had been updated. ?Does the same hold true for adjusting the Quatros? Or should I use the owner's manual that came with the speakers? ?(I have the right meter and tone disc.)
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? YES THE SAME IS TRUE FOR THE QUATRO.
Stuart (9/05/12): I just picked up a pair of 2CE Signature speakers and I am thrilled. I have finally joined the family.? ? I have four questions: 1) what is the difference from the 2CE Sig to the 2CE Sig II? I know that going to the 2CE Sig you add the barrier strips, the 3A tweeter and a more refined crossover. What does the II designation add? 2)I would really like to change to colors on these speaker though. I would like to go to cherry/black. They are currently black/grey. Do you sell end caps and new socks? 3) I know this is heresy, but I will be using a non-Vandersteen subwoofer for the time being. Do you have any recommendations on where the subs crossover should be set? I am guessing around 45-50hz. I know it is room/system dependent, but would be interested in where you would suggest the best point would be based on your experience
Answer: HELLO STUART,? TOO MUCH FOR THIS FORUM.? CALL ME 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.? AS FAR AS THE SUB IS CONCERNED TRY IT AT ALL AVAILABLE FREQUENCIES AND SEE WHERE YOU GET THE BEST INTEGRATION.
Rob (3/10/08):?? Richard, I have owned a pair of used 5As for 8 months now and have experienced a "bright upper midrange / lower treble" from the beginning. I followed you manuals instructions for setup and also had a Vandersteen dealer ensure setup was performed correctly. After comparing the sound? to another speaker type, it is clear that I am missing a lot of midbass information. When the volume is turned up it starts to come back, but it definitely sounds like the midbass has been turned "down" a few notches. can you think of what might be causing this and how best to trouble shoot. All electronics are top notch ARC and I have used both their VT 100 and Ref 210s amps in the system. thanks so much
Answer: HELLO ROB, ARE ALL RECORDINGS BRIGHT IN THE MIDS AND TREBLE? CHECK THAT THE CONES ARE TIGHT AND THAT YOU HAVE PROPER TILT. I ASSUME THE DEALER VERIFIED THAT THE HIGH-PASS IS 3DB DOWN AT THE OUTPUT OF THE AMP AT 100HZ. YOU DID NOT SAY WHAT OTHER SPEAKER YOU COMPARED THEM TO BUT MANY TODAY ARE USING 6.5 OR 7 INCH WOOFER FOR MID-RANGES THAT HAVE TOO MUCH MASS TO HAVE ANY RESOLUTION. MAKE SURE YOU ARE NOT REACTING TO RECORDING QUALITY WHICH CAN ONLY BE HELPED BY TONE CONTROLS IF YOU WANT HI-REZ IN THE MIDS. GIVE ME A CALL AT 559-582-0324 IF EVERYTHING CHECKS OUT ABOVE.
John (7/30/09): I have recently purchased a pair of 2CIs and I am happy with the sound apart from the bass seeming a bit light. I was expecting a bit more response considering the frequence specs for these speakers. I am sure there is nothing wrong with them and overall they are great speakers. I am driving them with an adcom gfa555mk2. My main question was about shielding. Someone told me they were not shielded at all, if this is the case what is the closest distance they should be to a flat screen tv, there are no signs of problems with the tv and I am not sure if flat screens are as effected by magnetic fields as crt tubes. Thanks in advance.
Answer:? HELLO JOHN,? BASS IS VERY MUCH AFFECTED BY ROOM PLACEMENT, TRY A DIFFERENT SPOT IN THE ROOM. ? PLASMAS, LCD AND DLP FLAT SCREENS? ARE NOT EFFECTED BY MAGNETS.
Terria (1/12/11):?Richard will the perfect piston midrange driver be an available future upgrade in the current 5a model.
Answer: HELLO TERRIA,? CHECK OUT THE WEB SITE.? THE INFO ON THE 5A CARBON IS THERE.? PRICE $23,700.00 PER PAIR, STANDARD FINISHES.
Mark (9/06/12): I am picking up my first Vandersteen speakers. 1998 2Ces. I intend to use an Onkyo TSX 606 AV receiver to drive them, using the bi-amp option this receiver gives. Will this work well in my 12 x 12 room with 8 ft ceiling? As an aside, I grew up down the road from you in Visalia, and listened to the Polk's and Vandersteen's that Cal Audio then featured( 1979-82 ). I now listen to the Monitor 10A in my living room, and am setting up your speakers in a dedicated 2 channel in the empty nest room. I don't expect to need a better speaker in my lifetime. By the by, if I got an adcom or haffler amp would I get much improvement? Sincerely,
Answer: HELLO MARK,? YES AND IT WON'T BE SMALL.
Kennedy (3/11/08): Richard, Could you re-finish or restore the wood finish of the 5A and how much would it cost? Thanks,
Answer:? HELLO KENNEDY, YES WE CAN. CALL 559-582-0324 AND ASK ME FOR A QUOTE.
Ed (8/1/09): Hi, I just recently purchased a used pair of Vandersteen speakers - I was told they were Model 2Ci(s) but on the rear plate it only states model 2. Can you tell me which model I have: Serial #s are:51022 & 51023. The speakers are an excellent match for my Jolida Amp and CD player. Thank you for designing such a wonderful pair of speakers that have enhanced my listen pleasure.
Answer:? HELLO ED,? I CAN'T TELL YOU BY THE SERIAL NUMBERS BUT YOU CAN BY LOOKING FOR THE LETTERS AFTER THE NUMBER.? BOTH 2CI'S AND 2CE'S COULD HAVE NUMBERS IN THE 50000 RANGE.
John (1/24/11):?'Can I update my original 2C's? I replaced the backfiring subwoofers a couple of years ago, but I feel the rest of the drivers may be getting tired. They are nearly 20 years old!! Do you have an upgrade package I can use?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THERE IS NO UPDATE AVAILABLE FOR ANY MODEL 2.? WE HAVE ALL THE STOCK PARTS FOR SERVICE HOWEVER.? THE DRIVERS AND X-OVER PARTS SHOULD RUN FOR MANY MORE YEARS
Julian (9/06/12):? Both of the 10" Active Acoustic Couplers have blown in my 2Ci's(the spiders have detached from the basket frame). I have removed them to have them shipped to Vandersteen and serviced by you. Although it doesn't sound nearly as good, is it safe to continue to use the speakers without the 10" Active Acoustic Couplers. If not, is it safe to install a temporary 10" sub-woofer replacement while I await the completion of the repair of my 10" Active Acoustic Couplers?
Answer: HELLO JULIAN,? IT IS NOT SAFE!? WE TURN AROUND REPAIRS IN ONE DAY SO I WOULD NOT GO THROUGH THE TROUBLE AND WAIT FOR THE REBUILT DRIVERS.
Bob (3/11/08): Is it true that you worked with Richard C. Heyser?
Answer:?? HELLO BOB, I DID NOT WORK WITH RICHARD HEYSER BUT DID TAKE SEVERAL WEEK LONG CLASSES ON SPEAKER MEASUREMENTS AND WHAT THEY TELL US.
Joseph (8/2/09): Hi Richard, I am using Vandersteen 2ce signature, I am writing this for one of my friend who is interested to by the Vandersteen but he doesn't have the budget to buy the 2ce, can you tell me the major difference is between the 2Ce Signatures and 1c in terms of sound ????
Answer:?HELLO JOSEPH,? THAT IS A BIG DIFFERENCE ONE HE WOULD HAVE TO AUDITION BUY HIMSELF.? ONE OBVIOUS DIFFERENCE IS A LOT MORE BASS AND CLEANER MID-RANGE.
Tom (1/25/11):?Distortion on model 2.I have an old pair of model 2 speakers that I love. ?Recently one speaker started to distort in the mid. ?This happened right about the time my wife moved a sofa adjacent to the speaker. ?(although she swears she did not hit it) Anyway, I took off the base and peeled back the sock to see what was going on, and (this is weird) it sounded fine. ?I pulled the sock back down and it sounded shitty again. ?Is the stretched sock causing distortion? ?Any other thoughts? ?Thanks
Answer: HELLO TOM,? THE SPEAKER IS DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH THE SOCK ON.? I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT POSSIBLY COULD BE THE CAUSE EXCEPT I KNOW IT IS NOT THE SOCK.? ANY FURTHER INFORMATION CALL 559-582-0324 EXT 3
Julian (9/06/12): One more question. The hardware to secure my 2Ci's to their T-bases as well as the carriage bolt feet for use on hardwood floors have been misplaced/lost. Does Vandersteen have this stuff available for purchase? If not, could you recommend an alternative source and what sizes of bolts, etc. I will need exactly?
Jack (9/11/12): I own an old pair of Vandersteen 4's, #234 and 235. I need to replace the foam surrounds on the Dynaudio 30W100 low frequency drivers. After removing the bases from the speakers, and peeling back the cloth, I am unable to remove the drivers from the cabinets. Is there a latch structure or are they glued in? Thank you very much for your time in supporting these old (great) speakers!
Bob (3/11/08): Daniel I need advice for my pair of earlier model 2W's. My goal is to enjoy music and video's immensely while incrementally making musical? improvements. My challenge: How to best match my 2W's due to my Fronts extreme high efficiency. My source is a OppO 981 (Outs: digital optical or coax, 5.1 multichannel, analog L/R), with a Yamaha RX-V2400 receiver as pre/pro with pre-outs to a soon to own Rotel RMB 1095 AMP (200 x 5, Input Impedance/Sensitivity 33 k Ohms/1.5 volt (unbalanced)33 k Ohms/?1.5 volt (balanced)). Speakers: Klipsch RF-7 fronts w/matching center and surrounds. 1) To increase both of the 2w's stereo dB output, may I "bi-wire" each of the 2W's from two amps each from the Rotel, and only send one of? two bi-amped leads going to the 2W's over to the RF-7's? That leaves one Rotel channel for the center, and I can amp my surrounds from the Yamaha. 2) The Yamaha has a Optimizer Mike to help adjust many speaker output control levels, including volume output within each different? Hz/frequency to all speakers. This optimizer may help blend the 2W's and RF's together. Have you? heard if internal Optimizer auto adjustments may moderate the RF-7's efficiency closer with the 2W's? 3) Would crossing the fronts over up at 150 Hz also help moderate the RF-7's efficiency with the 2W's? I'll certainly try many various speaker placements, tone controls, and everything else music lover's do . One side dish - I placed a "average" 12 inch subwoofer connected to the LFE higher up on a 20 inch tall table. It made a unbelievable difference everywhere in the musical soundstage. Musical? notes became instantly and infinitely cleaner with precision attacks and delays everywhere. The 2W's should be awesome stereo mid-low bass additions (CLEAN SPL's!!!). My A/V Room is 30 x 30 feet. A owner of 2Wq's said their was no way 2W's and RF-7's can musically blend together. I believe that maybe HE can't. I hope to try harder and do it. Can these two instruments be set-up to musically blend together as one entity with my equipment? I hope to own 5A's or QUADS some fine day. Thank you for your awesome products, build quality and customer support.
Answer:?? HELLO DANIEL, CALL ME 559-582-0324.
Espen (9/21/09):? I have your model 1 speakers, and I am looking for a good tube amp (integrated). Can you recommend an amp for these speakers? Planning to buy turntable as well. Done with cd`s.. Hope you can help me!! thanks :)
Answer: HELLO ESPEN,? I WOULD RECOMMEND AN INTEGRATED WITH ABOUT 50 WATTS OR SO THAT HAS A SOUND YOU LIKE.? MAKE SURE YOU AUDITION WHATEVER YOU BUY TO MAKE SURE IT IS A FIT.
Dan (1/25/11):?Hello - I have a pair of 2Ce's that were purchased around late 1991 / early 1992. ?First I would like to say thank you for making such a wonderful product. ?To say I have had countless hours of joyous music listening would be the understatement of the year! ?It appears to me that one of the midrange (4 1/2" die-cast basket with linear surround and curvilinear polycone) units has gone bad. ?I am trying to decide if I should replace these all together or if I could expect to get several more years of listening pleasure if I have it repaired.
Answer: HELLO DAN,? YOUR SPEAKERS ARE NOT THAT OLD.? THEY ARE DESIGNED TO LAST 30-40 YEARS SO I WOULD CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324 EXT 4.
Answer: HELLO JACK,? NO LATCH AND THEY ARE NOT GLUED IN, AT LEAST NOT WHEN THEY WERE BUILT.? I WOULD USE A SCREWDRIVER AND PRY THE RING OUT.? THERE SHOULD BE A FOAM GASKET BETWEEN THE OUTER DRIVER RING AND THE ENCLOSURE.? DO NOT REMOVE THE BOLTS THAT GO THROUGH THE FLANGE OF THE DRIVERS
Ralph (9/12/12):? Did you ever manufacture a model 2 speaker, or was the 2c the first in that line?? And can I tell from the serial number whether a speaker in the 2 line has rubber, as opposed to foam, surrounds?? Thank you very much!
Frank (3/12/08):? Mr. Vandersteen, I have a set of 2c speakers purchased about 20 years ago. Was wanting to upgrade to the new 2c and will be selling the old ones to my brother in law for $200.00 ( i don't like him enough to give them away). Do you feel the cones will last at least another 5 - 10 years. I took good care of them and never played them loud. They still sound GREAT! I just want to make sure he gets a good deal. Thank you.?
Answer: HELLO FRANK, THEY SHOULD JUST KEEP ON PLAYING. THE LONGEVITY OF THE CONES HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH HOW LOUD YOU PLAY THEM. THE VOICE COIL IS ANOTHER STORY MAKE SURE YOUR BROTHER IN LAW HAS ADEQUATE POWER.
John (9/23/09): ?As a loyal Vandersteen enthusiast I wanted to take a moment to tell you about the great experience I had today at Advanced Audio in Tacoma.? I was in Tacoma on business and had meeting cancel when I remembered that you had a dealer there so I went in to check it out.? I was pleasantly surprised to see that they had both the 5A's and the Wood Quatros in the listening room.? I was even more pleased to find that they are an AR dealer, too.? Curtiss and Bob spent a lot of time with me and I really learned a lot- which doesn't always happen during my excursions into Audio stores!? What great guys- their passion for the business, and more importantly, for your product line was palpable.? You should be proud to have Advanced Audio in your dealer network.
Answer:? HELLO JOHN,? WE ARE PROUD OF THEM AND THEIR ABILITY TO DO A GREAT DEMO.? CURTIS HAS BEEN SELLING VANDERSTEEN FOR 33 YEARS AND WAS OUR FIRST DEALER.
Doan (1/26/11): I am looking at purchasing a used pair of Model 4 speakers and wanted to know when they were produced and how much they sold for new.
Answer: HELLO DOAN,? THERE IS VERY LITTLE INFORMATION ON THE MODEL 4.? THEY WERE PRODUCED IN THE MID 80'S AND WERE ABOUT $3500.00 A PAIR.? THEY WERE DISCONTINUED WHEN THE MODEL 3'S WENT INTO PRODUCTION BECAUSE A PAIR OF 3'S WITH A PAIR OF 2W'S OUT PERFORMED THEM AND WAS A LITTLE EASIER ON THE EYES.
?Answer: HELLO RALPH,? THE SPECIFIC VERSION OF THE MODEL TWO WILL BE THE LETTERS AFTER THE? SERIAL NUMBER ON THE REAR PLATE.? ALL TWO'S (NO LETTERS), TWO A, TWO B AND EARLY 2C'S HAVE FOAM SURROUNDS.? WE DO NOT HAVE THIS INFORMATION RECORDED.? THE ONLY WAY TO TELL IS TO SHINE A FLASHLIGHT THROUGH THE GRILLE AND SEE IF THE WOOFER CONE IS CLEAR OR MILKY WHITE,? THESE HAVE FOAM SURROUNDS
Suzanne (9/13/12): I need to replace the speaker cloth on my speakers. How do I do that and can I buy the black cloth from you?
Todd (3/13/08): I have a set of your 2c speakers, do you have a recommendation for a budget minded amplifiers for those. thanks.
Answer: HELLO TODD, I DO NOT HAVE ANY EXPERIENCE WITH THEM, IT IS A GOOD QUESTION FOR A VANDERSTEEN DEALER. TRY TO FIND A VANDERSTEEN DEALER BECAUSE MANY DEALER KNOW ABOUT THEM BUT ONLY A DEALER THAT SELLS THEM WILL GIVE YOU ACCURATE INFO.
Kevin (9/25/09): It seems your technical questions have stopped being posted after 6/15/09. This happened when your website was revamped. Is this a glitch you know about or is it my computer. I miss the new questions.
Answer:? HELLO KEVIN,? PARTLY BUT I HAVE BEEN WORKING DAY AND NIGHT GETTING THE MODEL SEVEN'S INTO PRODUCTION.? GLAD TO HEAR YOU ENJOY READING THEM AS IT TAKES TIME FROM MY EVENINGS AT HOME.
Robert (1/26/11):?Just to clarify your previous answer; will the 5A not be upgradable to 5A-Carbon in the future? ? ?Purchasing modular, upgradable speakers was a prime consideration when I purchased my Model 5s.
Answer: HELLO ROBERT,? THE MODEL 5A WILL BE UPDATED TO THE 5A CARBON AND UPDATES WILL BE AVAILABLE TO THE ORIGINAL OWNERS AT A LATER DATE.? WE ARE COMMITTED TO THE MODULAR CONCEPT BUT IT IS VERY EXPENSIVE.? IT IS AVAILABLE TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER (MUST PRODUCE A SALES RECEIPT OR HAVE A WARRANTY ON FILE) IN ORDER TO KEEP IT AS AFFORDABLE AS POSSIBLE,? AS IT IS AT BEST A BREAK-EVEN SITUATION FOR US.
Thank you
?Answer: HELLO SUZANNE,? IT IS NOT EASY TO DO AND BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM.? IF YOU CAN FIGURE IT OUT (WE CAN'T WALK YOU THROUGH IT BY PHONE) THE SEWN CLOTH CAN BE ORDERED BY CALLING 559-582-0324.? WE CHARGE $110.00 PLUS FREIGHT TO CHANGE THE GRILLE, PARTS AND LABOR
Paul? (3/15/08):? Paul from Mesa (talked you at Estoteric) How would you compare the 3A Sig with your subs to the 5A, I know the 3A has some 5A components? Would it be almost a Quatro or between a Quatro and 5A. Enjoying my VCC 5 Center Channel. Thanks
Answer:? HELLO PAUL. THE 3A SIG HAS PARTS FROM THE MODEL 5, THE 5A IS A WHOLE OTHER STORY. THE 3A SIG/WOOFER WOULD BE 85% OF THE FABRIC QUATRO BECAUSE OF THE ROOM ADJUST ABILITY THE 2WQ DOES NOT HAVE. THE WOOD QUATRO HAS 5A BASED TWEETER AND MIDRANGE BUT THE WOOFER IS PUSH-PULL AND MUCH LOWER IN DISTORTION BECAUSE OF IT, THE ENCLOSURE IS HEAVIER AND MORE INERT THEREFORE LOWER IN DISTORTION AND ON AND ON. SOUND LIKE YOU NEED A DEMO.
Mike (9/25/09): Is it true that the next rolling upgrade to be added or included in the model 3--> model 3A signature upgrade package will be finalized by the end of February 2010?? I am holding of shipping a recently acquired pair of model 3s until that time because I believe this to be so.? Also one of the prior owners of my model 3s drilled a hole in the back a few inches above the 10 inch woofer to reduce bass output.? Can VANDERSTEEN fill this hole with some kind of liquid wood during the upgrading process?
Answer:?HELLO MIKE,? THE MODEL 3 SIGS HAVE BEEN TWEAKED A SHORT TIME AGO AND ARE NOT PRESENTLY BEING WORKED ON.? SMALL REPAIRS CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED DURING THE INSTALLATION OF THE UPGRADE.
Walter (1/29/11):?Hi, I'm owner and happy listener of model 2CI. Now i'm thinking to buy model 2CEsignatures. Can i use previous base stand (more high) with the model 2CE or preferable use new stand basement? ?Thanks.
Answer: HELLO WALTER,? NO THE HIGHER BASE OF THE 2Ci WILL NEGATIVELY AFFECT THE BASE PERFORMANCE OF THE 2CE SIG AND ESPECIALLY THE MARK II VERSION.
Kurt (9/25/12): ?I am about to purchase a new amplifier where the input impedance is 1 meg ohm (for your readers who may not know, this means 1000KOhms or 1,000,000 Ohms,) as it has a pure vacuum tube input section, and therefore is very easy to drive and does not load down sources. Do you see any issues with the HP filter for the Vandersteen 5A's combined with this amplifier?
?Answer: HELLO KURT,? THE NEWER HP-5 HIGH-PASS FILTERS HAVE A SETTING FOR 1 MEG.? I YOU HAVE A LATE VERSION IT WILL WORK PERFECT.? FOR YOUR INFORMATION ANYTHING ABOVE 200K IS CONSIDERED HIGH ENOUGH FOR THE BENEFIT YOU MENTION.
Daniel (3/16/08): Hi Richard, I just bought the March 08 issue of HiFi Choice, and in it contained a little booklet on tweaks that can be done to our hi-fi, and one of which is to add a super tweeter with the speakers by "Extending HF response". I would like to know what is your view on this, and whether Vandersteen speakers, in my case the 1C, will benefit from such a device. I understand these may range fm the cheaper John Blue super tweeters to the insanely priced Tannoy ones. Best regards, Daniel
Answer:? HELLO DANIEL, ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS WITH OUR PROPRIETY ALLOY DOME TWEETER HAVE USABLE ENERGY TO 40K. IN MY OPINION MANY OTHER THINGS WOULD BE MORE IMPORTANT. SAND FILLED BASES WITH THE SPIKES PROPERLY ADJUSTED AND TIGHT, VERY CAREFUL PLACEMENT DISCOVERED WITH LOTS OF EXPERIMENTATION AN INCH AT A TIME, GOOD HOUSEKEEPING, CLEAN TIGHT CONNECTIONS AND DUST FREE GRILLE ARE JUST SOME THAT ARE FREE.
Jeff (9/30/09): How much power do you need to drive the Quatro? Would 75 watts tube power do it in a fairly large room?'
Answer:?HELLO JEFF, NO WAY TO KNOW WITHOUT DOING THE EXPERIMENT.? BRING YOUR 75 WATT TUBE AMP (THEY ARE NOT CREATED EQUAL)? TO THE DEALER AND HOOK IT UP AND SEE.? WITHIN REASON THE SIZE OF THE ROOM WON'T MAKE THAT BIG OF A DIFFERENCE AS THE OTHER SPEAKERS IN THE DEALERS SHOW ROOM ABSORB SOUND.
Nicholas (2/04/11): I have a pair of 2c's with a 2wq sub that has been a music only system. ?I have moved it into the av room and have hooked it up to my processor (with the front channels running through my music preamp and the crossover between the preamp and amp). ?I would like to add another sub, but cost constraints limit me to only one more. ?Would it be preferable to get another 2wq (with the advantages of stereo bass touted in the manual) or a V2W, that I would hook up to the LFE output. ?Thanks.
Answer: HELLO NICHOLAS,? GET A V2W FOR THE LFE.
David (9/27/12): I have a set of Vandersteen 1c speakers. I was wondering if I could somewhere buy some better screws for the speaker terminals?
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? THE SCREWS PROVIDED ON THE 1CI ARE SILVER PLATED BRASS AND SOUND VERY GOOD.? THEY CAN NOT BE INSTALLED ON THE OLD 1C.
Jamie (3/16/08):? I recently got a pair of model 2ci's. Is there a place on your website where I can download the manual for them. It would greatly help me set them up.? Thank you.
Answer:? HELLO JAMIE, THAT IS ALMOST 20 YEARS AGO BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER. YOU CAN SEND $5 AND THE OFFICE WILL SEND YOU ONE.
Mark (10/05/09): My listening room is 13' wide by 10' deep. Is this too small for a pair of Model 2ce's? Would the Model 1c work better in this space? ...Or do I just need to sell my house to accommodate some Vandersteen's? Thanks very much!
Answer:?HELLO MARK,? IF YOU HAVE TOTAL FREEDOM FOR PLACEMENT THE 2CE SIG II SHOULD WORK BECAUSE THEY ARE MUCH BETTER CONTROLLED THAN PREVIOUS MODELS.? IF THEY SPEAKERS IMAGE AND DO ALL THINGS WELL EXCEPT FOR TOO MUCH BASE A HIGH PASS FILTER WILL SOLVE THAT PROBLEM.? CALL ME IF THAT IS THE CASE BECAUSE THAT IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM SO I WILL WALK YOU THROUGH IT ON THE PHONE.
Mathew (2/06/11): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, Let me first say how much I am a fan of your speakers. In the past I have owned the 1b and 2 sig and absolutely enjoyed them every time I sat down to listen to my 2-channel set-up. My question now is. I am looking to put together a 2nd ?system for my bedroom and I was looking at the 1c. I loved the sound, but my only concern was that it may be a little laid back for some of my musical tastes. I wanted to know if you had/knew of any tweak such as, certain speaker cables, amp etc. that I can use. When I play soft and easy listening I love the sound, but when I play certain pop and rock I would like it to sound a little more aggressive. I value your option immensely and any info would be greatly appreciated. Thank you.
Answer: HELLO MATTHEW,? THESE ARE GOOD QUESTIONS BUT THE ANSWERS ARE KNOWN ONLY BY A VANDERSTEEN DEALER.? THEY HAVE PLACED THEM IN SO MANY DIFFERENT SYSTEMS AND THEREFORE HAVE MUCH MORE EXPERIENCE THAN I.
Ian (9/30/12): Hi Richard, ?I have a pair of Vandersteen 2?s I bought and it had a blown tweeter I found a replacement but I had some problems with the crossover some overheated resistors ??if you be so kind to help me it in regards to the valves I have traced the circuit and I think they ?are 10 ohms watt I have attached a copy your help would be greatly appreciated as I am in Australian and I cannot find any help with repairing theses magnificence speakers ?thanks.
Answer: HELLO IAN,? THE RESISTORS YOU ARE ASKING ABOUT ARE DIFFERENT IN EVERY PAIR BECAUSE THAT IS WHAT WE ADJUST IN THE CHAMBER.? CHECK THE OTHER SPEAKER AS THE VALUES ARE ALWAYS THE SAME IN A PAIR.? IF THEY ARE ALSO BURNED MAKE A GUESS.? WE CAN PUT THEM IN THE CHAMBER AND DETERMINE WHAT THEY NEED TO BE BUT YOU WOULD HAVE TO SHIP THEM IN.
David (3/21/08):? Richard, I am setting up my 2Wq with a new amplifier system. They are stereo amps that can be switched into mono blocks, which is how I am using them. When set up as mono blocks the speakers are wired with the speaker positive to the right channel positive of the amp and the speaker negative to the left channel positive of the amp. Do I wire the subwoofer in the same manner, or should I connect the subwoofer positive to the right channel positive and the subwoofer negative to the speaker ground of the amp? Thanks for your help.
Answer:? HELLO RUSS,? WHEN SELECTING SMALL ON ANY PROCESSOR A HIGH ORDER HIGH-PASS IS USED WHICH IS NOT TIME AND PHASE CORRECT, SO I AM NOT INTERESTED.? THE ONLY SOLUTION IS TO USE FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKERS.?
David (10/04/09): I have a 2W subwoofer that I bought in the late '80s, and use the X-2 units bought at the same time. ?Are there any improvements in the X-2s being shipped now? ?Thanks in advance for your reply.
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? YES THE UNITS HAVE BEEN IMPROVED I SUGGEST YOU SEE YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A COMPARISON
Roy (2/06/11): Hello:? I have a question regarding the Vandersteen Model 4. Is it required to have the external WX-4 crossover for bi-amping in order to operate properly.? Other models are bi-wired using the internal crossover.? Does the Model 4 have an internal XO? Is a manual available? If not, what can I use to approximate it's inclusion into my system? Thanks you very much for your help.
Answer: HELLO ROY,? CALL 559-582-0324.
Pete (10/01/12): In looking at bi-wiring instructions, your manual recommends: "If possible, use only one spade lug to connect both cables to each terminal on the amplifier as shown in the amplifier connection." What is the advantage of this set-up compared with going from 4 connections on the speaker side to also 4 connections on the amplifier side, if my amplifier allows it?
?Answer: HELLO PETE, THEY BOTH WILL WORK BUT HAVING BOTH PAIRS OF WIRES CONNECTED BY ONE CONNECTOR WILL SOUND SLIGHTLY BETTER WHEN YOU HOOK THEM UP TO THE OUTPUT JACK MOST DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUITRY.? MOST AMPLIFIERS THAT HAVE DOUBLE CONNECTIONS HAVE ONE PAIR OF JACKS CONNECTED TO THE OUTPUT AND A JUMPER WIRE CONNECTED TO THE SECOND SET OF JACKS.
Glen (3/24/08): I have purchased a full surround system with 5a's vcc-5 and sig surrounds. I will use a projection screen for movies and concert videos. The only premade stand for the vvc-5 is a sound anchor which I consider both ugly and too low, probably made to go under big rear projector TV. If I make my own stand for vcc-5, what would you consider to be the ideal height for center channel to blend with 5a's? I can build it with 3 cornered stand with adjustable cones like you use on 5a's.
Answer: HELLO GLENN,? JUST BELOW THE SCREEN.
Harvey (10/05/09):? Hi I got a couple of ??? I just bought a pair of Vandersteen model 3 speakers serial number 2134 and 2135 could I have the year of fabrication??When I plugged them one of my speakers has a "fluttering" sound that seems to come from the midrange speaker, is it possible to order one and what is the cost?? The fabric is in tan color and is dirty is their a way to wash it, or can I order a replacement sock and what is the cost???? Can I buy 3A Signature upgrade kit for my 3's and again what is the cost, UPS charges me 450.00 to send these to California and another 450.00 to get them back add the 1800.00 that Vandersteen charges to update the speakers and it becomes very expensive for a pair of used ones.
Answer:?HELLO HARVEY,? WE DO NOT HAVE RECORDS WITH MANUFACTURE DATES BUT THEY ARE VERY OLD MAYBE 15 YEARS.? UPS WILL NOT CHARGE THAT MUCH AS THE UPGRADE IS NOT A KIT.? CONTACT THE FACTORY 559-582-0324 FOR DETAILS ON THE UPDATE WHICH WOULD INCLUDE NEW GRILLS.
Bryan (2/08/11): My right channel model 5 has no low firing driver. ?How do I best trouble shoot the driver or amp, or could it be a problem with the high pass filter? ?I am getting a thump when I plug in the sub and also hear a thump ?when adjusting the volume pot on the back in around the 7 to 8 position. ?Other than that there is Zero bass from the right channel sub. ?Please help.
Answer: HELLO BRYAN,? CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE.
Hector (10/01/12):First, I would like to thank you for your dedication to making outstanding products. I have a pair of Model 3s and have enjoyed them inmensely for the last 10 years. I read all the notes on bi-amping on the User section, and at the risk of being annoying I have a few questions. I'm considering bi-amping my Model 3s using two 150W vacuum tube monoblocks (Rogue Audio) for the high+mid section, and two solid-state monoblocks (170 WRMS each, ARCAM P1) for the bass sections. The idea is to use a signal generator, oscilloscope and the tweeter and midrage gain controls in the back of the 3s to match the gain of the lower section monoblocks to the gain of the upper+mid monoblocks, assuming the sensitivities of both the lower and upper parts of the speakers are similar or can be measured. In other words, can bi-amping be both benefitial and safe if (i) carefully matching gain of top and bottom section, as scaled by speaker sensitivity, (ii) using 4 separate monoblocks, and (iii) using vacuum tube monoblocks for the mid+high section and solid state monoblocks for the bass ? Thanks for your time and patience in keep up this blog !? Best regards,
?Answer: HELLO HECTOR,? THIS WOULD BE VERY BAD AS THE CONTROLS ON THE BACK ARE CONTOUR CONTROLS NOT LEVEL CONTROLS AND ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DISSIPATE THAT ENERGY.? CHANGING AMPLIFIERS WHO SOUND DIFFERENT IN THE MIDDLE OF THE MID RANGE FREQUENCIES WHERE THE EAR IS MOST SENSITIVE IS GENERALLY NOT SUCCESSFUL.
John (3/26/08): Hi Richard, I write this note not be adversarial- far from it, I am a loyal Vandersteen customer/disciple/enthusiast... As a matter of fact, I am in the market to replace my 3A sigs and am only deciding between different Vandersteen models, not vs. another brand. That being said, I noticed that you have a link to the Stereophile review of the "regular" Quatros but not the review of the "Wood" Quatros. Is there something in the review that you take exception to? After all, the reviewer was comparing your speaker to one that was more than two and a half times its price. Do you feel that there is some truth to the review and there is some lack of bass energy due to the different woofer and enclosure used (from your response to Paul 3/15/08)? I know that an audition is the best way for me to decide between the two models, but my local dealer does not stock the wood model and neither does another dealer that I visit in my travels- so I must rely a little more on other sources. I do trust that you wouldn't have released a product for an additional cost if you didn't believe that it was better. I'm just curious in regard to the omission of the review and your thoughts about it. Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THE QUATRO WOOD IS BETTER IN EVERY WAY INCLUDING THE BASS AND MIDBASS WHICH IS IDENTICAL BETWEEN THE TWO.? THE BIG DIFFERENCE IS IN THE MIDRANGE AND TWEETER AS STATED IN AN EARLIER POST.? THE REASON THE BASE AND MIDBASS IS IMPROVED ON THE WOOD IS BECAUSE THE PLINTH IS MORE STABLE.? THE REVIEW IS POSTED ON STEREOPHILE'S WEB SITE SO I SEE NO NEED TO PAY FOR IT.
Jay (10/06/09): Good afternoon, I've just purchased one of your 2wq subwoofers from its original owner, who no longer has the resistor box used for amp matching. ?Would I be able to buy one from you (no Vandersteen dealers in Arkansas)? Thanks very much.
Answer:?HELLO JAY,? OUR DEALERS ARE LISTED ON OUR WEB SITE YOU CAN ORDER THE WX-2 FROM ANY OF THEM. WE DO NOT DO DIRECT SALES, SORRY.
Howard (2/09/11): Dear Mr. Vandersteen. Recently I had occasion to listen to (or is it through?) your magnificent Model 7 speakers at The Audio Alternative in Ft Collins, Colorado. First I must congratulate you on producing one of the finest speaker systems I have ever heard, at any price and anywhere. Secondly, Rick D puts on an outstanding demonstration. His enthusiasm is infectious. Moreover in his main room, only your Model 7s are on display. I was with Rick for a social visit. I own and run Stereonow in the UK and on and off have been in this industry since 1976. Briefly, I was the UK?s most successful retailer of Apogee speakers, Magneplanar, Krell and so on. This is why my comments re both your 7s and Rick are sincere and based on experience. In my home system I use your 2C Signature speakers, purchased used in the UK. Your current UK importer strikes me as a very decent fellow and a Vandersteen enthusiast. Sadly the UK profile for Vandersteen is very low. I don?t think this is his fault. The magazines operate, in my opinion, a cartel and as such it?s rather hard to break into. Anyway, Absolute Sounds for years have tried to get me to stock Wilson Audio. Between you and me, I?m unimpressed. Again, between you and me they appear to do everything ?right? ? except encouraging me to listen to music for extended periods. In contrast I an Rick sat listening and chatting to the system with your speakers for 6 hours. The experience was both a privilege and a revelation. In conclusion and with complete sincerity I have to confess that Rick?s style, the approach, the attention to detail and sheer professionalism exceed my own. I've never said this before. My guess, albeit from a distance, is that your two organizations have found each other ? and are fortunate to have done so. Incidentally, an informal email between my good friend Ken Kessler and I, from me, confirmed how impressed he has been with the Model 7?s during a US visit.
Answer: HELLO HOWARD,? THANK YOU FOR YOUR FINE COMMENTS AND IT BRINGS UP A GOOD POINT.? ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS ARE DESIGNED IN HOMES TO BE USED IN HOMES AS THERE IS NO SOUND ROOM AT THE FACTORY.? OVER THE YEARS MANY PEOPLE HAVE FORMED LIFE LONG IMPRESSIONS OF OUR PRODUCT BASED ON A DEMO AT A SHOW OR DEALER SOUND ROOM.? BOTH OF THESE SITUATIONS ARE NOT THE KIND OF ROOMS THE SPEAKERS WERE DESIGNED TO WORK IN.?? THEIR IMPRESSIONS GOOD OR BAD IS NOT ANYTHING LIKE HEARING THEM IN A HOME WITH FURNISHINGS AND LOTS OF NATURAL DIFFUSION.?? RICKS ROOM IS ONE OF THE FEW EXCEPTIONS BECAUSE IT IS HIS LIVING ROOM.
Hector (10/01/12): What are your thoughts on 4-speaker systems (2 right, 2 left) ?? Can 4 speakers yield improved listening experience (compared to 2 speaker systems), provided adequate placement ? Thanks and best regards,
Answer: HELLO HECTOR,? I DON'T KNOW AS I HAVE NEVER TRIED IT
Henry (3/27/08):? Hi I am repairing an old set of Vandersteen Model 2's, have already replaced the foam surrounds for the woofers and found the midrange surrounds also in need of replacement. Do you offer a surround kit for the midranges? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO HENRY,? WE DO NOT HAVE SURROUND KITS BUT CAN REBUILD THEM.? PLEASE GO TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS.
Craig (10/07/09): I am running bi-wired 2ce sigs through a ps audio gca 100 (awesome combo by the way). ?While resting I heard a sharp pop from the left speaker and a little red light went on above the woofer and no sound when trying to play a disc. ?I turned the amp off and the red light went off but when I turned the amp back on I got an immediate pop again and red light. ?I turned the system off and back on after 20 minutes or so and everything is fine. ?Should I be concerned? ?What was the red light? ?Is it an amp issue? I am running power through a ps audio power plant. Thanks
Answer:?HELLO CRAIG,? SOUND LIKE A AMP PROBLEM TO ME.? THE RED LIGHTS MEASURE VOICE COIL HEAT OR DC AS A WARNING ONLY.? ANY AMP THAT POPS FOR NO REASON NEEDS TO BE LOOKED AT
Alan (2/12/11): I have owned four pairs of Vandersteen loudspeakers over the past 21 years. ?If you could find a way to design your speakers with user removable/replaceable grill cloths, you would stand to be counted amongst the most enviable of men.
Answer: HELLO ALAN,? THANK YOU FOR YOUR SUPPORT.?? I HAVE BEEN PUSHED, BEAT, BRIBED AND ABUSED ABOUT THIS FOR OVER 30 YEARS.? I HAVE EVEN ENCOURAGED OTHERS TO TAKE THE CHALLENGE AND FIND SUCH A SOLUTION.? EVERY IDEA INCLUDING MY OWN SERIOUSLY AFFECTED THE SOUND OR INCREASED THE PRICE APPROXIMATELY 100 PERCENT.? IN THE END THE SOLUTION BECAME THE MODEL 5, QUATRO WOOD AND THE NEWLY ANNOUNCED TREO.? THE QUATRO WOOD IS $10,700.00 A PAIR AND THE TREO (3A SIG SOUND BUT LESS BASS) $5990.00 PER PAIR BUT THEY ALL HAVE REMOVABLE GRILLES.? SO FOR MANY YEARS WE HAVE THAT OPTION FOR THOSE WHO WANT TO PAY.? THE NON REMOVABLE FABRIC WRAP IS WHY WE HAVE A 4 WAY SPEAKER WITH SCANSPEAK DRIVERS FOR $3950.00, NOBODY INCLUDING THE CHINESE CAN TOUCH THAT
Leon (10/06/12): Hello Richard, Can the M5-HPB be purchased directly from the Vandersteen factory?
Answer: HELLO LEON,? WE ONLY SELL THROUGH OUR DEALERS.? IT WOULD BE HARD TO HAVE A DEALER NETWORK IF WE SOLD DIRECT BUT YOU CAN MAIL ORDER FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER WHO WILL.
Tim (3/28/08): I purchased a pair of used 1c's. I think there is a problem with one of the "woofers". How do I remove the grill cloth to inspect? Can I still buy a replacement drivers if I need to? Thanks
Answer: HELLO TIM,? GO TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS.
Tom (10/05/09): Hi Richard, Subject 2WQ low but audible static like sounds. This week I powered up my systems (no music) and after 5 or so minutes what sounded like a rising high sound volume freight train of escalating velocity roaring from the Sub, immediately disconnected it and it subsided. Since then I hear a low level audible static like sound as long as it is powered. This static sound is present with speaker cables un-attached to it, and it is grounded and no other electrics turned on just the unit plugged in. After disconnecting power the static sound continues for 28 seconds until a little pop silences the unit. The static returns the instant I plug it in.Fidelity wise it still performs and produces bass. Recommendations/Suggestions?
Answer:?HELLO TOM,? CALL VANDERSTEEN 559-582-0324 AND SEE ABOUT GETTING THE UNIT SERVICED.
Shawn (2/14/11): I just acquired a pair of 2c's and want to know what you recommend: 1. Bi-wire, 2. Bi-amp with 60wpc highs & 100wpc for lows both adcom amps, OR 3. Bi-amp with identical 100wpc amps one for left speaker and the other for right. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO SHAWN,? OUR RECOMMENDATION IS TO BI-WIRE.
Mike (10/11/12):? 1994 circa 2CE and 1991 model 3 serial (1418) owner here ponders: In a 1993? review of your model 2 speakers you gave manufacturers response:? ? The differences between our Model 2Ce and Model 3 fall into the realm of diminishing returns.? The more advanced drive-units in the Model 3, including our patented midrange, give these listeners the increased resolution and dynamics to fully complement their top-line electronics.? While the Model 3 is better than the Model 2Ce even in a moderate system, the improved performance becomes much more pronounced as the overall quality of the system increases. ?Richard Vandersteen, Vandersteen Audio." Since the MODEL 2 and MODEL3 use the same tweeter and midrange where the model 3 uses higher quality crossover parts if one could make a quantitative measurement do you feel the difference between these two models quantitatively are closer today 2012 than in 1993?
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? THAT ANSWER WAS COMPARING A OLDER MODEL 3 AND A NEWER MODEL 2CE.? AT ANY GIVEN YEAR THE CURRENT 3 WILL BE MUCH HIGHER PERFORMANCE THAN THE CURRENT 2.? THE CURRENT MODEL 2CE SIG II WILL BLOW AWAY AN OLD MODEL 3, AND THE CURRENT MODEL 3A SIG WILL BLOW AWAY A CURRENT 2CE SIG II.? IT SHOULD AS THE PRICE IS ABOUT DOUBLE.
Victor (4/02/08):? I was told that the center channel speaker must sonically match the left and right main speakers. I have a pair of 2Ci's that I purchased new and still use. Will the VCC-1 centre speaker be a match or will I have problems? If not can you recommend a centre speaker for me?
Answer: HELLO VICTOR,? THE VCC-2 WOULD BE A BETTER MATCH.? THE VCC-1 IS A GOOD MATCH FOR THE 1C'S.? CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AS THERE IS NO INFORMATION ON THIS SITE FOR THE VCC-2.
Tom (10/09/09): I would like the specifications for the Vandersteen 2Ci speakers. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO TOM,? WE HAVE ALL THE PARTS TO REPAIR AND SERVICE THE 20- 25 YEAR OLD 2CI'S HOWEVER THE SPECIFICATIONS AND LIT ARE LONG OUT OF PRINT.
Edward (2/22/11): I have a pair of Quatros which I have used with high satisfaction for several years. ?This is my second pair of Vandersteen's. ?I have just purchased a pair of new Bryston 7B SST2 mono block amps. ?I have two questions: 1. ?The Bryston tech specs show the input impedances single ended to be 50Kohms and balanced to be 20Kohms. ?I have the Vandersteen balanced high pass filters. ?Are the speakers and amps compatible? ?(The people at Bryston are not certain of this, and there is not a local Vandersteen dealer in Sacramento. ?The Bryston people ask specifically whether the Quatros are "common ground" speakers.) 2. Assuming that the equipment is compatible, should I set the filter box as normal for 20Kohms? ?I do have an EE who is experienced with audio available to do this.
Answer: HELLO EDWARD,? THIS FORUM IS FOR GENERAL QUESTIONS OF INTEREST TO ALL.? WITH SPECIFIC QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.? IF THERE IS NO ANSWER BE SURE TO LEAVE A MESSAGE.? YOUR CALL WILL BE RETURNED.
Dale (10/12/12): 'Hi, I purchased a pair of 2Ce's in the mid '90.? (S/N 79409Ce 79408Ce).? I'm driving them with a same era Adcom GFA 545-II amp.? My cables are MIT Bi-wire.? I didn't receive the owner's manual from the dealer I purchased them from.? I like to listen to my music fairly loud and I often push the amp so the instantaneous distortion alert LED's light up (but not continuously on).? If I let the amp go for a while, red LED lights flicker in the speaker.? When I see those lights flickering I turn the amp down.? What are the red LED lights in the speaker for?? Are they for thermal or distortion?? I'm running the amp with Adcom's GTP 500-II preamp.? Thank you.? (Very good speakers by the way).
?Answer: HELLO DALE,? THE L.E.D. LIGHTS IN THE SPEAKER MONITOR THE VOICE COIL TEMPERATURE.? YOU DID THE CORRECT THING BY TURNING THE VOLUME DOWN BECAUSE IF YOU DON'T EXPENSIVE NON WARRANTY DAMAGE WILL OCCUR.
Jim (4/03/08): ?Hello. Regarding placement of a pair of 2Wq's: I am considering tube traps (acoustic treatment) as this is a particularly "live" room. Can you offer any suggestions regarding close proximity of the subs and traps?
Answer: HELLO JIM,? I WOULD CHECK WITH THE TUBE TRAP PEOPLE.? MY ONLY EXPERIENCE IS WITH DIFFUSERS,? WHICH I PREFER.
Eric (10/13/09): I am looking for a center channel for my home theater and would like to know what the differences are between the VCC-2 and VCC-5. I cannot seem to find a review on the VCC-2 or any of your dealers in my area with one in stock. Maybe you could add a write up, or at least some details, in product info area for the VCC-2 and hopefully in time we'll have some reviews. I have listened to the VCC-5, and enjoyed it very much. I am especially drawn to the size of the VCC-2 and the fact it can be located under my plasma TV. -Thank you for a fantastic product line,
Answer:?HELLO ERIC, THE VCC-2 IS A LOWER COST VERSION OF THE VCC-5 AND HAS THE WALL BRACKET INCLUDED.? I COULD WRITE A REVIEW OF THE VCC-2 OR MAYBE THERE IS A REVIEW IN THE WORKS I DON'T KNOW ABOUT HOWEVER I DON'T RECOMMEND A PURCHASE WITHOUT AN AUDITION YOURSELF.? MAY BE ON A TRIP OR VACATION YOU COULD GET AN AUDITION AT A VANDERSTEEN DEALER.
Aloysio (2/22/11):? Now i have an integrated amplifier . How can i connect my 2qw sub to my stereo ? where do i put my Vandersteen X-2 (100K) crossover?
Answer: HELLO ALOYSIO,? THE 2WQ CAN NOT BE USED WITH MOST INTEGRATED
Jack (10/15/12): Is it OK to run the 5A's in a home theater system alone, or should they be used with the 2WQ to protect the subwoofer? ?Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JACK,? THE 5A WILL HANDLE ANYTHING HOME THEATER WILL OFFER.? SOME PEOPLE ADD A V2W L.F.E.? SUB IS TO HAVE CONTROL DURING A MOVIE WHEN MANY LIKE MORE BASS THAN THE 5A'S WOULD HAVE,? BEING ADJUSTED AND OPTIMIZED FOR MUSIC.
Stan (4/04/08):? Hi - I have been using my 5A's for about a year, and have enjoyed them a lot. I just moved to Scottsdale ,Az., set everything up, and noticed I have a slight hum in the left speaker. If I use a cheater to bypass the ground, the hum is greatly increased. I'm using all Ayre equipment that is fully balanced, and am bi-wiring the speakers as suggested. The room is very different, so I expected it to sound different, but that little hum is bothersome. Also, It was set up by John at Audio Connection in New Jersey , however, because the room is so different here, I would like to go the default settings on the amps. When the furnishings of the room are completed, I'll have my local Vandersteen dealer set them up again. How can I adjust the amps for the default settings now.
Answer: HELLO STAN,? THE 5A'S AND QUATRO'S SHOULD NEVER HAVE THE POWER CORDS CHEATED.? CALL ME 559-582-0324 SO WE CAN SOLVE THE HUM.
Lambert (10/15/09): I have had a pair of 5a now for about 4 years and love them.? My concern is leaving them plugged in all the time.? I already had one amp go bad and you replaced it.? My questions are can I leave them unplugged when not in use?? and if I do how long is warm up time till I can play them.? Will leaving them unplugged cause any damage?? How much power do they draw when not in use do the amps go in to a standby mode?'
Answer:?HELLO LAMBERT,? THE AMPLIFIERS DRAW ABOUT 8 WATTS WHEN NOT BEING PLAYED.? YOU SHOULD LEAVE THEM ON NORMALLY AND TURN THEM OFF WHEN GOING ON VACATION AND DURING STORMS.? REMEMBER LIGHT BULBS AND ALMOST EVERY THING ELSE FAILS WHEN TURNING THEM ON BECAUSE OF INRUSH CURRENT, AMPLIFIERS ARE NO DIFFERENT.
Larry (2/22/11): 'I am the happy owner of a pair of wood Quatros. ?I am considering an upgrade to the Model 5As within the next year or so and wonder if you could describe the chief differences between these two speakers and what I can expect beyond the technical specifications. ??I listen chiefly to vinyl through a Rhea Sig Phono stage, Ref 3 ARC preamp, ARC VS115 power amp with KT 120 tubes.
Answer: HELLO LARRY,? THE OBVIOUS DIFFERENCE IS A MUCH MORE POWERFUL SUB-WOOFER.? AS FOR THE SONIC DIFFERENCES I WOULD ASK YOUR DEALER TO GIVE YOU A DEMO.
Jedrzej (10/17/12):Hello Richard, I have a pair of 1Ci. What type of cable plugs would you recommend / should I use for the speaker? I've been using banana plugs (simply took out the screws). Is it ok or should I change to spades for a better musical performance? Most of the literature (1Ci manual, reviews, etc.) talks about spades w/o mentioning the banana plugs....Best regards,
Answer: HELLO JEDRZEJ,? USING A BANANA INTO THE SCREW HOLES IS A VERY BAD CONNECTION.? USE THE SCREWS PROVIDED AND A SPADE ON YOUR SPEAKER WIRE AS SHOWN IN THE OWNERS MANUAL.
Marcio (4/04/08):?Hi Richard. Very soon, I hope, You will send me a pair o Quatro that a I bought from Ivan - CD SHOP, Brazil . So tell me: how long to burn in? Do you recommend the burn in CDs like some from Granite Audio? Thanks and regards.
Answer: HELLO MARCIO,? JUST HOOK THEM UP AND START PLAYING THE MUSIC.
Tracey (10/17/09): Do you plan on offering an upgrade to the 5A with some of the new drivers from the 7? If so, within the next year? ?
Answer: HELLO TRACEY,? THERE WILL BE A UPGRADE TO THE 5 AND 5A TO THE ORIGINAL OWNERS ONLY WITH SOME OF THE MODEL SEVEN TECHNOLOGY IN ABOUT ONE YEAR.? ANY 5A PURCHASED WILL BE UPGRADABLE FOR THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TODAY'S PRICE AND WHAT THE UPGRADED 5A PRICE TURNS OUT TO BE.
Monnex (2/23/11): I? have a pair of Vandersteen Model 1. My Harman Kardon died. Could you give me some suggestion which amplifier I should buy?
Answer: HELLO MONNEX,? CONTACT YOUR NEAREST VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND LET HIM KNOW WHAT YOUR BUDGET IS AND GIVE IT A LISTEN.? I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH RECEIVERS.
Philip (10/21/12): Hi, have a problem in my home audio system that has me stumped. The problem is, while listening, after the system's been playing a while, sometimes within the first track on a CD, the bass frequencies from both speakers will "drop out" and from that point on I'm hearing treble and midrange but very little bass, as if someone with a graphic equalizer pulled down all the bass sliders.? If I turn down the volume for a while, the bass frequencies will reappear, but often when a dense musical passage plays, the bass will again drop out. My bass is not consistent at all. Im listening to an Adcom GCD-575 played through a GTP-500 II preamp/tuner, my amp is driving a pair of Vandersteen 2ci's, the cable is bi-wired Straightwire Waveguides. The problem is still there when I hook the CD player directly to the amp (so it must not be the pre-amp's fault). Also hear the problem using a different CD player (so it must not be the CD player). I haven't noticed this yet when playing LP's. I soldered new spade lugs on the speaker cables and got an improvement in sound, but the bass problem still happens. I do like loud listening levels at times, this is when I notice these problems. I measure around 100 decibels from my seat with peaks into 105, listening to rock. At these levels the distortion LED's flash occasionally, but are not excessively on. I have used 2 different amps, a used and recently serviced Adcom GFA-555 II and brand-new Adcom GFA-555se with exactly the same symptoms. I bought the 2ci's used, so I don't know the full history of the speakers. I can tell you that years ago I accidentally shorted the outputs of one channel of my amp while it was on and the speakers hooked up (no signal playing) which ruined the amp. Is it possible my speakers are damaged in some way that would cause this problem with the bass?
Answer: HELLO PHILIP,? GOOD NEWS BAD NEWS.?? THERE IS NOTHING WRONG WITH YOUR SPEAKERS OR AMPLIFIER.? IF YOU READ THE OWNERS MANUAL IT STATES THAT THERE IS A CIRCUIT WHICH MONITORS THE TEMPERATURE OF THE 8 INCH WOOFERS VOICE COIL.? WHEN THE TEMP BECOME DANGEROUSLY HIGH THE L.E.D.'S WILL LIGHT AS A WARNING.? REMEMBER BECAUSE OF NEEDLE MASS THE METER READS AN AVERAGE LOUDNESS LEVEL RATHER THAN TRUE PEEK.? YOU WILL NEED A PAIR OF PARTY SPEAKERS TO PLAY FOR EXTENDED PERIODS THAT LOUD AND AT THOSE LEVELS THE FIDELITY IS NOT IMPORTANT.? THINK ABOUT YOUR EARS BECAUSE LEVELS AS YOU DESCRIBE DOES ACCELERATE THE NATURAL PROCESS OF HEARING LOSS.
Gerald (4/05/08):? Hi I don't know if I will have room on either side of my TV for speakers. Would it be possible to run 3 VCC-5 across the front under the TV? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO GERALD,? SEVERAL OF OUR DEALERS HAVE WITH REPORTED GREAT RESULTS.? I HAVE NOT HEARD 3 IN A ROW HORIZONTALLY ONLY WITH THE CENTER HORIZONTAL AND THE SIDE VCC-5'S VERTICAL, SOUNDED AWESOME.
Bradley (10/18/09): I cannot seem to locate info on the Models 2,2c or 2ce - only the signature series is available. I have three sets and they all say Model 2. Does the serial number factor in? One set has an active woofer. The other two use a passive radiator. Any info would be appreciated.? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO BRADLEY,? THE LETTER DESIGNATION IS AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER.? ALL LIT ON SPEAKERS BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER ARE NOW LONG OUT OF PRINT BUT WE DO STILL HAVE ALL THE PARTS FOR SERVICE.? THE SPEAKERS USING A PASSIVE RADIATOR ARE OVER 30 YEARS OLD.
Warren (2/24/11):? I have a 2Wq serial # 14011 purchased in 2002. ?I am considering replacing my current amp/pre-amp with an integrated amp because of cabinet space limitations in my family room. ?What are my options with the sub? ?Can 2Wq be converted for use with an integrated or do I need to purchase a new sub?
Answer: HELLO WARREN,? GET A INTEGRATED WITH PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN AND YOU CAN PUT THE HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THEM AND CONTINUE TO USE YOUR 2WQ.
John (10/22/12): I own a pair of Quatro Woods and am considering upgrading my preamp and amp. I'm interested in the Aesthetix Calispso Preamp and the Atlas Amp, especially since, according to Aesthetix, the Atlas contains a built-in high pass filter which they say is ideal for separately powered subwoofers "such as Vandersteen's". Since I'd be moving from a single ended to a balanced system this would save me the cost of a new crossover.? What are your thoughts on this and the Calipso/Atlas combo?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? IF YOU LIKE HOW THE COMBINATION SOUNDS IT WILL WORK GREAT.? I BELIEVE NO PURCHASE SHOULD BE MADE WITHOUT AN AUDITION BUT THE COMBINATION IS A POPULAR ONE.
David (4/07/08):? Is it possible to have the V2W configured for a balanced input. I've got a rather long run to the sub, and my Bryston pre-amp has a balanced subwoofer output. Thanks, David
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? THE V2W IS BALANCED ON ITS INPUT YOU JUST NEED TO MAKE AN ADAPTER.?? CALL 559-582-0324 FOR DETAILS.
Matt (10/23/09): Hi, what are the primary differences between the VCC 2 and the VCC 5?
Answer: HELLO MATT,? THE VCC-5 IS MORE DYNAMIC, LOWER DISTORTION, GOES LOWER IN FREQUENCY AND HANDLES MORE POWER.? THE VCC-5 IS DESIGNED TO GO WITH THE QUATRO, 5 OR MODEL 7.? SOME PEOPLE INVEST MORE MONEY INTO THE CENTER WHEN THE SYSTEM IS USED MOSTLY FOR MOVIES SO THEY WILL WORK WITH ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS.? THE VCC-2 IS ALSO DESIGNED TO WORK WITH ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS WITH A FLAT PANEL TV FOR BETTER AESTHETICS ALBEIT LOWER PERFORMANCE.? THE VCC-2 MOUNTS ON THE WALL UNDER OR OVER THE TV, BRACKET INCLUDED.
Harry (2/28/11): What is the difference between the Quattro and the Model 5A?
Answer: HELLO HARRY,? WOW WHERE DO I START.? THE 5A HAS A PUSH-PULL 12 INCH SUB-WOOFER VS 2 8 INCH,? 7 INCH MID-BASS VS 6.5 INCH, MORE INERT ENCLOSURE AND A MORE SOPHISTICATED CROSS-OVER WITH BATTERY BIASING OF THE CAPS.
Jack (10/22/12): With a standard stereo preamp and amp, I realize you must use the external crossover for the 2WQ. ?But, if using a surround sound processor where you can cut the bass frequency with the processor, do you still need the external crossover? ?If it's OK to use just the processor without the external crossover, will the resulting quality of sound from the 2WQ be the same as with the external crossover? ?Thanks,
Answer: HELLO JACK,? IF THE PROCESSOR HAS A FIRST ORDER (6 DB PER OCTAVE) OPTION (VERY RARE), IT WILL WORK.? I DOUBT THE COMPLEX CIRCUIT IN THE PROCESSOR WILL SOUND AS GOOD AS THE X-2 BECAUSE ONE HIGH QUALITY CAP IN THE CIRCUIT IS HARD TO SURPASS SONICALLY BY AN OP-AMP.
George (4/07/08):? Hello, Can you please provide a link to the manual for the wx-4 crossover? Thank you, George
Answer: HELLO GEORGE, THE MODEL 4'S WERE A CUSTOM SPEAKER SOLD BY A FEW VANDERSTEEN DEALERS WHO WERE TRAINED ON THEM BY ME.? THIS WAS BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER AT THE FACTORY.
Michael (10/23/09): How would one install one of your subs into an int amp?
Answer: HELLO MICHAEL,? THE 2W OR 2WQ DOES NOT WORK WITH MOST INTEGRATED AMPS.? SUGGEST YOU CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND RESOLVE WHETHER YOUR INTEGRATED WILL WORK AS THAT IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM, BEFORE YOU BUY THE WOOFER.
Stepheck (3/02/11): ?What is the manufacture date on my Model 3 Speakers they are #1202 & #1203?? ?
Answer: HELLO STEPHECK,? WE DO NOT DOCUMENT MUCH ON OUR PRODUCTS BECAUSE OF COST.? WHEN IT COMES TO REPAIRS THE TECHNICIANS KNOW IMMEDIATELY WHEN THEY OPEN THE SPEAKER WHAT IS REQUIRED.? IN THE END DOCUMENTATION WOULD ONLY INCREASE THE COST OF GOODS.? IT IS TOUGH ENOUGH TO RESIST MOVING MANUFACTURING TO CHINA LIKE SO MANY HAVE.? I CAN GUESS BY THE NUMBER IT IS OVER 20 YEARS.
Thomas (10/22/12): What is the correct size of spades to fit on bi-wire cables for the 3A sig speakers. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO THOMAS,? 7/16 " MAX WIDTH, 3/16" ID.
Stan (4/07/08): How can I get the 5A's to the default setting regarding equalization. I just moved to a new house and until I get the room with furniture, rug, etc, I want to undo my previous setup. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO STAN,? GET A FLASHLIGHT AND THE TUNING WAND THAT CAME WITH YOUR SPEAKERS AND ADJUST ALL ELEVEN POTS SO THEIR SLOTS ARE VERTICAL.? YOUR DEALER WILL HELP YOU WITH THAT
Eric (10/24/09): I've got a pair of 2Ce speakers from the late 80s-early 90s, and we recently moved. Now I don't remember the information about bi-wiring, or how I had them set up, or whether there is some shortcut for use with one amp. Any suggestions? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO ERIC,? VERY EASY YOU NEED TO CONNECT THE TWO RED TERMINALS ON THE SPEAKERS WITH THE ONE? RED TERMINAL(+)? ON YOUR AMPLIFIER.? THE TWO BLACK TERMINALS ON THE SPEAKERS NEED TO BE CONNECTED TO THE ONE BLACK TERMINAL(-) ON YOUR AMPLIFIER.? YOU CAN USE TWO WIRES OR FOUR WIRES TO DO THIS.? USE YOUR INGENUITY,? EITHER WAY THE SPEAKER WILL PLAY.
Mark (3/02/11): What dip setting do I use on the crossovers with Ayre MXR?
Answer: HELLO MARK,? YOU WILL HAVE TO CALL ME AT THE FACTORY BECAUSE I DON'T HAVE THAT INFORMATION HERE AT HOME.? 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE.
Mark (11/03/12): I have used the bi-wire method to connect my 2ce's to a Parasound 2250 amplifier. The sound is beautiful. My question is, The Parasound has a switch in back that lets me select either 8ohm, or 4ohm. I am currently using the 8ohm setting without any problem, but am concerned that the bi-wire shows the amp a 4ohm load. Should I select the 4ohm setting?
Answer: HELLO MARK,? BI-WIRE DOES NOT ALTER THE IMPEDANCE OF THE SPEAKER SEEN BY THE AMPLIFIER.
Louis (4/08/08): Dear Mr. Vandersteen. I currently own a pair of 23 year old 2C's and ordered a pair of Quatro Wood's in February (feeling a little guilty that I'm deserting an old friend but will try to find them a good home). I am concerned about having enough power out of my one dedicated 15 amp outlet to power my amp (Jeff Roland Model One), preamp (Audible Illusions), SACD player and turntable, and soon a pair of 275 watt SW's that come with the Quatro's. I also have a PS Audio Quintessence. Thanks for your help.
.Answer: HELLO LOUIS,? SHOULD WORK FINE AS LONG AS YOU DON'T TRY TO TURN ALL OF THEM ONE AT ONCE.? ONE ADVANTAGE WILL BE LESS PROBLEMS WITH GROUND LOOPS.
Hakan (10/24/09): Hello, 1) Reading the Stereophile review of the Quatro speaker there is a significant gap between specified efficiency by Vandersteen spec and the measured performance in the test. (87 vs 83dB/2.83V) Why so and what is your comments about it?? 2. ) How do I convert the amps on quatro to 230V AC & 50Hz. is it just to move a jumper so both primary windings goes from parallel to series connection? Best regards.
Answer: HELLO HAKAN,? OUR NUMBER IS INCORRECT AND I KEEP FORGETTING TO CHANGE IT.? IT SHOULD BE 83.5 DB FOR 2.83 VOLTS.? THE 220 VOLT SUPPLY IS A TOTALLY DIFFERENT SUPPLY BECAUSE BOTH ARE SWITCHING, POWER FACTOR CORRECTED AND REGULATED.? THE SPEAKERS WOULD HAVE TO BE ORDERED AS 120 OR 220 VOLT,
Dalton (3/05/11):? Hello Richard, I recently purchased a pair of 2c speakers. The bass is not responding very well - kind of flabby, it lacks punch. However the rest of the speaker is glorious. I have set them up by ear, I did not use test tones or meters. Do you think that the surround on the bass driver is broken? What course of action do you suggest? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO DALTON,? CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 FOR SERVICE AND LEAVE A MESSAGE.
Arvo (11/03/12): I bought Vandersteen 2ce ?n 1998 while I was in US. is there any changes to get upgrade to these to signature or replace to 3a signature.? Nowadays I live in Finland.? Not many Vandersteen's around here..Best regards
Answer: HELLO ARVO,? THERE ARE NO UP-DATES AVAILABLE FOR ANY MODEL TWO.
Mike (4/10/08):? Hello Richard: A neighbor is offering to sell a used 2W subwoofer at a very good price as he and his wife just had a baby. As it is about 15 years old do I need to be concerned about deterioration of the driver surrounds or does this model use woofers with butyl rubber surrounds?? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO MIKE,?YES.
Rogerio (10/24/09): I am a very proud owner of a pair of the 2c model, for about 10 years or few more, and the sound that I hear from de it is still perfect, and how is impossible to see the condition of the drivers after all these years, there is a doubt in my head if the condition of the drivers are still good, because they are made of a kind of material that is not those very used in drivers suspension, like foam ??? I am very happy that I found you people again, and if possible I would like to receive any news from or a brochures from the company. I think its the best sound I ever heard from a stereo pair of speakers, very HONEST QUALITY AND PURE AS ALIVE MUSIC. I am a civil engineer and musician in Brazil.
Answer: HELLO ROGERIO, IT THEY SOUND GOOD AND THE LEFT SOUNDS LIKE THE RIGHT ONE, THEY ARE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER.
Gordon (3/06/11):? Contacted "Waterlily Acoustics" about purchasing a Cd from them. Kavi said to contact you about the Cd "Dom Um Romao-Saudadles". Can you give me a price for this CD and the address that I need?to order this Cd. Can I call you and order this Cd over the phone, using a credit card? Thank You
Answer: HELLO GORDON,? YOU CAN ORDER ONE FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER LISTED ON THIS SITE.
Jack (11/04/12): I have a pair of Model 3.? One of the woofer has the open coil.? Can I buy the replacement woofer from you?? If so, how much?? Do you recommend to recoil or replace?? How much is the recoil?? The serial number is 2098. Thank you for your time,
Answer: HELLO VAN,? CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 FOR A QUOTE.
Bill (4/10/08):?Richard, I've had my 2CE Signatures for 2.5 yrs, purchased new from my local dealer. I have a room 24 x 38 that is not rectangular at the end opposite the speakers. I have a 53 inch rear projection tv between the speakers. The speakers are 34 in. from the wall (to center of speaker), about 7 ft. apart (on center), raked back 0.5 in. and are not toed in. I have the bases filled with sand and have followed all the instructions in the setup manual. I have very good sound right now, but cannot seem to get the soundstage and detail I know is possible along with strong bass response/impact that I also know is possible. I've tried the speakers in many different positions and can hear very minor changes in placement. Do you have any further suggestions on speaker placement given the room dimensions that would help solve this problem? For example, much farther apart, closer to the wall, extreme toe in, more rake, less rake? Thanks for your help. The speakers are capable of many different characters depending on placement.
Answer: HELLO BILL,? SOUNDSTAGE, DETAIL, AND STRONG BASS ARE MOST SENSITIVE TO RECORDING QUALITY AND SOURCE EQUIPMENT.? THE SECOND CULPRIT CAN BE THE AMPLIFIER AND LAST THE WIRES.? NONE OF THESE WERE MENTIONED SO I WOULD CONSULT YOUR DEALER AND DISCOVER IF YOU ARE EXPECTING TOO MUCH OR THERE IS A WEEK LINK IN YOUR SYSTEM.? I UNDERSTAND THAT YOU DO NOT HAVE ANY RECORDINGS THAT SOUNDSTAGE HAVE DETAIL OR BASS?? IF YOU DO THEN THERE IS NOTHING SERIOUSLY WRONG WITH YOUR SET-UP JUST POOR RECORDINGS.? IF YOU WANT FURTHER DISCUSSION CALL ME AT 559-582-0324.
Matt (10/25/09): I am a very happy owner of 2Ce Sig IIs, which I think are the best value in audio . . . I am interested in the upcoming Trio. Will it have an "active acoustic coupler" (ala 2Ce and 3A) and are there any modifications to the 8" woofer relative to the 2Ce or 3A? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO MATT, THE TRIO IS NOT FINALIZED YET.? AT THIS POINT IT HAS A 8 INCH WOOFER A 4.5 INCH MID AND A ONE INCH TWEETER.? IT WILL NOT GO AS LOW AS THE 3A SIG OF COURSE BECAUSE THERE IS NO ROOM FOR THE TEN INCH SUB-WOOFER BUT IT WILL LOOK A LOT BETTER AND THEREFORE BE MORE WIFE FRIENDLY.? PRICE WILL BE APROX $5000.00
Nhan (3/06/11):? I have received my VCC-5 in a box that is severely damaged during shipment. There's no visible external damage to the speaker that I can tell. The dealer told me to spend some time listening to it and if there's a problem let him know. I had pair of the 1C at one time and when it got knocked over by accident, the tweeter went out. With the stereo pair, I noticed right away the unbalanced sound. I am not sure what I should pay attention to with the single VCC-5 to hear if there's any damage. Are there more than one driver on the VCC-5 that can be potential damaged like when my older 1C got knocked over?
Answer: HELLO NHAN,? TAKE IT BACK TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND COMPARE IT TO HIS DEMO UNIT.? ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS ON THIS CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 AND LEAVE ME A MESSAGE.
Jack (11/04/12): I have a pair of Model 3.? One of the woofer has the open coil.? Can I buy the replacement woofer from you?? If so, how much?? Do you recommend to recoil or replace?? How much is the recoil?? The serial number is 2098. Thank you for your time,
Answer: HELLO VAN,? CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 3 FOR A QUOTE.
Michael (4/11/08):? I have 5's with Ayre electronics. Finally bought a 50" plasma flat screen. What type of dvd player are folks running with your speakers? My old DVD player sounds flat on the 5's. Any help here or do I have to wait for the next generation of blue ray's for audiophile dvd player.
Answer: HELLO MICHAEL,? I HAVE NEVER HEARD OF ANYONE CRITICALLY LISTENING TO A DVD PLAYER.? ANY DECENT PLAYER WILL DO MOVIES FINE BUT AUDIO SHOULD BE? HIGH RESOLUTION LIKE VINYL OR ALTHOUGH? LOWER IN RESOLUTION A FINE CD PLAYER (BEING YOU HAVE AYRE TRY THEIRS).
John (10/26/09): 'Is the Trio going to be easier to drive than the 2CE Sig 2?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? IT WILL BE ABOUT THE SAME.
William (3/12/11): Hello Vandersteen, There is a minor issue with my Vandersteen 5s.? When trying to remove the one of the floor cones from the speaker base the spike separated from the thread/bolt and the thread/bolt remained in the speaker.? Do you know of a method where I can remove the thread/bolt with out damaging the thread??? Or, is it just better to remove the thread/bolt any way possible and have you charge me for a replacement cone?
Answer: HELLO WILLIAM,? JUST SCREW THE CONE BACK ON THE THREADED SHAFT STICKING OUT OF THE BOTTOM OF THE SPEAKER WITH THE CORRECT AMOUNT OF SPACERS AND ALL WILL BE WELL.? IF YOU NEED TO REMOVE THEM FOR ANY OTHER REASON USE A VICE-GRIP.
?Walter (11/05/12): ?I am considering buying a pair of 2W subs to compliment my 3A-sigs in my home theater system - serial number 4701/4702 - driven by a Denon AVP-A1HDCI pre-processor with a built in crossover.? My first question, is when were these manufactured, what is the life expectancy for the 2W, and how can I tell if these are near end of life?? Do these units have any recommended upgrades?? Do you have a wiring diagram for the 2-sub installation - the owners manual speaks of a dual sub setup, but provides wiring diagram for one sub.? Can I use the crossover in my processor or would performance be better with the external crossovers?
Answer: HELLO WALTER,? I WILL MAKE THIS SIMPLE.? THE 2W WILL NOT WORK WITH THE DENON PROCESSOR, PERIOD.? 2W SUBS THAT OLD (25 YEARS) ARE STARTING TO HAVE ISSUES BUT WE ARE ABLE TO SERVICE THEM ($225.00 FLAT RATE WITH A 90 DAY WARRANTY).
Pete (4/16/08): Hi, I have a pair of 2ci about 15 years old or older. I'm selling them and was asked whether I had noticed any bass depletion. I was told speakers of this vintage had a problem with the foam around the driver's) deteriorating over time. Apparently the foam turns a grayish green and becomes brittle, suggesting a rebuild. Any truth to this? They sound great to me. Thanks
Answer: HELLO PETE,? THE 2CI DID NOT HAVE FOAM SURROUNDS.? THE 2C DID AND THEY OVER TIME WILL DETERIORATE AFTER ABOUT 25 YEARS.? I THINK PEOPLE FORGET THE 2CI IS OVER 18 YEARS OLD AND THE 2C 25 YEARS TO 30.
Ed (10/27/09): I have reviewed some of the FAQ's along with the User-Submitted Questions, but still have some confusion to what subwoofer would mesh well with my system. I currently have a pair of 2Ci's powered by a separate amplifier with a Pre-Amp/Processor for 5.1 channels. I am running my DVD player, which I also use for CD listening, through an offboard A-D Converter that is connected to the pre/pro. I am concerned with damaging my 2Ci's which is one reason why I am looking at adding a sub. I am seeing mixed information regarding which sub to go with. I have read that the 2Wq is ideal for music and the 2W is geared for movies and that one should not use the 2W for music. The audio quality is paramount for me. I use my system for both 2 channel listening along with movies; 60% movies, 40% music. Given my system, what would be your recommendations? I'm probably only going to be able to go with one sub due to budgets on both $$$ and space. Thanks for all your information.
Answer: HELLO ED,? BECAUSE YOU HAVE A SEPARATE AMPLIFIER YOU CAN USE EITHER THE 2WQ OR THE V2W.? CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND AUDITION THE V2W ON MUSIC.? IF THE V2W SATISFIES YOU ON MUSIC IT WILL BE BETTER FOR MOVIES AS THAT IS 60% OF YOUR USE.
Kurt (3/12/11): I have been using the 2ce stands without filling them (have not put the end caps on yet) - what is the best solution for filling the stands? Is lead shot not recommended due to health risks? (I'm not sure if you can even buy lead anymore). Steel shot? Or are they ok as is without being filled...'
Answer: HELLO KURT,? DRY SAND IS WHAT WE RECOMMEND.? SAND IS ALMOST AS GOOD AS LEAD AND MUCH SAFER TO USE.? USE HOUSEHOLD SILICON TO SEAL THE END CAP IF IT IS A LOOSE FIT.? FILLING THE STAND IS VERY IMPORTANT FOR SONIC REASONS.
Mick (11/06/12): I'm the original owner of a pair of 2ce signatures.? I purchased them around 2006.? I recall the store explaining there's an update option.? I would send the speakers to you and for a certain fee they would be updated.? Is that correct?? If so, can you provide more details?
Answer: HELLO MICK,? THERE NEVER WERE ANY UPDATES FOR THE MODEL ONES OR TWOS EXCEPT FOR A SHORT RUN OF 2CE SPEAKERS THAT HAD MOST OF THE SIG PARTS.? I COULD BE THE DEALER WAS CONFUSED BY THE THREES AS THEY HAVE ALWAYS BEEN UP-DATABLE.
Jeff (4/16/08): Jeff (4/16/08) Hi Richard can you please tell me the minimum seating distance from the 1C's I couldn't find it in the manual. Thanks.
Answer:? HELLO JEFF,? SIX FEET IF YOU FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS ABOUT TILT.
Cyrus (10/27/09):? What are the dimensions for the Model 7's?
Answer: HELLO CYRUS,? SAME AS THE MODEL 5'S.
Gordon (3/14/11): Just talked to Kavi at Water Lily Acoustics about one of there Cd's. He told me to contact you, about availability of there CD. It is the "Dom Um Romano-Saudadles" Cd that he told me you have it for sale through Vandersteen. Can you give me more information about?cost and availability and?how to order this Cd. Can I call you on the phone and order it, using my credit card? Also have a older pair of your great 2ce's for many, many years. What a great speaker. And you don't know how many friends ask about them. You have always had great products, great performance and outstanding value..Thanks...
Answer: HELLO GORDON,? THEY LIKE ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS CAN BE ORDERED FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER LISTED ON THIS WEB SITE.? I DO THIS AT HOME AND I AM NOT SURE IF WE HAVE THE CD IN STOCK.? WE DO HAVE IT IN LP.
Pete (4/18/08):? HI, I just got a set of 2C's and I also have Sansui AU 7900 integrated amp. I'm new to all of this and I'm wondering how I should connect the speakers to the amp. Specifically the + and -, red, black, bass, treble to the amp. The amp has one black and one red output for speaker A, and one black and red output for speaker B. I just need to know how to go from the speakers to the amp. I don;'t have a manual, and can't find one online. I've done some research, but haven't come up with the answer yet. Thanks!
Answer: HELLO PETE,? CONNECT THE AMPS RED CONNECTORS TO THE SPEAKERS RED CONNECTORS AND THE AMPS BLACK CONNECTORS TO THE SPEAKERS BLACK CONNECTORS.? PLAY MUSIC.
Matthew (10/29/09): Hi Richard - You answered my question last week regarding the difference between the VCC2 and VCC5 - I am planning to go with a VCC5. ?Now I am thinking of adding a pair of 3A Signatures and moving my 2C Signatures to the back. ?I have a 2WQ sub already also. ?Thoughts?
Answer: HELLO MATTHEW,? SHOULD BE A NICE UPGRADE.
John (3/14/11):? Do you have a set of spike for the Vandersteen 4A speaker? If you do can you tell me the price for two sets of four? If you don?t carry them anymore, can you please give me the specification for the spike
Answer: HELLO? JOHN,? CALL 559-582-0324.
Angelo (4/19/08): I have a chance to pick up a pait of 2c for a good price, which are going to be driven by my ASR Emitter 1 ('88/'89 model), but the seller can't tell me which version this is. He send me a foto of the back, and although it's not in focus, I think the serial number is 43131. Can you tell me which version of the 2 this is?
Answer: HELLO ANGELO,? THEY ARE? 2C LIKE YOU SAID WHICH WERE MANUFACTURED IN THE EARLY EIGHTY'S (81-83).
Lee (10/29/09):? 'Hi Folks I hope you can help me, I have a ol-1 phono preamp and it seems the power supply has died and gone to heaven. Can you tell me if this unit is repairable and whom shall I GIVE THE UNIQUE PLEASURE OF DOING SO?.
Answer: HELLO ECOMOB,? CALL VANDRSTEEN SERVICE 559-582-0324.
Martin (3/14/11):? Don't pay any attention to those malcontents ragging on you because they want a removible grill cloth. I for one rather like the appearance of the skirts on my 2 CE Signatures. I think the all black ones look rather elegent. I've owned 2s, 2Cis, 2CEs, 3s and my 2CE Sigs, and am still amazed at how open the 2CE Signatures sound. Now my question; is there a benefit to bi-amping over bi-wiring? I've been told that bi-amping frees up each amp so it can concentrate on just amplifying the lows or the mids/highs. Is this true? And your speakers are still just the best.
Answer: HELLO MARTIN,? BI-AMPING DOES AS YOU HAVE HEARD TO A DEGREE.? BI-WIRING WITH A AMPLIFIER TWICE AS EXPENSIVE WILL USUALLY SOUND BETTER THAN BI-AMPING WITH TWO LESSOR AMPS.? IT IS FOR THIS REASON WE DO NOT RECOMMEND BI-AMPING UNLESS YOU OWN THE BEST SOUNDING AMPLIFIER AT ANY PRICE, UNTIL THEN BI-WIRING WITH THE BETTER AMP WILL SOUND BETTER.
Stan (4/19/08): I have a 5.1 paradigm speakers HT set up with the denon 3808. If I were to move the 2 main speakers sides as my surrounds, which Vandersteen speakers could be used as their replacements for the main R and L? My Mains are the studio 40's, center cc 290, surrounds are the ADP 290, sub is the cube 10.
Answer: HELLO STAN,? I DO NOT RECOMMEND MIXING TIME A PHASE CORRECT SPEAKERS WITH SPEAKERS THAT ARE NOT.? THE PARADIGM ARE NOT TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SO THE SPATIAL EFFECT THAT IS SUPPOSED TO HAPPEN WITH 5.1 WILL BE COMPROMISED.? I WOULD NOT USE ANY VANDERSTEEN IN FRONT UNLESS YOUR END GOAL IS TO REPLACE ALL THE SPEAKERS EVENTUALLY.? READ THROUGH THE INFORMATION ON THIS WEB SITE CALLED "DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS" FOR AN EXPLANATION.
Jazznut (10/29/09): I have a pair of vandersteen 2CI's and was wondering what the specifications and requirements of these speakers are. Thank you.
Answer: HELLO JAZZNUT,? THE 2Ci'S ARE VERY OLD AND BEFORE COMPUTER FILES SO WE HAVE NO INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON THEM.? WE DO HAVE ALL THE PARTS FOR REPAIR.? YOU COULD LOOK FOR A REVIEW AT STEREOPHILE MAYBE THE INFO YOU ARE LOOKING FOR WILL BE IN THE REVIEW.
Roy (3/17/11):? Hello Mr. Vandersteen, Here is a question that was asked and your response:? Peter (9/17/10): 10 years ago one of my two special needs children blew up the tweeters (i think) of my 2ci Now, 10 years later I want to give him a Macintosh receiver the 2w and the 2ci's. He is moving to a larger apartment with his fianc?e and is finally staring to understand quality at low volume. May I ask what drivers are best suited currently for the old 2ci?. I use four of the largest soft dome tweeters B&W ever made in my main rig. Thanks Peter?
Answer: HELLO PETER, ?WE HAVE ALL THE PARTS NECESSARY TO REBUILD ANY SPEAKER WE HAVE MANUFACTURED IN THE LAST 34 YEARS.
Mike (4/20/08): I own a pair of model 2s serial CE59? cira 1994-5 and have noticed lots of questions about the age and lineage and types of drivers used within the model 2 version they own or want to purchase. I searched the web looking for some help in this area and have found the below quote I think you might like to share with your audience. ?And if it's rubber surrounds, then it must be a very late model 2B or a very early 2C. 2Cs/2Ci's quickly went to a poly cone 8" woofer on the front. Vandersteen changed drivers regularly, as he found stuff that was more advantageous for him. There's been at least 5 different woofers (ribbed un-treated paper, Becker treated paper, paper cone with rubber edge, and two different Vifa poly-cone 8"), 3-4 different passive radiator/active coupler versions, 4 different midranges (Audax dome/SEAS cone/Peerless sealed-back cone/his own design with neo magnet and low-profile basket ribs), 4 different tweeters (Peerless/Audax/Vifa soft-dome/Vifa aluminum dome) over the years between the original Vandersteen 2 of 1978 and the current 2Ce Signature. (Gordon W speakerfixer) BTW: On everything but the most recent models, the revision is NOT on the label plate. All Model 2s up to the most recent ones, just said "Model 2" on the ID plate, with the "B", "C" or whatnot, in with the SERIAL NUMBER. Look and see what the serial number is... I'd bet there's either a "B" or a "C" in there...? So when is the definitive book on the ls3/5a due to be published? Can all original model 2s be rebuilt?
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? THIS INFORMATION IS ONLY PARTIALLY CORRECT AND THE SPEAKERS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN A CAREFULLY TUNED SYSTEM.? DRIVER SUBSTITUTION IS A SURE WAY TO BAD SOUND.? ALL THE SPEAKERS WE HAVE? MANUFACTURED IN OVER 30 YEARS CAN BE REBUILT AT THE FACTORY ALTHOUGH NOT COST EFFECTIVE FOR SOME OF THE OLDER ONES BECAUSE? A GOOD USED LATER PAIR WOULD SIGNIFICANTLY OUT PERFORM THEM.? WE HAVE NEVER DOCUMENTED ALL OF THE CHANGES BECAUSE IT COST MONEY AND DOESN'T MATER.? WHEN THEY COME IN WE CAN SEE IMMEDIATELY WHAT IS NEEDED WITHOUT INCREASING COST OF MANUFACTURING CURRENT PRODUCTION.? THIS OVER THE YEARS HAS HAD A POSITIVE EFFECT ON THE PRICE OF NEW SPEAKERS AND WE INTEND TO REMAIN A VALUE.? IF WE HAD ALL THIS INFORMATION WE WOULD BE INUNDATED WITH CALLS WONDERING WHICH COMPONENTS WERE INSTALLED, SOMETHING WE HAVE NO TIME FOR BECAUSE TIME IS EXPENSIVE. ? MOST OF OUR DRIVERS CAN BE REBUILT SO THEY NEED TO BE SENT IN ANYWAY WITH A DOWNLOADED COMPLETED RMA FORM FROM THIS SITE, NO PHONE CALL REQUIRED.? VERY EFFICIENT. ? ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL ME 559-582-0324.?
John (11/01/09):? I have a pair of 4A speakers. Do you have any info in your archives? especially about the crossover?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THERE IS NO INFORMATION ON THE 4 OR 4A.? THE CROSSOVER WX-4 IS ELECTRONIC FOR THE LOW FREQ AND PASSIVE FOR THE HIGH FREQ.? CALL THE FACTORY 559-582-0324 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO.
Roy: My question has to do with the Model 4. ?Do you have all parts available that went into the Model 4 in stock also?
Answer: HELLO ROY,? A THIS TIME WE DO HOWEVER OUR INVENTORY FOR SOME OF THE PARTS FOR THE 4'S ARE VERY LOW AND THEY ARE NOT AVAILABLE.? THIS IS WHY THERE IS NO FACTORY SUPPORT ON THE 4'S FOR PEOPLE LOOKING AT USED PAIRS.
Keith (4/23/08): I don't like the spikes my new 1C's require. How may I protect my floor?
Answer: HELLO KEITH,? GET SOME VANDERSTEEN SPIKE SHOES TO PUT UNDER THE SPIKES FROM YOUR DEALER.
John (11/03/09): After 17 years of enjoying my 2ce's on a daily basis with no problems, I want to upgrade to a new pair of Quatro Wood's.? I bought the 2ce's from a local (upstate NY) audio store that I assumed was an authorized dealer, but now your website shows the closest dealer 150 miles away.? Although it is very inconvenient, I would travel to the dealer, but would the dealer make a 300 mile round trip to my house to properly set up the Quatro's?? I presume set up is included in the considerable (to me) cost of the speakers but I want your advice before I contact the dealer.? Thanks for your help.?
Answer: HELLO GORDON,? THAT WOULD BE A GOOD QUESTION TO ASK THE DEALER YOU ARE BUYING THEM FROM.? THE DEALER IS SUPPOSED TO DO THE SETUP AND INSTALL BUT THAT IS A LONG WAY, NO HARM IN ASKING.
Darren (3/18/11): Hi Richard, big fan... :-D? hehe. We've met a couple of times in Tacoma.? I have 2CE Signature II's and 2 - 2wq's.? Ayre K5xe and V-3 amp.? In the manual for most of your speakers you suggest that it might be better to run longer interconnects to an amp placed between the speakers and?then run shorter speaker wires.? Instead of the other way around.? Not to discuss speaker wire because that's a touchy subject.? I'm using bulk (but decent 16 gauge speaker wire bi-wired properly.? The run to the farthest speaker from my equipment behind the seating area is close to 35feet as it runs along the walls etc.? Would moving my amp between the speakers and using good quality XLR microphone cables to run from the preamp to the amp (say 25') and shorter speaker wires to the speakers about 9 feet apart make any sonic improvements in your opinion? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO DARREN,? I THINK THE MANUAL IS CLEAR ABOUT THAT.? I HAVE NEVER USED MIC CABLE SO I DON'T KNOW WHAT IT SOUNDS LIKE
Randy (4/23/08): Do you have any thoughts on pairing 2ce Sig.II with a Sim Audio i-7 (integrated 150wpc)?
Answer: HELLO RANDY,? I HAVE NOT HEARD THIS UNIT SO I WOULD COMPARE IT TO SOME KNOWN STANDARDS AND HEAR HOW IT SOUNDS.? DO NOT FORGET TO ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AS THEY LISTEN TO MANY MORE DIFFERENT COMBINATIONS THAN I.
Mike (11/05/09):? I have 1994 2ce and 1991 model 3 serial (1418) owner wonders if: ?The upcoming Trio having an 8 INCH WOOFER A 4.5 INCH MID AND A 1 ?INCH TWEETER is possibly a realized Vandersteen Reference Monitor ($6,495) as seen here back in the 2001 CES? ?If not what ever happened to the Vandersteen Reference Monitor ($6,495/2001 pricing)?
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? THE REF MONITOR WAS TRULY A GREAT DESIGN BUT WHEN ANALYZING THE MANUFACTURING COST IT WAS OBVIOUS THE RETAIL PRICE NEEDED TO BE $10,000.00.? THE SPEAKER DID NOT GO VERY LOW IN FREQUENCY SO WAS MODIFIED INTO THE QUATRO WOOD WHICH WE SELL FOR $10,700.00 INCLUDING SUB-WOOFER.? SO THE REF MONITOR LIVES TODAY AS THE TOP OF THE QUATRO WOOD II.? THE QUATRO FABRIC IS NOT THE SAME.
Greg (3/21/11):? Richard, Can you tell me the difference between the 1C and 1Ci. I couldn't find anything on your site about it. I'm sure there are others out there with the same question. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO GREG,? THE ICi HAS A NEW TWEETER, NEW CROSS-OVER WITH IMPROVED COMPONENTS AND TERMINAL INPUT CONNECTORS.
Rick (4/27/08):? Could you please tell me the difference between the 2CE Signature and the 2CE Signature ll? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO RICK,? BASICALLY IT IS THE MID AND TWEETER FROM THE 3A SIG AND DOZENS OF OTHER CHANGES TO MAKE IT WORK.? PERUSE THIS FAQ SECTION FOR MORE INFO OR CALL ME 559-582-0324.
Daryl (11/06/09): I am interested in your 2Wq or V2W subs.? I have been unhappy with the bass quality of some subs and am looking for a musical sub for my two channel Audio Research/KEF set up.? Can you tell the difference between them?? Is there anyway to demo them other then driving 4.5 hours each way to the closest dealer?? ARC tech support suggested your subs.
Answer: HELLO DARYL,? GOOD QUESTION TO ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER 4.5 HOURS AWAY.? THE V2W IS FOR HOME THEATER WITH PROCESSOR.? THE 2WQ IS FOR 2 CHANNEL SEPARATES.
Kevin (3/21/11):? Richard,? I have owned a pair of 2CE's for many years that are only used for my 2 channel setup. My question involves the top plate, if I was to place another small speaker on top of the 2Ce's would it hurt the sound? I am asking due to the fact that there is an open portion on the top that is covered by a piece of the sock material. The speakers I would be putting on top would be smaller light weight (10lb) and be used for a cheap home theater rig. Thanks
Answer: HELLO KEVIN,? PUTTING A SPEAKER ON TOP OF THE 2Ce WILL BE OK STRUCTURALLY BUT IT WILL CLOSE DOWN THE SOUND-STAGE SOME.
Walter (4/27/08): Richard, In a post dated 1/17/06 you wrote "SN# 77000 AND ABOVE AS THEY ARE FACTORY UPGRADEABLE TO 2CE SIG'S". I have a pair with the serial numbers 80192Ce & 80193Ce. The upgrade section of the website doesn't list an upgrade option for this model. Can these speakers still be upgraded? If yes, what are the upgrades and costs associated? Can any of the upgrades be done by the owner?
Answer: HELLO WALTER,? THE 2CE SIG HAS BEEN DISCONTINUED SO NO UPGRADES ARE AVAILABLE.? TO UPGRADE TO THE MARK II VERSION IS NOT POSSIBLE FOR ANY REASONABLE AMOUNT OF MONEY (TOO MANY NEW PARTS).
StroupB (11/06/09): I have your model 1 s/n 26505. One of the speaker connectors have been broken while moving them. I can't find anything similar available locally.
Answer: HELLO STROUPB,? CALL VANDERSTEEN AUDIO 550-582-0324.
Bill (3/22/11): Richard, As an original and happy owner of a pair of 5s for over 10 years I'm interested in when you'll be offering the upgrade to the 5A Carbons? Best regards
Answer: HELLO BILL,? WE HOPE TO ANNOUNCE THE UP-GRADE IN 3 MONTHS OR SO.? IT WILL BE AVAILABLE FOR THE MODEL 5 AND 5A BUT ORIGINAL OWNERS ONLY
Keith (4/28/08): Hello Richard, I am building a new dedicated sound room (two channel and surround theater) with all Vandersteen speakers. I am trying to determine the total electrical needs (consumption, amps, etc...) for my system as a whole and can not find any information on the power required by the sub woofers in the 5A's. Can you let me know what the subs require for power, amps, etc... Thank you for your help.
Answer: HELLO KEITH,? 5 AMPS PER SPEAKER MAX.
Mansell (11/07/09): 'I have been enjoying my 2CE and 2w for the last 17 years. Until now they have been powered by an equally vintage Bryston 2B power amp and PS Audio IV pre amp. ?PS finally gave up, all else going strong. I am now using a NAD 1700 pre amp and am wondering if I have to change the settings on the box between my pre and power amp. ?Unfortunately the manuals have gone missing so I don't know the impedances. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO MANSELL,? THE HIGH-PASS IS ADJUSTED TO THE INPUT IMPEDANCE OF THE AMPLIFIER.? YOU ARE USING THE SAME AMPLIFIER SO NO CHANGE IS REQUIRED.
Scott (3/23/11):? I have a question regarding the Model 5 speaker, did they come with the external high pass filters? And do you need these for them to sound right? Please let me know. Thank you,
Answer: HELLO SCOTT,? THEY ARE MANDATORY!!!!? READ THE OWNERS MANUAL.
Deric (4/28/08): I have a pair of 2Ci's bought in 1989 or 1990. I've had them in storage for the past two years, but will be setting them up in the next two weeks. Can you tell me if the drivers surrounds would have deteriorated? I don't believe the drivers have foam surrounds, but will I need to have the speakers overhauled because of their age?
Answer: HELLO DERIC,? MY CRISTAL BALL QUIT WORKING LONG AGO SO I HAVE NO WAY OF KNOWING.? PLAY THEM AND LISTEN FOR PROBLEMS.? IF SOMETHING SOUNDS OUT OF ORDER FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE.
Mike (11/09/09): Richard... I picked up an old pair of 3As really cheap because one has a failed 10" active coupler. I also have access to a used 2wq sub at a dealer, but have not yet purchased it. Could I simply disconnect the active couplers in each of the 3A speakers and use the 2wq sub to provide the lower base? How would that sound? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? THAT WOULD BE A MESS AS THE 8 INCH WOOFER AND THE 10 COUPLER WORK TOGETHER IN THE SAME CHAMBER.
Robert (3/27/11):? About 2 years ago I purchased a pair of 2Cs and had to replace one of the rear firing drivers that was damaged when I purchased the speakers. ?Since then I have used the speakers as the main front speakers in a home theater system with a pair of 2Ws (one for each front speaker). ?The driver that was replaced now has developed a rattle. ?There is no obvious delamination on the spider or surround. ?I will be sending the driver back for repair, but I am concerned that there may be a systemic problem that has caused the second failure. ?I believe that I have the crossover selected properly for the 2Ws so that I am not sending too much LFE to the main speakers. ?I also don't believe that I have had any other issues that would have caused damage to the driver. ?I would also be surprised if the driver just went bad in such a short period of time. ?Are there any other possible causes that I should be looking out for?
Answer: HELLO ROBERT,? IN MOST CASES WE GET THE DAMAGED DRIVER IN AND WE CHECK SERIAL NUMBERS.? WE FIND IT IS THE MATE NOT THE SAME SPEAKER.? IF IT IS THE SAME I DON'T KNOW WHAT COULD BE UP BECAUSE I AM NOT THERE BUT I KNOW WE DON'T REBUILD DRIVER WITH BROKEN PARTS.? THERE IS STUFF ON MOVIES TODAY THAT IS UNBELIEVABLE AND I CRINGE WHEN I HEAR THEM ON MY SYSTEM HERE AT HOME BUT OVER TIME MAY BE WITH A LITTLE MORE VOLUME?? CALL 559-582-0324 PRESS 4 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE
Roger (5/01/08): I have a Rogue Audio tube preamp feeding a PS Audio HCA-2 solid state amp through a 2W crossover box. Few weeks ago I lost the left channel to the 2CE and 2W speakers, but the preamp continued to supply a signal to a STAX amp through parallel output jacks. I sent the amp to PS Audio for repair, but their tests show both channels are good. Is there any way I can check the subwoofer crossover for continuity and proper operation, to see if this unit created the problem? I opened the unit and everything looks OK. Should I cycle the "on" switches on the selector switch? Is a meter continuity test possible? I am also looking into a possible DC leakage problem with the preamp. Thanks for any assistance or guidance you can give.
Answer: HELLO ROGER,? SWAP THE CABLES? LEFT FOR RIGHT AND SEE IF THE? PROBLEM? GOES TO THE OTHER SPEAKER.? REMOVE THE CROSSOVER BOX AND PLAY THE SYSTEM AT A LOW LEVEL AND SEE IF BOTH SPEAKERS PLAY (BE SURE TO HAVE THE AMPLIFIER OFF WHEN CHANGING CABLES).
Brad (11/11/09):? Mr. Vandersteen my name is Brad I just wanted to say I love your speakers!!! I was able to demo a pair of signatures with Ivan in NC. I was blown away. My question was can you put together a system for home theater with the Quatros??? What is my best Quatro setup? 2Pairs of Quatros? (front and back) with the VCC-5 center channel? Is the VSM Signature surrounds best for the Quatro system??? 5.1?? 7.1?? Well I guess if im using Quatros all the way around it would be 5.4?? My room is 20x25 with 9'cealing and there are no windows. This is my room, my down time, my man cave. Im a big fan of Action movies and yet I love contemporary jazz, Christian rock, to Luciano Pavarotti,Amy Lee with Evanescence and so on. Please I need your help. I trust Ivan totally but I would like to hear it from you on what you think the set up should be. Thanks again.?
Answer: HELLO BRAD,? QUATRO WOOD'S FOR THE FRONT WITH A V2W FOR L.F.E., VCC-5 CENTER, VSM-1'S FOR THE SIDES AND REARS, AND TWO 2WQ'S FOR THE TWO REAR CORNERS TO FULL RANGE THE SIDE AND REAR SPEAKERS.? ENJOY THE POP CORN.
Grant (3/28/11): Richard,? I have a pair of restored Dahlquist DQ-10's and am looking for a subwoofer that would compliment them.? If you are familiar with this speaker, would you recommend your 2wq as a good match? ? ? ? Thanks for your help. ?
Answer: HELLO GRANT,? SHOULD WORK VERY WELL BUT I HAVE NOT HEARD IT MYSELF.? YOU SHOULD ASK YOUR DEALER THEY HAVE MORE EXPERIENCE USING THEM WITH DIFFERENT PRODUCTS.
Justin (5/01/08): Have a pair of 2Ci speakers purchased in 1990. Still DELIGHTED with them. can you please recommend speaker CABLE for them? Brand, gauge, etc. Definitely want soldered banana plugs ... tried the banana plug adapters, was unhappy w/ results. Thank you!
Answer: HELLO JUSTIN,? TALK TO JOHN AND JOHN FORT AUDIO AND ASK HIM FOR ADVICE.? THE DEALERS HEAR MANY DIFFERENT WIRES IN MANY SYSTEMS.? I'M JUST SLAVING AWAY HERE IN THE FACTORY WITH VERY LITTLE EXPOSURE.
Wayne (11/15/09): My home theater system (7.1) consists of 2@2ce's, 1@VCC-5, 4@VSM-1's, 1 2wq. After reading the issue of Widescreen Review that speaks to adding additional height channels and am wondering what you would suggest as a height channel. I have a normal 8 ft ceiling with a 60" ceiling fan. I am looking for something unobtrusive but keeping in line with the sonic characteristics of my other Vandersteen speakers. But, then, I don't know if it is that important for a height channel as I don't know if the height channel carries that? kind of critical information. Thank you.u for your
Answer: HELLO WAYNE,? USING A HEIGHT CHANNEL WILL GIVE HEIGHT TO THE EFFECTS BUT IF IT DOES NOT HAVE THE SAME CHARACTERISTICS AS THE OTHER CHANNELS, BECAUSE IT IS DIRECTLY ABOVE IT WILL BE VERY DISCONCERTING.? THE BEST WOULD BE TO MOUNT A VCC-1 IN THE CEILING.? REMEMBER THE CEILING SPEAKER IS THE LIEST NEEDED EFFECT IN MY OPINION BECAUSE A TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SYSTEM DOES GIVE SOME HEIGHT EFFECT.
John? (3/31/11): I'm thinking of adding VSM1's to? my existing system of VCC5 and 2Ce Signatures.? My only option is to hang them from the ceiling.? Is this an acceptable placement option?? Also what does the mounting hardware consist of and will it support a ceiling application?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? PEOPLE HAVE MOUNTED? THEM ON THE CEILING BUT THE BRACKET PROVIDED WILL NOT WORK.? YOU CAN IMPROVISE AND USE SCREWS INTO THE TOP AND BOTTOM.? LEGALLY I CAN SAY NO MORE FOR LIABILITY REASONS.? IF YOU DECIDE TO DO THIS (MANY HAVE) PLEASE USE COMMON SENSE.? BECAUSE THEY ARE POINT SOURCES THEY ARE IDEAL FOR THAT PURPOSE.
Peter (5/04/08): Mr. Vandersteen and Team - I purchased a pair of 2C (S/N 15947 C) speakers in 1992. I would now like to upgrade to a HTS in a small 13x16x6 foot room by either: (1) Replacing the 2C speakers with your 1C System (2 ICS, 1 VCC-1, 2 VSM-1 and 1 V2W) or (2) Upgrading my 2C speakers by adding your Center VCC-1 and two VSM-1 speakers. QUESTION: Which of these two options would offer: (1) a least expensive conversion vs. (2) the best bang-for-the-buck sound conversion? I love the 2C sound (despite my wife's dislike of the large physical size!), and one way or another, I am determined to stick with a Vandersteen system of any size! Thanks!
Answer: HELLO PETER,? THE TWO'S? ARE A BETTER CHOICE EXCEPT HT DEMANDS THE USE OF A SUB THAT PROTECTS THE BOTTOM OF THE TWO'S OR ONES.? USE THE OPTION THAT INCLUDES THE V2W.
Jim (11/17/09): Can I get a new pair of Model 1C cross over for my pair of 1B's? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JIM,? THE 1C CROSS OVER IS NOT DESIGNED FOR THE MODEL 1B DRIVERS, OR THE 1B STRUCTURE.? IT WOULD BE A BIG STEP BACKWARDS.? THE 1C IS MUCH IMPROVED BUT ONLY BECAUSE THE DRIVERS,? ALIGNMENT (STRUCTURE) AND CROSS OVER WERE DESIGNED FOR EACH OTHER
Bob (4/02/11): 'Dear Richard. I have a pair of 2CE's (purchased in 1991 or 92), 2W in 1994, VCC-1 around 94 or 95. Last weekend a Paradigm speaker I've had since 1998 separated from the foam surround which made me start thinking about my Vandersteen's doing the same thing. I've gotten many years of fantastic enjoyment out of them and I wonder how many years I have left. Unfortunately, I don't have the budget I once did and when these die I will not be getting high end stuff again. Is there any reconditioning things you offer that can at least help the 2CE's?
Answer: HELLO BOB, LIFE IS TOO SHORT TO WORRY ABOUT THINGS THAT HAVE NOT HAPPENED YET.? THERE ARE NO FOAM SURROUNDS IN YOUR SPEAKERS.? KEEP THEM OUT OF DIRECT SUNLIGHT IN A NON SMOKING ROOM (ESPECIALLY POT) AND THAT WILL GIVE YOUR SPEAKERS LONG LIFE.
Ed (5/06/08): Hello Richard. I recently bought a pair of 1Cs here in MI. I love them. One question. Why banana plugs and not binding posts?
Answer: HELLO ED,? THE 1C IS OUR ENTRY LEVEL PRODUCT SO COST IS A FACTOR.? THE BARRIER STRIP WE USE ON OUR OTHER SPEAKERS COST TOO MUCH AND AFFORDABLE 5 WAY BINDING POSTS SOUND BAD.
Dan (11/18/09): I've had a pair of 2C's for over 25 years and they have been fantastic. Lately, though the soundstage has been poor. Going through the trouble-shooting guide I've concluded that the left speaker tweeter is not functioning. It seems that maybe the mid-range is playing a little loud, but not very extreme. I've check the impedance matrix and it is fine. Is it likely that it is just a problem with the tweeter and not the crossover? If so, do you have replacement tweeters and is it reasonable to do my own installation (I am fairly handy with tools). Thanks!
Answer: HELLO DAN,? WE CAN REBUILD YOUR TWEETER FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE.? THE X-OVER CAN NOT BE REMOVED (DO NOT ATTEMPT WE WILL NOT SERVICE A X-OVER OUTSIDE THE SPEAKER) SO THE WHOLE SPEAKER NEEDS TO BE SHIPPED TO THE FACTORY.? I SUSPECT BURNED COMPONENTS IS THE REASON THE MID IS PLAYING LOUDER.
Tony (4/02/11): I am considering buying a 2Wq subwoofer, but don't know if it will work with my Creek 5350SE or Creek Evolution integrated amps. The 5350SE has "Power Amp IN" and "Pre-Amp OUT" RCA jacks (R/L) currently connected with jumpers. The Evolution only has "Pre-Amp OUT" jacks. My name is Tony White.
Answer: HELLO TONY,? THE CREEK WILL WORK BECAUSE YOU CAN PUT THE WX-2 BOX IN PLACE OF THE JUMPER.? THE OTHER ONE WILL NOT.? YOU NEED TO KNOW WHAT THE INPUT IMPEDANCE IS OF THE CREEK, ADJUST THE WX-2 ACCORDINGLY AND PLAY MUSIC.? ONCE YOU FIND THE BEST SETTING FOR THE WX-2 WITH THE EXPERIMENTATION TALKED ABOUT IN THE MANUAL CONTACT YOU DEALER AND BUY THE HIGHER PERFORMANCE X-2.
Doug (5/07/08): Richard, I recently purchased a pair of 1Bs in need of repair. I had to glue the surrounds back to the woofers and all went well. I need two things that only you can provide. I need replacement socks and more importantly a crossover schematic for the speakers. I would like to build outboard crossovers and play around with the speakers. Any product support you can give that does not involve shipping them to you would be greatly appreciated. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO DOUG,? EACH PAIR OF VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS IS TWEAKED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER SO THE SCHEMATIC IS UNIQUE TO THAT PAIR, SO OBVIOUSLY ONE IS NOT AVAILABLE.? GRILLE CLOTH CAN BE ORDERED FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER.
Jim (11/18/09): ?I need to obtain the age and verify the Model of the following 2 serial numbers: 50534 and 50535. ?I would really appreciate this information as I am considering purchasing this pair and want to verify the age of the speakers. ?Thanks,
Answer: HELLO JIM,? THIS WILL NOT BE POSSIBLE AS WE DO NOT KEEP RECORDS BEYOND THE 5 YEAR WARRANTY PERIOD BUT THE MODEL DESIGNATION WILL BE STAMPED INTO THE BACK PLATE AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER.? IF THEY ARE 2CE'S I CAN ONLY GUESS THEY ARE ABOUT 15 YEARS OLD
Delton (4/04/11): What type of plug is required to connect to your Model 1 speakers? I have two speakers but I don't have the right connectors. ?Your help will be appreciated. ?Thank you.
Answer: HELLO DELTON,? STANDARD BANANA PLUG.
Kevan (5/12/08): What is the cost to upgrade the veneer on a 1C to Ebony Macassar?
Answer: HELLO KEVAN,? THIS CAN ONLY BE AN OPTION AT THE TIME OF ORDER AND EBONY PRICES VERY EVERY DAY LIKE OIL.? TODAY IT WOULD BE $550.00 IN CUT AND BUFF GLOSS ABOVE THE REGULAR PRICE.
William (11/19/09): I have a pair of Model 5s and had a question about setting up the M5-HP Crossover.? First of all the input impedance of the amplifier is provided by the manufacturer. My preamp has single ended outputs only.? I have an amplifier that accepts only balanced inputs.??? If I use a single ended to XLR converter on the amplifier end would this impact the setting of the M5_HP crossover?? In other words, would I just use the figure from the manufacturer or does it need to be altered? Or, would it be better to use the converter before the M5-HP Crossover? I do have a pair balanced and single ended crossovers.? And, in this case would I need to make an adjustment to the manufacturer's input impedance figure?
Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, ADAPTERS WILL NOT WORK AND COULD CAUSE VERY EXPENSIVE PROBLEMS.? THE SYSTEM MUST BE BALANCED OR SINGLE ENDED ALL THE WAY THROUGH.? CALL IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS 559-582-0324.
Mike (4/04/11): Hi Richard, Regarding the spade lugs that connect to Vandersteen speakers, what size do you recommend?? What are your thoughts regarding bare wire connections for Vandersteen speakers? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? RING LUGS WITH A 3/16 HOLE AND A MAX DIAMETER OF 7/16 WOULD BE BEST (MAX CONTACT AREA).? YOU CAN USE COPPER AUTOMOTIVE TYPE AND CRIMP THEM TIGHT.
Jeff (5/15/08): Hi; I was told that class D amps (Ice Power) amps should not be used with the 5As because of DC offset. Is that true, and/or can these amps damage the speakers? Thanks
Answer: HELLO JEFF,? YOU HAVE HEARD CORRECT THEY SHOULD NOT BE USED WITH THE 5A, 2WQ, AND QUATRO.? REPORTS FROM THE FIELD QUESTION THE AMPLIFIER'S SOUND ESPECIALLY ON HI REZ SOURCES (VINYL) LONG TERM.? I HAVE NOT HEARD THE COMBINATION OBVIOUSLY AS THE D.C. OFFSET IS A PROBLEM.? NOT ALL CLASS D AMPLIFIERS HAVE D.C. ON THE OUTPUT.
Mark (11/20/09): Good afternoon, Just a note to say "thanks" again for the 3A Signature. We've had our 3As for over 5 years now -always? enjoyed them; as well as the consequent relationship with our local audio dealer who also sold? us? our first?Vandersteen's ( Model 2Ce ) almost 20 years ago. While my regular amplifier ( Musical Fidelity M3) is away in? "long-term care" I replaced it with another MF product, a KW 500. All I can? say after? having listened to this combination is that it is clear I have not yet discovered the full potential of these? wonderful speakers.? So, to the question: Is it likely that moving on to a yet more powerful amplifier (currently 510 Watts per channel) would? yield additional improvements? We listen to classical and lots of vocals, including folk and and "old" pop. and never at "rock the house"? volumes.
Answer: HELLO MARK,? I KNOW THE TWO AMPLIFIERS YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT BUT THE REASON THE NEWER ONE SOUNDS BETTER HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH POWER, IT'S JUST A BETTER SOUNDING AMPLIFIER.? I AM SURE IF YOU SPENT ENOUGH MONEY YOU COULD FIND A 150 WATT AMPLIFIER THAT WOULD SOUND BETTER THAN THE KW 500.? ONCE YOU HAVE ENOUGH POWER IT THE QUALITY OF THE AMPLIFIER THAT DETERMINES THE SOUND.
Dr. Polyzos (4//11): Hello, My name is Michalis and I am an owner of Vandersteen's 2CE Signatures. I am planning to buy an amplifier that can drive them properly but I don't really know what to buy. I don't want to spend over 3000-4000$ for the amplifier. I have read that these speakers need transistor amplifiers to sound properly otherwise I will have to spend too much on a tube amplifier for to be driven properly. I would be grateful if you give me any recommendation for it? Thank you for your time.
Answer: HELLO DR. POLYZOS,? I WOULD DO SOME LISTING WITH YOUR DEALER ON SOME OF YOUR MUSIC AND PICK THE BEST SOUNDING ONE TO YOU THAT IS WITHIN YOUR BUDGET.
Frank (5/17/08): Hi Richard, do you know what input impedance to use for Joule electra grand marquis mk iv? I have Vandersteen 5A's. I got this amp after hearing your setup at CES. Thanks in advance,
Answer: HELLO FRANK,? I DON'T REMEMBER WHAT THE INPUT IMPEDANCE WAS BUT I AM SURE JUD AT JOULE ELECTRA CAN TELL YOU.? BY THE END OF THE SHOW IT WAS SOUNDING VERY GOOD.
Don (11/21/09): ?I want to synthesize a new balanced X-2 type fixed crossover for a W2 subwoofer crossed over at 80 hz to a pair of 3A's - if the main amp's 3A load impedance is 47K ohms per phase, all I need between the preamp / processor and the amp is a series film-type cap of ~ 0.047 mfd per phase - correct ? Will this work with a dedicated V2W for the LFE channel and the W-2's linked to the 3A's via the main L&R power amp ? Have you tried Audyssey's Multi-EQ XT software with this set-up ? Opinions ??'
Answer: HELLO DON,? CALL 559-582-0324 AS THIS QUESTION IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM.? YES I HAVE EXPERIMENTED WITH AUDYSEY AND OTHERS WITH MIXED RESULTS.? THE RESULT IS ALWAYS DIFFERENT EVEN WHEN NOTHING HAS CHANGED.? IN MOST CASES ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM WITH A RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER THE OLD FASHIONED WAY SOUNDS BETTER.? AUDYSEY CERTAINLY WORKS BETTER THAN TRING TO ADJUST LEVELS BY EAR.
Jim (4/10/11): 'Can I use 4 channels of a 5 channel (125W/channel) amp to bi-wire my Model 2s (ie, one channel to each of the 4 speaker inputs on the 2 speakers)?
Answer:? HELLO JIM,? PERUSE RECENT Q&A'S BECAUSE THIS QUESTION HAS BEEN ANSWERED? MANY TIMES
Henry (5/19/08): Dear Sir I had 1 pair of vandersteen 3 I bought it 15 years ago. and I saw you have supply the upgrade kit from 3 to 3 signature. haw I can get it. my address is Jakarta . Indonesia the 3series is 4ohm . how about the 3 signature is it 8 ohm. and if I upgrade to 3 signature do my amplyfier and pre amp can work for it? Thanks
Answer: HELLO HENRY,? THE UPGRADE IS NOT A KIT AND MUST BE INSTALLED AT THE FACTORY.? YOU WOULD HAVE TO SHIP THEM THE HANFORD, CALIFORNIA.? THE 3A SIG IS STILL A 4 OHM SPEAKER AND YOUR EQUIPMENT SHOULD STILL WORK.
Nelson (11/22/09): 'I have a pair of Model 4, SN 122,123, that I bought at Music By Design, Sausalito, CA. ?The woofers in #122 have a problem and may have shorted the amp, which has a blown channel. ?I would like to have the speakers repaired and updated, if an option. ?I would drop them off and pickup when the work is complete. I would like to build out a home theater system using these. ?Would the VCC-5 mate well, or be slightly brighter?
Answer: HELLO NELSON,? THERE IS NO UPGRADE BUT WE CAN REBUILD THE SUB-WOOFER DRIVERS FOR YOU.? CALL VANDERSTEEN 559-582-0324 FOR SERVICE.? THE VCC-5 WILL WORK GREAT BUT WILL BE SLIGHTLY SWEETER IN SOUND.
Antonella (4/10/11): Hello Richard, My name is Antonella and I come from Roma, Italy. I'd like to know if Vandy 1c can work well with tube integrated amp Leben CS 300, 12 W (Push pull El84). Thank you very much. Kind regards.
Answer: HELLO ANTONELLA,? I DON'T KNOW YOU WOULD HAVE TO TRY IT.
Mel (5/21/08): Hi Richard, Can you advise me on why you recommend in your W-2 brochure to use the next down for the X-2 crossover on your 2Ce speakers?
Answer: HELLO MEL,? THE PART OF THE OWNERS MANUAL YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT IS THE ROUGH SHOT TO BEGIN WITH.? LATTER IN THE MANUAL IS A SECTION CALLED OPTIMIZATION.? SUGGEST YOU READ THAT SECTION AND TRY THE EXPERIMENTS.
Bruce (11/23/09): 'Richard, ?I have to admit, I am shocked you are so dedicated to your customer base and actually answer the submitted questions! ?That is unheard of and I have a whole new respect for your company. ?That being said, I have a final question regarding the Model 1. ?My particular pair does not have a :"B" or "C" stamped after the serial number, so should I assume they are the original Model 1's? ?And how much improvement in sound quality should I expect with the current 1C's? ?Thanks!
Answer: HELLO BRUCE,? THEY ARE 1B'S WHICH HAVE NO COMMON PARTS WITH THE 1C.? WHAT THAT MEANS SONICALLY?? YOU WILL HAVE TO BRING THEM TO THE DEALER AND COMPARE THEM FOR YOURSELF TO KNOW THE TRUTH.
Mike (4/11/11): Mike here, I am a owner of a 1994 2ce and a 1991 model 3 serial (1418) poses this question: ?Are there any new developments within the technology behind the new Vandersteen TRIO or TREO that would be included in the next series 3 to series 3A SIG upgrades steps?
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? NOT LIKELY WITHOUT A SUBSTANTIAL PRICE INCREASE.
Mauricio (5/23/08): ?Hello Richard, why don't you have intermediate models?. I mean the difference in price from one model to the next is like the double and that way it's not easy to make the step... thanks:
Answer: HELLO MAURICIO,? GOOD QUESTION.? HAVING A SPEAKER FOR $1500.00 BETWEEN THE 1C AND 2CE SIG II WOULD BE A GOOD MARKETING IDEA HOWEVER NOT GOOD FOR OUR CUSTOMERS.?? EVEN IN CAR RACING, AIRPLANES, CAMERA, ETC IT HAS BEEN MY EXPERIENCE THAT TO EFFECT A WORTHWHILE IMPROVEMENT IT TAKES THAT KIND OF A INVESTMENT.? I WOULD NOT WANT A SMALL IMPROVEMENT FOR LESS? INVESTMENT BECAUSE IT IS A LOT OF TROUBLE TO SELL THE OLD AT A LOSS AND THEN BUY SOMETHING ONLY A LITTLE BETTER OR JUST DIFFERENT.? BETTER TO STAY WITH THE OLD A WHILE LONGER AND MAKE A STEP THAT EVERYBODY INCLUDING THE NEIGHBOR NOTICES AS A SIGNIFICANT STEP FORWARD.? THIS IS? MY OPINION OF COURSE BASED ON HOW I CONSUME.
Andrew (11/24/09): Am interested in the IICE and IICE Sig. ?Can I drive them adequately utilizing my Marantz SR 8200 alone? I don't play music loud and typically soft rock, jazz vocalists and classical. Thank you.'
Answer: HELLO ANDREW,? I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE SR 8200, ONLY AN AUDITION WILL ANSWER YOUR QUESTION.? ITS NOT HARD TO BRING THE UNIT TO THE DEALER AND HOOK IT UP AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS.
Greg (4/14/11): I have Vandersteen 5A speakers and just purchased a Classe CT-SSP surround processor. ?Can I configure the processor to do the high pass and not use the M5hp or are the M5hp still required for proper function? ?Also when I opened the M5hp case the battery says 2011. ?Do the batteries need to be replaced? ?How do I tell if the battery is dead or still working?
Answer: HELLO GREG,? THIS WILL NOT WORK IN MOST CASES AS " 6DB PER OCTAVE"? IS NOT AN OPTION.? I MOST CASES THE BATTERY BIASED BOX IS A DRAMATIC IMPROVEMENT OVER DIGITAL CROSS-OVERS ANYWAY.? THE DATE WRITTEN ON THE BATTERY IS THE DATE THE BATTERY NEEDS TO BE CHANGED.
Joe (5/23/08): Joe (5/23/08) After listening to my co-workers system, I really wanted to get into a stereo where I can experience "imaging." He told me that his last speakers were the 2CE models and highly recommended checking out your products. I will be arriving home from Iraq in less than 2 months and will be shopping for speakers. I have an Onkyo TX-8222 receiver that puts out 50W per channel. Will I be able to tell a difference between the 2CE Signature II and a less expensive pair of 1C's? Also, what connection and wire do you recommend? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO JOE,? FIRST THANK YOU FOR YOUR SERVICE.? I ASSURE YOU,? YOU WILL HEAR THE DIFFERENCE THE ONLY LIMIT WILL BE HOW LOUD THEY WILL PLAY.? WHEN YOU GET HOME SEE YOUR NEAREST VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND HAVE A LISTENING SESSION WITH HIM.? POSE THE WIRE QUESTION WITH HIM AFTER THE LISTENING SESSION AS THIS IS THE LAST THING IN A SYSTEM THAT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED.
Jim (11/24/09): 'I have a pair of 1B's and would like to incorporate them into a home theater. What should I do with them? Mains with wall mount rears? Rears with 1C's for mains?? I don't have a lot of money.
Answer: HELLO JIM,? USE THE IB'S FOR THE FRONT, VSM-1 FOR THE REAR, V2W SUBWOOFER AND VCC-1 FOR CENTER.
Josh (4/16/11):? Hello, again. Thank you for the reply on whether the Signature 3As were active or not - I bought them and they are beautiful to listen too. I am really enjoying them and when I go to Australia, I am sure they will love the trip. I was reading one of you earlier replies - Please do NOT move to China, it is refreshing to enjoy the labor of a genuine artist! Now, to my question, as I said before, I will be moving back to Australia next year (240V..again), and would like some guidance on a Passive Subwoofer that would suit the Sig 3A's - do you have any suggestions?
Answer: HELLO JOSH, I DO NOT KNOW OF ANY PASSIVE SUB-WOOFER THAT WILL WORK AS WELL AS A 2WQ EVEN IF IT IS USING A STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER OF QUALITY.
John (5/24/08): How many YEARS should we plan to wait until you post the 2C manual??? Jesus Christ, it's only the best selling speaker you ever made....
Answer: HELLO JOHN, I AM SORRY TO INFORM YOU THAT THE 2C MANUAL IS OUT OF PRINT AND BEFORE DIGITAL THEREFORE NOT GOING TO BE AVAILABLE.?? MOST OF THE INFORMATION IS NOT THAT DIFFERENT FROM THE 2CE SIG MANUAL WHICH IS AVAILABLE ESPECIALLY ROOM SET UP. IF THAT ISN'T GOOD ENOUGH I SUGGEST YOU LOOK FOR YOUR ORIGINAL MANUAL IN YOUR MESS BECAUSE THE 2C WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION 25 YEARS AGO.? WE DO HAVE ALL THE ORIGINAL PARTS? SHOULD THEY NEED REPAIR.
Tom (11/25/09): Can I upgrade my 2ce to signatures or even sig-2's?
Answer: HELLO TOM,? THE ENTIRE MODEL ONE AND TWO SERIES CAN? NOT BE UPGRADED.
Carlos (4/18/11): Hello my name is Carlos Acosta , I have owned a pair of 1C's since 1993 and have enjoyed then very much, although I have not used them in the past couple of years due to very bad "crackling" or vibrating sound coming from each of my speakers.? I have removed the fabric and inspected the woofers and seem to be vibrating from the actual cone and the "rubber like" formed rim.? It has almost separated from the cone almost entirely except for approx 1-2" .? This seems to have been attached with a 'light low tack adhesive and has now separated. My question is : can I repair myself or can I just send to you the woofers for repair ?? I hope this is the case, if not, what would the cost be to replace or upgrade?
Answer: HELLO CARLOS,? LIKE ALL SERVICE QUESTIONS CONTACT SERVICE 559-582-0324 ,PRESS 4 AND LEAVE A MESSAGE.?? WE CAN REBUILD THE DRIVER.
Jim (5/26/08): Hi Richard--I've had my 5A's for 2.5 years now, and they are glorious! This question has probably been asked before, but I can't find it among the hundreds of others. You recommend bi-wiring with one cable carrying the (+) to LF and HF drivers and the other cable carrying the (-). Is this significantly better than having one cable for both polarities of the LF signal and the other for HF? Or are they basically equivalent? --Thanks,
Answer: HELLO JIM,? THAT IS NOT CORRECT WE RECOMMEND ONE CABLE FOR THE BASS AND ONE CABLE FOR THE HIGHS.? EACH CABLE WOULD HAVE A (+) AND (-).?? CHECK THE DIAGRAM IN THE OWNERS MANUAL "A DRAWING IS WORTH A THOUSAND WORDS".
Bill (11/27/09): I own an 2W subwoofer S/N 4179 purchased in 1994. It does require the use of the X-2 crossover and has the banana jack inputs. is this considered the same as your current 2WQ? My main question is there an option to change my 2W so it can be used with a home theater system (V2W)? I would like to change my receiver to an AV type, but can't find any that offer pre-amp outputs amp inputs for the X-2. My families tastes have changed and I would like to go to an AV system, but don't want to loose the use of my Vandersteen subwoofer. I did look through the FAQ section of user submitted questions (daunting as it was, please please break them into categories) and could not find an answer. I also called the (559) 582-0324 number on Friday but there was no answer or any way of leaving a message. Any suggestions on how to use my 2W in an AV system will be greatly appreciated since my local Milwaukee WI Vandersteen dealer is no longer in business, and don't have anywhere else to go for support. Thank you.
Answer: HELLO BILL,? VANDERSTEEN WAS CLOSED FOR THANKSGIVING THURSDAY AND FRIDAY BUT OUR DEALER ULTRA FIDELIS IN MILWAUKEE IS STILL IN BUSINESS.? THERE ARE QUALITY A/V RECEIVERS THAT HAVE PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN, NAD IS ONE.? THE COST OF CHANGING YOUR 2W INTO A V2W IS $850 BUT THE ENTIRE UNIT MUST BE SHIPPED TO US.? ANY MORE QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324.
Geoffrey (4/19/11): I have been using your 2wQ subwoofer in system for video as well as audio. I have run a preamp out from the A/V receiver to a high quality tube pre-amp. ?The preamp is connected, using your dedicated croosovers, to a hight quality amp that drives only the left and right speakers (Vandersteen 2C's). ?The A/V reciver drives the center and surround channels. ?I would like to completely separate the 2 channel audio from the surround system yet keep the subwoofer working with both systems. ?Is this possible? ?If so, could you tell me what equipment I need to have the 2Wq work with both the dedicated 2 channel system and the A/V receiver? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO GEOFFREY,? LEAVE THE SYSTEM HOOKED UP AS YOU HAVE IT AND TURN OFF THE A/V RECEIVER WHEN PLAYING YOUR TWO CHANNEL SYSTEM.? IT WILL DO WHAT YOU ARE ASKING.
Henry (5/29/08): Ray Hi Richard, I own model 5s and they are the best....my question is why don't you like to much toe in where the speaker is facing the listener directly where he is sitting. Thanks
Answer: HELLO RAY,? FIRST LET ME SAY IF IT WORKS FOR YOU, HAVE AT IT.? I THINK IT CAUSES EXCESSIVE FOCUS IN THE MIDDLE WHICH IS UNNATURAL INSTEAD OF A SMOOTH PANORAMA ACROSS THE ROOM WITH NO HOT SPOTS (IN AUDIOPHILE TERMS NO FOCUS).? WHEN I HEAR MUSIC ALL OF THE PERFORMERS ARE NOT PILED IN THE MIDDLE.? FROM A TECHNICAL POINT OF VIEW I PREFER NOT TO BE EQUAL DISTANT FROM THE SURROUNDS WHICH HAVE SOME INEVITABLE DISTORTION.? BEING EQUAL DISTANT MAGNIFIES THIS DISTORTION.? HAVING SAID ALL THIS DO WHAT WORKS FOR YOU.
Russell (11/28/09): I set up my Vandersteen 3a Signatures to your formula. My question is How far back should one's listening chair be? Speakers are 7' on center.
Answer: HELLO RUSSELL, USE THE SAME FORMULA OR WHERE THEY SOUND BEST.
Steve (4/20/11):? Are your speakers available in white? What is the max. SPL@1M of the 2ce Sig2?
Answer: HELLO STEVE,? NON OF THE SPEAKERS ARE AVAILABLE IN WHITE BECAUSE IT SOILS SO EASILY.? THE MAX S.P.L. WITH? LISTENABLE LOW DISTORTION IS 110DB PEAKS.
John (5/29/08): Hi: I have a 2W subwoofer which I would like to continue using, but my amplifier is no longer functional and local dealers seem baffled when I insist that I need to be able to separate the pre amp and amp in order to accommodate the crossover. They insist that I should be able to use a subwoofer output, but I think that is incorrect. Who's right. If I'm right, can you suggest any receiver brands that still offer pre-amp out main in jumpers? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? IF YOU CAN FIND A RCA JACK ON YOUR 2W TO PLUG THE SUBWOOFER CABLE INTO OR ANY MENTION OF ONE IN YOUR OWNERS MANUAL SEND ME A PICTURE BECAUSE I DON'T KNOW OF ONE.? NAD I BELIEVE STILL HAS PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN JACKS.
HK (11/30/09): ?I am the original owner of a pair of your 2Ci's s/n 33034ci/33035ci, purchased in 1989? After using these 2ci as L/R front in our home theater system, the rear couplers in both have begun to "vibrate" at a low level with most inputs.? I have run the crossover routes as recommended on your service page -the crossovers appear to be within spec. After further reading of other user submitted questions, it appears likely that the voice coils/acoustic couplers are fried.? Can these drivers be repaired? Or is there an available replacement driver which you would suggest? Thanks Richard.? Best Regards
Answer: HELLO HK, CALL SERVICE 559-582-0324.
Pawel (4/20/11):? Hi Richard, Pawel from Poland here. I own a 1983 2C's and I just noticed that the suspension (surrounds) of my midrange drivers is terrible shape :/ Well, they are 28 yrs old so they probably suffer from age.Do you sell a replacement drivers for such an old products? If so, what is the price for a piece?. Second question: I've read that your new drivers have rubber suspension, mine midrange have foam one. Can I use a newer driver for replacement?
Answer: HELLO PAWEL,? THE NEWER DRIVERS ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE STRUCTURE AND THE CROSS-OVER.? MAYBE YOU COULD FIND SOMEONE IN YOUR COUNTRY TO REDO THE FOAM.? THAT MANY YEARS AGO WE DO NOT HAVE RECORDS AND I WOULD NOT HAVE ANY IDEA WHAT TO SEND YOU.? TO GET AN EXACT REPLACEMENT YOU WOULD HAVE TO SEND US ONE OF THEM BY POST.? THE COST WOULD BE ABOUT $65.00 EACH PLUS POSTAGE.
Jared (5/30/08): Richard, Can the 2W crossover be used downstream of a device which switches between line-level inputs just ahead of an integrated amplifier? All of the line-level devices would be going through the crossover before amplification, I guess this would be the same as using the crossover in the tape monitor loop of a receiver.
Answer: HELLO JARED,? NO THIS WILL NOT WORK BECAUSE ON MOST INTEGRATED'S THE INPUT IMPEDANCE VARIES WITH VOLUME CAUSING THE X-OVER FREQUENCY TO MOVE UP AND DOWN.? NOT GOOD!
Kris (12/03/09): ?Hello!? I am the new owner of a pair of 2c's with serial numbers:23692C and 23693C. I did not get a chance to take the socks off the speakers before I bought them as I was confident they sounded fine. Now that I have had them for a about a month, I used a flashlight to check them out beneath the socks. They have the Audax 1 inch dome, the flat surround poly cone Peerless and the diecast basket Vifa. The surrounds for the woofers and the acoustic coupler look good. After extended listening sessions, I have noticed that they impart a nasal quality to voices; best L-pad settings are -2 db on the tweeter with the mids boosted all the way up. If I turn the mids down to flat, they sound honky. There is plenty of sound output from the mids and the tweeter and I find no discrepancy in output level between left and right. I also tried playing only the upper sections to come to the same conclusion, that mids get honky/hooty at flat and sound best boosted all the way up. I understand that there may be a crossover problem, either burnt crossover resistors or maybe the mid needs correction of a resonance LCR filter/driver mismatch. Before I shell out 200+ bucks in shipping the speakers to your factory, I would like to know if there is anything else I can check. The drivers in both speakers look original to me, with no tell tale sign of them being "upgraded" by a well meaning speaker "tech" by swapping the original drivers with "upgrades". If you can please confirm that the Audax (looks like a 9x8D25), the Peerless (M122/821615) are indeed originals, it will be great. Further part ID numbers will also help me verify that they are all original before I send them your way. The reason why I am suspicious is that the Peerless drivers usually have integrated chambers and I do not understand why the 2c's would have them if the mid design is supposed to be a TL. My system comprises of a Pioneer BDP-51fd, Parasound P/SP1500 and an Aragon 8008BB. Thanks in advance for your time and for your reply,
Answer: Hello Kris, It sounds like the speakers are original as for the crossovers, who knows these speakers are 25 years or more old. A terminated transmission line simply means that provisions have been implemented to reduce reflections behind the cone. Depending on the frequencies involved this could be quite short slightly tapered and filled with sound absorptive material
Roberto (4/25/11):? I would like to run a 2W subwoofer from an integrated NAD C320BEE (now outputting to a pair of Vandersteen 1C). The Input Impedance of the Pre-Amp section is 200k ohm, with an output impedance of 80ohm. The Amp Section has an Input impedance 20K ohm. Could you please let me know which specifications I need for the X2 crossover? Also, can I order directly from you, or do I need to find a local distributor? Many thanks.
Answer: HELLO ROBERTO,? YOU WOULD PUT THE ADJUSTABLE W-X2 IN THE LOOP BETWEEN THE PRE-OUT AND THE AMP-IN.? THE AMP HAS AN INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 20K SO YOU WOULD START YOUR EXPERIMENT WITH THAT AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE "OPTIMIZATION" SECTION OF THE OWNERS MANUAL.? ONCE YOU KNOW THE RESULT OF THIS EXPERIMENT YOU CAN ORDER THE X-2 OF THAT VALUE FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER.? WE DO NOT SELL DIRECT.
Rob (5/30/08): I recently sent you an E-mail regarding amplification to be used with a set of 3A Signatures, where I was thinking of going to an Ayre or NAD integrated, to replace the tube model which I now own.? You may be gratified to know that instead of a new amp. I ordered a set of your Quatro speakers from my Sacramento , Ca. dealer instead; I am told that they will be delivered Tues. June 3rd. My question is still about your recommendations for power amplification, now with the Quatros. Info. from your web site suggests a similar load to your model 5A, or an advertised 87db sensitivity with an impedance mostly in the 7-8 ohm range. I have an Antique Sound Lab AQ-1001DT (integrated tube amp) which is specified to put out about 30W/ch in triode mode, 50W/ch in pentode mode. Your web site info. suggests that 40-200W is sufficient for the model 5A. Although, as we discussed, listening loudness levels are subjective, I do not believe that I have ever driven my 3A Signatures to clipping volumes and my questions are: Is my current amplifier sufficient to drive a pair of Quatros to satisfying, (reasonable) listening levels, and would you suggest that I use the 8 ohm or the 4 ohm speaker tap? Thanks for your help.
Answer: HELLO ROB,? CONGRATULATIONS ON HE QUATRO YOU WILL GET YEARS OF ENJOYMENT FROM THEM.?? I DO NOT HAVE ANY EXPERIENCE WITH YOUR AMPLIFIER SO I WOULD ASK YOUR DEALER HOWEVER YOU WILL SOON KNOW WHEN YOUR DEALER HOOKS IT UP.? AMPLIFIERS SOUND DIFFERENT ON THEIR VARIOUS TAPS SO I WOULD TRY BOTH AND SEE WHICH SOUNDS BEST.
Daryl (12/04/09): I've been trying to audition your 2wq sub for some time now but can't find anyplace closer than 5 hours away and I can't make the trip. I have heard the REL T's and is sounds very, very good for music. They seem to be similar in hook up principal but since I can't hear the Vandy, can you tell me how different it is from the REL T1 and what one could expect in comparison. I know that you use a passive high pass and REL does not...a point of confusion for me. I could really use some help.
Answer: HELLO DARYL, IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO USE A HIGH-PASS AS IT LOWER-ES DISTORTION IN YOUR AMPLIFIER, IMPROVES IMAGING DRAMATICALLY, LOWERS DISTORTION IN YOUR SPEAKERS (BECAUSE IT REMOVES WOOFER PUMPING BY REMOVING THE FREQUENCIES THE SUB WOOFER IS REPRODUCING) AND ALLOWS YOU TO PLAY LOUDER BECAUSE THE BASS IS NOT WORKING THE MAIN SPEAKERS. A SUB THAT OPERATES IN PARALLEL WILL NEVER BLEND AS WELL BECAUSE THE CROSSOVER BETWEEN THE TWO IS NOT WELL DEFINED. FIVE HOURS IS A LONG DRIVE BUT YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT A LOT OF MONEY AND THE POTENTIAL OF NOT OPTIMIZING YOUR SOUND AS MUCH AS A GOOD PROPERLY INSTALLED 2WQ COULD DO.
Josh (4/29/11): I am interested in purchasing a pair of Quatro which will eventually find there way back to Australia with me. As we use 240V back home, do you provide a modification to them so that I can use them in Australia? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO JOSH,? THEY WOULD HAVE TO COME BACK TO THE FACTORY FOR A MODIFICATION TOO 240V.? ONE COULD USE A STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER OF ADEQUATE SIZE WITH POTENTIAL SONIC BENEFITS (CALL ME FOR DETAILS 559-582-0324 PRESS 3).
Brien (5/31/08): What are the correct spike dimensions for Model 4's? Where can I purchase them? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO BRIEN,? 3/8 X 16 THEY CAN BE ORDERED FROM ANY VANDERSTEEN AUDIO DEALER.
Greg (12/06/09): Hello Richard, My name is Greg and I recently purchased a pair of 1C's. I am extremely happy with my purchase. I have had the speakers for less than a week and right out of the box they sound great. I've heard the effect of components breaking in and I'm wondering if you have any recommendations for how to properly/accelerate the break in process for the 1C's.
Answer: HELLO GREG, NOTHING SPECIAL AND NO WAY TO ACCELERATE BREAK IN EXCEPT TO JUST PLAY MUSIC AT NORMAL LEVELS.
Nguyed (05/02/11):? I am joining an aution sales for a couple of Vandersteen speakers series No 2 on Ebay. The information of seller show that the color of diaphragm is clear white. While all the information I search about this diaphragm is only black color. So I have a question is whether the diaphragm of this seller has been changed or Vandersteen has produced the clear white diagram for Model No 2? Many thanks for your answer.
Answer: HELLO NGUYEN,? THIS COULD BE A 33 YEAR OLD ORIGINAL MODEL 2.? UNLESS YOU ARE BUYING THEM FOR COLLECTOR PURPOSES I WOULD AVOID A SPEAKER THIS OLD.? SOME OF THE PARTS ARE GETTING VERY RARE (EXPENSIVE) AND THEN THE PERFORMANCE IS NOT WORTH THE INVESTMET.
Vicor (6/02/08): Richard, I recently purchased a pair of Quatros. The dealer performed the setup at delivery time. I have been contemplating repositioning the speakers further away from the back wall, more into the middle of the room, remaining the same distance from the sidewalls. I have mapped out my room at the corresponding intersection points based on the instructions in the manual. I am assuming that this move would require the bass calibration done again. Do you sell/provide the CD with the warble tones or a kit to consumers? I have a Radio Shack SPL meter. Is the calibration between the CD and the meter you mention in the manual critical? I realize this setup is easily done with two people, but I am willing to take the time to do it by myself. Awaiting your answer.
Answer: HELLO VICTOR,? YOU CAN USE ANY TEST DISC THAT HAS WARBLE TONES.? THE DISC THE DEALER USED IS FOR DEALERS ONLY AND NOT FOR SALE FOR LICENSING REASONS.? YOU WILL NEED TO READJUST THE BASE IF YOU MOVE THE SPEAKERS OR ADJUST ALL 11 BANDS BACK TO 12 O'CLOCK.
TL (12/06/09): Richard, I have a pair of 3A signature and one 2Wq, just bought a Pass Lab. X250 amp and in the process setting up using the WX2. I set it to 20 Kohm as the spec. said 22 Kohm input impedance. During power-on stage, I can hear thumping noise coming out the right hand channel only, but never heard this without the subwoofer in the loop.. I felt once something settle (voltage may be), it will be quiet. I am still debugging and like to see if you have any answer to this.
Answer: HELLO TL, YOUR PASS AMPLIFIER MAY HAVE EXCESSIVE DC OFFSET IN THE RIGHT CHANNEL. TAKE IT IN AND HAVE IT CHECKED.
Rich (5/05/11): I just got a pr. of CE2s.? The recommendation is for bi-wiring.? Is there an adapter, sort of like jumpers, in the case that I do not use bi-wire for now?? None came with the speakers and the manual seems to say that there are adapters.? If there are, can I still get them, and how much?
Answer: HELLO RICH,? THERE ARE NO ADAPTERS PROVIDED.? CONTACT YOUR WIRE MANUFACTURE ABOUT AVAILABILITY OF A JUMPER.
Tom (6/02/08): ?Hi Tom here: I have the Subwoofer VLR-1 that was purchased about 18 years ago. It is blowing the internal breaker imediately when pluged into the 110V independent of being hooked to the amplifier (we tried both ways; hooked to amp and isolated). Id there a circuit diagram that would help me in trouble shooting the problem? Any hints as to common failures on this product. We love it and have enjoyed it for several years.
Answer: HELLO TOM,? THE INTERNAL CIRCUIT BREAKER IS NOT FOR CONSUMER USE.? IF THE INTERNAL BREAKER BLOWS IT INDICATES A TERMINAL PROBLEM.? RESETTING THE BREAKER JUST CAUSES MORE DAMAGE.? DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND SEND IT IN FOR SERVICE.? WE SERVICE THEM IN 3 DAYS FOR $190.00.
John (12/08/09): Hi Richard, thank you for taking the time to answer all the questions. I wanted to ask you about your comments on vinyl vs digital. First of all I would like to say that I have a pair of 2ce's which I believe are by far the best value in speakers, they are quite remarkable considering there price. I read with interest your comments on vinyl and I do agree that it has to be the highest resolution because it is the original analogue signal, not a sample. I actually record my vinyl at DVD audio sampling rates when I want to play background music. It is somewhat confusing though when you try and think logically about the ultimate goal of HiFi. Most Newer recordings start of digital in some form or another we then convert them to analog when we press the vinyl. I think where we miss the point is to say hifi should reproduce the original signal as closely as possible. I think the object of hifi is to give the most enjoyment to a listener by creating a sound that is colored in the direction of that persons tastes.Vinyl playback although the highest resolution also starts with a cartridge which has to be the most varied sounding piece of hifi equipment, Saying that I believe your products produce the most exquisite music and I am sure most people visiting this site would agree. Do you see the possibility of someone inventing a better way of recording analogue than Vinyl? Surely if we have playback equipment that matches the sampling rate etc of the recording equipment. then in digital terms we will be listening to the recording exactly as it was recorded.
Answer: HELLO JOHN, THAT ASSUMES THAT THE UNNEEDED PROCESS OF TURNING IT INTO DIGITAL THEN CONVERTING IT BACK TO ANALOG TO HEAR IT ISN'T PART OF THE PROBLEM NO MATER WHAT THE SAMPLE RATE.? REMEMBER THE CABLE BETWEEN THE CD TRANSPORT AND THE DAC IS ONLY MOVING 0 AND 1 YET THEY SOUND DIFFERENT.? DIGITAL WILL IMPROVE SO WILL ANALOG BUT VINYL AVAILABILITY IS INCREASING AND "HI RES" DIGITAL IS DIMINISHING (MPEG 3) THE ARGUMENT IS MUTE WHEN MARKET DEMAND IS FOR LESS STORAGE SPACE RESOLUTION BE DAMMED.? I THINK WE WILL BE USING THE OLD CRUDE BUT ELEGANT SOURCE FOR MANY MORE YEARS.? P.S. I THINK THE SOUND OF BETTER CARTRIDGES ARE CONVERGING IN RECENT YEARS.
John (5/08/11): 'Hi.? I have a 2W (serial number above 4060) and am wondering what I would hear if I upgraded it to a 2Wq.? Is the adjustable Q feature the main benefit, or will the new amplifier provide an improved listening experience and bass control, as well?? Can I replace the top wooden surface at the same time (slightly damaged), and does it have to go back to the factory?? Can my local dealer do this? Also, I have the 2W paired with 2CE Sigs, serial numbers in the 51000 range.? What are my upgrade options?? What are the improvements in the2CE Sig II?? You don't list that price online.? How much is it, and can that upgrade be done locally? Finally, is there anything new in the works?? One post mention Trios? Another said Quatro IIs?? I haven't heard of either, and I don't want to purchase something that is soon going to be revised (thinking about Quatro Woods).? The website doesn't list the price or really detail the 5A Carbons, either.? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? WOW!? THIS IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM.? CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 AND I WILL ANSWER ALL YOUR QUESTIONS IN A LOT LESS TIME THAN I CAN TYPE.
Phil (6/06/08): I recently purchased a pair of 2CE Signature II's and have spent nearly 2 weeks getting them setup in my listening room (I'm kinda of anal about setup.) Having owned 5 pair of Vandersteen's over the last 25 years, I was very familiar with set-up and positioning for best sound in my room (accounting for speaker height differences between the 2' and 3's and the tilt differences.) I received the older 2 CE Signature owners manual and I'm curious if there might be some changes to the tilt vs. ear level and distance with these speakers. It seems for best integration and balance, the speakers need to be tilted back about a 1/2" or so more than listed for my 38" ear height and 8' distance. I did some up/down listening and I can easily hear where the window is. However, instead of the 1-3/4" tilt back (as interpolated from the manual), it requires a touch more than 2-1/4" (actually about 2-3/8") to get in the "Sweet spot." Is this normal or I'm I missing something? It actually appears that these speakers are a little less critical of the exact sweet spot for good sound than past models although, when they are right, things open up more. And just a comment, the sound of these speakers IMO best that of my much older 3A Sigs through the mids and highs and actually seem a little tighter in the bass. They may not dig quite as deep with the ease of the 3's but sound-well, cleaner. I suppose this could be because of the little lighter balance I perceive. I must say though, for the retail price, they are one good sounding(and to me) accurate loudspeaker. My congrats on a special loudspeaker.
Answer: HELLO PHIL,? THE TILT RECOMMENDED IN THE MANUAL IS WHERE THE DRIVERS ALL SPEAK AT THE SAME TIME FOR THE DISTANCE.?? THAT DOES NOT GUARANTEE YOU WILL LIKE THEM BEST AT THAT POINT.? MORE TILT THAN RECOMMENDED WILL BE SLIGHTLY SWEETER, LESS WILL BE SLIGHTLY MORE FORWARD.? YOU ARE VERY CLOSE AND I RECOMMEND YOU LEAVE THEM WHERE YOU LIKE THEM IN YOUR ROOM.? I ASSURE YOU THAT A COMPARISON BETWEEN NEW 3A SIGS WOULD BE A VERY DIFFERENT RESULT AS THERE HAVE BEEN MANY RUNNING CHANGES OVER THE YEARS.? I WOULD AGREE WITH YOU IF THE 3A SIGS WERE OLDER THAN 4 YEARS OR UPGRADED MORE THAN 4 YEARS AGO.? MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT THE HIGHER RESOLUTION THE SPEAKER THE SMALLER THE SWEET SPOT IN SPITE OF BETTER SOUND EVERYWHERE. ENJOY.
Max (12/09/09): Model 1b with stands, What is the correct bolt to connect the speaker to the stands.....??? Recently moved & can't find the hardware. Thank you,
Answer: HELLO MAX, 1/4" 20 THREADS PER INCH BY 1 INCH LONG.
John (5/09/11): Regarding bi-wiring, your manuals greatly emphasize the benefits of it.? I am rather committed to Transparent cables, however, and their information advises against it-- "Because of the way the Transparent network operates, we do not recommend using 2 pair of Transparent speaker cables from a single amplifier to hook up to a speaker with biwire terminations." They also say that a single cable with jumpers of a higher grade will be better than that same amount of money spent on a lower grade bi-wire cable.? Thus, I am using single cabling to my 2CE Sigs with jumpers.? Am I really missing out on much more sound quality?? Should I ignore their comments and invest a whole lot more in a true bi-cable?
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? YOU HAVE FOLLOWED THE COMPANY LINE COMPLETELY SO THE ONLY EXPERIMENT LEFT TO DO WOULD BE TO BORROW A? AUDIOQUEST BI-WIRE OF THE SAME COST.? COMPARE THEM AND KEEP THE SETUP THAT SOUNDS BEST.? BE SURE TO KEEP AN OPEN MIND.
Carl (6/08/08): Please describe the primary differences between a "2CE SIG" and "2CE SIG II". Thanks,
Answer: HELLO CARL,? THIS QUESTION HAS BEEN ANSWERED SEVERAL TIMES IN THE F.A.Q.'S ABOVE.? YOU CAN PERUSE THEM IN LESS TIME THAN I CAN TYPE (ONE FINGER) A NEW ANSWER.? USE YOUR PAGE SEARCH IN YOUR BROWSER.
Fernando (12/09/09): I have a pair of VSM-1's as my surround left and right with an older 2W sub for full range (with the proper X2 crossover, of course). I would like to add a second pair of VSM-1's for surround back. Can I also connect pair to the same 2W, with adding the proper X2? This seems wrong to me because each of the left and right 2W inputs will have 2 speakers attached, essentially shorting the positive terminal of the surr-left to the surr-back-left positive amp terminal, as well as positive surr-right and positive surr-back-right terminal, etc. Is the only way to add bass to the back surrounds to have another 2W (or 2Wq)? Is there an easy way to "sum-up" the bass of all the surround speakers and send it to one 2W (or 2Wq)?
Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, YOU WOULD NEED ANOTHER 2W AS THE 2W AND 2WQ ARE NOT COMPATIBLE.
Tim (5/14/11): Hello Richard, I own a pair of the 2CE. Is it possible to have any of the drivers replaced with the original? I ask this because you are currently using different tweeter/midrange drivers for the 2CE signature II. I know it might be easier to just buy a new pair of Sig II , but i prefer the sound of the 2CE.
Answer: HELLO TIM,? IF YOU PREFER THE SOUND OF THE 2CE I WOULD STAY WITH THEM.? THE MAJOR DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THEM IS THE NEW DRIVERS.? THEY ARE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION AND TEND TO REVEAL DEFICITS IN THE REST OF THE SYSTEM.
Ivan (6/10/08): I own 2Ce Sign and 2W for 9 years already and currently use required Mundorf capacitor integrated in my interconnect. I should say that i like the sound of your speakers. Recently i have ordered Quatros and M5-HP (hope they arrive till the end of summer to Moscow , Russia ). Question: is M5 more than a very high quality capacitor? Should i stick to using M5 (my amp's input impendence is 32kOhm (at 80Hz and, i believe, same at 100Hz). As alternative i was thinking to implant matching capacitor inside power amp (right after input connector). This will eliminate 2 additional RCA connections and i can match 100Hz very accurately. What is your opinion? With thanks to your work and knowledge,
Answer: HELLO IVAN,? THE M5-HP IS MORE TRANSPARENT THAN ANY HIGH QUALITY CAPACITOR WOULD BE.
Alan (12/10/09): Can you please tell me the exact dimensions of the Vandersteen 2ci speaker stands? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO ALAN, THAT GOES BACK BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER AND THEY WERE SOURCED FROM A VENDOR NO LONGER IN BUSINESS. WE DO NOT HAVE A SAMPLE NOR DO WE HAVE DRAWINGS. THE MOST CRITICAL WAS THE HEIGHT WHICH WAS SIX INCHES.
Steve (5/17/11): I just purchased a pair of 3A signatures and a 2wq sub.? I have a Counterpoint SA 20 that was upgraded by Michael Elliott.? He says the input impedance is 499K.? I have set the wx-2 to both 200 and 100 and don't notice any real difference.? What x-2 crossover would you recommend.
Answer: HELLO STEVE,? 200K WOULD BE YOUR ONLY OPTION WITHOUT DAMAGE TO THE SUBS AMPLIFIER.
Henry (6/12/08): One of my 2CE Signatures and associated amp will be 28 feet from its preamp while the other channel will be 13 feet distant. Would you recommend that, like speaker cables, the interconnects should be of the same length ,i.e.. 28 feet? I will be using a low capacitance well shielded cable. Thanks very much,
Answer: HELLO HENRY,? I HAVE NOT TRIED USING DIFFERENT LENGTH INTERCONNECTS BUT TO BE SAFE I WOULD KEEP THEM THE SAME.
Kevan (12/19/09): How much would it cost to have Composite Ebony on a 1C?
Answer: HELLO KEVAN,? AS YOU KNOW I DO THIS AT HOME SO I DON'T HAVE THAT INFO HERE.? CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER OR CALL THE OFFICE 559-582-0324
Jack (5/17/11): I am auditioning a used pair of Vandersteen's this weekend.? I am traveling a good distance to audition.? I would like to know the model number and year built if I could, they are consecutive serial #'s.? 63836C & 63837C.? Thank you,?
Answer: HELLO JACK,? THEY ARE 2C SPEAKERS BECAUSE OF THE C AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER.? THEY WILL BE ABOUT 25 TO 30 YEARS OLD
John (4/19/07):? I am the satisfied owner of a pair of Model Fives. Currently my preamp, amp, and high-pass filter modules utilize balanced interconnects. If either the amp or preamp were replaced with a single-ended design, is there any way to "fake out" the filter modules using an RCA-to-XLR adapter, or would it be necessary to replace the balanced filter modules with single-ended ones? Thanks for your help, Richard, and thanks for helping thousands of people to enjoy their music more fully.
Answer: HELLO JOHN, THE ADAPTERS WILL NOT WORK, YOU WOULD NEED A M5-HP (PRODUCT # FOR THE SINGLE ENDED MODEL).
Mike (6/17/08): Richard, I had a pair of 2c's 14 years ago but had to sell them needed the room for the kid. Now that she is old enough and we've moved a few things around I picked up a pair of the 1's. I was wondering if you knew the approximate age and model # form the serial #. They are 42676, 42677. On some recordings they seems to be a bit hollow in the midrange, on others the just sing. I'm running them with kimber 4tc and a Yamaha rxv2600. I'm thinking of putting in a switch box or using the tape outs to another preamp/amp (sound valves vtp101, B&K st140). Would that help? thanks again.
Answer: HELLO MIKE,? YOUR SPEAKERS ARE 1B'S ABOUT 12 YEARS OLD.? I HAVE NO WAY OF KNOWING BUT WHEN SOME RECORDING ARE HOLLOW AND SOME ARE SINGING IT USUALLY IS AN INDICATION OF RECORDING QUALITY.? I HAVE NO IDEA HOW A DIFFERENT AMP WOULD SOUND BECAUSE I AM UNFAMILIAR WITH EITHER AMP.
Dan (12/20/09): Hi Richard, I actually spoke with you a number of years ago. (Can't recall why I was calling at the time...) Anyway, I have been a loyal customer of yours for quite some time. I have a pair of 2Ce's, a VCC-1 center and a 2wQ sub. Question I have is it doesn't seem like I get full bass out of my sub. I have it direct connected to the post of my Rotel amp. Is there a better way to connect or do I have it connected improperly? Appreciate any input.
Answer: HELLO DAN,? YOU CAN DOWNLOAD THE 2WQ MANUAL FROM THIS SITE.? IF YOU HAVE YOUR WOOFER HOOKED UP ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS, IT IS CORRECT.
Joao (5/18/11): I have a pair of speakers Vandersteen which have a plate at the back, where is written "MODEL 3" and have a signature of Richard Vandersteen. Is it the model 3, or the 3A signature?
Answer: HELLO JOAO,? THEY WOULD BE 3A SIGNATURES IF THERE IS AN 'A' AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER.
Chuck (4/22/07):? I am looking at buying an older pair of 3A's #8428 AND 8429. Can you tell me about how old they are? I have also been reading your FAQ's as well as a variety of reviews on the Vandersteen line of speakers and am also considering the new 2CE SIG II's, the final price probably being very close. I would like to ask. in "YOUR OPINION". you being the one to know....which may sound better overall? ....the newest 2 or the old 3A considering all the upgrades? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO CHUCK, I CAN ONLY GUESS AT HOW OLD, I WOULD SAY 10 YEARS. THE 2CE SIG II WOULD BE A SUPERIOR SPEAKER EXCEPT YOU COULD UPGRADE THE 3A'S TO 3A SIGS. THE 3A SIG IS A HIGHER PERFORMANCE SPEAKER THAN THE 2CE SIG II.
Leon (6/17/08): Hello Richard, do you modify the X-2B filters to a different value? I have a 100K and need it adjusted to a 50K because I purchased a different power amplifier. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO LEON,? THE X-2B FILTERS CAN NOT BE MODIFIED FOR A REASONABLE PRICE.? YOU WOULD NEED TO ORDER A NEW X-2B FROM YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.? YOUR OLD X-2B CAN BE SOLD ON THE WEB TO HELP DEFRAY THE COST OF THE NEW VALUE.
Allen (12/20/09): I own a pair and had an issue when the right speaker's crossover got fried. I think everything else is OK. It does not appear to be an amp problem. I guess it just failed after time. How much would a replacement crossover cost. The serial number of the right speaker is 41123ci. I assume I can replace this myself. Please advise! Thanks,
Answer: HELLO ALLEN,? THERE ARE NO REPLACEMENT X-OVERS AVAILABLE ON A SPEAKER THAT OLD.? IF YOU WANT THE X-OVER REPAIRED YOU MUST SEND THE ENTIRE SPEAKER IN SO WE CAN PUT IT INTO THE CHAMBER A MEASURE WHAT PARTS NEED TO BE REPLACED.? WE CAN NOT SERVICE X-OVERS WITHOUT THE STRUCTURE AND DRIVERS.
Phil (5/31/11): I ordered your 2CE Signature II speakers. These speakers are replacing the 1Cs that I have owned for many years. I will use the 2 CEs with an Audiolab Integrated Amp (8000A) that I purchased about 15 years ago. It?s a nice amp with tone controls, which I very much like. I have Nordost Super Flatline MK II speaker wires (non bi-wiring). I am planning on getting another set of the same wires so that I can bi-wire the 2 CEs. There?s so much information on the internet about bi-wiring. One website said if the speaker crossover has been deliberately designed to sound better when bi- or tri-wired, then it quite possibly will. The question I have is: is your speaker crossover deliberately designed to sound better with bi-wiring?
Answer: Hello Phil, Yes
Kevin (4/23/07):? I have a question about your factory upgrade program. Since you don't change your model numbers quarterly like other audio companies, would there be a difference between let's say for example a 2Wq made five years ago versus one made today? If there is, would it be worth it to upgrade those differences since this model is upgradeable? Or are upgrades only offered when there is significant improvement? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO KEVIN, ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS WOULD HAVE CHANGES OVER 5 YEARS TIME THAT DO NOT WARRANT A MODEL CHANGE. THERE ARE NO INTERMEDIATE UPGRADES AS THEY WOULD COST ABOUT WHAT A FULL UPGRADE COSTS AND WOULD NOT BE WORTH THE MONEY. AS I HAVE SAID BEFORE WHEN BUYING USED MAKE SURE YOU AUDITION THE PRODUCTS BEFORE BUYING, IF YOU LIKE IT GIVE THE MAN THE MONEY AND LOAD THEM UP IN YOUR CAR AND TAKE THEM HOME. NO SHIPPING PROBLEMS AND IF THEY ARE NOT THE LATEST IT DOES NOT MATER, BECAUSE YOU LIKED WHAT YOU HEARD.
Rob (6/20/08): HELLO ROB,? INSTALL THE ADJUSTABLE WX-2 AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE MANUAL UNDER SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION.? IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A COPY OF THE MANUAL THE 2WQ MANUAL CAN BE DOWN LOADED FROM THIS SITE, MOST OF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE RELEVANT TO THE 2W.
Answer: I just purchased a very nice 2w that came with a 50K x-2, but I believe I need a 22K (Adcom GFA 555) Where can I purchase-- what are my options? What happens to the sound if I use this one? Thanks.
David (12/20/09): 'I don't think these are in the FAQs...apologies if I missed it. (1) I have Vandersteen Model 2 speakers. ?I had a carpeted living room, so I bought the heavy stands with spikes. ?But we're putting in a hardwood floor, into which I presumably don't want to put spikes. ?Can I set the speakers down on the wood directly, or can I remove the spikes from the stands? (2) Can you replace the cloth cover for these older speakers, and if so, what would it cost? ?(I still have the original boxes.) ?Kittens, you see...the speakers sound great, but look a little ratty. ?Or, if this is a DIY task, do you sell the cloth? Thanks,
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? I DO THIS AT HOME AND DO NOT HAVE THE PRICES.? CALL CUSTOMER SERVICE 559-582-0324 THEY CAN ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS.? SPIKE SHOES
Jeffrey (6/05/11): I have a system with bi wired 10 year old 2c's and a separate older subwoofer for each side running off Audible Illusions preamp and Quicksilver V-4 mono block amps.? Sounds real great. Here's my question: I have a preamp and amp (Parasound zpre amp and amp) powering Paradign wall mounted speakers for my plasma TV.? I do not run them at the same time.? CAN I USE THE SUBWOOFER OUTS FROM THE PARASOUND AMP INTO THE SPARE UNUSED SIDE (L OR R) OF INPUTS ON THE BACK OF THE VANDERSTEEN SUBWOOFERS TO USE THEM SUBWOOFERS IN THE PARASOUND SYSTEM WHEN I AM NOT USING MY MAIN SYSTEM?? If so, what is the best way to connect the subwoofers to the Parasound system preamp outs while leaving them also connected to the Audible Illusions in my main system and what type wires and connectors?? Should this cause a ground lop hum? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JEFFREY,? NO THAT WOULD NOT WORK.? THIS IS COMPLEX SO IF YOU HAVE MORE QUESTION ON HOW TO MAKE IT WORK CALL ME, 559-582-0324 PRESS 3

Mark (2/03/13): Hi Richard, Just out of interest, what would you say are the top 5 records you have heard in regards to sound quality?

Answer: HELLO MARK, THERE ARE SO MANY BUT HERE ARE A FEW THAT ARE GOOD NOT NECESSARILY TOP: DAVE BRUBECK (TAKE FIVE), DIANA KRALL (LIVE IN PARIS), STEVIE RAY VAUGHN (TIN PAN ALLEY), BLUE NOTE(LEE MORGAN), MARK KNOPFLER (SHANGRI-LA) AND AARON NEVILLE (WARM YOUR HEART) ETC.

Peter (4/23/07):? Hi Richard. Thank you for this very informative Q&A forum. Can you please tell me if the VSM-1 with white end cap and, I understand, white metal grill compromises sound quality compared to the black version with cloth surround? Is the white version paint able to match decor and if so what are the best specs for painting so as not to affect sound quality? Regards,
Answer: HELLO PETER, THERE IS A SLIGHT SONIC COMPROMISE WITH THE METAL GRILLE. THE VSM-1 IN WHITE COME WITH INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO PAINT THEM. MOST PEOPLE THINK THE SLIGHT SONIC DEGRADATION IS WORTH THE ABILITY TO MATCH THEM TO THE WALL COLOR. IF YOU PROVIDE A PINT OF SPRAY ABLE PAINT AT THE TIME OF ORDER WE WILL PAINT THEM FOR YOU.
Jeff (6/23/08): I have the 2ce's and love the sound with an NAD integrated amp. Recently I have received Fisher 400 tube receiver (25-28 pc). Is it ok to run the Vandys with this receiver? thanks,
Answer: HELLO JEFF,? IT WOULD BE OK AT VERY LOW LISTENING LEVELS IN A SMALL ROOM.? 25-28 WATTS IS BELOW THE RECOMMENDED POWER FOR THIS SPEAKER.
John (12/21/09): Hello Folks. ?I have a pair of Model 3A speakers. which I love! ?I purchased them in 2006. ?Would these be the 3A Signature, or just 3A? ?I've noticed you offer an upgrade, but perhaps I already own the 3A Signature version? ?Thanks.
Answer: HELLO JOHN,? THE 3A SIGNATURES HAVE MY SIGNATURE ON THE BACK PLATE.? IF THEY HAVE THE DECAL THEY ARE SIGNATURES.
Larry (6/06/11): I am looking to purchase either the 3A Signature or the Quatro for my 10 x 14.5 music studio.? I have had some 2C's in the studio for the last 15 years or so. The room is heavily treated with traps and the like.? I make and master music in the room.? The preamp is a Manley mixer and the amps are two Channel Island class D mono amps about 100w solid state each. Please advise on best speaker for this room and purposes.? Would either work fine? The 2C has been fine. Many thanks for your replies.?
Answer: HELLO LARRY,? I HAVE NOT HEARD THE AMPLIFIERS YOU OWN.? I WOULD TAKE THEM TO THE DEALER AND ASK THEM TO HOOK THEM UP FOR YOU AND THEN YOU WILL KNOW.
87 Year Old (4/24/07):? I'm the 87 year old who has been happy over 20 years) with your 2C speakers. Your suggestion to GO FORTH AND LISTEN to your 2CE's at a dealer, was a great idea....but living on Vancouver Island makes it very difficult to find a dealer................so have taken the bull by the horns and have purchased the 2CE, sight unseen, and listened unheard..... The speakers should arrive next week, and I think some preparatory work is needed. The speakers are about 25feet from my electronics no choice here), and on advise have been using #10 gauge copper wire, thus am using #10 gauge banana plugs on my 2c. So my question is: can I still use the same gauge wire and the same banana plugs. and if not, what must I do, to really enjoy my VANDERSTEEN 2CE,the ball, as they say is in your court, Mr. Vandersteen, or can I call you Richard?
Answer: HELLO 87 YEAR OLD, YOU CAN USE YOUR SAME SPEAKER WIRES HOWEVER THE BANANA'S NEED TO BE EXCHANGED FOR SPADES. THE SPADES SHOULD BE FOR A #10 SCREW AND IN YOUR CASE FOR #10 WIRE (MAX WIDTH 7/16").
Ed (6/25/08):? Hello Richard. What might be some of your favorite amplifiers to pair up with the 1C speakers. I listen to mostly Jazz and female vocals but love solid bass too. Thanks for your time.
Answer: HELLO ED,? I SUGGEST YOU ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AS THEY LISTEN TO DIFFERENT AMPLIFIERS ALL THE TIME.? IT HAS BEEN A LONG TIME SINCE I HAVE EVALUATED MODERATE PRICED AMPLIFIERS.?? BRING SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC WITH YOU AND SEE WHAT YOUR OPINION IS (THE MOST IMPORTANT).
Adrian? (12/23/09): Well Richard my Wood Quatro are now 2 years old and sounding better than ever.? I recently sold my expensive CD player, as I have never heard a CD player under $20,000 (way over my budget) that satisfied me and moved into Computer Audio via playback of WAV files of 44 KHz through 192 KHz.? I can honestly say that it has dramatically improved my entire music collection.? The high resolution audio data disk from Reference recording sound amazing (WHAT AN AMAZING SOUNDSTAGE).? My system now includes a Sonore Computer, Weiss Minerva D/A into an Ayre Pre Amp and Amp.? My question is the following, would you recommend upgrading my Amp to something like the Aesthetix Atlas since they incorporate a built-in high-pass crossover in the amp therefor eliminating the high-pass filter exterior box?
Answer: HELLO ADRIAN,? THE MODEL 5 HIGH-PASS STILL HAS AN AUDIBLE ADVANTAGE BECAUSE THE INTERNAL CAPACITORS HAVE A BATTERY BIAS 24 HOURS A DAY, 365 DAYS A YEAR.? THIS MORE THAN COMPENSATES FOR THE EXTRA SHORT WIRE AND EXTRA CONNECTOR.? SOUNDS TO ME LIKE YOU NEED TO LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM ALONE OR MAYBE ADD A RECORD PLAYER.
Richard (6/06/11): ?I am looking to purchase your Quatro speakers. I am considering running them with a Musical Fidelity 35Watt Class A amp, in conjunction with a DAC unit.. ?1. Is the amp a good match in your opinion and 2. how do the cards for the bass work in this situation as they are meant to be installed between the Pre and Power amp as recommended in your manual.
Answer: HELLO RICHARD,? I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THIS UNIT.? THE HIGH-PASS WOULD HAVE TO BE PLACED BETWEEN THE PRE AMP SECTION AND THE POWER AMP SECTION SOME HOW.? THESE ARE VERY IMPORTANT QUESTIONS FOR YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.? YOU SHOULD BRING YOUR OWNERS MANUAL FOR THE ELECTRONICS SHOULD THEY NOT BE FAMILIAR WITH THEM.
Anthony (4/30/07): Not a technical question, just curious. What's in your main listening setup Mr. Vandersteen?
Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, 5A'S IN EBONY, 4 2WQ'S, 2 VSM-1 SIGS,VCC-5 AND 2 V2W'S.
Rob (6/26/08): Three questions please, Richard:(1) any future plans to upgrade the VLR-1, (2)any future plans to produce a smaller sized subwoofer, (3)with the VLR-1 speakers, would the VCC-1 or 2 work better, perhaps it doesn't make any difference with the room size: 14 x 25 x 8. The speakers must be placed inside a wood cabinet console. Size is consideration. Thanks,
Answer: HELLO DAVE,? NO PLANS TO UPGRADE THE VLR-1 EXCEPT FOR COSMETICS AT A HIGHER COST.? IN MY OPINION A SMALLER SUB-WOOFER IS TOO HIGH IN DISTORTION TO BE CALLED HIGH-END.? I WOULD USE THE VCC-2 BECAUSE A HOME THEATERS QUALITY IS DEFINED BY THE CENTER CHANNEL AND THE SUB-WOOFER.? THIS IS WHY I THINK IT IS WISE TO SPEND A LITTLE MORE MONEY ON THE TWO.
David (12/29/09): Hi Richard, I have 3A Sigs + two 2WQ subs.I want a new amp to replace my Rotel RB-1080 (200WPC) I am considering buying an Odyssey Stratos, possibly the Mono-blocks, with the extra caps & parts upgrade (Their best) - One of your dealers told me that I should forget the Odysseys and go find a used ARC D200 - or an ARC 100.2 (I do own a wonderful ARC SP16 preamp, so I DO like/respect Audio Research's quality/reputation) - that either of those amps would "make the Odyssey sound like garbage with the #A Sigs" ?- he was not going to SELL me anything, just giving his advice. ?HE said something I did not understand about some sort of mismatch (impedance?) with the Vandy 3A Sigs and the Odyssey amps??? I know you are not in a position to recommend specific amps, but can you please guide me about things I need to be cognizant of when picking amps - especially mismatch issues? It is my understanding that using the two 2WQs takes a BIG 'load' off the amp in it's job of driving the 3A Sigs, and the Odysseys seem like a good choice to me for the money. ?The Stratos MBs should be significantly better than the Khartagos that got a rave from TAS recently. Thanks (as always) for you help.
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? I DON'T KNOW ABOUT IMPEDANCE MISMATCH AS I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE ODYSSEY AMPLIFIERS.? I DO KNOW THAT BUYING A AMPLIFIER WITHOUT AUDITIONING THE THING MAKES FOR LESS THAN COULD HAVE BEEN.? RAVE REVIEWS COME AND GO BUT WHAT MATTERS IS HOW THEY WORK IN YOUR ROOM WITH YOUR SYSTEM ACCORDING TO YOUR TASTE.
Rose & Harry (6/10/11): I have model 2ci serial#s 34066 and 34067. Going great for over 20 years. I purchased them in the gray cover and are showing a little age. I would like to change the cloth to black myself. Do you sell a kit with instructions? Thanks for a great product.
Answer: HELLO ROSE AND HARRY,? WE DO NOT HAVE A KIT BUT YOU CAN ORDER GRILLES FROM YOUR DEALER OR SEND THEM FOR RE GRILLE TO US.? WE WILL BE CLOSED FOR VACATION JUNE 11 THROUGH THE 18TH.
Will (4/30/07): Hello Richard, I have brought this question up to you on the phone, but thought the FAQ could benefit from it being addressed. Amplifiers are all different, and the truth is in the listening, but with that said, shouldn't OTL amplifiers offer a clearer sonic picture with a stable impedance, well designed speaker such as the 5A? Do you have any comments on OTL amplifers from your own experimentation?
Answer: HELLO WILL, IT IS TRUE. IF THERE EVER WAS A SPEAKER DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH OTL AMPLIFIERS, THE 5, 5A AND QUATRO ARE IT. THIS WAS PLANED FROM THE VERY BEGINNING ONLY TO DISCOVER THAT ALL AMPLIFIERS SOUND BETTER INTO A REASONABLY FLAT IMPEDANCE WHEN HIGH PASSED. I HAVE HEARD THEM SOUND INCREDIBLY GOOD WITH SEVERAL DIFFERENT ONES. AS USUAL DO THE AUDITION AND FIND THE ONE YOU LIKE.
Bill (6/30/08): Richard. I auditioned the Quattro wood a few days ago and was impressed. The dealer was running one with a grill and the other without, would that make a difference in the sound?
Answer: HELLO BILL,? IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT ALL VANDERSTEEN'S BE USED WITH THEIR GRILLES.? THE MODEL 5A AND QUATRO ESPECIALLY HAVE THE ANTI-DIFFRACTION SCULPTING AS PART OF THE GRILLE STRUCTURE.? THIS WOULD CAUSE A VERY ERRATIC FREQUENCY RESPONSE ESPECIALLY WITH ONE ON AND THE OTHER OFF.? I WOULD GO BACK FOR ANOTHER DEMO WITH BOTH ON AND YOU WILL BE DOUBLE IMPRESSED.
Brian (12/29/09): Looking for advice on getting lower bass extension from my 2CE's. ?They are being powered by an old NYAL Moscode 600 amp and I have them pretty much against the back wall. ?I haven't adjusted the bass knob on the back of the speakers yet. ?They are still set to flat. ?Is a sub the only way to get good bass extension?
Answer: HELLO BRIAN,? HAVING THE SPEAKERS NEAR THE BACK WALL MAY NOT BE WHERE YOUR ROOM SUPPORTS BASE BEST.? I WOULD EXPERIMENT WITH DIFFERENT ROOM POSITIONS ACCORDING TO THE OWNER MANUAL.? THERE IS NO ADJUSTMENT ON THE BACK OF THE SPEAKERS FOR BASS ONLY MID AND TREBLE.? YOU MIGHT WANT TO TRY A DIFFERENT AMPLIFIER JUST TO SEE AS I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE MOSCODE.? SOME SOURCES ARE WEAK IN THE BASS.? IF YOU FIND THAT ALL IS WELL BUT YOUR ROOM JUST DOESN'T SUPPORT BASS A SUB MAY BE THE ONLY ANSWER.? CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER THEY MAY HAVE MORE INFORMATION AS THEY SEE MANY MORE ROOMS THAN I.
Jeffery (6/11/11): I have had a pair of 2Cs for a number of years and have enjoyed them immensely.? I am now looking to build a home theatre; but, the wife insists upon moving the 2Cs out of the room. I am thinking about 4 VSM1 on-walls, the VCC-2 center and the V2W sub. First, would I notice a big difference if I use the VSM Sigs in the front (instead of the VSM1s) in this type of set-up?? My dealer does not have the VSM sigs to audition (just the VSM1s).? Second, because of my room, I have to position the back VSM1s (the surrounds) almost ceiling height and am concerned how that will sound given their height in the room. Is that type of placement acceptable or should I look for some type of in-ceilings for the surrounds? How critical is placement for those back surrounds? Thank you for any insight you can share.
Answer: HELLO JEFFERY,? THE VSM-1 SIG'S WOULD MAKE A NOTICEABLE DIFFERENCE FOR 2 CHANNEL MUSIC BUT NOT A LOT OF DIFFERENCE ON MOVIES.? THE VSM-1 WOULD WORK BETTER THAN A CEILING SPEAKER EVEN IF IT WERE MOUNTED HIGH ON THE WALL.? FOR FURTHER INFO YOU CAN CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 PRESS 3.
Mark (5/01/07):? ?Hello Richard, Nice to see things are going well for you and your marvelous line of loudspeakers! I have a pair of 1Bs which I purchased new in the '80s. They have performed flawlessly until recently. The speakers were recently packed up after being inactive for the last year. I moved the speakers to my new home and set them back up. I now notice the sound is quite distorted especially on vocals. Louder passages do not seem as noticeable. I have eliminated the electronics and interconnects by substitution. Any suggestions will be greatly appreciated.
Answer: HELLO MARK, THEY OBVIOUSLY NEED SERVICE. CHECK IT OUT UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OR CALL 559-582-0324.
Alex (7/01/08): Hi Richard, your wonderful loudspeakers are quite popular between audiophiles here in Russia . I have recently stepped up in buying 3A Signature instead of the 2Ce?s. I spent the whole day reading your FAQ's and guess you are tired of all these same Qs of how and why but?I also have some questions to you about some construction aspects of these two speaker systems, not blaming but curious: 1. You place big enough, 10? active acoustic coupler as low-end, making the speaker nearly four-way which is great but?with such a narrow range of operation: 26 to 35 Hz, 10 Hz-wide(!?), looks like a huge truck carrying a box to a small distance. Why it does not operate, say, 35 ? 100 Hz at least, same way as a small subwoofer? I am sure that people who are buying the 3A?s having well powered amps to support enough current to drive it. 2. You make your speakers, basically, for producing musical sounds not movie blasts, airplane crushing bumps etc?you advise a subwoofer for these sound effects. So, what musical instrument do you expect plays that low (26-35 Hz), tympani and double bass low E string is around 40 Hz and only synth, organ and grand piano very, very, very seldom played bottom keys which are lower, around 30 Hz. In this case, this mighty 10? driver hardly works for music. In your 4 and 5 models you use build-in subs and they have good and deep low-end. Why do not give the 3A?s 10? driver to kick with more wide range of the low frequency? Bi-amping. When it began and you have started warning that you do not recommend the solid state amp vertical bi-amplification with your speakers because ?etc? Does anybody burn his 2?s or 3?s, how many of thousands owners, what were those amps, what are their specs etc??? Or you personally, have had a bad experience with many solid state amps being harmful to the Vandersteen's? That is most important and interesting, where does it come from? I am sure, it behaves different with various amps so it can not be same dangerous for everyone using it. I have a friend who?s having old enough 3A?s bi-amped with his giant 5-channel home theatre Rotel amp for a few years without any harm to their tweeters/mids with a very nice sound and imaging. I do the same - bi-amplifying my 3A Sigs with the two NAD C272. One more useful consideration about bi-amping. Having two stereo solid state power 50-70W/ch amps to bi-amp the 3A?s, which is not enough (according to your recommended amplification of 100 to 200W per channel) if using them in vertical bi-amp configuration, result in 100-140W per speaker! Connecting left channel 50-70W to the tweeter/mid section together with right channel 50-70W connecting to the woofer section in sum give 100-140W per speaker. And finally Q about subs. You insist that three small 8? drivers are faster and deliver more reveal and tighter bass than bigger ones. Same as three cellos deeper and more revealing than one double bass, they sound different. Three small dogs never bite as a BIG one. Anyway thank you for all you are doing for music lovers.
Answer: HELLO ALEX,? I WILL TRY TO ANSWER ALL THESE QUESTIONS AS BEST I CAN.? THE BASS ALIGNMENT WE USE ON THE 2CE SIG II AND 3ASIG IS VERY UNORTHODOX AND IT IS THE WAY IT IS BECAUSE THAT IS HOW IT MUST BE TO WORK.? TO CHANGE THE RANGE OF OPERATION WOULD RESULT IN UN FLAT FREQUENCY RESPONSE.? THE RECOMMENDATION FOR SUBS IS FOR LOWER DISTORTION OR HOME THEATER USE, IT IS NOT MANDATORY.? IT IS NOT UNCOMMON FOR TWEETERS TO FAIL WHEN BI-AMPING WITH SOME AMPLIFIERS BUT CAN TAKE SOME TIME.? I WILL SAY ONE MORE TIME THAT YOU WILL GET MUCH BETTER SOUND WITH A PAIR OF MONO BLOCKS WITH SHORT WIRE THAN BI-AMPING.? TAKE THE MONEY SAVED ON SHORT VS LONG QUALITY SPEAKER WIRE THE COST OF TWO QUALITY STEREO AMPLIFIERS AND INVEST IT IN A PAIR OF HIGHER PERFORMANCE MONO AMPLIFIERS THE SOUND WILL BE BETTER I ASSURE YOU.? WHEN BI-AMPING WITH A 70 WATT STEREO AMPLIFIER YOU ONLY HAVE 70 WATTS AVAILABLE TO EACH DRIVER NOT 140.? ON SUB-WOOFERS IT IS A MATTER OF MOVING AIR.? MOVING THE SAME AMOUNT OF AIR WITH BETTER CONTROL WILL ALWAYS BE MORE ACCURATE.? SOME PEOPLE CONFUSE THE OVERHANG AND LACK OF CONTROL OF A LARGE DRIVER IN A PORTED ENCLOSURE AS MORE, IT IS ONLY A BOOMY EXAGGERATION OF THE PROGRAM MATERIAL.? IF THAT IS WHAT ONE LIKES FINE BUT IT IS NOT MORE ACCURATE AND BETTER ACCOMPLISHED WITH A ACCURATE SEALED WOOFER AND BASS BOOST BECAUSE WHEN YOU GET TIRED OF IT, ALL YOU HAVE TO DO IT TURN IT OFF, NOT BUY A NEW WOOFER.
Arjun? (1/01/10): I own Merlin? TSM Speakers and a Leben CS600 Int amp and want to use a Sub for a better Bass response and am interested in the 2Wq as a sub. The Leben does not have a pre out but does have a Pre in which bypasses the pre-amp section and keeps only the Volume control in the path. It also has a Tape out/in option. Is it possible to use a 2Wq in this configuration ? BTW I am based in India.
Answer: HELLO ARJUN,? FIND A GOOD TECHNICIAN AND TELL HIM YOU NEED YOUR INTEGRATED HIGH-PASSED AT 80HZ.? THIS IS VERY EASY FOR ANY TECH TO DO BUT A VERY HIGH QUALITY FILM CAPACITOR MUST BE USED.? YOU WILL ENJOY HAVING A HIGH-PASS BECAUSE IT REMOVES THE LOW BASS FROM THE AMPLIFIER AND THE WOOFER IN YOUR SPEAKER.? THIS WILL LOWER IM DISTORTION DRAMATICALLY AND INCREASE DYNAMIC RANGE.
Charles (6/11/11): running 2wq's with dual, bi-amped, Pass x150's.? The balanced input impedance of the x150's is 22k ohms.? I also use a balanced passive Placette preamplifier and everything has worked fine in this configuration for some time now.? I'm considering replacing the passive Placette pre with a Balanced Audio Technology VK-3ix tube preamp with output impedance of 1000 ohms.? According to Victor Khomenko at BAT, as long as the input impedance that the preamp is presented on the woofer crossover is 20K ohms or greater everything should be fine.? Do you see any problem with this?? To me, if the passive Placette works fine now , I wouldn't suspect any problems with the active tube preamp (even with its highest output impedance).
Answer: HELLO CHARLES,? ALL THAT TECH STUFF WILL NOT DETERMINE, HOW DOES IT SOUND?? I WOULD LASH IT ALL UP AND GIVE IT A GOOD LISTEN AS I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE GEAR YOU ARE ASKING ABOUT.
James (5/01/07):? I have a pair of 5's and the grille cloth is getting a tad natty. The frames are just fine. Is there a place to access an equivalent material and if not, is there a material type from a sonic standpoint that should be sought? Or, does it make a lot of difference? Thanks
Answer: HELLO JAMES, THE MODEL 5/5A SPEAKER ARE OPTIMIZED WITH THE GRILLE ON SO THE TYPE OF FABRIC IS VERY IMPORTANT. BECAUSE OF THE DIFFRACTION EXPOSED ON THE TOP OF THE SUBWOOFER ENCLOSURE THE GRILLE MUST BE USED FOR BEST SOUND. CALL THE FACTORY ON THE COST FOR RE-GRILLE. BE SURE TO PACK THE FRAME VERY WELL AS THEY ARE CUSTOM FIT PER SPEAKER. THIS WOULD BE A GOOD TIME TO CHANGE COLOR IF YOU WANT.
No Name (7/02/08): ?I may have a unique scenario for you. I am using a pair of 3A's in my main listening room, but also have multiple rooms wired up via Niles audio control. My question is: how can I integrate a Vandersteen subwoofer in my main room without using the crossover, which would cut the bass in the other rooms?
Answer: HELLO,? YOU WONT BE ABLE TO DO THAT WITHOUT DISCONNECTING THE SUB AND REMOVING THE CROSSOVER.? IF YOUR OTHER SPEAKERS ARE SMALL OR IN-WALLS WITH LIMITED BASS YOU WON'T NOTICE THE FACT THAT THE BASS BELOW 60HZ IS MISSING.? IN FACT YOU COULD NOTICE AN IMPROVEMENT BECAUSE YOU ARE REMOVING ENERGY THEY CAN'T REPRODUCE ANYWAY, THIS WOULD REDUCE DISTORTION NOTICEABLY.
Tracy (1/01/10): Hello, I recently bought a V2W and I'm having a hum problem. ?I am using a Denon AVR-688 receiver without a ground connection. ?Is there a way to ground the subwoofer to a receiver without a dedicated connection or should I get a Radio Shack ground loop isolator? ?The hum does stop when the receiver is turned off. ?Thanks,
Answer: HELLO TRACY,? THE GROUND WIRE CAN BE INSTALLED UNDER ANY SCREW ON THE CASE OF THE RECEIVER.
George (6/12/11): I have a pair of 2Ci's (inherited from brother who was original owner) and would like to discuss an recommended service and possible upgrade to Signature level.? What is involved and what is your pricing?? How are my speakers different from the 2, the 2Ce and the 2Ce Signatures?? Thank you.
Answer: HELLO GEORGE,? THERE ARE NO UPDATES AVAILABLE FOR ANY MODEL 2 SPEAKER.?? 2Ci SPEAKERS ARE ABOUT 25 YEARS OLD.? YOU CAN PERUSE THESE FAQ FOR THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE DIFFERENT MODELS.
Walt (5/04/07):? Just bought a pair of 2CEs and love them, but the seller (going through divorce) had lost the bolts for the Sound Anchor stands. Are the specs on the bolts such that I can get them at a local hardware store? Or, do I need to order them from Vandersteen or Sound Anchor? Hex head is what I seem to remember from my 2CI days, but what thread and length?
Answer: HELLO WALT, 1.5" LONG 1/4 20 HEX HEAD, YOU WILL NEED 4.
Dimitri (7/03/08): I own a set of model 3 speakers. I bought them 15 years ago and for a short period of time I used a Yamaha M-80 amp. with a Soundcraftsman pro-control 3 preamp. I was never able to reproduce the sound that made me fall in love with them. For a number of reasons I had to set my audiophile hobby aside for a few years. I kept all my equipment and I am now trying to put together a new system that will let me enjoy the full capabilities of these speakers. I have heard many amp/preamp combinations using various speakers and I have been impressed with Spectral and McIntosh equipment. In my ear the Spectrals sounded superior but the set up I was listening used electrostatic speakers. I would like to ask your advice on what amp/preamp combination would work best with my speakers. Thank you.
Answer: HELLO DIMITRI,? A SPEAKER CAN ONLY REPRODUCE WHAT IT IS GIVEN BY THE CHAIN BEFORE IT.? ALTHOUGH THE EQUIPMENT YOU USED IS NOT THE MOST MUSICAL IT IS THE SOURCE THAT MOSTLY DETERMINES THE OVERALL SOUND QUALITY.? THIS IS WHY THERE IS SUCH A RESURGENCE IN VINYL THESE DAYS (IT SOUND BETTER).? TAKE YOUR TIME AND EVALUATE EVERY SINGLE MOVE YOU MAKE IN YOUR SYSTEM ,SOURCE FIRST, WIRES LAST.? IT IS NOT IMPORTANT THAT YOU HAVE THE BEST OF EVERYTHING, ONLY THAT THEY ARE AVAILABLE LOCALLY SO YOU CAN EVALUATE EACH PIECE IN YOUR SYSTEM ACCORDING TO YOUR TASTE. IF YOU FOLLOW OTHER PEOPLES RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS AND PURCHASE THEM WITHOUT EVALUATING THEM IN YOUR SYSTEM AS A SYSTEM YOU ARE ASSURING YOURSELF OF MEDIOCRE SOUND.
Glen (1/02/10): Hello Richard,? I noticed, in response to a customer from the forum, that the Quatro Wood II version has not been reviewed as of yet.? I'm assuming that the Stereophile review was of the first version of the Woody's.? Is this correct?? Also, if that is the case, would their measurements be different from the ones posted by John Atkinson?? In either case do you supply measurements that are done at your facility to the public? I would love to see them if you do.? I am in the process of talking to my local dealer and trying to decide between the sock version and the Woody's.? He has the Woody's on display, and I just love how they image and appear to be very linear when listening to music.? However, I am trying to be thrifty without compromising, on the other hand I want to buy the best I can aspire to afford. Between my dealer and Richard Hardesty I have a profound respect for the value you instill in each of your products and how they are extremely accurate, especially when compared to other brands that cost much much more.? Thank you for any assistance you can provide.
Answer: HELLO GLEN,? THE STEREOPHILE REVIEW OF THE QUATRO WOOD WAS NOT THE MK II VERSION AND SHOULD MEASURE THE SAME A MICHAEL FREMER REVIEW OF THE FABRIC VERSION.? SPEAKER MEASUREMENTS ARE VERY DEPENDENT ON EXACT TEST CRITERIA.? IT IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT WHERE THE MICROPHONE IS PLACED WHEN MEASURING A TIME AND PHASE ACCURATE DESIGN.? THIS IS WHY IT IS ALSO IMPORTANT THAT THE VERTICAL HEIGHT BE ADJUSTED PROPERLY WHEN INSTALLING ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS.? SET-UP MATTERS.? WE DO NOT PUBLISH CURVES BECAUSE THY ONLY MEAN SOMETHING WHEN THE PARAMETERS ARE THE SAME.? WE WILL BEGIN WITH THE UP COMING MODEL SEVENS AS THEY WILL HAVE A QC CURVE IN THE BOX OF THAT PAIR.? THE QUATRO FABRIC ARE BASED ON THE 3A SIG AND THE WOOD VERSION IS BASED ON THE 5A MID AND TWEETER.
Steve (6/13/11): Is the decision to use one or two 2Wqs dependent on room size, or is it ALWAYS better to use a stereo pair (2) regardless of the space available? My new listening room is very small (11' x 10' with 8' ceilings) and I wonder if using two subwoofers is advisable/beneficial, or if a single 2WQ will suffice in that space. A follow-up question to that, I understand that the main speakers should have "predictable response to 40Hz" to blend with the 2WQ; I will be using a pair of Spica TC-50s, which are flat to about 55Hz and -6dB at 40Hz (in that room). Again, just trying to determine the advisability of this combination. Thanks in advance for your help.
Answer: HELLO STEVE,? IN MY OPINION HAVING STEREO INFORMATION DOWN INTO THE LOW BASE IS POSITIVE NO MATER THE SIZE OF THE ROOM.? IN A SMALL ROOM THIS COULD REQUIRE SMALLER SUBS OR MEDIUM SIZED FULL RANGE SPEAKERS FROM A VISUAL POINT OF VIEW.
Socratis (5/06/07):? Good morning from Athens-Greece . I have a pare of model 1 with serial nr. 40711 & 40710 , and i wish to know if they are B or C . Thanks' in advance & keep producing this perfect "WANDERSOUND" ( the best approach to natural sound ). Have a nice day !
Answer: HELLO SOCRATIS, IF THERE IS A "C" AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER IT IS A 1C. IF THERE IS NO LETTER "C" IT IS A 1B.
Alex (7/06/08): Hello Richard. Thank you for your detailed answer. First of all, I absolutely delighted with the sound of the 3A Sigs and they are getting better and better since their initial burning-in period started. I agree that too much low freqs in many-giant-woofer constructions will spoil the sound with lots of ?boominess?. Having big-woofer speakers before I used to have a big resonance lift-up at 30, 60 and 90 Hz respectively (my listening room is 18.5?x10.5?x8.5?), which, luckily, I do not have now with the 3A Signature, possibly because of that ?deep? at 65 Hz of 84 dB, in the crossing point where 10? meets 8? woofer, which I have spotted on the Frequency Response and Impedance graph from Vandersteen Model 3A company?s leaflet. Anyway, the sound is crystal clean at all frequencies, just what every moderate room owner-audiophile wants. OK, I will bridge my NADs to two mono-blocks, 300W each and will connect my only 4 feet long Nordost Red Dawn bi-wire speaker cables in bi-wire combination. I will report after serious testing with many people to get a more wide opinion about it. At least for statistics. But I definitely know two people here, who used the Vandersteen model 3 in bi-amped connection with some different amplifiers both tube and solid state ones for some years before and the last three years with a home theatre 5-channel Rotel without any harm or any feeling of the sound degradation. They both insist that after a long time test and evaluation listening, bi-amping is better than bi-wiring. This is a real fact opinion. Again about vertical bi-amping ? one stereo amp 70W per channel goes to one speaker with its left channel?s 70W are amplifying tweeter/mid section and its right channel?s another 70W do the same with woofer in sum we have 70+70W=140W per speaker same as two 70W mono blocks connected to one speaker
Answer: HELLO ALEX,? WHEN BI-AMPING YOU ARE BI-WIRING!!!!? MOST AMPLIFIERS RING ABOUT 3 TO 4 CYCLES WHEN DRIVING THE CAPACITIVE LOAD REPRESENTED BY THE UPPER SECTION OF THE 3A SIG.? THIS ADDITIONAL RINGING IS NOT IN THE SOURCE AND CAUSES THE SOUND TO BE A BIT BRIGHTER (OPEN).? IF YOU LIKE IT THAT IS GOOD JUST THOUGHT YOU SHOULD KNOW WHAT IS GOING ON.? WHEN BI-AMP YOU? ONLY HAVE 70 WATTS FOR THE MID RANGE FREQUENCIES, 70 WATTS FOR THE BASS FREQUENCIES, AND 70 WATTS FOR THE TWEETER FREQUENCIES AND 140 WATTS NOWHERE!!!!? IF YOU BRIDGE YOUR AMPLIFIER AND BI-WIRE? YOU WILL HAVE MORE THAN 140 WATTS AVAILABLE AT ALL FREQUENCIES AND NO ARTIFICIAL RINGING.
Daniel? (1/03/10): I own a pair of Vandersteen Model 2 speakers purchased 20 yrs ago. Planning a new home and want to incorporate these speakers into a home theater system. Currently I drive these speakers with McIntosh MX113 preamp and 2100 amp that still work well after 30 yrs of use. I know the preamp will have to be updated. Can I use the speakers as the front set in the new system and will the 2100 amp (105 min watts per channel, 4, 8, 16 ohms) be adequate? ?
Answer: HELLO DANIEL,? YOUR AMP WILL BE FINE.? CHECK OUR WEB SITE AS ALL THE CURRENT PRODUCTS ARE COMPATIBLE FOR HT.
Steve (6/14/11): I have enjoyed my 2C's for many years ant they are at their optimum placement for imaging.? Though the left speaker has been by the fireplace for that time, now I am forced to supplement my heat with a wood stove.? Will I have any issues having my speaker within?4 feet of a wood stove insert in that fireplace (as opposed to a free standing stove)??? Unlike using the fireplace only occasionally the woodstove will be my primary heat and I do live in New England.
Answer: HELLO STEVE,? I HAVE NO IDEA HOW THIS WOULD EFFECT THE SPEAKERS.? IT WOULD DEPEND ON HOW HOT THE SURFACE OF THE SPEAKER ACTUALLY GETS.? I WOULD ASSUME THAT ANY THING UNDER 110 DEGREES F WOULD BE OK.? WE ARE NOT ALLOWED TO BURN FIREPLACES IN CALIFORNIA
Jonathan (5/07/07):?? Richard, Do you think it will sound better if a pair of BAT VK 75-SE tube amps are used as mono-blocks with both outputs connected in each amp to drive one 5A speaker, or, if the left and right channels in each amp are used to drive the treble and bass respectively of each speaker? So in other words, each amp is used in a bi-amp configuration. thanks.
Answer: HELLO JONATHAN, BI WIRE THE AMPS AS MONO BLOCKS FOR BEST SOUND AND BETTER DYNAMICS.
Jeff (7/08/08):? Hi Richard, just wondering if you have made any changes to the 2wq subwoofer in recent years. I am on a budjet and looking at a used 2wq made in 2004. I am assuming I would be getting something very similar to the currently produced version? Do you still make them with captive power cords? Lastly, do I need to contact a dealer to purchase the fixed crossover (would feel a little awkward contacting a dealer when I haven't given them the business for the sub). Thanks so much. I'm a big fan of the company, sold my 2CE sigs and that was my biggest audio mistake to date.
Answer: HELLO JEFF,? THERE HAVE BEEN SOME IMPROVEMENTS IN THE LAST 4 YEARS? AND THEY STILL HAVE CAPTIVE POWER CORDS.? THE X-2 MUST BE ORDERED FROM YOUR DEALER WE DO NOT SELL DIRECT.? NO PROBLEM SELLING THE 2CE SIG AS THE 2CE SIG II IS A LARGE IMPROVEMENT.
David (1/07/10):? I have an amplifier with an input impedance of 47k. ?Do you have crossovers for this impedance to be used with a 2wq subwoofer and how much is a pair of them?
Answer: HELLO DAVID,? ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS YOU ARE TO EXPERIMENT WITH THE ASSESSMENT BOX (WX-2) AND DISCOVER WHICH SETTING SOUNDS BEST.? THEREFORE WE ONLY MANUFACTURE? THE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN THE WX-2.
Mark (6/27/11): 2c's/2ci's in home theatre? I have recently moved into a house with built in entertainment center. Looks like I can move my speakers into the cabinet==barely. If I take out stand. remove the top wood veneer. etc....question is...does it make sense use C's in this type of situation. would what would the sound be? would I need to dampen the vibration in the built in cabinet.? (Is this a reasonable idea or a sonic disaster)?
Answer: HELLO MARK,? I THINK IT WOULD BE A MESS BUT I MUST ADMIT I HAVE NOT TRIED THIS.
Ashok (5/07/07):? Hi Richard, Can the Vandersteen 5A's be driven by the 18 watt Lamm 2.1 triode amps? Thanks.
Answer: HELLO ASHOK, THE AMPLIFIER WILL DRIVE THE SPEAKERS BUT YOU WOULD NEED A DEMO TO SEE IF THEY WILL PLAY THE SPEAKERS LOUD ENOUGH FOR YOUR TASTE.
Tom (7/11/08):? I recently purchased a pair of used 2ce's after using having 1b's in service for many years. I like the speakers, but have a problem that perhaps you can help with. Due to room (and spouse) issues, the speakers are required to be elevated ~ 30" above the floor. Are there any recommendations as far as tilting the speakers forward (as opposed to back as described on the manual), or just do what sounds best? I would appreciate any feedback. Thanks.
Answer: HELLO TOM,? FOR OBVIOUS REASONS I DO NOT HAVE ANY EXPERIENCE USING THE 2CE'S THIS WAY.? THEY WOULD NEED TO BE TILTED SO MUCH THEY WOULD FALL FORWARD. ? A BETTER SOLUTION WOULD BE THE VSM-1 ON WALL AND A SUB.
Robert? (1/07/10):? I have a pair of 2Ce 66387 and -86 I bought new, I have a loose dust cap on one of the woofers, which buzzes at times, this had happened a few years ago as well and was re-glued by the dealer. ?My questions are should it be reglued, would the sound change if the dust cap were removed? Thanks -Rob'
Answer: HELLO ROBERT,? THE CAP MUST BE IN PLACE.
Tim (7/08/11): When is the Treo being released.
Answer: HELLO JIM,? WE HOPE TO HAVE SOME DEMO UNITS OUT IN THE FIELD BY OCTOBER.? EXPECTED PRICE IS $5995 PER PAIR.
James (5/09/07):? I need some advice on which speakers to use in my listening room. Unfortunately, my room is not as large as I would like (8.5' wide X 14' long X 9.5' ceiling). Given the dimensions of my room, would the 1C be a better choice than the 2CEsig? I would like to place the speakers on the 8.5' wide wall.
Answer: HELLO JAMES, YOU HAD BETTER ASK YOUR DEALER ABOUT THIS ONE AS I HAVE NEVER TRIED TO PLACE SPEAKERS IN A ROOM LIKE YOURS. ASK YOUR DEALER BECAUSE THEY DO ROOMS OF ALL SIZES ALL THE TIME.
Robert (7/23/08):? I recently purchased a 2WQ sub to go with my 2Ce Signatures. Easy question: is the sub designed to be plugged in, and so on, all the time, or should I unplug it when not in use? Will it draw power when not in use? Thanks!
Answer: HELLO ROBERT,? IT SHOULD BE PLUGGED IN AT ALL TIMES EXCEPT LIGHTNING STORMS.? AT IDLE THE UNIT DRAWS ABOUT 4 WATTS.
Nathan (1/08/10): 'Dear Mr. Vandersteen, I became interested in Vandersteen Audio after reading the Editor's Choice Awards of TAS (The Absolute Sound) in addition to Stereophile heaping praise of Vandersteen Loudspeakers.? Having never auditioned your products, I was seeking the nearest Vandersteen dealer to judge for myself if the glowing reviews in the Popular Press are accurate about your products. I called customer service @ 559-582-0324 this afternoon and inquired into those dealers located in my area. My question was met with an interesting response as I was informed, "sorry, I don't have a list of dealers, you will have to go to our web-site". It's a shame the customer service/support of Vandersteen Audio pales in comparison to the excellent reviews of its products. Additionally, after consulting your web-site, it's surprising there are no dealers located in North Carolina. Perhaps the local dealers in North Carolina have been given the same subpar level of customer service that I received today and thus they opted to not carry your line of loudspeakers. I am in the market for a two channel loudspeaker system and in light of the fact that Vandersteen ha